PC 2109 
.L6 
1839 
Copy 1 



X 



GUIDE 

TO THE 

FRENCH LANGUAGE; 

ESPECIALLY DEVISED 

FOR PERSONS WHO WISH TO STUDY THE 

ELEMENTS OF THAT LANGUAGE, 

/ BY 

J. J. P. LE BRETHON. 



FIRST AMERICAN 

FROM THE 

SEVENTH LONDON EDITION, 
CORRECTED, ENLARGED, AND IMPROVED; 

By P. BEKEART. 



Adolescsntiam alere jucundum est et laudabile. — Cicero, 



NEW YORK: 
W. E. DEAN, PRINTER & PUBLISHER, 2 ANN STREET, 

COLLINS, KEESE & CO., 254 PEARL ST. 

1839. 



^1 



.Li 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1839, by W. E. 
Dean, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the Southern Dis- 
trict of New York. 



/ 



TO THE 



PRESIDENT, DIRECTORS, AND MEMBERS 

OF THE MERCANTILE LIBRARY ASSOCIATION, NEW YORK. 

I have prepared for the press an edition of Le Brethon's 
" Guide to the French Language," — a work, which, by the 
general consent of those best qualified to judge, stands at the 
head of its class. 

As a slight acknowledgment, gentlemen, of the encourage- 
ment which you have always given to the study of a language 
which has become to the merchant at least, a necessary part 
of education, rather than an accomplishment ; and of the 
generous co-operation and assistance which I have constantly 
received from those members who have been my pupils, it 
affords me sincere pleasure to dedicate this work to your 
noble Institution — an Institution already justly distinguished 
for its wisdom in divising, and for its perseverance in provi- 
ding, the means of moral and intellectual improvement. 

I am, &c, 

P, BEKEART. 



TO THE LEARNER * 



I suppose you to be animated with as great a desire to learn 
the french language as I am to assist you. Before we begin, 
permit me to ask you a single painful question. Do you know 
your own language 1 Do you know the parts of which it is 
composed, nouns, articles, adjectives, pronouns, verbs, 
ad veres, prepositions, conjunctions, &c. 1 Are these 
terms familiar to you 1 If you answer no : then will I say to 
you, learn ihem before we go further, for it is ten to one that 
you and I should not understand each other, or, if we did, it 
would be with a great deal of difficulty. Besides, you may 
be excusedfor notknowinga foreign language ; you can hardly 
be pardoned for being ignorant of your own, especially at a 
time when, so many able persons devote themselves to the 
teaching of it. Nor do you even want the assistance of a 
teacher ; with a moderate share of understanding and a good 
grammar, you may learn as much as is necessary for our pur- 
pose in the course of a fortnight. 

Now 1 suppose that you have these few requisites, and you 
wish to make use of this book. Begin at the page 42 : com- 
pare the French with the English, and endeavour to form some 
idea of the difference between the two languages : Then 
translate into French the English exercises, page 44 and the 
following, the rules correspond with the exercises that you are 
now reading, the figures under the words point out to you the 
rule by which you are to apply. It will be proper during this 
time that you should peruse the verbs, that the variation in their 
tenses and persons may by degrees become familiar to you. 



* The Author is not so vain as to wish to give instructions to teachers, or to per- 
sons accustomed to the study of languages, but to such persons only as are at a loss 
how to begin. 



TO THE LEARNER. 



N. B. Persons making use of this book, who have already 
some general notions of the Trench language, must begin at the 
part called the Syntax, page 167, and write the exercises.* 

But, says an Englishman, how shall I learn the pronunci- 
ation ? Your anxiety is commendable, but it is untimely. You 
do not wish to speak before you know how to arrange the 
words grammatically together. 

The pronunciation of the French language, which to an 
Englishman seems the most difficult part of it, is in fact the 
easiest. I have known many persons who, in seven or eight 
lessons, have acquired as good a pronunciation of that lan- 
guage, as it is possible for a foreigner to acquire, and there are 
perhaps few people who, with a little attention, would not 
learn it in twelve or fifteen lessons. If your mind is ambi- 
tious of surmounting all the difficulties at once,read the chap- 
ter on pronunciation, page 1 and following ; but I should de- 
ceive you, if 1 were to tell you that you would make yourself 
perfect in that part by the single assistance of the rules which 
are contained in it ; all thatl can say is that from the repeated 
experiments which have been made of them they cannot lead 
you to a bad accent. It is even proper that you should cast 
your eyes now and then over those rules ; they will be of great 
service to you, when you think fit to apply to pronunciation, 
whether you have a teacher or not. But let your attention be 
now chiefly bent upon the Syntax ; it is the most difficult part 
of the French language ; and when you have made some pro- 
gress in it, then will be the time for you to apply to the pro- 
nunciation. Knowing the meaning and arrangement of the 
words which you have to pronounce, you will make more 
proficiency in one lesson, than otherwise you would make 
in three. 



* Then you may read either of the following works, which, I think, you will find 
both instructive and entertaining: Ilistoire de Charles XII., roi de Suede, by Vol- 
taire ; Recueil Choisi de Traits Ilistoriques et de Contes Moraux, by Wanostrocht ; 
Tourist's French Companion, by De Souillon ; or any other book you may have a 
mind to read. 



THE ALPHABET. 



The French language is composed of twenty-five letters, 
viz. 



A pronounced ah like 


a 


in axt* 


B 


bay 





6 ay. 


C 


say 


s 


say. 


D 


day 


a 


(Zay. 


E 


ay 


a 


ale. 


F 


f , * 


J 


dea^l 


G 


zhay 






TT 

H 


ash 


n 


asA. 


I 


ee 


i 


fVeld. 


J 


zhee* 


i 




K 


kah 


c 


cart. 


L 


I 


I 


ell 


M 


m 


m 


gem. 


N 


n 


n 


pen. 











old. 


P 


pay 


P 


pay. 


Q 


ku 


2 




R 


ayr 


r 


to err. 


S 


s 


s 


bless. 


T 


tay 


t 


bailor. 


U 


u 


2 




V 


vay 


V 


veil. 


X 


eeks 


X 


six. 


Y 


ee-grayc 




the same sound as i. 


Z 


zeyd 


z 


zed. 



* To give this letter its proper sound, the ft must be pronounced aspirate. 

1 The sound of g and j, in english, is formed of dj ; so general, judge, are pro- 
nounced djeneral, djudge ; leave out the sound of d in french, and you will have the 
proper sound. 

2 There is no word in the enghsh language in which the s*ounds of the french q 
and u are to be found, and no combination of characters can give an idea of the 
pronunciation of these two letters. The person who has them to pronounce, must 
shut his lips quite close, leaving only a small opening in the middle, as if he were 
going to blow a flute. 

1 



2 



PRONUNCIATION 



These are the names by which the letters are called in 
french ; but in that language, as well as in the english, the 
sound of several of them varies according to their position 
with other letters, as will appear by the following observa- 
tions.* 

OF VOWELS. 

The French reckon three sorts of vowels. 
The simple, a, e, i, o, u. 

The compound, ai, ao, au, ea, eai, eau, ei, eu, eo, oe, ou. 
The nasal, am, an, em, en, im, in, aim, ain, ein, om, on y 
urn, un. 

OF SIMPLE VOWELS. 

a, e, i, o, u. 

1. Each of these letters has two sounds common to both 
languages ; 

One short, as English words in which the same sound is found, 

a in paMe, paw, a in pat. 

e bette, marked thus' beet, e bet. 

i fixe, fixed, i fix. 

hotte, dorser, o hot. 

u mur, wall, u see note 2. 

The other long, as 

si in. pate, ~\ paste, & in pall. 

e bete, j beast, e bear. 

1 fit, marked '3 might do, i field. 
6 hole, | landlord, o hope. 

u mur, J ripe, u see note 2 and 3. 

N. B. The beauty of french pronunciation depends upon a clear and distinct ar- 
ticulation of these five letters. 

2. To the two sorts of e abovementioned, must be add'ed e 
mute, as in 

cela, that, pronounced sla. 

demande, requires, dmand. 

des mesures, measures, daymsur. 

This e, as you see, has no sound, but it generally affects 
the sound of the penultima, by rendering it longer, if it be a 
vowel, or by giving a sound to the consonant which, without 
it, would be silent ; for ex. 

e in aime, mascul. loved, is pronoun, aymay, like e ) 

i joli, pretty, zhplli, 4 i > short. 

u vu, seen, vu, u ) 

* It is perhaps unnecessary to observe, that in a treatise of this kind, the minutest 
precision must not be expected. There are simple sounds which no combination of 
Characters can exactly express : every person who knows any thing of languages 
must be sensible of this. 

3 A vowel with a circumflex is pronounced as long again as it would be without it, 

4 Sound the letter i as sharp as you can,*sharper, if possib\e, than y in pretty* 



OF SIMPLE VOWELS. 



3 



% in aimee, femin. loved, is pronoun, aymaye, like i ) 

i jolie, pretty, zholee, % > long. 

a vue, seen, vii, u) 

petit, mascul. little, is pronoun, pti, see note 4. 

grand, great, gran. 

pris, taken, pree. 

but femin. little, is pronoun, ptitt. 

grande, great, grand. 

prise, taken, preez. 

In un bon chien, a good dog, the n has only a half sound. 
In une bonne ckienne, a good bitch, the n has a full sound. 5 

- N. B. c mute is distinguished from the two others, by its not being accented; it is 
never pronounced at the end of words, but when e begins a word, it is always sound- 
ed whether it be accented or not. 

3. In the monosyllables, je, me, te, le, se, ce, de, ne, que, 
this e has sometimes a weak guttural sound, similar to that of 
e in daughter, sister, because the consonant can not be pro- 
nounced without a feeble articulation of a vowel ; but it i$ 
always dropt in conversation and in familiar reading, when it 
can be done without embarrassing the pronunciation. The 
manner in which this is effected is easy. With the last syllable 
of the preceding word, pronounce the consonant to which e 
mute belongs, and the e, thus unsupported, will remain silent ; 
ex. 

Quand me ferez-vous le plaisir de me preter ce livre que je vous ai demande ? 
pronounce, kam fray e vool play zeer daym pray tays livr kayzh voozayd manday / 

But there must not be any pause between the words, and 
the junction must be as smooth as possible. 

Observe only, that a syllable ending in e mute, can not at- 
tract the consonant of another e mute, without giving to the 
first e a gentle guttural sound, like that of e in daughter, so as 
to render the pronunciation easy ; ex. 

Je ne puis pas vous le dire, puis que je ne le sais pas. 
pronounced, zhen puee paw vool deer, pueesh zhen lay say paw. 

But carefully avoid pronouncing it like an accented 6, for 
there is not any pronunciation more ridiculous.* 



5 To give n its full articulation, you first press the tip of the tongue against the 
root of the lower teeth, then raise it up quickly to the roof of the mouth. In 
the pronunciation of the above nasal vowels, the articulation of n must end, when 
the tip of the tongue is at the root of the lower "teeth, without any motion towards 
the roof of the mouth ; this is what is here meant by a half sound. 

* In the pronouncing of this e consists much of the neatness and elogance of a true 
french accent. In the southern provinces of France, especially in Guienne and 
Gascogne, they pronounce it like the acute or short e, which gives them that affected 
pronunciation, so much ridiculed by the rest of the inhabitants of France, under the 
name of accent gascon. For this reason a foreigner will sooner understand a native of 
Bordeaux, than a native of Paris, and may often understand the former, without be- 
ing able to understand the latter, though if he understands the latter, he will un- 



4 



PRONUNCIATION 



4. Among the simple vowels is also reckoned y, which 
however does not increase their number, since its sound is 
the same as that of i. The peculiar use of this letter is to 
divide the syllable in which it is found, into two distinct 
syllables ; it is equivalent to ii ; as, 

pays, country, pron. pay-ee. 

citoyen, citizen, citwoy-eeyen. 

soyons, let us be, swoy-eeon. 

joyeuz, joyful, zhwoy-ec-ugh. 

Except in the words derived from the greek and latin, 
where y is kept to show the etymology of the word, and is 
pronounced like one i only ; as, 

Egypte, Egypt, ayzheept. 

tyrannie, tyranny, teerannee. 

etymologie, etymology, ayteemolozhee. 

mythologie, mythology, rneetolozhee. 

OF COMPOUND VOWELS. 

ai, ao, au, ea, eai, eau, ei, eo, eu, oe, ou. 

This sort of vowel is formed by the association of several 
simple vowels, which produce together, a sound different from 
that which they produce separately. 

^ eai \ soun ^ ec * ^e e short, i. e. ay ; as, 

fai I have, pronounce zhay. 

je mangeai, I ate, zhmanzhay. 

6. ais, } sounded like e long, i. e. aye ; as, 

ate, \ favais, I had, zhavaye. 

aient U! a ™> I may have, zhaey. 

. ' tils aient, they may have, eel-z-a.ye. 

eats, \ je mangeais , I was eating, zhmanzhaye. 

eaient,) Us nageaient, they were .swimming, eel-nazhaye. 
ao, found only in aout, august ; taon, oxfly ; faon, fawn ; paon, peacock, 
pronounced, oow, ton, fan, pan. 
(see nasal vowels.) 

7. au, ) fi na i sound like o short, or au. in laurel ; as, 
eau, ) 9 

eau, water, o. 

peau, skin, po. 



„<ioubtedly understand the former. It is the frequent dropping of this e which makes 
the foreigner believe that the French speak fast, for, in reality, the French, taken in 
general, do not pronounce their words faster than other people do ; but by dropping 
this letter, they link two, three, or four words together, and so go quicker through a 
sentence than a foreigner does, who gives a full sound to every e he meets with. 
Foreigners should pay particular attention to this, as nothing is more difficult to g et 
rid of than a bad accent. 



OF NASAL VOWELS. 5 

8. an, ) followed by a consonant in the same word, sound- 
er, $ ed like 6 long, or au in hautboy ; as, 

eaux, waters, 6, 

autant, as much, otan. 

9. ea, tlie e has no sound, but gives g the soft sound of 
/, or zh ; as, 

jean, John, zhan. 

mangea, ate, manzha. 

10. ei, pronounced like ei in reign ; or «e in rain; as, 

mwe, queen, rain, 

peine, pain, |?ak 

11. eo, in ^eo, the e has no sound, but softens that of g into 

2k ; as, 

george, george, zhorzh. 

gedlier, jailer, zhbleeay. 

12. eu, the nearest idea which I can give of eu, is that of c, 
in tar, agreeably to Walker's pronunciation of that word, viz. 
hur* 

feu, lire, fen. 

pen, little, pen. 

N. B. c has no sound in the monosyllables. 
tu, eus, eut, eurrves, eiites, eurent, eu$se t had ; pronounce u, u, u, urn, tct, ur, uss. 

13. oe, pronounced e; the o having no sound; and the 
words in which it was found formerly being now generally 
spelled without it ; as, 

cceur, heart, heur. 

osuvres, works, euvr. 

14. ou, pronounced like oo in cook, book, look; as, 

coup, blow, koo. 

bout, end , boo, 

15. N. B, If one of the vowels is accented, or marked over 
with two dots (-), the vowels form distinct syllables, and are 
pronounced separately ; as, 

fieau, scourge, floy-o. 

naivete, ingenuousness, na-ivtay. 

OF NASAL VOWELS. 

am, an, em, en, im, in, aim, ain, ein, om, on, urn, un. 

16. am, N j have all the same sound, that of en in encore, or 
an in want, observing to give the n only a half 
sound. See note 5, 

ambition, ambition, anbiseeon. 

empire } empire, anpeer. 

enfant, child, anfan. 

anglais, english, anglaye. 

vengeance, revenge, vanzhance. 

ornement, ornament, ornayman. 



6 



PRONUNCIATION 



17. en has the sound of en in when, giving n only a half 
sound. See note 5. 

1. In foreign names ; as, 

mentor, mentor, mentor, 

2. At the end of words ; as, 



examen, 
Hen, 

entretien. 



examination, 
well, 

conversation. 



eg z amen. 

beeyen. 

antrayt-yen. 




18. N. B. ent has no sound at the end of the third person 
plural of verbs ; as, 

Us eurent, they had, eel-z-ur. 

Us furent, they were, eel-fur. 

Us aimtrent, they loved, eel-z-aymayr. 

19. 

have all the same sound, a sound similar to that 
of in in fine, giving n only a half sound. See 
note 5. 

imparfait, imperfect, ineparfay. 

infini, infinite, inejini. 

cousin, cousin, masc, coozine. 

Jin, end, ' fine, 

/aim, hunger, fine, 

pain, bread, pine, 

sein, bosom, sine. 

20. But if in, either in the first or last syllable of a word, 
is followed by a vowel, it is sounded like the english prepo- 
sition in ; as, 

inaccessible, inaccessible, inaksessible. 

inutile, useless, inutil. 

fine, fine, fin. 

cousine, cousin, femin. coozin. 

playful, bad-in. 



21. 



om, 
on, 
eon, 



are sounded like on in wont, observing always to 
give n only a half sound. See note 5. 

compter, to count, coniay. 

donjon, dungeon, don-zhon. 

pigeon, pigeon, peezhon. 

mangeons, let us eat, man-z/wn. 

N. E. The English are apt to open their mouths too much in pronouncing- on, by 
which means, instead of sounding it like on in wont, they sound it like an in want. 
They should guard against this. 

22. um, \ have all the same sound ; but no exact idea can 
un, > be given of it, unless it be that of un in fungus ; 
eun, j observing not to give n its full sound. See note 5. 

parfum, perfume, parfun. 

cliacun, each, shak-un. 

djeun, fasting, azhun. 



OF DIPHTHONGS. 



7 



OF DIPHTHONGS. 



23. Diphthongs are a union of several vowels, which, 
though they produce different sounds, are pronounced at the 
same breath ; 



ia, sounded like 


ya in yard. ex. 


i'e 




ve. 


18, 


yo 


k 


iau, 


yo 


yoke. 


ieu, 






iou, 


you 


you. 


iant, ) 


yan, 




tent, ) 




ien, 


yen, 




ion, 


yon, 




oe, ) 
oue, ) 


whey 


whey. 


°\ u 






eoi, ) 


woa, 




oin, 


woin, 




ouan, ) 


wan 


want. 


ouen, ) 






oua, 


wa 


water. 


oui, 


wi 


without. 



In pronouncing this u 
• shut your lips as direct- 
l ed m note 2. 



fiacre, 


hackney-coach, 


feeyacr. 


pied, 


foot, 


pce-ay. 


fiole, 


vial, 


feeol. 


vnauler, 


to mew, 


meeolay. 


dieu, 


god, 


dee -ugh. 


chiourme, 


a galley crew, 


sheeoorm. 


priant, 


praying, 


preeyan. 


patient, 


patient, 


pawceeyan. 


bien, 


well, 


beeyen. 


action, 


action, 


akseeyon. 


bo'ete, 
fouet, 


box, 


bwheyt. 


whip, 


fvjhey. 


moi, toi, 
bourgeois^ 


I, thou, 
burgess, 


mwoa, twoa. 
boorzhwoa. 


soin, 
louange, 


care, 


swoin. 


praise, 


Iwanzh. 


rouen, 


rouen, 


rwan. 


louage, 


hiring, 

yes, rejoiced, 


Iwazh. 


oui, rejoui, 


we, rayzhwee. 


nuage, 
ecuelle, 


cloud, 


muazh. 


porringer, 


aykuayl. 


lui, fruit, 


him, fruit, 


luiyfrui, no. 4. 


juin, 


june, 


zhuine. 



6 To remove the embarrassment which learners find in the pronunciation of oi, 
which is sometimes pronounced like the diphthong oi, and sometimes like the com- 
pound vowel at, in words which are entirely similar, I have through all this work 
spelled with oi the words which are pronounced woa, and with ai, those which are 
pronounced ay. It will perhaps be argued that this is contrary to the opinion of the 
french academy. I respect the opinion of the french academy, as much as any man 
can do, when it is consonant to reason ; but the opinion of no man, let his rank and 
talents be ever so eminent, nor of any corporation of men, however pompous their 
appellation may be, can be put in competition with reason. Now is it reasonable that 
two sounds so very different should be expressed by one sign ; exposing the learner 
to innumerable mistakes, when by the mere change of a single letter, another sign 
can so easily be formed, which removes every difficulty ? The following words, for 
instance, are given to a foreigner to pronounce, or even to a native of France, who 
never heard them pronounced before : 

Francois, danois, suedois, chinois, bourgeois, chamois, /oi, paroisse, percoit, <$-c, 
Frangois, anglois, hollandois, japonois, bougeois, charmois, foible, paroisse, percoit, fyc. 

The stranger is told how to pronounce the words in the first line ; he pronounces 
them well ; he goes on confidently to the second line, naturally thinking that the same 
letters ought to produce the same sound : what must his astonishment be, when he is 
told that oi in the words contained in the second line is pronounced quite differently 
from what it is in the words contained in the first, the first being pronounced woa, and 
the second ay ; and how much greater will his surprise be still, when he finds that 
even in the same word, such as uoyois, croyois-, $c. (see rule 4) oi has two different 
sounds, the first syllable bein? pronounced woa and the second ay, And have you 
no means, the stranger will say, of removing this insuperable difficulty? Yes, we 
have, and a very easy one too ; you have only to change o into a in the words w hich 
are to be pronounced ay, and the whole difficulty will vanish ; but the french acade- 
my do not approve of it. Oh ! never mind the french academy, the stranger will say. 
Nor do the French, it seems, mind it much, for these great censors of the language 
have the mortification to see that, in almost every book now printed in France, this 
diphthong is now spelled contrary to their anogant and unreasonable decision. In 
vain they will say that ai does not express the exact sound that we wish to express ; 
if it removes a great difficulty, if nothing better is offered, if it is the best representa- 
tive of this sound that we can find, and is a sign which nobody can mistake, we must 
be satisfied with it, till the french academy deign to favour us with a better. — (See 
Dictionnaire Philosophique, art. A.) - 



8 



PRONUNCIATION 



OF CONSOxVANTS. 

General Rules. 

The french language admits of two modes of pronunciation ; 
one for poetry and oratory \ the other for conversation. 

24. In repeating verses, and in oratorical discourses, (he final 
consonant of a word is generally sounded, when the word which 
follows it begins with a vowel, or h mute ; as, 

D'un pinceau deli Cat, V artifice agreable, 
Du plus affreux object, fait un objet aimable* 
Des dons exterieurs Vuniformilc lasse, 
Mais V esprit a toujour* une nouvelle grace. 

The above lines must be read in the following manner ; 

Dun paineso daylika lartijice agrayable, 
Dupluz-affreu-z-obzkay fau-t-un-obzhay-l-aymable. 
Day don-z-extayrieur luniformitay lass, 
May layspri-Ua toozhoor-z-un-noovayl #rass, 

25. In conversation, the ear alone being consulted, opinions 
greatly differ. Some are for sounding the final consonant of 
every word, when the word which follows it begins with a 
vowel ; others, and this seems to be the opinion of the best 
informed persons, maintain that the final consonant of a word 
should be sounded on the initial vowel of the next, only when 
the two words are so connected that the second word is ne- 
cessary to complete the sense ; such as, 

Article and noun ; 

un enfant^ a child, u-n~anfan> 

cct kiver, this winter, s-t-eevayr. 

d son age, at his age, d so n-dzh. 

les artifices, the artifices, lay-z-artifiss, 

des hommes, of men, day-z-om. 

Adjective before the noun ; 

bon ouvrage, good work, bo-n-oovrazh, 

grand espace, great space, gran-t-ayspass* 

petit koinme, little man, pti-t-om. (7) 

gros oiseau, large bird, gro-z-owyzo, 

beaux habits, fine clothes, bd-z-abee. 

Pronoun with the verb, and verb with the pronoun : 

it est, he is , i-ll-aye. 

est it? is he 1 aye-t-il? 

sont-ellcs ? are they 1 son-t-ell ? 

nous axons, we have, noo-z-avon. 

vous en avez s you have some, voo-z-an-avaye. 

les ont-ils ? have they got them 1 lay-z-on-t-eel? 

7 We sound the final consonant of an adjective upon a noun, but not the final 
consonant of a noun upon an adjective 5 so, though # 
petit enfant, is pronounced pti-t-anfan. 

enfant aimable could not be pronounced anfan-t-aymabh, but an/an aymable. 



OF CONSONANTS. 



9 



Preposition with the noun, pronoun, or verb that follows it ; 

sans amis, without friends, san-z-amee. 

avec elle, with her, avayle-ell. 

en allant, in going, anallan. 

chez eux, to their house, skay-z-ugh. 

apres avoir, after having, apray-z-avoai. 

Adverb before the adjective or participle ; 

bien honnete, very honest, beeyen-onayt. 

plus habile, more clever, plu-z-ah-bill. 

tres aimable, very lovely, iray-z-aymable. 

fort utile, very useful, for-t-utiU, 

troy ignorant, too ignorant, tru-p inyoran. 

N. B. There are a few other instances in which a final 
consonant may be sounded on the following vowel, but they 
can hardly be reduced to rules, as it chiefly depends on the num- 
ber of letters of the same sound that follow one another. The 
surest way for a foreigner is to confine himself to the general 
rules which apply to nine-tenths of the words the final con- 
sonant of which is to be sounded on the following voweL 
The rest must be learned from the conversation of well inform- 
ed persons.* 



* As in music, it is the diversity of sounds that produces melody ; so it is with 
languages. The union of the final consonant of some words, to the initial vowel of 
the word which follows them, being done to disencumber the language of too great 
a number of monosyllables, and to render it more melodious by a greater variety of 
sounds; the rule given by some persons, that every word ending with a consonant 
should be joined to the following word, when it begins with a vowel, is totally erro- 
neous, and produces the very effect which this union is intended to remove. It is true, 
that in reading verses, the final consonant is generally joined to the following vowel, 
to preserve the measure of the verse ; and, in public speeches, the consonants are 
also often sounded at the end of words, to give a stronger impulsion to the air, and 
to be heard at a greater distance ; but in familiar reading, and in conversation, this 
is carefully avoided by all unaffected people. 

If any authority be necessary to support what I advance here, I trust that of Vabbe 
d'Olivet, one of the most distinguished members of the french academy, will be suffi- 
cient to convince every man of candour, since it implies the opinion of the most en- 
lightened part of that body. This philosophical grammarian, in his treatise on french 
prosody, (a work which has been, and ever will be the admiration of the learned,) 
before he speaks of the effect which certain nasal terminations have in repeating 
verses, remarks, art, 3. parag. 5. 

Je commence par dire que cette observation ne regarde point ceux qui ecrivent en prose, 
car la prose souffre les hiatust pourvu quHls ne soient, ni trop rudes, ni trop frequents, 
lis contribuent meme a donner au discours un certain air naturel, et nous voyons en effet 
que la conversation des honnetes gens est pleine d'hiatus volontaires qui sont tellement 
autorises par Vusage, que si Von parloit autrement, celaseroit d^un pedant, ou d?un provin- 
cial. Par exemple, lorsqu'un acteur recite ces vers de la premiere scene d'Athalie, Je viens 

celebrer avec vous la fameuse journee, <fec. Pensez-vous etre saint? il prononce 

comme sHl y avoit ; celebre-r-avec vous pensez-vou-z-etre. Mais dans la simple 

conversation, Vusage veut qu'on prononoe comme sHl y avoit, celebre avec vous — pensez- 

vou etre, &c. And art. 2, he says On le croira si Von veut ; au moins est-il certain 

qu'au theatre ce est pas chose rare quun acteur, et surtout une actrice dont les talents sont 
admires fasse adopter un mauvais accent, une prononciation irreguliere, d'oii naissentinsen- 
siblement des traditions locales qui se perpetuent, si personne n'est attenti f a les combattre. 
These are the words of a man, for whose opinions the french academy had the great- 
est deference ; a man who, at their request, had made this subject one of his parti- 
cular studies, and who had consulted upon it, as he himself declares, all the men of 
taste and learning with whem he was acquainted ; and they never were contradicted, 
t By hiatus is meant a broken sound. 



10 



PRONUNCIATION 



26. The foregoing instances excepted, the final consonant of 
words, in general, has no sound in french. See the particular 
rules for consonants under their respective heads. 

Particular Rules. 
B 

b is sounded at the end of proper names ; as, 
job, job, pronounce zhob. 

jacob, jacob, zfiakob. 

At the end of common names b is found only in 

plomb, lead, pron. plon. 

radoub, refitting, radoob. 

c 

This letter has two sounds common to both languages. 

1. Thai of k as in case, pronounced kase. 

2. That of 5 as in cease, sease. 

c before a, o, has the sound of k. 

ca, ka, car, for, kar. 

co, ko, cour, yard, koor. 

cu, ku, culotte, breeches, kulot. (u, see note 2.) 

c before e, i, or before a, o, w, with a cedilla, this mark (j) 
under it, has the sound of s ; as, 

ga, sa, facade, front, fasad. 

ce, se, ceder, to yield, say day. 

ci, si, ceci, this, scee. (i, see note 4.) 

go, so, garcon^ boy, gar son, 

cu, su, recu, received, rsu. (u, see note 2.) 

c final is generally sound, and has the sound of k ; as, 

oA-rc, with, avayk. 

public, public, publeek. (u, see note 2.) 

except the following words, in which c final has no sound ; 

broc, pore, clerc, un marc, blanc, franc, jonc, trone, almanac, estomac, tabac. 
a jug, pork, clerk, 8 ounces, white, frank, rush, trunk, almanack, stomach, tobacco, 
pron. bro,por, clayr, mar, Man, fran,* zhon, tron, almana, aystoma, taba. 

cc, before e, i, the first c has the sonnd of k, the second that 
of s ; as, 

succes, success, suksaye. 

accident, accident, akseedan. 



but by persons, who, being fond of appearing singular, affect in conversation the em- 
phatic tone of the stage, without considering whether they are speaking prose or 
verse, (most of the french plays are in verse,) or by those who, looking upon singu- 
larity as an accomplishment, mimic their rediculous affectation. 

Dans tine nation qui est une par rappoit au gouveinement, il ne peut y avoir dans sa ma" 
niere de parler qu'un usage legitime, celui de la cour et des gens de lettres, a qui elle dov 
des encouragements ; tout autre usage qui s'en ecarte dans la prononciation, dans les termi" 
naisons, ou de quelqu'autre facon que ce puisse etrc, nefait ni une langue. ou un idiome 
a part, ni un dialecte de la langue nationale ; e'est un patois abandonne a la populace 
des provinces, et chaque province a le sien. Girard synon. franc, art. Langue, Lan- 
gage, fa. 

* c, in the adjectives blanc and franc, followed by a noun beginning with a vowel, 
has the sound of k ; as. Lu blanc au noir, pronounce du blan-k-o-noir. Franc etourdi, 
pron. fran-k-aytoordee.mi, see note 4.) 



OF CONSONANTS. 



11 



Before 0, o, u ; cc have only one sound, that of k ; as, 

accabler, to crush, akablay. 

accomplir, to accomplish; akonpleer. 

accuser , to accuse, akusay. (u, see note 2.) 

ch, generally pronounced sh ; as, 

chirurgien, surgeon, sheeruzheyen. 
architecte, architect, arsheetayet. 

ch has the sound of k in the following words ; 

christ, chretien, choriste, archange, orchestre, chronique, chronologic 
Christ, christian, chorister, archangel, on hestre, chronicle, chronology, 
pron. kree, krayteeyen, koreest, arkanzh, orkaystr, kroneek, kronolozhee. 

D 

d final has no sound ; as, 

froid, cold, frwoy. 

chaud, hot, show. 

except at the end of a word which is pronounced at the same 
breath with another word beginning with a vowel, then d has 
the sound of t ; as, 

apprend-il/ does he learn 1 apran-t-eel? 
quandilvienl, when he comes, kan-t-eel veeyen. 

d, or even dd, in the body of a word, is sounded ; as, 

adjectif adjective, adjecteef. 

addition, addition, addeeseeon. 

F 

f final is generally sounded ; as, 

chef, chief, shayf. 

nerf, sinew, nayrf. 

bceuf, ox, bug/', 

ozuf, egg, ugf. 

except in clef, key, clay. 

bosufsy oxen, bugh. 

czufs, eggs, ugh. 

and if pronounced at one breath with a word beginning with 
a consonant ; 

chef 'aVazuvre, master-piece, shaydeugvre. 
nerf de bazuf, cow-skin, a rod, nayr d bugf. 
bceuf sale, salt beef, bugh salay. 

ozuf frais, new egg, ug/ifraye. 

/is sounded in neuf at t lie end of a sentence ; as, 

fen ai neuf, I have got nine. zhan-ay nugf (eu, see 
un habit neuf, a new suit, un-abee nugf. [r.12.) 

joined to a noun beginning with a consonant,/has no sound ; 
as, 

neuf livres, nine livres, nughleevr.eu,see r. 12. 

dix neuf sous, nineteen pence, dees nugt son. 

joined to a noun beginning with a vowel,/ has the sound 
of v ; as, 

neuf ecus. nine crowns, nugh-v-ayku. (u, see n. 2.) 

vingt neuf homines, twenty-nine men, vyngt nugf-v-om. 



12 



PRONUNCIATION 



G 



Ion. (on, see rule 21.) 

Tan, \ See rule 16<) 
long-aksey. 
sank- ay o. 
drank- an ran. 



g final has no sound ; as, 

long, long, 

sang, blood, / 

rang, rank, 

except in long acces, long fit, 

sang et eau, blood and water, 

de rang en rang, from rank to rank, 

g before e, t, has the soft sound of zh, ox s in pleasure, or z 
in azure. 

ge, z/iay, general, general, zhaynayral. 

gi, zhee, gigot, leg of mutton. zheego. 

g before a, o, u, has the hard sound of g in god; a sound 
nearly similar to that of k ; as, 

ga,ka, gargo7i ) boy, karson. (on, see r. 21.) 

go, ko, g° r ge, throat, korzh. 

gu, k, guerir, to cure, kayreer. 

N. B. gu form only one sound, that of g hard, or k ; as, 
guerir, to cure, kayreer. 

guerre, war, kayrr. 



guide, 



guide, 



keed. 



exept the following words, in which gu have each a distinct 
sound ; 

aiguille, aiguillon, ayguiser, arguer, cigu'e, aigue, ambigue, ambiguite 
needle, sting, to whet, to argue, hemlock, sharp, ambiguous, ambiguity, 
pronounced. 

aygueell, aygueellon, aygueesay, arguay, seegu, aygu, anbeegu, ambeegueetay. 

gna, sound gnya, ' 



gne, 



gno, 



gnye, f observing to sound the n as much as 



gnyi, 
gnyo, 
campagnard, 
accompagne, 
compagnie, 
ignorant. 



possible through the nose ; as, 



countryman, 
accompanied, 
company, 
ignorant, 

H 



kanpagnyar. 
akonpagnay. 
konpagnee. 
eegnyoran. 



There are two sorts of h both in french and in english ; the 
one aspirate, which requires an effort of the breath ; as, 
heros, hero, hayrow. 

fiasard, hazard, hazar. 

the other mute, which has no sound, and serves only to shew 
the etymology of the words ; as, 

honneur, honour, onhur. (eu, see r. 12.) 

histoire, history, eestwoyr. 

N. B. These two sorts of A are often embarrassing to the learner ; they are mark- 
ed in dictionaries, but one should always bear some characteristic mark in writing. 
The h mute that occurs through the subjoined exercises will be preceded by an apos- 
trophe. 



OF CONSONANTS. 



13 



ch, pronounced ; sh as, 

chat, cat, 
chose, thing, 



ph, pronounced f ; as, 

phrase, 
philosophe, 



sentence, 
philosopher, 



rh, sounded, r ; as, 

rhetorique, rhetoric, 

rhume, cold, 

th, sounded t ; as, 

thomas, thomas, 

methode, method, 



ska. (see c.) 
shoz. 



fraz. 
feelosof. 



raytoreeck. 

rhugm. (u, see note 2.) 



tomaw. 
maytod. 



j, pronounced zh, or like s in pleasure, leisure, or z in azure ; 



jardin, 
jour, 



garden, 
day, 

K 



zhardine. (in, r. 19.) 
zhoor. 



k, the same sound in french as in english ; as, 



kan, 

Stockholm, 



kan, 
Stockholm, 



kan. (an, see rule 16.) 
stokolm. 



I final is generally sounded ; as, 
set, salt, 
fit, thread, 
cheval, horse, 



sayl. . 

feel, (i, see note 4.) 

shval. 



except 

baril, chenil, coutil, fusil, fenil, fil$, gril, outil, percil, sourcil, soul. 
barrel, kennel, ticking, gun, hayloft, son, gridiron, tool, parsley, eyebrow, drunk, 
pronounced. 

baree, shnee, kootee, fusee, fnee, fee, gree, ootee, persee, soorsee, soo. 

I. In the pronouns il, Us, some sound the I in all instances ; 
others sound it only when it is followed by a vowel ; opinions 
being divided, I in il, Us, followed by a consonant, may either 
be pronounced or dropt ; as, 

il a, he has, 

il dit, he says, 

Us ont, they have, 

Us disent, they say, 

In conversation I is not sounded in 

quelque, some, kayk. 

quelquSun, somebody, kaykun. 

II, in general are both sounded the same as in english ; as, 

allegorie, allegory, al-laygoree. 

illustre, illustrious, il-lustr. (u, seenote2.) 

2 



eel-a. [n. 4.) 

eel dee, or ee dee. {i, s. 
eel-z-on, or ee-z-on. 
eel deez, or ee deez. 



14 



PRONUNCIATION 



But 11 preceded by i in the middle, and at the end of words, 
must be sounded like ill in the word million ; as, 
meilleur, 
bouteille, 
famille, 
bataille, 
also il in avril, 
peril, 
babil, 
travail, 
soleil, 

gentil homme, 

except the following words, in which one I only is sounded ; 

argille, camomille, distille, imbecille, mille, ville y pupille, tranquille. 
clay, camomile, distil, imbecile, thousand, town, pupil, quiet, 
pron. arzheel, kamomeel, deesteel, inebayceel, meel, veel, pupeel, trankeel. 

M 

m, at the end of a word, and in the first syllable of words 
beginning with com, has only the half sound of n. See note 5. 



bottle, 


vn fin? h 1/ f 


hnntsull 


family, 


fameell. 


battle, 


batauill. 


april, 


avreell. 


peril, 


payreell. 


prattling, 


babeel. { and word? 


labour, 


travauill.\ ending in 


sun, 

nobleman, 


soleyll. \^ail. 


zhanteellom. 



faim, 
- nom, 
compliment, 

m has no sound in 

damner, 
solemnel, 
automne, 



hunger, 
name, 

compliment, 



to damn, 
solemn, 
autumn, 

but m has a full sound in 



fine, (in, see rule 19.) 
non {on, see rule 21.) 
compleeman.(an,r. 16.) 

[tives. 

dawnay ; and deriva- 

solanel. 

oton. 



automnal, autumnal, 

amnistie, amnesty, 

calomnie, slander, 

hymne, hymn, 

indemniser, to indemnity, 

indem.nite, indemnification, 

agamemnon, agamemnon, 

somnambule, sleep-walker, 

mm, only one sound ; as, 

komme, man, om. 

femme, woman, Jam. 

except in the first syllable of the words beginning with imm ; 



btomnal. 
amneestee. 
calomnee. 
heemn. 

inedamneesay. 
inedamneelay . 
agamemnon. 
somnanbul. (s. n. 2.) 



as, 



immortel, 
immense. 



immortal, 
immense, 

N 



im-mortayl. 
im-manss. 



What has been said of m may be applied to n. 
n, at the end of a word, or in the first syllable of words be- 
ginning with con, has only a half sound. See note 5. 

pain, bread, pine. \ . 

vin, wine, rine. J h ' r ' LJ 'J 

condition, condition, condetseeon. (ew 3 r.21.) 



OF CONSONANTS. 



15 



nn, only one sounded. 

annee, year, 
connaitre. to know, 



anaye. 
conaytr. 



except the following words, in which nn are both sounded ; 

annotation, annotation, an-notasseon. [tives. 

"annual, an-nuel ; and deriva- 

to annul, an-nulay. 

innate, in-nay. 



annuel, 
annuler, 
inne, 
innover, 



to innovate. 



[tives. 

in-novay ; and deriva- 



p final is not sounded, even when it is followed by a vowel ; 
us, 

un loup, a wolf, un loo. (u, see note 2.) 

ce drop est ban, this cloth is good, sdra aye bon, 
except in cap, cap, cap. 

cep, stock of a vine, sayp. 

p in trop and beaucoup, joined to a word beginning with 
a vowel, is sounded ; as, 

trop entile, too obstinate, iro-p-aniaytay. 
beaucoup etudie, much studied, bokoo-p-aytudeeay. 

followed by a word beginning with a consonant, p has no 
sound ; as, 



trop stupide, too stupid, 

beaucoup d'affaires, much business, 



tro stupeed. (w, see note 2.) 
bokoo daffayr. 



p is sounded in 

baptismal, sceptigue, septembre, septentrion, accepter, excepter, dompter. 
baptismal, sceptick, September, north, to accept, to except, to subdue. 

pron.bapteesmal, saypteeck, sayptanbr, sayptantreeon, aksayptuy, eksayptay, domptay. 

but p is not sounded in 

bapteme, compte, exempt, prompt, manuscript, symptome, sept, sculpteur,temp. 

baptism, account, exempt, quick, manuscript, symptom, seven, sculptor, time, 
pronounced. 

bataym, cont, egzan, pron, manuscree, sinetom, sayt, skulter, tan. 



pp, one only sounded ; 

apparence, appearance, 
appartenir, to belong, 

pA, sounded/*; as, 

sphere., 
philosophic, 



sphere, 
philosophy, 

Q 



aparanss. 
apartneer. 



sfayr. 
feelosofee. 



q final is found only in coq and cinq ; 
q is sounded, and has the sound of A; in 

coq, cock, cok. 

coq a Vane, idle tale, cok a lawn. 

but it is not sounded in 

coq d'inde, turkey-cock, co dynd. (in, s. r. 19.) 



16 



PRONUNCIATION 



q in cinq substantive, is sounded k ; as, 

un cinq de pique, a five of spades, un synk dpeeck. 

a cinq pour cent, at five per cent, a synk poor san. 

trois et deux font cinq, three and two are five, troa-z-ay dugh f on synk. 

in cinq, prefixed to a noun, and pronounced at the same 
breath with it, q is sounded if the noun begins with a vowel or 
h mute ; as, 

cinq hommes, five men, synk om. (in, s. rule 19.) 

vingt cinq ecus, twenty-five crowns, vyngt synk ayku. 

if the noun to which cinq is prefixed, begins with a conso- 
nant, q is not sounded ; as, 

cinq gar^ons, five boys, sine karson. ) (in, s. rule 

cinqjilies, five girls, sine feell. \ 19.) 

qu has only one sound, that of k ; as, 
qui, who, kee. (i, see note 4.) 

qnatre, four, katr. 

qualite, quality, kaleetay. 

marquis, marquis, mar kee , 

except the following words, in which qu are pronounced kw: 
as in english : 

aquatique, equateur, quadrature, quadruple, quadrupede quadragenaire, quarto. 
aquatic, equator, quadrature, quadruple, quadruped, forty years old, quarto, 
pronounced. 

akwateek, aykwater, kwadratur, kwadruple, kwadrupayd, kwadrazhaynayr, kwarto. 

R 

r is sounded at the end of all words ; as, 
car, for, because, Tear, 

pour, for, poor, 

parvenir, to arrive, parvneer. 

except the words ending in er or ier, for more than one syl- 
lable, in which the r has no sound, but it gives to e the sound 
of e short, i. e. ay ; as, 

aimer, to love, aymay. 

icolier, scholar, aykoleeay. 

and in 

monsieur, sir, moseeugh. 

r is not sounded in notre, votre, quatre, joined to a noun be- 
ginning with a consonant ; as, 

notre maison, our house, notmayzon. (on, r. 21.) 

votre chape au, your hat, votshapo. 

quatre livres, four livres, kat leevr. 

but r is sounded when notre, votre, quatre, are joined to a 
noun beginning with a vowel ; as, 

notre ami, our friend, notr-amee. 

votre honneur, your honour, volr-onhur, (eu, see r. 12.) 

quatre ecus, four crowns, katr-ayku. 
and in 

notre pere, our father, notr-payr, lord's prayer. 

notre dame, our lady, notr-dam, virgin mary, 



OF CONSONANTS. 17 

r is always sounded in 

le nbtre, oars, Inoiotr. 

le voire, yours, Ivowtr. 

rr, only one is sounded ; as, 

arrive?) to arrive, areevay. 

arroser, to water, arozay. 

except in the first syllable of the words beginning with irr ; 
as, 

irregulier, irregular, ir-rayguleeay. 
irreprochoMe, irreproachable, ir-rayproshabl, 

S 

This letter has two sounds common to both languages, the 
first hard or aspirate, like c soft ; as, 

somme, sum, sum. 

the other soft or liquid ; like, z ; as, 

rose, rose, roze. 

s, at the beginning of a word, or in the body of a word, when 
it is preceded or followed by a consonant, is always pronounc- 
ed hard or aspirate ; as, 

saint, safety, sain, {n, see note 2.) 

sonper, supper, soopay. 

per sonne, , nobody, pay r son. 

s, between two vowels in the body of a word, or at the end 
of a word, which is to be pronounced at the same breath with 
another word beginning with a vowel, has the sound of z ; as, 

raison, reason, rayzon. (u, see rule 21.) 

plaisir, pleasure, playzeer, 

trois heures, three hours, Iroa-z-kur, 16.) 

mes enfant s, my children, may-z-anfan. {an, rule 

in other instances, s final \ms no sound; but renders the 
syllable long ; 

ironvas tu ? didst thou find 1 troovaw tu? (u, see n. 2.) 

tes amis, thy friends, iaye-z-amee. 

revenns, returned, rayvnii. (see note 2.) 

except at the end of greek and latin names which have been 
adopted in the french language ; as, 



paris, 


paris, the trojan, 


pawreess. 


venus, 


venus, 


vaynus. 


mars, 


mars, 


mars. 


also in 






as. 


ace, 


ass. 


vis, 
j lis, 


screw, 


veess. 


lily, 


leess. 


aloes, 


aloes, 


aloays. 


but not in 






mars, 


march, 


mar. 


Jleur de lis, 


flower de luce, 

9* 


jluhr dloe. 



18 



PRONUNCIATION 



ss have only one 

assurer, 
ressentir, 

sc before e, i, hav 

sceptiquc, 
science, 

sc before a, o, w, 
scandale, 
gascon, 
scorbut, 

sculpteur, 

esclave, 

scrupule, 



sound, but always 

to assure, 
to resent, 

e only one sound, 

sceptick, 
science, 

Z, r, have the soun 

scandal, 
gascon, 
scurvy, 
sculptor, 
slave, 
scruple, 



aspirate ; as, 

asuray. (u, see note 2.) 

rsanteer. 

that of s aspirate ; as, 

saypteeck. 
seeanss. 

d of sk ; as, 

skandal. 
kaskon. 

skorbu. (u, see note 2.) 

skultur. 
aysklav. 

skrupul. (u, see note 2.) 



t has two sounds, both found in satiety, pronounced saciety. 
t at the beginning of words has the same sound in french 
as in english. 

table, table, tabl. 

timidite, timidity, teemeedeetay . 

in the body of a word t followed by i, has general^ the 
sound of c ; 

patience, patience, pawceeanss. 

action, action, akceeon. 

in which t retains its own 



sortions, sortiez, entier. 
went out, went out, entire. 



except the following words, 
sound ; 

bastion, question, partie, matter e, etions, etiez, 
bastion, question, part, matter, were, were, 
pronounce, 

basteeon, kaysteeon, partee, mateeayr, ayteeon, ayteeaye, sorteeon, sorteeaye, anteeay. 

entierement, chretien, chretiente, soutien, entretien, il retient. 

entirely, christian, Christendom, support, maintenance, he retains, 
pronounce, 

anteeayrman, crayteeyen, krayteeantay, sooteeyen, antrayteeyen, il rayteeyen. 

and the words ending in tie, and tier ; as, 

amitie, friendship, ameeteeay. 

chdtier, to chastise, 

t final is not sounded ; as, 

tout, all, 
il est, it is, 

fait, done, 

except in 

est, ouest, 
lest, dot, 
brut, correct, 
un fat, un sot, 
pact, exact, 

and when it ends a word which must be pronounced at 



east, west, 
ballast, dower, 
rough, correct, 
a fop, a fool, 
pact, exact, 



shawteeay. 



too. 

eel aye. 
jay. 



ayst, west, 
layst, dot. 
brut, corrayct. 
un fat, un sol. 
pact, egzact. 



OF CONSONANTS. 19 

the same breath with another word beginning with a vowel ; 
as, 

est-elle ? is she 1 aye-t-ell ? rule.) 

tout a fait, quite, too-t-afay. (see general 

but never in 

et, and, (conjunction,) ay. 

t is sounded in sept, huit, substantives : as, 

un sept, a seven, un sayt, (11, see note 2.) 

un huit, an eight, un hueet. 

in sept, huit, vingt, cent, joined to a noun, t is sounded when 
the noun which follows it begins with a vowel ; as, 
sept enfants, seven children, sayt-enfan. 
huit amis, eight friends, hueet-amee. (s. gen. rul.) 

if the noun begins with a consonant, t has no sound ; as, 

sept navires, seven ships, say nawveer. 

cent chevaux, a hundred horses, san shvo. 

tt, only one sounded ; as, 

attirer, to attract, ateeray. 

/rotter, to rub, frotay. 

V 

v has the same sound in french as in english ; as,. 
vanite, vanity, vaneetay. 

vivacite, vivacity, veevaceetay. 



This letter has three sounds, viz. gz, ks, and z. 

In the first syllable of a word, x followed bv a vowel, is 
sounded gz ; as, 

exemple, example, egzanple. 

exister, to exist, egzeestay. 

followed by a consonant, it is sounded ks ; as, 

exces, excess, ayksaye. 

exposer, to expose, ayksposay. 

x is also sounded ks in 

sex, axe, sex, axle, sayks, aks. 

fluxion, fluxion, flukseeon. (u, s. note 2.) 

axiome, axiom, akseeom. 

stix, phoenix, stix, phoenix, steeks, fayneeks. 

index, pollux, index, pollux, inedeks, polluks. 

alexandre, alexander, alayksandr. 

■x has the sound of s aspirate in 

six, dix, six, ten, sees, dees, 

dix sept, seventeen, deessayt. 

soixante, sixty, soassant. 



20 



PRONUNCIATION 



x final generally has no sound ; it only renders the sylla- 
ble long ; as, 

beaux, fine, bo. 

lieux, places. leeugh. 

except when it ends a word which is pronounced at the 
same breath with another word beginning with a vowel, then 
it is sounded z ; as, 

six amis, six friends, see-z-amee. 

beaux yeux, fine eyes, bd-z-yeugL (gen. rule.) 

and when it is followed by ieme, or iemement ; "as, 
deuxieme, second, dughziem. 

sixiemement, sixthly, seezeemman. 

z 

z has the same sound in french as in english ; as, 

zele, zeal, zayl. 

z final has no sound ; but renders the syllable long, 

vous avez, you have, voo-z-avaye. 
vous par lez, you speak, voo parlaye. 

except in chez, at one's house, followed by a vowel ; as } 

chez elle, at her house, shay-z-ell. 

PROSODY, OR PRONUNCIATION OF SYLLABLES. 

By prosody is meant the manner of pronouncing each syl- 
lable regularly, i. e. according to what each syllable taken 
separately, requires. 

It is certain that some diversity must be observed in the 
pronunciation of syllables, otherwise the language would be 
perfect monotony ; there are then divers inflexions of the 
voice, some which raise the tone, some which lower it, and 
this is what grammarians call prosodical accent* 

GENERAL RULES. 

I. The permltima vowel of all words ending with e mute, is long ; as, pensee s 
thought; armee, army ; je lie, I tie ; je me fie, I trust myself; joie, joy ; fenvoie, I 
send ; je hue, I praise ; iljoue, he plays ; je nue, I shadow ; la rue, the street ; de la 
morue, cod-fish, <$-c. 

But if, in these words, the e mute were changed into a masculine e, then the pe- 
nultima would become short ; as, lier, to tie ; louer, to praise ; nuer, to shadow. 

II. "When a vowel ends a syllable, and is followed by another vowel, which is not 
e mute, that syllable is short ; as, cree, created ; feal, trusty ; action, action ; hair, to 
hate ; doue, endowed ; tuef, to kill. 

III. Every syllable ending with any consonant but s, x, or z, is short ; as, sac, sack ; 
lac, lake ; sel, salt ; eventail, fan ; faim, hunger; paifum, perfume ; sein, bosom : soln, 
care ; garcon, boy ; cap, cape ; nectar, nectar ; pot, pot ; sort, fate, SfC. 



■ This mark (") is intended to show that the syllable is long; this other ( v ) that it 
is short ; and the doubtful syllables are marked with a grave accent, thus C)> 



OF SYLLABLES. 



21 



IV. Every syllable ending with s, x, or z, is long ; des sacs, sacks ; des sels, salts ; 
des pots, pots ; monfils, my son ; la paix, peace ; la voix, the voice ; le n'ez, the nose. 

V. Between two vowels, the last of which is mute, the letter s or x lengthens the 
penultima ; as, extdse, extasy ; diocese, diocese ; il pese, he weighs ; betise, foolish- 
ness ; franchise, candour ; rose, rose ; epoiise, spouse ; ruse, cunning ; recluse, recluse ; 
aise, glad': these, thesis ; vase, vessel. 

And it then generally happens, that the antepenultima becomes short ; as, il s^extd- 
sie, he falls into extasy; pes'ee, weighing ; epousee, married, <£c. for the french proso- 
dy requires that the penultima be strong, if the final is mute, and that the penultima 
be weak, if the voice rests upon the final. 

VI. An s or an x sounded, preceded by a vowel, and followed by a consonant, al- 
ways renders the syllable short ; as, jaspe, jasper ; masque, mask ; astre, star ; 
burlesque, burlesque ; funeste, fatal ; piste, track ; risque, risk ; poste, post ; brusque, 
abrupt : juste, just ; bdrbe, beard ; barque, bark ; berceau, cradle ; infirme, infirm. 

But when there are two rr, if the two together form only an indivisible sound, the 
syllable is always long ; as,„ arret, arrest ; bdrre, bar ; bisdrre, whimsical ; tonnerre, 
thunder ; ecldrre, to be hatching, %c. 

VII. When the nasal vowels am, an, em, en, im, in, aim, ain, ein, om, on, um, 
"un, are followed by a consonant, which is neither m nor n, and which begins 
another syllable, they are long ; as, dinsi, thus ; jdmbe, leg ; jdmbon, ham ; crdinte, 
fear ; trembler, to tremble ; peindre, to paint ; joindre, to join ; tbmber, to fall ; humble, 
humble, $c. 

If m or n be doubled, it renders the syllable short to which the first of the doubled 
consonant belongs ; as, homme, man ; femme, woman ; epigrdmme, epigram ; quHl 
prenne, let him take ; consbnne, consonant ; personne, person, nobody. 



PARTICULAR RULES. 

A 

A, the first letter of the alphabet, is long ; as, un petit a, a littie a ; il ne sait ni a ni 
b, he knows neither a nor b. 

A, the preposition, is short ; as, je suis d Paris, I am at Paris ; fecris d Rome, I write 
to Rome ; as is also a in the third person singular of the verb avoir, to have ; ildde 
beaux livres, he has fine books ; ild ete, he has been ; il a parle, he has spoken. 

At the beginning of a word a is long, in acre, sour ; age, age ; dme, soul ; one, ass"; 
dpre, harsh ; drrhes, earnest money ; as, ace, $c. 

These instances excepted, a is short, whether it makes a syllable of itself ; as in 
dpotre, apostle ; or is followed by a double consonant, as in dpprendre, to learn ; or by 
two consonants which are different, as in altere, altered ; argument, argument. 

At the end of a word a is very short in the preterite and future tenses of verbs ; as, 
il aimd, he loved ; il chantd, he sung ; il aimerd, he will love ; ilehanterd, he will sing. 
In the articles Id, the ; md, my ; td, thy ; sd, his. In the adverbs cd, here ; Id, there ; 
d'ejd, already. A little more stress is laid upon the a, in substantives borrowed from 
foreign languages ; as, sofa, sofa ; duphcatd, duplicate, S^c. 

abe, always short ; as, ardbe, arabian ; except astrolabe, astrolabe ; crdbe, crab. 

able, short in all adjectives ; as, aimdble, amiable ; capable, capable, fyc. long in 
most substantives ; as, cable, cable ; fable, fable ; sable, sand ; and in these verbs, 
on ni'accdble, I am overwhelmed ; je ni'ensdble, I stick in the sand ; il hdble, he 
brags. 

abre, always long ; as, sabre, sabre ; il se cdbre, he rears ; ^lso in the masculine 
termination ; se cdbrer, to rear ; deldbre, in tatters. 

ac, always short ; as, sac, sack ; lac, lake ; trictrac, back-gammon. See III. Gen. 
Rule. 

ace, long, in grace, favor ; espace, space ; lacer, to lace ; deldcer, to unlace. 

These words excepted ; ace is short ; as, glace, ice, looking-glass ; preface, preface. 

ache, long, in lache, coward ; tdche, task ; reldche, relaxation ; je mdche I chew.* 
As also in the masculine terminations mdcher, to chew ; relacher, to relax, <£c. 

In all other instances ache is short ; as, tdche, a spot ; moustache, whisker ; vdche, 
cow ; il se cache, he conceals himself ; il arrd.che, he pulls out, AfC. 

acle, long, mil rdcle, he scrapes ; il debacle, the ice is breaking ; these two words 
excepted, acle, is doubtful ; as, oracle, oracle ; miracle, miracle ; obstacle, obstacle. 



* Formerly written lasche, tasche, with a mute s, to show that thev are long. This 
is now supplied by a circumflex accent, and it should not be omitted over these 
words, as the pronunciation of a word sometimes alters its meaning. 



22 



PRONUNCIATION 



acre, long, in acre, tart ; but short in all other words ; as, diacre, deacon ; fiacre T 
hackney-coach ; acre, an acre ; sacre du roi, the king's coronation. 

a ee, always short, as, serenade, serenade ; cascade, cascade ; fade, tasteless ; il 
persuade, he persuades ; il evade, he makes his escape. 

adre, short in ladre, leprous; but long in cadre, frame ; escadre, squadron; even 
when the word ends with e mascul. as, mddre, speckled ; encddrer, to frame. 

afe, athe, aiways short ; as, carafe, decanter ; epitdphe, epitaph ; egrdffe, clasp. 

afre, affre, long, in affre, fright ; bafre, gluttony ; short in all other instances ; as, 
baldfre, gash ; sdfre, ravenous. 

afle, long ; as, rafle, a royal pair at dice ; f trifle, I scratch ; and the same quan- 
tity is preserved when e final is short ; as, rafler, to sweep away ; erafler, to scratch 
slightly. 

age. long in the word age, age ; but so short in all the rest that we dwell a little 
upon the penultima ; paridge, division ; avantdge, advantage, #c. 

agne, always short, except in the verb gdgner, to gain ; je gdgne, I gain. 

ague, always short, bague, ring ; dcigue, dagger ; vague, wave, vague, 

ai, a false diphthong, which produces only a simple sound. When it has the 
sound of e long, it is doubtful ; a.s,vrdi, true ; essai, essay ; but it is short when the 
sound approaches to that of e short ; as,fai, I have ; je chantdi, I sang. 

a ie, always long ; as, hdie, hedge ; pldie, wound ; vrdie, true. See I. Gen. Rule. 

ate, shoit ; as, vousdyez, you may have ; vous pdyez, you pay ; vous begdyez, you 
stammer. See II. General Rule. 

The reason of this difference between aie and aye is, that aie makes only one syl- 
lable, and that y, which is equivalent to ii, dividing the word into two syllables, 
these words are pronounced as if they were spelt ai-iez, pai-iez, begai-iez, the first 
syllable of which is pronounced like e short. (See ai, compound vowel.) 

aigne, always short ; as, chatdigne, chestnut ; je ddigne, I deign ; Use bdigne, he is 
bathing; on le sdigne, they are bleeding him. 

aigre, always short ; as, digre, tart ; mdigre, lean ; vindigre, vinegar, SfC. 

ail. General Rule. When a word ends with I liquid, the syllable is short; as, 
eventdil, fan ; gouvernail, rudder ; the a being the only vowel which is heard in the 
penultima, and the i serving only to soften the sound of the following consonant. 
This is also the case in the three following paragraphs. 

aili.e, short in meddille, medal ; and in the following verbs ; je detdille, I retail; 
f'emdille, I enamel ; je travdille, I work ; but it is long in all other words ; as, je raille, 
I jeer ; ilbdille, he yawns ; il braille, he brawls ; ilrimaille, he makes poor verses. 

aillet, aii.lir, short ; as, mdillet, mallet ; pdillet, pale coloured; jaillir, to spout ; 
assdillir, to assault. 

aiillon, short in medallion, medallion ; batdillon, battalion ; nous emdillons, we 
enamel ; detdillons, let us detail ; travdillons, let us work. These words excepted, 
aillon is Jong ; as, hdillon, tattered clothes ; baillon, gag ; nous taillons, we cut, SfC. 

aim, ain. See III. and VII. General Rules. 

aime. This termination is found only in the verb aimer, to love ; which is short ; 
as, faime, I love ; tu dimes, thou lovest, <SfC. 

aine, long, in hdine, hatred ; chaine, chain ; gdine, sheath ; je trdine, I draw, and 
their derivatives. These instances excepted, aine is short : as, capitdine, captain ; 
fontdine, fountain ; semdine, week ; lame, wool. 

air, aire. The first is doubtful in the singular; as, Pair, the air ; chair, flesh ; 
eclair, lightning, §c. The second is long; as, unepdire, a pair ; la chdire, the pulpit. 

ais, aix, aise, atsse, all long ; as, paldis, palace ; j'avdis, I had ; j y etdis, I was ; un 
francdis, a frenchman ; paix, peace ; fourndise, furnace ; cdisse, chest. 

ait, aite, both short ; as, Idit, milk ; attrdit, charm ; retrdite, retreat, <SfC excepts 
pldil, he pleases ; il ndit, it springs ; il repdit, he feeds ; le faitc, the summit. 

aitre, always long ; traitre, traitor ; mditre, master ; and other terminations of the 
same sound, though spelt differently ; as, paraitre, or paraitre, to appear, SfC 

ale, alle, always short ; as, cigdlle, cicada ; scanddle, scandal ; une mdlle, a trunk ; 
une bille, a ball ; except hd J e, sunburnmg ; pale, pale ; un male, a male ; un rale, a 
rail ; and the derivatives of these words, though the fmal syllable be masculine ; as, 
hale, parched by the sun ; rdler, to rattle ; palir, to grow pale ; pdleur, paleness. 

am, an. See III. and VII. General Rules. 

ame, always short ; as, dame, lady ; rdme, oar, ream, S^c. except in the following 
words; amc, soul; inflme, infamous; blame, blame; il se pdme, he swoons; un 
brdme, a brarnin ; and in all the preterit^ 1 tenses of verbs ; as, nous aimdmes, we 
loved ; nous chantdmes, we sang ; nous parlames, we spoke ; nous joudmes, we 
played, $e. 



OF SYLLABLES. 



23 



aNE, anne, always short ; as, cabdne, cottage ; organe, organ, $ c. except dne, ass ; 
crane, skull ; les manes, the manes ; de la mdnne, manna ; une marine, a basket. 

ant. See III. General Rule. N. B. In the word comptant there is a difference ; 
when a participle, it is long ; as, je me suis trompe en comptant Vargent, I made a mis- 
take in counting the money ; and it is short when used as a substantive or adverb ; 
as, ila du comptant, he has ready money ; payer comptant, to pay in ready money. 

ap, always short ; as, cap, cape. See III. General Rule. 

ape, appe, always short ; pape, pope ; trape, trap ; grape, a bunch ; onfrappe, some- 
body knocks ; except rape, a rasp ; and rdper, to rasp, in which it is long. 

a.pre ; cdpre, caper ; dpre, tart ; the only two words of this termination, are long. 

aque, always short, except pdqwes, easter ; and Jdques, James. 

ar, always short, as car, for ; nectar, nectar. See III. General Rule. 

arbe. General Rule. Every syllable which finishes with r, and is followed by 
another syllable beginning with a consonant ; is short ; as, barbe, beard ; barque, bark ; 
berceau, cradle ; infirme, infirm ; ordre, order, 6{C. 

are. long ; as barbdre, barbarous ; je prepare, I prepare ; but when the last syllable 
is not mute, are is short ; as, egdre, strayed ; prepdrant, preparing ; barbarie, barbary. 

arre. General Rule. Whatever vowel precedes two rr, if the two together form 
only one sound, the syllable is long ; as arret, arrest ; bdrre, bar ; tonnerre, thunder, 4-c. 

ari, arie, always short ; as, mdri, husband ; pari, wager ; Marie, Mary ; barbarie, 
barbary; except hourvdri, uproar ; mdrri, sorry ; equarri; squared 

as, commonly long, as there are few words terminated in this manner in which the 
a is not sounded very open, whether the s be pronounced ; as in Pallas, Pallas ; as 
ace ; or whether it be mute, as in tas, heap ; tu as, thou hast ; tu annas, thou lovedst^ 

ase, always long ; as base, basis ; Pagdse, Pagasus ; emphdse, emphasis ; extase, 
extasy ; rdser, to shave ; jdser, to chatter. See V. Ueneral Rule. 

espe, General Rule. An s sounded, preceded by a vowel, and followed by a con- 
sonant, always renders the syllable short ; as, masque, mask. See Vf. General Rule. 

asse, short ; except in the substantives basse, base ; cdsse, cassia ; cldsse, class ; 
echdsses, stilts ; passe, pass ; ndsse, bow-net ; tdsse, cup ; chdsse, shrine ; masse, mass ; 
in the feminine adjectives basse, low, base ; grasse, fat ; Idsse, weary; and m the fol- 
lowing verbs ; il amdsse, he collects ; il enchdsse, he inchases ; il cdsse, he breaks ; il 
passe, he passes ; il compdsse, he measures-; with their compounds. 

All these words retain their quantity, even when the termination, instead of being 
mute, is masculine ; as chassis, sash ; cdsser, to break ; passer, to pass. 

Add to these the first and second persons singular, and the third person plural of 
verbs, terminated in asse, asses, assent, in the subjunctive ; as, faimdsse, I might love ; 
tu aimdsses, thou mightest love ; Us aimdssent, they might love. 

at, long in the substantives bat, a pack-saddle ; mat, mast ; appdt, bait ; degdt, 
havock ; and in the third person singular of the perfect of the subjunctive il aimdt, he 
might love ; il chantdt, he might sing ; ilparldt, he might speak, #c* 

In all other substantives, in adjectives, and in the present of the indicative, at is 
short ; as, avocat, counsellor; eclat, splendour; plat, flat, a dish; on se bat, people 
fight. 

ate, always short, except in hate, haste ; pate, dough ; il gate, he spoils ; il mate, 
he masts : il demdte, he dismasts ; and in the second person plural of the preterite 
tenses of verbs, terminated in ates ; as vous aimdtes, you loved ; vous parldies. you 
spoke, 

atre, short in quatre, four ; and in bdtre, to beat, with its derivatives abatre, to pull 
down ; combdtre, to fight, <f" c - 

These instances excepted, atre is always long ; as, idolatre, idolatrous ; theatre, 
theatre ; opinidtre, obstinate ; enipldtre, plaster, $c. 

au, compound vowel. When this vowel forms a syllable which is followed by a 
mute termination, it is long ; as, duge, through ; autre, other ; dune, ell ; paume, tennis. 

It is also long when in the last syllable of a word it is followed by a consonant ; as, 
hdut, high ; chdud, hot ; chdux, lime ; faux, false ; except Paul, Paul. 

But au is doubtful when it precedes a masculine syllable ; as, dubade, serenade ; 
audace, audacity ; autonne, autumn ; augmentcr, to increase ; auteur, author ; and 
when it is final; as, joydu, jewel ; cotedu, hillock ; coutedu, knife. 

ave, short in rave, radish ; cave, cellar ; on pave, they are paving ; but oftener 
long ; as, entrdve, shackles ; grave, grave, serious. 

But when v instead of being followed by e mute, is followed by a masculine sylla- 
ble, the preceding syllable is short ; as, grdvier, grave] ; aggrdver, to aggravate. 



* Formerly spelt with an 5 mute, to show that they are long ; as, bast, mast, il 
aimast, vous aimastes, &c. This is now supplied by a circumflex accent, bat, mat, &c. 



24 



PRONUNCIATION 



bkave preceding its substantive is short ; as, un brave homme, a well-behaved man ; 
but long when it comes afier it ; as, un homme brave, a brave or courageous man. 
avre, always long; as havre, harbour: cadavre, corpse. 

ax, axe, always short ; as, Ajax, Ajax ; thorax, thorax ; borax, borax ; axe axle ; 
taxe, tax ; parallaxe, parallax. 

E 

The French distinguish three sorts of e, which express different sounds ; the differ- 
ence of which is perceived in fermete, firmness ; honnetete, honesty. 

The first e in each of these words, is long, the second mute, and the third short. 

2? mute is also called feminine ; the others are called masculine. 

There is no accent over e mute, the short requires an accute accent, and the long a 
grave, or a circumflex, but it is found sometimes without any of these sings, as ap- 
pears in the first syllable of the word fermete. 

With respect to e mute, it is sufficient to know that it never begins a word, and 
that it is seldom found in several consecutive syllables ; for if it is found in some 
compound words, such as revenir, to return ; redevenir, to become again ; entretenir, 
to entertain ; at least this never happens at the end of a word ; thus the e which is 
mute or feminine in the penultima of the infinitive of verbs ; as, appeler, to call ; peser, 
to weigh ; mener, to lead ; devoir, to owe ; ooncevoir, to conceive, becomes masculine, 
or is changed into the diphthong oi, in the tenses which end with e mute ; fappele, I 
call ; il pese, he weighs ; il mene,he leads ; ilsdoivent, they owe ; Us concoivent, 6fC. 

For the same reason, though we make e mute in chapelain, chaplain ; chandelier, 
candlestick : celui-ci, this ; faime, I love ; je chante, I sing ; we sound it in chapelle, 
chapel ; chandelle, candle : celle, that ; aime-je, do I love '• chante- je, do I sing 1 

For such is the genius of the french language, that the penultima be strong, if the 
final is mute, and that the penultima be weak, if the voice rests upon the final. 

eble, ebre, EC, ece, always short ; as, hieble, wallwort ; funebre, mournful ; bee, 
bill ; niece, niece. 

eche, long and very open in b'eche, spade ; leche, thin slice ; grilche, noisy ; peche, 
fishing ; peche, peach ; il emplche, he prevents ; ildeplche, he dispatches ; ilprlche,he 
preaches. Short in caliche, calash ; fleche, arrow ; meche, match ; creche, crib ; seche, 
dry, the cuttle-fish ; breche, breach ; onpreche, people sin. 

ecle, ect, ecte, DRE, ede, eder, all short ; as siecle, age ; respect, respect ; insecte, 
insect ; cedre, ceoar ; remede, remedy ; elder, to yield ; posslder, to possess, <$c. 

e'e. General Rule. The penultima vowel of all words ending with e mute, is 
long ; as, pens'ee, thought ; arm'ee, army ) je lie, I tie. See I. General Rule. 

e'e'. General Rule. When a vowel ends a syllable, and is followed by another 
vowel which is not e mute, that syllable is short ; as, cree, created ; feal, trusty ; 
action, action ; hair, to hate ; titer, to kill, $c. See II. General Rule. 

ef, effe ; the first is short ; as, chef, chief ; bref, brief, short. The second long ; 
as, greffe, graft, the rolls ; je greffe, I graft. 

effle, long, in nefle, medlar ; short in irefe, trefoil, club. 

ege, egle. The first long ; as, sacrilege, sacrilegious ; college, college ; silge y se?&, 
siege. The other short ; as, regie, rule ; seigle, rye, <$-c. 

egne, eigne. The first is doubtful ; as, regne, reign ; duegne, duenna. The other 
is short; as peigne, comb ; enseigne, sing; quHlf eigne, let him pretend. 

egre, egue, short ; as, negre, negro ; integre, upright ; begue, a stammerer ; colle- 
gue, colleague ; ilallegue, he alleges, c]c. 

eil, eille, short ; as soleil, sun ; sommeil, sleep ; abeille, bee ; bouteille, bottle ; the 
only exceptions are, vilille, old woman ; vilillard, old man ; vieillesse, old age. 

ein, etnt. See III. and VII. General Rules. 

eine, short ; as, veinc, vein , peine, pain ; the only exception is reine, queen. 

einte, always long ; as, atteinte, stroke ; f'einte, feint. 

el, al ways short ; as, sel, salt ; cruel, cruel, SfC. See III. General Rule. 

ele, elle, long in zele, zeal ; poele, frying pan ; fr'ele, frail ; pile mele, confusedly ; 
grele, hail ; il sefele, it cracks ; labrebis bele, the sheep bleats. 

These instances excepted, ele elle, is always short ; as, module, model ; fidele, 
faithful ; rebelle, rebellious ; mor telle, mortal, fyc. 

em, en. See III. and VII. General Rules ; and sound the final consonant in item, 
item ; Bethleem, Bethlehem ; amen, amen ; himen, hymen ; examen, examination. 

eme, doubtful in creme, cream ; short in je seme, I sow ; il seme, he sows ; and long 
in all other words ; as, bapteme, baptism ; diademe, diadem ; meme, even, fyc. 

ene, long in ch'ene, oak ; e'ene, the lord's supper ; scene, scene ; gene, rack ; aline, 
awl ; r'ene, rein ; frlne, ash-tree ; arlne, area ; pine, the bolt of a lock ; and in the pro- 
per names, Athlnes, Athens ; Dioglnes, Diogenes ; Meclne, Maecenas, <SfC but short in 



OF SYLLABLES. 



25 



phenomene, phenomenon ; ebene, ebony ; etreme, new year's gift ; quHl prenne, let him 
take ; quHl vienne, let him come ; and in all words in which the consonant is doubled. 

epe, epke, always long; as, gulpe, wasp; crepe, crape ; vlpres, vespers ; except 
lepre, leprosy. 

epte, eptre ; ectre, always short ; as precepte, precept ; il accepte, he accepts ; 
sceptre, sceptre ; spectre, spectre. 

eque, ecque, always short ; as, grecque, greek ; bibliotheque, library ; obseques, fu- 
neral, 4-c. except evlque, bishop : archevlque, archbishop. 

ER is short in Jupiter, Jupiter ; Lucifer, Lucifer ; ether, aether ; cher, dear ; cancer, 
cancer ; pater, the lord's prayer ; magister, a country schoolmaster ; J rater, a surgeon's 
apprentice ; and long in fir, iron ; enflr, hell ; leger, light ; mer, sea ; amir, bitter ; 
hivlr, winter ; but it is doubtful in the infinitive of verbs when the r is sounded with 
the following vowel, as is always the case in repeating verses. 

erbe, erce, erse, erche, ercle, erde, erdre, all short. See the General Rule 
under arbe. 

erd, ert, doubtful ; as, concert, concert ; ouvert, open ; desert, desert, wilderness ; 
il perd, he loses ; le verd, green, §c. ' 

ERE, doubtful ; as, chimere, chimera ; pere, father ; sincere, sincere ; il espere, he 
hopes, 4-c. but long in the third person plural of the perfect tense of verbs ; as, ils 
alllrent, they went ; ils parllrent, they spoke ; ils chanterent, they sang, fyc. 

erge, ergue, erle, erme, erne, erpe, all short. See arbe, General Rule. 

err, always long when agreeably to the general rule, the two rr form only one in- 
divisible sound ; as in guerre, war ; tdnnlrre, thunder ; nous verrons, we shall see ; 
short when the two rr are pronounced separately ; as, erreur, error ; terreur, terror, SfC. 

erte, ertre, erve all short. See arbe. General Rule. 

esse, long in conflsse, confession ; prlsse, press ; comprlsse, compress ; exprlsse, 
express ; clsse, ceasing ; on s'empresse, they are eager ; il prof esse, he professes. 

These instances excepted, esse is short ; as, tendresse, tenderness ; paresse, lazi- 
ness ; caresse, caress ; jeunesse, youth, <$-c. 

esque, este, estre. See VI. General Rule. 

et, long in arret, a decree ; benet, a simpleton ; foret, forest ; genet, broom ; pret, 
ready ; aprlt, preparation ; acquit, acquisition ; interlt, interest ; il 1st, he is.* 

These instances excepted, et is short ; as, cadlt, younger, junior ; bidlt, pony ; e£, 
and ; sujlt, subject ; brochlt, pike, 4-c. 

ete, long in bite, beast ; fete, feast ; arballte, a cross-bow ; bolte, box ; templte, 
tempest ; quite, quest ; conqulte, conquest ; enqulte, inquest ; requite, request, peti- 
tion ; arrlte, fish-bone ; crlte, crest, a coxcomb ; tlte, head ; in all other instances, 
ete is short ; and the t is doubled ; as, tablette, shelf, memorandum-book ; houlltte, 
crook ; unless the etymology forbids doubling it, as, prophete, prophet ; poete, poet. 

Honnete is short when placed before a noun ; as, un honnete homme, an honest man ; 
it is long when placed after ; as, un homme honnete, a civil man. 

Vous etes, the second person plural of the present tense of etre, is either long or 
short, as the poet chooses. 

etre, long in lire, a being, to be; salpltre, saltpetre; ancetre, ancestor ; fenltre, 
window ; prelre, priest ; champltre, rural ; hltre, beech ; gultres, spatterdashes. 

In all other instances etre is short, and t is doubled, unless the etymology pre- 
vents it ; as, diametre, diameter ; il penetre, he penetrates ; lettre, letter ; mettre, 
to put. 

eu, compound vowel, short in the singular, feu, fire ; bleu, blue ; jeu, game, sport ; 
veu, vow ; neveu, nephew, fyc. 

eve, long in trlve, truce; lagrlve, the sea-shore ; il rive, he dreams ; and the pe- 
nultima of the verb river, remains long in all its tenses ; as, river, to dream ; je rlvai, 
I dreamt ; but eve is doubtful in f eve, bean ; breve, brief, short ; ilacheve, he finishes ; 
il creve, it bursts ; il se live, he rises ; and the penultima of these verbs is mute, if it 
be followed by a masculine syllable ; as, achever, to finish ; il se levait, he was rising. 

exjf, short ; as, veuf, widower ; neuf, new ; un ceuf, an egg ; un boeuf, an ox. 

n. b. The /is pronounced in all these words, in the singular, but not in the plural, 
except in veufs, widowers. 

euil, short ; as, seuil, threshold ; fauteuil, arm-chair, 4-c. See III. General Rule. 

eule, long in mtule, grinding stone, mill-stone. This excepted, eule is short ; as, 
seule, single, alone ; gueule, the name given to the mouth of-beasts and fishes. 



* All these words, as well as those in the two following paragraphs, were formerly 
spelt with a mute s, which is now suppressed, and supplied by a circumflex, except 
an est, the third person singular of the present tense of etre, in which 5 is still retained. 



26 



PRONUNCIATION 



EUNE, long in jeune, fasting ; and short in jeune, young. 

eur, eure. The first is short in the singular ; odcur, odour ; peur, fear ; majeur, of 
age ; and long in the plural odeurs, odours ; but the second is doubtful, i. e. 

If eure ends a word pronounced at the same breath with another word, it is sr ort ; 
as, la majeure par tie, the major part ; une heure entiere, a whole hour. If there is no 
word after it, to be pronounced at the same breath with it, it is long ; as, cettefille est 
majeure, that girl is of age ; f attends depuis une heure, I have been waiting for an hour. 

evre, doubtful ; levre, lip ; chevre, goat ; lievre, hare ; orfevre, gold or silver-smith. 

EUX, euse, long ; deux, two ; precieux, precieuse, precious ; cr'euser, to dig, 4-c. 

Ex, always short ; as, exemple, example ; extirper, to extirpate ; sexe, sex, 4-c. 

I 

An observation which may have already been made, but which will appear more 
obvious by reading the rules on the three remaining vowels, is, that the number of 
short syllables is much greater than of long ; therefore, in order to abbreviate this 
treatise, those terminations will be omitted which are short without exception. 

idre, long in hidre, written hydre, for the sake of the etymology, hydra ; cldre, 
cider. 

IE, diphthong, doubtful ; as, miel, honey ; fiel, gall ; fier, proud ; amitie, friendship ; 
sarriere, quarry ; poussiere, dust ; mien, mine ; tien, thine ; dieu, god. 

IE, dissyllable, long ; as, vie, life ; saisie, seizure ; il prie, he begs. See I. General 
Rule. 

ien, when a dissyllable, the two syllables are short ; as, lien, tie ; Parisien, Pari- 
sian ; when a diphthong, the syllable is doubtful ; as, lemien mine ; rien, nothing, 4 c. 

ige, doubtful ; tige, stalk ; prodige, prodigy; htige, litigation ; vestige, footstep ;je 
m y oblige, I bind myself ; il s'afflige, he afflicts himself. 

But ige is short in the tenses of these verbs which do not end with e mute, as 
s'obligtr, to bind one's self ; afflige, afflicted. 

ile, long in He, island ; huile, oil ; stile stile ; tuile, tile ; presqu'ile, peninsula. 

im, in. See III. and VII. General Rules. 

ime, long in abime, abyss ; dime, tythe ; and in the first person plural of the prete- 
rite tense of verbs ; as, nous vimes, we saw ; nous repondimes, we answered. 

ion, short ; as, action, action ; passion, passion. See II. General Rule. 

ire, doubtful, empire, empire ; ecrire, to write ; il soupire, he sighs ; long in the 
third person plural of the perfect tense of verbs ; Us punirent, they punished ; ilsfirent, 
short before a masculine termination ; as, soupirer, to sigh ; desirer, to wish, 4-c. 

ise, long ; as, remise, coach-house ; surprise, surprise ; j'epuise, I exhaust ; Us di- 
sent, they say ; quHls, liseut, let them read. 

isse, always short ; as, saucisse, sausage ; reglisse, liquorice ; except in the perfect 
of the subjunctive ; &s,jefisse, I might do ; Us punisscnt, they might punish, 4-c. 

it, long only in the third person singular of the perfect of the subjunctive ; as, il 
dit, he might say ; il fit, he might do ; il punit, he might punish, fyc* 

ite, long in benite, blessed ; gite, the seat of a hare ; vite, quick ; and in the second 
person of the perfect of verbs ; as ; vousfites, you did ; vous vites, you saw, 4-c. 

itre, long in epitre, epistle ; huitre, oyster ; regitre, register; but if regisrte is spelt 
with s, the i is short. 

iVE,longin the adjective feminine, formed from the masculine in if ; as, tardive, 
late ; captive, captive ; juive, jewess, 4-c. 

ivre, long in vivres, victuals ; short in vivre, to live ; un livre, a book, 4*c. 



O, always short when it begins a word ; as, occasion, occasion ; odeur, odour, 4-c. 
except ds, bone ; dser, to dare ; osier, osier ; bter, to take away ; btage, hostage ; as, 
likewise in hole, host, landlord ; though we say hotel, hotel, and hotellerie, an inn. 

obe, long in globe, globe ; and lobe, lobe ; in every other instance obe is short ; as> 
robe, robe, gown ; il d'erbbe, he robs. 

OLE, long in the verb rbder, to ramble ; je rode, I ramble ; short in all other instances; 
as, mode, mode, fashion ; antipode, antipodes ; peribde, period, 4-c. 



* Formerly written fist, dist, punist, with a mute s, now supplied by a circumflex. 



OF SYLLABLES. 



27 



oge, always short ; as, elbge, praise ; horlbge, clock ; on derdge, they derogate. 

01, diphthong, doubtful at the end of a word ; as, mot, me ; rot, king; foi, faith ; 
emploi, employment ; short at the beginning; as, mbisson, harvest ; mbitie, half. 

oie, lon^- ; as,jbie, joy ; sbie, silk ; quHl vbie, let him see, <frc. 

orient, termination of the third person plural of the imperfect of verbs, is long; as, 
ils avoient, they had ; ils chantbient, they sang, 4-c. whilst the third person singular of 
the same tense spelt oit, is short ; as, il avbit, he had ; il chantbit, he sang, 4-c. 

oin. See HI. and VII. General Rules. 

oir, oike, the fnst is doubtful; as, epsbir, hope ; devoir, duty, 4-c. the second long; 
as, bbire, to drink ; glbire, glory ; membire, memory, 4-c. 

ois, alwavs long ; whether it be a diphthong, as in fbis, time ; bourgeois, burgess ; 
Danbis, Dane ; Suedbis, Swede, 4-c. or whether it be used instead of the compound 
vowel ai, as fetbis, or fetdis, I was ; un Frangbis, or un Frangdis, a Frenchman, 4c 

oise, oisse, oitre, oivre, all long ; as, framboise, raspberry ; pardisse, parish ; 
cloitre, cloister ; pbivre, pepper, $c. 

ott, short ; as, il bbit, he drinks ; excepts crbit, he grows ; and when it is used 
instead of the compound vowel ai ; as, il pardit, or ilpard.it, it appears. 

ole, always short ; as, obble, obole ; idble, idol ; boussble, sea compass ; except 
drole, facetious ; pole, pole ; geole, jail ; mole, mole, pier ; role, a list, the part of an 
.actor ; contrdle, control ; enjbler, to wheedle, to decoy ; enrbler, to enlist, and 
the tenses derived from these verbs ; il contrdle, he controls ; ils enrblent, they 
enlist, 4-c. 

om, on. See III. and VII. General Rules. 

ome, one, long ; as, atbme, atom ; axibme, axiom ; phantdme, phantom; trbne, throne, 
4-c. except Rome, Rome ; and the words in which the consonant is doubled, which 
follow the general rule ; as, sbmme, sum ; pbmme, apple ; consbnne, consonant. 

ons, always long ; as, nous aimons, we love ; fbnds, land, funds ; maisbns, houses ; 
pbnts, bridges, 4-c. See IV. General Rule. 

or, always short ; as, castor, beaver ; butbr, bittern, a blockhead ; tncor, yet, still ; 
effort, effort ; but when, or is followed by s, it is long ; as, Mrs, out ; albrs, then ; le 
corps, the body ; les tresbrs, the treasures. See IV. General Rule. 

ore, long ; as, aurbre, aurora ; je deplore, I lament ; but observe that the penulti- 
ma of the verbs which have only one r, and which is long in present of the indica- 
tive ; as, je decbre, I decorate ; il s'evapbre, it evaporates ; becomes short if the 
termination is masculine ; as, decbrer, to decorate ; evapbre, evaporated, and that it 
remains long in tenses in which the r is doubled ; as, il s'evapbrrait, it would evap- 
orate, 4-c. 

os, osE,long ; as, bs, bone ; prbpos, discourse ; apropos, timely; dose, dose ; chose, 
thing ; il bse, he dares. See IV. and V. General Rules. 

osse, long ; as, grbsse, big ; fosse, pit ; il endbsse, he endorses ; even when the final 
is masculine ; as, grbsseur, bigness ; grbssesse, pregnancy ; fosse, ditch. 

ot, long in impbt, tax ; tot, soon ; depot, deposit ; entrepot, store-house ; supbt, a 
subservient agent ; rot, roast meat ; prevbt, provost, sheriff.* 

ote, long in hbte, host, landlord ; cote, coast, rib ; maltbte, exaction of taxes ; fbte, 
I take away ; likewise when the final is masculine ; as, cote, side ; bte, taken away .f 

otre. There are only three words of this termination, viz. apbtre, apostle ; notre, 
our, ours ; votrc, your, yours. 

As to the first, it is always long ; but the two others are doubtful ; not that their 
measure is arbitrary, for it depends upon the place which "they keep in a sentence. 

Notre and Vutre are short, when like an article they are prefixed to a substantive, 
i. e. when used for our, your ; and long when they themselves are preceded by an 
article, and used as pronouns, i. e. when used for ours, yours ; so we say, je suis v5- 
tre serviteur, I am your servant ; et moi le vbtre, I am yours. C y est-ld voire opinion, 
mais la nbtre est que, fyc. that is your opinion, but ours is that, 6fC. Les nbtres . sont 
excellents, mais les vbtres ne valent rien, ours are excellent, but yours are good for 
nothing. 

If the final be mute, as in this sentence, je suis le vbtre, after which my ear expects 
nothing more, then the voice wants a support, and not finding it in the final re, it takes 
it in the penultima vo ; but in this other, je suis vbtre serviteur, where after voire I 



* Formerly spelt with an s mute, impost, rost, suppost, to show that the syllable is 
long, that is now supplied by a circumflex. 



t Formerly spelt hoste, coste, and when a syllable was to be pronounced short, the 
consonant was doubled ; as, hotte, dorser ; cotte, petticoat, dfc. 



28 



PRONUNCIATION 



necessarily expect a substantive, between which and voire there can be no intermis- 
sion, this substantive is destined to support my voice, and I pass quickly over votre. 

Perhaps there is not in the french prosody a principle more extensive than this. A 
doubtful syllable which is made short in the body of the sentence, is made long if it 
comes at the end. 

Sometimes even in conversation as well as in oratory, a long syllable becomes 
short, by the transposition of the word ; for we say, un homme honnete, a civil man ; un 
homme brave, a brave or courageous man ; but we say, un honnete homme, an honest 
man ; un brave homme, a well-behaved man ; these instances have already been men- 
tioned, (see E,) but can so important rules be recalled too often 1 

oudre, oue, long ; as, poudre, powder ; moicdre, to grind ; resoitdre, to resolve, <$-c* 
boue, dirt ; joue, cheek ; il loiie, he praises, fyc. but when ouis followed by a mascu- 
line, instead of a feminine termination, it is short; as, poudre, powdered ; moulu, 
ground ; roue, broken on the wheel ; hue, praised, fyc. 

ouille, long in rouille, rust ; il deroiiille, he gets off the rust ; il embrouille, he em- 
broils ; il debrouille, he unravels ; but ouil is short when it is followed by a mascu- 
line syllable ; as, brouillon, bad paper or writing ; brouille, daubed ; rouille, rusty, SfC. 

oule, long in moiile, mould, muscle ; lafoiile, the crowd ; il Joule, he presses, he 
tramples ; il roule, he rolls ; il s'ecroule, it falls down ; il se soule, he gets drunk. 

oure, ourre, the first is doubtful ; as, bravoure, bravery ; the second is long ; as, 
de la bourre, cow hair ; quHl coiirre, let him run ; but if ou, instead of being followed' 
by a mute, is followed by a masculine syllable, then ou is short, notwithstanding the 
general rule under arre ; as, courrier, messenger; bourrade, thrust, <$-c. as like- 
wise in the future and in the conditional tenses of verbs spelt with rr, in which the 
two rr are sounded separately ; as, je mourrai, I shall die ; je courrai, I shall run ; je 
mourrais, SfC. 

ouse, long; as, epouse, bride ; qu'elle couse, let her sew. See V. General Rule. 

ousse, long in je pousse, I push ; short in all other instances ; as, je tousse, I cough ; 
coussin, cushion ; poiissin, young chick, fyc. 

out, long in aoiit, august ; cout, cost ; gout, taste ; mout, must, new wine. 

oute, long in absoute, absolution ; joute, tilt : croute, crust ; votcte, vault ; il coute, 
it costs ; il broiite, it grazes; je goitte, I taste ; fajoicte, I add ; but ou is generally 
short, when the syllable which follows it is masculine ; as, ajouter, to add ; coute, 

COSt, SfC. 

outre, long in poiitre, beam ; and in coutre, coulter, ploughshare ; short in all 
other instances ; as, loutre, otter ; outre, en outre, besides, $c. 



u 

uche, long ; as, biiche, a log of wood ; ruche, hive ; on debiiche, they dislodge, 
but u is short, if the final is masculine ; as, bucher, pile ; debuche, dislodged, SfC. 

ue', diphthong, found only in the word ecuelle porringer, is short. 

ue, dissyllable, always long ; as, vice, sight ; tortue, tortoise, SfC See I. Gen. Rule. 

uge, doubtful when the final is mute ; as, deluge, deluge ; refuge, refuge ; short, 
when the final is masculine ; as, juger, to judge ; refugier, to take refuge, SfC 

ui, diphthong, short before a masculine syllable ; as, buisson, bush; cuisine, kitchen ; 
rtiisseau, rivulet, fyc. 

uie, long ; as, pluie, rain ; truie, sow ; ils'ennuie, he grows tired. See I. Gen. Rule. 
ule, long in the verb briiler, to burn ; je brule, I burn ; tu brides, thou burnest, SfC 
um, un. See III. and VII. General Rules. 

umes, long; as, nous fumes, we were ; nous pumes, we could ; nous recumes, we re- 
ceived ; nous apercumes, we perceived, fyc. 

ure, always long ; as, augure, omen ; verdure, grass ; par jure, perjurer, perjury ; on 
assure, they assure ; ilsfiirent, they were ; but u is short, if the final is masculine ; as, 
augurer, to conjecture ; parjurer, to perjure ; assure, assured. 

use, always long ; as, muse, muse ; excuse, excuse ; riise, cunning ; see V. General 
Rule ; we also say, ruse, cunning ; but in the other words in which the final is mas- 
culine, u is short ; as, excuser, to excuse ; refuse, refused, SfC. 

uce, usse, the first of these two terminations is confined to nouns, and always 
short ; a.s,puce, flea ; astuce, craft, 4-c. the second is confined to verbs, and is always 
long; as, je fiisse, I were ; je pusse, I might; ils fussent, they might be ; except 
Prusse, Prussia ; and Russe, a Russian ; substantives in which usse is short. 

ut, short in all substantives ; as, le but, the end ; un debut, a beginning ; except in 
fitt, a cask ; un affut, a gun carriage ; short in the third person of the perfect tense of 



OF EQUIVOCAL WORDS. 



29 



the indicative of verbs ; as, ilflut, he was ; il vecut, he lived ; long in the same per- 
son and tense in the subjunctive ; as, ilflut, he might be ; il vecut, he might live, fyc. 

ute, utes, short in all substantives ; brute, brute, rough, SfC. except flute, flute ; al- 
ways long in verbs ; vous flutes, you were ; vous lutes, you read, vous reputes, you 
received ; vous apercutes, you perceived, §c. 

It is not perhaps unnecessary to inform such readers as might be discouraged by the 
multiplicity, or by the prolixity of these rules, that it is not requisite, in order to speak, 
french with propriety, that they should be observed with a scrupulous nicety, which 
few persons, if any,. do, but he certainly speaks best who deviates the least from 
them. 



HOMONYMOUS, OR EQUIVOCAL WORDS. 

THE MEANING OF WHICH IS DETERMINED BY THE ACCENT. 



Acre, tart. 
Alene, awl. 
Battler, to gape. 
Bat, pack-saddle. 
Bdteleur, mountebank. 
Bedute, beauty. 
Bete, beast. 
Boite, box. 
Bond, rebound. 
Chair, flesh. 
Chdsse, shrine. 
Clair, clear. 

Corps, body. 

Cote, rib. 
Cote, coast. 

Cuire, to boil or roast. 
Falte, summit. 
Fete, feast. 
Falx, burthen. 
Le fole, the liver. 
Une fols, once. 
Foret, forest. 
Je goute, I taste. 
Grave, grave. 

Hale, scorching of the sun. 
Hote, host, landlord. 
Jeune, fast. 
Lacs, noose. 
Vdme, the soul. 

Legs, legacy. 

Lis, lily. 
Maitre, master. 
Male, male. 
Masse, stock. 
Mat, mast. 
Matin, mastiff. 
Mots, month. 
Mur, ripe. 
II rtest, it is not. 
II nait, it springs. 
Pate, paste. 
Paume, palm. 

3* 



Acre, acre. 
Haleine, breath. 
Bailler, to give. 
11 bat, he beats. 
Batelier waterman. 
Bbtte, booted. 
BUte, beet. 

11 boite, he goes lame. 
Bon, good. 
Cher, dear. 
Chdsse, hunting. 
Clerc, clerk. 
Cor, hunting-horn. 
Cor, corn. 

Cotte, petticoat. 

Cuir, leather. 

Faite, done. 

Fait, done, fact. 

La fox, faith. 

Un foutt, a rod, a whip. 

Foret, gimblet. 

Une goutte, a drop. 

Je grave, 1 engrave. 

Halle, market. 

Hotte, scuttle. 

Jeune, young. 

Lac, lake. 

Lame, blade. 

Laid, ugly. 

Lait, milk. 

Lit, bed. 

Mettre, to put. 

Malle, mail, trunk, 

Masse, mass, mace. 

Ma, my. 

Matin* morning. 

Moi, me. 

Mur, wall. 

Net, clean. 

Pdtte, paw. 
Pomme, apple. 



PRONUNCIATION, ETC. 



Pecheur, fisherman. 
Pecker t to fish. 
Pecker, peach-tree. 
Pene, bolt. 
Rot, roast meat. 
Sols, sieve. 
Scene, scene. 

La Scene, the communion 

Sur, sure, sure, certain. 

Tdcke, task. 

Tdcker, to endeavour. 

Tete, head. 

Vers, verse. 

Vers, towards. 

Verre, glass. 



Pecheur, sinner. 
Pecker, to sin. 
Pccke, sin. 
Peine, punishment, 
i?6£, belch. 
Sd, her. 

Sdine, wholesome. 

Seine, the Seine. 
<Sur, sour. 
Tdcke, stain. 
Tdcker, to stain. 
Tete, teat. 

; Fer, worm. 
' Vtrd, green. 



GENERAL PRINCIPLES 



OF 



THE FRENCH LANGUAGE 

WITH PARTICULAR RULES AND EXCEPTIONS.* 



The French Language, like most of the living languages, 
is composed of NINE different sorts of words, commonly 
known by the names of 



NOUN, 

ARTICLE, 

ADJECTIVE, 



PRONOUN, 

VERB, 

ADVERB, 



PREPOSITION, 

CONJUNCTION, 

INTERJECTION.! 



CHAPTER. I. 
NOUN. 

Every word is called a noun which names a substance or 
leing, either real, as man, house, tree, fyc. ; or ideal, as god, 
heaven, glory, SfC. 

Nouns are distinguished into proper and common. 



* Some of the general rales contained in the introduction are repeated in the syntax, 
because they are necessary to connect the different rales together. But each part must 
be considered as a distinct work, designed for different persons. The introduction is 
intended for children, and for persons who, not being accustomed to the study of lan- 
guages, could not at once comprehend such a multiplicity of rules. The syntax, 
which includes all the rules which are necessary to a perfect knowledge of the lan- 
guage, is intended for the same persons, after they are sufficiently grounded in the 
introductory rules, and for persons of a comprehensive mind, who have no need of 
an introduction. 

t Ever since the art of speaking has been reduced into a system, grammarians, and 
the philosophers who have written on the subject, have differed upon the parts, or dif- 
ferent species of words of which it is composed. Some argue that there are but two, 
the noun and the verb, and assert that the rest are only corruptions or abbreviations 
of these ; others- add the article and the conjunction ; others the pronoun, and 
so on to the interjection. It does not belong to a production of this kind to inquire 
into these different opinions ; and I have adopted the most prevalent, because it has 
appeared to me, that whether they be words, or only abbreviations of words, there are 
nine sorts, which are subject to different rules. 

Those who are desirous to see ingenious dissertations on this subject, may read 
Harris's Hermes, andTooKE's Diversions of Purley. 



32 NOUN. 

A noun proper, or proper name, is that which belongs only 
to one being ; as, John, the Thames, London, Paris, England, 
France, fyc* 

A noun common, or common name, is that which belongs to 
all beings of the same kind ; as, man, woman, river, city, coun- 
try, tyc. 

N. B. In this class are comprised the abstract names of 
virtue, vice, pleasure, pain, love, desire, fear, hatred, glory , honor, 
and such like. 

Two things are to be considered in nouns ; the gender and 
the number. 

The gender is the distinction between the sexes. 
The french language admits of two genders only, the mascu- 
line and the feminine. 



* Though proper names should remain invariably the same in all languages, yet the 
French have given to the names of countries, and of some capital cities, names or ter- 
minations adopted to their own language ; so, Asia is called Asie ; Africa, Afrique ; 
America, Amerique ; England, Angleterre ; Scotland, Ecosse ; London, Londres ; Spain, 
Espagne ; Mexico, Mexique ; Jamaica, Jamdique ; Italy, Italie ; Tuscany, Toscagne ; 
Sardinia, Sardaigne ; Sicily, Sidle ; Leghorn, Livourne ; Mantua, Mantoue ; Geneva, 
Geneve; Genoa, Genes; Switzerland, Suisse ; Germany, A llemagne ; Hungary, Hongrie ; 
Bohemia, Boheme ; Vienna, Vienne ; Poland, Pologne ; Warsaw, Varsovie ; Cracow, 
Cracovie ; Russia, Russie ; Prussia, Prusse ; Sweden, Suede, 4-c. for which no rule 
can be given ; but as they are single words, and are generally found in the dictiona- 
ries, when they have been seen once or twice, they are easily retained. 

The names of persons, derived from the living languages, do not vary ; so, Fox, 
Pitt, White, Brown, are in french, Fox, Pitt, White, Brown, as in english ; but the 
names of persons, derived from the greek and latin languages, generally change their 
terminations, agreeably to the following rules. 

Names ending in al, ar, or, is, os, on, do not vary ; as, Annibal, Adherbal, Ccesar, 
Hamilcar, Mentor, Nestor, Adonis, Sesostris, Minos, Atropos, Damon, Solon, $c. nor the 
names of men ending in a ; as, Numa, Nerva, Sylla, Agrippa, Dolabella ; except Seneca, 
which is Seneque. 

The finals as and es, are changed into e : as, Pythagoras, Pythagore ; Mecenas, 
Mecene ; Eneas, Enee ; Socrates, Socrate ; Demosthenes, Demosthene ; SfC. ; except 
Agesilas, Leonidas, Pelopidas, Phidias, Pythias, Pausanias, Epaminondas, Evdamidas, 
Calchas, Olympias, Ceres, Xerxes, Pericles, and a few others not often met with. 

The finals us and ius, are also generally changed into e ; as, Augustus, Auguste ; 
Titus, Tite; Tiberius, Tibere ; Julius Caesar, Jule Cesar; Tacitus, Tacite ; Virgilius, 
Virgile ; Horati us, Horace ; Eolus, Eole ; CEdipus, Oedipe ; except Appius, Baccus, 
Brutus, Cincinnatus, Claudius, Ci'cesus, Cyrus, Darius, Dccius, Dentaius, G alius, Ger- 
manicus, Janus, Junius, Manlius, Marius, Menenius, Metellus, M.utius, Papirius, Plau- 
tius, Pompilius, Porus, Pyrrhus, Remus, Romulus, Silvius, Valerius, Venus, Tullus, and 
a few others not frequently met with ; and Coriolanus, Tarquinius, which lose the 
finals us, ius ; thus, Coriolan, Tarquin. 

Nouns in chus, change chus into que ; as, Telemachus, Telcmaque ; Lysimachus, 
Lysimaque ; Gracchus, Graque ; except Antiochus. 

Nouns ending in o take the addition of n; as, Cato, Caton ; Cicero, Ciceron ; Sci- 
pio, Scipion ; Plato, Platon ; Apollo, Apollon ; Pluto, Pluton ; Juno, Junon ; Dido, 
Didon ; except Calipso Clio, Clotho, Sappho, Echo. 

The final der is changed into dre ; as, Alexander, Alexandre ; Lysander, Jjysandre. 

Names of women ending in a, change a into e mute ; as, Julia, Julie ; Amelia, Ame- 
lie ; Agrippina, Agrippine ; Cleopatra, Cleopatre ; Minerva, Minerve, SfC. 

Those ending in e, e, retain their termination ; as, Cybele, Melpomene, Circe, Cloe y 
Daphne, Hebe, Thisbe ; except the following, in which the French do not sound the 
final e ; Ariadne, Euridice, Penelope. 



NOUN. 



33 



By masculine is meant the male being ; by feminine, the fe- 
male. 

The names of beings whose sex is unknown, and of those 
inanimate beings, commonly called things, which are of the 
neuter gender in english, are either masculine, ox feminine, in 
french, according to custom. 

The difference of gender is generally known by the termina- 
tion of the noun. 

Nouns of following Terminations Nouns of the following Terminations are 
are masculine. feminine. 

A. un Opera, an opera ; un Sopha, a 

sopha ; 

du Quinquina, peruvian bark. 

AT. sounded a ; as, 

un Plat, a dish ; un Combat, a battle. 

B. du Plomb, lead ; le Radoub, refitting; 
un Rumb, a point of the compass. 

C. le Bee, the beak ; du Sue, gravy ; 
du Pore, pork; du Tabac, tobacco. 

D. du Lard, bacon ; du Fard, paint ; 
un Regard, a look ; le Hasard, 

chance. 

E preceded by any letter but T ; 

du Ble, corn ; un Pre, a meadow ; 
un Conge, a holiday ; du Caffe, cof- 
fee. 

Except l'Amitie, friendship ; 

la Moitie, the half ; la Pitie, pity. 
ER sounded e ; as, 

un Baiser, a kiss; le Danger, danger; 

un Metier, a trade ; un Panier, a 
basket. 
AI. sounded e ; as, 

un Geai, a jay; un Balai, a broom ; 

un Essai, an essay; un Delai, a delay. 
AIT, ET sounded e ; as, 

un Fait, a fact; un Portrait, a picture 

un Sujet, a subject ; un Object, an 
object. 

F. un Nerf, a sinew ; un CEuf, an egg; 
du Boeuf, beef; du Suif, tallow. 

Except une Clef, a key ; la Soif, 
thirst ; 

la Nef, the body of a church. 

G. le Rang, rank; le Sang, the blood ; 
un Etang, a pond ; un hareng, a her- 
ring. 

I. un Etui, a case; un Defi, a challenge; 
un Lit, a bed : un Habit, a coat. 
Except une Fourmi, an ant; la 
Nuit, night. 
01. un Envoi, an invoice ; un Convoi, 
a" convoy ; 
un Emploi, an employ ; le Doigt, the 
finger. 

Except la Foi, faith ; la Loi, law. 
L. un Mai, an evil; le Travail, labour ; 
un Hotel, an hotel; le Sommeil, 
sleep. 

M. le Nom, the name ; le Parfum, per- 
fume ; 



TE, la Liberte, liberty ; <la Sante, health ; 
la Beaute, beauty ; la Bonte, goodness ; 
la Majeste, majesty ; la Divinite, Mi- 
nify. 

Except l'Ete, summer ; un Comte, a county, 
le Cote, sz'ie ; un Pate, a pie ; un Co- 
mite, a committee ; un Traite, a treaty, a 
treatise ; du The, some tea. 



34 



NOUN. 



N 



AN. 



Masculine Terminations. 

duThim, thyme. 

Except la Faim, hunger. 
All the terminations in N which are 
not ION or son sq/Y, i. e. sounded 
zon, viz. 
du Bran, bran; du Saffran, saffron. 
ANT, ENT sounded an ; as, 

un Diamant, a diamond; un Present, 

a present ; 
le Vent, if wind. Except une Dent, 
a tooth. 

AIN. du Pain, iread ; un Bain, a bath. 
Except la Main, the hand. 

IN, EIN sounded ain ; as, 

du Vin, same wine ; le Matin, morn- 
ing ; 

le Sein, the bosom ; le Teint, the 
complexion. 

Except la Fin, the end. 
OIN. le Soin, care ; un Coin, a corner. 
I EN. un Lien, a tie ; du Bien, wealth. 
CON. un Balcon, a balcony ; un Flacon, a 

decanter. 

LON. un Violon, a violin ; un Papillon, a 
butterfly. 

SSON.un Buisson, a bush; du Voisson fish. 

Except la Moisson, the harvest ; 

la Boisson, drink ; une Chanson, 
a song. 

CON. un Hamecon, a fish-hook ; un Lima- 
con, a snail. 
Except une Lecon , a lesson ; une 
Rancon, aransom ; la Facon, the 
making. 

TON. un Baton, a stick ; un Bouton, a 
button. 

un Echo, an echo ; un Duo, a duet, 
sounded O ; as, 

un Mot, a word ; un Complot, a plot ; 
on Pot, a pot ; un Gigot, a leg of 
mutton. 
EAU sounded O ; as, 

un Couteau, a knife ; un Chapeau, 
a hat. 

Except l'Eau, water ; la Peau, the 
skin. 

un Cap, a cape; un Cep, a stock of 
a vine ; 

un Champ, afield ; le Galop, the 
gallop. 

un Cinq", a five ; un Coq, a cock. 
All the terminations in it, which are 
not EUR. 

l'Air, the air ; un Eclair, a flash of 
lightning. 

Except la Chair, the flesh. 
le Fer, iron ; l'Enfer, hell. Except 
la Mer, the sea ; une Cuiller, a 
spoon. 

le Desir, desire ; le Plaisir, pleasure. 
le Soir, evening ; un Mouchoir, a 

handkerchief. 
l'Or, gold ; un Tresor, a treasure. 



O. 
OT 



P. 



Q. 
R. 

AIR. 

ER. 

IR. 
OIR. 

OR. 



Feminine Terminations. 



ION. une Action, an action ; une Caution, 

a bail ; unc Portion, a portion. 
Except un Bastion, a bastion ; un Crayon, 
a pencil ; un Rayon, a ray ; un Pion, a 
man at drafts ; le Tallion, retaliation ; un 
Scorpion, a scorpion; le Septentrion, the 
north ; le Croupion, the rump of fowls and 
birds ; un Million, a million. 



SON 

^QTyr' une Maison, a house ; la Raison, 
' reason ; la Saison, the season. 
Except jUi Gazon, turf ; du Poison, poi- 
son ; un Tison, a firebrand ; un Oison, a 
gosling l'Horizon, the horizon ; le Blason, 
heraldry. 



EUR. la Peur, fear ; la Chaleur, heat ; 
une Fleur, a flower ; la Couleur, 

colour. 

Except le Bonheur, Zwcfc, happiness ; le 
Malheur, misfortune ; PHonneur, honour ; 
le Deshonneur, dishonour; le Cceur, ffte 
heart; l'Equateur, the equator ; PInterieur, 
the interior ; l'Exterieur, the exterior. 

Except also the nouns in e UR, which be- 
long only to persons ; as, un Auteur, an 
author ; un Docteur, a doctor ; <$-c. 



NOUN. 



35 



Masculine Terminations. 

ORD. ORT, sounded or ; as, le Bord, the 
horder ; 

un Fort, a fort ; le Sort, fate. 
Except la Mort, death. 
OUR. le Jour, the day ; un Tour, a trick. 
Except la Cour, the court) the 
yard ; une Tour, a tower. 
S. le Bras, the arm; le Repos, repose ; 
du Bois, wood ; le Succes, success ; 
Except une Brebis, a sheep ; une 
Souris, a mouse ; une Vis, a 
screw ; Fois, time. 
T. un Plat, a dish ; un Lit, a bed ; 

le Vent, the wind ; un Accident, an 
accident. 

Except une Part, a share; une 
Foret, a forest ; la Nuit, night ; 
une Dot, a dowery ; une Dent, 
a tooth ; la Mort, death. 
U. un Ecu, a crown ; un Fetu, a straw. 

Exceptld, Vertu, virtue; une Tribu, 
a tribe ; de la Glu, bird-lime. 
UT. sounded u ; as, 

le But, the aim ; le Scorbut, the 
scurvy. 

EU. le Feu, fire ; un Lieu, a place. 

OU. un Trou, a hole ; un Chou, a cabbage. 

X. un Faix, a burthen; le Choise, choice. 

Except la Paix, peace ; la Voix, 
the voice ; une Noix, nut ; de la 
Poix, pitch ; une Croix, a cross ; 
la Toux, cough ; une Perdrix, a 
partridge ; une Faux, a scythe. 



Feminine Terminations. 

See also page 40, how some nouns femi- 
nine are formed from the masculine, in the 
same manner, as adjectives, by changing the 
termination. 



From the above rules it appears that nouns ending with a consonant, or any vowel 
but e mute, are generally masculine ; but there is a great number of nouns endingin e 
mute, part of which are masculine, and part feminine, which can not be reduced to 
such certain rules.* 



GENERAL RULES. 

All names of countries ending with e mute are feminine ; as, 
la France, France; la Hollande, Holland; 1'Angleierre, England; la Suisse, 
Switzerland, <5fC. except le Mexique, Mexico. Those ending with any other 
vowel, as, Canada, Chili, Perou, SfC. or with a consonant, as, Denmark, Portugal, 
Japon, SfC. are masculine. 
Ee All common names ending in e mute, precededby another vowel, are feminine, 
le as, une Epee, a sword ; une Armee, an army ; une Guinee, a guinea ; la Vie, 
Ve life ; la Rue, the street ; la Vue, the sight ; la Joie, joy ; la Joue, the cheek ; 
la Pluie, rain, §c 

Except le Foie, the liver ; un Incendie, a conflagration ; le Genie, genius ; le 
Messie, the messiah ; un Parapluie, an umbrella; un Trophee, a trophy; un 
Pigmee, a pigmy ; le Caducee, caduceus ; l'Hymenee, hymen; un Mausolee, a 
mausoleum ; and nouns ending in gue and que, which are subject to a particu- 
lar rule. See GUE, QUE. 



* The discrimination between the genders of nouns is a difficulty which the learner 
finds hard to overcome. In order to attain it, he must consider the greatest number of 
wordsof each termination which are either masculine or feminine, as a general rule, 
and retain as many words of the exception as he can. Besides this, when he reads a 
french author, he must pay particular attention to the article which precedes each 
noun, and consider it as its necessary appendage. By these means the difficulty 
will insensibly lessen, and his mistakes will be but few. Not to overload his memo- 
ry with amultiplicity of words, I have omitted in the list of nouns given as exceptions, 
those which are either obsolete or little used. 



36 



NOUN. 



PARTICULAR RULES. 

Masculine Terminations. 



Feminine Terminations. 



BE. There are Thirty-four nouns ending in be, Eleven of 

which are masculine ; the most commonly used are 
un Adverb, an adverb ; un Proverbe, a proverb ; 

un Cube, a cube ; un Tube, a tube ; 

un Globe, a globe ; un Teorbe, a theorb ; 

un Orb, an orb ; un Verbe, a verb ; 

CE. There are Three hundred nouns ending in ce, Thirty- 
four of which are masculine ; the most commonly used 
are, 

un Indice, an indication ; 
le Negoce, traffic ; 
un Office, an office ; 
un Orifice, an orifice ; 
le Pouce , the thumb ; 
un Precipice, a precipice ; 
le Prejudice, injury ; 
un Sacrifice, a sacrifice ; 
un Service, a service ; 
le Silence, silence ; 
le Solstice, the solstice; 
le Supplice, punishment ; 
le Vice, vice. 



Twenty-three other 
nouns ending in be 
are feminine. 



un Appendice, an appendix ; 
un Armistice, an armistice ; 
un Artifice, an artifice ; 
un Auspice, an auspice ; 
un Benefice, a benefit ; 
un Calice, a chalice ; 
le Caprice, caprice ; 
un Cilice, a hair-cloth ; 
le Commerce, commerce ; 
le Delice, delight ; 
un Edifice, an edifice ; 
un Exercice, an exercise ; 
le Frontispice, frontispiece ; 



Two hundred and six- 
ty-six othernouns end- 
ing in ce are femi' 
nine. 



There are Two hundred nouns ending in de, Twenty- 
seven of which are masculine ; the most commonly 
used are, 

le Monde, the world ; 
un Periode, a period of time ; 
un Remede, a remedy ; 
un Spheroide, a spheroid ; 
un Subside, a subsidy ; 
le Suicide, suicide ; 
le Vide, Vacuum. 



DE. 



un Camarade, a companion ; 
un Code, a code ; 
le Coude, the elbow ; 
un Fluide, a fluid ; 
un Grade, a degree ; 
un Guide, a guide ; 
un Mode, a mode ; 



FE. There are Twenty nouns ending in fe, phe, Eight of 

PHE. which are masculine ; they are, 

un Golfe, a gulf ; un Parafe, a paraph ; 

un Greffe, a court register ; un Paragraphe, a paragraph ; 

un Hieroglyphe, a hieroglyph; un Triomphe, a triumph; 

un Logogriphe, a riddle ; un Telegraphe, a telegraph. 



Onl hundred and sev 
enty-three other nouns 
ending in de are femi- 
nine. 



Twelve other nouns 
ending in fe, phe are 
feminine. 



GE. 



There are Eighty nouns ending in ge, Thirty-two of 
which are masculine ; the most commonly used are, 



un ange, an angel ; 

un archange, an archangel ; 

le Change, the 'change ; 

un Cierge, a taper ; 

un College, a college ; 

un Cortege, a retinue; 

un Deluge, the deluge ; 

un Echange, an exchange ; 

un Eloge, an encomium ; 

du Liege, cork; 

du Linge, linen ; 

le Manege, riding school, 

un Melange, a mixture ; 



un Mensonge, a lie ; 
un Prestige, a prestige ; 
un Privilege, a privilege ; 
un Prodige, a prodigy ; 
un Rechange, a change ; 
un Refuge, a refuge ; 
un Sacrilege, a sacrilege ; 
un Siege, a seat, a siege ; 
un :ige, an ape ; 
un Songe, a dream ; 
un Subterfuge, a subterfuge ; 
un Vertige, a giddiness ; 
un Vestige, a track. 



AGE. All nouns ending in age are masculine ; as, 



un Avantage, an advantage ; 
un Badinage, a joke ; 
un Bocage, a grove ;\ 
le Courage, courage ; 
du Fromage, some cheese ; 
le Jardinage, gardening ; 
un Hermitage, an hermitage ; 



le Manage, marriage ; 
le Menage, housekeeping ; 
un Orage, a storm ; 
un Ouvrage, a work ; 
le Rivage, the shore ; 
le Veuvage, widowhood ; 
le Visage, the face, 4-c. 



. Forty-eight other 
nouns ending in ge 
are feminine. 



Except une Cage, a 
cage ; une Image, an 
image ; la Nage, swim- 
ming ; une Page, a 
page ; la Plage, a po- 
etical word for sea; la 
Rage, rage. 



NOUN. 



37 



Masculine Terminations. 

OTJE. There are Thirty-Jive nouns ending in gue, Twelve 
of which are masculine ; the most commonly used 
are, 



Feminine Terminations. 



un Dogue, a bull-dog ; 
un Orgue, an organ; 
le Prologue, the prologue. 

CHE. There are One hundred nouns ending in che, Twelve 
of which are masculine ; the most commonly used 



un Catalogue, a catalogue ; 
le Decalogue, the decalogue 
un Dialogue, 



Twenty-three other 
nouns ending in gus 
are feminine* 



un Acrostiche, an acrostic ; 
le Coche, the stage coach ; 
un Dimanche, a Sunday ; 
un Hemistiche, an hemistich ; 
un Manche, a handle ;* 



un Panache, a plume ; 

du Ponche, punch ; 

un Preche, a dissenting sermon; 

un Reproche, a reproach; 

un Tournebroche, a jack. 



Eighty-eight other 
nouns ending in che 
are feminine. 

^une Manche, a sleeve. 



LE. There are Four hundred nouns ending in le, One hun- 
dred of which are masculine ; the most commonly used 
are, 



une Pendule, a clock. 
une Poele, a fryingpan. 



Three hundred other 
nouns ending in le are 
feminine* 



un Aigle, an eagle ; 
un Angle, an angle ; 
un Article, an article ; 
un Asile, an asylum ; 
un Buffle, a buffalo ; 
un Cable, a cable ; 
le Capitole, the capitol ; 
le Centuple, the centuple ; 
un Cercle, a circle ; 
du Chevre-feuille, woodbine 
le Chile, the chyle ; 
le Comble, the top ; 
un Concile, a council ; 
le Controle, the control ; 
un Couvercle, a lid ; 
le Crepuscle, the twilight ; 
un Crible, a sieve; 
un Crocodile, a crocodile ; 
le Diable, the devil ; 
un Disciple, a diseiple ; 
un Domicile , a domicil ; 
le Double, the double ; 
un Drole, a fellow ; 
V Evangile, the gospel ; 
un Exemple, an example ; 
du Girofle, clove-spice ; 
le Hale, the burning sun ; 
un Intervalle, an interval ; 
un Li belle, a libel; 
un Maroufle, a scoundrel ; 
un Merle, a blackbird ; 
le Meuble, the furniture ; 
un Mille, a mile ; 
un Miracle, a miracle ; 
un Modele, a model; 
un Monopole, a monopoly ; 
un Moule, a mould ; 
le Mufle, the muzzle; 
un Muscle, a muscle ; 

ME. There are One hundred and seventy-two nouns ending in me, Forty-three of 
which axe feminine ; the most commonly used are, 

l'Ame, the soul; 
une Arme, an arm ; 
la Brume, the fog ; 
la Cime, the top ; 
laCoutume, the custom} 
la Creme, cream ; 
la Dime, the tithe ; 
V Ecume, the foam; 



un Obstacle, an obstacle ; 
un Ongle, a nail ; 
un Oracle, an oracle ; 
le Parallele, the parallel ; 
un Pecule, spare money ; 

un Pendule, a pendulum ; 

le Peuple, the people; 

un Poele, a stove ; 

le Pole, the pole ; 

un Portefeuille, a portfolio ; 

le Preambule, the preamble ; 

un Quadrangle, a quadrangle 

le Quadrille, quadril ; 

le Quadruple, quadruple ; 

un Receptacle, a receptacle ; 

un Role, a roll, the part of an 

le Sable, the sand ; [actor ; 

un Saule, a willow ; 

le Scandale, scandal; 

le Scrupule, the scruple ; 

du Seigle, rye ; 

un Siecle, an age ; 

le Symbole, the symbol ; 

le Souffle, the breath ; 

un Spectacle, a spectacle ; 

le Stile, the style ; 

le Tabernacle, the tabernacle ; 

un Temple, a temple ; 

le Trefle, trefoil ; 

le Tremble, the asp tree ; 

le Triple, the treble ; 

le Trouble, disturbance ; 

un Vaudeville, a ballad; 

un Vestibule, a vestibule ; 

un Vignoble, a vineyard ; 

un Violoncelle, a violoncello ; 

un Voile, a veil; 

le Zele, the zeal. 



une Voile, a sail 



une Enclume, an anvil ; 
une Enigme, an enigma ;~ 
une Epigramme, an epigram ; 

V E s cnm e , fencing ; 

V Estime, esteem ; 
une Ferme, a farm; 
la Flamme, the flame; 
la Forme, the form; 



38 NOUN. 



Masculine Terminations. 



One hundred and twen 
ty-nine other nouns end- 
ing in me are masculine 



la Gamme, the ga?nut ; 

la Gomme, gum ; 

la Gourme, the strangles ; 

un Idiome, an idiom ; 

la Lame, the blade ; 

une Larme, a tear ; 

la Legitime, a child's portion ; 

une Lime, a file ; 

une Maxime, a ?naxim ; 

la Paume, the palm, tennis ; 



Feminine Terminations. 

une Plate-forme, a platform ; 

une Plume, a pen ; 

une Pomme, an apple ; 

la Prime, the prime ; 

une Rame, an oar, a ream ; 

la Reforme, the reform ; 

la Rime, the rhyme ; 

une Somme, a sum ; 

la Trame, the thread ; 

une Victime, a victim. 



NE. There are Two hundred and forty-six nouns in ne, 
Thirty of which are masculine ; the most commonly 
used are, 

le J cune, fasting ; 
un Organ e, an organ ; 
le Patrimoine, patrimony ; 
un Peigne, a comb ; 
le Pene, the bolt of a lock ; 
un Pentagone, a pentagon ; 
un Phenomene, a phenomenon; 
un Polygone, a polygon ; 
un Prone, a sermon ; 
le Regne, the reign ; 
un Renne, a rein deer ; 
un Signe, a sign ; 
un Trone, a throne. 



de PAntimoine, antimony ; 
un Aune, an elder ; 
V Automne, autumn ; 
le Capricorne, the Capricorn 
un Cerne, a magical ring ; 
un Chene, an oak ; 
tin Cygne, a swan ; 
un Cone, a cone ; 
le Crane, the scull ; 
un Decagone, a decagon ; 
un Domaine, a domain ; 
un Faune, a faun; 
du Filigrane, filligram ; 
un Frene, an ash-tree ; 



Two hundred and 
sixteen other nouns 
ending in ne are femi- 
nine. 



PE. There are Sixty-eight nouns ending in pe, Twelve of 

which are masculine ; the most commonly used are, 
un Groupe, a group ; un Participe, a participle ; 

un Horoscope, a horoscope ; un Polype, a polypus ; 
du Jaspe, jasper ; un Principe, a principle ; 

un Microscope, a microscope ; un Telescope, a telescope. 

QUE. There are One hundred nouns ending in que, Thirty- 
four of which are masculine ; the most commonly 
used are, 

le Panegirique, panegyric ; 
le Pentateuque, the pentateuch; 
un Portiqtie, a portico ; 
le Risque, the risk ; 
un Soliloque, a soliloquy ; 
un Specirique, a specific ; 
le Tropique, the tropick ; 
le Viatique, viaticum ; 
le Zodiaque, the zodiac. 



un Asterisque, an asterisk 
un Cantique, a canticle ; 
un Casque, a cask ; 
un Caustique, a caustic ; 
un Cirque, a circus ; 
un Disque, a disk ; 
un Emetique, an emetic ; 
tin Obelisque, an obelisk ; 
un Manque, a want ; 
Tin Masque, a mask ; 

RE. There are Six hundred and thirty-two nouns ending in 
re, Two hundred and twenty-three of which are mascu- 
line ; the most commonly used are, 

un Adultere, an adultery ; le Eien-etre, happy state ; 

V Albatre, alabaster ; un Cadavre, a corpse ; 

V Anibre, amber ; latre ; un Cadre, a frame ; 
un Amphitheatre, an amphithe- le Calibre, the bore ; 
un Anniversaire, an anniversa- du Camphre, camphire ; 
un Autre, a den; Iry ; un Cancre, a crab ; 

un Arbre, a tree ; "un Candelabre, a chandelier ; 

un Artere, an artery ; le Caractere, the character ; 

un Astre, a star ; nn Cedre, a cedar ; 

V Atmosphere, the atmosphere; le Certre, the centre ; 
un Atre, an hearth ; un Chancre, a shanker ; 
un Auditoire, an auditory ; du Chanvre, hemp 



Fifty-six other noung 
ending in pe are femi- 
nine. 



Sixty-six other nouns 
ending in que are fem- 
inine. 



un Augure, an omen ; 
du Rabeure, buttermilk ; 
du Beun e, butter ; 
un Rarometre, a barometer ; 



un Chapitre, a chapter ; 
un Chef-d'oeuvre, a master- 
un Chiffre, a figure ; [.piece ; 
du Cidre, cider ; 



NOUN. 



39 



RE. 



Masculine Terminations. 



Feminine Terminations. 



un Cilindre, a cylinder ; 
un Cirneterre, a cimeter ; 
un Chnetiere,a church yard ; 
un Cintre, an arch ; 
un Olystere, a glister; 
un Coffre, a chest ; [ry ; 

un Commentaire, a commenta- 
un Concombre, a cucumber ; 
un Cong-re, a conger ; 
un Corollaire, a carollary ; 
le Conlraire, the contrary ; 
un Corsaire, a corsair ; 
du Cuivre, copper ; 
le Decombre, the rubbish ; 
le Delire, delirium ; 
un Depositaire, a depositary ; 
3e Derriere, the back part ; 
un Desastre, a disaster ; 
le Desordre, the disorder ; 
le Diametre, the diameter ; 
un Dictionnaire, a dictionary ; 
le Directoire, the directory ; 
un Douaire, a dowery ; 
un Empire, an empire ; 
un Emplatre, a plaster ; 
V Equilibre, the equilibrium ; 
un Etre, a being ; {booh ; 
un Exemplaire, a copy of a 
un Fiacre, a hackney coach ; 
un Fifre, a fife ; 
un Formulaire, a formulary ; 
du Genie vu - e, juniper ; 
le Genre, the gender ; 
du Gingembre, ginger ; 
un Gouffre, a gulf; 
un Havre, a harbour ; 
P Hemisphere, the hemisphere; 
un Hetre, a beech tree ; 
un Inventaire, an inventory ; 
un Interrogatoire, an interrog- 
atory ; 
de l'l voire, ivory ; 
un Laboratoire, a laboratory ; 
du Lierre, ivy ; 
un Lieyre, a hare ; 
un Livre, a book ;* 
le Lustre, the lustre ; 
un Luminaire, a luminary ; 
le Mai°:re, the lean ; 
du Marbre, marble ; 
le Martyre, martyrdom ; 
un Massacre, <z massacre ; 
un Membre, a limb ; 
un Memoire, a memorial ;t 
du Mercure, mercury ; 
.un Meteore, a meteor ; 
un Meurtre, a murder ; 
le Ministere, the ministry ; 
un Mystere, a mystery ; 
un Monastere, a monastery ; 



un Monstre, a monster ; 

un Murmure, a murmur ; 

du Nacre, mother of pearl ; 

un Navii-e, a ship ; 

le Necessaire, the necessaries 

du Nitre, nitre ; 

un Nombre, a number ; 

un Observatoire, an observato- 
ry ; "\ - 

un Opprobre, a reproach ; 

un Orchestre, an orchestre ; 

un Ordinaire, an ordinary ; 

un Ordre, an order ; 

le Parterre, the pit of a play- 

un Patre, a herdsman ; [house } 

un Phare, a lighthouse ; 

du Phosphore, phosphorus ; 

du Piatre, plaster ; 

du Poivre, pepper ; 

un Pore, a pore ; [ries ; 

Les Preliminaires, prelimina- 

un Presbitere, a parsonage 
house ; 

un Promontoire, a promontory ; 
un Pupitre, a desk ; 
le Purgatoire, purgatory ; 
un Refectoire, an eatingroom ; 
un Registre, a register ; 
un Repaire, a den ; 
un Reverbere, a reflector ; 
un Sabre, a sabre ; 
le Sacre, the coronation ; 
du Salpetre, saltpetre ; 
un Sanctuaire, a sanctuary ; 
un Sceptre, a sceptre ; 
un Secretaire, a secretary ; 
un Seminaire, a seminary ; 
un Sepulcre, a sepulchre ; 
un Sequestre,a sequestration; 
•le So mm aire, the compendium ; 
du SoufTre, brimstone ; 
du Sucre, sugar ; 
un Tertre, a hillock ; 
un Territoire, a territory ; 
un Theatre, a theatre ; 
un Thermometre, « thermome 
un Timbre, « cZoc/t bell ; Iter, 
un Tire-bourre, screw ofaram- 
un Titre, a title ; [rod 
le Tonnerre, thunder ; 
un Ulcere, an ulcer ; 
le Ventre, belly ; 
un Vertebre, a vertebra ; 
un Verre, a glass ; 
un Vesicatoire, a blister ; 
du Vinaigre, vinegar ; 
un Vocabulaire, a vocabulary ; 
un Vomitoire, a ^ot;u# ; 
le Vulgaire, the vulgar ; 
un Vulneraire, a vulnerary. 



Four hundred and 
nine other nouns end' 
ingin re are feminine. 



*un Livre, a pound. 



tla Memoire, memory. 



SE. There are Two hundred and ^/fy nouns ending in 
se, Fourteen of which are masculine ; the most com- 
monly used are, 

F Aise, ease; un Narcisse, a narcissus ; 

un Carosse, a coach ; le Parnasse, parnassus ; 

un Colosse, a colossus ; un Thyrse, a thyrsis ; 

un Diocese, a diocess ; un Trapeze, a trapezium ; 

le Malaise, uneasiness ; un Vase, a vessel. 



I Two hundred and 
thirty-six other nouns 
ending in se are fe~ 
j minine. 



40 



NOUN. 



Masculine Terminations. 

TE. There are Three hundred and seventy-Jive nouns in 
TE, Thirty-nine of which are masculine ; the most 
commonly used are, 

un Geste, a gesture ; 
un Gite, the seat of a hare ; 
un Inceste, an incest ; 
un Insecte, an insect ; 
un Labyrinthe, a labyrinth; 
un Manifeste, a manifesto ; 
un Mecompte, a misreckoning ; 
le Merite, merit ; 
un Myrte, a myrtle ; 
V Omoplate, the omoplate 
un Pacte, a pact ; 

un Poste, a station ; 

un Precepte, a precept ; 
un Pretexte, a pretext ; 
le Reste, the rest ; 
un Squelette, a skeleton ; 
le Texte, the text ; 
un Tirebotte, a bootjack ; 
le Tumulte, tumult, 



Feminine Terminations. 



un Acte, an act ; 
un Antidote, an antidote ; 
un Arbuste, a shrub ; 
un Aromate, an aromatic ; 
un Automate, an automaton ; 
un Buste, a bust ; 
un Cassetete, a puzzlebrain ; 
un Ceste, a cestus ; 
un Compte, an account ; 
un Conte, a tale ; 
un Contraste, a contrast ; 
le Culte, the worship ; 
un Decompte, a discount ; 
le Demerite, demerit ; 
le Doute, the doubt ; 
un Entr'acte, an interlude ; 
V Escompte, the discount ; 
le Faite, the top ; 
le Faste, pomp ; 

VE. 



Three hundred and 
thirty-six other nouns 
ending in te ate fe- 
minine. 

la Poste, post office. 



There are Forty-two nouns ending in ve, Four of 
which are masculine. 
un Conclave, a conclave ; un Glaive, a sword ; 
un Fleuve, a river ; un Reve, a dream. 



Thirty- eight other 
nouns ending in ve 
are feminine. 



XE. 



There are Ten nouns ending in xe, Five of which 
are masculine. 



un Paradoxe, a paradox ; 
le Sexe, the Sex ; 



| The other Five nouns 
ending in xe are femi- 
I nine. 



un Axe, an axis ; 
Y Equinoxe, the equinox ; 
le Luxe, luxury ; 

ZE. There are Two nouns ending in ze, One of which is 

masculine, viz. du Bronze, bronze. One fern. viz. de la Gkze, gauze. 
Some nouns feminine are formed in the same manner as the feminine of adjectives, 
by adding e mute to the masculine, or by changing the termination ; these are ; 

1st. The nouns denoting trade, profession, business, <$-c. as, 



un Acteur, 
un Berger, 
un Boucher, 
un Eoulanger, 
un Comedien, 
un Cuisinier, 
un Epicier, 
un Fermier, 
un Marchand, 
un Ouvrier, &c. 

2d. The followin 
un Amant, 
un Ami, 
un Chat, 
un Chien, 
un Chanteur, 
un Citoyen 
un Compagnon 
un Cousin, 
un Danseur, 
un Diable, 
un Ecolier, 
un Epoux, 
un Hentier, 
un Heros, 
un Hote, 
un Ivrogne, 
un .Tuif, 
un Lapin, 
un Levrier, 
un Lion, 



an actor ; 
a shepherd ; 
a butcher ; 
a baker ; 
a player ; 
a cook ; 
a grocer ; 
a farmer ; 
a dealer ; 
a workman ; 

g, as being the most 
a lover; 
a male friend ; 
a male cat ; 
a dog ; 

a male singer ; 

a citizen ; 

a male companion ; 

a male cousin ; 

a male dancer ; 

a male devil ; 

a male scholar ; 

a husband ; 

an heir ; 

a hero ; 

a landlord ; 

a drunken man ; 

a jew ; 

a buck rabbit ; 
a greyhound ; 
a lion ; 



une Actrice, 
une Bergere, 
une Bouchere, 
une Boulangere, 
une Comedienne, 
une Cuisiniere, 
une Epiciere, 
une Fermiere, 
une Marchande, 
une Ouvriere, 

frequently used ; 
une Amante, 
une Amie, 
une Chatte, 
une Chienne, 
une Chanteuse, 
une Citoyenne, 
une Compagne, 
une Cousine, 
une Danseuse, 
une Diablesse, 
une Ecoliere, 
une Epouse, 
une Heritiere, 
une Heroine, 
une Hotesse, 
une Ivrognesse, 
une Juive, 
une Lapine, 
une Levrette, 
une Lionne, 



an actress ; 
a shepherdess, 
a female butcher, 
a female baker, 
a female player, 
a female cook, 
a female grocer 
a female farmer, 
a female dealer, 
a workwoman. 



she who loves, 
a female friend, 
a female cat. 
a bitch. 

a female singer, 
a citizeness. 
a female companion, 
cs female cousin, 
a female dancer, 
a female devil, 
a female scholar, 
a wife, 
an heiress, 
a heroine. 



a drunken woman , 
a jew ess. 
a doe rabbit, 
a greyhound hitch, 
a lioness. 



NOUN. 



41 



un Loup, 
le Maitre, 
le Marie, 
un Menteur, 
un Orphelin, 
un Parent, 
un Paysan, 
un Prisonnier, 
un Sultan, 
un Tigre, 
un Tuteur, 
un Veuf, 
un Voisin, 



a male wolf ; 
the master ; 
the bridegroom ; 
a man who lies ; 
a male orphan ; 
a male relation ; 
a countryman ; 
a male prisoner ; 
a sultan ; 
a tyger ; 

a male guardian ; 

a widower ; 

a male neighbour ; 



une Louve, 
la Maitresse, 
la Mariee, 
une Menteuse, 
une Orpheline, 
une Parente, 
une Paysanne, 
une Prisonniere, 
une Sultane, 
une Tigresse, 
une Tutrice, 
une Veuve, 
une Voisine, 



a female wolf, 
the mistress, 
the bride, 
a woman who lies, 
a female orphan, 
a female relation, 
a -countrywoman, 
a female prisoner, 
a sultana, 
a tygress. 
a female guardian, 
a widow. 

a female neighbour. 



There are two numbers, the singular and the plural. 

A noun is singular, when we speak of one being only ; as, 
a book, un lime ; a house, une maison ; a tree, un arbre ; a 
ship, un navire, <SfC. 

A noun is plural when we speak of more than one. 

General Rule. The plural is generally formed in french, 
as in english, by adding s to the singular ; as, des livres, 
books ; des maisons, houses, SfC. 

1st Exception. Nouns ending in s, x, or 2, in the singular, 
are the same in the plural ; as, mon fils, my son ; mes jils, 
my sons ; une brebis, a sheep ; des brebis, sheep ; une voix, 
a voice ; des voix, voices ; une noix, a nut ; des noix, nuts ; 
le nez, the nose ; les nez, the noses. 

2d Exception. Nouns ending in eau and au, take x instead 
of s, for the sign of the plural number ; as, chapeau, hat ; cha- 
peaux, hats. 

3d Exception. Nouns ending in eu and ou, take x instead 
of s for the sign of the plural number ; as, lieu, place ; lieux, 
places ; feu, fire ; jeux, fires ; chou, cabbage ; choux, cab- 
bages. 

Except clou, nail; bijou, jewel ; fou> mad ; filou, sharper; 
trou, hole ; sou, penny ; matou, ramcat ; which require s for 
their plural, as clous, nails, fyc. 

4th Exception. Nouns ending in al, ail, change I or il into 
ux for the plural ; as, mal, evil ; maux, evils ; cheval, horse ; 
chevaux, horses ; canal, canal ; canaux, canals ; travail* la- 
bour ; travaux, labours. 

Except bal, ball ; detail, detail ; epouvantail, bugbear : evan- 
tail, fan ; gouvernail, rudder ; portail, portal ; serail, seraglio ; 
the plural of which is formed by adding s to the singular ; 
bals, balls ; details, details ; epouvantails, bugbears ; eventails, 



* The word travail is also spelled with an s in the plural, when it means traves or 
written summaries in administrations. 

4* 



42 



ARTICLE. 



fans ; gouvernails, rudders ; portails, portals ; serails, serag- 
lios ; and betail, cattle, the plural of which is bestiaux. 

Aieul, grandfather, used in the plural, and signifying ances- 
tors, becomes aieux ; but if it means grandfathers, it is regu- 
lar, and is spelled a'ieuls. 

Aiguail, or aigail, morning dew, has no plural. 

The plural of ail, garlick, is aulx ; but it is seldom used. 
Gousses d'ail, cloves of garlic, is preferred. In botany, it is 
formed regularly ails. 

Bercail, sheepfold, has no plural. 

Ciel, when it signifies sky or heaven, changes into cieux ; 
but, when used to express the sky in painting, the top of a 
bedstead, or when it is metaphorically used for climate, it 
remains regular. 

OEil, eye, changes into yeux, when it means the eyes of ani- 
mated or personified beings. In any other instance it is reg- 
ular ; as, 

(Eils-de-bceuf, ovals, (in architecture,) bulVs eyes. 

OEils-de-chat, cat's eyes, (precious stone,) &c. 

Yet we say, yeux du pain, du fromage, &c. for the holes of 
bread, of cheese ; and yeux de la soupe, du bouillon ; for the 
dross of fat in soup or broth. 

Universel, universal, (a logic term,) makes universaux. 



CHAPTER II. 
ARTICLE. 

The same noun admitting different meanings, as for example ; 
the bread, the wine ; some bread, some wine; this bread, 
that wine ; my bread, thy, bread, his bread ; my wine, <5fc. it 
was necessary to adopt some signs which would fix its proper 
meaning. 

These signs, called article, are various, and generally 
receive their appellation from the office which they perform 
in the sentence. They are called in this treatise, 

definite, that which defines the object ; as, the bread, the 
wine. 

i * 



ARTICLE. 43 

partitive, that which denotes a portion of the object; as, 
some bread, some wine. 

numeral, that which numbers the objects ; as, a or one 
shilling* 

demonstrative, that which points out the object ; as, this 
or that bread, these or those clothes. 

possessive, that which expresses the possession of the 
object ; as, my bread, thy bread, his bread, her bread, our 
bread, your bread, their bread; my wine, thy ivine, his 
wine, fyc* 

The signs called article, are declined in french as follows : 



SINGULAR. PLURAL. 







2 


% 


3 




Masculine. Faminine. Masc. and Fern. 


DEFINIT. 


THE ; 


LE, 


LA, 


LES. 


Of, from 


THE ; 


DU, 


de LA, 


DES. 


To, at 


THE; 


AU, 


a LA, 


AUX. 


PARTIT. 


SOME : 


DU, 


de LA, 


DES. 


NUMERAL 


A, AN; 


UN, 


UNE, 




DEMONS. 


THIS, THAT: 


CE, 


CETTE,* 






THESE, THOSE;. . . 




CES, 


POSSESS. 


MY; 


MON, 


MA,* 


MES. 




THY ; 


TON. 


TA 


TES. 




HIS, HER, ITS ; 


SON. 


SA„ 


SES. 




OUR ; 


NOTRE, 


NOTRE, 


NOS. 




YO UR ; 


VOTRE, 


VOTRE, 


VOS. 




THEIR ; 


LEUR, 


LEUR, 


LEURS. 



* To these might be added all th3 numbers, and the words chaque, each ; tout, 
every ; plusieurs, several ; which exclude the article from the noun, and have the 
same property as the words generally known by the name of article, 



I 



44 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



CHAP. HI. 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



GENERAL RULES. 
1. The signs called article are never used without a noun 
after them, and they must be of Sesame gender and number as 
that noun ; this, in grammar, is called argeement of the article 
with the noun : ex. 



SINGULAR. 



1 

Masculine. 

The le Pere. 
of The | du Pere. 
to The § clu Pere. 

A •' un Pere. 



Some du 



Pain. 



ThtM Ce Pain ' 
M i 

My > mTVere. 

of My ~&de mon Pere. 
to My ,3 a mon Pete. 

Thy f ton Pain. 

His a son Pain. 

Her ^ son Pain. 

Our " notre Pain. 

Your voire Pain. 

Their leur Pain. 



Feminine. 

the | la Mere. 
of the o"e Za Mere. 
to the ^ a Za Mere. 

a ' wne. Mere. 

some a"e Za Viande. 



this ) 
that j 

my 

of my ! 
to my ; 

thy 

his 

her 

our 

your 

their 



cette Viande. 

; ma Mere 
? a*e ma Mere. 
! a ma Mere. 

! fa Viande. 
^ sa Viande. 
sa Viande. 

notre Viande. 

voire Viande. 

leur Viande. 



Masculine and Feminine, 

the les Enfants. 

of the g des Enfants. 

to the ^ aux Enfants. 



these | 
those ) 

my 2 
of my 
to my 

thy 
his 

her i 
our 
your 
their 



des Habits. 

ces Habits. 

> mes Enfants. 
|j de mes Enfants. 
^ a mes Enfants. 
s 

tes Habits. 
ses Habits. 
2 ses Habits. 
nos Habits. 
vos Habits. 
leurs Habits. 



EXERCISE. 

The father, the mother, the children. The good nature of the father, 
* pere, t mere, enfants. t * bon naturelm. 

the tenderness of the mother, the civility of the children. Speak to the 
* tendresse f. * civilite f. Parlez 

father, tell it to the mother, give it to the children. The brother, the 

dites-le donnez-le frere, 

sister, the cousins. The complaisance of the brother, the modesty 
soeur, cousins. * complaisance f. * modestief. 

of the sister, the kindness of the cousins. The horse, the cow, the 

* bonte f. cheval, vache, 

dogs. The bridle of the horse, the horns of the cow, the ears of the 
chiens. * bride f. cornes oreilles 



* Eefore you prefix an article to a noun, never omit to consider, 

1 Whether the noun which follows the article is masculine or feminine ; 

2 Whether it is singular or plural. 

If the noun which follows the articie is masc. sing, use the signs contained in the 

1 column. 

If the noun which follows the article is fern. sing, use the signs contained in the 

2 column. 

If the noun which follows the article is plural, whether masculine ox feminine, use 
the signs contained in the 3 column. 

t Observe also, that if the noun is singular in english, it must be singular in french, 
and if it is plural in english, it must be made plural in french, agreeably to the rules, 
page 41. 



ARTICLES AND NOUN. 



45 



dogs. Bring it to the horse, give it to the cow, leave it to the dogs. 

Apportez-le donnez-ie laissez-le 

The nose, the mouth, the eyes. The tip of the nose, the size of 
* nez, m. bouche, f. yeux. * bout m. grandeur f. 

the mouth, the beauty of the eyes. A glass, a spoon, a knife, a 

beaute f. * verre, m. cuiller, f. couteau, m, 

fork. Some wine, some beer, some glasses. This dinner, this 
fourchette. f. * vin, m. biere, f. *, diner, m. 

table, these dishes. That cheese, that bottle, those apples. My arm, 
table, f. plats. fromage, m. bouteille, f. pommes. t bras, m. 

my hand, my feet. His hat, his shirt, his stockings. Her apron, 

* main, f. * pieds. t II chapeau, m. * II chemise, f. *ll bas. * II tablier, m. 

her II gown, her llscissars. Our garden, our house, our fields. Your 

* robe, f. * ciseaux. jardin,m. maison, f. champs. 

umbrella, your watch, your gloves. Their coach, their servants. 
parapluie, m. montre, f. gants. carosse, m. domestiques. 

2. If the noun which follows the article is singular, and be- 
gins with a vowel, or h mute^ whether it is masculine or fem- 
inine, use 



V i le, la; as The 

de V § du, de la ; of The |^ 

a V ^ au, a la ; to The *^ 

cet ^ ce ; This or That |r. 

mon ma ; My §■ 

ton ta ; Thy 

son sa : His or Her 



V 

de V 



Enfant. m. V 
Enfant, de V 



a V 


Enfant. 


kV 


cet 


Enfani. 


celte 


mon 


Enfant. 


mon 


ion 


Enfant. 


ton 


son 


Enfant. 


son 



Histoire. f. 
Histoire. 
stoire. 
istoire. 
Histoire. 
Histoire. 
Histoire. 



Hi 



EXERCISE. 

The air. The water. My slate. Her writing. His school. 
2 air. eau. 2 ardoise. 2 ecriture. 2 II ecole. 



Her 



* See note * page 44. 

t Observe that two of the signs called article cannot be used before the same 
noun ; so we say le bras, the arm ; la main, the hand, la dame, the lady, uke dame, 
a lady ; MAdame, my lady, madam, Mrs. ; des dames, some ladies ; UEsdames, ladies ; 
tjne demoiselle, a young lady ; des demoiselles, some young ladies ; MEsdemoiselles, 
ladies ; but we do not say, le mon bras ; la ma main ; la. madame ; une madame ; 
des mesdames ; la mademoiselle ; une mademoiselle ; des mademoiselles ; because 
each of these signs fixing the proper meaning of the noun, renders another sign su- 
perfluous . 

N. B. From this rule must be excepted the 'words monsieur and messieurs, 
which, though they are compounded of the noun sieur, and of the article mon, mes, 
will in some instances admit of the other articles ; for we say ; le monsieur, the gen- 
tleman ; un monsieur, a gentlemen; ce monsieur, this gentlemen, &c. les messi- 
eurs, the gentlemen ; ces messieurs, these gentlemen ; nos messieurs, our gentlemen. 
These few singularities will be learnt by custom. 

t The h must is marked in these exercises with an apostrophe, this mark before it. 

II I have frequently been asked if, having only one word to express both his and 
her, we do not often commit mistakes in the use of that word. No, we never do ; 
because this sign always refers to a noun mentioned before, the gender of ^vhich we 
know ; So, when I say, Mon frere a perdu son couteau, My brother has lost his knife ; 
I know by Son that it is the knife belonging to my brother. Ma sceur a perdu son cov. 
teau, My sister has lost her knife ; I know by this Son that it is the knife belonging to 
my sister. But suppose a gentleman and a lady sat at table, and both let their knives 
fall ; and a person said to a servant, Eamassez son couteau, meaning the knife of the 
lady, which knife would the servant pick up ? Indeed he would not know, but"a 
Frenchman would not express himself thus ; He would say ; Ramassez le couteau de 
monsieur, Pick up the gentleman's knife ; or Ramassez le couteau de madame, Pick up 
the lady's knife, by which all ambiguity would be avoided. 



46 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



school. This mm. That child. This tree. That bird. The ornament 

2 'homme, enfant. arbre. oiseau. ornement 

of the mind. The history of the year. The wing of the bird. He 

esprit. 2 'histoire annee. aile II 

sacrificed his honour to the interest of the state. She has lost the 
sacrifia 'nbnneur interet etat. Elle a perdu 

affection of her- friend. Her obstinacy is the cause of his inconstancy, 
affection 2 ami. opiniatrete est 1 cause f. inconstance. 

3. The signs called article must be repeated before every 
noun in french agreeably to the gender and number of each 
noun, though the nouns are in the same sentence, and though 
the article is not repeated in english ; as, 

The father, mother and children are (gone out,) 

Le pure, la mere et les enfants sont sortis, i. e. the farther, the &c. 

Some bread, meat, money and clothes. 

Du pain, de la viande, de Z'argent et des habits, i. e. some bread, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

Bring thread and butter3 ; the tea and coffee3 ; some milk or 
Apportez 1 painm. et beurre ; m. them. ca^e ; m. 1 lait m. ou 
cream3 ; a cup and saucer3; a knife and fork3 ; some bread and 
creme ; f. tasse f. soucoupe ; f. couteau m. fourchette ; f. 

cheeseo; the dishes and plates3; the beans and bacon3 ; the pepper 
from age ; m!i platt assiettet ; feve t lard ; m. poivre m. 

and salt3. My brother and sister3 are (gone out.) His father and 

sel. m. 1 frere sceur sont sortis. — * 

mother3 are dead. She has lost her friends and relations.!, 
sont morts. Elle a perdu ami t parent, t 



PARTICULAR RULES. 

PROPER NAMES. 

4, The names of persons and places, i.e. of cities, towns, 

villages, fyc- are used in french as in english, without any of 
the signs called article ; as, 

I like Voltaire, J'aime Voltaire, (a) 

London. Londres. 

I speak of Voltaire, Je parle de Voltaire, 

0/ London. de Londres. 

I. prefer it to Voltaire, Je le prefere a Voltaire, 

to London. a Londres.(B) 

Observe that de and a which are prefixed to Voltaire, Lon- 



* A dash, this mark(— ), under a word shews that the word is not expressed in 
french agreeably to rules which will be seen in the last part of this work, 
t See note t page 44. 

(a) Some names of persons, derived from common names, such as, le Brun, Le Blanc y 
Le Noir, La Porte, La Grange, La Fontaine, <$-c. are always preceded by an article, 
but that article is considered as a syllable of the name, and never varies. 

(B) Except le Caire, Cairo ; le Catelet, la Chapelle, la Charite, la Ferte, la Fleche, 
le Havre, la Havanne, Havannah ; la Haye, the Hague ; la Hogue, le Mars, la Mccque, 
Mecca ; le Plessis, le Pur, le Quenoi, la Rochelle, which require the definite article, 
for we say. Je viens du Havre. I come from Havre. Je vais a la Rochelle- I am 
going to Rochelle. 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



47 



dres, are not articles ; they are prepositions used to unite the 
noun to the verb. 

EXERCISE. 

I have read almost all the! works of Voltaire and 4Rousseau, 

J' ai lu presque toutes ceuvres <j 
I am reading now tkel adventures of Telemachus the son of Ulysses 
Je — lis a present aventures Telemaque — fils Ulysse 

and Penelope. Have you ever been in London 1 Yes, I have, i.e., been. 
$ Penelope. Avez-vous jamais ete a Oui, j ? y ai ete 

Is it as large as Paris 1 London is much larger than Paris. 
Est-il aussi grand que est beaucoup plus grand que 

London is tkel largest city in Europe. Have you seen Naples % No; 

plus grande ville f. de V vu Non ; 

I have been at Florence and Rome, but I have not55 been at Naples, 
ai ete a $ maisjen'ai pas ete 

5. But the names of countries and provinces, which are 
used without an article in english, require in french one of the 
signs le, la, les ; du, de la, des, au, a la, aux, agreeably to the 
gender and number of the noun ; as, 

I like Portugal, J'aime le Portugal, 

France, la France, 

England. V Angleterre. 

I speak of Portugal, Je parle du Portugal, 

of France, &c. de la France, &c> 
I prefer it to Portugal, Je le prefere au Portugal, 

to France, &c. , a la France, &e. (c) 

EXERCISE. 

Italy5 is the garden <?/Europe5. France5 is also a fine country j 
Sltalie* est jardin m. 2Europe.t France f. est aussi beau pays ; m. 

it lies between Spain,5 Italy, Switzerland, Germany,5 Holland,5 
elle (estsituee) entre Espagne, 5 Suisse, f, 5 Allemagne, Hollande, f. 

and England.5 Spain, with all the gold of Mexico5 and Peru, 5 is 

et Angleterre, 5 avec tout 2 or Mexique m. $ Perou, m. n'est 

not55 so rich as France. Brazil5 belongs to Portugal, Mexico to 

pas si riche que 5 Bresil m. appartient 5 m. 5 

Spain, Canada5 to England, Martinique5 and Guadeloupe5 to France. 

6 Canada m. 5 Martinique f. Guadeloupe f. . 5 



I) The preposition must be repeated before every noun in french, in the same way 
as the article. 

t When the monosyllables le, de, ne, se, je, vie, te, la, que, are followed by a vowel 
or a h mute, the vowel, e, a, is left out, and an apostrophe, this mark ('), put in its 
place. 

(c) Some names of countries, which take their names from their capital city, such 
as, Alger, Algiers ; Avignon, Genes, Genoa ; Geneve Geneva ; Florence, Maroc, Moroc- 
co ; Naples, Orange, Tunis, Tripoli, Venise ; or from the name of some person; as St. 
Domingue, St. Domingo ; St. Vincent, $c. do not require the article. 

* The figures at the top of the words or under the words, indicate the number of 
the paragraph where the rule concerning that word is to be found ; if you do not 
perfectly recollect the rule, never omit to look for it, and read it every time with the 
example. 

t The parts of the world follow the same rules as the names of countries. 



48 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



6.^0bserve however that the names of countries are used 
without the article in french, when they come after verbs de- 
noting dwelling or movement, such as to be in, to live in, to go 
to, to conic from. In these instances, in, to are expressed by 
en, and from by de ; as, 



He is in 

in 

He is going to 
to 

He comes from 
from 



France. 

England. 

France. 

England. 

France. 

England. 



II est 
II va 
II vient 



en France. 

en Angleterre. 

en France. 

en Angleterre. 

de France. 

(V Angleterre. (d) 



exercise. 

* My brother lives in Switzerland and my sister in France. I intend 
demeure 6 6 J' (ai dessein) 

to go to France and Italy, (as soon) as the war is over. I come 
d' alter 6 6 <5> aussitot que 1 guerre/, sera finie. Je viens 

from Portugal, and I (am going) to Holland and England. Have you 
6 Je vais 6 6 ^ Avez-vous 

ever been to Spain % No; I (am going) to Turkey and to Greece, 
jamais ete 6 Non • Je vais 6 Turquie 6 Grece, 

whence I {will pass) into Spain. I would rather go to Italy, 
(d' ou) Je passerai en 6 J' aimerais mieux aller 6 



THE ; LE, LA, LES, DU, de LA, DES ; AU, a LA, AUX. 

7. All common names used in a general sense ; as, bread is 
good ; or in & particular sense ; as, the bread which I eat is 
good ; must have before them one of the definite signs le, la, 
les ; du, de la, des ; au, a la, aux, agreeably to the gender and 
number of the noun ; ex. 



(d) From- this rule must be excepted the countries discovered by the navigators, and 
some counties in Asia and Africa, which are never used without the article. The 
most essential to be known, on account of their being frequented by the Europeans, 
are 

1' Archipel, Archipelago, la Floride, Florida. le Mississipi Mississipi. 
les Bar bades, Barbadoes. la Grenade, Grenada. le Mogol, Mogul Emp. 
le Bengal, Bengal. la Guadeloupe, Guadaloupe. les Moluques, Moluccalsles, 
la Bermude, Bermuda, la Guienne, Guiana, la Nigritie, [terre, Nigritia, 
le Bresil, Brasil. 1' Inde, India. la Nouvelle Angle- NewEngland. 

1' Indostan, Indostan. le Paraguai, Paraguay, 
la Jamaique, Jamaica, le Peloponese, Peloponesus. 
le Japan, Japan. la Pensylvania, Pensylvania. 

le Levant, The Levant, le Perou, Peru, 
la Louisiane, Louisiana, les Philippines, The Phil. Isles, 
la Cochinchine, Cochinchina. la Martinique, Martinique, la Sonde Sunda. 
le Congo, Congo. le Mexique, Mexico. la Virginie, Virginia. 

For we say ; P ai ete au Canada. 1 have been in Canada. Je vais a la Jamaique, 
au Mexique, au Perou, <$-c. I am going to Jamaica, to Mexico, to Peru, <SfC. Je viens- 
du Japon, de la Chine, des Jndes, $c. I come from Japan, Chine, the Indies, SfC. 
t} See note $ page 47. 



la Califournie, California, 
le Canada, Canada, 
la Caroline, Carolina, 
le Chili, Chili, 
la Chine, China, 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



49 



General sense, no article in english before the noun. 
I like bread, J'aime le pain,* 

meat, la viande, 

money, V argent, 

clothes. les habits. 

I speak of bread, Je parle du pain, 

of meat, of clothes. de la viande, des habits. 
I prefer it to bread, to meat, &c. Je le prefere au pain, a la vi&ide, &c. 

Particular sense, in english the before the noun, 
I like the bread ^ J'aime le pain 

the meat ( j haye> la viand. - que ^ 




the money i * lia,vc * Z' a 
clothes J les ha 

I speak of the bread and meat I have. Je parle du pain et de la viande que j'ai. 
I prefer it to the bread and meat he has. Je le prefere au pain et a la viande qu'il a. 

EXERCISE. 

GoldT and silver7 are precious, but 7iron and steel7 are more useful. 
2or 2argent sont precieux, mais fer m. 2acier sont plus utiles. 

The gold and silver of Peru are purerl8 than that of Europe.5 

3 5 Perou m. sont (plus pars) que celui 2 

Modesty7 and virtue are preferable to beauty and 7riches. I prefer 
modestie f. 3vertu f. sont preferables Tbeaute f. ^richesse. Je prefere 
the modesty and virtue of your sister, to tJie beauty and 3riches of your 

1 3 de l 4 

cousin. Peace7 and plenty7 make men7 happy. (Let us preserve) the 
cousine. paix f. 2abondance rendent hommes heureux. conservous 1 
peace and plenty which we enjoy. Patience and perseverance are 
3 dont nous jouissons. 7patience f. /perseverance f. sont 

necessary to happiness. I admire the patience and perseverance of 
necessairer 2bonheur. m. J' admire 1 f. 3 f. 

your brother. Pride7and vanity are generally the cause of the mis- 
2orgueil 7vanite f. ordinairement 1 cause f. 1 mal- 

fortunes of men. (Let us go) into the garden, to see if the fruit is 
heur Thomme. allons dans 1 .jardin rn. — voir si 1 fruit m. est. 

ripe. Which fruit do you51 like best 1 Gooseberries or strawber- 
mur Quel — aimez - vous le mieux? 7groseille ouTfraise? 

ries 1 I do not55 like gooseberries ; I like cherries and peaches. 

Je— n' aime pas 7 J' aime 7cerise 7peehe. 

Children generally like fruit. I prefer milk7 and cheese to fruit, 
enfant 7 en general aiment 7 Je prefere lait m. 7fromage m. 7 

OF expressed by DE ; not by du, de la, des. 
8. Observe that the preposition of before a noun used in a 



* When you speak of a substance, you either mean it Whole, or in Parts. 
If you mean the Whole of the substance of which you are speaking, the noun that 
names it, is said to be used in a General sense ; as, Wine cheers the heart of man, i. e. 
that substance in general known by the name of Wine, cheers the heart of man. 

If you mean some Particular sort of the substance of which you are speaking, the 
noun is said to be used in a Particular sense ; as, The wine which we drank was good ; 
in speaking thus, I do not mean to say, that all the substance called wine is good, for 
there is bad wine, but that particular sort which we drank was good. 

If you neither mean the whole, nor any particular sort of the substance spoken of, 
but a certain Portion, or Quantity of it ; as when you say, Give me some wine, A glass 
of wine ; i. e. a portion of the substance called wine, the noun is said to be used in a 
Partitive sense. 



50 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



general sense* preceded by another noun, used in a partitive 
sense, cannot be expressed by du, de la, des, which would 
render the expression particular* and mean of the, it must be 
expressed by de only, without any regard to gender or num- 
ber ; as, 

He gave me a pound of bread, II me donna une livre de pain, 

a piece of meat, un morceau de viande, 

a bag of money, un sac id 1 argent, 

aheap of clothes. un tas d? habits. 

Not, Une livre du pain ; Un morceau de la viande, &c. 
which would mean a pound of the bread ; a piece of the meat, 
&c. 

N. B. In this rule must be included the following words, 
which, though they have no sign after them in english, re- 
quire the connective particle de to unite them to the noun 
which follows them : 

assez, enough; as, 
beaucoup, much, many ; 
combien, hoio much, how many ; 
tant, so much, so many ; 
autant, as much, as many ; 
plus, more ; 
moins, less; 

trop, too much, too many ; 

&,* 

pas, point, no, not; 
jamais, never ; 

Not, assez du pain,§ &c. which would mean enough of the 
bread, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

I have bought a pair of boots, and two pairs of shoes. Drink a 
J' ai achete 1 paire f. 8 botte, deux 8 Soulier. Buvez 1 

glass of wine. Have a Utile patience. 8 This is (a day) of rest, 
verrem. vin. Ayez un peu n.b. C est (aujour d'hui jour) 8 repos. 

I have many things8 to do. I have no money8, and I have very 
beaucoup choseN.B. a faire. Jen'ai pas argentN.B. j* ai tres 

few friends.8 You have more property8 than I have. I have not55 
peu ami. n.b. avez plus bien n.b. que moi — Jen'ai pas 

(so many) friends8 as you. Your friends have (as much) interes'8 as 
tant n.b. que ont autant 7 credit n.b. que 



* See note * page 49. 
t See note t page 47. 
$ Observe that guere is used only in negative sentences. 

$ It appears from the foregoing examples that, when two nouns come together in 
french, they must be connected by some sign, and this sign is determined by the 
sense in which the nonns are used. 

If, as in the first instance (rule 7.), the nouns are used in an unlimited signification, 
they must be connected by the sign which denotes that idea, viz. du, de, la, des. 

But if, as in the second instance (rule 8), the extent of the secondnoun is determined 
by the first, then a simple preposition is sufficient to connect them. 



assez 


de 


pain. 


beaucoup 


de 


viande. 


combien 


d x 


argent. 


tant 


4' 


habits. 


autant 


de 


pain. 


plus 


de 


viande. 


moins 


d' 


argent. 


trop 


d' 


habits. 


peu 


de 


pain. 


guere 


de 


viande. 


pas, or point, d' argent. 


jamais, 


d> 


habits. 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



51 



mine. Give me Utile wine8 and much water. 8 You give we24 
les miens. Dopnez-moi peu n.b. eauN.B. Vous me24 donnez 

{too much) wine8 ; you do not55 give me24 water enough^. I never 

trop n.b. vous — ne me24 donnez pas dssez. n.b. Je ne55 
drink wine8 without putting a {good deal) of water8 (into it24.) 
bois jamais n.b. sans y24 mettre — beaucoup n.b. . 

SOME, ANY; DU, de LA, DES, 

9. If you want to express only a part of the substance of 
which you are speaking ; as, some bread, Some meat, &c. use 
before the noun one of the partitive signs du, de la, des, agree- 
ably to gender and number. The signs are the same as those 
of the definite article of the ; as, 

He gave me some bread, II me donna du pain, 

some meat, de In viande, 

some money,, de V argent, 

some clothes, des habits. 

i. e. a portion of the bread, of the meat, of the money, of the 
clothes. 

N. B. The sign some is often understood in english, before 
such nouns as bread, meat, money, &c, but the sign which re- 
presents it in french, cannot -be omitted ; and it must be re- 
peated before every noun ; as, 

He gave me bread, meat, money, clothes ; i. e. some bread, some meat. 

II me donna du pain, de la viande, de V argent, des habits. 

EXERCISE. 

The dinner is on the table. Will you have meat9NB. or fish9NB. < ? 
diner ni. est stir f. Voulez-vous — viande f. ou poisson m. ? 

Will you have some beef and cabbage ; some mutton and turnips'? I 
beuf m. 3 choux ; plur. mouton m. 3navet ? Je 
(shall eat) some fish and potatoes. Bring me some salt and pepper, 
mangerai g 3{pommes de terre.) Apportez-moi sei m. 3poivre. m. 

What will you drink ? Will you have beer9, or cHerO 1 I (will drink) 
Que voulez-vous boire 1 — biere, f . ou cidre m. ? Je boirai 

some wine and water.4 Put some bread and cheese, on the table, 
vin m. 2 eau. Mettez pain m. 3fromage, m. sur f. 

Except some, any, expressed by de ; not by du, de la, des. 

10. The partitive signs du, de la,des, require the noun imme- 
diately after them ; therefore if a noun used «in a partitive 
sense is preceded by an adjective, use de before that adjective, 
for both genders and numbers, instead of du, de la, des, before 
the noun ; as, 

He gave me very good bread, II me donna de tres bon pain, 

excellent meat, oV excellente viande, 

fine clothes, de beaux habits. 

N. B. But if the adjective comes after the noun, then the 



52 



ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



noun resumes its proper sign, as in Rule 9th, viz. du, de la f 
des; as, 

Nous avons du vin excellent, We have excellent wine. 

de la gloire bien acquise, well acquired glory, 

de V argent comptant, ready money. 

des plaisirs champetres, rural pleasures. 

EXERCISE* 

(This is) lOexcellent wine, but (that is) lOvery bad beer. Have you any 
Voici excellent vin, mais voila tres mauvaise biere. Avez - vous 10 
good beer in France ? No ; but we have lOgood wine and good brandy, 
bonne biere en Nonj nous avons bon 10 bonne (eau de vie. > 

Good small beer is better than bad wine. You must have fine 
lObonne petite biere est meilleure que lOmauvais devez avoir lObeau 

fruit in France. Yes; we have very fine fruit. (Are there) any large trees 
en Oui; avosislOtres beau Y a-t-il 10* grands arbre 

in your garden 1 No : (There are only) young trees. Have you not 
dans 1 jardin? Non ; (iln'yaque) lOjeunes N'avez-vous pas 

better pens to lend mel I have good pens, but badlO ink. 
lOmeilleures plume a me24 preter 24? J' ai lObonnes mais mauvaise encre. 

*How to place two Nous together. 

1 1 . When two nouns come together, the French always place 
first the noun which is the subject of discourse, which da, de 
lay des, de or d, before the second noun, agreeably to the sense 
in which it is used ; as, 

Peter's book. he livre de Pierre, 

i. e. the book of Peter. i DE ^ ^ 

Some London beer. De la Here be Londres.? 1 jP " 

i. e. Some beer of London. ^ S ^ me *' 

The master's pen, La plume du maztre. 

i. e. the pen of the master. ) DU ^ ehA ^thrule 

The street door La parte de la rue. £ p ^ nicu ' lar sense [ 

i. e. the door of the streei. ) r 

A gold watch, Une montre d' or. 

i.e.^ch ofgald. ) VE , or, 8th rule, 

Some silk stockings. Des has de soie. > ' 



i. e. Some stockings of silk. 



general sense. 



exercise. 

Where is William's4 hat? 1 Have you seen Mary 5 s4 apronTI 
Ou est Guillaume chapeaum.? Avez- vous vu Marie tablier m. 1 
Will you drink a glass of Port4 wine8 % Nature's? voice? proclaims 
Voulez-vous boire verre m. "vin? Nature f. voix f. proclarne 

god's4 power7. Ignorance? is the mother of error?. Have you seen my 
dieu pouvoir.m. 21gnorance mere 2 erreur. vu 

father's horse? 1 I (will wait for you24) at the garden gate7, or (at the) 

cheval? Je (vous24 attendrai) a jardin m. porte, f. ou au 
corner of my sister's house7. Shut the kitchen door?, and open the 
coinm. maison. f. Fermez Tcuisine f. porte, f. ouvrez 

parlour7 window. Bring my goldS watch, and clean my silverS 
sallef. Tfenetre. f. Apportez 1 or montre, f. nettoyez 1 argent 

buckles, 
boucle. 



ADJECTIVE. 



53 



12. Sometimes however the order of the words could not 
be changed in english in the above manner, without changing 
also their meaning ; for ex. a wine glass, an ink bottle, a tea 
spoon, could not be changed into a glass of wine, a bottte of 
ink, a spoon of tea ; yet the nouns require this order in french ; 
but instead of de between the two nouns, we use d. 

N. B. This is done when the first noun denotes the use of 
the other ; as, 

A wine glass, i. e. a glass used for wine. Un verre kvin. 
A teaspoon, i. e. a spoon used for tea. Une cuiller hthe. 

EXERCISE. 

Give me the winel2 bottle, and the waterl2 pot. Put some winel2 
Donnez-moi vin bouteille, f. eau pot. m. Mettez 

glasses on the table. Bring the teal2 board and the coffee 12 cups, 
verre sur table, f. Apporlez the cabaret m. ca^e tasse. 

There is no powderS in my powderl2 bag. (Let us go) and sit 
II n'y a pas poudreN.B. dans sac. m. Allons — (nous asseoir) 

in the diningl2 room. Have you any firel2 arms in your house 1 
dans diner chambre. f. Avez 9 feu arme maison f. ? 



CHAP. IV. 



ADJECTIVE. 

An adjective is a word joined to a noun, to denote some qua- 
lity or circumstance belonging to that noun ; as, good bread, 
bad meat, &c. 

1 3. The adjective must be of the same gender and number as 
the noun which it qualifies. 

An adjective is made feminine by adding e mute to the 
masculine ; as, 

(That is) a pretty boy. Voila un joli garcon, 

(This is) a pretty girl. Voici une jolie fille. 

He is well dressed. II est bien HabillL 

She is very well dressed. Elleest tres bien habillee. 

Except the adjectives ending in e mute, which are of both 
genders ; as, 

Un jeune horn me aimoble. An amiable young man. 

Une jeune fern me aimable. An amiable young woman. 

5* 



54 ADJECTIVE. 

And the adjectives in x, which change x into se for the fe- 
minine ; as, 

Mon frere est paresseuz. My brother is lazy. 

Ma soeur est par esseuse. My sister is lazy. 

The plural number of adjectives is formed like that of nouns, 
by adding.? or x to the singular; see nouns, page 41. ex. 

Une jolie fille. A pretty girl. Un beau chapeau. A fine hat. 
De jolies lilies. Pretty girls. De beaux chapeaux. Fine hats. 

N. B. A past participle used to qualify a noun, or coming 
after the verb to be to express an action or the state of the 
noun, follows the same rules as an adjective ; ex. 

My brother is gone out. Mon frere est sorti. 

My sister is gone out. Ma soeur est sortie. 

EXERCISE. 

Your brother is diligent; your sister is diligently • your brothers are 

est diligent ; * 1 sont 

diligently ; your sisters are diligent\3. Your father is esteemed; your 
* 1 * estime ; 

mother is esteemedlS ; your sons are esteemed ; your daughters are es- 

* 1 fils 13* 1 fille 

teemed. That boy is very civil ; that girl is very civil ; these gentlemen 
13* 1 tres civil ; 1 * 1 messieurs 

are very civil ; these ladies are very civillS. Our man servant is lazy ; 

* 1 dame * valet paresseux ; 

our maid servant is lazy 13 ; our men servants are lazy 13 / our maid 
servante * 1 * 1 

servants are lazyXZ. My son is very young; my daughter is very young; 

* tres jeune ; 1 

my sons are very young ; my daughters are very young, Your cousin 
* 1 cousin f. 

is very amiable ; she is officiousXS and complaisantlS. 
aimable ; elle officieux* complaisant. 

14. If an adjective qualifies several nouns singular of the 
same gender, that adjective must be of the same gender as 
those nouns, and plural, as 

Her father and her uncle are angry. Son pere et son oncle sont f aches 
Her mother and her aunt are angry. Sa mere et sa tante sont f ackers. 

15. But if the noun3 are of different genders, the adjective 
must be of the masculine gender, and in the plural number ; 
as, 

Her father and mother are angry. Son pere et sa mere sont f aches. 

EXERCISE. 

My mother and sister are ready. His daughter and his niece are 
1 et 3 sont pret.14 1 fille niece 

civil and obliging. Her son and daughter are deadlb. The horse and 
civi!14 obtige'ant.14 1 fils 3 mort.* cheval 



* The masculine singular only of adjectives is here given ; the learner must make 
the adjective of the gender and number which the noun requires, agreeably to the 
above rules. 



ADJECTIVE. 55 

the cnw have escapedlb. The gate and the door were openH. The 

vache (se sont) echappe,* 1 bairiere f. porte f. etaient ouvert.* 
man and the woman were gone. I found a glass and a bottle broken. 

etaient parti*. Je trouvai verre m. bouteille f. casse.* 

16. Adjectives are generally placed in english before the 
noun; in french they are placed after the noun ; as, 

A red coat. A round table. A new house. 

Un habit rouge. Une table ronde. Une maison neuve. 

17. Except these adjectives, which are generally placed 
before the noun ; premier, 1st ; second, 2d ; and all the adjec- 
tives of number. 

beau, bel, m> > fine. mauvais, bad. 

belle, fern. ) handsome. mechant, wicked. 

bon, m. bonne, f. good. meilleur, better. 

, grand, great, large. moindre, less. 

gros, m. grosse, f. big. petit, little, small. 

jeune, young. tout, all, whole. 

joli, pretty. vieux, m. vieille,/. old;f 
A good husband. A handsome woman. A pretty little bird. 
Un bon mari. Une belle femme. Un joli petit oiseau. 

EXERCISE. 

England is a fruitful country. The englishlG nation has made several 
5Angleterre est 1 fertile 16 pays. m. 1 anglaisl3 nation f. a fait plusieurst 
usefullG discoveries. Your sister is a charmingXQ woman. She has the 
utilel3 decouverte. est 1 charmantl3 femme. Elle a 1 

most engasringXQ manners7. Does she51 know the frenck\6 language^ 
plus engageantl3 manieres. f. — sait elle51 1 francaisl3 langue f. ? 
I have met her near the whitelG house. She lives in al smallXl 
Je 1 25 ai rencontree25 (pres de) 1 bianche maison. f. demeure dans 13 
house in a large garden. It is an oldXl house, and (there is) &badXl road 
maison f. 1 17 jardin. m. C est 1 vieille il y a cherninm, 

to go (to it) but it is the bestlG situation in this neighbourhood, 
pour y 24 aller 24 mais c' est 1 meilleurl3 f. dans 1 voisinage.m. 

Comparison of Adjectives, 
The same words which serve to qualify nouns, serve also 
by the means of certain adverbs to compare their qualities. 

18. The comparative of superiority , more before the adjec- 
tive, or r or er added to it, is formed in french by plus\ before 
the adjective ; as, 

I am more strong, or stronger than you. Je suis_pfefort que vous.. 

19. The comparative of inferiority, less, or not so before the 
adjective, is formed by moins,^ ox pas si before the adjective ; 
as, 



* A participle used to qualify a noun, follows the same rule as an adjective; 13r.N.B„ 
t Add to them me me, same, and plusieurs, several, which also come before the 
noun. 



56 



ADJECTIVE. 



I am less strong than you. J e suis moins fort que vous. 

1 am not so strong as you. J e ne suis pas si fort que vous. 

20. The comparative of equality, formed by as before trie 
adjective is formed in french by aussi before the adjective ; as, 

I am as strong as you. Je suis aussi fort ^we vous. 

21. The superlative most or Zeas* before the adjective, or st 
or added to it, is formed by adding le, la, les, to the com- 
parative words plus, moins, agreeably to the gender and num- 
ber of the noun ; as, 

My brother is the strongest. Mon f'rere es le plus, fort. 

My sister is the least strong. Ma soeur est la moins forte. 

EXERCISE. 

The country ismore pleasant than the town. My horse is younger 
1 campagne f. est 18 agreable que 1 ville. f. 1 cheval jeune 18 
and runs faster than yours. Thatl house is larger 18 and more 

court vile 18 le votre. maison-la f. grand 13 13 

convenient than this44, but this44 is better built. You virile better 
commode celle-ci, ceile-ci (e) bati. 13 ecrivez (e) 

than I do, bpcause you have lQbetter pens. Vice7 is /ess dangerous 

moi — , parceque (E) plume, f. Vice m. 19 dangereux 

than hypocrisy?. She is not so handsome as her sistsr, but she is more 

2 hypocrisie. Elle n'est pas 19 belle 19 sceur, elle est 
amiable. She is as rich as you. She is the handsomest woman in 
aimable. 20 riche 20 1 belle 21 (f) 
the town. Her father is the. proudest'21 man that I have ever known. 

ville. {. orgueilleuxl6 que aie (g) jamais connu- 



CHAPTER V. 



PRONOUN. 

A pronoun is a word used to represent a noun; as, when 
I say, /, instead of naming my own name ; thou, you, he, she, 
it, they, instead of naming that of another being. 



(E) Beginners are apt to mistake the words MEILLETJR & MIEUX, which are both 
expressed by BETTER. 

Meilleur, better, is the comparative of bon, good, an adjective, and is added to 
nouns ; as, 

My pen is good, yours is better. Ma plume est. bonne, la votrtjkst meilleure. 
Mif.ux, better, is the comparative of bien, well, an adverb, and is added to verbs; as, 
I write well, but .you write better. 7' ecris bien, mais vous ecrivez mieux. 

(f) IN, after a superlative, is expressed in french in the same manner as OF ; ex. 
She is the finest woman in the town. C" est la plus belle femme de la ville. 

(g) QUI, QUE, DONT, after a superlative require the verb in the subjunctive ; as, 
She is the finest woman 1 have ever seen. C est la plus belle femme queftiE jamais vue. 



PRONOUN. 



57 



There are various sorts of pronouns, generally known by 
the names of personal, relative, possessive, demonstrative, in- 
definite. 

OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Personal pronouns are either agents or nominatives of verbs, 
or they are objects. 

The nominat. are, I, thou, he, she, it, we, ye, you, they. 
The objects are, me, thee, him, her, it, us, you, them. 

OF AGENTS OR NOMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 

22. When /, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they, are the nominative 
of a verb, i. e. when there is before or after them, a verb of 
the same number -and person that agrees with them, they are, 

I. Je. He, it. II. 

Thou. Tu. They, mas. Us. 

We. Nous. She, it. File. 

You. Vous. They, fem. Elles. 

N. B. The nominative pronouns keep the same place in 
the sentence in french as in english ; ex. 
/have. Thou hast. He has, &c. Have I? Hast thou ? Has he? &c. 
J'ai. Tu as. 11 a, &c. Ai je ? As tu / A-l-ii ? &c. 

EXERCISE. 

/speak. T7i0W writest. He plays. She sings. We walk. You dance, 
parte. ecris. joue. chante. marchons. dansez. 

They study. Have you done? Is he come 1 Are they gone % 
etudient. Avez fmi 1 Est venu ? Sont partis 1 

23. If /, thou, he, she, we, you, they, have not a verb to 
agree with them, or if they are joined to another substantive,* 
they are, 

/. Moi. He. Lui. 

Thou. Toi. They, mas. Eux. 

We. Nous. She, it. Kile. 

You. Vous. They, fem. Elles, ex. 

It is / who have done that. C'est moi qui ai fait cela. 
He and / have done that. Lui et moi nous avons fait cela. 

You and they have done that. Vous et eux vous avez fait cela. 

EXERCISE. 

Who has done that? It is not55 /; it is he. It was neither 
Qui a fait cela? Ce n'est pas 23 c' est 23 Ce n'etait ni 
he nor /, it was either you or they. He and / were together. 

23 ni 23 c' etait ou ou 23 23 23 (nous etions) ensemble. 

I can do that better than he. You can not do it24 better than /. 
22 puis faire cela (e) que 23 ne pouvez pas le24 faire (e) 23 



* By substantive is meant here every word which either names or represents a 
substance. 



58 



PRONOUN". 



OF OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 
A Table showing how the Objective Pronouns are expressed, 
according to the place which they keep with the Verb. 

Before the verb. After the verb. After a preposition. 
24. 25. 27. rules. 

Me, 
to Me. 

Thee, 
to T/iee, 

Himself, 

Herself, 

Itself 

Themselves. 



24, 25, 27, rules. 


26 rule. 


2d rule. 


| Me. 


Moi. 


Moi. 


I - 


Toi. 


Toi. 


Se. 




Soi. 



Whether before or after the verb, 
24, 25, 26, 27 rules. 

I 



Nous. 
Vous. 
Le. 
La. 
Les. 

Lui. 

Leur. 

En. 

Y.(h) 



Nous. 
Vous. 
Lui. 

Elle. 

SEux, m. 
Elles, f. 



175, 

to Us. 

You, 
to You. 
Him, 
It; mas. 
Her, 
It ; fern. 

Them. 

to Him, 
to Her. 
to Them, 
of, from, ) It, 
for, with, ) Them, 
to, at, } It, 
in, by ) Them. 

This table shows in one point of view all the rules concern- 
ing the objective pronouns. 

These pronouns, as you see in the table above, are some- 
times governed by verbs, and sometimes by prepositions. 

When the objective pronouns are governed by a verb, they 
are placed invariably before that verb. See rules 24, 25, 
and 27. 

Except when the verb commands, for then the pronouns 
must be placed after the verb, and moi, toi must be used, in- 
stead of me, te. See rule 26. 

If the pronouns are governed by a preposition, they are 
then independent of the verb, and must be placed after the 
preposition. See rule 28. 



(h) En, y, are also adverbs of place, used, en for thence ; y for there, thither, and 
they follow the same rules as the pronouns. 



PRONOUN. 



59 



The order which the Objective Pronouns keep with the Verb. 
GENERAL RULE. 

24. When the Pronouns me, thee, us, you, him, her, it, them, 
are governed by a verb, the pronouns me, te, nous, vous, le, la, 
les, lui, leur, en, y, which represent them} must be placed im- 
mediately before that verb ; ex. 

He sees me. 

thee, 
us. 
you. 



literally he me 
be thee 



II me voit. 
II te voit. 

II nous voit. he us 

II vous voit. he you 

II le voit. he him, or it 

II la voit. he her, or it 

II les voit he them 

me voit il 1 me 

te voit-il ? thee 

nous voit-il % us 

vous voit-il 1 you 

le voit-il ? him, or it 

la voit-il 7 her, or it 

les voit-il 1 them 

He does not see me ; fyc. II ne me voit pas. he me sees not. 
Does he not see me? tyc. Ne me voit-il pas % me sees he not ? 
Does he not see thee ? fyc. Ne te voit-il pas ? thee sees he not 1 



Am, or it. 
her, or i£. 
them. 
Does he see me ? 

Mee ? 

^5 ? 
you ? 

him, or i£ ? 
Aer, or it ? 
them ? 



I see Azra. 
24 



I see yon. 

vois 24 

Do you see us ? 
— 51 24 — 51 

them? I do not55 know 

24 
her. 



EXERCISE. 

I see her. I see them. Do you 51 see me? 

24 24 * — voyez-vous 24 

Do you see him ? Do you see her ? Do you see 



24 — 51 24 

you. I do not know him. 



51 



I do not know 

connais pas 24 — 55 24 — 55 

I do not know them. Do you51 not know me? Do you 
24 — 55 24 — ne connaissez-vous pas 24 ? — 51 

not know us? Do you not know him? Do you not know her? 

55 24 ? — 55 24 ? — 55 24 

Do you not know them? I meet them sometimes, but I do not5 
— 55 24 ? rencontre 24 quelquefois, — ne 

speak (to them.) Have you seen your mother lately? I saw her 

parle pas — leur24. Avez vu depuis peu ? vis 24 

yesterday. Did she51 bring you any thing 1 She brought me a 

hier. — * apporta-t-elle 24 quelque chose ? apporla 24 

new book. Did you51 tell her that I wished to see her? 
nouveaulivre- m. — dites-vous lui24 que souhaitais — voir la34? 

I told her that we (should go) to see her on Sunday. "What did 

dis lui24 que irions — voir Ja24 — dimanche. Que 

she51 say to you ? She told me that she (would be) glad to see us. 
dit-elle — 24 dit 24 qu' serait (bien aise) de voir 24 



* When the English ask a question, they are obliged to have recourse to the signs do, 
does, did ; as, Do I learn well 2 Doest thou learn well? Does he learn well? Does 
your brother learn well? Does your sister learn well? Do we learn well? Do you 
learn well ? Do they learn well ? Do your brothers learn well ? Do your sisters learn 
well? Did I learn well ? 6fC. ; the French, as you see, do not require any signs, 
and when these signs occur in english, they must be left out infrench. 



GO 



PRONOUN. 



25. If the objective pronouns me, thee, us, you, him, her, it, 
them, are governed by a verb compounded of the auxiliary 
verbs have, or be, and of a participle past, the pronouns me, te, 
nous, vous, le, la, les, lui, tear, en, y, which represent them, 
must be placed before the auxiliary verb ; not between the 
auxiliary and the participle ; as, 



He has seen me. 

thee. 

him, or it. 
her, or it. 
us. 
you. 
them. 

Has he seen me 1 
t/iee ? 

him, or it ? 
her, or it? 
us ? 
you ? 
them ? 

He has not seen me ; fyc. 
Has he not seen me ? fyc. 



II ra'* a vu. 
II V a vu. 
II V a vu. 
II V a vue. 
II nous a vus. 
II vous a vus. 
II les a vus. 
m' ta-t-il vu 1 

V a-t-il vu % 

V a-t-il vu 'l 

V a-t-il vue 1 
nous a-t-il vus 1 
vous a-t-il vus 1 
les a-t-il vus ? 
II ne m'a pas vu. 
Ne fli*a-t-il pas vu 1 



literally he me 
he thee 
he him, or it 
he her, or it )> c« 
he us 
he 

he *A<?77i J 

me 

Aim, or it 
her, or i£ 

you 
them 

he me has not seen. 
me has he not seen 1 



EXERCISE. 

I have seen you. I have sten him. I have seen her. I have 
ai vu 25 vu 25* vue 25* 

seen them. Have you seen me ? Have you seen us ? Have you seen 

vus 25 Avez-vous vu 25*? vus 25 1 vu 

him? Have you seen her? Have you seen them ? Where have you 

25* ? vue 25* ? vus 25 ? Ou 

seen him ? I have met him at the door. He had seen me 

vu 25* 1 rencontre 25* a porte. f. avait vue 25* 

(coming out) of the house. He has kept me all this while. I would 
sortir 1 maison. f. retenue 25 tout 1 terns, m. — 

have told him2o that I wanted to go. 1 have told him2b that you 
aurais dit lui t que voulais, — (tn'en aller.) dit lui t que 

had forbid me to stop. I have heard you. Had you never55 

aviez defendu 25 de m'arreter. entendus 25 Ne aviez - vous jamais 

seen him before ? I had met him once or twice, but I had 
vu le25* auparavant I avais recontre le25* une ou deux fois,'mais ne avais 

never55 spoken (to him,) and, he had never55 spoken (to me. I have 
jamais parle — lui25* ne avait jamais — 25 

written (to him) this morning, but he has not55 yet answered me. 

I matin, m. ne a pas encore (fait reponse) 25. 



ecrit 



lui25 



matin, m. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

26. 1st Exception. When the objective pronouns me, thee, 
us, you, him, her, it, them are governed by the imperative of a 



* See note $ page 47 

t The letter (t) has not any meaning here, it is added only to soften the pronun- 
ciation. 

i See note (i) page 63, 



PRONOUN. 



6! 



verb used in a commanding sense, i. e. without a negation, 
the pronouns which represent them, are placed immediately 
after the verb ; 

In these instances me is expressed by moi, and thee by toL 

27. But if the imperative is used in & forbidding sense? i- e. 
if it is attended by a negation, the pronouns must be placed 
immediately before the verb, agreeably to the general rule ; 

Then me is expressed by me, and thee by te ; ex. 



Imperative commanding, 26 rule. Imperative forbidding, 27 rule. 

L ° 0kat IW. Regarde r- {regarded ? 

Look at us. Regzrdez-nous. Ne 7i<ms > rpo . arHpy na ~ & 

yourself. vows. Ne z?^s J le b a ™ez pas. ^ 

Let us look at him.px it. Regardons-Ze. Ne Ze ) ft 
Acr, or i£. la. Ne Z« > regard ons pas. 

Mm. Zes. Ne les S § 

EXERCISE* 

Speak to me. Do not55 speak to me. Do not interrupt me. Warm 
Parlez — 26 — ne pas — 27 — 55 interrompez 27 Chauffe 

thyself a little. Do not warm thyself (so much.) Write to her. Do 
26 un peu. — 55 27 tant. Ecrivez — lui26. — 

not write to her. Send it (to Mm.) Do not send it to him. 
55 — 27 Envoyez-le26 — lui.26 — 55 Ie27 — lui27. 

28. 2d Exception. The objective pronouns are not always 
governed by verbs, they are sometimes governed by a prepo- 
sition which some verbs require to be united to the substan- 
tive* that follows them ; then the pronoun being the object of 
the preposition, and not the object of the verb, it is placed 
after the preposition, and we express 

Me, by MoL Us, by Nous, r 

Thee, by Toi. You,\ by Vous. 

Htm, by Lui. Them, m. by Eux. 

Her, by Elle. Them, fern, by Elles, ex. 

Was he speaking of me? Pariait-il de moi ? 

1 will not go with Mm. Je n 5 irai pas avec lui. 

He is eome without her. II est vena saris elle. 

Re applied to them. II s'adressa a eux, m. a elles, f.f 

EXERCISE, 

Come to me. I do not55 care for thee. I went to her, and she 

Viens a 28 — - ne me soucie pas de 28 allai 28 et 

sent me to him. I will not go with them. I am tired of them. 

envoya 24 28 — 55 irai avec 28 ennuye d' 28 

Have you thought of me ? I always54 think of you. 

Avez pense a 28 to uj ours pense a 28 



* See note * page 57. 

t This is more fully explained in the third part of this work. 

6 



02 



PROxXOUN. 



The order which several objective pronouns keep together. 

29. When several objective pronouns are governed by the 
same verb they must be placed together in the following 
order : 



Before the verb 24, 25 rules. 
Me, 
Nous, 

Te, \ bef. le, la, les, y, en. 
Vous, 
Se, 



After the verb, 
26 rule. 

Le, -I 

Les ^ e ^* mo *> 



Whether bef. or 
after the verb, 
24, 25, 26, 27 r. 

5£ i bef. en. 
l e, ) 



Whether before or ajter the verb, 24, 25, 26, 27 rules. 
Le, ) 

La, £ bef. lui, leur, y, en. 
Les, 
Lui, 
Leur, 



| bef. y, en. 
bef. en. ? 



Having uniformly observed that the arrangement of several 
pronouns together is one of those rules which learners find 
the greatest difficulty to attain, I have given examples show- 
ing how several pronouns are placed together in all possible 
instances, by the means of which errors may always be rec- 
tified. 



He gave him or it to me. 
He gave her or it to me. 
He gave them to me. 
He gave me some. 
He gave him or it to us. 
He gave her or it to us. 
He gave them to us. 
He gave us some. 
He sent me there. 
He sent him, her, or it to 
He sent them to me there. 
He sent me some there. 
He sent us there. 
He sent him, her, or it to 
He sent them to us there. 
He sent some to us there. 



before the verb, 24,25 rules, after the verb, 26 rule. 
FIRST PERSON. IMPERATIVE COMMANDING. 

11 me le donna. Donnez-Ze-wioz. 

II me la donna. 

IJ me les donna. 

II m' en donna. 

II nous le donna. 

II nous la donna. 

II nous les donna. 

I] nous en donna. 

II m' y envo3 r a. 
me there. II me V y envoya. 

II me les y envoya. 

II m' y en envoya, 

II nous y envoya. 
us there. 11 nous V y envoya. 

II nous les y envoya. 

\ \ nous y en envoya. 



Donnez-Za-moz 
Donriez-/es-moa. 
Donnez-m' en. 
Donnez-nous-lc. 
Donnez-nous-la. 
Donnez-nous-les. 
Donnez-nous-en. 
Envoy ez-y-moi. 
Envoyez-/' y-moi. 
Envoy ez-les-y-moi. 
Envoy ez-y-en-moi. 
Envoy ez-nous-y. 
Envoy ez-nous-l' y. 
Envoyez-nous-les-y. 
Envoy ez-nous-y-en. 



He gave him or it to thee. 

He gave her or it to thee. 

He gave them to thee. 

He gave thee some. 

He gave him or it to you. 

He gave her or it to you. 

He gave them to you. 

He gave you some. 

He sent thee there. 

He sent him, her, or it to thee 

He sent them to thee there. 

He sent some to thee there. 

He sent you there. 

He sent him, her, or it to you 

He sent them to you there. 

He sent some to you there. 



SECOND PERSON. 

II te le donna. 

II te la donna. 

II te les donna. 

II V en donna. 

II vous le donna. 

II vous la donna. 

II vous les donna. 

II vous en donna. 

II f y envoya. 
there. U te V y envoya. 

II te les y envoya. 

II V y en envoya. 

II vous y envoya. 
there. II vous V y envoya. 

11 vous les y envoya. 

II vous y en envoya. 



Represente-/e-£oi. 
Represente-/a-£oi. 

Represente-les-toi ^ 

Represented' en. a> 

Representez-voi/s-Ze. *S 

Representez-vows-Za. 5> 
Representez-vot/s-tes. % 

Representez-t/'ows en. £ 



Transportez-vows-y. j?* 



Informez-vous-y-en. 



PRONOUN. 



63 



before the verb, 24, 25 rules. AFTER the verb, 26 rule. 



THIR 

He recalls him or it to himself. 

He recalls her or it to himself. 

He recalls them to himself. 

He repents of it, of them. 

He applies himself to it to them. 

He has given him or it to him, to her. 

He has given her or it to him, to her. 

He has given them to h<m, to her. 

He has given him or it to them. 

He has given her or it to them. 

He has given them to them. 

He warned him, or her of it. 

He warned them of it. 

He sent him, her or J/iere. 

He sent them there. 

He sent him or £o him, to her there. 

He sent her or t£ £o him, to her there. 

He sent them to hint, to her there. 

He sent him or it to them there. 

He sent her or & to them there. 

He sent them to them there. 

He sent some to him, to her. 

He sent some to them, or them some. 

He sent some ?o him, to her there. 

He sent some to them there. 

He sent some (j) there. 



D PERSON. 
II se le rappele. 
II se la rappele. 
II se les rappele. 
11 s' en repent. 
11 s' y applique. 
II le lui a donne. 
II la lui a donnee. 
II les lui a donnes. 
II le lcur a donne. 
II la leur a donnee. 
II les leur a donnes. 
II V en avertit. 
II les en avertit. 
II V y envoya. 
II les y envoya. 
II le lui y envoya. 
11 la lui y envoya. 
II les lui y envoya. 
11 le leur y envoya. 
II la leury envoya. 
11 les leur y envoya. 
U lui en envoya. 
II leur en envoya. 
II lui y en envoya. 
II leur y en envoya. 
II y en envoya. 



Donnez-Ze-Zttt". 

Donnez-Za-Zwt. 

Donnez-Zes-Zwt. 

Donnez-Ze-Zet/r. 

Donnez-Za-Zeur. 

Donnez-Zes-Zewr. 

Avertissez-Z' en. 

Avertissez-Zes-en. 

Envoyez-Z' y. 

Envoyez- Zes-y. 

Envoyez-Ze-Zwi-y.* 

E n v oy e z- la- lui-y . 

Envoyez-Zes-Ztn-y. 

Envoyez-Ze-Zewr-y. 

En voy ez-la-leur-y . 

Envoy ez-les-leur-y. 

Envoyez-Zm-en. 

Envoyez-Zewr-en. 

Envoyez-Zut-y-^en. 

En voyez-Zeur-y-en, 

Envoyez-y-en. 



EXERCISE. 

I have brought you the book which I had promised you. Where 

ai apporte 25 livrem. que avais promis '25 Ou 

is it? Shew U29 me. I (will shew) t/,24 you (by and by.) "Will you give 
est-il ? Montrez-le 25 montrerai le 29 tantot. Voulez donner 
it2i me? Give U26 me. I can not give it c M you. It does not belong 
le 29 ? Donnez-le 29 ne puis pas donner let 29 II — n' est pas 

tome. I (will lend) UM you. When will you51 lend it24me? 
a 28 preterai le 29 Quand — p'reterez-vous le 29? 

Lend U29 me now. I (will return) it2& to you (to-morrow.) I (will lend) 
Pretez-le 26 a present. rendrai le — 29 demain. preterai 
U24 you nexiKi week?. I (shall be) in the country then. I (will send) 
le 29 prochaine semaine. f. serai a campagne f. alors. enverai 
them to you there. You will not find (any body) to bring them 

24 — 29 y 29 — ne trouverez personne pour apporter 24 

to me there. I (will take) them to you there myself. Has she given 
— 29 y 29 porterai 24 — 29 29 mo'i-meme. A-t-elle donn6 

him2h any money 1 No; she has lent Aim25.a guinea. Tell her26 

(i) 9 argent/ Non ; prete (i) 1 guinee, f. Dites (i) 

not to lend him2i a?iy more, for he will never return ?7*24 her. 
de ne pas preter (i) (j)29 davantage, car — ne55 rendra jamais le (i)29 



* Lui y is grammatical, but i, i, at the end of a sentence do not sound well, there- 
fore, instead of y for there, use la, and say lui Id instead of lui y. 

(i) When a verb governs two substantives, either nouns or pronouns, one of them 
has a preposition expressed or understood, but the preposition is generally understood 
before the pronoun which represents the person. In these instances him, her, must 
be expressed by lui, and them by leur, the same as when to is prefixed to them ; ex. 

I will send him money, i. e. money to him. Je lui enverai de V argent ; not V enverai. 

I have offered them some, i. e. some to them ; Je leur en ai offert ; notje les en ai 
offert. 

(j) Some, any, implying, of it, of them, understood after them, are expressed by en. 
t The pronouns le, la, les, and the objective pronouns are placed immediately be 
fore the verb they govern, 



$4 



PRONOUN". 



30. As there are only two genders in french, the masculine 
and the feminine, the neuter pronouns it, they, them must be 
expressed by il, eUe, Us, elles ; le la, les, the same as he, she, 
they ; him, her, them, masculine or feminine, agreeably to 
the gender of the noun which they represent ; so we say : 

Of a man or a tree ; 
II est grand j je le vois. He or it is tall ; I see him. or it. 

Of a woman or a flower ; 
EUe est belle ; regard ez-la. She or it is fine ; look at her, or it 

Of men or trees ; 
Ms sont ici j je les ai vits. They are here ; I have seen them. 

Of women or flowers ; 
Elles sont belles j je les admire. They are fine j I admire them. 

EXERCISE. 

You have a fine hat. It is new. I can not wear jf. It is 

Avez 1 beau chapeau. m. 30 est neuf. ne saurais porter 30 (k) 30 
too small. (Here is) another ; try. it. 26 This watch has cost me 
trop petit. En voici un autre ; essayez 30 (k) 1 montre f. a coute 25 
a (good deal) of money ,8 but it is not55 good ; it does not go well, 
— beaucoup argent, n.b. 30 n'est pas bonne ; 30 — ne va pas bien. 

Get it2$ mended. Give ^30 me. (That is) a good house; it 
Faites 30(k) raccoinmoder. Donnez (k) 26 Voila I bonne maison ; f. 30 
is well built, but it is not well situated. It is too near the road. If 
bien bati, 13 30 bien situe 13. 30 trop pres de route, f. Si 

ttwas mine,42 I (would sell) itM Eat some of these grapes ; 
30 etait (a moi) vendrais 30(k) Mangez (quelques-uns) 1 raisins ; m. 
they are good. I (would rather have) apples, if they were ripe- 
30 bon. 13 J' airnerais mieux — 9pommes r f. 30 etaient mux. 13 

It is not the time for apples. Is it astonishing that they are 
(l) n'est pas tems m. des (l) etonnant qu' 30ne soient 

not55 ripe 1 It (would be) an astonishing thing if they were, 
pas 13 (l) serait etonnante 16 chose f. qu' 30 le fussent. 

31. He, she, they, him, her, them, are sometimes used without 



(k) Learners are sometimes embarrassed how to discriminate it the object from it 
tho agent or nominative, i. e. when to express it by il, elle, and when by le, lA. 

It is the agent, and expressed by il, elle, agreeably to the gender of the noun to 
which it relates, when, if you were speaking of a. person, you would use he or she ; as,, 

He or it is come. Il est venu. She or it will fall, elle tomhera. 

It is the object, and expressed by le, la., agreeably to the gender of the noun, when,, 
if you were speaking of a person, you would use him or her ; as, 

I see him or it. Je le vois. 1 know her or it. Je la. connais. 

(l) It is often used in an impersonal sense, i. "e. without reference to any substan- 
tive mentioned in the sentence ; as, it is glorious, shameful, necessary, &c. 

In these instances, it is always expressed by il, or by ce. 

It is expressed by il, if the verb is followed by an adjective without a substan- 
tive ; as, 

It is glorious, shameful, necessary, il est glorieux, honteux, necessaire, $c. 
It is expressed by ce, when the verb is followed by a substantive, either with or 
without an adjective ; as. 
It is 1. It is he. It is she. It is you. It is your brother. It is a shameful thing. 
C'estmoi. C'estlui. C'e&t elle. C'est vous. C est voire frcrc C est une chose honleust 



PRONOUN. 



65 



relation to any noun expressed before them, but imply the 
words man, woman, or people understood ; as, 

He who is honest is esteemed ; i. e. the man who is honest is, &c. 
Do you know her whom I love 1 i. e. the woman whom I love 3 

In this sense they are expressed; 

Ik \ b y Celui ' p, \ b y Celle - 35S I by Ceux ; as - 

He who is honest is esteemed. Celui qui est honnete est estime. 
Do you know he?- whom I lovel Connaissez-vous celle que j'aime 1 

N. B. Celui, celle, ceux, and the relative qui, que, dont which 
attends them, must not be separated, as the corresponding 
words sometimes are in english ; they must be placed to- 
gether ; as, 

He knows men but little who relies on their promises. 

Celui qui compte sur les promesses des hommes ne les connait guere ; 

i. e. He who relies on the promises of men knows them but 
little. (m) 

EXERCISE. 

He who can live dishonoured does not deserve to live. He who 
31 qui peut vivre deshonore — 55 merite de 31 

betrays a friend is unworthy of friendship. He can not be happy 
trahit ami m. indigne amitie. 31 ne saurait — etre heureux 

whoseol happiness depends on. others. Do not55 trust Aim who 

dontN.B. 7bonheur rn. depend de.s autres, — Ne vous fiez pas a 31 

has deceived you. She (of whom) you speak (will come) (by and by.) 

trompe 25 31 dont parlez viendra tantot. 

She is not come (of vihomZY) you (were speaking.) Do you51 know for 
31 est 55 venue n.b. parliez. — Connaissez-vous 31 

(of whom) we (are speaking X) They who prefer 7riches to 7honour 
parlons ? 31 preferent richesses 2'honneur 

are contemptible. They are mistaken whoZX think that riches make 
meprisable 13. 31 — se trompent n.b. pensent que 7 rendent 

men7 happy. Do you51 know that gentleman 1 He is a physician, 
hom me heureux. — Connaissez-vous 1 monsieur? (n) medecin. 

(That is) his wife. She is a fine woman. They are lOvery honest people. 
Voila 1 femme. (n) belle femme (n) ' tres honnetes gens. 



(m) We may also say without changing the order of the words ; 

Celui-la ne connait guere les hommes qui compte surleurs promesses ; 
or c' est ne connaitre guere les hommes que de compter sur leurs promesses ; 
but these two modes of expression are more adapted to oratory than to conversation. 

(Ni He, she, they, corning with the verb be followed by a substantive, are ge- 
nerally expressed by CE, though the noun to which they refer has been mentioned 
befere ; as, 

He is a merchant. Cest vn negociant. 

She is a milliner. Cest une marchande de modes. 

They ^re great rogues. Ce sont de grands fripons. 

N.B. If the substantive which follows the verb denotes trade or profession, he, 
she, they, may be expressed by il, elle, ils, elles, but the article must be left 
out; as, • 

Il est negociant. Elle est marchande de modes. 

But the learner will do well, in these instances, to use ce until he has seen the ' 
second part of this book, in which this is more fully explained. 

6* 



6 6 



PRONOUfT, 



RELATIVE PRONOUN, 

Who, Whom, Whose, That, Which, What. 

Qui, Clue, Dont, Gloi, duel, Lequel. 

32. When who, whom, whose, that, which, come after one or 
several substantives which they particularize, they are expresed 7 

gJ W * The man «)Ao ) L' homme qui ) 

| Thh^ > qui. The horse that > comes, Lecheval^ut >vient. 

g- WVitc/i ; ) The excuse to/ttc/* ) La chaise qui ) . 

C Whom, \ The man zu/iom \ L' homme j * 

<~ T/m£, r (o)' The horse which > I see Le cheval que >je vois, 

2, Which;) 1 ; The coach that ) Le carosse que ) 

HTio«e, 1 The man o/?ote ^ L' homme rfonf ) 

* > dont.The horse of which > I speak. Le cheval d«>n£ > je parlc, 

) The chaise of which ) La chaise dont ) 



J U7>ose, ) 
g of W7iO?/», * > (i 
9 o/" VVAtc/i; ) 



N. B. Qwi, ^z/e, cZdm£ must be placed immediately after the 
noun to which they relate ; as, 

Is the ship arrived which was expected 1 
Le navirc qiCon attend ait est-il52 arrive 1 

i. e. the ship which was expected, is it 52 arrrived ? 

EXERCISE. 

Do you51 know the master who teaches me french7? The scholars 

— Connaissez-vous maitre 23 enseigne 24 francais m. 1 ecoliers m. 
tvhom you have recommended to me are very diligent. (This is) 

32 avez recommandes — 25 sont ties 13. Voici. 

the person of whom I (was speaking.) Have you seen the ships thatZ% 

1 personne f. 32 parlais. vu 1 navire fo) 

(are just) (come in 1) You have bought a book which32 is very dear 

viennent d'arriver ? achete livre in. (o) est tres cher. 

The book whiM2 you have bought is very dear. The book of which 

(o) 32 

you speak is very dear. The house is sold whicho2 you wanted to buy. 

parlez 1 maison 1". vendue n.b. vouliez — acheter 

The ladies you want to see are here. The gentleman is gone irhaSl 

dame (r) voulez voir ici. monsieur parti n.b. 

has brought you a letter. He has lost all the money he had. 

apporte 25 1 lettre. f. perdu tout 2 argent(P) avait. 



(o) Persons not versed in grammatical terms, are often at a loss to distinguish the 
object from the nominative, i. e. when to express that, which by qui, and when by 

QVE. 

To these I will observe, that that, which are the nominative, and expressed by 
QUI, when they are followed immediately by a verb ; as, 

The coach tha{ or which is at the door. Le carosse qui est a la porte. 

That which are the object of the verb, and expressed by QUI, when, between them 
and the verb, there is a noun or pronoun which is the nominative of the verb ; as, 

The coach that or which wc have met. Le carosse que nous avous rencontre „ 

(p) The distinctive pronouns whom, that, which are often left out in english ; 
as, The man I saw ; for the man whom I saw ; but the corresponding words qui, que, 
dont must always he expressed in french ; as, 

The man 1 .saw, i. e. whom I saw. V homme que je vis. 

The wine we drank, i. e. which we drank. Le vin que nous biimes. 

The woman I speak of, i. e.of wfwm I speak. Lafemme dont je parte. 



PRONOUN*. 



67 



33. After any preposition but of or a preposition synony- 
mous to it, whom is expressed by qui for both genders and 
numbers. 

Masc, sing. Fern. Masc. plur. Fern. 

Which by le duel, la Quelle, les duels, les duelles; 
From Which by d% duel, de ta (XueUe, des duels, des duelles: 
T,at Which by an duel, a la duelle, aux duels, aux duelles; 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun to which it 
relates ; as, 



The man with whom 
The horse on vrtiich 
The chaise in which 

The man from wham 
The horse from which 
The man to vjhom 
The horse to which, 



I come . 



this fell. 



he gave it. 



L' homme avec qui 
Le cheval sur lequel 
La chaise dans laquelle 
L' horn me de qui 
Le cheval du quel 
L' homme a qui 
Le cheval au quel 



I;- 



vins. 



I ceci tomba. 
[ il le donna. 



You know the lady to whom I have spoken. The study to which 
Connaissez dame 33 ai parle. 2 etude f. 33 

he applies is not very useful. The chair on which you sit is 
s'applique est 55 tres utile. chaise f. sur 33 (etes assis) 

broken 13. The coach in which I came was overturned. The people 
rompu. n.b. carosse m. dans 33 vins fut renverse. gensm, 

with whom I was were very civil. (This is) the stick with which 
avec 33 etais etaient civil 13. Voici baton m. 33 

he struck me. Where is the horse to which you have given the corn'? 
frappa 24. Ou 33 avez donne 2 avoine 1 

34. Who, whom, whose used absolutely, i, e. without refer- 
ence to any noun mentioned before, imply the word person 
understood. 

Who, whom are then expressed by qui ; as, 

WIio is there 1 i. e. what person is here 1 Qui est la. 1 

I know whom yon love, i. e. what person, &c. Je sais qui vous aimez, 

Whose is expressed by de qui, when it is used for of what 
person ; and by a qui, when it is used for to what person ; as. ? 

Whose daughter is she 1 De qui est-elle fille 7 

i. e. (of what person) is she the daughter 1 

Whose house is that % A qui est cette maison % 

i. e. (to what person) does that house belong ? 



EXERCISE. 

Whom did you send? Whom have you found 1 Whom did you 
34 avez 51 envoye ! 34 avez trouve ? 34 avez 

speak to5C? I know whom you are speaking of. 56 Whose hat 
perle a 1 sais 34 — parlez de 34 chapeau in. 

is this % Whose coach . is that 1 1 do not know whose it is, 
est 1 1 34 carosse m. 1 ? — ne sais pas 34 30 

Whose son is he 1 Whose wife is she 1 Whose relat ions are they 7 
34 fils 1 femme ? 34 parent sont-ils ? 



68 



PRONOUN. 



WHICH INTERROGATIVE. 
In an interrogative sentence which requires three distinc- 
tions. 

Which interrogative is either joined to the noun like an 
adjective, i. e. without the help of a preposition ; as, 

Which man 1 Which carriage 1 Which horses 1 

Or, like a substantive, joined to it by the preposition of; as, 
Which fl/ihe men ? Which of the ca rriages ] Which of my horses 1 
Or, like a pronoun used absolutely after the noun ; as, 
It is one of these men ; Which is it 1 

35. Which interrogative joined like an adjective, i. e. with- 
out a preposition, to the noun to which it relates, is 

Masc. sing. Fein. Masc. plur. Fern. 

Which ; duel, duelle, duels, duelles ; 

Of ] from Which ; deduel, duelle, de duels, de Gluelles ; 

To, at Which; a duel, a Gtuelle. d duels, a Gluelles ; 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as, 
Which rqan ) Quel horn me ) 

Which carriage > will you have'? Quelle voiture > voulez-vous'? 
Which horses ) Quels chevaux ) 

36. Which interrogative joined by a preposition to the noun 
to which it relates, or coming after it absolutely, i. e. without 
a noun, is 

Masc. sing. Fern. Masc. plur. Fern. 
Which; le duel, la duelle, les duels, Zes d-ielles ; 
Of, from Which ; du duel, de la duelle, des duels, des duelles ; 
To, at W/iich ; au duel, d la duelle, aux duels, aux duelles ; 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as, 

Which of these men J 

Which of the coaches > will you have 1 

Which of my horses ) 

Lequel de ces hommes J 

Laquelle des voitures > voulez-vous 7 

Lesquelsde mes chevaux j 
Which is the tallest 1 Lequel est le plus haut 1 

Which is the finest 1 Laquelle est la plus belle 1 

Which are the best 1 Lesquels sont les meilleurs 1 

37. Which sometimes implies the demonstrative pronoun 
that or those understood, this demonstrative word can not be 
omitted in french, and which, as including the two words, is 
expressed by 

Celui que m. > tm whkh Cenz que m J ^ whkh 

Celle que f. S ' Cclles que 1. ) 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun to which it 

relates ; as, 

Which of these horses shall I ride ? Lequel de ces chevaux monterai-je ? 
Ride which you will, i. e. that which. Moiitez celui que vous voudrez. 



PRONOUxV. 



69 



EXERCISE. 

Which book shall I read ! Which of these books shall I read 1 
35 livre m. — 51 lirai-je 51 ? 3G 1 51 ?. 

Rend which you please. Which pen shall T make use of56l 
Lisez 37 il vous plaira. 35 plume f. — 51 me servirai-je del 

Which of these pens shall T51 make use of? Use tchich you will. 

36 * 1 — me servirai-je 59 ? Servez-vous de 37 voudrez 

Which boy shall 151 give this to? Which of the boys shall I give 
33 garcon — donnerai-je ceci 56 ? 36 * 1 51 

this to? Give it to which you like. Which lady is the handsomest 1 
56 1 Donnez-le 37 voudrez. 35 dame est belle 21 ? 

Which of these ladies is the handsomest 1 Which ladies do you 

36 1 21 35 — 51 

speak of5G % To ichich do you51 give the preference 1 Which 
parlez-vous51 ? 36 — donnez-vous51 preference f. ? 

fruit do you51 like best? Which of these fruits do you like best ? 
fruit m. — aimez-vous le mieux? * 1 — ? 

W^hich is the ripest ? Eat of which you like. Which road shall 

est mur21 1 Mangez voudrez. route f. — 

we go by56 ? Which of these roads shall we go by 56 ? Which 

51 irons par ? 1 51 par ? 

house shall we51 go to ? Which is the bestl3 1 Go to which 
maison f. — irons-nous 56? meilleur? Allez a 

you choose. Which door must I go through '? Which of these 

voudrez. porte f. faut-i) quije passe par 52 1 

doors must I go through 1 Go thourgh which you please. 

par 56 ? Passez par il yous plaira. 

What requires the same distinction as which. 

38. What followed by a noun, or relating to a noun men- 
tioned before, is expressed in the same manner as which ; 

Masc. sing. Fern. Masc. plur. Fern. 

What ; Quel, Quelle, Quels, Quelles ; 

Of from What; de Quel, de Quelle, de Quels, de Quelles; 

To, at What ; a Quel, a Quelle, a Quels, a Quelles ; 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as, 

What man ^| quel horn me ^ 

What carriage J> will you have 1 quelle voiture J>voulez-vous'? 
What horses J quels chevaux J 

It is my opinion, what is yours 1 C'est mon opinion, quelle est la 
voire ? 

EXERCISE. 

What man has he employed % What language do you51 like bestl 
-38 a-t-il employe ? 36 langue f. — aimez-vous le mieux ? 

What study do you51 apply to56 % What sort of books do 

38 etude f. — vous24 appliquez-vous51 ? 38 sorte f. 8 livre — 

you51 read 1 To what use shall I put ir24 1 What news 
lisez-vous51 ? 38 usage m. — 51 mettrai-je51 le 1 33 nouvelle f. 

are you5l speaking of? What is your sentiment 1 What is yours41 1 
— parlez-vousol 56 ? 38 est sentiment m. ? 38 le votre '? 



* Which may here be either singular or plural, agreeably to the number that is 
meant. 



70 



PRONOUN. 



RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

39. What used absolutely, i. e. without reference to a noun 
mentioned, implies the word thing understood, and is ex- 
pressed by que or by quoi. 

What is expressed by que, when it is the object of a verb ; 

as, 

What are you doing there 1 Que faites-vous la I 

I do not know what to say to her. Je ne sais que lui dire. 

What is expressed by quoi, when it is governed by a pre- 
position, or used as an interjection ; ex. 

What do you meddle wifhbt)? De5t> quoi vous24 melez-vous51 1 
What ! you have not done yet. Quoi! vous n'avez pas encore fini. 

EXERCISE. 

What do you want 1 What do you think of that'? What shall 

39 — 51 cherchez ? 39 — 51 pensez de cela? 39 — 

I do with this 1 Do you know what this is made of? What 

51 ferai de ceci? — 51 savez 39 ceci fait 56? 39 

is it good for56 ? I do not know what you (are talking) about. 

il bon a ? — 55 sais 39 parlez de 56. 

What ! are you not gone yet53 1 What ! you do not answer me. 
39 55 parti encore ? 39 55 repondez 24. 

40. What sometimes implies the demonstrative pronoun 
that, and the distinctive which; it is then expressed, 

Nom. What, ce qui ; Always do what is right ; i. e. that which is right. 

Faites to nj ours ce qui est juste. 
Obj. What j ce que ; H hat I sav is true ; i.e. that which 1 say is true, 
(o) Ce que je dis est vrai. 

But with the prepositions of, to, or any preposition that is 
synonymous to them, it is necessary to* consider whether the 
preposition comes before or after vihat ; for, 

Of what is de ce qui, ) I speak of what is true, i. e. of that which 

de ce que, ) Je parle de ce qui est vrai. 
What of is ce dont ; as, What he speaks of is not true ; i. e. that of which 

Ce dont il parle n'est pas vrai. 
To what is a ce qui, ) You do not apply to ivhat is useful ; to that which 

a ce que; \ Vous ne vous appliquez pas d ce qui est utile. 
What to is ce a quoi ; as, What you apply to is not useful ; that to which 
Ce a quoi vous^vous appliquez n'est pas utile. 

EXERCISE. 

Sav what is true, and do what is just. WhatiO we do hastily 
Dites 40 est vrai, et faites 40 juste. (o) faisons (a la hate) 

is ofien imperfect. Shew me whatiO you have -done. Pay attention to 
souvent imparfait. Mo'ntrez 26 (rn) fait. Faites attention 

vihalAO I say to you. Are you sure of whatiO you say 1 It is what you 
(o) dis — 24 Etes sur (o) dites ? C'est 40 

may be sure of. I would not55 trust to whatiO he proposes. What 

pouvez etre 56 ne voudrais pas me fier (o) propose. 40 



PRONOUN. 



71 



you trust to is very uncertain. He complains of whatiQ he has 
vous vous fiez 56 est tres incertain. se plaint (o) a 

suffered. What he complains of is right. They attribute it iowhateO 
souffert. 40 se plaint 56 juste. attribuent le24 (o) 

I have told you. What they attribute it to has never55 happened, 
dit 25 40 24 n' est jamais arrive. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 







Masc. sing. Fern. 


Masc. 


plur. Fern. 




Mine. 


le Mien, 


la Mienne, 


les Miens, 


les Miennes. 


0/, from 


Mine. 


du Mien, 


de la Mienne, 


des Miens, 


des Miennes. 


To, at 


Mine. 


au Mien, 


a la Mienne, 


aux Miens, 


aux Miennes. 




Thine. 


le Tien, 


la Tienne, 


les Tiens, 


les Tiennes. 




His. 
Hers. 


| le Sien, 


la Sienne, 


les Siens, 


~ les Siennes. 




Ours. 


le Notre, 


la Notre, 


les Notres, 


les Notres. 




[Yours 


le Voire, 


la Votre, 


les Votres, 


, les Votres. 




Theirs. - 


If, Leur, 


la Leur, 


les Leurs, 


les Leurs. 



41. The possessive pronouns le mien, le tien, le sien, &c. 
must be of the same gender and number as the noun which 
they represent ; as, 

Y our ho:se is better than hers, i. e. her horse. 

Votre cheval est meilleur que le sien. 

My house is not so fine as his, i. e. his house. 

Ma maison n' est pas si belle que la sienne. 

Your histories are prettier than his, i.e. his histories. 

Vos histoires sont plus joiies que les siennes. 



EXERCISE. 

Why do not55 you£l eat your cake 1 Your brother has eaten his, 
' Pourquoi — ne mangez-vous pas ] gateau m.1 1 a mange 41 

My sister has not eaten hers. I (will eat) mine (by and by.) Your 

a 55 41. mangerai 41 tantot. 1 

lesson is shorterlS than mine, but (I shall know) mine before you 
lecon f. court 13 41 mais saurai 41 avant que 

know yours. It is not55 your business, it is his. My books are 
sachiez 41 Ce n'est pas 1 affaire f. , c' est 41 livre m. sont. 

finerlS than yours and his. They are not finer than mine. H^Lve 
beaux 41 41 30 55 18 41 

you cleaned my boots'? Yours and mine are cleanl3, but his are not. 
decrotte 1 botte f. ? 41 41 decrotte, 41 nele sont pas. 

42. The possessive words mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, 
theirs, do not always represent a noun mentioned before 
them ; they often come with the verb he used in the sense of 
belong, instead of the personal pronouns me, thee, him, her, us, 
you, them ; as for example, 

This book is mine, i. e. belongs to me ; 
in this sense mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, are ex- 
pressed by a moi, a toi, a lui, a elle, a nous, d vous, d eux, m, 
d elles, f. as, 



72 



PRONOUN. 



This book is mine. Ce livre est a moi ; i. e. belongs to me. 

is thine. est a toi ; to thee. 

is his. est «. ; to him. 

is Aers. est a elle ; to her. 

is ours. est a nous ; to as. 

is yours. est d #fl2A.s ; to you. 

is theirs. est d e?o: ; m. aelles ; i. to them. 

EXERCISE. 

This stick is mine, and this umbrella is Ms. It30 is neither 
1 baton m. 42 1 parapluie m. 42 n'est ni 

yours nor to, it is hers. Is this horse52 yours It is not mine ; 

42 ni 42 30 42 Ce cheyal est-il 52 42 ? 30 55 42 

it is my cousin's. If it was yours, what would you51 do (with it) 1 
30 (q) S' 30 etait 42 • 39 — feriez-vous51 en24 ? 

If it was mine, I (would sell) it*24. I wish it was ours. 

30 42 vendrais 30 (k) souhaiterais qu' 30 fut 42. 

43. The possessive pronouns mine, think, his, hers, ou\s, 
yours, theirs, by an idiom peculiar to the english language, 
are sometimes joined to the noun to which they relate by the 
preposition of ; as a friend of mine : a book of yours ; this 
possessive pronoun can not be expressed by the possessive 
pronoun in french; it must be expressed by the possessive 
article mes, tes, ses, nos, vos, leurs, placed before the noun, 
which must always be plural in french ; as, 

A friend of mine. TJn de mes amis ; i. e. one of my 

of thine. Un de tes amis ; one of thy 

of his. Un de ses amis ; one of his 

of hers. Uu de ses amis ; one of her 

of ours. Un de nos amis ; one of our 

of yours. Un de vos amis ; one of your 

of theirs. Un de leurs amis ; one of their/ 



(This is) a relation of mine. He is a cousin of ours. A brother of 
Voici 1 parent m. 43 (n) est * 43 

mine has married a sister 0/ to. (That is) a child of theirs. I have 

43 a epouse 1 43 Voila enfant m. 42 

seen to-day a scholar of yours. I (shall dine) to-morrow with 
vu (aujour d'hui) ecolier m. * 43 dinerai demain aveo 

a friend of ours. 1 have found a book of yours amongst mine. 

43 trouve livre m. 43 parmi 41 

It30 is not mine; it is my brother's. It is a friend's of mine. 

n'est pas 42 30 (q) 30 (q) 43. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 

Masc. sing. Ff m. Masc. plur. Fem. 

This, that; Celui; Celie. These, those ; Ceux; Celles. 

44. The demonstrative pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles must 



(q) The possession denoted in english by adding s to the noun, is expressed in 
french by a before it ; as, It is my father's. II est a mon pere ; Not, il est de mon pere. 



PRONOUN. 73 

be of the same gender and number as the noun which they 
represent ; as, 

He has eaten his apple and that of his brother ; i. e. the apple of, &c. 
II a mange sa pomme et celle de son frere. 

EXERCISE. 

She has spoiled her hat and that of her brother. He has torn 
a gate 1 chapeau m. 44 1 dechire 

my gown and that of my sister. Bring my shoes and those of my 
1 robe f. 44 Apportez 1 souliers m. 44 

mother. (Look at) thesel guineas and those which32 he has given us. 

Regardez (k) guinees f. 44 (o) a donnees. 25 

N. B. The demonstrative words this, these ; that, those im- 
ply a local distinction which celui, celle, ceux, celles do not 
express ; if you wish to make that distinction in french, you 
must add to these pronouns the adverbs ci, here ; and la, there ; 
thus, 

This; Celui-a, CeWe-ci. These; Ceux-ci, Celles-ci. 
That ; Celui-Zd, Ce[\e-la. Those ; Ceux-Zd, Celles-Zd ; as, 
This horse is better than that ; 

Ce cheval-ci est meilleur que celui-la ; i.e. this horse here — that there. 

EXERCISE. 

Thatl horse is young, and thisii is old, but I prefer this£4 to 
(r) cheval-laest jeune, n.b. vieux, mais prefere n.b. 

thatAi Thesel girls dance much better than those A\ 
n.b. (r) fille-ci dansent beaucoup (e) n.b. 

45. If this, that, are not followed by a noun, nor relate to a 
noun mentioned, they imply the word thing understood, and 
are expressed, 

This, by Ceci ; That, by Cela ; as, 

This is good, i. e. this thing is good. Ceci est bon. 
That is better, i. e. that thing is better. Cela est meilleur. 

EXERCISE. 

Take this. Leave that. Have you seen this 1 That is very pretty, 
Prenez 45 Laissez 45 vu 45 45 tres joli. 



(r) The demonstrative words this, that, these those, have three different proper- 
ties* 

If this, that, these, those are followed by a noun, they have the property of a demon- 
strative article, and are expressed by ce, cette, ces ; as, 

This bread, that meat, those clothes. Ce pain, cette viande, ces habits. See rule L 

If this, that, these, those do not point out a noun after them, but represent one 
mentioned before, they are pronouns, and are expressed by celui, celle, ceux, celles, 
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun which they represent (rule 44.) ; as, 

He has eaten his apple & that of his brother. II a mange sa pomme $ celle de son 
frere. 

If this, that do not point out a noun after them, nor represent one mentioned before, 
they may be considered as substantives, and are expressed this by ceci, that by cela. 
This is good, but that is better. Ceci est bon, mais cela est meilleur. (rule 45,) 

7 



74 



PRONOUN. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUN, 

46. One, we, they, people, used in an indefinite sense, i. e, 
not relating to any particular person, are expressed by On. 

N. B. Observe that On is always the nominative of a verb, 
and though it represents we, they, people, which are plural, it 
requires the verb in the third person singular ; as, 

One says, } ... 

They sly, People say , \ on dlt ' « sa y s - 

EXERCISE. 

1 People are never55 so happy nor so miserable as they imagine, 
46 n'est jamais si heureux ni malheureux qii' 46 s'imagine. 
They say that we (are going) to have peace. They say so ; but can 
46 dit que nous allons — ayoir 7paix, f. 46 le24 ; peu* 

one believe it, when they (are making) such preparations for war7 1 
46 croire le24, quand 46 fait tant de preparatif pour guerre f. ? 

47. The following and other like indefinite expressions, are 
also expressed in french by On, with the verb in its active 
sense. 

N. B. The verb is rendered active by leaving out the 
auxiliary verb be, and making the participle into a verb of the 
same tense and person as the auxiliary verb is ; ex. 

It was said. On disait; i. e. one said. 

It is reported, On rapporte ; one reports. 

EXERCISE. 

It is thought that (there will be) a war. It is said that hostilities 
47 pense qu' il y aufa — guerre. 47 dit que 7hostilit6s 
have already begun. It is supposed that the two fleets have met. 
ontj deja commence. 47 s'imagine que deux flotte se sont rencontrees? 

48. The english passive verbs used indefinitely, require 
the active signification in french, with On for nominative ; 
but observe that by adding on to the sentence, the substan- 
tive,* which is the nominative of the verb in english, be- 
comes its object in french ; as 

I have been told that news has been received ; turn this 
sentence thus, 

One has told me that one has received news. 
On m25 a dit qu' on a recu des nouvelles. 

EXERCISE. 

We have been told that you were married. J have been told so 
48 dit que etiez marie. 48 le24 

too, but that is not true. / was advised to do it. / have not 
aussi, cela n'est pas vrai. 48 avait conseille de faire le24. 48 ne a pas 
been permitted to do it. Do you51 know what is said of youl 
48 permis de 24 — savez - vous51 40 48 dit de 28 ? 



* By substantive is here meant every word which either names or represents a sub~ 
stance. 



VERB. 75 

What can be said of me % It is said that great news is 
39 peut 48 dire 28 ? 47 — dit que lOgrandes nouvelles 48 
expected. Have the letters been received which were expected 1 
attend. 48 lettre 48 recu 32 48 attend&it? 



CHAPTER VL 
VERB. 

A verb is a word which expresses either being or acting. 

Being; as, lam; I exist; Thou art; He is ; My brother 
is ; We are, &c. 

Acting ; as, / speak ; I blame ; I ivalk ; I drink ; I sing, &c. 

Every action requires an agent, i. e. a being to perform that 
action ; this agent, in grammar, is called the nominative of the 
verb. 

49. The verb must be of the same number and person as the 
agent or nominative ; this is called agreement of the verb with 
its nominative ; ex. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL.. 

lp. 1 sing. Je cha?ite. Nous chantons. 

2p. Thou singest. Tuchantes. Vous cfiantez. 

3p. He sings. II chante. lis c/iantent. 

She sings. Elle chante. Elles chantent. f ^'S 

My brother sings. Mon frere chante. Mes freres chantent. ! qT 

My sister sings. Ma sceur chante. Mes sceurs chantent. j £ 

EXERCISE. 

I speak. Thou playest. He walks. She dances. My brother 

parler. jouer. marcher. dans£r. 

stays. My sister forgets. We blame. You study. They look. My 
rester. oublier. blamer. etudier. regarder. 

brothers call or {are calling.*) My sisters dispute or (are disputing.*) 

appeier. disputer. 

50. In a declarative sentence, i. e. when a question is not 
asked, the nominative of the verb is placed in french, as in 
english, before the verb, as, 



* These two modes of expression are rendered in the same manner in french. See 
the conjugations. 



76 



VERB. 



/sing. le chante. Nous chantons. 

Thou singest. Tu chanits. Vous ckantez. I -5 

He sings. II chante. lis chantent. )s~*P 

SAe sings. Elle chante. Elles ctoitent. i 

My brother sings. Mon frcre chante. Mes freres chantent. 

My sister sings. Ma soeur chante. Mes soeurs chantent. 



I speak49 french. Thou speakest french. He speaks french. She 
parlor francais. parler49 parler49 

speaks french. My brother speaks french. My sister speaks french. 

parkr49 parler49 parler49 

We speak french. You speak french. They speak french. My bro- 
parler49 parler49 parler49 

thers speak french. My sisters speak french. They speak it very welh 
parler49 parler9 parler le24 tres bien. 

But when the sentence is interrogative, i. e. when a ques- 
tion is asked, it is necessary to consider whether the nomina- 
tive of the verb is a noun or a pronoun. 

51. If, when a question is asked, the nominative of the verb 
is one of the pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, Us, elles, 
on or ce, these pronouns are placed in french, as the corres- 
ponding words are in english, immediately after the verb ; as, 

Do (s) /sing well? Chante-jebien 1 i.e. sing /well'? 

Doest thou sing well ? Ch&ntes-tu bien 1 singest thou well % 

Does he sing well % Chante-tMZ bien 1 sings he well 1 

Does she sing well ? Chante-t*-*Me bien 7 sings she well ? 

Do we sing well 1 Chantons-wotzs bien 1 sing we well 7 

Do you sing well 1 Chantez-iwws bien 1 sing you well 1 

Do they sing well 1 Chantent-iZs bien 1 sing they well 1 

Do sing well 1 Chantent-<?ZZes bien 1 sing they well 1 

EXERCISE. 

Do Jspeak49 french well53 1 Doest thou speak french well 1 Does 
(s) 51 parler francais bien ? (s) 51 parler49 53 ? (s) 

he speak french well ? Does she speak french well 1 Do we speak french 
51 parler49 53 ? 51 parler49 53 ? 51 parler49 

well 1 Do you speak french well 1 Do they speak french well 1 
53 ? 51 parler49 53 ? 51 parler49 53 ? 

52. If, when we ask a question, the nominative of the verb 
is a noun, that noun is placed before the verb in french, the 
same as when the sentence is not interrogative : but to show 
that a question is asked, one of the personal pronouns il, elle, 
Us, elles, agreebly to the gender and number of the noun, is 
placed immediately after the verb ; as, 



(s) The auxiliary words do, did, shall, will, should, would, may, might are not ex- 
pressed in french ; their meaning is implied in the termination of the verb. 

* When il, elle, on come after a verb ending with a vowel, - 1 - is placed between 
these pronouns and the verb to soften the pronunciation. 



ADVERB. 77 

Does my brother sing Mon frere chante-t-«7 bien ? i. e. my b. sings he ? 

Does my sister sing 3 Masceur chante-t-eZZe bien ? my s. sings she 

Do my brothers sing £. M^sfreres chantent-iZs bien ? my 6. sing they 

Do my sisters sing -^ Mes soeurs chantent-eZZes bien ? my 5. sing they 

EXERCISE. 

Does my brother speak49 french well53 ? Does my sister speak french 
(s) 52 parler francais bient* 1 (s) 52 parler49 

well 1 Do my brothers speak french well 1 f Do my sisters speak 
53 ? (s) 52 parler49 53 ? (s) 52 parler49 

french well ? Does your son go to school now 1 Does your daughter 

53 ? (s) 52 va a l'ecole a present ? 52 

go to school now '] Do your sons go to school now 1 Do your 

va ? (s) 52 vont 1 

daughters go to school now? Do the boys52 make any progress 1 
52 vont ? (s) garpons font 9 progTes plur. 

Do the girlsb% make any progress % Is all your family^ well % 
filles 9 ? se porte toute famille f. ? 



CHAPTER VIL 
ADVERB. 



An adverb is a word added to a verb to denote the manner 
in which an action is performed; as, / walk fast ; he walks 
slowly ; you write well ; she writes badly ; the words fast, 
slowly, well, badly, which denote the manner in which the 
action of the verbs walk and write is performed, are adverbs. 

53. The adverb being to the verb what the adjective is to 
the noun, i. e. expressing some circumstance of the verb, 
must be placed immediately after the verb which it modifies; as, 

I saw your sister yesterday. Je vis hier votre soeur. 

She speaks french very well. Elle parle tres bien francais. 

I will come to see her soon. Je viendrai bientbt la voir.t 



* Place the adverb bien before frangais ; thus, bienfrangais. See 53 rule. 

t The perspicuity of a sentence often depends on the placing- of the adverbs. These 
sentences far example ; J'aime beaucoup a lire, and J'aime a lire beaucoup, though, 
formed of the same words, by changing- the place of the adverb beaucoup, express 
two different ideas. J'aime beaucoup a lire ; means, I am fond of reading ; J'aime & 
lire beaucoup ; means, I like to read a great deal. 



78 



ADVERB. 



EXERCISE. 

You read french very well. I wish t<5 iearn it24 {very much.) 
lisez 7fran<pais m. tres bien53. souhaite — apprendre 30 fort53. 

You will soonbS know it24,if you read the rules attentively I (will do) 
— bientot saurez 30, lisez regies attentivement. ferai 

what you have recommended to me carefully .53 We (shall go) into 

40 " recommande — 25 soigneusement. irons a 

the country to-morrnw. I hope you (will come) to see us often.53 
carnpagne f. demain53. espere que viendrez — voir 24 souvent. 

54, Some adverbs may be placed in english either before 
or after the verb which they modify ; as, I often see him, or I 
see him often. I very seldom speak to him, or I speak to him 
very seldom ; but the adverbs which represent them in french, 
must always be placed after the verb ; as 

I often see him. Je le vois souvent. 

I sometimes meet her. Je la rencontre quelquefois. 

I seldom speak to them. Je leur parle rarement. 

EXERCISE. 

You alwaysh\ walk alone. I seldomM go to town. I generally 
Vous toujours vous promenez seul. rarement vais a la ville. ordinairement 
go into the country. I oftenbi think of you. You seldombk come 
vais a carnpagne f. souvent pense a 28 rarement venez 

to see us now. I sometimes think that you soonbi (will forget) 
— voir 24 a present. quelquefois54 pense que ' bientot oublierez 
us. You cerlainlybi can not think so. I sincerelybi wish that 
24 certainement pouvez 55 penser le24 sincerement souhaite que 

you may succeed. I heartilyCA wish you the same, 
puissiez reussir. de bon cceur souhaite 24 la meme chose. 

55. The negative adverbs 

No, not, are ne — pas, ne — point. 

No more, ) 7 

AT ± > ne — plus. 

Not any more ; J r 

Never ; ne — jamais. 

But little, ) s ■ 

Very little ; ) ne S uere " 

By no means ; ne—nullement. 
. Ne is always placed before the verb, and pas, point, plus, 
jamais, guere, nullement are placed immediately after the verb ; 
as, 

I do not like that woman. Je %'aime pas cette femme. 

I have never liked her. Je ne l'ai jamais aimee. 

I will not speak to her any more. Je ne lui parlerai plus. 

EXERCISE. 

Do not you51 know that man 1 Have you never seen him before 1 
— 55 connaissez 2 'homme 1 Avez 51 55 vu 25 auparavant ? 

Were you not in his company yesterday'? I know him but little. 
etiez 51 55 a I compagnie'f. hier53 ? connais 24 55 
I do not wish to see him any more. I by no means consent (to it.) 
— 55 souhaite — 24 55 55 consens y24. 



PREPOSITION. 



79 



CHAPTER VIII. 
PREPOSITION. 

Prepositions are words which serve to connect other words 
together, in order to form a sentence ; as, 
I am going to London with my father. 

The words to, with, which connect the substantives, Lon- 
don, father to the verb go, are called prepositions. 

56. The prepositions may often be placed in english either 
before or after the substantive which they govern ; as, 

With whom were you, or whom were you with 1 of what 
do you speak, or what do you speak of 1 In french the pre- 
positions must always be placed before the substantive which 
they govern ; as, 

With whom were you ? \ A . 6tiez . vous , 

or whom were you with, ? I 

To whom did you speak 1 ) A . avez . vous parl6 , 

or whom did you speaks? 5 

Of 'what are you speaking 1 | De ^ parlez . vous , 

or what are you speadmg of? ) * r 

EXERCISE. 

What country do you come from ? What people did you come 
38 pays m. — 51 venez de56 ? 38 gens f. etes 51 verm 
with? What news do you speak of? Which road shall 
avec56 ? 38 nouvelles f. 51 parlez de56 ? 35 chemin m. — 

we go Which of these houses shall we go to? What 

51 irons par ? 36 1 maisons f. — 51 irons a56 ? 39 

are you laughing at ? It is what you may depend upon. 
51 riez de56 ? C est 39 pouvez compter sur 56. 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR, To Have ; 
And recapitulatory exercise on the foregoing rules* 

I have a new riband 16. She has a new gownl6. We have 
1 neuf ruban m. 1 13 robe f. 

newl3 stockings. You have newl3 ruffles. They have a fine 
9n.b. basl6 9n.b. manchette 1 beau 

nosegay, (b) I had a good master. She had a good mistress. We 
bouquet, 1 bon maitre. 1 13 maitresse f. 

had good brothers. You had good sisters. They hadlO good friends. 
10 frere de soeurs 9n.b. ami 



* The learner must perus« the verbs before he writes these exercises. 



80 VERB TO BE. 

I had a large garden. He had a great house. We had two 

1 grand jardin. 1 13 maison. 

Iargel3 gardens. You had two greall3 houses. They had a young 

deux 1 jeune 

turkey for their dinner. I shall have a white horse. He will 
dindon pour diner ; 1 blanc cheval 16. 

have a whitel3 waistcoat. We shall have white curtains. You will 

veste f. 9 rideaul6 pi. 

have a bad supper. They will have a bad excuse. I would 

mauvais souper 1 f. 

have delicious fruit. She would have a deliciousl3 pear. We would 
un delicieux m. 16. 1 poire 16 f. 

have a precious jewel. You would have a precious stone. They 

1 precieux joyanl6 piesre. 

would have a bloody war. That I may have sincerel3 friends. 

1 sanglant guerre. 16 f. que 9 ami 16 pi. 

That he may have elevated 9sentiments.l6 That we may have 

eleve 13 pi. 

delightful landscapes. That you may have prepossessingl3 manners, 
delicieux 9 paysage 16 pi. prevenant 9 mannere 16 pi. 

That they may have enlightenedl3 judges, (g) That I might have a 
eclaire 9 jug»16 pi. 1 

sword, a musket and pistols. That he might have a furnishedl3 house, 
epee 1 fusil 9 pistolet pi. 1 garni maisonl6 

That we might have faithfull3 servants. That you might have a 

fldele 9 domestique 16 pi. 
pretty dressing-room. That they might have a beautiful drawing- 
joli cabinet de toilette. ^ 1 superbe salon de 

room, 
compagnie. 

E TRE — To Be. 

. I am sick. Thou art young. He is unhappy. She is unhap- 

malade jeune malheureux. 

py.* We are laborious. You are modest. They are lazy. I 
— rieux — te paresseux 

was prudent. She was prudent. We were discreet. You were 
— * — cret 

studious. They were jealous. Your sisters were jealous. I was 

— dieux. jaloux soeurs 

his intimate friend. She was my greatest enemy. We were 

— me ami 16 plus grand ennemie. 

generous. You were ungrateful. They were cruel. Your daughters 
genereux ingrat — filles. 

were cruel. I shall be a brave soldier. He will be a handsome 

soldat bel 

man. She will be a handsome woman. We will be faithful to our 
homme femme fidele 

country. You will be in continual fears. They will be our mortal 
pays dansdes nuel cranite f. tel 

enemies. I should be ready. She would be troublesome. We 
ennemi pret incommode, 

should be very ridiculous. You would be too eager. They would be 
ties le trop empresse. 



« The adjective or adjectives which follows the verb etre to> be, agreed in gender 
and number with the subject of the verb. 



VERBS IN ER. 



81 



extremely unpolite. That I may be so impatient. That he may 

extremement malhounete si 

be obstinate. That we may be unreasonable. That you may be hu- 

• entete deraisonnable. 
mane and generous. That they may be guilty. That I might 
humain genereux coupable 

be grateful. That she might be careful. That we might be attentive. 

reconnoissant soigneux tif. 

That you might be credulous. That they might be inconsiderate. 

le. indiscret. 



Exercise on the four conjugations er, ir, oir, re. 

VERBS IN ER* 

affirmatively. I Kke49 wine. Thou askest49 for beer. He 
aimert 7vin m. demandert — 9biere f. 

gives49 me water. We are looking49 for flowers. You go49 to see 
donnert 24 9eau. (t) cherchert — 9fieur. allerf — voir 

them. They are looking49 at us. 1 was helping49 him. He 

24 (t) regardert — 24 (t) aidert lui24. 

was disturbing me. We were studying our lessons. You were 
troubler49 24 (t) etudier49 1 lecon. 

singing a song. They were playing in the corner. 1 brought49 

chanter 1 chanson, f. jouer dans coin. m. apporter t 

him24 a book. He admired it24 much. We invited them to stay, 
(i) livre. m. admirer 30 (k) beaucoup. inviter 24 a rester. 

You went away too soon. They arrived in time— I shall dine49 
Yous vous en aLlert — trop tot anfver a terns. (s) diner 

with you. He will send it24 me. We vrill accompany you. You 
avec 28. (s) envoyerf 29 accompagner 24 

will sup with us. They will bring it24 to them. 1 should like49 

souper 28. apporter — 29. (s) airner 

to see it.*24 He would give it you, if you asked him24 for it.29 
a voirle. (s) donner 24 29, si demandiez (i) — le. 

We should stay with you, if we had time. You would avoid his 

rester 28, avions 7tems. m. eviter 1 

company, if you knew him. They would pay them, if they had 
compagnie, f. connaissiez 24. payer 24 , avaient 

money. They would lend them24 some, if they asked them24 for it.29 
9argent. preter (i) (J)29, demandaient (i) — le. 

interrogatively. Do I speak49 too fasti Doest thou advise me 
(s) 51 parler trop vite 1 (s) 51 conseiller 24 

to do it24 1 Does he converse well 1 Do we spend (too much.) 
de faire le ? (s) 51 converser bien ? 51 depenser trop 

money8 1 Do you live in town now? Do they call us] 

argentN.B. ? 51 demeurer a la ville f. a present ? 51 appeller 24- 

Was I striking too hard 1 Was he speaking french 1 Were we 

(t) 51 frapper49 trop fort 1 51 parler francais 1 (t) 51 



* Make the same difference in the verbs which are here given, as is marked in itali c 
characters in the verb blamct*, agreeably to tense, number, axiciperson. 
t See the irregular verb envoyct*. 

(T) Do not express the auxiliary words be, am, art, is, are, xoas, wast, were, when 
they are followed by the present participle in ing. Consider them only as sings which 
indicate the tense in which the verb which follows them must be in french. 

% See t page 83. 




82 



VERBS IN ER, 



going too far 1 Were you sating fruit ? Were they scolding you 1 

aller trop loin? 51 wanger 9fruit m. ? 51 gronder 24 ? 

Did I hurt49 him'? Did he shut the door'] Did we 

(s) 51 blesser 24 ? 51 ferrner 1 porte f. ? 51 
gain any thing? Did you invite them'? Did they insult you? 
gagner quelque chose 1 (s) . inviter 24 ? insulter 24 
Shall I begin49 it24 again ? Will he bring it with him 1 

(s) 51 recommencer le — ? (s) apporter 24 28 

Shall we divide it amongst us 1 Will you think of me] Will 

partager 24 entre 28 1 penser a 28 ? 

they take it24 along with them 1 —Should I lend it him,29 if 

emporter le — avec 28/ (s) 51preter24 (i), 

he asked me for it ? Would he stay with us, if we asked him 1 
I demandait 24 — 29 1 (s) rester avec 28, en priions 24 

Should we dance, if it was not so late ? Would you shew it24 me, 
(s) danser, (s) etait 55 si tard ? (s ) montrer 29, 

if I called at (your house)? Would they change it, if I sent it 
passais chez vous ? (s) changer 24, si renvoyais 

back uvthem 1 Would they forgive me, if I begged theft pardon 1 
— — 29 ? pardonner 24, demandais leur 24 pardon ? 

negatively. I do not blame you. He does not deny it. We 
(s) 55 blamer 24 (s) 55 nier 24 

do not breakfast so soon. You do not give me money8 enough. 
55 dejeuner49 si tot. 55 donner 24 argentN.B. assez. 

They do not cost (so much). 1 vjas not touching it. He was 

55 coutertant. (t) 55 toucher49 y 24. 

not taking it away. "We were not disputing. You were not listening 
emporter le24 — . (t) disputer49. ecouter 

to me. They were not looking at you. 1 did not speak to 

— 24 regarded — 24. (s) 55 parler49 

her. She did not look at me. We did not shew it to them. 

24 regarder — 24 montrer 24 29 

You did not eat any.24 They did not invite us.— I shall not stay49 
manger* (j) inviter 24 (s) 55 rester 

long. He will not incommode you. We shall not play to-night, 
long terns. (s) incommoder 24 jouer ce soir. 

You will not fail to ask for it24. They will not shew il24 you. 

manquer de demander — le. montrer 29 

I should not like49 to go there. He would not borrow money, 8 if he 

(s) 55 aimer a aller y24, (s) emprunter argentN.B. , s' 

had any.24 We should not despise others, if we had no pride.8 
avait (j) mepriser les autres, si n'avions pas orgueil.N.B. 

You would never pardon him, if you knew what he has done. 

55 pardonner lui24, saviez 40 f ait 

They would not blame me, if they knew the pains I have taken. 

blamer 24, savaient peines (p) prises. 

NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. Do I not begin49 right? 

(s)t 51 55 commencer bien? 
Does she not dance well? Do we not incommode you? Do you 
(s) 51 55 danser bien? 51 55 incommoder 24 ? 51 

not breakfast this morning ? Do they not deserve it ? Was I 

35 dejeuner 1 matin m. ? 51 meriter le24 ? (t) 51 

not relating it right 1 Was he not shaking the table 1 Were we not 
55 raconter 24 bien ? 51 remuer table f. ? (t) 51 



* See note,* under blamer 1st table. 



t See * page 59. 



VERBS IN IR. 



83 



walking too fast % Were you not speaking to me % Were they not 
marcher trop vite ? 51 parler — 24 ? 51 

asking you for it29 1 — Did I not shut the door % Did he not give 
demander 24 — le ? (s) 51 55 fermer porte f. ? 51 donner 

her24 some 1 Did we not stay too long ? Did you not encourage 
(i) (J)29 ? 51 rester trop long'tems 1 51 encourager 

them 1 Did they not accompany you 1 — Shall I not bring it24 you 7 
24 ? 51 accompagner 24 f (s) 5155 apporter le 29 ? 

Will he not marry her 1 Shall we not sing a song 7 Will you not 
(s) 51 epouser 24 ? 51 chanter chanson f. 1 55 

grant him24 that favour ? JTiZZ they not refuse it24 me 1 — Would not 
acc order (i) 1 grace f. ? refuser le 29 ? (s) 55 

that book cost less in London than here 1 Would not your father 

52 couter moins a Londres qu' ici t (s) 55 52 

send him to France, if he was older 1 Would he not go himself, 
envoyer* 24 6 etait age 18 ? (s) 51 allerf lui-meme, 

if he had time ! Would not your sister go with him, if he went 1 

avait 7tems m. 1 (s) 52 aller 28, s> il y allait ? 

VERBS IN 1RX. 

regular . I am finishing the work I had begun. He is building. 

(s) finir 2 ouvrage (p) avais commence, (p) batir 

a newl6 house. We are demolishing ours. You are embellishing it24 
neuve maison. f. (t) demolir " 41 embellir 30 

much. They are filling it24 with furniture. — I was reflecting on 
beaucoup. remplir 30 de meubles. (t) reflechir a 

what k I have to do. He was languishing in misery. We were 

40 a faire. languir dans 7misere. f. (t) 

warning them of the danger. You were not applauding what they 
avertir 24 danger, m. 55 applaudir a 40 

have done. Were they not betraying us 7— I punished him severely. 

fait. (t) 51 55 trahir 24 ? punir 24 severement. 

Did he not accomplish his purpose? Did we not obey your orders 1 
(s) 51 55 accomplir dessein m. ? (s) 51 obeir a 1 ordre ? 

You did not choose a good colour. They matched them as well as 

(s) 55 choisir bonne couleur. f. assortir 24 aussi bien qu 7 

they could. — I will banish him from my house. That will rejoice 
purent. (s) bannir 24 de 1 45 rejouir 

us (very much.) We will bless you (as long) as we live. You 
24 beaucoup. benir 24 tant que vivrons. 

will fill what you can find. That will not impoverish them 

emplir 40 pourez trouver. appauvrir 24 

much. — I would cure him, if 1 could. You would finish at once 
beaucoup. (s) guerir 24 , si pouvais. finir tout d'un coup 

our misfortunes. We would abolish it, if we could. You would 

1 malheur. abolir 24, pouvions. 

divert them much. Your brothers would succeed better, if 
divertir 24 1 reussir (b) , 

they were more careful. Will this tree52 blossom this year T Did 
etaient soigneux. (s) 2 arbrem. fleurir 1 anneef. ? (s) 



* See the irregular verb envoyer. 

t Aller, to go, requires a place mentioned after it as je vais a la maison, a la villei 
4c. I am, going home, to town, fyc. If no place is mentioned, we use the reflective 
Terb. Sen aller, see the conjugaion of that verb. 

X See the regular verb fini^ and make the same difference in these verbs. 



84 



VERBS IN IR. 



it30 blossom lastlG year 1 Young trees seldom54 blossom two years 
51 fleurir derniere 7 ? TJeunes rarement fleurir deux 

together. Do the fruits ripen well 1 Do they51 not often54 wither on 
(de suite.) (s) 52 m. murir ? 30 souvent se fletrir a 

the tree 1 Do they51 not commonly54(grow rotten) ] (Here are) several 

2 1 (s) 30 ordinairement pourir 1 Voici plusieurs 

sorts of fruit; choose which you like best. Fill* your basket 
sorte f. 8 ; choisirt 37 aimer le mieux. Rernplir corbeille f 

(with it.) Enjoy it while it will last. We will supply you 
en26. Jouir t en26 pendant que 39 durer. fournir 24 

with pears and apples, as fast as they will ripen. The children 
— 9poiref. 9pomme f., aussi vite qu' 30 " murir. enfant m. 

will rejoice (very much,) for they are very54 fond of fruit, and it 
se rejouir beaucoup, car — beaucoup aimer — 7fruit, 30 

is growing dearer every day. I hope that they will obey you, for 
— enchehr — touts les jours, espeier qu' obeir 24 , car 

children who disobey their parents seldom54 succeed. 
7 32 desobeir a 1 parent rarement reussir. 

irregular. I am perusing this book. Does it51 belong to you ? 

(t) parcourir* 1 livre. m. (s) 30 appartenir* — 24 1 
It belongs to a friend of mine. Runt fast. Why do not you run 
30 appartenir* 43 Courir vite. Pourquoi 55 courir 

faster 1 We are running as hard as we can. For whom are 

Tite 18 ? (s) courir 20 vite 20 pouvons. Pour 34 (t) 

you gathering these flowers'? We are gathering them for your 
cueillir 1 fleur ? cueillir 24 pour 

mother. I will offer them to her, that she may remember me. 

offrir 24 — 29, afinqu' se souvenir de 28 

Does not your mother hate mel Why should she hate you 7 ? 

(s) 52 hair 24 ? 51 hair 24 ? 

Because she never comes to see us. He maintains that he has not 
Parceque 55 venir — voir 24. soutenir qu' 55 

done it, but I firmly54 believe that he lies. Was your sister asleep, 
fait 25, fermement crois qu' mentir. (t) * 52 dormir, 

when we set out % They came in as we ivere going out. They 

quand partir — ? entrer — comme (t) sortir — 

were running to us, when we discovered them. I came yesterday 

accourir vers 28, decouvrir 24 venir 

to see you, but you were not in. I went out early in the morning, 
pour 24, etiez 55 y24. sortir — de bon — — matin, m. 

and I did not return till late. I met your father, and he 

(s) nej revenir que* tard. recontrer 
consented to every thing that I proposed to him. Did my father 
consentir a tout ce que proposer 24. (s) 52 

offer you any money *? He offered me all the money that I should 
offrir 24 9 argent ? offrir 24 tout dont aurais 

want. We went out (as soon) as the dinner was over. You did 
besoin. sortir — aussitot que diner m. fut flni. 

not set out so soon as you intended. They detained us a good 
partir — si tot que (aviez dessein.) retenir 24 — long 

while at the inn. At what time will you set out to-morrow % 
terns a 2 auberge. a 38 heure f. (s) partir — demain ? 



* See the irregular verbs in ir. 

t 2d person imperative. 

t Ne que, without pas, expresses not title. 



VERBS IN OIR. 



85 



We shall set out as soon as we are ready. When will you return 1 

(s) partir — aussitot que serons pretl3. Quand revenir? 
We shall not return before the end of nextlG week. Shall I 

55 revenir avant fin f. prochaine Tsemaine. f. 

help you to a glass of wine 1 Help yourself first. I will help 
servir 24 — verrem. 8 vin ? Servir vous26 le premier. servir 
myself after you. I will never co'risent (to it.) You grow more 
me24 apres 28 55 consentir y 24. devenir 

ceremonious every day. Why do you not come to see us 
ceremonieux touts les jours. Pourquoi 55 venir — voir 24 

oftener 1 Why does not your sister come with you 1 When ivill 
souventl8 ? , 52 venir avec 28 ? 

your brother return from his journey % Will he not set out as soon 

52 revenir de voyage m. 1 55 partir — aussitot 

as he hears that you are going (to be married 1) Will your mother 
qu' apprendra que aller vousmarier? 52 

consent to your marriage 1 Will she not obtain your father's con- 
consentir mariage ? 55 obtenir 11 con- 

sent 1 If I were in your place, I would not go out so soon, 
sentement m. ? etais a place, (s) 55 sortir — si tot. 

Would my brother obtain that place, if he asked lor it k 24 1 Should 

(s) 52 obtenir 1 place, f. demandait — 30 (k) 

the children go out, if it was fine weather 1 It is too late ; they 

52 sortir — , s' il faisait beau terns ? (L) trop tard ; 
would not return in time for supper. They would not remember 

55 revenir a tems pour souper. 55 se souvenir 

it.24 They would soon54 feel the want (of it.) 
en29. bientot sentir besoin m. en 24. 

VERBS IN OIR* 

Does that man52 owe you any thing? He owes me a 
(s) 2 homme devoir 24 quelque chose 1 devoir 24 — 

(great deal) of money. (How much) does he owe you 1 I do not 

beaucoup 8 argent, m. Combien devoir 24 ? 55 

know exactly ; but I can get nothing from him. You should tell 
savoir au juste ; ne pouvoir tirer rien de 28 devoir (u) dire 

him24 that you want it. You should get him arrested. He is 

(i) que avez besoin en24. (u) faire 24 arreter. devoir(v) 
to pay me part (of it) in a day or two. If you receive it24 
— payer 24 une partie 24 en 29 dans jour m. ou deux. recevoir 30 

to-morrow, will you lend me eighteen or twenty pounds 1 I 
demain, vouloir preter 24 dix huit ou vingt livres sterling ? 

can not55 lend you (so much.) I can lend you24 ten or twelve, 
pouvoir preter 24 tant. pouvoir preter vous en29 dix douze. 

Lend me what you can. Were we not to take a walk this 
Preter 26 40 pourez. Devoir (v) 55 — faire un tour de promenade 1 

evening? Yes, we were; but the master will not let me (go out) 
soir m.l Oui, le devoir(v) ; vouloir laisser24 sortir 



* See the verbs in oir. 

(v) Should, denoting duty, or the necessity of doing a thing, is expressed by the con- 
ditional of devoir ; as, You shculd or ought to do it. Vous devriez le faire. 

(v) The present tense of the verb be, am, art, is, are, and the imperfect was, were, 
followed by the infinitive of a verb, are expressed by the same tenses of devoir ; as, ' 

I am to go there. Je dois y aller. I was to go there. Je devais y aller. 

8 



86 



VERBS IN RE. 



before I have said my lesson. Can you say it24 now ? I de 
(avant que) aie (lit 1 lecon f. Pouvoir dire 30 a present ? 
not know whether I can say i«24 or not ; but I knew it,24 when 
savoir si pouvoir dire 30 ou non ; savais 30, quand 

I came in. You do not know ii24 yet. I shall know it24 in a little8 

suis entre. savoir 30 encore. savoir 30 en — peuN.B. 

time. 1 can say it24 now. A see your sister who is coming 
terns pouvoir dire 30 a presenw^voir 32 (t) venir 

to help us. We do not see her often, but we sometimes hear 
— aider 24 voir 24 souvent, quelquefois 54 recevoir 

(from her.) You shall see her to-morrow, if you will, for I know 
(de ses nouvelles.) voir 24 demain, vouloir, car savoir 

that she intends to call upon you. If you will believe me, we will 
qu' (a dessein) de passer chez 28. vouloir croire 24, 

go. I think that it will rain soon. If it rains, do you know 
s'en alter, penser pleuvoir bientot. pleuvoir, savoir 

what we will do'* We will sit down under that large tree, until 

40 ferons ? s'asseoir sous (R) grosl? arbre m. (jusqu' a 

the rain is over. I can not55 stay. I do not know what I must 
ce que; pluie f. soitjpassee. pouvoir rester. savoir 40 devoir 

do. It will not rain much. It is only a shower, 
faire. pleuvoir Ce n'est qu' 1 ondee. f. 



VERBS IN RE* 

What are you doing there 1 I am waiting for my brother, 
39 (t) 51 faire la ? (t) attendre — 
He is learning his lesson in the garden. If you see him 7 
(s) apprendre 1 lecon f. dans jardin. m. voir 24, 

tell him26 that I am waiting for him here. I hear you. Why 
dire (l) que attendre 24 ici. entendre 24. Pourquoj. 

do you interrupt me so often 1 Do you pretend to know that better 
(g) interrompre 24 si souvent ? pretendre — savoir 45 (e) 

than I do 1 I will not interrupt you (any more.) These people 
que 23 — ? (s) ne interrompre 24 plus55 1 gens 

sell lOvery badl7 wine. They sell it24 very dear. I never drink 
vendre tres mauvais vin. m. vendre 30 cher. 55 boire 

wine,8 when they46 sell it24 so dear. Do you hear that man % 
vin n.b., quand n.b. vendre 30 si (s) entendre 2 ? 

He is speaking to us. 1 hear him, but I do not understand what 

(t) parler — 24. entendre 24 , comprendre 40 

he says. I was answering your letter, when I heard that you were 

dire. (t) repondre a lettre, quand (ai appris) que etiez 

in town. You surprise us quite, for we did not expect you 
en ville. surprendre 24 (tout a fait,) car (s) attendre 24 

so scon. I came down as soon as I heard you. If I return 
is tot. descendre — aussitot que entendre 24. rendre 

them24 their goods, will they return me my money ^ They would 

(i) marchandise, rendre 24 2 argent 1 

not return you one half (of it.) I would lose the whole rather 

rendre 24 la moitie 24 en 29. perdre tout m. plutot 

than submit to such terms. What are you learning now 1 
que (de me soumettre) a lOtelles conditions. 39 (t) apprendre a present ? 

I am learning mathematicks. Do you understand them well 1 I 
apprendre 7mathematiques. entendre 24 bien ? 



* See the verbs in re. 



VERBS IN RE. 



87 



understand them pretty well. If you take 9 pains, you will make 
entendre 24 assez bien. prendre de la peine, faire 

•greatlT progress in a short8 time. Does your sister learn 7music 
10 progres en — peuN.B. (s) 52 apprendre musique 

still53 % No; she is learning french7 and geography. Do you read 
encore? Non ; (r) appreiflBre francais m. 7geographie. f. (s) lire 
frenchlG books now ? I am reading Marmontel's tales. I do not 

91ivre a present ? (r) lire 11 7contes. 

like tales. I like plays. Do you translate any book % I translate 
aimer7 7comedies. traduire quelque ? traduire 

engiishl6 histories into freneh. I pity you much. Why do you 
anglais 13 9histoire f. en francais. plaindre 24 fort. Pourquoi 
pity me 1 ? Because you are losing your time, and you displease all 
plaindre 24 ? Parceque (t) perdre terns, et que deplaire a toutl3 

your friends. I do not fear them. I do not depend upon them. 

1 ami. m. craindre 24. dependre d' 28. 

I will do what I think proper. That man is always54 laughing. Do 
faire 40 croire a propos. 2 (t) toujours rire. 

you know what he is laughing at 1 He does not know it 24 himself, 
savoir 39 (t) rire de56 ? 55 savoir le lui-meme. 

Let us drink* your friend's health. What shall we drink 1 Drink a 
— — boire a 11 7sante. f. 39 (s) boire ? Boire t 

glass of wine. I will drink a glass of beer. I will not permit you to 
verre m. 8 (s) boire 8 biere. 55 permettre 24 de 

do that. Promise me not to do it.24 Well! I promise it to you. You 
faire 45 Promettret 26 de ne pas faire le. Eh bien ! promettre 24 — 29. 
always promise, but you seldom54 keep your word. I do not believe 
toujours54 promettre, mais rarement tenir parole. 55 croire 

what he says. Why do not you believe him 1 Do you mean to 
40 dire. " Pourquoi 55 * 51 croire 24 ? 51 vouloir — 

say that he lies 1 I do not say so ; I only54 say that people often54 
dire qu' mentir ? 55 dire cela ; seulement dire que 46 n.b. souvent 

promise what they46 do not intend to perform. What are you 
promettre 40 n.b. 55 avoir dessein de faire. 39 (t) 

sewing there 1 I am making a gown for a sister of mine. For which 
coudre la ? (t) faire 1 robe f. pour 43 36 

of your sisters are you making it24 % For the youngest. You are 

1 (t) * faire 30 ? jeune 21 . 

always54 doing and undoing the same thing over again. Put out 
toujours faire defaire 1 meme chose f. — — Eteindre t 

one of these candles. ■ Putt these books into their places again, 
une (r) chandelies. f. Remettre (r) livre a 1 — 
Why do you not pay attention to what I say to you ? Will the 
Pourquoi faire attention 40 dire — 24? 

master permit us to (go out) to day 1 . 1 do not know ; ask 

52 permettre 24 le sortir aujourd'hui ? savoir ; demander 

it26 him.29 He will not live long, if he drinks (so much.) Yet, 

(i) vivre (long terns) si boire tant. Cependant, 

he appears to enjoy good health, 
paraitre — jouir d'une bonne sante. f. 



* 1st person imperative. 



1 2nd person imperative, 



88 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
Have you seen my mother 1 I have seen her, but I have not spoken 

voir ? voir * 25 , parler 

to her. Has your sister done what she had promised me to do 7 

25 52 faire 40 ajait promettre 25 de faire? 

Why has she not done it 1 Has your father forbid her to do 

Pourquoi 55 faire 25 ? 52 defendre lui25 de faire 

it24 / ? Has your brother been where I had told him 1 Has he 

le ? 52 etre ou avais dire lui25 ? 

received the letter which32 my sister has sent him 251 Have you read 
recevoir lettre f. (o) envoyer * (i) lire* 

it25? Has your father bought the horse which32 I had recommended 
30 (k) 52 acheter (o) avais recommander 

tohim25 / ? Has he- tried it 7 Has my mother brought any body 
(i) essayer 25 ? 52 amener quelqu' un 

with her 1 Are your brothers gone out 1 Have your sisters 
avec 28 ? 52 sortir plur. — ? 52 

finished the work they had begun % They ivould not have done 
finir ouvrage(p) avaient commencer ? 55 faire 

it so soon, if they had not been compelled (to it.) I have met 
25 si tot, avaient 55 forceea y 25. rencontrer 

a man on (horseback) who has asked me the way to (your house, 
a cheval demander 25 chemin m. chez vous 28. 



REFLECTIVE VERBS.t 

affirmat. I am getting up. He is washing himself. We 
(t) se lever — (t) se laver 24 

are dressing ourselves. You are amusing yourselves. They are 
(t) s'habiller 24 s'amuser 24 

getting ready to (go out.) I was getting up, when you called me. 
s'appreter — a sortir — . (t) se lever — , quand appeler 24 

He was warming himself in the parlour. We were conversing by 
se chauffer 24 dans salle f. (t) s'entretenir pres 

the fire. You were (making merry.) They were laughing at us. 
du feu. se divertir. se moquer de 28. 

interrog. Do I get up too late 'J Does that man (run away) 1 
(s) 51 se lever— trop tard? (s) 2 52 s'enfuir ? 
Does your bird52 (grow tame)*? Do we warm ourselves 

(s) ' oiseau m. s'apprivoiser ! 51 se chauffer 24 

(too much)'? How do you do 7 ? How does your sister do 7 ? 

trop? Comment 15 se porter? 52 se porter? 

Was I coming too near 7 ? Was he hiding himself? Did we 

(t) s'approcher pres ? se cacher 24 ? 51 

expose ourselves (too much) % Were you inquiring after them 7 
s'exposer 24 trop ? s'informer d' 28 ? 

negativ. I do not care for him. He does not mistrust them. 

(s) 55 se soucier de 28 (s) 55 se mefier de 28 

We do not repent (of it29). You do not rise early enough. They 

se repentir en24. se lever assez matin 

do not meddle with his affairs. I did not stop. He did not 
se meler de 1 affaire. (s) s'arreter. 55 



* This participle must be feminine. 



t See the reflective verb se blamer. 

4 ' 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



89 



undress himself. We did not sit down. You did not awake in. 
se deshabiller 24 . s'asseoir — - . s'eveiller a 

time. I did not expect that they46 would have called me up so soon* 
%ems. s'attendre n.b. (s) eveiller 25 — si tot. 

interr. <md negat. Am I not mistaken? Does he not apply to 
(t) 51 55 se tromper ? (s) 51 55 s'appliquer 

study7 ? Ltewe not walk to-day ? Why do not you (make 
2etude ? 51 se promener aujourd'hui ? Pourquoi 55 51 se 

haste)? Why do not you (get ready)? Do you not rejoice (at the) 
depecher ? 51 s'appreter ? 51 serejouir des 

goodl3 news we have received? Do you not remember what I 
17 nouvelles f.(p). recues ? se souvenir de 40 

have told you? No; I do not remember it29. I do not recollect it29. 
dit 25 se souvenir en24. se rappeler le24. 

COMPOUND TENSES, 

affir. I have (gone to bed) late. Thou hast soon (fallen asleep). 

* se coucher tard. * bientot s'endormir.t 

He has awoke early. We have (got up) before you. You have 

* s'eveiller de bon matin. * se levert avant 28 * 

hurried yourself (too much). They have dressed themselves in haste, 
se pressert trop}. * s'habilJert a la hate. 

inter. Have I (gone away) too soon ? Hast thou bathed lately? 

* 51 s'enallert trop tot ? * 51 se baigner depuis peu? 
Has he amused himself well ? Have we undressed ourselves 

* 51 s'amuser bient? * 51 se deshabillert 

too soon? Have you been well since I saw you? Have 
tot ? * 51 se porter t depuis que n'ai vu 25 ? * 

they stopped too long? Have they (got ready) in time? 
51 s'arretert trop long terns 1 * 51 s'appreterf a terns 1 

negat. I have not been well to-day. Thou hast not complained (of it), 
* 55 se porter t * 55 se plaindre en 29 

He has not perceived it much. We have not walked long. 

* 55 s'appercevoir en29 t * 55 se promenerf long terns. 

You have not rested enough. They have not (sat down) a moment. 
* 55 se reposert assez.t * 55 s'asseoirt un moment. 

inter, and negat. Have I not (made haste) enough ? Hast thou 

* 51 55 sedepechert assezj ? * 51 

not (caught cold) ? Has she not married too young? Have we 
55 s'enrhumer ? * 51 55 se marierf jeune ? * 51 

not mistaken the way? Have you not inquired after them? 
55 se meprendret de chemin ? * 51 55 s'informert d' 28 ? 
Have they not applied to you? Have they not (been mistaken)? 

* 51 55 s'adressert 28 1 * 51 55 se trompert ? 



* In the compound tenses of the verbs that are made reflective, the auxiliary verb 
have can never be expressed by the verb avoir ; it must be expressed by the same 
tense and person of the auxiliary verb etre to be. See the compound tenses of the 
reflective verb blamer. 

t This participle must agree in gender and number with the nominative of the 
^erb. See Syntax, Rule 158. 

t This adverb must be placed before the participle in french. See Syntax, Rule 183. 

8* 



90 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 



THE CONJUGATIONS 

OR 

ACCIDENCE OF VERBS. 

A verb, as has been seen, page 77, is a word which ex- 
presses either being or acting. 

As the same action may be performed in different manners, 
at different times, and by different persons, it was found ne- 
cessary to modify or vary the same word, so as to denote the 
manner in which an action is done, the time in which it is 
done, and the person or persons by whom it is done, and this 
is what grammarians call conjugation. 

The manners of acting, in grammar called modes or moods, 
are four ; infinitive, imperative, indicative, subjunctive, or con- 
junctive. 

The times, in grammar called tenses, are properly three on- 
ly ; past, present, and future ; but, in order to express time 
with more precision, these are again divided into other tenses, 
the use of which will be seen in the syntax of verbs. 

The persons who act in a verb are generally three for each 
number. 

1. The person or persons who speak ; s.s,Iblame ; we blame. 

2. The person or persons spoken to ; as, thou blamest ; you 
blame. 

3. The person, persons, or things spoken of, as he, she, my 
brother, my sister blames ; they, my brothers, my sisters blame. 

The modifications or variations by which these moods, 
tenses, and persons are known, differ, according to the dif- 
ferent languages. 

In english,the difference is shewn by the means of certain 
signs prefixed to the verb ; as, do blame ; did blame ; shall or 
will blame ; should or would blame ; may blame ; might blame. 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 



91 



In trench, it is made by changing the last syllable of the 
word ; as, je bldm e, tu bldm es, il bldm e, nous bldm ons, 
vous bldm ez, ils bldm ent ; je bldm ais ; je bldm ai ; je bldmer 
ai ; je bldmer ais, &c. * 

This variation in the tenses and persons, simple as it is, be- 
cause it is nearly uniform, is nevertheless found embarrassing 
by some persons. 

The difficulty lies chiefly in the present and perfect tenses 
of the indicative and subjunctive moods, and in the imperative. 

In order to remove it as much as possible, I have placed in 
one point of view, the tenses which are either similar or part- 
ly similar, or formed from one another, that, by perceiving at 
once the similarity or the difference, the learner's mind may 
be more easily impressed with it. 



* The signs by which these inflections or variations are made, not being the same 
in all verbs, the conjugations must also be various. 

The number of them is not exactly fixed, and varies in almost every grammar. 
Some fix it at four, some at six, some at ten, some at eleven, some at twelve. 

It appears to me that their number must either be limited to four, or extended to 
twelve. 

As amongst such a number of conjugations, out of which there will still be a great 
number of irregular verbs, it is very difficult for learners to distinguish of what conju- 
gation a verb is ; and as the infinitive of all the french verbs ends in one of these ter- 
minations ek, ir, oir, re, the only signs by which each different conjugation maybe 
discriminated, I have thought it more simple to fix their number at four. 1 

Alf verbs which may be conjugated after the same manner as one of these four, 
are called regular. 

Those verbs which can not be conjugated like one of these four, are called irre- 
gular, and set in an alphabetical order after the regular, so that the learner can never 
be mistaken as to the manner of conjugating any verb which he may have need of, 
by paying attention to the termination of the infinitive only. 



92 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 

Infinitive Mood or Manner. 
To have. A voir. 



Have. 

Let us have. 
Indicative Mood. 
have. 
S 77w?4 hast. 
ttHe has. 
~ have, 
es Yew have, 
p They have. 
jg7 had. • 

TAaw hadst, 
S i& had. 
had. 

5 Y<w had. 
p T/tey had. 
j)/hadJ 
^T%^ hadst 
8 had. 

£ ffc had. 
p Yom had. 
P TAey had. 
^ J shall or will have, 
r- TAwz, shalt, wilt have. 
+e He shall, will have. 
8. JFe shall, will have. 

Yow shall, will have. 
P Tftey shall, will have. 
^3/ should, would have, 
o Thou shd., wld. have. 
§ He should, would have. 

6 We should, would have. 
5* You should, wld. have, 
g They shld., wld. have. 



Imperative Mood. 
Aie, sing. 



J't ai.5? 
Tu as.26 
/J a. 

Nous2b av ons.26 
F(9^s av ez.26 
Its onr.26. 
J' av ais.6 
TV av ais.§ 
II av ait. 26 
Nous2b av ions. 
F<ms av iez.| 
lis av aient.6 
J't eus.12 
Tu eus.ll 
J7 eut.26 
Nous2b e umes. 
Vous eutes.26 
lis eurent.18 
J' 8aurai.5 
Tu auras.26 
II aura. 

Nous2b aurons. 
Vous aurez. 
lis auront.26 
J' 8aurais.6 
Tu aurais.§ 
II au rait. 26 
Nous2b aurions. 
Vous auriez. 
Us auraient.6 



Ayez, plur.* 
Ayons. 

Subjunctive Mood, 
J' aie.6 
Tu aies. 
II ait.26 
Nous ayons.4 
Vous ayez. 
Us aient.6 



J eusse.2 

Tu eusses.26 
II eut.26 
Nous eussions. 
Vous eussiez. 
lis eussent.18 



9- 



P 



P 



S3 - 

p 

<; 



Gerund, or Present Participle. Participle Past. 

Having. Ayant. Eu. Had. 

The same Verb conjugated Interrogatively, 



Have I? 
Hast thou ? 
Has he ? 
Has she ? 
Has my brother ? 
Has my sister ? 



Ai-je5H 
As-lubl / 
A-t-ilbl ? 
A-t-ellebl ? 
Mon irere a-t-^52 ? 
Ma soeur a.-l-elleb2? 



Avons-nousbl ? 
Avez-vousbl ? 
Ont-?7s51 ? 
Ont-ellesbl ? 
Mes freres ont-iZs52 ? 
Mes sceurs ont-ellesb2 ? 



p 

< 
at 



* The plural is generally used instead of the singular, though speaking to a single 
person. 

t See note J page 47. 

t These figures refer to the pronunciation, see page 2. 
t) See note 6, page 4. 

II See, syntax of verbs, the distinction betweenjroat'j and eus, 
1" These figures refer to the rules. 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 



93 



The same Verb Avoir conjugated Negatively. 

Infinitive. 
Not to have. Nepas avoir. 



Have not, 

Let us not have. 



Imperative. 
iV'*aie, 



or TV' ayez > 
N avons \ r 



I have not. 
Thou hast not. 
He has not. 
We I 

You > have not 
They ) 

Thou ] 
He 
We 
You 
They 
I 

Thou 
He 
We 
You 
They 
I 

Thou 
He 
We 
You 
They 
I 

Thou 
He 
We 
You 
They 



^had not. 



>had not. 



! shall 
{ not have 



shld. 



Indicative. 

Je ai5 ^ 
Tu tC as 

11 n ' a l<nas t 

Nous ri avons26 C pa 

Vous n 1 avez j 

lis rc' ont26 J • 

Je avais6 

Tu n' avais 

II ri avait26 

Nous tO avions 

Vous rC aviez 

lis n 1 avaient6 

Je n' eus26 

Tu n' eus 

II w» eut26 

Nous n 1 eumes 

Vous ri* eutes 

lis n 1 eurentl8 

Je n 1 aurai5 

Tu kC auras 

willll n 1 aura 

Nous n' aurons 

Vous n' aurez 

lis n 1 auront26 

Je n 1 aurais6 

Tu n 1 aurais 

wld. 11 ?i' aurait 



>pas. 



>pas. 



>pas. 



> not have. Nous ?i' aurions ^ 
Vous iC auriez 
lis n' auraient6 



Gerund. 
Not having. N ay ant pas. 



Subjunctive. 
Je n'aie6 
Tu w'aies 
II 7&'ait26 
Nous Rayons 
Vous w'ayez 
lis ?&'aientl8 



B 



P 



Je w'eusse 
Tu w'eusses 
II 7i'eut26 
Nous %'eussions 
Vous w'eussiez 
lis ?&'eussentl8 



0*1 



Ypas. 



Participle. 
Pas eu. iV^ had. 



The same Verb conjugated Negatively and Interrogatively. 



Have I \ W ai-je5U 

Hast thou f . « 2V' as-^51 
Has he (™ U 2Va-t-tZ51 ' 
Has she * iV' a-t-eZfe 

Has tm£ my brother'? Mon frere w'a-t-z752 
Has wo£ my sister % Ma sceur %'-a-t-e/Ze52 £ 



N 1 avons-nous 
JV' avez-7^ws 



N' ont-27s51 
N cmt-ellesbl 
Mes freresw'ont-z'Zs 
Messceursw'ont-d/es £ 



* See note t page 47. t See the negative adverbs, rule 55. 

t See note IT page 92. 



94 



AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 



AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 

Infinitive Mood. 



To be. 



Eire. 



Be. 

Let us be. 
Indicative. 

^1 am. 
$ Thou art. 
&He is. 
~ We are. 
S Vtftt are. 
« TAei/ are. 
^ / was. 
3 TAflu wast. 

£fe was. 
n We were. 
5 You were. 
* TAey were. 
^ J was. 
« TAtm wast, 
r^i/e was. 
£ We were. 
S Vflu were. 
™ TAey were. 
*3J shall or will be. 
r 7%<ma shalr, will be. 
>g J/<? shall, will be. 
%We shall, will be. 

Yiw4 shall, will be. 
ft They shall, will be. 
^/should, would be. 
~ TAaw should, would be. 
g He should, would be. 
&We should, would be. 
pi* You should, would be. 
~ They should, would be. 



Imperative. 
Sois, SING. 



Je'S tsuis.26 
Tu es.26 
II est.26 
Nous sommes. 
Vous etes.26 
lis sont.26 
J 1 et #is.6 
et ais. 
n et ai7.26 
Nous et i<ms.26 
F(9^5 et iez. 
lis et aAent.6 
JeZ tfus.26 
7\4 fus.t 
JR fut.26 
iVows fumes. 
Fims futes.26 
7/5 furent.18 
Je3 serai.5 
Tit seras.26 
II sera. 
Nous serons. 
Vous serez.26 
lis seront.26 
JeS serais.6 
Tu serais. 
II serait.26 
Nous ser ions. 
Vous seriez. 
lis seraient.6 



Soyez. plur.* 
Soyons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je3 sois. 23 

Ttosois.26 
II soit.26 
Nous soyons.4 

Vous soyez. 
lis soient.18 



Je3 fusse.2 
Tu fusses.26' 
11 fut.26. 
Nous fussions. 
Vous fussiez. 
Us fussent.18 



Gerund, or 


Present Participle* 


Participle Past. 




Being. 


Et ant. 


Ete. Been. 




The same Verb conjugated Interrogatively. 




Am I? 


Suis-;e51 ? 


Sommes-7to^s51 ? 


H 


Art thou ? 


Es-tu&l ? 


Etes-vousbl ? 


CD 


Is he? 


Est-2751 3 


Sont-i/551 ? 




Is she ? 


Est-elle5\ ? 


Sont-ellesb} 1 


-o 


Is my brother ? 


Mon frere est-z752 ? 


Mes freres sont-iZs 52 ? 


&» 


Is my sister ? 


Ma sceur est-elle&2 ? 


Mes sceurs sont-*M«52? 


o 



* The plural is generally used instead of the singular, though speaking to a singlt 
person. 

t See note 2, page 1. 

t See, syntax, rule 140, the distinction between etais and/te*. 



AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 



95 



The same Verb etre conjugated Negatively. 



Not to he, Ne pas etie. 

Imperative. 
Be not. Ne sois, or Ne soyez ) 

Ne soyons J paS ' 



Let us no£ be. 

Indicative. 
I am Je3 ne suis 

Thou art not. Tu es26 
He is n<^. II n' esi26 

We j 

| are no£. Vous ?i'etes 
) lis nesont26 

SJe3 »' etais6 
w&snot.Tu. n' etais* 
II n' 6tait26 
1 Nous »' etions 

> werenc^Vous tV etiez 
) lis ?i'etaient6J 
) Je3 ne fus 

> was Tu Tie fus* j 
) li ?tefut26 ! 
I Nous ne fumes | ^ 
>weren0£ Vous futes j 
) lis ne furentl8 J 

Je3 ne serai5 ^| 
Tu ne seras 
II ne sera 



You 
They 
I 

Thou 
He 
We 
You 
Tney 
I 

Thou 
He 
We 
You 
They 
I 

Thou 
He 
We 
You 
They 
I 

Thou 

He 

We 

You 

They 



Nous ?iesommes \ / P as ' 



ypas. 



shall, will 
not eb. 



Nous ne serous 



ypas. 



Vous ne serez | 
lis neseront26 J 
Je3 ne serais6 ^ 
Tu we serais j 
shld.wld.il neserait 
not be. Nousneserions j P a ' 
Vous ne seriez | 
Us ne seraient6 J 



Gerund, 
Being not. n'etant pas. 



Subjunctive. 
Je3 ne sois23 
Tu ne sois 
II ne so it 26 
Nous ne soyons 
Vous ne soyez 
lis ne soient!8 



>pas. 



Je3 ne fusse "\ 
Tu ne fusses j 
11 ne fut26 ! 
Nous ne fussions y 
Vous ne fussiez j 
lis ne fussent!8 J 



Participle. 
pas ete not been 



The same verb conjugated negatively and interrogatively. 
^ ne suis-je^\ ne sommes-nous ~) 



Ami 

Is she J 



ne suis-^'e^ 
n' es-iw 
n' est-il 
n' est-elle j 



}pas? 



ne sommes-?ww5 
n' etes-rans 
ne sont-zZs 
ne sont-e/Zes 



Is not my brother 1 Mon frere n'est-ilpas? Mes freres ne sont-z'Zs pas? 
Is n#£ my sister % Ma soeur n'est-elle pas ? Mes soeurs ?ie sont-eWes pas ? 



* See, syntax, rule 140, thje distinction between avais andeus ; etais and/ws. 



96 



THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS 



THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS ER, IR, OIR, RE* 
A Table, shewing in one point of view, the difference between 



Infinitive. 
Blam er. 



ER. 

Gerund, 
ant. 



Par tic. 
e. 



Indicat. Imperat. Subjunct 



^Je blam 

pll 
" Nous 
S Vous 
^Ils. 
£Ve? blam 
J% Tu 

8 Nous 

co VOUS 

' lis 

*DJe blam 

"Z Nous 
S Vous 

rt> lis 

**lJe blamer 
f*Tu 

►tf 11 

w Nous 
Vous 

CO Il s 

^Je blamer 
o Tu 
$11 
^Nous 
so Vous 



e. 
es. 
e. 

ons 

ez. 

ent. 

ais.i 

ais. 

ait. 

ions. 

iez. 

aient. 

ai. 

as. 

a. 

dmes. 

dies. 

erent. 

ai. 

as. 

a. 

ons. 

ez. 

ont. 



e 



e. 
es. 
e. 

ons. ions, 
ez. iez. 
ent. 



asse. 
asses, 
at. 

assions. 
assiez. 
assent. 



ais.i 
ais. 
ait. 
ions, 
iez. 

^ Us aient. 

* After the same manner as Bla- 
mer are conjugated all the verbs the 
infinitive of which ends in er, (abou 
2700 in number) except Aller and 
Envoyer. Observe only, that in the 
verbs in ger, as, Changer, Manger, 
Songer, the e is retained before a, o 
in order to soften the sound of g ; so 
instead of saying Change, Mang 
ons, Songons ; Chang&zs, Mangaw, 
Songais ; we say, Change0?w>, iVlang 
eons, Songeons ; Changeais, Mang 
eais, fyc. 



Infinit. 
Fin ir. 

Indicat. 
Fin is. 



IR. 

Gerund. Part, 
issant. i. 



Imperat. 



is. 



issons. 
issez. 



Subjunct. 
isse. 
isses. 
isse. 
issions. 
issiez 
issent. 



Fin 



Fin 



isse. 

tsses. 

U. 

issions. 

issiez. 

tssent. 



is. 
it. 

ISS071S. 

issez. 
issent. 
issais.f 
issais. 
issait. 
issions. 
issiez. 
issaient. 
is. 
is. 
it. 

tmes. 

ttes. 

irent. 
Finir ai 

as. 

a. 

ons. 

ez. 

ont. 
Finir aisf. 

ais. 

ait. 

ions. 

iez. 

aient. 

After the same manner as Finir 
ire conjugated about 220 verbs in 
ir, bot h primitive and compound. 

Compound verbs are those whose 
signification changes by the means 

>f a preposition prefixed to them ; 
is defleurir, to lose the blossom ; re- 
!leurir, to blossom again; which are 
conjugated like their primitive/Zew- 
rir, to blossom; defaire, to undo; 
refaire, to do again ; which are 
conjugated like their primitive 
] faire, to do. 



* These are the only signs by which it can be known to what conjugation a verb be- 
longs. By paying attention to the termination of the infirtitive, and altering the same 
number of letters as are here marked in italic, i. e. those ending in er after blam er, 



ER, IR, OIR, RE. 



97 



the Four Conjugations, and how the tenses of a Verb proceed 
from one another. 





OIR. 






RE. 




Infinit. Gerund. 


Par tic. 


Infinit. Gerund. 


Partic. 


Dev oir. 


ant. 


Du. 


Attend re. 


ant. 


u. 


IndicaL Imperat. 


Subjunct. 


IndicaL Imperat. 


Subjunct. 


Dois. 




Doive. 


Attend s. 




e. 


Dois. 


Dois. 


Doives. 


s. 


s. 


es. 


Doit. 




Doive. 


Attend 




e. 


Dev ons. 


ons. 


W7LS. 


ons. 


ons. 


ions. 


ez. 


ez. 


iez. 


ez. 


ez. 


iez. 


Doivent. 




Doivent. 


enL 




enL 


Dev ais.i 






Attend ais.i 






ais. 






ais. 






ait. 






ait. 






ions. 






ions. 






iez. 






iez. 






aient. 






aient. 






Das. 




Dusse. 


Attend is. 




isse. 


Dus. 




Dusses. 


is. 




isses. 


Dut. 




Dut. 


it. 




it. 


Dumes. 




Dussions. 


zmes. 




issions. 


Dutes. 




Dussiez. 


Ues. 




issiez. 


Darent. 




Dussent. 


irent. 




issent. 


Dev rai. 






Attendr ai. 






ras. 






as. 






ra. 






a. 






rons. 






ons. 






rez. 






ez. 






ront. 






ont. 






Dev r ais.i 






Attendr ais.i 






rais. 






ais. 






rait. 






ait. 






Hons. 






ions. 






riez. 






iez. 






raient. 






aient. 







After the same manner as De- 
voir are conjugated Redevozr, Per- 
cevoir, Apercevoir, S'apereevtfir, 
Conceal/-, Recevflzr. 

N. B. This verb is not regular ; 
if it is found here amongst the reg- 
ular, it is because its termination 
requires a conjugation of its own. 
The words which are irregular are 
printed wholly in roman charac- 
ters ; the regular are the italic ter- 
minations added to the roman 
letters. 



After the same manner as At- 
tendre are conjugated Batre, 
Abatre, Combaire, Debate, Ra- 
batre, Rebatre, Fendre, Defendre, 
Descendr£,Condescendre,Fondre, 
Confondre, Refondr<?, Morfondre, 
Rompre, Corrompre, Interromp- 
■re, Ponclre, Repondre, Corres- 
pond?^, Repandre, Mordre, De- 
mordre, Tendre,Etendre, Entend- 
re, Preiendre, Rendre, Penary 
Depends, Vendre, Perdre, Tor- 
dre, Retordre, Tondre. 



those in ir after fin ir, those in oir after dev oir, and those in re after attend r«r, and 
with the assistance of the tables of the irre?ular verbs, it is impossible for any person 
to commit errors which he is not himself able to rectify, 
t See note 6, page 4. 

9 



98 



REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 



REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 

Infinitive Mood. 



To Blame. 



Blam er. 



Imperative. 
Blame. Blam e, sing 

Let us blame. 

Indicative. 
*v t blame, or am ¥Je3 Blam e.2 
3 Thou blamest, art | Tu Blam es.26 
xsHe blames, or is ~-Il Blam e. 
£ We ) blame, qq Nous Blam <ws. 
p > are 

They ) blaming 



~Tkm 



was 

' blaming.* 

' were 
I blaming. 



blamed or 
did blame. 



shall, will 
blame, 
or be 
blaming. 



should, 
would, 
(blame, or 



Vous Blam ez. 
Ils26 Blam ent.lS 
Je3 Blam ais.6 
Tu Blam ais. 
II Blam ait.26 
Nous Blam ions. 
Vous Blam iez. ( 
iZs26 Blam aient.6 
Je3 Blam ai.5 
TV Blam as.26 
II Blam «• 
iVows Blam awes. 
Fbw.s Blam aies. 
Ils26 Blam erewU8 
Je3 Blamer ai.5 
Tu Blamer as.26 
II Blamer a. 
Nous Blamer ons. 
VoV;S Blamer ez. 
Ils26 Blam ont.26 
Je3 Blamer ais.6 
Tu Blamer ais. 
II Blamer ait.26 
Nous Blamer ions. 



r-They J 



be blaming. Vous Blamer iez. 



Ils26 Blamer aient.6 



Gerund. 
Blaming. 



Blam ez, plur, 
Blam ons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je3 Blam e.2 
Tu Blam es.26 
II Blam e. 
Nous Blam ions. 
Vous Blam iez. 
Ils26 Blam ent. 18 



5 



2; 

i 



Je3 Blam asse.2 
T'w Blam asses. 
7Z Blam d£.26 
Nous Blam assions. 
Vous Blam assiez. 
Ils26 Blam asse?*£. 18 



cr 

3 



Blam a?iZ. 



Participle. 
Blam e. Blamed. 



Interrogatively. Negatively. 



Inter rogativ. and Negativ^ 
Blame-je ? ^ Je ne Blame ~ Ne Blame-je 

Blames-^ ? £ Tu ne Blames | o Ne Blames-^ 



Blamons-nows Nous we Blamons 
Blamez-vaws ? ^ Vous ?ie Blamez 1 



J Ate Blamons-?i<ms 
g Ne Blamez-vous 



>pas?\ 



Blament-iZs ? 9 lis ne Blament J ? Ne Blame nt-zZs 

N. B. After the same manner as Blamer conjugate all the verbs, the 
infinite of which ends in er, except alter and envoyer, p. 102, 103.t 



* Never say je suis bldmant, tu es bldmant, il est bldmant,f etais bldmant, AfC. See 
note (t) p. 81. 
t See note* page 95. 



REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 



99 



Compound tenses of the verb Bldmer, formed by adding the participle 
Blame to the auxiliary Avoir. 

Infinitive Compound, 
To have blamed. Avoir Blame. 



Indicative. 

*"dl have ) 

$ Thou hast > blamed. 

x He has ) 

2 We 1 

~g You > Aawe blamed. 
4j Thoul 

o We \had blamed. 

3.You I 
^They J 
£1 ^ 
ftThou J 

g-^ \had blamed. 
5 We • 

p:You 

* They J 
*3I 1 
&Thou ( 

g He I shall, will 
g We J Aawe blamed. 

You 
^ They J 
OI 



&He ^should, wld. 
^ We * /toe blamed, 
g You I 
P They J 



J' ai 
Tu as 
II a 

NOUS (2^071$ 

Vous ave^r 
lis ont 
T avais 
Tu avais 
II a??<u£ 
JNous avions 
Vous 

lis avaient) 
J' e^s 
Tu 

11 ewtf 
Nous ewwes 

VOUS €lto 

lis eurent 
J' 

Tu awras 
11 aura 
Nous aurons 
Vous aurez 
lis auront 
T aurais ~) 
Tu aurais ( 
11 aurait vhl A me 
Nous aurions ( 
Vous auriez j 
lis a.uraint J 



Subjunctive. 
J' ^1 
Tu #ies I 

bl4mfi *NousajL 

Vous fl^e^r j 
lis <aie?^ J 



> blame. 



> blame. 



Tu e&sses 
« , ]A , II ew£ 
f Diame, Nous eussions 
I Vous eussiez j 

J lis eusseni J 

I 

V blame. 



Vblai 



<3 



Gerund. 
Having blamed. 



Ay ant Blame. 



Participle. 
eu Blame. 



Had blamed 



Interrogatively. 
Ai-je 
As-tu 
A-t-il 

Avons-nous 
Avez-vous 
Ont-ils 



Negatively. 
Je y&'ai 
Tu ?i'as 



?i a 



1 



Interrog 'ly and NegaHy* 



iV'ai-je 
N'&s-tu 



Vous w'avez | 
Us w'ont J 



avons-wows 



N'&vez-vous 
N'ont-ils 



pas 

blame ? 



* See, syntax of verbs, the rules on the past participle. 



100 



REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 



The verb Blamer made reflective.* 



Infinitive. 



To Blame oneself. 



Se Blamer. 



Imperative. 
Commanding 26 rule, page 60 . 
Blame thyself, blam e - toi. 

yourself, blam ez - vous. 
Let us blame ourselves.blam ons - nous. 



Forbidding 27 rule, page 61, 
Ne te blam e ) 
Ne vous blam ez \pa§ 
Ne nous blam aws ) 



/ 1 

Thou I 
He 
We 
You 
They j 

I 1 

Thou 

He 

We 

You 

They J 

/ 

Thou 
He 
We 
Yon 
They J 

I 1 
j 

We [ 
You I 
They J 
/ 

Thou 
He 
We 
You 
They J 



I? 



Indicative. 
myself, 
thyself, 
himself, 
ourselves, 
yourselves, 
themselves, 
myself, 
thyself, 
r himself, 
ourselves. 
• yourselves, 
themselves, 
myself. 
: thyself. 

himself. 
! ourselves. 

- yourselves, 
themselves. 

- myself. 
< thyself. 

himself. 
; ourselves. 
; yourselves. 

themselves. 
' myself. 
' thyself. 

himself. 
! ourselves. 

yourselves. 

themselves. 



Subjunctive. 
Je3 me blam e. Je3 me blam e. 
Tu te blam es. Tu te blam es. 
II se blam e. 11 se blam e. 
iVTws nous blam ons. iVtms nous blam 



Fras vous 
7/5 se 
J<? me 
Ti* te 
11 se 
i\0%s nous 



blam ez. 
blam £7i£. 
blam #is. 
blam #is. 
blam az£. 
blam ions. 



Vous vous blam iear. 
Us se blam en2. 



I 
or 

3 

CP 

5 



Fows vous blam iez. 
lis se blam aient. 
Je me blam ai. 
T'm te blam as. 
se blam a. 



Ji? me blam asse. § 
Tfo te blam asses. ^ 
se blam at. ^ 
iV02£S nous blam dmes. Nous nous blam assions — 
Vous vous blam ates. Vous vous blam assiez. g 
i/s se blam ere?^. i2s se blam assent. 



J<? me blamer ai. 
!Tw te blamer as. 
II se blamer a. 
Nous nous blamer cws. 
F^s vous blamer ez. 
lis se blamer ont. 
Je me blamer ais. 
Tu te blamer ais. 
II se blamer 
iVtfws nous blamer ions. 
Vous vous blamer iez. 
Us se blamer a lent. 



3 



Interrogatively. 
Me blame-je ? 
Te blames-^? 
Se bllme-t-iZ? 

Nous blamons- nows ? 
Vous blamez-uous ? 
Se blament-tZs ? 



Negatively. 
Je ne me blame 
TVrae te blames 
Ilnese blame 
Nous ne nous blamons pas 
Vous ne vous blamez pas. 
lis ne se blament pas. 



Inter ro'ly. and NegHy. 
Ne me blame-je ) 
pas?Ne te blames-ta >^as? 
Ne se blame-t-iZ ) 
iVe nous blamons-nous pas ? 
Ne vous blamez-vous pas? 
Ne se blame nt -Us pas ? 



^Sometimes it happens that the agent, or person who acts, is also the object, i. e- 
acts upon himself, as when 1 say ; /blame myself ; Thou preparest thyself ; He dis- 
tinguishes himself; We wash ourselves ; You dress yourself ; They expose themselves, 



REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 



101 



Compound tenses of the reflective Verb Se Blamer, formed by adding 
the participle Blame, to the auxiliary verb etre, 

Infinitive Compound. 
To have blamed oneself, S'etre blame. 



/ 1 

Thou 



He 
We 



You I 
They > 

Thou 1 
He [ 
We f 
You I 
They J 

I ^ 

Thou , 
He I 
We ( 
You | 
They J 

I 1 

Thou I 
He { 
We f 
You I 
They J 

I , 
Thou 
He 

We > 
You , \ 
They J 



Indicative. 
|" myself. 
£ thyself, 
cr himself, 
g ourselves. 
| yourselves. 
^ themselves, 
ft myself. 
^ thyself. 
2 himself. 
§ ourselves. 
§ yourselves. 
^ themselves. 
|" myself. 
^ thyself. 
2 himself, 
g ourselves. 

yourselves, 
themselves. 

£ myself. 

thyself, 
p himself. 
I* ourselves. 

1 yourselves, 
£ themselves, 
w myself, 
p! thyself. 
> himself. 
I ourselves. 
J. yourselves. 
5* themselves. 



/e3 me st/ts 
Ttt t>* es 
iZ s' est 
Nous nous sommes 
Vous vous efes 
77s se sont 
Je m' etots 
^Tw t' etais 
11 s' etoif 
Nous nous eft'ons 
Vow5 vous etiez \ 
lis s' etaient \ 
Je me /ws i 
Tu te 

JZ se fut ) 
Nous nous fumes ) 
Vous vous fut es 1 
lis se furent ) 
Je me serai \ 
Tu te seras > 
11 se sera > 
iVows nous serons ) 
Vous vous sere;? > 
lis se seront ) 
Je me serais ) 
Tu te serais > 
IZ se serait ) 
iVows nous serious ~) 
Fows vous senez J» 
i7s se seraient) 



Subjunctive. 



\ Blame, m. 
} tee. f. 

r Blames, rm 
S ees. f» 

[ Blame, m. 
I ee. f. 

\ Blames, m. 
i ees. f. 

Blame, m, 
ee. f. 

Blames, m, 
ees. f. 

Blame, m» 
ee. f» 

Blames, m, 
ees. f. 

Blame, m. 
ee. f. 

Blames, m. 
ees. f. 



Je3 me sois 
Tu te sois 
11 se soit 
Nous vous soyons 
Vous vous soyez 
lis se soient 



Je 
Tu 
II 



me fusse 
te fusses 
se § 
Nous nous fussions ^ 
Vows vous/wssiez <j| 
i7s se f us sent 



Interrogatively. 
Me suis-je ) 
T' es-*« > blame ? 
S' esf-iZ ) 
Nous sommes-nous ) S 
Vous etes-vous > 
Se sont-ils ) «s 



Negatively. 
Je ne Me suts ' 
Tw ne T» es 
/2 ne S' es* ! 



pas blame. 



Nous ne Nous sommes p 
Vous ne Vous etes pas 
lis ne Se sont pas 



Interrogatively and Negatively* 

Ne Me suis-je \ 

Ne T' es-fu >^as blame" ? 

iVe S' -esf-t'Z ) 
Ne Nous sommes-nous p\ £■£ 
iVe Vous etes-vous pas > 
Ne Se sont-ils pas j ox 



<$-c. by which you see that the person who is the agent, performs the action on him- 
self, and consequently is also the object. These verbs the French call reflechis, i. e, 
reflective, or reflected, because the energy of the verb returns to its agent. They 
differ in nothing from the other verbs, but in requiring an objective pronoun of the 
same number and person as the agent, or nominative, and in having their compound 
tenses formed with the auxiliary ETRE, instead of the auxiliary avoir. 

N. B. These verbs are known in the dictionaries by having SE before their infini- 
tive. 

* See note} page 47. 

tSee, syntax of verbs, the rules on the past participle,, 



102 



IRREGULAR VERES IN ER. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN ER* 

Infinitive . 



To go. 

Go. Va, sing, 
Let to$ go. 

Indicative. 
/ go, or am °g 
». T*A<?ia goest, ar£ 5 
%He goes, or 15 ? q 

•o Thou I was going. 

I 

£ r 

8 Ybw | were going. 
» They J 

um 

TAey^ 

m 



Aller. 



Imperative. 



All cr. 
All ons. 



went, or 
"did go. 





Subjunctive. 


»/e3 vais6. 


J' aille. 


7\ vas26. 


Tit ailles. 


7/ va. 


iZ aille. 


Nous all tfTZ-s. 


Nous all ions. 


Ftf&S all e^. 


Vous all ie~. 


iZ vont26. 


JZs aillentlS. 


J' all a 156. 




Tii all ais. 




II all azZ26. 




Nous all itf^s. 




F(5W5 all iez. 




lis all aient6. 




J" all-ai5.t 


J 5 all asseQ, 


TV all as26. 


Tu all asses. 


iZ all a. 


II all dm. 


iVcws a 11- awes. 


Nous all assions. 


F<?%s all dies. 


Vous all assiez. 


lis all erent. IS 


Us all assent. 


«/' irai5. 




iras.26 





p. We 
9 They j 

s 14 e 

J 



IsWZ, wiZZ go, 
j or be going. 



^should, wd. go. 
or be going. 



Gerund. 



Going. 



11 ira. 
Nous irons. 
Vous irez. 
iZs iront.26 
J' iraisG. 
TV irais. 
7Z iraii26 
Nous irions. 
Vous iriez. 
Us iraient6. 

All ant. 



or<* 
o 



4 

S3 



OfQ 
O 



Participle . 
All e. Gone. 



iV. /?. Aller, to Go, requires a place mentioned after it ; as, 
Je Vais a Za maison, d Za ville, &c. lam going home, to town, &c. 
If no place zs mentioned^ we make the verb reflective as follows : 



* A verb is called irregular, when all its tenses and persons cannot be formed from 
the infinitive, by changing only the last syllable, as you see in the verb BLAMER. 

In order to render the difference more obvious, the tenses or persons which are 
formed regularly from the infinitive, have their terminations printed in italic charac- 
ters, the words which are irregular are printed wholly in roman. 

t Fus, Fus, Fut ; Fumes, Futes, Furent, the perfect tense of etre, is often used in- 
stead of Allai, Alias, Alia; AHdmes, Allales, Allerent, the perfect of aller ; as, / ; 
allai or je fus en France I* annee derniere ; I went to France last year. I would prefer 
allai to fus. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN ER. 



103 



Infinitive. 

To go away. S' en All er. 



Imperative. 



Forbidding rule 27, page 61. 
Ne t' pn va pas. ) do not go, 

Ne Votis en AUe.z pas. J away. 
Ne Nous en Allocs pas. let us not go. 

Subjunctive. 



Commanding rule 26, 60. 
Go away, or I va-t-en, sing. 

be gone, ) A\\ez-Yoas-en, pi, 
Let «s go away, Allons-Nous-en. 

Indicative. 

r OS 

J go, or am o 
Tnoa goest, aft § 
ife goes, or is ^ 
We \ go, are § 
You > going 4* 
They ) away. 
I was going away. 
I went away. 
I shll, vjill go away. 
I shd, wld go away. 
I am no£ going away. 

Compound tenses, formed by adding the participle alle to the aux- 
iliary verb etre. 

I have~\ /e m'en suis Alle. 

Thou hast | § Tu Ven es Alle. 

He nas I * 7Z s'en est Alle. 

We have ( | iVoas nousensommes Alles, 

You Aaue | g Vuus vous en etes Alles. 

They have J lis s' en sont Alles. 



Je m' en vais 


Je 


m'en aille. 


Tu Ven vas. 


Tu 


t'en ailles. 


JZ s'en va. 


II 


s'en aille. 


Nous nous en Allows, 


Nous 


nous en Al Hons. 


Vous vous en Allez, 


Vous 


vous en Alliez, 


JZs s'en Vont. 


lis 


s'en aiilent. 


Je m 'en Allow. 






Je m'en Allat. 


Je 


m'en Allasse. 


Je m'en irai. 






Je m'en irais. 






Je ne m'en vais pas, &c. 







ENVOYER, To Send. 

The sole irregularity of this verb is in the future and in the condi- 
tional, the other tenses being formed regularly in the same manner 
as Bldmer. 

Infinitive. 
To send, Envoy er. 



Indicative; 
Pres. /send. 
Imp. / did send. 
Perf. /sent. 

Futu. / 1 

Thou i 

He \ shall, or 



J' Envoys.* 
J' Env oy ais. 
S Envoys, &c, 
J' enverai.5 

Tu enveras. 

II en vera. 



Subjunctive. 
J> Envoys, &c. 

J 1 Envoy asse, &c. 



We I will send. iV<ms enverons. 
You | Tows enverez. 

They j Us enveront.26 

Cond.J ^ J' enverais.6 

Thou j 7% enverais. 

i/<? \shld. or enverait.26 
JFe [wld. send. A r 6>%s enverions. 
Ffltt J Vous enveriez. 

They J Us enveraient.6 

Conjugate in the same manner 5 Renvoy er, to Send bach, to Dismiss, 



The modern Grammarian changes the y into i before an e mute, 



104 



REGULAR VERBS IN 1R* 



REGULAR VERBS IN in. 

Infinitive. 

To finish. Fin if. 

Imperative. 
Finish. Fin is, sing. 
Let us finish. 



Indicative. 
5/ finish , or am %>Je3 20 fin is26. 
g» Thou finishest, art |T« fin is. 
r?He finishes, or is fin it26. 

a We ) n ■ , ott Nous fin issons. 

I Yen, \l ms \> oxare -Vousfouscz. 
JrA C jr nlshlD S- Ms fin issentlS. 
g / ^ Je3 fin issaisG. 

^ T%om finishing. Tu fin iss#is. 

! II fin issait26. 

g We f iVattS fin issions. 

' werefinishing. Fows fin issie^. 



k They] 

!?/ •] 

^ 7%<w I 

^.He (finished 

« fTe fc^cZ finish. 

* They] 



j2 TAow 
%We 

8 He 

ss* You 
t-They j 



sA#ZZ, wzZZ 

finish, 
be finishing. 



should, would 

finish, 
be finishing. 



Gerund. 
Finishing. 



lis fin issaient6. 
JeS fin «26. 
TV fin zs. 
iZ fin i*26. 
Nous fin £??ies. 
Vous fin £res. 
iZs fin irent2%. 
JeS finir #i5. 
7% finir as. 
11 finir ft. 
Nous finir <ms. 
Fcws finir ez. 
Es finir cwZ26. 
Je3 finir aw6. 
TV finir #zs. 
11 finir «^26. 
iVo«5 finir ions. 
Vous finir ife 
IZs finir aient6. 

Fin issant. 



Fin t'sstf?, ^Zwr. 
Fin issw. 

Subjunctive. 
Je3 20fin iwgg. 
T% fin isses. 
11 fin is.se. 
iVtfws fin issions. 
Vous fin tssi^. 
lis fin issentlS. 



Je3 fin 2sse2, 

T% fin ZSStfJ. 

7Z fin U26. 
Nous fin issions. 
Vous fin 

fin tssent26. 



3 



53 



Fim 



Participle. 

Finished , 



Interrogatively. 



Finis-je ? - 
Finis-*u? 
Finite? J S 
Finissons-nous ? 
Finissez - vous 1 
Finissent-tZs ? 



Negatively. 



Je tie Finis ") 
Tu ne Finis | 
II ne Finit ( 
Nousne Finissons f pas ' 
Vous ne Finissez 
lis ne Finissent J 



Interrogatively and Negatively. 

NeFims-je ^ 
JVe Finis-ta \pas 1 
Ne Finite J 
iVe Finissons-nows p. 
iVe Finissez - vous p. 
Ne Finissent-iZs pas 



After the same manner as finir are conjugated the follo w- 
ing verbs, 

*'Abatardir, to degenerate. Abolir, to abolish. Aboutir, to end. 

f'Abetir, to grow stupid. Abonnir, to better. s'Abrutir, to become stupid. 

Accomplir. 



REGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



105 



Accomplir, to accomplish. 
Accourcir, to shorten. 
s'Accroupir, to sit squat. 
Adoucir, to soften. 
Affadir, to render tasteless. 
Affermir, to strengthen. 
AlFaiblir, to weaken. 
Affranchir, to free. 
Agir, to act. 
Agrandir, to enlarge. 
Aguernr, to inure to war. 
Aigrir, to exasperate. 
Alentir, to slacken. 
Am aigrir, to grow lean. 



Derougir, to take off redness. 
Desobeir, to disobey, 
se Dessaisir, to give up. 
Desunir, to disunite. 
Divertir, to divert. 
Durcir, to harden. 
Eblouir, to dazzle. 
Eclaircir, to brighten. 
Elargir, to widen. 
Embellir, to embellish. 
Emplir, to fill. 
Encherir, to grow dearer. 
Endurcir, to harden. 
Enforcir, to grow strong. 



Ameublir, to make moveable. Enfouir, to bury. 



Amoindrir, to lessen. 
Amollir, to soften. 
Amortir, to redeem. 
Aneantir, to annihilate. 
Anoblir, to ennoble. 
Appauvrir, to empoverish. 
Appesantir, to make heavy. 
Applanir, to level. 
Applatir, to flatten. 
Applaudir, to applaud. 
Approfondir, to fathom. 
Asservir, to enslave. 
Assortir, to match. 
Assoupir, to make drowsy. 
Assouplir, to supple. 
Assourdir, to deafen. 



Enhardir, to embolden. 
Englouiir, to swallow up. 
Engourdir, to benumb. 
Enlaidir, to grow ugly. 
s'Enorgueillir, to grow proud. 
Enrichir, to enrich. 
Ensevelir, to put in a shroud. 
Envahir, to invade. 
Epaissir, to thicken. 
Epanouir, the bud opening. 
Equarrir, to square. 
Etablir, to establish, 
Etourdir, to stun. 
Etrecir, to narrow. 
s'Evanomr, to faint. 
Farcir, to stuff. 



Assouvir, to glut, to satiate. FJechir, to bend, to move. 
Assujettir, to subdue. Fletrir, to wither. 

Attendrir, to move to pity. Fleunr,£o blossom, to flourish 
Atterrir, to approach the land.F ouir, to dig. 
Avertir, to warn. Fourbir, to furbish. 

Avilir, to revile, to debase. Fournir, to supply. 



Bannir, to banish. 
Eatir, to build. 
Benir, to bless. 
Blanchir, to whiten. 
Blemir, to grow pale. 
Bleuir, to make blue. 
Blondir, to grow fair, 
se Blottir, to lie squat. 
Bondir, to skip. 
Brandir, to brandish. 
Brouir, to blast. 
Brunir, to burnish. 
Candir, to candy. 
Cherir, to cherish. 
Choisir, to choose. 
Clapir, to squat, to clap. 



Franchir, to leap over. 
Fremir, to shudder, 
se Froidir, to grow cold. 
Garantir, to warrant. 
Garnir, to furnish. 
Gemir, to groan. 
Grandir, to grow tall. 
Grossir, to grow big. 
Guerir, to cure. 
Hennir, to neigh. 
lnvestir to invest. 
Jaillir, to spout out. 
Jaunir, to grow yellow. 
Jouir, to enjoy. 
Languir, to languish. 
Meurtrir, to bruise. 



Compatir, to compassionate. Moisir, to grow mouldy. 
Conveitir, to convert. Mollir, to grow soft. 

Crepir, to roughcast. Mugir, to low. 

Croupir, to stagnate. Munir, to store. 

Debratir, to take the rough-Mnnr, to ripen. 

ness. Nantir, to give security. 

Definii, to define. Noircir, to blacken. 

Defleurir, to lose the blossom.Nowcrir, to feed. 



Degarnir, to disgarnish. 
Degourdir, to warm a little. 
"Deguerpir, to move off. 
Demolir, to demolish. 
Deperir, to decay. 
Depolir, to unpolish. 



Obeir, to obey. 
Obscurcir, to obscure. 
Ourdir, to warp. 
Palir, to grow pale. 
Parfournir, to take up. 
Patir to suffer. 



Deroidir, to take off stiffness. Perir, to perish. 



Pervertir, to pervert. 
Petrir, to knead. 
Polir, to polish. 
Pourir, to grow rotten 
Premunir, to provide. 
Punir, to punish. 
Raccourcir, to shorten. 
Racornir, to make tough. 
Radoucir, to soften. 
Raffermir, to strengthen a~ 
gain. 

Rafraichir, to refresh. 
Ragrandir, to enlarge again. 
Rajeunir, to grow young 

again. 
Ralentir, to slacken. 
Ramoitir, to moisten. 
RamolJir, to soften. 
Rancir, to grow rancid. 
.Ravilir, to debase. 
Reblanchir, to whiten again. 
.Ravir, to ravish, to delight. 
Rebatir, to build again. 
Rebondir, to rebound. . 
Reflechir, to reflect. 
Refleunr, to blossom again. 
Refroidir, to cool. 
Regir, to rule, to govern. 
Rejaillir, to spurt up. 
Rejouir, to rejoice. 
Rembrunir, to darken. 
Remplir, to fill again. 
Rencherir, to grow dearer. 
.Rendurcir, to make harder. 
Renhardir, to grow bold again, 
Repartir, to distribute equally* 
Repolir, to polish again. 
Resaisir, to seize again. 
Resplendir, to shine. 
Ressortir, to resort. 
Retentir, to resound. 
Retrecir, to straiten. 
Reverdir, to grow green a- 

gain. 
Reunir, to reunite.. 
Reussir, to succeed* 
Rotir, to roast. 
Rougir, to blush. 
Rouir, to steep. 
Roussir, to make reddish, 
Rugir, to roar. 
Saillir, to gush out. 
Saisir, to seize. 
Salir, to soil. 

Sevir, to exercise severity* 
Subir, to undergo. 
Subvertir, to subvert, 
se Tapir, to i _ 
Tarir, to drain. 
Ternir, to tarnish. 
Terrir, to land. 
Trahir, to betray. 
Transir, to chill. 
Travestir, to disguise. 
Unir, to unite. 
Verdir, to grow green* 
Vernir, to varnish. 
Vieillir, to grow old, 
Vomir, to vomit. 



106 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR* 



The Irregular verbs belon 

s'Abstenir, to abstain 
Accourir, to run to - - . 
Accueillir, to welcome 
Appartenir, to belong 
AGIUERIR, to acquire - 
BOULLIR, to boil 
Concourir, to concur - 
Conquerir, to conquer 
Consentir, to consent 
Contenir, to contain 
Contrevenir to contravene 
Convcnir, to agree - - 1 

COURIR, to run - - 

Couvi'ir, to cover 
CUELLIR, to gather 
Dccouvrir, to discover 
Dementir, to give the lie - 
se Departir, to give up - i 
Desservir, to take off the dishes - ! 
Detenir, to detain. - - \ 
Devenir, to become - - < 
se Devetir, foundress 
Disconvenir, to disagree - 
Discourir, to discourse 
Dormir, to sleep 
Endormir, to lull asleep 
s' Endormir, to fall asleep 
Encourir, to incur 
s' Enfuir, to run away 
Entretenir, to keep up 
Entr'ouvrir, to open a little 
FUIR, to flee, to shun, to avoid 
Hair, to hate t - 
Intervenir, to intervene 
Maintenir. to maintain - 



to this conjugation are, 



like venir. 
like courir. 
like cueillir. 
like venir. 
page 108. 
page 109. 
like courir. 
like aquerir. 
like sentir. 

like venir. 

page 110. 
like ouvrir. 
page 111. 
like ouvrir. 

like sentir- 

like verar. 

like revetir. 
like wir. 
like courir. 

like sentir. 

like courir. 
like fair, 
like vemr. 
like ouvrir. 

page 112. 
like venir. 



* Several of these irregular verbs having- a similarity in their conjugation, as, for 
example, the verbs in tir, which are all but two {vetir and revetir) conjugated like 
sentir, the verbs in enir which are conjugated like venir ; I have conjugated only- 
one verb of each termination, as a model for the others ; and all the verbs which 
may be conjugated in the same manner as that verb are found under it. 

t HAIR is regular only in theirs*, second, and third persons, singular of the present 
of the indicative, and in the second person singular of the imperative, where ai are 
pronounced in one syllable, 

Je hais. I hate. pronounce haye. 

Tu hais. Thou hatest. haye. 

II hait. He hates. hay. 

in the other tenses and persons ai are pronounced in two distinct syllables, and the 
i is marked over with two dots, 

Nous ha'issons. We hate. pronounce ha-isson. 

Vous ha'issez. You hate. ha-issay. 

lis haissent. They hate. ha-iss. 

Je haissais. I did hate. ha-issaye. 

Je hais. I hated. ha-ee. 

Je hairai. I shall hate. ha-eeray. 

Je hairais. I should hate, &c. like fin ir. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



107 



Mentir, to lie 
MOURIR, to die - 
Obtenir, to obtain 
Offrir, to offer 
OUVRIR, to open 
Parcourir, to over-ran - 
Partir, to set out 
Pressentir, to have a foresight 
Parvenir, to attain 
Prevenir, to prevent 
Provenir, to proceed - 
Querir, to fetch* 
Recourir, to have recourse to. 
Recouvrir, to cover again. 
Eecueillirj to collect. - 
Redevenir, to become again. - 
se Rendormir, to sleep again. 
Repartir, to set out again, 
se Repentir, to repent. 
Requerir, to require. 
Ressentir, to resent. - 
Ressortir, to go out again. i 
Ressouvenir, to remember. - 
Retenir, to retain. 
Revenir, to return. 
REVET1R, to invest. - 
Secourir, to succour. - 
SENTIR, to feel, to smell. - 
Servir, to serve, to use. 
Sortir, to go out. - 
Souffrir, to surfer. - - 
Soutenir, to maintain, 
se Souvenir, to remember - 
Subvenir, to afford. 
Survenir, to befall. - - 
Tenir, to hold. - - 
TRESSAILLIR, to start. - 
VENIR, to come. 
Vetir. to clothe. 



•i 



like sentir. 
page 113. 
like venir. 
like ouvrir. 
page 114. 
like courir. 

like sentir. 



like venir. 

like courir. 
like ouvrir. 
like cueillir. 
like venir, 

like sentir. 

like aquerir. 
like sentir. 

like venir. 

page 115. 
like courir. 
page 116. 

like sentir. 

like ouvrir. 



like venir. 



page 117. 
page 118. 
like revetir. 



* Used only in the infinitive after .AZZer and Envoy er : as, 

JiZe7 querir, to go and fetch. Envoyer querir, to send for, 



108 



IRREGULAR VERBS INT IR. 



Infinitive. 
To acquire, *Aquerir. 
Imperative. 
Acquire. Aquiers, sing. 

Let us acquire. 

Indicative. 



•■dj acquire, or am 
S Thou acquirest, art 
<*.He acquires, or is 
v acquire, 
are acqui- 
ring. 



Z We 
3 You 

S Vow 

^/ 1 

%Thou ' 

&» 
S We 

S Vow i 

« They J 

r r I? 0U shall will 
T3 He '• 

8 



► was acquiring. 



► were acquiring. 



acquired, 
did acquire. 



P-You 
S TAey 

s= TA<?w 
o We 
t^TAey J 



acquire, 
e acquiring 



should, would 

acquire, 
be acquiring. 



J' *aquiers. 
Tu aquiers. 
II aquiert.26 
Nous aquer ons. 
Vous aquer e^r. 
lis aquierent.18 
J 1 *aquer ais6. 
Tu aquer a is. 
11 aquer ait. 26 
Nous aquer ions. 
Vous aquer iez. 
lis aquer aient6. 
J' *aquis.t 
Tu aquis. 
11 aquit.26 
Nous aquimes. 
Vous aquites. 
lis aquirent- 
J' *aquer rai.bt 
Tu aquer ras. 
II aquer ra. 
Nous aquer rons. 
Vous aquer rez. 
lis aquer ront.26 
J 1 *aquer rais.6t 
Tu aquer rais. 
II aquer rait.26 
Nous aquer ri07is. 
Fow5 aquer riez. 
Us aquer raient.6 



Gerund. 
Acquiring. Aquer ant. 



Aquer ez. plur. 
Aquer ons. 
Subjunctive. 
J' *aquiere. 
Tu aquieres. 
II aquiere. L 
Nous aquer ions. 
Vous aquer iez. 
lis aquierent.18 



S *aquisse.2 
Tu aquisses. 
II aquit.26 
Nous aquissions. 
Vous aquissiez- 
Us aquissent.18 



Participle. 
Aquis. Acquired. 



(to 



Conjugate in the same manner, 
Requerir, to require, and Conquerir, to conquer. 

N. B. Conquer ir is used only in the infinitive, in the gerund Con 
quera%£, in the participle Conquis, and in the perfect 
Je conquis. / conquered. Je conquisse. 

Tu conquis. Thou conqueredst. Tu conquisses 

Ii conquit. He conquered. // conquit. 

Nous conquimes, &c. We conquered. Nous conquissions. 8 



O 53 

c 5x 



* See qu, page 16. 
t See note page 4. 

; These two rr must be sounded distinctly ; in order to do it, lay a stress on the 
first r. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



109 



Infinitive. 
To boil. Bouillir. 



Boil. 

Let us boil. 



Imperative. 
Bous, sing. 



Bouill ez, plur, 
Bouill ons. 



Indicative. 



*~>I boil, or am 

| TAoa boilest, art gi 

§ /fie boils, or is aq 

*g TAow )> was boiling. 



% Tho-i 
%He 
$We 
% You 
? They^ 

H Thou 

~ We 
B-You- 
£ They j 

b 

glfc 
S; We 
g Ybw 
pThey^ 



were boiling. 



boiled, 
did boil. 



shll, wll boil, 
5e boiling** 



shd, wd boil, 
6e boiling. 



Je3 14bous26. 



Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis. 



bous. 
boul26. 
bouill ons. 
bouill ez. 
bouill entlS. 



Je 14bouill aisQ. 
Tu bouill ais. 
II bouill aim. 
Nous bouill ions. 
Vous bouill zez. 
lis bouill aientQt 
Je 14bouill is2Q. 



Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



bouill is. 
bouill im. 
bouill imes. 
bouill ites. 
bouill irentl8. 



Je 
Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



14bouillir ai5. 
bouillir as. 
bouillir a. 
bouillir ons. 
bouillir ez. 
bouillir on£26. 



Je Mbouiilir ais6. 
Tu bouillir ais. 
II bouillir ait%6. 
Nous bouillir ions. 
Vous bouillir iez. 
lis bouillir aientQ. 



Gerund. 
Boiling. Bouill ant. 



Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Subjunctive* 
bouill e. 
bouill es, 
bouill e. 
bouill ions. 
bouill iez. 
bouill entl8. 



1 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



bouill isse2. 
bouill isses. 
bouill $£26. 
bouill issions. 
bouill issiez. 
bouill issent. 



Participle. 
Bouill L Boiled. 



N. B. To Boil, used in an active sense, i. e. followed by anobject, is not expressed 
by bouillir, but by fair e bouillir ; as*, 



I ) wi ~„ 1 Je fais 

^ boil or are [~^*^:to»tZS»* 

You } .'■,.„ Vous faite& " 

T»A„, \ DOlling, T j J r . 

They) °' J lis font 



bouillir"| 
bouillir | 
bouillir [_de Veau, 



bouillir 
bouillir J 



Thou\a^i boiled ' ^em boiling. 



J' ai } 
Tu as < 



fait bouillir, &c. 



And so on, by adding the infinitive bouillir to the verb faire. See Faire* 

10 



110 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



Infinitive. 
To run. 14Coun>. 



Run. 

Let us run. 

Indicative. 



Imperative. 
Cour s, sing. 



^1 run, or am 3 
3 Thou runnest, art § 
§ He runs, or is 

g You 



3 

run, or 
are running. 



Je3 14cour s26. 
Tu cour s. 
II cour t2Q. 
Nous cour ons. 
cour ez. 
cour ew£l8. 



Cour ez, plur. 
Cour ons. 

Subjunctive 
Je 14cour e. 
Tu 



Vous 
lis 



B 1 ] 
^ J 



Je 14cour aisQ. 



was running. 

VWe -) 
%You > were running. 
S They J 

glfe 
~We 
§ Yoa 
? They^ 

sr 

5 TAoa 
-i/e 
1^ 

1^ 



ran, 
did run. 



saZZ, wZZ run, 
be running. 



shd, wd run, 
be running. 



Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



cour ais. 
cour ait26. 
cour ions. 
cour iez. 
cour aientQ. 

14cour us26. 
cour 
cour 

cour itmes. 
cour wfes. 
cour urentlS. 



Je 14cour raz"5.* 



/z 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Ti 



cour ras. 
cour ra. 
cour rons. 
cour rez. 
cour ront26. 

14cour raisft.* 
cour razs. 



J7 cour raz£26. 

iVows cour rions. 

Vous cour riez. 

i7s cour raientfi 



II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



cour es. 
cour e. 
cour ions. 
cour iez. 
cour entlS. 



Je 14cour usse2. 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



cour usses. 
cour ut26. 
cour ussions. 
cour ussiez. 
cour ussent. 



0*5 



Gerund* 
Running. Cour ant 
,4/£er Me same manner as Courir, conjugate 



Participle. 
Cour m. Run. 



Accourir. to run to. 
Concourir. to concur. 
Discourir. to discourse. 
Encourir. to incur. 



Parcourir. to peruse, to overrun. 
Recourir. j to run a S ain < to have 



Secourir. 



recourse to. 
to succour, to relieve. 



N. B. The compound tenses of Accourir are formed with either Avoir or 22fre ; as, 
I have run, J' ai account, or Je suis accouru. 

Thou /ms£ run, Tm as accouru, Tu es accouru; 

He A. as run, J/ a account, II est accouru. 

We /mve run, &c. .AToms avons accouru, Nous sommes accourus, fyc. 



* These two rr must be sounded distinctly ; in order to do it, lay a stress on the 
first. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



Ill 



Infinitive. 



To gather. 



Cueill*£r. 



Imperative. 

Gather. Cueill es, sing. 
Let us gather. 



Cueill ez, plur. 
Cueill ons. 



Indicative. 
^ J gather, or am °g Je3 cueill*e. 
| Thou gatherest, art s£ Tu cueill es2b. 
| He gathers, or is II cueill e. 
5 We ") Al J5 iVows cueill o?zs. 
Sy „ t gather m°? y«« cueill e*. 
P They) are S atherm S- jj, cueill «rfl8. 
g 1 / Je cueill ais6. 

*g TAom I was gathering. Tu cueill az's. 
£#e J 7Z cueill aiz26. 

S We "J iVoMS cueill ions. 

| You y were gathering. Vous cueill iez. 
| TAe?/ J 
J 



$Thou 
^He 
ZWe 

CD T _ 

grow 

? T% J 
|J 

ZThou 
«He 
%We 
BYou 
? They 

*I 

^Thou 
%He 
| We 
§' Fo% 

s.r% J 



gathered, 
did gather. 



lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 



cueill aientft. 
cueill zs26. 
cueill is. 
cueill z£26. 



iVows cueill imes. 
Vous cueill z£es. 
lis cueill zre7i£l8. 
cueill e?-ai5. 
cueill eras. 
cueill em. 



Je 
Tu 

shll, wll gather II 
be gathering. Nous cueill erons. 

Vous cueill erez. 
lis cueill erontSS. 

Je cueill erais6. 
Tu cueill erais. 
shd, wd gather,/Z cueill erait2Q. 
be gathering. Nous cueill erions. 

Vous cueill eriez. 
lis cueill eraientQ. 



Gerund. 
Gathering. Cueill ant. 



Subjunctive. 
Je cueill e. 
Tu cueill es. 
II cueill e. 
iVows cueill io/is. 
Vous cueill iez. 
7/s cueill entlS. 



cueill zsse2. 
cueill me*, 
cueill 
Nous cueill issions. 
Vous cueill issiez. 
lis cueill issent. 



Je3 



5s- 



Participle. 
Cueill i. Gathered. 



ii/^er fAe same manner as Cueillir are conjugated, 

Accueillir, to welcome, and Recueillir, to receive, to collect. 

N. B. Jlccueille is now rather obsolete, instead of it, we use Fairs bon accueil ; as, 
They welcomed us. Its nous firent bon accueil. 

To be welcome is, Eire bien venu ; as, 

You are welcome. Vous etes bien venu. 



* The nearest idea that I can give with letters, of the sound of Cueill, is kheughl. 



112 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



Infinitive. 
To shun ; To flee. Fu ir. 



Shun. 

Let us shun. 



Imperative. 
Fu 2*, sing. 



Fui ez, plur. 
Fui ons. 



Indicative. 
^1 shun, or am 
3 Thou shunnest, art g 
g i/e sliuns, or is g 
~ We ) g" 
3 y 0tt ( shun, or 

) are shunnin g- 

•g T^ow > was shunning. 
ZWc \ 

| You > were shunning, 

"Thou 
tWe 
ZWe 
%You 
?They 

|r -i 

*i/e 
|T7e 

"Thou 
%He 
BWe 
| You 



shunned, 
did shun. 



shall, will shun 
6e shunning. 



shd, wd shun, 
6e shunning. 









Subjunctive. 
fu ie. 




Je3 23fu 2*26. 


Je 




r M 


fu is. 


Tu 


fu ies. 




II 


fu it26. 


II 


fu ie. 




Nous 


fu yons. 


Nous fu yions. 




Vous 


fu yez. 


Vous fu yiez. 




77 o 
IIS 


IU £e7u±o. 


lis 


fu ie/i*. 


g 


Je 


4fu yais6. 








Tu 


fu yais. 








II 


fu yait26. 








Nous 


fu yions. 








. T^iow* 


fu yiez. 






CO 

1 


IIS 


fu yaientQ. 






Je 


fu i*26. 


Je 


fu 2**e2. 


g 


Tu 


fu 25. 


Tu 


fu isses. 


a 


II 


fu 2*26. 


II 


fu 2*26. 


Nous 


fu 2me*. 


Nous fu issions. 


§ 


Vous 


fu 2*e*. 


Vous fu issiez. 


lis 


fu 2rew2l8. 


lis 


fu issent. 




Je 


fuir ai5. 






g 
P 


Tu 


fuir as. 








,11 


fuir a. 








Nous 


fuir on*. 








Vous 


fuir ez. 








lis 


fuir onZ26. 








Je 


fuir a2*s6. 








Tu 


fuir ais. 








II 


fuir az'£26. 








Nous 


fuir 2022*. 








Vous 


fuir iez. 








lis 


fuir aientQ. 









Gerund. 
Shunning. 



Fuy aw*26. 



Participle. 
Fu 2. Shunned. 



After the same manner is conjugated s'Enfuir, to run away ; thus, 



I run, or am 
Thou runnest, art 
He runs, or is 
We run, are 
You run, ere 
They run, are 



running away. 



Je m' enfui*. 
Tu t' enfui*. 
II s' enfui*26. 
iVow* nous enfuyons. 
Vous vous enfuye*. 
lis s' enfuie72*18. 



jV. J3. The compound tenses of s'Enfuir are formed with Eire, not Jlvoir ; as 
I Aave run away. Je me sw?'s ) 

Thou Aas* run a«?ay. Tu V es > Enfui, &c. 

He has run away. XI s' e«f J 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR, 



113 



To die. 



Die. 

Let us die. 



Infinitive, 

Imperative, 
Meurs, sing. 



Indicative, 
^1 die, or am £ 
» Thou diest, art \ 

2 He dies, or is ®, 

\ die, or 
?T°hey) are 

TAott ^z/v/s dying 
ife J 
*We 1 

§ Yow >were dying. 

3 They J 

2. Thou 



Nous 
Vous 
lis. 



Nous 
Vous 
lis 



me 

§ You 
* TAey J 

2 Thou 

°He 

^We 

l.You 

tThey 

%i 

"Thou 

%He 

BWe 

gYou 

pThey) 



died, 
olid die. 



sAZZ, itffslJ die, 
be dying. 



shd, wd die, 
be dying. 



Je 12meurs26. 
Tu meurs. 
II meurt26. 
mour 0715. 
mour ez, 
meurentl8. 
Je 14mour ais6. 
Tu mour ais. 
II mour ait26. 
mour ions. 
mour iez. 
mour aientft, 

Je 14mour us26. 
Tu mour us. 
II mour ut26. 
Nous mour wmes. 
Vous mour lUes. 
J/s mour urentlQ. 

Je 14mour rai5.* 
Tu mour ras, 
II mour ra. 
Nous mour rows. 
Vows mour rez. 
lis mour ro«£26. 

Je 14mour raisQ.* 
Tu mour rois. 
II mour ?m'226. 
iVows mour Hons. 
Vous mour riez. 
JZs mour raientb. 



Gerund. 



Dying. 



Mour ant26. 



Mour ir. 



Mour ez, plur, 
Mour 07W. 



Je 
!Fa 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Subjunctive, 



meure. 
meures. 
meure. 
mour ions. 
mour iez. 
meurent. 



Je mour usse%. 
Tu mour usses. 
II mour w£26. 
Nous mour ussions. 
Vous mour ussiez, 
lis mour ussent. 



CD 



Participle, 
Mort26. Dead. 



dying away. 



4/Yer f same manner as Mourir is conjugated se Mourir, to be dying ; 

Je me meurs. / am 

Thou art 
He is 
\ We are 
You are 
They are 

JV. J5. The compound tenses of Mourir are formed by adding Mort to the auxiliary 
Etre ; as, He has died. i7 est mort. 

They Aa^e died. J/s sont morts, &c. 

* These two rr must be sounded distinctly ; in order to do it, lay a stress on the 
first r. 

10* 



Tu te meurs. 
JZ se meurt. 
Nous nous mour ons. 
Vous vous mour ez. 
i7s se meurent. 



114 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



Infinitive. 



To open. 



Ouvr ir. 



Imperative. 



Open. Ouvr es, sing. 
Let us open. 



Ouvr ez, plur. 
Ouvr ons. 



Indicative. 
^1 open, or am ►§ 
| 77to«t openest, ari § 
I He opens, or is | 
8 We ) 

open, or 
are opening 



' They 
ZI 

ZWe 

^He 
eWe 
| You 
They 

M 

«He 
%We 
EYou 
?They^ 

y/ 

iHe 
B We 
oYou 
pTheyj 



J' 14ouvr e. 
Tu ouvr es. 
i7 ouvr e. 
A t oms ouvr o«5. 
Vows ouvr ez. 
JZs ouvr 672.218. 

J' 14ouvr ai«6. 
TV ouvr ais. 
II ouvr az£26. 
iVows ouvr ions. 
Vous ouvr iez. 
i7s ouvr aientQ. 
J' 14ouvr is26. 
Tu ouvr is. 
II ouvr it26. 
Nous ouvr 
Fows ouvr ites. 
lis ouvr irentl8. 
J' 14ouvrir az*5. 
TV ouvrir as. 
shall, will open, i7 ouvrir a. 
6e opening. iVows ouvrir ons. 

Vous ouvrir ez. 
lis ouvrir ont26. 

J' 14ouvrir aisQ. 
Tu, ouvrir ais. 
shd, rod open, II ouvrir ait26. 
be opening. Nous ouvrir ions. 

Vous ouvrir iez. 
lis ouvrir aientG. 



was opening. 



were opening. 



opened, 
did open. 



Subjunctive. 
J 1 14ouvr e. 
Tu ouvr es. 
II ouvr e. 
Nous ouvr ions. 
Vous ouvr iez. 
lis ouvr ent. 



'sse2. 
isses. 



J 1 14ouvr j 
Tu ouvr ? 
II ouvr \ 
Nous ouvr i 
Vous ouvr issiez. 
lis ouvr issent. 



Gerund. 
Opening. Ouvr ant26. 



Participle* 
Ouvert26. Opened. 



After the same manner as Ouvrir, are conjugated 

Entr'ouvrir, to open a little. Recouvrir, to cover again, 

Couvrir, to cover. Offrir, to offer. 

J >e>ouvrir, to discover. Souflfrir, to suffer. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



115 



Infinitive. 
To invest with.*- Revet ir. 



Imperative. 

Invest. Revet s, sing. 
Let us invest. 



Revet ez, plur. 
Revet ons. 



Indicative. 

^1 invest, or am B' Je3 

5 Thou investest, art g Tu 

g He invests, or is iZ 

"We 1 crq Nous 

lYou I mvest ' ' F 0WS 

^AeyJ^ 6 mvestm ^ lis 

fl -\ Je 
•g Thou y was investing. Tu 
%He J II 



3 They 

ZThou 

$He 

iWe 

w You 

?They, 

^1 

I Thou 
3 He 
!We 
SFoti 

? r^ey 

~Thou 

o 

%He 
StWe 
°You 
pThey 



were investing. Foms 
ZZs 

Je 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



invested, 
did invest. 



revet s26. 
revet s. 
revet 26. 
revet ons. 
revet ez. 
revet e«U8. 

revet aisQ. 
revet ais. 
revet ait26. 
revet zows. 
revet ze^. 
revet aient6. 

revet zs26. 
revet is. 
revet it26. 
revet £/nes. 
revet ites. 
revet zrew£l8. 



Je revetir ai5, 

Tu revetir as. 

shll,wll invest, II revetir a. 

be investing. Nous rev6tir ons. 

Vous revetir ez. 

lis revetir ont26. 

Je revetir ais26. 

Tu revetir ais 

shd, wd invest,// revetir ait. 

be investing. Nous revetir ions. 

Vous revetir iez. 

lis ■ revetir aientQ. 



Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Subjunctive. 



revet e. 
revet es. 
revet e. 
revet ions. 
revet iez. 
revet cut. 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



revet isse. 
revet isses. 
revet it26. 
revet issions. 
rev6t issiez. 
revet issent. 



crq 



Gerund. Participle. 
Investing. Revet ant26. Revet u. Invested. 

After the same manner as Revetir, are conjugated 

Vetir, to clothe ; and Devetir, to undress ; 

but these two verbs are seldom used, except in the infinitive Vetir, De- 
vetir, and in the participle Vetu, clothed; instead of the former, we 
make use of Habiller, to clothe, to dress; and instead of the latter, we 
use Deshabiller, to undress. 



* To invest with honours, dignities, fyc. but not to surround. 



116 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



Infinitive. 

To feel ; To smell. 

Imperative. 

Feel. Sens, sing. 

Let us feel. 

Indicative. 
I feel, or am a? Je3 16sens26. 



was feeling. 



3 7^o?z feelest, art 
I /fe feels, or is 
ZWe 1 - . 

PTfoyJ feeling. 

3 7 

►a 77wa 
|tfe 

5 We -\ 

I Foa I were feeling. 

s r% J 

"Thou 
£He 
£We 

? TAey j 

I We 

? They ^ 
*I 

"Thou 
%He 
I We 

s.r% J 



TV 

11 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 
Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je3 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 
Je 
Tu 

shll, wll feel, II 
be feeling. 



felt, 
did feel. 



shd y wd feel, 
be feeling. 



sens. 
sent26. 
sent ons. 
sent ez. 
sent entlS. 
sent ais6. 
sent ais. 
sent ait26. 
sent ions. 
sent iez. 
sent aientS. 
sent fs26. 
sent is. 
sent ?'Z26. 
sent wies. 
sent ites. 
sent iren£ 18. 
sentir ai5. 
sentir as. 
sentir a. 
Nous sentir cms. 
Fows sentir ez. 

sentir on^26. 

sentir aisf). 
sentir ats. 
sentir off. 
sentir ions. 
sentir iez. 
sentir aientQ. 



Sent ir. 



Sent ez, plur. 
Sent ons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je sent e2. 
7V sent es. 
II sent e. 
iVoas sent ions. 
Vous sent iez. 
7/s sent entlS. 



lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Gerund. 



Feeling. 



Sent antSQ. 



Je sent isse2. 
Tu sent isses. 
II sent it%6. 
Nous sent issions 
Vous sent issiez. 
lis sent issent. 



3 



0^ 



Participle, 
Sent i. Felt. 



J/Zer £/*e sawe manner as Sentir are conjugated 
Consentir, £o consent. Partir, to set out ; to depart. 

Dementir, to give the lie.- Pressentir, to have a foresight. 

Se departir, to give up. Repartir, to set out again; to reply. 

Desservir, to take off the dishes ; Se repentir, to repent. 
Dormir, to sleep, [to do an ill office. Ressentir, to resent. 
Endormir, to lull asleep. Ressortir, to go out again. 

s'Endormir, to fall asleep. Servir, to serve; se servir to z/se.* 

Mentir, to lie ; to tell a lie. Sortir, to go out. 



* Observe that the third person singular of the present tense of Servir } is sert f 
not serv. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



117 



Infinitive. 

To X Ztou}°hear. S TressaiU ir de >*' 
Imperative. 

Start. Tressaill es, sing. Tressaill ez, plur. 

Let us start. Tressaill ows. 



^1 start, or 
5 Thou startest, art 



Indicative. 

%Je3 
%Tu 
fll 
Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 

n 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 

shll, will start,// 
be starting. Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 

shd, iv d start, 11 
be starting. Nous 
Vous 
lis 



started, 
> did start. 



2 He starts, or is 

tWe -] . . 
2 start, 

?r%J \ are startm g- 

*g TrtOM J- was starting. 

z We 5 

2 Yow [> were starting. 
P TAey J 

I We 
ZYou 
? They J 

BThou 
*He 
% We 
%You 
? They J 
J/ 

§& 
|TYe 
| Tow 



tressaill e.t 
tressaill es. 
tressaill e. 
tressaill 07/5. 
tressaill ez. 
tressaill entiS. 
tressaill ais.Q 
tressaill ais. 
tressaill ait. 26. 
tressaill ions. 
tressaill iez. 
tressaill aientft. 

tressaill is26. 
tressaill is. 
tressaill it26. 
tressaill imes. 
tressaill ites. 
tressaill irentl8. 
tressaillir ai5. 
tressaillir as. 
tressaillir a. 
tressaillir ons. 
tressaillir ez. 
tressaillir ont2$. 

tressaillir ais6. 
tressaillir ais. 
tressaillir ait26. 
tressaillir ions. 
tressaillir iez. 
tressaillir aientQ. 



Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Gerund. 
Starting. Tressaill ani2§. 



Subjunctive. 
tressaill e. 
tressaill es. 
tressaill e. 
tressaill ions. 
tressaill iez. 
tressaill ent. 



Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



tressaill isse2. 
tressaill isses. ^ 
tressaill it. 
tressaill issions. 
tressaill issicz. 
tressaill issent. 



Participle. 
Tressaill i. Started. 



After the same manner as Tressaillir are conjugated 

Assaillir, to assault, but it is not used in the first, second, and third 
persons singular of the present tense, and is seldom used, except in the 
infinitive Assaillir, and in the participle Assailli, assaulted. 

Saillir, to jet out, used only in the infinitive Saillir, in the gerund 
Saillant, in the participle Sailli, and in the third person of each tense. 



* Tressaillir is seldom used without the words joie, joy ; or peur, fear, 
f See II preceded by i, page 14. 



118 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 



To come. 

Imperative. 

Come. Viens, sing. 
Let us come. 



Ven ir. 



Ven ez, plur. 
Ven ons. 



Indicative. 
^7 come, or am g 
a Thou comest, art B 

u ' wr ■ K' 

g /le comes, or *g 

lYou l come > or 
?T%J flr * comm ff- 

3 7 1 

*%Thou ywas coming. 
%He J 

Z We ) 

%You >were coming. 
S They J 

ZTkou 
Wife 
-We 
%You 

? r% J 

£7 

c Thou 
°He 
*$We 
%You 

? The y J 
t l 

~Thou 
%He 
§We 
°You 
f.Theyj 



Subjunctive. 



came, or 
did come. 



shll, wll come, 
^or be coming. 



shd, wd come. 
y or be coming. 



Je3 


viens23. 


Je3 


vienne2. 


o 

o 


Tu 


viens. 


Tu 


viennes. 


i 


II 


vicnt26. 


II 


vienne. 




Nous 


ven ows. 


Nous 


ven ions. 




Vous 


ven ez. 


Vous 


ven iez. 




lis 


viennentl8. 


lis 


viennent. 


o 
o 


Je3 


ven aisft. 






B 

9 


Tu 


ven ais. 






11 


ven ait26. 








Nous 


ven ions. 








Vous 


ven iez. 








lis 


ven aientQ. 






o 
p 


Je 19vins26. 


Je3 


vinsse2. 


i 


Tu 


vins. 


Tu 


vinsses. 


- 


II 


vint26. 


11 


vint26. 




Nous 


vinmes. 


Nous 


vinssions. 




Vous 


vintes. 


Vous 


vinssiez. 




lis 


vinrentl8. 


lis 


vinssentl8. 


§ 


Je3 


viendrai5. 






M 

CD 


Tu 


viendras. 








II 


viendra. 








Nous 


viendrons. 








Vous 


viendrez. 








lis 


viendront26. 








Je3 


viendrais. 








Tu 


viendrais. 








II 


viendrait26. 








Nous 


viendrions. 








Vous 


viendriez. 








lis 


viendraient6. 









Coming. 



Ven ant2Q. 



Ven u. 



Come. 



After the same manner as Venir are conjugated, 



Obtenir, to obtain. 

Parvenir, to attain, to arrive. 

Prevenir, to prevent, to anticipate. 

Provenir, to proceed. 

Revenir, to come again, to return. 



s'Abstenir, to abstain. 
Appartenir, to belong. 
Convenir, to agree, to become. 
Contrevenir, to contravene. 
Contenir, to contain. 

Disconvenir, to disagree, to disown. Retenir, to retain, to keep. 
Detenir, to detain. Soutenir, to maintain. 

Devenir, to become. se Souvenir, to remember. 

Entretenir, to keep up. Subvenir, to afford. 

Intervenir, to intervene. Survenir, to befal, to happen. 

Maintenir, to maintain. Tenir, to hold. 

N. B. The compound tenses of Venir, Convenir, Devenir, Disconvenir, Parve 
nir, Provenir, Revenir, and Survenir, are formed with the auxiliary Etre, not Avoir } 
as, I have agreed, Je suis convenu j not «/'ai conveuu. 



VERBS IN IU. 



119 



A TABLE 

Showing how to conjugate all the verbs in IR, both regular and irre- 
gular. 

Ger. Part. \ Infin. Ger. Part, 



t—Je fin 

3 Tu 
VII 

gNous 
g Vous 
? lis 

~Je 
I 7\«. 
? II 
a Nous 

?Ils 

^11 

a Nous 
= Feus 



Infin. 
Fin ir, 

Indie. 



is 
is 
it 

issons 

issez 

issent. 

issais 

issais 

issait 

issions 

issiez 

issaient. 

is 



ites 
irent. 



Ger. Part. | Ivfin 
is s ant, i. Bouill 



Imper. 



, Subj, 
isse 

is isses 
isse 

issons issions Bouill 
issez issiez 
issent. 



ir. 



ant, i. Cueill ir, ant, i. 



isse 
isses 
it 

issions 

issiez 

issent. 



t^Je finir ai 
c Tu as 
ril 

•g Nous 

oc VOUS 

Wlls 



ons 



oil 
g Nous 

G^VoUS 

rlls 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



Like Finir, 
conjugate all th« 
verbs in ir 
the following ex- 
cepted. 



Indie. Imp. Subj. 
bous e 
bous bous es 
bout e 
ons ons ions 



Indie. 
Cueill e 



Imp. Subj. 



ez 
ent. 



ais 
ait 



iez 
aient. 



is 
is 
it 

imes 
ites 
irent. 



ez 



iez 
ent. 



isse 

isses 

it 

issions 

issiez 

issent. 



Bouillir at 



Aquer ir. 



ant, aquis. 



aquiert 
ons 



3 Tu 

in 

© Nous 
w Vous 
P. lis 



t".7'aquer ais 

£ Tu ais 
'^11 ait 
g Nous ions 
w Vous iez 
• lis aient. 



aquiers aquiersaquieres 



oNous 
K Vous 
?Ils 



aquis 

aquis 

aquit 

aquimea 

aquites 

aquirent. 



aquiere 

ions 

iez 

aquierent 



aquisse 

aquisses 

aquit 

aquissions 

aquissiez 

aquissent. 



rons 
rez 
ront. 



►rj./'aquer rai 
c Tu ras 
' II ra 
^ Nous 
Z.Vous 
^Ils 



*5J' 
ETu 

g Nous 
a. Vous 

wiis 



rais 

rais 

rait 

Hons 

riez 

raient. 



In the same manner conjugate Cori- 
querir, Requerir. 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



Cour ir, ant, u. 



ons ons ions 
ez ez iez 



ais 
ais 
ait 



Cour 



iez 

aient. 



us 
ut 

vmes 
utes 
urent. 

rai 

ras 

ra 

rons 

rez 

ront. 

rais 

rais 

rait 

rions 

riez 

raient. 



usse 



lit 

ussions 
ussiez 
us sent 



ons ons ions 
ez ez iez 
ent. ent. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



is 
is 
it 

imes 
ites 
irent. 

Cueill erai 
eras 



isse 
isses 
it 

issions 

issiez 

issent. 



era 
erons 
erez 
eront. 

era is 
erais 
erait 
erions 

eriez Accueillir, 
eraient. Recueillir* 



Fu 



ir, yant, i. 



y ons y ons yions 
yez yez yiez 
ient. ient. 

yais 

yais 

yait 

yions 

yiez 

yaient. 



is 
is 
it 

imes 
ites 
irent 



isse 
isses 
it 

issions 

issiez 

issent. 



Fuir 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



Like Counr conjugate Like Fuir conjugate 
Accounr, Concounr, Dis- s'Enfuir, to run away. 
courir, Encourir, Pafcou- 
rir, Recourir, Secourir. I 



120 



VERBS IN IR. 



A TABLE 

Showing how to conjugate all the verbs in IR, both regular and irre- 
gular. 



Infm. Ger. Part. 

Mour ir, ant, mort. 
Indie. Imper. Sub}. 

>vJe meurs meure 

o Tu meurs meurs meures 

II meurt meure. 

<%Nous mour ons ons ions 

~ Vous ez ez iez 

P lis meurent. meurent 



a Nous 
£ Vans 
? lis 

2. Tu 
r>Il 
oNous 
£ Vous 



la 
ril 

^ Nous 
Vous 
rlls 

^Je 
£Tu 

nil 

g JVtfi/S 

p^Vous 
r-'lls 



ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 
iez 

aient. 

us 
us 
ut 

umes 
utes 
urent. 

mour rai 
ras 
ra 
rons 
rez 
rant, 
rais 
rais 
rait 
riojis 
riez 
raient. 



usse 

usses 
ut 

ussions 

ussiez 

ussent. 



se Mourir, 



ez e 
ent. 

Revet ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 
iez 

aient. 
is 
is 
it 

imes 
ites 
irent. 

Revetir ai 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



Ouvr ir, 


ant, 


ouvert. 


e 




e 


es 


es 


es 


e 




e 


ons 


ons 


ions 


ez 


ez 


iez 


ent. 




enU 


ais 






ais 






ait 






ions 






iez 






aient. 






is 




isse 


is 




isses 


it 




it 



5 Tu 
>*l 

6 Nous 
E Vous 
?Ils 

|£ 

2 Nous 
g Vous 
9 Us 

^jr 

2 Tu 
r>Il 

oNous 
j~ Vous 
? Us 

hrj.7' ouvnr 
g Tu - 
r Il 

"g Nous 
v.Vous 
rils 

g Nous 
cLVous 

fiis 

In the same manner conjugate En 
tr'ouvrir,Couvrir, Decouvrir, Recouv 
rir, Offrir, Souffrir. 



xmes 
ites 
irent. 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

io?is 

iez 

aient. 



issions 
is s iez 
issent. 



Jnfin. Ger. Part. 
Revet ir, ant, u. 

Indie. Imp. Subj. 
Revet 5 e 



I Infin. 
Tressail ir, 

Tres- Indie. 
saill e 



"MS 

iez 
tat. 



isse 
isses 
it 

issions 

issiez 

issent. 



Vetir, 
se Devetir. 



ites 
Tres- irent. 
saillir ai 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



Sent 



ir, ant, i. 



sens e 
sens sens es 
sent e 
Sent ons ons ions 
ez ez iez 
ent. ent. 
ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 
iez 

aient. 
is 



is 
it 

imes 
ites 
irent. 

Sentir ai 
as 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



tsse 
isses 
it 

issions 

issiez 

issent. 



Consentir, Pressentir v 
Ressentir, Mentir, Demen- 
tir, Partir, Repartir, se De 
partir, Sortir, Ressortir, se 
Repentir, Servir, Desservir, 
Dormir, Endormir, s'En 
dormir. 



Ger. Part, 
ant, i. 

Imp. Subj. 



ent. ; 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 



ons ions 
ez iez 
ent. 



isse 

isses 
it 

issions 

issiez 

issent. 



Assaillir, 
Saillir. 



Ven ir, 

vjens 
viens 
vient 
Ven ons 



ant, u. 



vienne 
viens viennes 
vienne 
ons ions 
ez ez iez 
viennent. viennent. 
ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 
iez 

aient. ^ 

vins vinsse 
vins vinsses 
vint vint 
vinrnes vinssions 
vintes vinssiez 
vinrent. vinssenlg 
viendrai 
viendras 
' viendra 
viendrons 
viendrez 
viendront. 
viendrais 
viendrais 
viendrait 
vie ndr ions 
viendriez 
viendraient. 

Conyenir, Contrevenir, 
Devenir, Disconvenir, In- 
tervenir, Parvenir, Preve- 
nir, Provenir, Revenir, se 
Souvenir, Subvenir, Surve- 
nir, Tenir, s'Absfenir, Ap- 
partenir, Contenir, Detemr, 
Entretenir, Maintenir, Ob* 
tenir, Retenir, Soutenir. 



REGULAR VERBS IN OIR.* 



121 



To owe. 



Owe. 

Let us owe. 



Infinitive, 

Imperative, 
Dois, sing* 



Indicative. 

^1 owe. 

» Thou owest. 

£He owes. 

g You > owe, 
* They ) 

S We 

I Fo« 

^1 

i Thou 
ftte 
$We 
ZYou 
?They) 

gj 

"He 
%We 
z.iou 



did owe. 



owed. 



shall, will 



Thou 

yWe >s hd,wdowe. 



gxre 
§ You 



Owing. 



Gerund. 



Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 
Je3 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 
Je 
Tu 
11 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



23dois26. 
dois. 
doit26. 
dev ons. 
dev ez. 
doiventl8* 
dev ais6. 
dev ais. 
dev ait26. 
dev ions. 
dev iez. 
dev aicntft* 

dus.t 
dus. 
dut26. 
dumes. 
dutes. 
durentl8-, 
dev rai5* 
dev ras. 
dev ra. 
dev ron$* 
dev rez. 
dev ront26. 

dev raisft. 
dev rais. 
dev rait26, 
dev Hons. 
dev ne#. 
dev raient^ 



Dev <m?26. 



Dev oir. 



Dev eZ) plur. 
Dev ows. 



Subjunctive, 
doive2 9 
doives. a 



Tu 

II doive. 
Nous dev ions, 
Vous dev fez. 
ite doivent. 



Je dusse2. 


1 


Tu dusses. 




II dut26. 


<*• 


iVows dussions. 


Foms dussiez. 




JZs dussentlS. 




1 



Participle. 
Du. owed. 



>pas 



Negatively. 
Je we dois 
Tu we dois 
II ne doit 
Nous ne devolis 
Vous ne devez 
lis ne doivent^ 

After the same manner as Devoir are conjugated, 
Apercevoir, ) ^ . Percevoir,' (a law term) to receim 

Apercevoir, $ " ' Recevoir, to receive. 

Concevoir, to conceive. Redevoir, to owe still. 



Interrogatively . 
Dois-je ? g- 
Dois4w ? 
DoiHZ ? I 
Devons-rcotts ? 
Devez-yows ? ^ 
Doivent-z7s ? o 



Interrogatively and Nagativ. 
Ne dois-^'e 
iVe dois-Zw 
iVe doit-z'Z 
Ne devons-nows 
iVe devez-vows 
Ne doivent-z'Zs 



pas ? g. 
o 

3 



* See N. B. under derotr, page 97. 

11 



f See note 2, page L 



122 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN OIR. 



The irregular verbs belonging to this conjugation are 



Choir, to tall - ^ 

Dechoir, to decay > * 

Fxhoir, to expire, to be out. -J 

Emnuvnir, to stir up. - like Monvoir. 

JEntrevoir, to have a glimpse ; like Voir. 
Equiraluir, to be equivalent; - like Valoir. 
Falluir, must; to be necessary, f 

Mouvoir, to move ; page 124. 

Pleuvoir, to rain J 

Pour voir, to provide ; see Prevoir. 

Pouvoir, to be able ; page 125, 



Prevoir, to foresee ; page 195, 

Prevaloir t to prevail; - 1 ... v^lnir 

»e Prevaloir to avail oneself ; j see Valoir ' 
Revaloir, return like for like ; - like Valoir. 
Rasseoir, \ to sit duwn \ «V*- i .L.. (j 
se Rasseoir, \ again ; J "" /l/cc A^eoif. 

Rrvoir, to see again ; like Voir. 

Savoir, to know j page 127. 

Seoir, to fit, to suit, to become ; J 

Surseoir, to supersede ; see Prevoir. 

Valoir, to be worth ; page 128. 

VoIr, to sec ;-- page 120. 

Vouloir, to willy to be willing ; page 130. 



* These three verba are now hardly ever used, but are found in many ancient 
writings ; they are conjugated thus : 



Infinitive. 



Ch oir. 
Dech oir. 



To fall. 
To decay. 



%Tu 
S" II 
K Nous 
i Vous 
flls 

^}Je 
%Tu 

hn 

ff Nous 

a VOUS 

?Ils 

^Je 
?Tu 

Nous 
Z.Vous 
r Ils 
>riJe 
£Tu 

all 
£ Nous 
c~Vous 
rils 



Indicative. 

decho?s. /decay, or am 
decha/s. Thou decayest, art £ 
decho?7. He decays, or is *< t 
dcchoyons.We ) , =' 
dechoyez. Yon L rc d A C c \ 7 ^ 
dechoient. They ) are deca y ,n o- 

dechus. I I 
dechws. Thou 
dech7*£. He [ decayed, 
dechfones. We [ did decay, 
dech/ifes. You j 
d6ch£rent They J 
decherrai. I } 
Thou \ 



Participle. 

Ch u. Fallen. No other tenses, 
Dechutt. Decayed. 



Subjunctive. 

Je dechoie. I 
Ta decho?'c*. Thou 
It decho?'e. He 
Nous dechoy ions. W e 
Vous dechoyiez. You 
lis dechoient. 
Je dechwsse. 
Tu dechusses. 
II dechw/. 
Nous dechussions. We 
Vous ddchussiez. You 
lis dechussent. They 



They 
I 

Thou 
He 



decay, 
may decay. 



decayed, 
might decay, 



decherras. 
decherra. 
decherrons. 
decherrez. 
decherront. 

decherrois. 
decherrois. 
decherroit. 
decherrions. We 
decherriez. You 
decherroient. They 

Infinitive. 



He 

We 

You 

They 

I 

Thou 
He 



shall, will decay, 
be decaying. 



should, would decay, 
be decaying. 



Echoir. To expire ; speaking of the end of a term ; as, 

The rent is due, the time is expired. La rente est due, le termc est echo.- 



Indicative. 



Subjunctive. 



Pres. H echoit. 
Perf. II echut. 
Fut. II echerra. 
Con. II echerroit. 



It expires. 
It expired. 
It icill expire. 
It would expire. 



II echoie. 
II echut. 



It may expire. 
It nS.gh t expire. 



Participle. 
Ech u. Expired, 
f Falloir, Pleuvoir, see the Impersonal Verbs, page 160, 162. 
\ Seoir, To fit, to suit, to heroine, has only the third person of each tense in Met. 



Gerund. 
Echea??f. Expiring. 



II sied. 
lis sieent. 
II siera. 
lis sieront. 



It fits. 
They fit. 
It will fit. 
They will fit. 



lis seioit. 
lis seioient. 
II sierait. 
lis sitraient. 



It fitted. 
They fitted. 
It would fit. 
They would f 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN OIR. 



Infinitive. 



To sit down. 



123 



s 1 Asse oir. 



Imperative. 

Sit down. Assieds-toi, sing. 
Let us sit down. 



Asse ie^-vous, plur. 
Asse ions-nous. 



Indicative. 
♦3 J sit, or am g. Je3 

| 77/.ow sittest, art 
S i/e sits, or & 

£ We 1 Nous 



<§ II 



sit, are 



I J sitting 



down ^ 



• They 

%Thou\ was A sittin £ 
|# C J down * 

lYou [ wer / SlUing 

ir%J down - 



m' 23assieds26. 
t' assieds. 
s' assied26. 
nous asse ions. 
Vous vous asse iez. 
lis s' asse ientl8. lis 
Je m' asse iais6. 
Tu V asse mis, 
II s' asse iait26. 
Nous nous asse yonsi. 
Vous vous asse yez. 

s' asse iaient6. 



Subjunctive. 
Je m' asse ze2. | 
Tu V asse ies. ^ 
II s' asse ie. 2- 
Nous nous asse yorcs. 
Vous vous asse 2/ez. ^ 



asse ient, ? 



sit down. 



shll, wll sit, 
oe sitting dn. 



shd, wd sit, 



/Zs 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 
Je 
Tu 
II 



fHe [ sat, did 
IWe 
lYoh 
* They J 

&T 

| Thou 
%He 
%We 
-You 
| They J 

r Thou 

g?We j oe sitting dn. iVows nous asseirions. 

gYou Vous vous asseiriez. 

£. TVie?/ j 7Zs s' asseiraient6 

Gerund. 
Sitting down. 

In terrogatively. 
M' assieds-/e ? 



m' assis26. 
t' assis. 
s' assit26. 
nous assimes. 
vous assites. 
s' assirentl8. 

m' 10asseirai5. 
t' asseiras. 
s* asseira. 
nous asseirons. 
vous asseirez. 
s' asseiront26. 
m' asseirais6. 
t' asseirais. 
s' asseirait26. 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



m' 
V 



assisseS. 
assisses. 
s' assit26. 
nous assissions, 
vous assissiez. 



o 

assissent. 3 



T' assieds-ta ? ^ 
S' assied-iZ ? ^ 



s' Asse yant26. 

Negatively. 
Je ne m' assieds 
Tu ne t' assieds 
II ne s' assied 



Participle, 
Assis. sat down. 



pas. 



Interrogatively and Negativ. 
ne m' assieds-; e ) 
ne V assieds-Zu >pas? 
ne s' assied-z*Z S 



Compound tenses formed by adding assis to the auxiliary 6tre. 

J Aaue "1 p Je me sias "| Je me sois 

Thou te£ 2 7V t' es . Tu te sow 1 

tt t y a ti i * 5- assis. r , .. >assj 

He has f 2 iZ s' es£ | . II se soii [ 

We kce J s iVotw nous sommes J IVoms nous soyons J 



*3 



jfo the same manner^ conjugate K.asseoir ? se Rasseoir ? to sit down again. 



124 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN OIR. 



Infinitive. 
To move. Mouv oir.* 



Move. 

Let us move, 

Indicative. 
^1 move, or am 3 
5 Thou movest, art § 
g He moves, or is 3 

re _ i 



Imperative. 
Meus, sing. 



Mouv ez, ^Zwr. 
Mouv ons. 



move, 
are moving. 



7u y 
3 7 1 

•g T^om J>was moving. 
*He J 

| You V were moving. 
a They J 

'i 

ftCfe 
fWa 

? They J 

w 

*He 
fWe 

|A 

oYou 
pThey, 







Subjunctive. 


a 


Je 12meus26. 


Je 


meuve2. 


a 


Tu meus. 


Tu 


meuves26. 


< 


// meut26. 


11 


meuve. 




Nous mouv ons. 


Nous 


mouv ions. 




Vous mouv ez. 


Vous 


mouv iez. 




lis meuventlS. 


lis 


meuvent. 


3 


Je 14mouv aisG. 






1 


Tu mouv ais. 








II mouv ait2G. 








Nous mouv ions. 








Vous mouv iez. 








lis mouv aientG. 






3 
o 


Je tmus26. 


Je 


musse2. 


I 


Tu mus. 


Tu 


musses. 




II mut26. 


11 


mut26. 


i 


Nous mumes. 


Nous 


missions* 


»* 


Vous mutes. 


Vous mussiez. 




lis murentl8. 


lis 


mussentlS. 


3 
o 


Je 14mouv rai5. 






i 


Tu mouv ras26. 









moved, 
* did move. 



shll,will move ,11 mouv ra. 
oe moving. Nous mouv rows. 

Vows mouv rez. 
lis mouv roftf26. 
Je 14mouv raisG. 
Tu mouv raw. 
shd, wd move, II mouv ra^26. 
be moving. Nous mouv Hons. 

Vous mouv nez. 
i7s mouv raientG. 



Gerund. 
Moving. Mouv ant2G. 



Participle. 
Mu. Moved. 



4/Yer the same manner as Mouvoir is conjugated e*mouvoir, to move, to 
stir up, speaking of vapours, or the passions ; as, 

Le soleil emeut les vapeurs. The sun stirs up the vapours. 

Cet homme s'emeut de rien. That man is moved with the least thing. 

* Mouvoir is a technical term, used only in some general propositions ; as for example, 
Every free body moves in a straight line. Tout corps libre se meut en ligne draite. 

The general acceptation of move is remuer ; as, 
Move your arm, your leg, your foot, the chair, the dish, the table, &c. 

. Remuez le bras, la jambe, le pied, la chaise, le plat, la table, &c. 

f See note 2, page 1, 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 

A, 

Infinitive. 
To be able. Pouv oir. 



Indicative. 
^1 can, or am able. 
5 77/0 ^ canst, ari able. 
| He can, or is able. 
£ We ] 

S You y can, are able. 
? They J 

3 ^ 1 could, 
*Th° u \wo8 able. 

f They J 



could, 
> were able. 



^rr, 7 1 COUld, 

» „ .« able. 



j 



could, 
were able. 



■He 
~We 
*You 
?They^ 

^iie I shall, will 
tWe fable. 
^•Yom I 
tThey) 



?Thou 
iHe 

%You 
pThey, 



could, shd, 
* wd be able. 



Je 23puis26. 
Tu 12peux. 
II peut26. 
Nous pouv ons. 
Vous pouv ez. 
lis peuventl8. 
Je 14pouv aisQ. 
Tu pouv ais. 
II pouv ait26. 
Nous pouv iorcs. 
Vous pouv iez. 
/Zs pouv aientG. 

Je tpus26. 
Tu pus. 
II put26. 
Nous pumes. 
Vous putes. 
lis purentl8. 
Je 14pourai5. 
Tu pouras26. 
j II poura. 
Nous pourons. 
Vous pourez. 
lis pouront26. 

Je 14pourais6. 
Tu pourais. 
11 pourait26. 
Nous pourions. 
Vous pouriez. 
lis pouraient6. 



Gerund. 
Being able. Pouv antSQ. 



Subjunctive. 

Je puisse2. 

Tu puisses26. 

II puisse. 

Nous puissions. 

Vous puissiez. 

lis puissentl8. 



Je pusse2. 

Tu pusses. 

II put26. 

Nous pussions. 

Vous pussiez. 

lis pussentl8. 



125 



5 

0$ 



OK* 



Participle. 
Pu. Been able. 



* MAY, MIGHT have, through the verbs, been considered only as signs of the 
subjunctive mood; but these words are not always signs ; they are sometimes verbs 
denoting power. 

In order to discriminate whether may, might, are verbs, or only signs, change them 
into the tenses of the verb BE, that will make the best sense with the word power or 
able. 

If may, might, thus changed, answer to the tenses of the indicative of the verb BE, 
they must be expressed by the same tenses of the verb pouvoir ; as, 
I may see. it, if I choose, i, e. it is in my power, or I am able to see it, if I choose, 
Je puis le voir, sije veux. 

I might see it, if 1 chose, i. e. it icould be in my power, or I should be able to see it, 
if I chose. Je pourais le voir, sije voulais. 

If may, might, answer to the tenses of the subjunctive of the verb BE, they may 
be expressed either by the subjunctive of the following verb, or by the subjunctive 
of Pouvoir ; as, 

• {Bring it me, that I may see it, i. e. that I may be able to see it. 
Apportez-le-moi, ajin que je le voie, or afin queje puisse le voir. 

He brought it me, that I might see it, i. e. that I might be able to see it. 

II me Vapporta, afin queje le visse, or afin queje pusse le voir. 

| See note 2, page 1. N. B, MAY 

11* 



126 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN OIR. 



Infinitive. 



To foresee. 



PreV oir. 



Imperative. 



Foresee. Pre*v ois, sing. 
Let us foresee. 



^1 foresee. 
» Thou foreseest. 
g He foresees. 

%You > foresee. 
? They) 



Indicative. 

Je 



B 1 

*%Thou 

ZWe 
%You 
%They 

ZThou 
$He 

ro YOU 

* They J 

%Thou 
ZHe 
^We 
lYou 
tThey^ 

~Thou 
%He 
-•We 
°You 
tLThey) 



Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 

n 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 

should, would H 
foresee. Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Foreseeing. Prev oyant26. 



did foresee. 



foresaw, 
did foresee. 



shall, will 
* foresee. 



preV ois23. 
prev ois. 
prev oit26. 
prev oyons^. 
prev oyez. 
prev oientl8. 
prev oyaisS. 
prev oyais. 
prev oyait26. 
prev oyions. 
prev oyiez. 
prev oyaientQ 

prev is26. 
prev is. 
prev it2Q. 
prev imes. 
prev ites. 
prev irentlS. 
preVoir ai5. 
pre voir as2Q. 
pre voir a. 
pre voir ons. 
prevoir ez. 
prevoir ont2$. 

prevoir ais6, 
prevoir ais. 
prevoir ait26. 
prevoir ions. 
preVoir iez. 
prevoir aient26. 



Prev oyez, plur. 
Prev oyons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je prev oie23. 
Tu prev oies26. 
II preV oie. 
Nous prev oyions. 
Vous preV oyiez. 
lis prev oient. 



3 



prev isse2. o* 

prev isses, g 

II prev U26. § 

Nous prev issions. * 

Vous prev issiez. g. 

lis preV isse7i£.18 ^ 



Je 
Tu 
II 



Prev w. 



Foreseen. 



After the same manner is conjugated surseoir, to supersede, participle 
sursis. Pourvoir, to provide, except the perfect tense, 



/ 

Thou 
He 
We 
You 
They) 



provided, 
did provide. 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



pourv us. 
pourv us. 
pourv ut26. 
pourv tunes. 
pourv utes. 
pourv urentlS. 



He pourv usse2. 
Tu pourv usses. 
II pourv ut26. ^ 
Nous pourv ussions. 3 
Vous pourv wssiez. 23. 
lis pourv ussentl8. §* 



N. B. MAY, expressing a wish, is rendered by the present of the subjunctive of pou- 
voir ; as May you be happy ! Puissiez-tfows etre heureux ! 

But observe that, these instances excepted, the subjunctive, never begins a sentence ; 
so this, May I see it ? is, Puis-Je le voir/ Not Le \o\e~je, or Puisse-j'e le voir/ 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN OIR. 



127 



Infinitive. 



To know. 



Sav oir.* 



Imperative. 



Know. Saches, sing. 
Let us know. 




Sachez, plur. 
Sachons. 



Indicative. 



^1 know. 

| Thou knowest. 

g He knows. 

| You >know. 
? They J 

B 1 

*o Thou 
\He 
IWe 
g Yow 
g They, 

I Thou 



> did know. 



$He 
%We 
%You 
?They 

W 

c Thou 
%He 

BYou 
? They a 

& 

^Thou 
%He 
&We 
g You 
ZThey 



knew, 
did know. 



shall, will 
know. 



should, 
would know. 



Gerund. 



Je, sais6. 

Tu sais. 

II sait26. 

Nous sav ons. 

Vous sav ez. 

lis sav cntlS. 

Je sav ais6. 

Tu sav ais. 

II sav az726. 

Nous sav io?is. 

Fows sav iez. 

lis sav aientQ. 

JeS sus26. 

Tu sus. 

JZ sut26. 
Nous sumes. 

Vous sutes. 

i7s surentl8. 

Je 8saurai5. 
Tu sauras26. 
II saura. 
Nous saurons. 
Toms saurez. 
lis sauront26. 
Je 8saurais6. 
Tu saurais. 
II saurait26. 
Nous saurions. 
Vous sauriez. 
lis sauraient6. 



Subjunctive. 
Je sache.t 
Tu sachesS. 
II sache. 
Nous sachions. 
Vous sachiez. 
lis sachentl8. 



Je susse2. 
Tu susses. 
II sut26. 
Nous sussions. 
Vous sussiez. 
lis sussentl8. 



o 

3 



Knowing. Sachant26. 



Participle. 
Su. Known. 



* Meaning mental knowledge, science, information ; as, 

I know my lesson, French, English, mathematics. 

Je sais ma lecon, le Francais, P Anglais, les mathematiques. 

I know your brother will come. Je sais que votrefrere viendra. 

But To know, meaning to be acquainted with, to know by sight, is not expressed 
by savoir, it is expressed by Connaitre ; as, 

I knoic your brother, your sister, i. e. I am acquainted with them, I know them by 
sight. Je connais votre frere, voire sozur, &rc. See Connaitre, 

\ Not that I know, <§*c. so often used in answer to a question, is expressed by the 
present of the subjunctive of this verb ; thus, i 

Not that 1 know. Non pas que je sache. 

Not that we know. Non pas que nous sachions. 



128 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN OIR. 



Infinitive. 



To be worth. 



Val oir. 



Indicative. 

*$I am worth. Je 8vaux26. 

» Thou art worth. Tu vaux. 

%He is worth. II vaut26. 

%We 1 Nous val ons. 

zYou > are worth. Vous val ez. 

9 They J lis val entlS. 

2 1 ~) Je val aisQ. 

*f Thou > was worth. Tu val ais. 

%.He J II vzlaim. 

" We ^ iVows val iorcs. 

gYow >ic ere worth. Vows vaHez. 

(S TAey J 7/5 val aientfi. 

^1 ~\ Je val w,s26. 

^ Thou >was worth. Tu val us. 

$He J JZ val ut26. 

g We S iVbws val umes. 

zYou I were worth. Vous val utes. 

? They J lis val wre?z£l8. 

|?J 1 Je 8vaudrai5. 

| TAo^ Tw. vaudras26. 

a //e , shall, will II vaudra. 

*o We f be worth. Nous vaudrons. 

%You Vous vaudrez. 

» They j lis vaudront26. 

"| Je vaudrais6. 
£ TAou I 8vaudrais. 

°He [should, would II vaudrait26. 

-We [ be worth. Nous vaudrions. 

S>You Vous vaudriez. 

-They J lis vaudraient6. 



Gerund. 
Being worth. 



Val ant26. 



Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Subjunctive. 



vaille2.* 
vaillcs26. 
vaille. 
val ions. 
val iez. 
vaillentl8. 



3 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



val usse2. 
val usses. 
val ut26. 
val ussions. 
val ussiez. 
val ussentlS. 



Participle, 
Val m. Ueerc worth. 



-A/fer ^e same manner as Valoir are conjugated 
Equivaloir, to be equivalent. Prevaloir, to prevail. 

Revaloir, to return like for like. se prevaloir, to avail oneself. 
But observe that prevaloir and se prevaloir have an imperative. 
Prevail. PreVaux, sing. Preval ez, plur. 

Let us prevail. Preval ons. 



And, 



I may 

Thou mayest 
He may 
We may 
You may 
They may 



prevail, is 



Je prev ale, 
Tu prev ales, 
II prev ale, 
Nous prev alions, 
Vous prev aliez, 
lis prev alent, 



►not gJ 



* See M preceded by i, page 14. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN OIR. 



129 



Infinitive. 



To see. 



See. 

Let us see. 



Imperative. 
V ois, sing. 



Indicative. 



^1 see. 

3 Thou seest. 

ZHe sees. 

g Fow f> see. 
9 They J 



si 

gFow 
?They^ 

gFow 

? r% J 

°He 

z.You 
? They J 

~Thou 
%He 
ZWe 
g Fow 



If did s 



saw, tZiVZ see. 



see. 



Je 23vo2s26. 
3Th v ozs. 
JZ v 02*26. 
JVoms v oyons4:. 
Vous v oye^r. 
lis v oierc£l8. 

Je 
Tit 

n 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



v oyaisG. 
v oyais. 
v oyait2Q. 
v oyions. 
v oyiez. 
v oyaientft. 

v i$6. 
v is. 
v 2726. 
v $mes. 
v ztfes. 
v zrenZlS. 

Je *verrai5. 
Tu verras26. 
II verra. 
Nous verrons. 
Vous verrez. 
lis verront26. 



Je 
Tu 

should would II 
see. Nous 
Vous 
lis 



*verrais6. 
verrais. 
verrait26. 
verrions. 
verriez. 
verraientG. 



V 02V. 



V oycz, plur. 

V oyons. 





Subjunctive. 




Je 


v ote23. 


tr. 


CO 


Tu 


v 02es26. 


II 


V 026. 




Nous 


v oyions. 




Vous 


v oyiez. 


BO 


lis 


v oientG. 


a 
9 



Je v 1 
Tu v isses. 
II v i*26. 
Nous v issions. 
Vous v issiez. 
lis v issentlB. 



OK} 



Gerund. Participle. 
Seeing. V oyant2(j. V u. Seen. 

After the same manner as voir are conjugated 



Entrevoir, to have a glimpse. 



Revoir, to see again. 



* Only one r is sounded, the other r serves to make the preceding c long, 



130 



^ IRRE 



REGULAR VERBS IN OIR. 



Infinitive. 
To will, To be willing. 



Indicative. 
^1 will,* or am 3 
5 Thou wiliest, art B 
g/fe wills, or is o§ 

IE» 1 wiil '„. 

3 "I would,* 

2. rr WflS Willing. 

£ J ^ 

1 would ' 

iT7ey) werewim Z- 
T 



gThou] 
HHe [ would, 
ZWe Twilled, 
g You 
?Tkey, 

BThou 
°He 
%We 

hrou 

? They • 
*I 

C Thou 
2He 
|W« 
gYou 
^Theyj 



will,* sAaZZ, 
will be willing 



would,* 
> should, wld 
be willing. 



Je 12veux26. 
Tu veux. 
11 veut26. 
Nous voul ons. 
Vous voul ez. 
Us veulentl8. 
Je 14voul aisQ. 
Tu voul a is. 
77 voul ait26. 
Nous voul ions. 
Vous voul iez. 
Us voul aientf). 

Je 14voul us26. 
Tu voul us. 
II voul w*26. 
iVottS voul umes, 
Vous voul uZes. 
lis voul wrewil8. 
Je 14voudrai5. 
Tu voudras. 
II voudra. 
. Nous voudrons. 
Vous voudrez. 
lis voudront26. 

Je 14voudrais6. 
Tu voudrais. 
11 voudrait26. 
Nous voudrions. 
Vous voudriez. 
lis voudraient6. 



Gerund. 
Being willing. Voul ant26. 



Voul oir. 

Subjunctive. 
Je vcuille2. 
Tu vcuilles26. 
II veuille. 
Nous voul ions. 
Vous voul iez. 
lis veuillentl8. 



Je voul usse2. 

Tu voul usses. 

II voul um. 

Nous voul ussions. 

Vous voul ussiez. 

lis voul ussentl8. 



Participle. 
Voul u. Been willing. 



* Frequent mistakes are committed in the use of the word avill, which sometimes 
is a verb implying will, wish, desire, inclination, and sometimes, as has been seen 
through the conjugations, only the sign of some of the tenses of verbs. 

Though the distinction between will, the verb, and will, the sign, in some instan- 
ces be nice, yet it is necessary it should be made, as it changes the idea. 

If will, would can be changed into the words be willing, they denote the will, 
and are expressed by the tenses of vouloir as above. 

If will, would cannot properly be changed into be loilling, they are mere signs 
expressed in French by the termination of the verb. This sentence, for example ; 

Will you go to the play to-night ? may be translated these two ways ; 

Vou]ez-vous alter a la comedie ce soir ? or, \rez-vous a la comedie ce soir ? with this 
difference , that in the first instance, I inquire whether it is the wish, desire, or inclina- 
tion of the person I am speaking to, to go to the play, yet he may not go for all that ; 
in the second, I do not consult his will or inclination, for a person may do a thing 
against his inclination ; but I ask whether his going to the play will actually take 
place, either because he has resolved to go, or because he is compelled to go. 



VERBS IN OIR. 



131 



A TABLE 

Showing how to conjugate all the verbs in OIR, both regular and 
irregular. 



-o 






Tm 




JJ 




Nous 




Vous 




Us 




Je 


f 


Tu 




II 


1 


Nous 




Vous 


CP 


Us 


5J Je 




Tu 




II 


i 


Nous 




Vous 


| 


lis 



w Je 

I n 

% Nous 

g. ^0U5 

r //s 

•S Je 

p. TV 

6 /* 

§ Nous 

&. Vous 

F /fc 



5 J' 

? II 

g Vous 

9 Us 

| 

^ /* 

g Nous 

? /& 

I? ^ 

E ^ 

g JVbttS 

? /is 

** II 

r /to 

*J J' 

6 ru 

o // 

g JVottS 

F ife 



Infin. 
Dev oz>, 

Indie. 
dois 
dois, 
doit 
Dev ons 
et, 

doivent* 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aienti 

dus 
dus 
dut 

d Times 

dutes 

durent 

Dev rai 
ras 
ra 
rons 
ret 
ront. 

rais 

rais 

rait 

rions 

riez 

raient. 



Ger. 
ant. 

Imp. 

dois, 

ons, 
ez, 



Part. 
da. 

Subj. 
doive 
doives 
doive 
ions 
iez 

doivent. 



dusse 



dut _ 
dussions 
dussiez 
dussent. 



Like Devoir con- 
jugate Redevoir, 
Percevoir, Aper- 
eeyoir, Conce- 
voir, Recevoir. 



Asse oir, 

assiods 
assieds, 
assied 
Asse ions, 
iez, 
ient. 

iais 
iais 
iait 
yons 
yez 

iaient. 

assis 

assia 

assit 

assimes 

assites 

assircnt 

asseirai 

asseiras 

asseira 

asscirona 

asseirez 

asseironk 



yant, 



tons, 
ieti 



assis. 



yons 

yez 

ient. 



assit 

assissions 
assissioz 
assissent. 



asseiraia 
asseiraia 
asseirait 
asseiriona 
asseiriez 
asseiraient. 

Like Jlsseoir, conjugate a'Asaeoir, Rasseolr, 
s Rasseoir. 



Infin, 
Pouv oir, 

Indie. 
puis 
peux 
peut 
Pouv ons 
et 

peuvent, 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iet 

aient s 

pua 

pus 

put 

pumes 

putes 

purent, 

pourai 

pouras 

poura 

pourons 

pourez 

pouront. 

pourais 

pourais 

pourait 

pourions 

pouriez 

pouraient. 



Ger. 
ant, 



Imp. 



Part. 
pu. 

Subj. 
puisse 
puissea 
puisse 
puissions 
pui^siez 
puissent, 



pusse 
pussea 
put 

pussions 
pussiez 
pussent, 



oir, 


oyant, 


u. 


ois 
ois, 
oit 

oyonSi 

ayez, 

oient. 


ois, 

oyons, 
ez. 


oie 

oies 

oie 

oyions 

oyiez 

oienh 


oyais 

oyais 

oyait 

oyions 

oyiez 

oyaient, 






is 
is 
it 

vmes 
ttes 
irent. 




isse 
isses 

to 

issions 

issiez 

issent- 



Pre voir ai 



out. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 

Pourvoir, perfect Pourvi/s, Pourvusse i 
not Pourvis. Surseoir, participle Swrsis* 



132 



VERBS IN OIR. 



A TABLE 



Showing how to conjugate all the verbs in OIR, both regular and 
irregular. 



2 Nous 
? J& 

e Tu 
r /Z 

22. Foms 
s* 

*4 Je 

£ Tit 

B S 

g JVoMS 

F Us 





Infin. 


Oer. 


Part. 


In Jin. 




Sav oir, 


sachant 


su. 


V oir, 




Indie. 


Imp. 


Subj. 


Indie. 


Je 


saia 




sache 


V ois 


Tu 


sais, 


saches, 


saches 


ois, 


R 


Bait 




sache 


oit 


Nous 


Sav ons 


Bachons> sachions 


oyons, 


Vous 


ez, 


sachez, 


6achiez 




Us 


cnt- 




sachent. 


ouez,^ 


Je 


ais 






oyais 


Tu 


ais 






oyais 


II 


ait 






oyait 


Nous 


ions 






oyions 


Vous 


iez 






oyiez 


lis 


aient. 






oy aient, 


Je 


BUS 




susse 


is 


Tu 


BUB 




susses 


is 


II 


BUt 




But 


it 


Nous 


sumes 




sussions 


hnes 


Vous 


siites 




sussiez 


itcs 


Us 


surent 




sussent. 


irent. 


Je 


saurai 






vcrrai 


Tu 


sauras 






verras 


II 












SGiurons 






vcrrons 


"Vous 


SELlirGZ 






vgitgz 


Us 


cq n rnnf 

OCLUi Uilli 






VGrrontk 


Je 


saurai s 






verrais 


Tu 


saurais 






verrais 


II 


S3.urd.it 






vcrrjiit 




S3.UriOP9 






vcrrions 


"Vo^vis 


S3.UF1GZ 






VGrricz 


Us 


ScLU ro.iGnt. 






> C| I till. Ill 




Val oir 


ant, 


u. 


V oui oir, 


Je 


vaux ' 




vaille 


veux 


Tu 


vaux 




vailles 


veux 


II 


vaut 




vaille 


veut 


Nous 


Val ons 




ions 


Voul ons 


Vous 


ez 




iez 


ez 


lis 


ent. 




vaillent. 


veulent. 


Je 


ais 






ais 


Tu 


ais 






ais 


II 


ait 






ait 


Nous 


ions 






ions 


Vous 


icz 






iez 


Us 


aient. 






aient. 



us 
■us 
ut 

umes 
utes 
went. 

vaudrai 

vaudras 

vaudra 

vaudrori3 

vaudrez 

vaudront. 

vaudrais 

vaudrais 

vaudrait 

vaudrions 

vaudriez 

vaudraient. 



usse 

usses 

ut 

us s ions 

ussiez 

usscnt. 



Equivaloir, Revaloir, (Prevaloir, se Preva- 
loir, subjunctive, Y rev ale, not PrGvaille.) 



Oer. 
oyant, 

Imp. 



oyons, 

ovcz 



Part. 



Subj. 
oie 
oies 
oie 

oyions 

oyiez 

oient' 



isse 
isses 
it 

issions 

issiez 

issent* 



Entrevoir, Revoiri 



us 
us 
ut 

umes 

utes 

went. 

voudrai 

voudras 

voudra 

voudrons 

voudrez 

voudront. 

voudrai3 

voud rais 

voudrait 

voudrions 

voudriez 

voudraient 



u. 

veuille 

veuilles 

veuille 

ions 

iez 

veuillentr 



usse 



ut 
ussions 
ussifiz 
ussenU 



REGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



133 



Infinitive. 

To wait /or, To expect. Attend re, 

Imperative. 

Wait. Attend s, sing. Attend ez, plur. 
Let us wait. Attend ons. 



Indicative. 

J' 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



S3 



^ J wait, or 3 
S TAom waitest, ar£ 
2 He waits, or is 
ZWe 1 
lYou I walt > 
?TheyJ are Waitm ^' 

J' 

/z 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

J' 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

J' 
Tu 

.shll, wll wait, iZ 
> be waiting, 



Thou\was waiting. 
2 We S 

| Yow f were waiting. 
1 



\He 
tWe 
I Yon 
? They J 

J/ 

°He 
g We 

g:Yo« 

» TAey 
gj 

~Thou 
%He 
|We 
%You 
tLThey) 



waited, 
0^'cZ wait. 



shd, wd wait, 
oe waiting. 



Nous 
Vous 
lis 

J' 

72 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



attend si 6* 
attend s. 
attend26. 
attend ons. 
attend ez. 
attend entlS. 

attend aisQ. 
attend ais. 
attend aH2Q. 
attend ions. 
attend iez. 
attend aientQ. 

attend zs26. 
attend is. 
attend it26. 
attend trnes. 
attend ites. 
attend irentlS. 

attendr ai5. 
attendr as. 
attendr a. 
attendr ons. 
attendr ez. 
attendr ont2$. 
attendr ais6. 
attendr ais. 
attendr ait2G. 
attendr ions. 
attendr iez. 
attendr aientG. 



Subjunctive, 
J' attend e2. 
Tu attend es26. 
II attend e. 
Nous attend ions. 
Vous attend iez. 
lis attend entlQ* 



J 1 attend isse%. 
Tu attend isses. 
II attend it2S. 
Nous attend issions. 
Vous attend issiez. 
lis attend issentlS. 



Waiting. Attend ant26. 



Attend u. 



Waited. 



After the same manner as Attendre are conjugated 

Battre, to beat, to fight. Descendre, to go ox come down^RoboXXxQ, to beat again, to 
Abattre, to pull do ten. Entendre, to hear, to under- repeat. 

Cornbaitre, to fight. stand. Refondre, to melt again. 

Condescendre, to condescend.'Etendre, to stretch, to spread. Rendre, to render, to return, 
Confondre, to confound. Fend re, to cleave, to split. se Rendre, to surrender. 
Corresponds, to correspond. Fondre, to melt, to cast. Repandre, to spill, to shed. 
Corrompre, to corrupt. Interrompre, to interrupt. Repondre, to answer. 

Debattre, to debate. Mofdre, to bite. Retordre, to twist anew, 

se Debattre, to struggle. se Morfondre, to grotj cold. Rompre, to break. 
Defend re, tv forbid. Pendre, to hang. Suspendre, to suspend, 

se Defendre, to defend one- Perdre, to lose, to ruin. Tend re, to tend, to bend. 

self. Pond re, to lay eggs. Tondre, to shear. 

Demordre, to relax. Pretendre, to pretend*. Tordre, to twist, to wring, 

De pendre, to depend. Rabattre, to abate. Vendre, to sell. 

12 



134 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE, 



The irregular verbs belonging to this conjugation are 



Absoudre, to absolve, see Resoudre. 

Jlbstvaive, to abstract, see Traire. A 

Jiccroltrc, to accrue, like Connaitre. 

Jldmcttve, to admit, like Mettre. 

Ap/jaraltre, to appear, tike Connaitre. 

Apprendre, to learn, page 136. 

JJstvanidre, to restrain,- - - ? , •. nv m ,i ro 
Mteindre, to reach, to hit, i llke 1<eindre < 

Noire, to drink,- page 137. 

Jiraire, to bray.* 

C indve, to gird, ; like Feindre. 

Circoncire, to circumcise,- - see Dire. 

Civconscvire, to circum- 
BQribe, like Ecrire. 

Clove, lo close, to shut.t 

Commettre, to commit, like Mettre. 

Comparative, to appear, like Conn;.itre. 

Coinplaire, to comply with,- like Plaire. 

Compr/ndre, to understand, like Apprendre, 

Compvomettve, to compro- 
mise, -- - like Mettre. 

Conclure, to conclude, - - - page 138. 

Conduive, to conduct, to 
lead, — like Instruire. 

Conjire, to pickle, see Dire. 

Conjoindre, to join together, like Feindre. 

Connaitre, to know, page 139. 

Construire, to construct, — like Instruire. 

Contvaindre, to compel, — like Feindre. 

Covtredire, to contradict, - - see Dire. 

Con tref aire, to counterfeit,- like Faire. 

Convaincre, to convince, like Vaincre. 

Coudre, to sew, — page 140. 

Craindve, to fear,- like Feindre. 

Croire, to believe,- page 141. 

Croitve, to grow up, like Connaitre. 

Cuive, to do victuals, to 
cook, see Instruire. 

Decoudve, to unsew, like Coudre. 

DUrive, to describe, like Ecrire- 

Decvoitve, to decrease, like Connaitre. 

se Dedive, to recant, to re- 
tract, see Dire. 

Deduive, to deduct, like Instruire. 

Defaive, to undo, to de-1 
feai,- - — V like Faire. 

se Defaive, to get rid of, -J 

Dejoindve, to disjoin, like Feindre. 

Demrttre, to disjoint, ? MpHvp 

ge Demettve, to abdicate, - \ Uke Me "re. 

Deplaire. to displease, like Plaire. 

Desappvendve, to unlearn, - like Apprendre. 

Deteindre, to take off the 
die, like Feindre. 

Detruire, to destroy, like Instruire. 

Dire, to say, page 142. 

Disparakve, to disappear, - like Connaitre. 

Dissoudre, to dissolve, like Resoudre. 

Distraire, to disturb atten- 
tion, like Traire. 

Eclore, to hatch. f 



Ecrire, to writo, page 143. 

Elire, to elect, like Lire 

Emoudve, to whet, to grind, like Moudre. 
Enceindre, to encompass,- - like Feindre. 
Enclove, to enclose. t 

En d mrc, to daub, like Instruire. 

Enfreindre, to infringe,- - ? » , Feindre 

Enjoindre, to enjoin, J lvie remare - 

b' Entremettre't intermeddle, like Mettre. 

Entvepvendre, to under- 
take, — like Apprendre. 

Eprcindre, to squeeze > 
out, > like Feindre. 

Eteindre, to extinguish,- - ' 

Exdure, to exclude, see Conclure. 

Extvaive, to extract, like Traire. 

Faire, to do, to make, page 144. 

Feindre, to feign, page 145. 

Frive, to fry, see Rire. 

lnduire, to induce. like Instruire. 

Inscrive, to inscribe, like Ecrire. 

Instruire, lo instruct, page 140. 

InteviLivc, to interdict, se? Dire. 

Intvoduive, to introduce, — like Instruire. 

Joindve, to join, like Feindre. 

Lire, to read, page 147. 

iAiire, to shine, see Instruire. 

Maudire, to curse, ) r\- 

Medire, to slander, \ see VlTe ' 

Meconnaitre, not to know, - like Connaitre. 

se Mepvendve, to mistake,- - like Apprendre. 

Mettre, to put, page 148. 

Moudre, to grind, page 149. 

NaUre, to come to life, see Connaitre. 

Nuire, to harm, to hurt, — see Instruire. 

Oindre, to anoint, like Feindre. 

Omt ttrr, to omit, like Mettre. 

PaUre, to graze, ? w p nnnn 5 trp 

PavaHve, to appear, \ Llke <- onnaltre - 

Feindre, to paint, like Feindre. 

Pevmrttve, to permit, like Mettre. 

Plaindre, to pity, 1 nha r?- ,1 

se Plaindve, to complain,- 5 llke Fe,nd ™. 

Plaire, to please, page 150. 

se Plaive a, to delight in, -- like Plaire. 

Pours uivve, to pursue, like Suivre. 

Pvedire, to foretel, see Dire. 

Pvevdve, to take, like Apprendre. 

Pvescvive, to prescribe, like Ecrire. 

Produive, to produce, like Instruire. 

Pvomet.tve, to promise, like Mettre. 

Pvoscvire, to proscribe, — like Ecrire. 

Reboire, to drink acain, like Roire. 

Reconduire, to lead back,- - like Instruire. 

Reccnnaitve, to know again, like Connaitre, 

Recoudre, to sew again, — like Coudre. 

Recvive, to write again, --- like Ecrire. 

Rexuire, to do or cook again, see Instruire. 

Rede faire, to undo again,- - like Faire. 

Redire, to say again, like Dire. 

Redaire, to reduce, like Instruire. 



* Braire is used only in the following tenses and persons; 

Present 

11 brait, He, it brays. 

lis braient, They bray. 

Future. 

II braira, He, it will bray. 

lis brairont, They will bray. 

Conditional. 
11 brairait, Hf, it would bray. 
Us brairaient, They would bray. 

t Clore, and its compounds Eclore, Enclore, have only the following tenses and 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



135 



JRefaire, to do again, like Faire. Sourire, to smile, like Rire 

Relirc, to read again, like Lire. _ Suuscrire, to subscribe, — like Ecrire. 

Relaire, to shine, — like lnstruire. Soustraire, to subtract, like Traire. 

Remettre, to put again, like Mettre. Suivre, to follow, page 153. 

Remoudre, to grind again, - like Momlre. Suffire, to be sufficient, see Dire. 

Renaitrc, to revive,- see Connaitre. Surf aire, to exact,-- like Faire. 

Rentraire, to fine-draw, like Traire. Sur prendre, to surprise, — like Apprendre. 

Repaitre, to feed, .- - " - see Connaitre. Survivre, to outlive, survive, like Vivre. 

Rcprendre, to take again,- - like Apprendre. se Taire, to holdone's tongue, like Plaire. 

Resoudre, to resolve, page 151. Teindre, to dye, like Feindre. 

Restreindre, to restringe, -- like Feindre. Traduire, to translate, like lnstruire. 

Revivre, to live again, like Vivre. Traire, to milk, page 154. 

Rire, to laugh, page 152. Transcrire, to transcribe,- - like Ecrire. 

Satisfaire, to satisfy, like Faire. Transmettre, to transmit,- - like Mettre. 

Seduire, to seduce, like lnstruire. Vaincre, to vanquish, page 155. 

Soumcttre, to submit, like Mettre. Vivre, to live, page 156. 



persons in use : 



Infinitive. 
Clo re. To close. 

Indicative. 

tTjJe clo s. /close, or am closing. 

"3 Tu clo s. Thou closest, art closing 

5° II clo /. He closes, is closing. 



Participle. 
Clo s. Closed. 

Subjunctive. 

Je close. : 
Tu closes. J 
II close. 



Je clor ai. 


* 1 


cTu clor as. 


Thou 


r II. clor a. 


He 1 


*g Nous clor o>?s. 




B.Vous clor ear. 




• J/s clor ont. 




*T)Je clor a/s. 


J "I 


£ Tti clor a/s. 


Thou 


^ II clor a?7. 


He 


g iVows clor ions. 


We ' 


o- Vous clor ?ez. 


You 


r i7s clor atew<. 


They, 



should, would close, or be closing. 



? I toe } 
OThou to* 
| He has ! 
*e We Aave [ 
I You have 
j^They have J 



closed. 



Compound Tenses. 



J' ai 
Tu as 
J7 a 

Nous avons 
Vous avez 
lis ont 



I Aad closed, &c. J' avais c/os, fyc. 

Conjugate in the same manner, Enclore, 



J' aie 
Tu aies 
II ait 
iVbws ayons 
Vous ayez 
JZs aient 



To enclose. 



>clos. i 



Eclore has only the following tenses and persons in use : 



Infinitive. 
Eclo re. To be hatching. 



Indicative. 



It eclot. 
Us eel use nt. 
II eclora. 
lis ecloront. 
II eclorait. 
lis ecloraient. 



It is hatching. 
They are hatching. 
JLav'iII be hatching. 
T7ky will be hatching. 
It would be hatching. 
They would be hatching. 



Participle. 
Eclo s. Hatched. 



Subjunctive. 

II eclose. 
lis eclosent. 



136 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



Infinitive, 



To learn. 



*Apprend re. 



Imperative, 

Learn. Apprend s, sing. Apprenez, plur. 
Let us learn. Apprenons. 



Indicative. 
^1 learn, or am 
3 Thou learnest, art g 
§ i/e learns, or is g* 

IK. 1 Ie , arn '. 05 

? 3"%/ arc learnln S- 

"g TAote V was learning. 
J 

z We 1 

I Yow J- were learning. 
■8 They J 



$He 
I We 
*You 



learned, 
> did learn. 



J't 
Tz* 
jR 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 

J» 

shll, wll learn, 17 
" fee learning. Nous 
Vous 
lis 

J' 
Tu 

shd, wd learn,// 
* be learning. Nous 
Vous 
lis 



J't *apprend s26. 
Tu IGapprend s. 
II apprend26. 
Nous apprenons. 
Vous apprenez. 
lis apprennentl8. 

J' apprenais6. 

Tu apprenais. 

11 apprenait26. 

Nous apprenions. 

Vous appreniez. 

lis apprenaient6. 



Subjunctive* 

J' apprenne2. 

Tu apprennes26. 

17 apprenne. 

Nous apprenions. 

Vous appreniez. 

lis apprennent. 



appris26. 
appris. 
apprit26. 
apprimes. 
apprites* 
apprirentl8. 

apprendr ai5. 
apprendr as26. 
apprendr a. 
apprendr ons. 
apprendr ez. 
apprendr ont26. 

apprendr aisG. 
apprendr ais. 
apprendr ait26. 
apprendr ions, 
apprendr iez. 
apprendr aientG. 



Gerund. 
Learning. Apprenant26. 



J' apprisse2. 
Tu apprisses. 
II apprit26. 
Nous apprissions. 
Vous apprissiez. 
lis apprissentl8. 



3 



Participle. 
Appris26. Learned. 



After the same manner as Apprendre, are conjugated [mistake. 
Desapprendre, to unlearn. se Meprendre to commit a 

Prendre, to take. -n 1 J to take again 9 

Gomprendre, to comprehend, to understand. " "* \to rebuke. 
Entreprendre, to undertake. Surprendre, to surprise. 



* Sound only one p ; see pp, page 15. 



t See note \ page 47. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



137 



Infinitive. 
To drink. Boi re. 

Imperative. 

Drink. Boi s, sing. Buvez, plur. 

Let tis drink. Buvons. 



Indicative. 
t I drink, or am Je 23boi s26. 



« !TAo?/ drinkest, ar£ £ Tu 
§ drinks, or £s §• 

i Fa a 



drink, 



arc drinking . 



boi 5. 

boi m. 

buvons. 
buvez. 
boi ventlS. 



Z 1 1 
J 

g You S- 
S 77*e?/ J 

2 You 
? T% J 

°He 
tWe 



Je *buvais6. 
was drinking. Tu buvais. 

II buvait26. 
Nous buvions. 
were drinking. Vous buviez. 

lis buvaientS. 

Je *bus26. 
Tu bus. 
drank, II but26. 

did drink. Nous bumes. 

Vous butes26 
lis burentl8. 



WYou 
? They 

"Thou 
%He 
S:We 
| Yo u 
pThey} 



Te 23boir ai5. 
Tu boir as2Q. 
shlljWill drink,// boir a. 
be drinking. Nous boir ons. 

Vous boir ez. 
lis boir 07^26. 

Je 23boir aisQ. 
Tu boir ais. 
shd, wd drink, II boir ait2Q. 
be drinking. Nous boir ions. 

Vous boir iez. 
lis boir aientft. 



Subjunctive. 
Je 23boive2. 
Tu boi ve&G. 
II boi ne. 
Nous buvions. 
Vous buviez. 
lis boi ventlS. 



Je *busse2. 
Tu busses. 
// but26. 
Nous bussions. 
Vous bussiez. 
lis bussentl8. 



a. 

3. 



r 

3 



Gerund. 
Drinking. Buvant26. 



Participle* 
Bu. Drunk. 



.A/Yer sa?ne manner as Boire is conjugated 
Reboire, £o drink again; to drink afresh. 



* See note 2, page 1. 
12* 



138 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 
Infinitive. 
To conclude. Conclu re. 



Imperative. 

Conclude. Conclu s, sing. Couclu ez, plur. 
Let us conclude. Conclu ons. 



Indicative. 

^1 conclude, or am § Je 21 conclu s26 

3 Thou concludest^rZ- Tu conclu s. 

§ He concludes, or is § H conclu 2*26. 

S We ") i i Nous conclu ons. 

® , r I conclude, «re Tr i 

= 1022 > i j • fo^s conclu ez. 

^r/^J concludin S- Jfa conclu entlS 



was conclud- 



Je 21 conclu 02*56. 

Tu conclu ais. 

II conclu cuf26. 

We ~\ I i Nous conclu ions. 

s Tr J were conclud- T7 . 

g F K022S COnclu 7eZ. 

I They J 17s conclu aientG. 



% Thou 
$He 
iWe 
lYou 
* They j 

*He 
%We 
EYou 
3 TAe^ J 



concluded, 
did conclude. 



Je 21 conclu s26. 
T22 conclu s. 
17 conclu 2*26. 
iVows conclu mes. 
Vous conclu tes. 
lis conclu re7?il8. 



Je 21conclur ai5. 

, 77 .„ Tu conclur 0526* 
shall will n conclura< 

6 COn ncludin Nous conclur ons - 
e =»* Vows conclur ez. 

conclur 0722*26. 



SHe 



1 s/ 



Je 21conclur 02*56. 
Tu conclur 02s. 
conclur 022*26. 
conclur 2077s. 



oYou \ becmcluiin S-Vous conclur iez. 
£L They J Us conclur aientG. 



Subjunctive. 
Je conclu e2. 
Tu conclu es26. 
// conclu e. 
Nous conclu 2022s. 
Vous conclu iez. 
lis conclu entlS, 



3 
2- 



Je conclu sse2. 
Tu conclu sses. 
II conclu *26. 
Nous conclu ssiojis. 
Vous conclu ssiez. 

IIS COnclU 556722*18. 



Gerund. 
Concluding. 



Conclu 0722*26. 



Participle. 
Conclu. Concluded. 



After the same manner as Conclure, 2*s conjugated 

Exclure, to exclude ; observe only that the participle of Exclure is ex- 
clus f excluded. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



139 



Infinitive. 



To know.* 



tConnait re. 



Know. 

Let us know. 



Imperative. 
Connais, sing. 



Connaissez, plur. 
Connaissons. 



Indicative. 



^1 know. 
I Thou knowest. 
§ He knows. 

sW* ] 
| You > know. 

? They J 
Thou 



*He 
g Yow 

L/ 

%Thou 
f.He . 

ZThou 
*He 
| We 
z.You 
3 They J 

kr 

~Thou 
f-They 



Je3 tconnais6. 

Tit connais. 

/Z connait26. 

iVbws connaissons. 

Voms connaissez. 

JZs connaissentl8. 

Je connaissais6. 

Tu connaissais. 

II connaissait26. 

Nous connaissions. 

Vous connaissiez. 

lis connaissaient6. 

Je connus26. 

Tu connus. 

II connut26. 

Nous connumes. 

Vous connutes. 

lis connurentl8. 

Je connaitr ai5. 
Tu connaitr as26. 
II connaitr a. 
Nous connaitr ons. 
Vous connaitr ez. 
lis connaitr ont2Q. 
Je connaitr aisQ. 
Tu connaitr ais. 
should, would II connaitr ait26. 
know. Nous connaitr ions. 

Vous connaitr iez. 
lis connaitr aient6. 

Knowing. Connaissant26. 



Je 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Subjunctive. 
connaisseS. 
connaisses26. 
connaisse. 
connaissions. 



connaissiez. 
connaissentl8, 



did know. 



knew, 
■" did know. 



shall, will 
know. 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 



connusse2. 
connusses. 
connut26. 
connussions. 
Vous connussiez. 
lis connussentl8. 



3 



o 

3 



ct> 

3 

I 

3 



Connu. Known. 



After the same manner as Connaitre, are conjugated 
Meconnaitre, not to know. Paraitre, to appear. 
Reconnaitre, to know again. Apparaitre, to appear, speaking of ghosts. 
Croitre, to grow up, to increase. Comparaitre, (a law term,) to appear. 
Accroitre, to accrue. Disparaitre, to disappear. 

D6croitre, to decrease. Paitre, to graze. 

Recroitre, to grow again. Repaitre, to feed. 

Renaitre, to revive. 

Naitre, to come to life, ^ perf. ind. Naqu -is, -is, -it; -imes, -ites, -irent. 
part. ne. *■ perf. sub. Naqu-isse, -isses, -it; -issions, -issiez, -issent. 

* Meaning to know by sight, or to be acquainted with ; as, 

I know that man, this horse, that house, your brother, your sister, i. e. by sight. 
Je connais cet homme, ce cheval, cette maison, votre frere, voire scBur. 
See Savoir, p. 127. f Sound only one n, and lay the accent upon o. 



140 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



Infinitive. 



To sew. 



Coud re. 



Imperative. 



Sew. Coud Sj sing. 
Let us sew. 



Indicative. 



sew, or am 

» Thou scwest, art §. Tu 

§ He sews, or is £ II 

s We "] „ Aw * Nous 



3 Yom /- 
? They J arescwm S- 

si "I 

*g Thou >was sewing. 
*He J 
We S 

I Yom > were sewing. 
S TAey J 



Je3 14coud s26. 
coud s. 
coud 26. 
cousons. 
cousez.* 
cousent!8. 



Vous 
lis 



%Thou 

?He 

IWe 

ZYou 

?They 

WL 

BThou 
%He 

EYou 
P They J 

r Thou 
°He 
§We 
°You 
^They J 



sewed, 
did sew. 



shll, wll sew, 7/ 
be sewing. Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Je 14cousais6. 
Tu cousais. 
II cousait26. 
Nous cousions. 
Vous cousiez. 
lis cousaient6. 

Je 14cousis.t 
Tu cousis26. 
// cousit26. 
Nous cousimes. 
Vous cousites. 
lis cousirentl8. 

Je 14coudr ai5. 
Tu coudr as26. 
coudr a. 
coudr ons. 
coudr ez. 
coudr ont26. 



Cousez, plur. 
Cousons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je 14couse2. 
Tu couscs26. 
// couse. 
Nous cousions. 
Vous cousiez. 
lis cousentl8. 



slid, wd sew, 
> be sewing. 



Je 14coudr aisft. 
Tu coudr ais. 
II coudr ait26. 
Nous coudr ions. 
Vous coudr iez. 
lis coudr aientft. 



Gerund. 
Sewing. Cousant26. 



3 



Je 14cousisse2. 
Tu cousisses. 

cousit26. 
Nous cousissions. 
Vous cousissiez. 
lis cousissentl8. 



II 



Participle, 
Cousu. Sewed. 



After the same manner as Coudre, are conjugated 
Deeoudre, to unsew. Recoudre, to sew again. 



* See s between two vowels, page 17. 



f See note 4, page 4. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 

Infinitive. 
To believe. Croi re. 



141 



Imperative. 

Believe. Crois, sing. 
Let us believe. 



Croyez, plur. 
Croyons. 



Indicative. 



^1 believe. 

a Thou believest. 

2 He believes. 

g You J> believe. 
5° They J 



%Thou 
%He 
&We 
| Yow 
S They j 

|j * 

Z.Thou 

tHe 

IWe 

m YOU 

9 They, 



did believe. 



believed, 
!" did believe. 



7* 

BThou 
"He 



sMZ, toi'ZZ 
believe. 



Je3 croi s26. 
!Tw 23crois s. 
II croi £26. 
Nous croyons. 
Vous croyez4. 
/Zs croi ent\8. 



Je 23croyais4. 
Tu croyais. 
croyait26. 
croyions. 
croyiez. 
croyaient6. 



II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



le crus26. 

Tu crus.* 

II crut26. 

Nous crumes. 

Vous erutes. 

lis crurentl8. 

Je 23croir a.i5. 

Tu croir «s26. 

II croir a. 

Nous croir ons. 

Vous croir ez. 

lis croir owZ26. 



£1 -] Je 23croir aisQ. 

r Thou Tu croir ais. 

%He ! should, would II croir ait2Q. 
&We [believe. iVows croir iows. 

I' Yoi* I Vous croir zez. 

pThey j /Zs croir aientft. 



Subjunctive. 
Je 23croi e. 
Tu croi es26. 
II croi e. 
iVows croyions. 
Vous croyiez4. 
lis croi e7?Zl8. 



Je crusse2. 
Tu crusses. 
II crut26. 
Nous crussions. 
Vous crussiez. 
lis crussentl8. 



Gerund. 
Believing. Croyant26. 



Participle. 
Cru. Believed. 



* See note 2, page 1. 



142 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



To say, To tell. 



Say. 

Let us say. 



Infinitive. 

Imperative. 
Di s, sing. 



Dire. 



Dites, plur. 
Di sons. 



Indicative. 



^7 say, or am p 
5 Thou sayest, art 
g He says, or is or 
ZWe -) 

I You I sa ^ . 
?They\ are sa y in &' 

■*o Thou >was saying. 

& He J 
8 We 1 

g Yow > were saying. 
S They J 



1 



me 

ZWe- 
%You 

? r% J 

c Thou 
«He 
%We 
z.You 
? They. 

£7 

~Thou 
iHe 

E We 
°You 

ZLThey) 



" did say. 



Je3 di 526. 

Tu di s. 

II di *26. 

JVo&s di sons. 

Vous dites26. 

lis di sentl8. 

Je di sazsG. 

Tu di saz's. 

7Z di saim. 

Nous di si<ms. 

Fows di siez. 

lis di saient6. 

Je di $26. 

7^ di s. 

II di *26. 

iVows di mes. 

Vous di Jes. 

lis di rerc*18. 



«7e dir aib. 

Tu dir as26. 

sAZZ, will say, 7/ dir a. 

be saying. Nous dir ohs. 

Vous dir ez. 

7Zs dir ont2$. 

Je dir azs6. 

7*2* dir ais. 

shd, wd say, II dir az£26 

*6e saying. Nous dir iows. 

Tows dir iez. 

lis dir aientG. 



Subjunctive. 
Je di se2. 

di scs2Q. 
II di sc. 
iVoMS di sions. 
Vous di sie^. 
lis di sew*18. 



II 



di sse2. 
di sses. 
di *26. 
Nous di ssions. 
Vous di ssiez. 
7/5 di ssentl8. 



3 

0^* 



•5 



Saying. 



Di sant26. 



Di *26. 



Said. 



After the same manner as Dire, are conjugate. 

Contredire, to contradict. Predire, to foretell, 

se Dedire, to retract, to recant. Redire, to say again. 

Interdire, to interdict. Confire, to confer t, preserve fruit in sugar. 

Maudire, to curse. Circoncire, to circumcise, part. Circoncis. 

Medire, to slander. Suffire, to be sufficient. part. Surfi. 

Observe only, that except Redire, the second person plural of the present of the 
indicative^ and of the imperative of all these verbs ends in sez. and not in tes ; so, 
Vous confisez, Vous contredisez ; and that in Maudire the s is doubled in the middle 
of the word; so, Nous maudissons, Vous maudissez; Je maudissais, &c not Nous 
maudisons, &c. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



143 



Infinitive. 



To write. 



Write. 

Let us write, 



Imperative. 
Ecri s, sing. 



Indicative. 
^1 write, or am $ 
S Thou writest, art ? 
g /fe writes, or is £ 

* * T \ write, 

J are writing. 



J'* ecri s26. 

TV ecri s.t 

JZ ecri <26. 

iVows ecri uo/w. 

Voits ecri vez. 

JZs ecri ventlS. 

J'* ecri vaz$6. 

ecri vais. 
11 ecri u#,i£26. 
Nous ecri vions. 
Vous ecri uiez. 
jTZs ecri vaientft 

J"' ecri uis.t 

TV* ecri ms. 

II ecri vit2Q. 

Nous ecri vimes. 

Vous ecri mfes. 

17s ecri virentlS. 

J* ecrir «i5. 

Tu ecrir as26. 

sAZZ, w;ZZ write,// ecrir a. 

> be writing. Nous ecrir ons. 

Vous ecrir ez. 

lis ecrir o«£26. 

J 1 ecrir ais6. 
ecrir ais. 
shd, wd write, 17 ecrir ait26. 
"Rewriting. Nous ecrir ions. 

Vous ecrir iez. 
t-Theyj Us ecrir aientQ. 



wrote, 
cfoeZ write. 



*g TAom J-was writing. 
S>#e J 

| Fow [> were writing. 
P TAey J 

t 1 1 

fife 
tWe 
ZYou 
* They J 

•Hie 
1 We 
%Y«u 
3 T% J 

HI 

r Thou 
I He 
-■We 
°You 



Gerund 
Writing. Ecri vant26. 



Ecri re. 



Ecri vez, plur. 
Ecri vons. 



J' 

TV 

JZ 

Nous 
Vous 



Subjunctive. 
e'en ve2. 
ecri «es26. 
ecri #e. 
ecri vions. 
ecri azez. 
ecri vm£l8. 



J' 

/Z 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



ecri m'sseS. 
ecri visses. 
ecri vi£26. 
ecri vissions. 
ecri vissiez. 
ecri vissentl8. 



Participle. 
Ecri *26. Written, 



.A/fer i"fte sct?7ie manner as Ecrire, are conjugated 

Circonscrire, to circumscribe. Proscrire, to proscribe. 

Decrire, to describe. Recrire, to write again. 

Inscrire, to inscribe Souscrire, to subscribe. 

Prescrire, to prescribe. Transcrire, to transcribe, to copy. 



* See note \ page 47. 



f See note 4, page 4, 



144 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



Do. 

Let us do. 

Indicative 
yl do, or am §« 
§ Thou doest, «r£ 3' 
g //e does, or is ^ 

I do, 

g YOU > ', . 



si 



Infinitive. 
To do, To make. 

Imperative. 
Fai s, si«g\ 



•g TAow V ioa s doing. 

S>#« J 

g Fom I toere doing. 



did, or made. 



2 Thou 

ZWe 
lYou 
?They. 



g Thou 

& He I sM, will do, 
"o We f be doing. 
EYou 
3 T% J 

^Thou 



s^d, wd do, 
y 6e doing. 



Fai re. 



Faites, plut. 
Fai sows. 



e. 

TO 

Jed 




Subjunctive. 


fai 56. 


Je 


fasse2.1 


1 U 


iai .9. 


Tu 


fasses26. 


T] 
11 


fai £26 


11 


fasse. 


Nous 


fai sows. 


Nous 


fassions. 


Vous 


faites. 




fa acif"7 


lis 


font26. 


lis 


fassentl8. 


Je 


fai saisQ. 






1 u 


fai sais.* 






T] 
11 


fai s«i£26. 






Nous 


fai sions. 






Vous 


fai siez. 






lis 


fai saientfi. 






Je 


nsSso. 


Je 


fisse2. 


Ill 


fis. 


Tu 


fisses. 


TJ 
11 


ntzo. 


II 


fit26. 


Nous 


f imes. 


Nous 


fissions. 




f ites. 


Vous 


fissiez. 


77© 
IIS 


flrentl8. 


lis 


fissentlS. 


Je 


!"ferai5. 






Tu 


feras26. 






11 


fera. 






Nous 


ferons. 






Vous 


ferez. 






lis 


feront26. 






Je 


rferais6. 






Tu 


ferais. 






11 


ferait26. 






Nous 


ferions. 






Vous 


feriez. 






lis 


feraient6. 







Gerund, 
Doing. Fai s<m*26. 

After the same manner as Faire, are conjugated 



Participle* 
Fai *26. Done, made* 



Contrefaire, to counterfeit. 
Defaire, to undo, to defeat, 
se Defaire, to get rid of. 
Redefaire, to undo again. 



Refaire, to de again. 
Satisfaire, to satisfy. 
Surfaire, to exact, to ask too much. 



** See s between two vowels, page 17* f Pronounce fray, fraw } kd \ See 88, p. 18* 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



145 



Infinitive. 
To pretend, To feign* 



Feind re. 



Imperative* 

Pretend. Feins, sing* 

Let us pretend. 



Feignez, plur. 
Feignons. 



Indicative. 

^1 pretend, 
g Thou pretendest, 
g i/e pretends. 
~We 1 

g Yow J- pretend. 
• tt r% J 

f Thou\ was P retend " 
£We 1 

grow ^ erc P retend " 

1 



ing. 



%Thou 
-We 

•° r% J 

c Thou 
°He 
\We 
z.You 
5 They ^ 

^Thou 
% He 
%We 
°You 
fL They J 



pretended, 
^did pretend. 



sMZ, wu'ZZ 
y pretend. 



should, would 
'pretend. 



Pretending. 



Je3 feins26. 
Tu 19feins. 
72 feint26. 
2Voms feignons. 
T^ows feignez. 
7Zs feignentl8 
Je 19feignais6. 
Tu feignais. 
II feignait26. 
Nous feignions. 
Vous feigniez. 
lis feignaient6. 

Je 19feignis26. 
Tu feignis. 
II feignit26. 
Nous feignimes. 
Vous feignites. 
lis feignirentlS. 

Je 19feindr ai-5. 
Tu feindr as%6* 
II feindr a. 
Nous feindr ons. 
Vous feindr ez. 
lis feindr ont26. 

Je 19feindr aisQ. 
Tu feindr ais. 
II feindr ait26. 
Nous feindr ions. 
Vous feindr iez. 
lis feindr aient%. 

Feignant26. 



Subjunctive. ^ 
Je 19feigne2. 
Tu feignes26. 
II feigne. 
Nous feignions. § 
Vous feigniez. 
lis feignentl8. 



3 



Je 19feignisse2. 
Tu feignisses. 
II feignit26. 
Nous feignissions. 
Vous feignissiez. 
lis feignissentl8. ^ 



3 



Feint26. Pretended. 



After the same manner as Feindre, is conjugated 



Astreindre, 

Craindre, 

Contraindre, 

Ceindre, 

Enceindre, 

Joindre, 

Conjoindre, 

Dejoindre, 

Enjoindre, 

Enfreindre, 



to tie, to bind, 

to fear. 

to constrain. 

to gird. 

to encompass* 

to join. 

to unite* 

to disjoin. 

to enjoin. 

to infringe* 



Oindre, 
Teindre, 
Deteindre, 
Eteindre, 
Atteindre, 
Peindre, 
Plaindre, 
?e Plaindre, 
Restreindre, 
Epreindre, 
13 



to anoint, 
to die. 

to take off the die. 

to extinguish^ to put out, 

to reach. 

to paint. 

to pity. 

to complain* 

to restrain, to limit. 

to squeeze out, to strain* 



146 



IRREGULAR VERES IN REV 



Infinitive. 



To instruct. 



Instruct. 

Let us instruct, 



Imperative. 
Instrui s, sing* 



Instrui re. 



Instrui sez, plur, 
Instrui sons. 



Indicative. 
^1 instruct, or am %J' 19instrui 526. 
3 Thou instructest, a?tS Tu instrui s. 
g He instructs, or is a. 1 1 
Z We -] _ vNous 



a YOU )- 



instruct, are 



ZThou 
°He 
"ZWe 
%You 
t They j 

V 

~Thou 

° rr 

°He 
&We 
%You 
pTheyj 



instrui t26. 
instrui sons. 
Vous instrui sez. 
lis instrui sentlS. 
J 1 19instrui saisG. 
Tu instrui sais. 
II instrui sait2Q. 
Nous instrui sions. 
Vous instrui siez. 
lis instrui saientQ. 
J 1 19instrui sis2Q. 
Tu instrui sis. 
II instrui sit2$. 
Nous instrui simes. 
Vous instrui sites, 
lis instrui sirentQ. 
J 1 19instruir aib. 
Tu instruir as26. 
II instruir a. 
Nous instruir ons. 
Vous instruir ez. 
Us instruir ont26. 

J' 19instruir ais. 

7 7 7 7 7 Tu instruir ais. 

should, would 71 . , . ., 0£r 

instruct instruir ail2b. 

7 • . Nous instruir ions, 

be instructing. ir . . 

& vous instruir icz. 

lis instruir aientG. 



?Theyj mstructin g- 

%Thou\ waS . instmct " 
%He J m S' 
£ We ~\ 

S You I were mstruct ' 

1 They J in ^ 

2 Thou] 

$?He { instructed, 
g We f did instruct. 
ZYou I 
? They J 

9/ 



shall, will 
instruct, 
be instructing. 



J' 
Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Subjunctive. 
instrui se6. 
instrui ses2Q. 
instrui se. 
instrui sions. 
instrui siez. 
instrui sentl8. 



Tu 
II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



instrui sisse2. 
instrui sisses. 
instrui sit26. 
instrui sissions. 
instrui sissiez. 
instrui sissent. 



Gerund. 

Instructing. Instrui sant2Q.' 

After the same manner as Instruire, are conjugated 



Participle. 
Instrui t26. Instructed, 



Conduire, to conduct. 
Reconduire. to take or lead back. 
Construire, to construct. 
Cuire, to do victuals, to cook.* 
Recuire, to do or cook over again. 
Deduire, to deducti 
Detruire, to destroy 't 
Enduire, to daub. 



Introduire, to introduce. 
Reluire, 

| to shine, part. Lui, Relui. 

Nuire, to hurt, to injure, part. Nui. 
Produire, to produce. 
Reduire, to reduce, to compel. 
Seduire, to seduce. 
Traduire, to translate. 



* To cook, followed by an object, is generally expressed by Paire cuire; as, 
I cook, or am cooking meat, fish, 8cc. Je l'ais cuire de la viande, du poisson, &c. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



147 



To read. 



Infinitive* 



*Li re. 



Read. 

Let us read. 



Imperative. 
Li s. sing. 



Li sez. plur. 
Li sons. 



Indicative. 



^1 read, or am 
3 TAoz* readest, artf 
§ He reads, or is 
t We •) . 



S° The 



are reading. 



Je3 *Ks26. 
Tu li s. 
II li *26. 
Nous li so?is.t 
Vous li se^. 
7/s li se/zU8. 



g*/ ") Je *li s<z£s6. 

•| TVioi* ^was reading. 7V li sais.f 

&He j /Z li sait2Q. 

~We "I iVbws li swns. 

§ J- were reading. Fows li siez. 

9 They J lis li saientd. 

Je lus 26. 
T*f tlus. 
JZ lut26. 
JVo^5 lumes. 
Fows lutes. 
JZs lurent-18. 



2 Thou 
fHe 
ZWe 
gYou 
f They J 

ft Thou 

°He 

lWe 

? They 

*i 

2tfe 
| We 
g Fom 



read, 
*<foYZ read. 



Je *lir «i'5. 
lir 0*26. 
s^ZZ, wiZZ read, II lir a. 
6e reading. Nous lir ons. 

Fows lir ez. 

lis lir <m*26. 



Je 
Ta 

shd, w d read, /Z 
*6e reading. iVows 
FbtM 
lis 



*lir <m6. 
lir ais. 
lir aim. 
lir ions. 

ir iez. 

ir aientG. 



Subjunctive, 
Je *li se2.t 
T« li ses26. 
II li se. 

iVflWS li 520725. 

Vous li siez. 
JZs li serc*18. 



Je |lusse2. 
Tu lusses. 
II lut26. 
Nous lussions. 
Vous lussiez. 
Us lussentlB. 



3 



(rerwwfZ. 
Reading. Li sawZ26. 

il/ter <Ae same manner as Lire, are conjugated 
Elire, £o eZeci 1 . Relire, £o read again. 



Participle. 
Lu. Read, 



* See note 4, page 4. 

f See p. 17, s between two vowels, 

X See note 2, page L 



148 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



Infinitive. 
To put. *Mett re. 



Put. 

Let us put. 



Imperative. 
Mets, sing. 



Indicative. 
^1 put, or am *g 
3 TAow puttest, art S 
| //e puts, or is J 
£ We ^ 
%You i P ut ' 
^ They J are P uttin g* 



1 T^ow ^ic^s putting. 
^He J 

| You )■ were putting. 
3 They j 



ZThou 
$He 
We 
3 You 
*They} 

sThou 
*He 
IWe 
B.You 
? They J 

g»J 

2/fe 

|Wc 
| Fow 
pThey 



put, 

did put. 



Je3 mets26. 

mets. 
JZ met26. 
iVows mett ows. 
Vous mett ez. 
/Zs mett entlS. 

Je *mett ais$. 
Tu mett ais. 
II mett ozY26. 
Nous mett ions. 
Foms mett iez. 
lis mett aientG. 

Je tmis26. 
Tu mis. 
iZ mit26. 
Nous mimes. 
Vous mites. 
lis mirent!6. 



Je 
Tu 

shall,will put, II 
y be putting. Nous 
Vous 
lis 



*mettr ai5. 
mettr as2Q. 
mettr a. 
mettr o»s. 
mettr ez. 
mettr o,r^26. 



Je *mettr aisft. 
Tu mettr ais. 
sM, wd put, 7Z mettr a^26. 
> be putting. Nous mettr iorcs. 

Vous mettr zez. 
JZs mettr aientS. 



Mett ez, |?Zttr. • 
Mett ons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je *mett e. 
Tu mett es26. 
II mett e. 
Nous mett ioras. 
Vous mett iez. 
/Zs mett entlB. 



Je tmisse2. 
Tu misses. 
II mit26. 
Nous missions. 
Vous missiez. 
lis missentl8. 



I 



Gerund. Participle. 

Putting. Mettara*26. Mis. Put. 

After the same manner as Mettre, are conjugated 

Admettre, to admit. Omettre, to omit. 

Commettre, to commit. Permettre, to permit. 

Compromettre, to compromise. Promettre, to promise. 

Demettre, to put out of joint. Remettre, to put again, to deliver up. 

se Demettre, to abdicate. Soumettre, to submit. 

s'Entremettre, to intermeddle. Transmettre, to transmit. 



* Sound only one t. 



f See note 4, page 4. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



149 



Infinitive. 



To grind. 



Moud re. 



Grind. 

Let us grind, 



Imperative. 
Moud 5, sing. 



Moulez, plur. 
Moulons. 



Indicative. 



^1 grind, or am 
a Thou grindest, art 
g He grinds, or is 

lYou I 8™*' 
?They] are Z nndm Z' 



°$Je 
B'Tu 



14moud «26. 
moud s. 
moud26. 
°? Nous moulons. 
Vous moulez. 
lis moulentl8. 



B-Il 



g J 1 Je 14moulais6. 

1 TAou > was grinding. Tu moulais. 
~>He J 11 moulait26. 

£ We ^ Nous moulions. 

%You >were grinding. Vous mouliez. 
p TAey j i7s moulaient6. 



jfife I ground, 
~We f tfo'd grind. 
%You 
?They) 



Je 14moulus26. 
Tu moulus.* 
II moulut26. 
Nous moulumes. 
Vous moulutes. 
lis moulurentl8. 



J/ ^1 Je 14moudr ai5. 

c Thou Tu moudr as26. 

a He I shll, wll grind, II moudr a. 

o We [ he grinding. Nous moudr ons. 
B'.You Vous moudr ez. 

3 They J lis moudr ont26. 



2* 

"Thou 
%He 
gWe 
g'Yow 
f-They J 



Je 14moudr ais6. 



Tu 

shd,wd grind, II 
' be grinding. Nous 
Vous 
lis 



moudr ais. 
moudr ait%6. 
moudr ions. 
moudr iez. 
moudr aient6. 



Subjunctive. 
Je 14moule2. 
Tu moules26. 
11 moule. 
Nous moulions. 
Vous mouliez. 
lis moulentl8. 



% 
ft. 



Je 14moulusse2. 
Tu moulusses. 
II moulut26. 
Nous moulussions. 
Vous moulussiez. 
lis moulussentl8. 



1 
§ 

a. 
0§* 



Participle* 
Moulu. Ground. 



Gerund. 
Grinding. Moulant26. 

After the same manner as Moudre, are conjugated 
Emoudre, to grind, io whet. Remoudre, to grind again. 



* See note 2, page 1. 
13* 



150 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE* 



Infinitive. 



To please. 



Please. 

Let us please 



Imperative. 
Plai s, sing. 



Indicative. 



^I please. 

g Thou pleasest. 

§ He pleases. 

gWe "J 

3 You > please. 

9 They J 



™Thou 
%tie 
ZWe 
%You 
3 They ^ 

%Thou 
$He 
-We 
%You 
? TAe</ J 

I We 
£ TAe*/ J 

°You 
pThey 



> did please. 



pleased, 
did please. 



shall, 
will please. 



should, 
would please. 



Je plai s6. 

Tu plai s. 

n piai m. 

Nous plai sons. 

Vous plai 5e z.* 

lis plai se«Zl8. 

Je plai saisS. 

Tu plai sais.* 

7Z plai sait26. 

Nous plai sions. 

Vous plai siez. 

17s plai saientQ. 

Je tplus26. 

Tu plus. 

II plut26. 

iVows plumes. 

Vows plutes. 

7Zs plurentl8* 

Je plair ai5. 

Tu plair as26. 

17 plair a. 

Nous plair ons. 

Vous plair ez. 

IZs plair ont26. 

Je plair ais6. 

Tw. plair ais. 

II plair ai?26. 

Nous plair iorcs. 

Voms plair iez. 

lis plair aientG. 



Plai re. 



Plai sez, |?Zwr. 
Plai sons. 

Subjunctive. 

Je plai se2. 

Tu plai ses26. 

1Z plai se. 

Nous plai sions. 

Vous plai szez. 

IZs plai sewtl8. 



Je tplusse2. 
Tu plusses. 
II plut26. 
Nous plussions. 
Vous plussiez. 
lis plussentl8. 



Gerund. 
Pleasing. Plai sant26. 

After the same manner as Plaire, a%$ conjugated 



orq 



Participle, 
Plu. Pleased. 



Complaire, to comply* 
Deplaire, to displease. 



se Plaire* to delight in. 

se Taire, to hold one's tongue, to be silent. 



* See s between two vowels, page 17» 



f See note 2, page 1. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



151 



Infinitive. 
To resolve, To dissolve. 

Imperative, 

Resolve. Resous, sing. 

Let us resolve. 



Resoud re. 



Resolvez, plur. 
Resolvons. 



Indicative. 
y^I resolve, or am g 
S Thou resolvest, art o 
%He resolves, or is 

I You 1 resolve ' 



Je 14resous26. 
Tu resous. 
II resout26. 
Nous resolvons. 
Vous resolvez. 



f They j are Ksol ™S- H S resolventlS. 

"| resolvais6. 

*g T^ow f was resolving. Tu resolvais. 

ZpHe J II resolvait. 

&We ~) Nous resolvions. 

%You ywere resolving. Vous resolviez. 

co They J lis resolvaient6. 

^1 

£5 Thou 

Tr 

? T% J 



resolved, 
cfo'd resolve. 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



resolus26. 

resolus. 

resolut26. 

resolumes. 

resolutes. 

resolurentl8. 



c Thou 
°He 
*%We 
EYou 
<§ They j 

~Thou 

° rr 

%He 
ZWe 
oYou 
pThey J 



shall, will 
resolve, 
be resolving. 



Je 14resoudr ai5. 
Tu resoudr «s26. 
II resoudr a. 
Nous resoudr ons. 
Vous resoudr ez. 
lis resoudr ont26. 



Je 14resoudr ais6. 

7 j j 7 7 Tu resoudr ais. 
should, would T1 * , 

res 1 e resoudr az£26. 

, ° 1 V . J ' Nous resoudr ions, 

be resolving. y<nu r ^ soudr ^ 

lis resoudr aientS. 



Subjunctive. 
Je resolve2. 
Tu resolves26. 
II resolve. 
Nous resolvions. 
Vous resolviez. 
lis resolventlS. 



Je resolusse2. 
Tu resolusses. 
II resolut26. 
Nous resolussions. 
Vous resolussiez. 
lis resolussentl8. 



Gerund. 



Participle. 

Resolved, determined. 
Melted, dissolved.* 



After the same manner as Resoudre, are conjugated 

Absoudre, to absolve, part. Absous, absolved ; and Dissoudre, to dis- 
solve, part. Dissous, dissolved. 

N. B. These two verbs have no perfect tense. 



* As, Le soleil a resous le brouillard en pluie. The sun has melted the mist into rain. 



152 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



To laugh. 



Laugh. 

Let us laugh. 



Infinitive. 

Imperative. 
Ri 5, sing. 



Indicative. 
^1 laugh, or am p - 



5 Thou laughest, art orq 
| He laughs, or is |" 

%You I lau 2 h ' 



1 They 



are laughing. 



Je3 *ris26. 
Tu ri s. 
II ri m. 
Nous ri 0715. 
Fows ri ez. 
lis ri e?i£l8. 



Je *ri ais6. 
* Y was laughing. Tu ri ais. 

II ri ai*26. 



3^ 

•g Thou 1 
J 

8 We 1 iVbws ryons4. 

§Ybw ywere laughing. Vows ryez. 



? r% J 

^/ 1 

%Thou 
fHe 
ZWe 
*You 
?They 

?i ^ 

cThou 
%He 

B'.You 
I They j 

"Thou 
2He 
|We 
g You 
V-They 



lis ri aientS. 

Je *ri 526. 

ri 5. 
JZ ri <26. 
Nous ri mes. 
Vbw5 ri tes. 
lis ri re«2l8. 

Je *rir ai5. 
Tu rir a«26. 
II rir a. 
iVows rir ons. 
Vous rir cz. 
J7s rir on £2 6. 



Je *rir ais6. 

, 7 , 7 7 Ta rir ais. 
should, would n . . « 

, \ 11 rir aztzb. 

laugn, r - f f 

oe laughing. Vous rir 

//s rir aientft. 



laughed, 
" did laugh. 



shall, will 
laugh, 
be laughing. 



Eire. 



Ri ez, plur. 

Ri 0715. 

Subjunctive. 
Je *ri e2. 
Tu ri es26. 
// ri e. 
Nous ryons4. 
Vous ryez. 
lis ri eratl8. 



d 



Je 

Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



*ri 55e2. 
ri sses. 
ri *26. 
ri ssions. 

ri 65262. 

ri ssen*18. 



i 



I 

•g. 



Participle. 
Ri. Laughed. 



Laughing. Ri ant26. 

After the same manner as Rire, arc conjugated 

Sourire, to smile. Frire, to fry, part. Frit, fryed. 

N. B. Frire is used only in the 1st, 2d, and 3d person of the present of the indicative, 
je /ris, tu /r?s, il frit ; in the future, je frirai, tu friras, &c. and in the conditional, 
je fn'rais, tu frirais, &c. ; the other tenses are formed with the verb Faire, and the 
infinitive of this verb; so, We fry, nous faisons frire ; you fry, vous fakes /rire ; they 
fry. Us font frire. 

Fry this fish, these eggs, that meat. Faites frire ce poisson, ces cei^fe, celte viande. 
* See note 4, page 4. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



153 



Infinitive, 



To follow. 



Suiv re. 



Imperative. 



Follow. Suis, sing. 
Let us follow. 



Suiv ez, plur. 
Suiv ons. 



Indicative. 
^1 follow, or am g Je3 suis26. 
3 Thou folio west, art ST Tu 23suis. 



gi/e follows, or is %. II 

lYou I fo11 ™'' . * Vous 
? They J *re following. /fa 



suit26. 

SUiv 0715. 

suiv ez. 
suiv e?z£l8. 



i >i 



Je 23suiv aisQ. 
Thou Vwas following. suiv ais. 
§>i/e J II suiv ait26. 

~ We "J Nous suiv zona. 

gYozz >M?ere following. Vous suiv ze^r. 
a They J lis suiv aientd. 



2. TAow 

^ They J 
|7 

ZThou 
°He 
tWe 
%You 
? They^ 

gUT 

£ Thou 
%He 
Z-We 
%You 
ZThey, 



followed, 
" did follow. 



Je 23suiv zs26. 
Tu suiv is. 
II suiv z £2 6. 
iVozzs suiv imes. 
Vous suiv i^es. 
jTZs suiv irentlS. 

Je 23suivr ai5. 
Tu suivr as2Q. 
II suivr a. 
Nous suivr ows. 
Fozzs suivr ez. 
lis suivr 0rc£26. 

Je 23suivr ais6. 

should, would l u su ! vra ^ c 
> follow, # suivr «t«26. 

f 6e following. ^ ous 

& fows suivr zez. 

JZs suivr aientQ. 



shall , zez'ZZ 

follow, 
6e following. 



Subjunctive. 5* 
Je suiv e2* 

Tz/ suiv es26. ^ 

JZ suiv e. § 

iVozzs suiv ions, v§ 

Fozzs suiv zez. g» 

7Zs suiv ezz*18. g 3 
3 



Je 

Tz* 

7Z 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



suiv zsse2. 
suiv isses. 
suiv i£26. 
suiv issions. 
suiv issiez. 
suiv zsse7z£l8. 



Crerzzrad. 
Following. Suiv ant26. 

After the same manner as Suivre, are conjugated 

s'Ensuivre, to follow from, i. e. a consequence. 
Poursuivre, to pursue. 



Participle. 
Suiv L Followed, 



154 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



Infinitive. 



To milk. 



Trai re. 



Milk. 

Let us milk. 



Imperative. 
Trai s, sing. 



Indicative. 
>a J milk, or am 3 
3 TA.ow milkest, ar£ £r 
S He milks, or is J3' 

1^1 milk, 
3 7 1 

■*g Thou > was milking. 
%He J 
» We T 

g You y were milking. 
3 T% J 

1/ 



g Thou 
"He 
| We 
%You 
3 They j 

%He 
a.We 
"°You 
ZLTheyj 



milked, 
" did milk. 



iZs 

Je 
T« 

shall,will milk,/Z 
6e milking. iVous 
Vous 
lis 
Je 
Tu 

shld, wld milk,// 
be milking. Nous 
Vous 
lis 



Je3 trai 56. 

Tu trai s. 

II trai m. 

Nous trayons4. 

Vous trayez. 

lis trai entlS. 

Je 4trayais6. 
Tu trayais. 
II trayait26. 
Nous trayions. 
Vous trayiez. 
lis trayaient6. 

tirai.* 
tiras26. 
tira. 
Nous tirames. 
Vous tirates. 

tirerentl8. 
trair ai5. 
trair as26. 
trair a. 
trair ons. 
trair ez. 
trair ont2Q. 
trair aisQ. 
trair ais. 
trair ait.2G. 
trair zons. 
trair iez. 
trair aientft. 



Je 
Tu 
II 



Trayez, plur. 
Trayons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je trai e2. 

trai es26. 
// trai e. 
Nous trayions. 
Vous trayiez. 
lis trai entlS. 



Je tirasse2. 

Tu tirasses. 

II tirat26. 

Nous tirassions. 

Vous tirassiez. 

lis tirassentl8. 



3 



5 

ct> 
a. 



Gerund. 
Milking. Trayant. 



Participls. 
Trai i26. Milked. 



After the same manner as Traire, are conjugated 

Abstraire, to abstract. Rentraire, to fine-draw. 

Distraire, to disturb one's attention. Soustraire, to subtract. 
Extraire, to extract. N. B. These verbs have no perfect tense. 



* Traire having no perfect tense, we supply its place with the perfect of the verb 
tirer, which may be used in the same sense as traire ; example, 

I milked my cows, my goats ; Sic. Je tirai mes vaches, mes chevres, &c. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



155 



Infinitive. 



To vanquish. 



Vainc re. 



Imperative. 

Vanquish. Vainc s, sing. 

Let us vanquish. 



Indicative. 
^1 vanquish, or am g Je3 

3 TllO 1 ' wa-nwi 



vainc s2G. 
19vainc s. 
vainc *. 



vanquish, or am Jj Je3 
I T#ow vanquishest, 

gHe vanquishes, or is £.11 vainc *. 
~We ") vanquish, criVbtt* vainquons. 
g Yow j> are vanquish-^ Vous vainquez.t 
" They J ing. * /Zs vainquentl8 



ing. 

^TAo^l^ 5 vanquish- 

|a J ^ 

S y 0M I were vanquish- 

$He 
ZWe 
» You 
?They 



*1 ■ 



. vanquished, 
* did vanquish. 



B.You 
? They ^ 

tThou 
%He 
gWe 
g Yow 
pThey J 



shall, will van- 
quish, 
be vanquish- 
ing. 



should, would 
vanquish, 
be vanquish- 
ing. 



lis 

Je 19vainquais6. 
Tu vainquais.f 
II vainquait26. 
Nous vainquions. 
Vous vainquiez. 
lis vainquaient6. 

Je 19vainquis26. 
Tu vainquis.t 
II vainquit26. 
Nous vainquimes. 
VouS vainquites. 
lis vainquirentl8. 

Je 19vaincr ai5. 
Tu vainer as26. 
II vainer a. 
Nous vainer ons. 
Vous vainer ez. 
lis vainer ont26. 

Je 19vai'ncr ais$. 
Tu vainer ais. 
II vainer ait2Q. 
Nous vainer ions. 
Vous vainer iez. 
lis vainer aientQ. 



Vainquez, plur. 
Vainquons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je vainque.t 
Tu vainques26. 
II vainque. 
Nous vainquions. 
Vous vainquiez. 
. lis vainquentl8. 



OK, 



Je vainquisse2. 
Tu vainquisses. 
II vainquit26. 
Nous vainquissions. g 
Vous vainquissiez. j* 
lis vainquissentl8. 



Gerund. Participle, 
Vanquishing. Vainquant26. Vaincu. Vanquished* 

After the same manner as Vaincre, is conjugated 
Convaincre, to convince. 



* The 1st, 2d, and 3d person singular of the present of the indicative, are noS 
much used. 

f See qu, page 16.. 



156 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN RE. 



Live. 

Let us live 



Infinitive. 
To live, To have life.* 

Imperative. 
Vis, sing. 



pqI live. 
3 Thou livest. 
g/fe lives. 

| Yom k live. 
$ They J 



Indicative. 



*>Thou 
%He 

Z We 

I You 
p They. 



did live. 



S Thou 
tHe 
%We 

p ar% J 

S Thou 
°He 
%We 
&.You 
p They 



lived, 
^did live. 



. shall, 
> will live. 



^Thou 
I He 

g Fow 



should, 
> would live. 



Je3 tvis26. 
TV vis. 
/Z vit26. 
Nous viv oris. 
Fows viv ez. 
lis viv ew£l8. 

Je tviv flts6. 
TV viv ais. 
II viv ai£26. 
iVous viv ions. 
Viv ie*. 
viv aientG. 



Vous 
lis 



Je 

Tu 

II 



v6cus.t 
vecus. 
vecut26. 
Nous v£cumes. 
Vous vecfrtes. 
lis vecurentl8. 



Je 


tvivr 


ai5. 


Tu 


vivr 


«B& 


II 


vivr 


a. 


Nous 


vivr 


ons. 


Vous 


vivr 


ez. 


lis 


vivr 


ont26. 


Je 


tvivr 


aisQ. 


Tu 


vivr 


ais. 


II 


vivr 


aim. 


Nous 


vivr 


ions. 


Vous 


vivr 


iez. 


lis 


vivr 


aientG. 



Viv re. 



Viv ez, plur, 
Viv ons. 

Subjunctive. 
Je viv e2. 
Tu viv es26. 
II viv e. 
Nous viv ions. 
Vous viv iez. 
lis viv ew*18. 



3 



Je 

Tu 

II 



vecusse2. 
vecusses. 
vectit26. 
Nous vecussions. 
Vous vecussiez. 
lis vecussent,18. 



53 



Gerund. Participle, 
Living. Viv ant2Q. Ve'cu. Lived. 

After the same manner as Vivre* are conjugated 
Revivre, to revive, to come to life again. Survivre, to survive, to outlive. 



* To live, meaning to dwell, is expressed by demeurer ; as, 
We live, in London, in town, in the country. 
Nous demeurons a Londres, a la ville, a la campagne. 

f See note 4, page 4. \ See note 2, page 1. 



VERBS IN HE; 



157 



Tables showing how to conjugate all the verbs in RE, both regu- 
lar and irregular.* 

Ger. Part, 
ant, u. 
Imp. Subj. 



3 Tu 
II 



Injin. 
Attend re, 

Indic. 
Attend s, 

s, 

attend 



o 




ons, 


a 




ez, 


CO 




ent> 


HI 


J' 


ais 


a 


TV. 


ais 




# 


ait 


CO 




ions 


DO 




iez 


? 




aient. 




J' 


is 


CD 


TV 


is 




22 


it 


CD 




rmes 


D 


Vous 


Ues 


CO 


its 


irenU 




J' Attend r 


ai 




7V. 


as 




II 


a 


o 


Nous 


ons 




Vous 


ez 




lis 


ont. 


*k 


J' 


ais 


p 


Tu 


ais 


- 


II 


ait 





Nous 


ions 


3 

&. 


Vous 


iez 




lis 


aient. 



ons, tons 
ez, iez 
ent. 



tsse 
isses 
it 

issions 

Sirz 



issent. 



Battre, and its com- 
pounds ; Fendre, De- 
iendre, Doscendre, 
Condescendte, Fon- 
dle, Contbndre, se 
Morfondre, Rompre, 
Corrompre, Interrompre, Pondre, Re pond re* 
Corresponds, Repandre, Mordre, Demordre, 
Tendre, Etendre, Entendre, Pretendre, Rendre, 
Pendre, Dependre, Suspendre, Vendre, Perdre, 
Tordre, Tondre. 



Apprend re, 
J' s 
Tu s 
II 

Nous 



apprenant, appns. 

apprenne 



Vous 
lis 
.P 
Tu 
II 

Nous 

Vous 

lis 

J' 

Tu 

II 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



apprend 
apprenons 
apprenez 
apprennent. 

apprenais 

apprenais 

apprenait 

apprenions 

appreniez 

apprenaient. 

appris 

appris 

apprit 

appnmes 

apprites 

apparent. 



apprennes 

apprenne 

apprenions 

appreniez 

apprennent. 



apprisse 

apprisses 

apprit 

appiissions 

apprissiez 

apprissent. 



J' Apprendr ai 
Tu as 
II a 
Nous ons 
Vous ez 
lis 



J' 
Tu 
Jl 

Nous 
Vous 
lis 



ont. 
ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 



Like Apprend re are 
conjugated Desap- 
iez prendre, Prendre, 
ai p nt._ Comprendre, Enti 



prendre, se Me prendre, Reprendre, Surprendre. 



Infin. 
Boi re, 

Indic. 



Boi i 



Ger. Part. 
buvant. bu. 
Imp. Subj. 



t 

bnvons, 

buvez, 

vent. 

buvais 

buvais 

buvait 

buvions 

buviez 

buvaient. 

bus 

bus 

but 

b umea 

butes 

burent. 



buvons, buvions 
buvez, buviez 
vent. 



busses 
but 

bussiong 
bussiez 
bussenfc< 



Boir ai 



onU 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 

Conjugate in the same manner Reboire* 



Conrmit re, 



connaissant, connu. 



conn a is 


connaisse 


connais 


connaisses 


connait 


connaisse 


connaissons 


connaissions 


connaissez 


connaissiez 


connaissent. 


connaisse nt 


connaissais 




conriajssais 




connaissait 




commissions 




connaissiez 




connaissaient. 




connus 


connusse 


connus. 


connusses 


con nut 


con nut 


conn mnes 


connussions 


conniites 


connussiez 


connurent. 


connussent. 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



Meconnaitre, Reconnaitre, 
Paraitre, Apparaitre, Com- 
paraitre, Disparaitre, Croi- 
tre, Accroirre, Decroitre, 
Recroitre, Paitre, Repaitre, 
Nai-tre, Renaitre- (See re- 



mark under Connaitre, p. 139.) 



* The verbs Conclure, to conclude; Coudre, to sew; Moudre, to grind; Resoudre, to 
resolve; Traire, to milk; Vaincre, to vanquish; which are not frequently used, have 
been left out of this table, in order to render it more convenient; they may be seen in theif 
alphabetical order amongst the verbs in RE. 

t Imperative the same as the indicative. 

14 



158 



VERBS IN EE. 



Tables showing how to conjugate all the verbs in RE, both reguiat 
and irregular. 



In fin. 
Croi re, 

Indie. 
*vJe croi s 
3 Tu s, 
? II 



Ger. 
croyant, 

Imper. 

8, 



£ Nous 
g Vous 
?Ils 

~Je 

a Nous 
m Vo\LS 

Fib 

3 Tu 

» Nous 

Pi/5 

croir at 
c 7'w as 
rn 

t? Nous 
it. Vous 

'Tils 

*}Je 
%Tu 
oil 

-7/3 



croyons, croyons, 
croyez, croyez, 
ent. 

croyais 
croyais 
croyait 
croyions 
croyiez 
croyaient. 



Part. 
cru. 

Subj. 



croyions 

croyiez 

ent. 



crus 
crus 
crut 
crumea 
crutes 
crurent. 



ons 
ez 

ont. 



cruase 
crusses 
crut 

crussions 
crussiez 
crussent 



ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 

iez 

aient. 



Di re, 


sant, 


t 


s 




se 


s, 


s, 


ses 


t 




se 


sons, 


sons. 


sions 


dites, 


dites. 


siez 


sent. 




sent. 



sse 
sses 
t 



a Tu 

a Nous 
« Vous 
9 lis 
~.Ie 

l& 

2 Nous 
| Vous 
? lis 

>aJe 
2 Tu 
-II 

a Nous 
g Vous 
?Ils 

*r>.Te dir 
c Tu 
• II 

%Nous 
t.Vous 
rils 

*^Je 

a 5 

o Nous 
£.Vous 
FIls 

Contredire, Dedire, Interdire, Mau- 
dire, Medire, Redire, Predire, Circon- 
cire, Confire, Suffire. (See remark 
under Dire, p. 142.) 



sais 

sais 

satt 

sions 

siez 

saient. 



t 

mes 
tes 
rent, 
ai 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 



ssiez 
ssent. 



Injin. Ger. Part. 
Ecri re, vant, t. 

Indie. Imp. Subj. 

Ecri s ve 

s, s, ves 
t ve 

rons, vans, vions 

vez, vez, viez 
vent. vent. 

vais 

vais 

vait 

vions 

viez 

v aient. 



! . Injin. Ger. Part. 
Fai re, sant, t. 

Indie. Imp. Subj. 
Fai s fasse 
s, 8, lasses 
t fasse 
sons, sons, fassione 
faites, laites, fassiez 
font. fassent. 
sais 
sais 
8 ait 
sions 
siez 
saient. 



vis 

vis 

vit 

vhnes 

Vites 

virent. 

Ecrir ai 
as 



visse 
visses 
vit 

vissions 
vis siez 
vissent. 



ont. 

ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 
iez 

aient. crire, Trans 



Circon3crire, 
Dccrire, Ins- 
crire, Presori 
re, Proscrird 
Recrire, Sous- 



Feind re, feignant, feint. 

feins feigne 
feins feigne9 
feint feigne 
feignons * feignions 
feignez feigniez 
feignent. feignent. 
feignais 
feignais 
feignait 
feignions 
feigniez 
feignaient- 

feignis feignisse 
feignis feignisses 
feignit feignit 
feignimes fcignissions 
feignttea feignissiez 
feignirent. feignissent. 

Feindr ai 



ont. 
ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 
iez 

aient. 



Astreindre, 
Craindre.Con 
traindre, Cein 
dre, Encein- 
dre, Joindre, 
Conjoindre, 
Dejoindre, Enjoindre, En 
frewdre, Oindre, Teindre, 
Deteindre, Eteindre, Attein- 
dre, Poind re, Plaindre, Rea- 
treindre, Epreindre. 



fia 
fia 
fit 

fime3 
fites 
firent. 

ferai 
feraa 
fera 
ferons 
ferez 
feront. 

feraia 
fera is 
ferait 
ferions 
feriez 
feraient. 
faire. 



fifse 
fissea » 
fit 

fissions 
fissiez 
Assent. 



Contrcfaire, 
Detaire, se 
Defaire.Re- 
faire, Rede- 
faire, Satis- 
faire, Sur- 



Instrui re, sant, t. 



sons, sons, sions 
sez set siez 
sent. sent* 

sais 

sais 

8 ait 

sions 

siez 

saient. 



81S 

sis 
sit 
S'mes 
sites 
Ina- sirent. 

truir ai 



st3se 
sisses 
sit 

sission* 

sissiez 

sissent. 



ont. 

ais Conduire, Re- 
el* eonduire, De- 
ait duire, Eo- 
ions duire, Intro- 
iei duire, Pro- 
aient. duire. Rg- 
duire, Seduire, Traduirf* 
Construire, Detruire, 
Cuire, Recuire, Luire, 
Reluire, Nuire. (See Ins-' 
truire, p. 146.) 



* Imperative the same as the indicative. 



VERBS IX EE. 



159 



Tables showing how to conjugate all the verbs in RE. both regular 
and irregular. 



Injin. 
Li re, 



STit 

A'o us 
= Vous 

fn» 

~Je 

I Til 

fn 

ZJs'ous 
S. Vous 
?Ils 

>~Je 

i Til 

-I! 

e A"ous 

Z Vous 

?lls 

ril 

"= Afl US 

jFjBl 

in 

Fiii 



Ger. Port 
sant, lu. 

Indie. Imper, Subj. 



li s 


se 




scs 


t 


se 


sons, sons, 


sions 


sez, stz, 


siez 


sent. 


sent. 


sais 




sais 




sait 




sions 




siez 




saient. 




las 


lusse 


lU3 


lusses 


lut 


lut 


lu me 3 


lussions 


lutes 


lussiez 


lurent- 


lussent. 



Injin. Ger. Part. 

Plai re, sant, plu. 

Indie. Imp. Subj. 
Plai s se 

s, s, ses 
t se 

sans, sans, sions 

sez, sez, siez 



sent. 

sais 

sais 

sait 

sions 

siez 

saient. 

plus 

plus 

plut 

plumes 

plutes 

plurent. 



sent. 



Injin. Ger. Part. 

Suiv re, ant, i. 

Indie. Imp. Subj. 
suis e 

suis, suis, es 
suit e. 
Suiv ons, 
ez, 
ent. 



ons, ions 
tz, iez 
ent. 



plusse 
ptoses i 
plut I 
pi us sions. 
plussiez ! 
piussent. : 



nit 

ions 



Plair ai 



Complaire. 

Like Lire conjugate Elire, Relire. Deplaire, se Plaire, se Taire. 



ant. 

ais 
ais 
ait 
ions 
iez 
aient. 



ais 
ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 

is 
is 
it 

\mes 
\tes 
irent. 



ont* 

ais 

ais 
ait 
ions 
iez 



is se 

is ses 
it 

issians 
is siez 
issent. 



aient. 

s*Ensuivre. Poursuivre. 



Mctt re, 

~Je mets 
g Tu mets, 
-_Il met 
= J\'ous men ons, 
! Vous 



Ri re, 



t 

ons, 



?Ils 

zr.Te 
I Tu 

£ .\'0US 

5 Vous 

*n? 

mje 
£ Tu 
r-Tl 

S.Xous 
Z Vous 
9 lis 



ent. 



ais 

ait 

ions 

iez 

aient. 

mis 

mis 

mit 

mimes 

mites 

mirent. 



ons, ryons 
tz, ryez 
ent. 



misse 
misses 
mit 

missions 
missiez ; 
missent. 



ais 

ait 

ryons, 

ryez 

aient. 



t 

mes 
tes 
rent. 



Yiv re, ant, vecu. 



vis, vis, es 
vit c 
ons, ons, ions 
ez, ez, iez 
ent 



sse 
sses 
t 

s sions 

ssiez 

ssent. 



*Je mettr ai 
iTu as 

in a 

: .~\"ous ons 
i.Vous ez 
~Ils 



ont. 



Rir ai 



ont. 



Vivr 



ent. 

ais 
ais 
ait 

ions < 

iez 

aient. 

vecus vecusse 
vecus vecusses 
veeut vecut 
vecr.mes vecussions 
vecutes vecussiez 
vecurent.vecussent. 

ai 



wfaJe ais Admettre.Com- ais 

<~LTu ais mettre, Comoro- ais 

'all ait mettre. Demet- ait 

e.Xous ions tre, Entremet- ions 

c-Vous iez tre, Omertre, iez Sourire, Fri- 

r'Hs aient. Permettre. Pro- aient. re. (See re- 
mettre, Remettre. Soumettre, Trans- mark under Rire, p. 152.) 
/nettle. 



ont. 

ais 

ais 

ait 

ians 

iez 

aient. 
Revivre, Surrivre^ 



160 



VERBS CALLED IMPERSONAL. 



Some verbs which have only the third person singular, and sometimes 
the third person plural of their tenses in use, are called impersonal, though 
they would perhaps be more properly called monopersonal, i. e. verbs of 
one person ; the most frequently used are the following : 



Tonner. Eclairer. 

To Thunder. To Lighten. 

Indicative. 
^ It thunders. 
3 It lightens. 
5 It rains, 
g It freezes, 
g It snows. 
? It hails. 
The wind blows. 

g It did thunder. 

It did lighten. 
J It did rain. 
% It did freeze, 
g It did snow. 
S It did hail. 

The wind did blow. 



, It thundered. 

It lightened. 
' It rained. 

It froze. 

It snowed. 

It hailed. 

The wind blew. 



Infinitive. 
Pleuvoz'r. Geler. 

To Rain. To Freeze. 

II tonne. 
II eclaire. 
II pleut. 
II gele. 
II neige ► 
II grele. 
Il vente. 

II tonnazf. 
II eclainzzz*. 
II pleuv«zz\ 
II gelait. 
II neigeait. 
II grekzzz 1 . 
II ventaif. 

II tonnfl. 
II eclairs 
II plut. 
II gela. 
II neigea. 
II grela. 
II venta. 



Neiger. Greler. Venter. 

To Snow. To Hail. To Blow. 

Subjunctive. 
II tonne. 5 
II eclaire. S 
II pleuve. «<i 
II gele. ~ 
II neige. 
II grele. 
II vente. 



II tonnaz\ 
II eclairat. 
II plut. 
II gel#z\ 
II neigeaf. 
II grelaZ. 
II ventaz\ 



31 



M It will thunder. 
£ It will lighten. 
| It will rain, 
•g It will freeze. 

It will snow. 1 
< It will hail. 

The wind will blow. 



II tonnera. 
II eclairera. 
II pleuvra. 
II gelera. 
II neigera. 
II grelera. 
II ventera. 



hrj It would thunder. 
. £ It would lighten. 
2 It would rain. 
Pj It would freeze. 
§• It would snow. 
§ It would hail. 
r The wind would blow. 



Interrogatively. 

Tonne-t-z7 ? 
Eclaire-t-z7 ? 
PleuUZ ? 
Gele-t-z7 ? 
Neige-t-zZ ? 
Grele-UZ ? 



/Z tonneraz*. 
II eclaireraz7. 
II pleuvrazY. 
II gelerazz*. 
II neigerazf. 
/Z grelerazz*. 
II ventemzZ. 

Negatively. 

II Tie tonne 
II n' eclaire 
II ne pleut 
II we gele 
II ne neige 
II ne grele 



Interrogatively and Negatively. 

~ iVe tonne-tf-zZ 

I JV» eclaire-UZ 

a iVe pleut-z7 

r'P' 2 *- | Ne jfMe-t-tf 

s iVe neige-t-z7 

f IVe grele-t-z7 



VERBS CALLED IMPERSONAL. 



161 



Infinitive. 
There be. Y avoir. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Affirmatively. 

There is, 

There are II y a. II y ait. -J 

There was, g 

TAere were II ?/ avait. ^ 

T^ere was, cr 

T/^ere were ....II ?/ eut. II 3/ eut. ? 

T^ere will be II y aura. 

There would be ...II y aurait. 

There is not, <^ 

There are not ,.,.11 n J y a pas. II n'y ait pas. ^ 

There was not, 

There were not II n'y avait pas. § 

There was not, ^ 

TAere were not >...I1 n'y eut pas. II n'y eut pas. § 

There will not be II n'y aura pas. 

There would not be...... II rty aurait pas. ? 

Interrogatively. 

Is there, 

Are ZAere? ..Y a-t-il ? 

Was there, 

Were */zere ? Y avait-il ? 

Was there, 

Were JAcre ? ....Feut-il? 

Will there be ? Y aura-t-il? 

Would there be ? .Y aurait-il ? 

Is there not, 

Are ^ere not? »N'?/ a-t-il pas? 

Was there not, 

Were ^Aere not ? N't/ avait-il pas ? 

Was fAere not, 

Were there not ? N'y eut-il pas? 

Will not there be ? N'y aura-t-il pas ? 

Would not £/*ere be ? N'jr aurait-il pas ? 

Compound tenses. 

There has been, 

There have been II y a eu. II y ait ett. 

There had been II ?/ avait eu. 

There had been II y eut eu. II y eut eu. 

TAere will have been. ...II y aura eu. 
There would have been.il y aurait eu. 

There has not been, 

There have not been Il n'y a pas em 

Has tffore been ? Y a*kil eu ? Has not there been ? N'y a-t-il pas eu ? 

14* 



162 



VERBS CALLED IMPERSONAL* 



Must. 



Falloir. 



The verb Must is conjugated through its different persons; but its 
representative Falloir has only the third person singular of each tense, 
with 77 for nominative; then the nominative of Must becomes the nomi- 
native of the following verb in French, which verb must be in the pre- 
sent of the subjunctive after II faut, II faudra ; and in the perfect, after 
II fallait, II fallut, II faudrait, as appears by the following example, 



I must 
Thou must 
He must 

My brother must Vgo out. 
We must 
You must 
They must 

for me 
§ for thee 
% for him 
% for my brother 
S for us 
p for you 
^ for ZAem 

for me 
S. for f Aee 
^ for him 
= for 777 y brother 
| for w£ 
£ for yoM 
q for tAem 

S for me 
!L for ?/fee 
o for him 
s for ?nv brother 
g for MS 
u for 7/oz< 
£ for £Aem 



JZ faut 



to go out, or 
that I, thou, 
• he, Sf-c. should 
go out. 



to go out, or 
that / go out. 



II fallait 
II fallut 



II faudra H 



to go out, or 
that I should 
go out. 



II faudrait 



que je sorte. 
que tu sortes. 
qu* il sorte. 
<7<ze mon frere sorte. 
que nous sortions. 
que vous sortiez. 
^qu 1 ils sortent. 

que je sortisse. 
que tu sortisses. 
qu' il sortit. 
que mon frere sortit* 
que nous sortissions. 
que vous sortissiez. 
^qu 1 ils sortissent. 

que je sorte. 
o/we tu sortes. 
qu> il sorte. 
o/we mon frere sorte. 
£we nous sortions. 
que vous sortiez. 
h o^' ils sortent. 

" que je sortisse. 
que tu sortisses. 
qu' ii sortit. 
que mon frere sortit* 
que nous sortissions* 
que vous sortissiez. 

h o/w' ils sortissent. 



Negatively. 



I must t?o£ 

2^ow must 72o£ Vgo out. 
7/e must rco Z J 
brother must wo£ 



f o/we je sorte. 
/Z we faut jjos J ^ we tu sortes. 

I o/u' il sorte. 



(_(/we mon frere sorte. 



} 



Interrogatively. 



go out ? 



Must 7 
Must 
Must Zfe 

Must 7»t/ brother 

Must 7 7?o£ "I 
Must £/iow ?*o£ Vgo out ? 
Must Ae 7?o£ J 
Must 77o£ my brother 



f (/we je sorte ? 
FauWZ J tu s^tes - ? 

o/w' il sorte ? 
^we mon frere sorte? 

{que je sorte ? 
£«e tu sortes ? 
qu' il sorte ? 
*ie mon frere sorte 7 



VERBS CALLED IMPERSONAL. 



163 



Must have, meaning To be in need of a thing , is expressed thus 

/ must have 
Thou must have 
He must have 



We must have 
You must have 
They must have 
My brother must have 



money, books ; 
or, /, thou, he, tyc. 
want money, 
books. 



II me 
II te 
II M 
II nous 
// vous 
II leur „ 
II fa lit des livres a mon frere. 



faut de Vargent, des 
livres. 



tj for me 
8 for thee 
b for Aim 
§ for MS 
I for yow 
° for Me?/i 



iZ me 

. \ lite 
to have money, j u - 

books; or, /wanted 7/ ^ 

money, books. n youg 

/Z leur 



fallait, or fallut de 
Vargent, des livres. 



~ for me 
| for thee 
s* for Aiw 
| for «s 
I for you 
<< for ZAem 



to have money, 
books ; or, / shall 
want money, &c. 



II me "] 
II te 
ItM 
II nous 
II vous 
II leur 



faudra de Vargent, 
des livres. 



£ for me 
I for thee 
S* for Aim 
g for 
I for yow 
| for them 



to have money, 
books ; or, / should 
want money, &c. 



II me 
II te 
JTZlui 
II nous 
/Z vous 
II leur 



faudrait cZe Vargent, 
des livres. 



The impersonal verb Tarder, To long, is also conjugated in the same 
manner as the above ; 



i" long 

Thou longest 

He longs 

We long 

You long 

They long 

My brother longs 

7 did long 
Thou didst long 
He did long 
We did long 
You did long 
TAey did long 



to see her, 
^to go there. 



.to see her, 
to go there. 



Thou\Yff' \ 
Re j did long J 



to see her, 
to go there. 



Thou 
He 



' shall, 



1 to 
J to 



see her, 
go there. 



J will long 
should long to see her, &c. 



II me 
II te 
Rim 
II nous 
II vous 
/Zleur j 
II tarde a mon frere de 



^tarde de la voir, d'y 
alter. 



II me 
II te 

n iui 

/Z nous 
II vous 
/Zleur J 



tardait de la voir, d'y 
alter. 



\ tarda «Ze la voir, d'y 



II te 
11 tui 



J * 



ZZer. 



// te^ "1 tar( * era ^ e ^ a u0?r » ^ 

J7 tui j aller - 

II me tarderait la voir. 



134 THE NUMBERS* 

I. L, one. *Un } m. Une y f. 

II. 2, two. Deux. 

III. 3, three. Trois.i 

IV. 4, four. Quat re, 

V. 5, five. Cinq. 

VI. 6, six. Six. 

VII. 7, seven. Se/tf. 

VIII. 8, eight. Huit. 

IX. 9, nine. Neuf. 

X. 10, ten. Dix. 

XI. 11, eleven. Onze. 

XII. 12, twelve. ZWe. 

XIII. 13, thirteen. Treize. 

XIV. 14, fourteen, Quatorze. 

XV. 15, fifteen. Quinze. 

XVI. 16, sixteen. Seize. 

XVII. 17, seventeen* Dix-sept. 
XVIIL 18, eighteen. Dix.huit. 

XIX. 19, nineteen. Dix.neuf. 

XX. 20, twenty. Vingt. 

XXI. 21, twenty-one. Vingt et imi. 

XXII. 22, twenty-two. Vingt-deux. 

XXIII. 23, twenty-three, Vingt-trois. 

XXIV. 24, twenty-four. Vingt-quatre. 

XXV. 25, twenty-five. Vingt-cinq. 

XXVI. 26, twenty-six. Vingt-six. 

XXVII. 27, twenty-seven. Vingt-sept. 

XXVIII. 28, twenty-eight. Vingt-huit. 

XXIX. 29, twenty-nine. Vingt-neuf. 

XXX. 30, thirty. Trente. 

XXXI. 31, thirty-one. Trente et un. 

XXXII. 32, thirty-two, &c. Trente-deux, $c. 
XXXIX. 39, thirty-nine. Trente-neuf. 
XL. 40, forty. Quarante. 

XLI. 41, forty-one. Quarante et un. 

XLII. 42, forty-two, &c. Quarante-deux, <J-c. 

XLIX. 49, forty-nine. Quarante-neuf. 

L. 50, fifty. Cinquante. 

LI. 51, fifty-one. Cinquante et un. 

LII. 52, fifty-two, &c. Cinquante-deux, <£c. 

LIX. 59, fifty-nine. Cinquante*neuf. 

LX. 60, sixty. Soixante. 

LXI. 61, sixty-one, &c. Soixante et un, tyc. 

LXIX. 69, sixty-nine. Soixante-neuf. 

LXX. 70, seventy. Soixante-dix. 

LXXI. 71, seventy-one. Soixante-onze. 



* These words are both Articles and Substantives. 

Articles when prefixed to a noun ; as, Un homme, line femme ; Un livre, Deut 
iivres; Trois hommes ; Quatre maisons ; Cinq chevaux; Dix ecus, &c. 

Substantives when preceded by an article; as, wwDeux; Trois; un Quatre ; 
Ic Deux, le Trois, Quatre, de janvier, de fevrier, de cceur, de pique, &c. des Trois ; 
des Quatre, &c. 

f The chapter on pronunciation contains rules which show how to pronounce all 
Chese words. 



THE NUMBERS. 



165 



LXXII. 


72, 


LXXIII. 


73, 


LXXIV. 


74, 


LXXV. 


75, 


LXXVI. 


76, 


LXXVII. 


77, 


LXXVIII. 


78, 


LXXIX. 


79, 


LXXX. 


80, 


LXXXI. 


81, 


LXXXII. 


82, 


LXXXIII. 


83, 


LXXXIV. 


84, 


LXXXV. 


85, 


LXXXVI. 


86, 


LXXXVII. 


87, 


LXXXVIII. 88, 


LXXXIX. 


89, 


XC. 


90, 


XCI. 


91, 


XCII. 


92, 


XCIII. 


93, 


XCIV. 


94, 


xcv. 


95, 


XCVI. 


96, 


XCVII. 


97, 


XCVIII. 


98, 


XCIX. 


99, 


c. 


100, 


CI. 


101, 


CII. 


102, 


ex. 


110, 


cxx. 


120, 


cc. 


200, 


CCL. 


250, 


ccc. 


300, 


CM. 


900, 


M. 


1000, 


c. 


100, 


cc. 


200, 


M. 


1000, 


MM. 


2000, 



seventy-two. 

seventy- three. 

seventy-four. 

seventy-five. 

seventy-six. 

seventy-seven. 

seventy-eight. 

seventy-nine. 

eighty. 

eighty-one. 

eighty-two. 

eighty-three. 

eighty-four. 

eighty-five. 

eighty-six. 

eighty-seven. 

eighty-eight. 

eighty-nine. 

ninety. 

ninety-one. 

ninety-two. 

ninety-three. 

ninety-four. 

ninety-five. 

ninety-six. 

ninety-seven. 

ninety-eight. 

ninety-nine. 

a hundred. 

a hundred and one.* 

a hundred and two, &c, 

a hundred and ten. 

a hundred and twenty. 

two hundred. 

two hundred and fifty. 

three hundred. 

nine hundred. 

a thousand.t 

one hundred. 

two hundred. 

one thousand. 

two thousand. 



Soixante-dnuze. 

Soixanle-trcizc. 

Soixanlc-quatorze. 

Soixantc-quinzc. 

Soixante-srizc. 

Soixantc-dix-scpi. 

Soixante-dix-huit. 

Soixantc-dix-ncuf. 

Quatre-vingt. 

Quutre-vingt-un. 

Quatre-vingt-deux. 

Quatre-vingt-trois. 

Quatre-vingt-quatre. 

Quatre-vingt- cinq. 

Quatre-vingt-six. 

Quatre-vingt-sept. 

Quatre-vingt-huit. 

Quatre-vingt-neuf. 

Quatre-vingt-dix. 

Quatre-vingt-onze. 

Quatre-vingt-douze. 

Quatre-vingt-treize. 

Quatre-vingt-quatorze* 

Quatre-vingt-quinze. 

Quatre-vingt-seize. 

Q ua tre-vingt-dix-sept. 

Quatre-vingt-dix-huit. 

Quatre-vingUdix-neuf, 

Cent. 

Cent un. 

Cent deux, $c. 

Cent dix. 

Cent vingt. 

Deux cents.i 

Deux cent cinquante. 

Trois cents. 

Neuf cents. 

Mille. 

Un cent. 

Deux cents. 

Un mille. X 

Deux mille. 



* The article A, and the conjunction Jlnd, are omitted with these numbers in 
French. 

f QuoAre vingt and Cent, followed by a noun plural, require s ; as, Quatre vingts 
arts, eighty years ; Deux cents homines, two hundred men ; but not when they 
are followed by another number ; as Quatre vingt dix ans ; Deux cent cinquante 
homines. 

Observe also, that the noun which follows the number One. after another number, 
must be singular in French, though it is plural in English; as, One and twenty 
years. Vingt et un an. One and thirty men. Trente et un homme ; but if the noun 
is followed by an adjective, the adjective must be plural ; as, Vingt et un an accom- 
plis. Trente et un homme armes. 

% In the date of the year, One is omitted, and Thousand is spelt Mil, not Mille; 
so we write 1819, MU hint cent dix neuf, not Un mille huit cent dix neuf. 



166 



THE NUMBERS, 



From the foregoing numbers 
1**, the first. 
2nd, the second. 

3rd, the third. 

4th, the fourth. 

5th, the fifth. 

6th, the sixth. 

1th, the seventh. 

8^, the eighth. 

9th, the ninth. 

10th, the tenth. 

11th, the eleventh. 

12th, the twelfth. 

13th, the thirteenth. 

14^, the fourteenth. 

15th, the fifteenth. 

16th, the sixteenth. 

17th, the seventeenth. 

18th, the eighteenth. 

19th, the nineteenth. 

20th, the twentieth. 

21st, the twenty-first. 

22nd, the twenty-second. 

23rd, the twenty-third. 

24th, the twenty-fourth. 

25^, the twenty-fifth. 

26th, the twenty-sixth. 

21th, the twenty-seventh. 

28^, the twenty-eighth. 

29 th, the twenty-ninth. 

30^, the thirtieth. 

31st, the thirty-first. 

32nd, the thirty-second, &c. 
adding ieme, to the substantive 

Observe only, that in those ending in e, the e is left out ; as, Quatre, 
Quatrieme ; Douze, Douzieme ; and in those ending in /, the f is changed 
into v, for softness of sound ; as, Neuf, Neuvieme ; Dix-neuf, Dix- 
neuvieme. 

From the above adjectives are also formed the numeral adverbs ; 



are formed the adjectives of number ; 

le Premier, m. la Premiere, i. 
{ le Second, m. la Seconde, f. 
I le or la Deuxieme, m. and/.* 

le Troisieme. 

le Quatrieme. 

le Cinqieme. 

le Smeme. 

le Se^Zieme. 

le Huitieme. 

le iVewvieme. 

le Dmeme. 

le O/izieme, or YOnzieme 
le .Douzieme. 
le Tmzieme. 
le Quatorzieme. 
le Qwmzieme. 
le Sememe, 
le Dix-septieme. 
le Dix-huitieme. 
le Dix -neuvieme. 
le Fiwgtieme. 
le Vz'rcgt eZ w??ieme. 
le Vingt-deuxieme. 
le VzV2g"£-£r0isfeme. 
le Vingt-quatrieme. 
le Fmgt-cwoieme. 
le Fmgt-smeme. 
le VingUseptieme. 
le Vingt-huitieme. 
le Fz'ttg-Z-wewvieme. 
lc TVe/^ieme. 
le Trent et unieme. 
le Trente-deuxieme, and so on, by 
numbers, pages 164, 165. 



lstly, 

2ndly, 

3rdly, 
4thly, 
5thly, 
6thly, 



firstly. 

secondly. 

thirdly, 
fourthly, 
fifthly, 
sixthly. 



Premierement. 
Secondement. 
Deuxiemement. 
Troisiemement. 
Quatriemement. 
C inqui emement . 
Sixiemement, 



and so on, by adding ment to the above adjectives. 



* Second and Deuxieme are used indiscriminately, when they are followed by a 
noun ; as, Le second, or Le deuxieme jour ; La seconde, or La deuxieme semaine ; 
but after another number, Deuxieme alone can be used ; so we could not say, Vingt 
second ; Trente second ; we must say, Vingt deuxieme ; Trente deuxieme, <§-c. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOtTN< 



167 



CHAPTER h 

SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 

1. The use of the article being to convey a determinate 
signification to substantives or nouns which follow it, must be 
used before adjectives, the infinitives of some verbs, adverbs- 
prepositions or conjunctions, when substantively used ; as, 

le bon,* le mauvais, le savoir, le pour, le contre, 
the good, the bad, the learning, the for, the against. 

EXERCISE. 

There are no means to satisfy those that willl73 know the 

il n'y a pas moyens 168 satisfaire 88 74 veulent savoir 
why from the wherefore. Good and bad seem to be blended 
pourguoi pourguoi. 1 bon 1 mauvais sen.bler mele 29 

together through all nature, and sometimes to be confounded with each 
ensemble dans quelquefois confondu 29 l'un avec 

other. White and black are two opposite colours, green hurts the' sight 
l'autre. 1 blanc 1 noir oppos629 couleur, 1 vert blessar vue f. 

less than red. The wise man seeketh wisdom, but the fool de- 
moins que 1 rouge. 1 sage chercher 1 sagesse fou me- 

spiseth understanding. Newton says, that there are seven primitive 
priser raison. dire qu'il y a 

colours, called 1 orange, colour 1 red, 1 yellow, 1 green, 1 blue, 1 indigo, 
32 couleur appele — rouge, jaune, vert, bleu, 

and 1 violet. 

2. The article is omitted — 1st, When the substantive de- 
notes neither a species nor an individual nor any part of a 
thing, i. e. when nothing is determinate on the extent of its 
signification ; as, 

II est dans un etat d'ignorance, 
He is in a state of ignorance. 

2dly, Before nouns apostrophized, i. e. addressed to, as to 

individuals ; as, 

Rochers, soyez sensibles a ma douleur, 
Rocks, be sensible of my grief. 

3dly, Often also when we make an enumeration ; as, 

Le grand feu de New York detruisit maisons, magasins, marchan-* 
dises, &c. 

The great fire of New York destroyed houses, warehouses, merchan- 
dise, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

You are in a state of doubt, fear, and distrust. Corrupted32 men and 
etat doute, 2 crainte, 2 defiance. Corrompu 

* Observe that all adjectives, verbs, prepositions, &c. when substantively used; 
are masculine in French. 



168 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOTJNi 

t)f ill lives easily believe that there is no more 2 virtue, 2 probity, 

mauyaise 184 croire il n'yapasplus 

and 2 sincerity in others than in themselves. Charming flowers, through 

les autres Charmante29 32 par 

you nature is more beautiful. Soldiers ! be firm. SCitizens, strangers,2 

plus belle. Soldats ! Citoyens 
enemies,2 pcople,2 kings,2 emperors,2 pity and respect him.* The 

empereurs le plaignent et leo4 reverent 54. 
river carried away 2houscs, flocks, trees, bridges, &c. Generals, ofrl- 
riviere e in porter — troupeaux pontB Generaux 

cers, soldiers, all promised that they would resist with great intrepidity. 

promettre 74 resisteraient intrepidity. 

3. The article is omitted, but the preposition (de or d') is 
used after the words sorte, sort ; genre, kind ; melange, mix- 
ture ; espece, species ; or any other of the same signification ; as 

JJliomme est sujet a toutes sortes dHnfirmites. 
Man is exposed to all sorts of infirmities. 
Exercise. 

There are two kinds of curiosity ; the one of interest, Which excites us 
il y a sorte f. interet, 74 porter 54 

to desire to learn what may be useful to us ; and the other of pride, which 
a desirer d'apprendre 84 178 54; l'autre orgueil, 74 

proceeds from the desire of knowing what others aret ignorant of. 

venir desir savoir 84 les autres ignorer 

(Old age) is a sort of tyrant, who forbids, under pain of death, all the 
vieillesse f. sorte tyran, 74 defendre sous mort 
pleasures of youth. Politeness is a mixture of discretion, {complacency, 

plaisir jeunesse. Politesse melange complaisance, 
and {circumspection. Praises are a kind of tribute (that is paid) to true 
louange sorte 3 tribut qu'on paie|| 1 vrai 

merit. There is in goodness a kind of magnet which attracts all men to 

il y a dans aimant 74 attirer 

itself. The hieroglyphics of the Egyptians were figures of men, {birds, 

soi. hieroglyphes Egyptiens 

{animals, and {reptiles. 

oiseau. 

4. The preposition to, translated by de. 

The preposition to, is translated into French by the prepo- 
sition de — 1st, Before nouns expressing consanguinity, appro- 
priation to a particular person, kindred, kinsfolk, kinsman, kins* 
woman ; as, 

Le roi d'Espagne, frere de Napoleon premier. 

The king of Spain, brother to Napoleon the first. 

2d, After the words road, way, path, alley ; as, 

Nous sommes sur la route de Newark. 
We are on the road to Newark. 

EXERCISE. 

On the eighteenth of February, one thousand four hundred and seventy* 
(a) dixhuit (b) fevrier 21 mil (c) (d) 



* See f page 63. f See t page 81. { See § page 47. || See * page 103. 

(a) On is never represented in French with expressions of time. 

(b) The preposition of when immediately followed by the name of the month, ia 
generally omitted. 

(c) When mentioning the date of the Christian era, we write mil, instead oimille. 

(d) The conjunction andis now omitted in French before cardinal numbers 



i 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 169 

eight the duke of Clarence, brother to king Edward the fourth, was 

due 4 (e) flit 

drowned in a butt of Malmsey wine. Mr. P. jeweller to the queen, 

noye tonneau Malvoisie 25. jouailler 4 

has a very prudent wife. The road to Croyden is very bad in winter. 

29 32 4 29 hiver. 

Go to the ferry boat to inquire the road to Paterson, and then you 
4 bac vous informer du chemin alors 

will see Mr. Smith, cousin to your friend who went to the theatre 
4 " 74 alia theatre 

with Miss Charlotte, sister to the director of the bank. The 

avec Mademoiselle directeur 

heir to the crown of Portugal is called prince of Brazil, 
heritier 4 couronne appele 

5. A, an, no, expressed by de. The article a, or an, or 
the negative* no, is expressed by the preposition de, after a 
verb negatively used, except the verb to be. 

II n'a pas d'ami. Vous n'etes pas un Ciceron. 

He has not a friend. You are not a Cicero. 

EXERCISE. 

He has no sugar. She has no beer. We have no cider.; You have 
sucre. biere. cidre. 

no coffee. They have no tea. They have no water. I have had no 
cafe the. d'eau. 

wine. Thou hast had no china. She has had no saucer. You have 

vin. porcelaine. soucoupe. 

had no soup. They had no cloaks. Thou wilt have no hat. He 

soupe. manteau. chapeau. 

will have no handkerchief. She will have no pencil. We shall have 
mouchoir. crayon. 

no boy. I should have no waistcoat. Thou wouldst have no watch, 
garcon. giiet. montre. 

6. The sign un, une, can be used when the intention is to 
name one person or thing only, whether the verb is used ne- 
gatively, or negatively and interrogatively, but then un, une, 
means one, not a or an, and dc is considered its plural ; as, 

Je n'ai pas un livre. 

I have not a book ; i. e. not one single book. 
Je n'ai pas de livre. 

I have no book ; i. e. not any of any kind. 

EXERCISE. 

I have no peaches. Thou hast no strawberries. We have had no 

peches. fraises. 

plates. They have had no cups. I have not a cent. I have no cents, 
assiettes. tasses. sou. sous. 



(e) The article the is used in English, and not in French, before the ordinal num- 
bers first, second, third, $c. when they come after the words booh, chapter, section, %c, 
or the name of a sovereign, Charles the Second, chapter the sixth. 

chapitre six. 

* No, between a verb and a substantive is translated like not any. 

15 



170 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 

Have we no cook'? Have we not a cook 1 I can not conceive 

cuisinier? cuisinier? Je ne puis pas conce voir 

why this gentleman feeds his horse himself. Has he no servant 
pourquoi fait paitre luimeme. > J domestique 

to do that work for him % No, sir; he cannot keep a servant; he 

besogne garder 
has no property, and his lady, who is considered a beauty, spends 
bien epouse consideree depenser 

perhaps too much on her daughters, who are no beauties., 
peut-etre ne sont pas des beautes. 

7. Some, any, expressed by de, not by du, de la, des. The 
partitive sign, some* any, after a verb used negatively is ex- 
pressed by the preposition de alone, because the substantive is 
used in an indeterminate sense ; as, 

This year they will not have any peaches. 
Cette annee ils n'auront pas de peches. 

EXERCISE. 

Never give her59 any7 advice, for you see (s) she does not shew 
Ne jamais donnez t conseil car voir montrer 

any7 talent, after all the pains (5) you have taken with her.58 I will 

toutes peines prises 

not drink any7 water, nor eat any7 fruit. Your brother bought a 

boire ni ne manger acheter 

fine horse yesterday, but he ought to remember (5) he will not always 
hier doit se rappeler n'aura toujours 

have money. ' I went last Saturday to market, but could not get 

aller dernier Samedi marche Je ne pas trouver 

any? ripe gooseberries. I have not had any oysters yet. 184 
mures32 groseilles. eii huitres encore. 

8. Some, any, expressed by du, de la, des, not de. The 
partitive signs, some, any, resume their proper form du, de la, 
des, after a negative verb ; 

1st. When the verb is used negatively and interrogatively ; 
because then the substantive means a certain portion ;\ as, 
Navez vous pas des livres 1 Have yoii no books ? 
2dly. When the the noun is qualified by an adjective 
placed after the substantive ; as, 

Je ne vous ferai pas des reproehes frivoles. 
I shall not make you frivolous reproaches. 

3dly. When the noun is determined by any words follow- 
ing it ; as, 

Je ne vous donnerai pas des peches de cet arbre. 
I will uot give you any peaches of that tree. 



* When the substance is restrained to a little, a few, some is expressed by 
quelques, not by du, de la, des, which imply an unlimited number or quality. f 

t See (i) page 63. 
, $ See * page 49. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



171 



4thly. When there are in the sentence words which limit 
the effect of the negation ; as, 

Les Turcs ne portent pas touts des turbans. 
Turks do not all wear turbans. 

EXERCISE. 

Have we not any8 books 1 Have they not any ribands 1 Have 

Avoir 133 190 ? Avoir 133 190 rubans ? 

we con venient33 houses 1 Had they had extensive33 fieldst 1 Had 
commode t 133 190 spacieux champs ? Avoir 

you not had fashionable gowns 1 I shall not make you frivolous33 

133 190 a-la-mode robes ? (5&.n.e.) fri voles 

reproaches. I will not send spoiled33 oranges. I informed him54 
t reproches. X envoyer gates informai 

that I wouldi not send him any fruit of my garden. I beg her not 
(bb n.b.) envoyer * prier 54 190 

to play tunes of your composition. He desires us not to tell 
(n.e.) jouer t airs composition. prier 54 raconter 

stories without explaining the personages mentioned in them, 
f histoires lui* expliquer personages qui y sont mentiones 55 

and not bring him any books contrary to fgood morals, for he 
190 (n.b.) apporter * 8 " contraires moeurs, xar 

knows that men have not all sentiments calculated to appreciate 

(bb n.b.) t propre a aprecier 

what they read. 
84 lisent. 

9. The partitive sign some is understood (i. e. not ex- 
pressed) in french, after the preposition de, whatever be the 
english preposition which de represents ; 

II nous donna du cidre aulieu de vin; 

He gives us some cider instead of wine ; 
and the english prepositions at, about, of, from, by, with, are 
translated by de alone, without the article, when they follow 
an adjective or a participle ;& as, 

Plein de charmes. Estime de tout. 

Fall of charms. Esteemed by all. 

EXERCISE. 

Human life is fall of disappointments. (To die) for one's country 
Surname vie plein 9 rcvers. Mourir son pays 

is a death fall of charms. A noble but confused thought is a diamond 
mort charm e. se 32pensee diamonet 

covered with dust. If fortune has blessed you with her gifts, if 
couvert 9 poussiere. favorisse 55 9 don 

besides you are endowed with wit and judgment, be not puffed up 
outre eel a done esprit 9jugement, ne vous enflez pas 

with pride, and do not contemn others. No one is fit for friendship 
orgueil, mepriser les autres. On n'est pas propre a l'amitie 



* See (f) page 63. 

t See 7th Rule Introduction. t See note (5) page 76. 

§ The adjectives or participles which signify plenty. or scarcity, are generally fol- 
lowed in trench by de without any article ; 

Je suis content de vous . I am satisfied with you. 



172 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 

who is not endowed with virtue. Whoever attacks the sacred 

quand on 1Q0 doue vertu. Quiconque attaquer sacre 

person 0/ a king, is guilty of high treason. The ladies of the 
32personne f. roi, coupabie haut trahison. 
present day buy mousseline de laine instead of silk, but they 
^aujourd' hui acheter mousseline de laine soie, 

(cannot use) ink instead of paint. These amiable children, after 

ne peuventse servir d'encre fard. 

a long walk, have returned and brought us pears, instead of 
longue promenade, revenir apporter poires, 

apples. 

pommes. 

10. The suppression of the partitive sign does not take 
place when the above prepositions are used in their proper 
form, or after any other preposition ; as, 

En hiver on couvre les pommes de terre avec de la paille. 
In winter people cover potatoes with some straw. 

EXERCISE. 

See that lady, she has trimmed her dress with *green32 riband. 
Voyez orne robe vert ruban. 

The minister is really satisfied with men whom the people hate. The 

ministre vraiment satisfait 
Egyptian ladies 39cover 13their face with *veils. The English 

Egyptiennes se couvrent le visage » 

manufacture their superfine cloths32 with* Spanish27 wool.32 

manufacturer drap laine. 

NUMERAL ARTICLE. 
A, AN; UN, UNE. 

11. A, an denoting individuality, i. e. one only of the sub- 
stance spoken of, is expressed in french by the number un, 
une, and no distinction is made between a and one ; as, 

A or one bottle. une bouteille. 

A or one dozen. une douzaine. 

A or one pound. une livre. 

A or one hundred. un cent. (/) 

EXERCISE. 

A glass, a bottle, a pound, a day, a year, 
verre, m. bouteille, f. livre f. jour, m. an. m. 

12. But a, an before the names of measure, weight, number 
and periods of time, used in a collective sense, i. e. not denot- 
ing individuality, is not expressed by un,une, it is expressed by 
le, la; as, 



* See Rule 9 (n.b.) page 51. 

(/) Any number prefixed to a noun may be considered as an article, since, like 
the article, it serves to determine the acceptation of that noun; as Deux hommes, 
two men ; Trois femmes; three women ; Quatre livres, four books ; Six bouteilles, siv 
bottles, &c. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 173 

Wine sells at six shillings a bottle; Le vin se vend six shelins la bou- 

i. e. six shilling per bottle. teille; not une bouteille. 

Butter twenty pence a pound ; Le beurre vingt sous la livre ; 

i. e. per pound. not, une livre. 

Eggs a shilling a dozen ; Les oeufs nn shelin la douznine ; 

i. e. one shilling^/- dozen - not, une douzaine. 

Oranges a guinea a hundred ; Les Oranges une guinee le cent ; 

i.e. one guinea per hundred. not, une guinee un cent. 

I go to town once a day ; Je vais a la ville une fois le jour, 

i. e. each day, or daily. or par jour ; not, une jour 

Three times a week, or weekly. Trois fois la semaine, or par sem. 

By these words a bottle, a pound, a dozen, a hundred, I do 
not mean that one single or individual bottle, pound, dozen or 
hundred sells at that price ; but each bottle, pound, dozen, or 
hundred ; nor that I go to town one single day or week ; but 
each day, each week. 



I must 181 Qpy a pound of plums. (How much) do they 

II faut que j'achete 11 prune. Combien — onl33 
sell them a pound % They90 selll25 them two pence a dozen, 
vend les54 ? On x.b. vendre les54 deu^ou douzaine.f. 
Beer se]lsl25 at four pence a pint, wine five shillings a bottle, 
Biere f. se vendre — quatre sou pinte, f, vin m. cinq shelin 

brandy six pence a glass, and rum five shillings a quart. I gol25 
eau-de-vie , rum. m. quarte. f. aller 

to school once a day. I takel25 lessons three times a week. 

Secole une fois prendre lecon fois semaine.f. 

We have (holydays) only once a year. 

n'avons vacances qu'* une fois annee. 

DEMONSTRATIVE ARTICLE. 
THIS, THAT, THESE, THOSE, CE ; GET, CETTE, CES. 
13. The demonstrative words, ce, cet, cette, ces are used in the 
same instances as the corresponding signs are in english ; 
they serve to point out the objects we name, and follow the 
same rule as le, la, les ; ex. 
I like this or that wine, J'aime ce vin, 
this or that beer. ' cette biere, 

this or that money, cet argent, 

these or those fruits. ces fruits. 

N. B. ce, cet, cette, ces do not express that local distinction 
which is implied in the words this, these; that, those ; so, if 
you wish to make the same distinction in french, you must add 
to the noun, ci to denote the nearest object, and la to denote 
the remotest ; as, 



JyJ X w f«f Cr \? nhj m u V be , ° x P ressed twoiways, either by Soulement after the verb, 

k > Yerb ' and by Que after [t ; so > Nous avon3 vacances soulement une 
jots, oijyous wavons vacances qu' une fois, &c 

15 # 



174 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



I prefer this wine to that, 

this beer to that.* 
I prefer that wine to this, 
that beer to this,* 
this money to that, 
those fruits to these. 



Je prefere ce vin-ci a celui-Zd. 

cette biere-a a celle-Zd 
Je prefere ce v'm-la a celui-a. 
cette biere-Z(2 a celle-tfi. 
cct argent-cia celui-Zd. 
ces fruits-Zd a ceux-ci. 



EXERCISE. 

This man, this woman, these children 
homme, femme, enfant. . 

house, those trees. This field, that grass, 
maison, f. arbre. champ, m. herbe 

flocks. This man is taller than that. 



That horse, that 
cheval, 

these people, those 
f. gens, 

38 That woman is 



troupeau. grand41 celui-la.N.B. 

handsomer than this.88 These children play better than those.88 
belle41 n.b. jouerl25 t n.b. 

Those trees are larger than these.88 This field is better than that.88 

125 gros41 n.b. t n.b. 



POSSESSIVE ARTICLE. 

MY, THY, HIS, HER, ITS, OUR, YOUR, THEIR. 
MON, MA, MELTON, TA, TES; SON, SA, SES; NOTRE, &c. 

14. These words follow the same rule as the article le, la, 
les ; they agree in gender and number with the noun which 
follows them ; so, 

Her father, is, son pere. tHis or her son, son fils. 

His mother, sa mere. His or her daughter, sa fille. 

EXERCISE. 

My book, my pen, my papers. His coach, his chaise, his 
livre, m. plume, f papier. carosse, m. chaise, f. 

horses; His coach, her chaise, her horses. Our friends, your 
cheveau ; ami, 

children, their relations, 
enfant, parent. 

15. The possessive article my, thy, his, her, our, your, their 
is expressed by the definite le, la, les, when prefixed to the 
name or any part of the body, after a verb denoting a natural 
action of the body ; as, 

I open my \ J' ouvre 

Thou openest thy Vmouth. Tu ouvres J^abouche ; 

He opens his J II ouvre J not, ma bouche.ll 



* This, that, these, those, are also pronouns ; see note (p.) 
f See note (e) page 56. 
j See II page 45. 

II When I say, J'ouvre la bouche, I open the mouth ; the hearer understands that 
it is of my own mouth that I am speaking, for if it was the mouth of another being, 
I should name that being. Again, Je me suis coupe le doigt, corresponds with the 
english, I have cut myself in the finger ; and J'ai mal au doigt, with, I have a pain 
in the finger. Here also the possession being sufficiently determined by the pronoun 
me, or by tho verb J'ai, any otheT possessive expression would be superfluous ; how- 
ever, these are idioms which practice alone can render familiar. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



175 



Or when the verb denotes an action done upon the body ; as, 
I have cut my ) Je me suis ) 

Thou hast cut thy > finger. Tu V es > coupe le doigt. 
He has cut his ) II s' estt ) 

Never say ; J'ai coupe tnon doigt ; Tuas coupe ton doigt ; II a coupe son doigt, &c. 

N. B. Observe that in speaking of an action done upon the 
body, the person on whom the action is done must be denoted 
by a personal pronoun ; so, if the verbis not reflective, i. e. if 
the agent does not act upon itself, as it does above, one of the 
pronouns me, nous, te vous, lui, leur, agreeably to number and 
person, must be added to the verb ; as, 

C my ) II m 1 } 

He has cut 1 thy > finger. II V > a coupe le doigt. 

f his or her ) II lui ) 

i our 1 II nous } 

He has cut < your > fingers. II vous > a coupe les doigts. 
( their ) II leur ) 

Never say ; II a coupe tnon doigt ; II a coupe ton doigt ; II a coupe son doigt, &c. 



Raise your arm. Move your leg. Advance your foot. She 
Lever* bras, m. Remuer* jambe.f. Avancer* pied, m. 

shutsl2& her eyes, and opens her mouth ; I have237 hurt my arm. You 

fermer yeux, ouvrirl25 bouche ; f. t blesse 

have237 cut your hand. He has237 broken his leg. She has237 put 
t coupe main. f. t rompu \ — 

her foot (out of joint.) You have hurt my arm. He has cut my hand. 

demis t blesse t coupe 

You have put her foot (out of joint.) The carriage ranl36 over his 
t — demis voiture f. a passe par-desaus t 

body, and brokel36 his leg. 

a rompu t 

16. If in instances similar to the above, i. e. before the 
names of the parts of the body, the possessive words my, thy, 
his, her, our, your, their come with the verbs, To have a pain, 
Avoir mal ; To hurt, se Faire mal ; To be cold, Avoir froid ; 
To be warm, Avoir chaud ; they are expressed by au, a la, 
aux ; as, 

I have a pain in my ) J' ai ) 

Thou hast a pain in thy > finger. Tu as > mal au doigt ; 

He has a pain in his ) II a ) not, a mon doigt. 



t See 237 rule. * Second person of the imperative. 

t These sentiments must be expressed as if the words were construed in this man 
ner : I to myself have 237 hurt the arm. You to yourself have237 cut the hand. He 

— me suis blesse — vous etes coupe 

to himself has237 broken the leg. She to herself has237 disjointed the foot. You to 
— s' est rompu — s' est demis — 

me have hurt the arm. He to me has 'cut the hand.' You to her have disjointed the 
m' avez blesse — me a coupe — lui avez demis 

foot. The carriage to him has runl36 over the body, and to him has broken the leg. 
voiture i. — lui a passe par-dessus — lui a rompu. 



176 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE ANE NOUN. 



I have hurt my J Je me suis ) 

Thou hast hurt thy > hand Tu V es > fait mal a. la main ; 

He has hurt his ) II s' est } not, a ma main. 

My feet J J' ai 



Thy feet <z?r > cold, Tu as* >froid aux pieds, 

His or her feet are* ) II or elle a ) not, a ?wcs pieds. 



I have a pain in my head. My mother has a pain in her side. 

24 mal t tete. f. 24 mal cote. ift. 

My father has got the gout in his feet. Have237 you not hurt your 

270 goutef.t Nevous etes-vous pas fait mal t 

leg? No; but I have237 hurt my knee. In the last29 battle, my 
jambef. ? 191 ; me suis fait mal t genou. m. Dans dernier battaile,' f. 

brother was wounded in his arm, and I was wounded in the shoulder. 

fut blesse t , fus blesse t epaule. 

My hands are239 warm, but my feet are239 very cold. 

avoir chaud,t avoir grand froid. 

17. Its and their neuter, are also expressed by le, la, les, 
and the pronoun en is added to the verb, when the noun to 
which they are prefixed is not governed by the same verb as 
the noun to which they refer ; as, 

That tree is fine, but its fruit is good for nothing. 

Cet arbre est beau, mais le fruit n'en vaut rien ; i. e. the fruit of it. 
But they are expressed by son, sa, ses, leur, if the nouns are 
governed by the same verb ; as, 

I like that tree, its shape and its leaves. 

J'aime cet arbre, sa forme et ses feuilles. 

EXERCISE. 

That water is good,29 I know!25 its qualities (turn, the qualities 

eau f. bon, (g) connaitre qualites, 

of it,) and I have experienced Us effects, (i e. the effects of it.) TolTO 
en, 54 j'ai eprouve effet, en55. Pour 

paint the human heart (it is necessary) to know all its springs, (i. e. 
peindre humain32 cceur m. il faut 172 — connaitre touts ressort, 
the springs of it-) London astonishes strangers; they admire its 

en. 54 Londres etonnerl25 ' etranger ; admirerl25 
extent, and its riches, i. e. (of it.) 
etendue, richesse,f. en. 54. 

1 8. The possessive mon, ma, mes must be prefixed to names 
of kindred and friendship, when we call or answer any one 
by those names ; as, 

Come here, brother. Venez ici, mon frere. 

I can not, sister. Je ne saurais, ma sceur. 



* See 239 rule. 

t Say ; At the head ; at the side ; at the feet ; at the leg ; at the knee ; at the arm ; 
at the shoulder. N. B. at the is expressed in the same manner as to the. 

I Turn, I have warmth at the hands, but I have great cold at the feet. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 177 
EXERCISE. 

Mother, you are92 wanted. I am coming, child. Daughter 
, on vous demande. J' — vais,155 2enfant. fille, 
are you ready? Yes, father. Come, friends, (let us be) merry. 
pret?29 Oui, Allons, ami, — — soyons gai.29 

19. The article is left out in french, when expressed in 
english, at the title page, or before any of the parts of a book ; 
as, 

A french grammer. Grammaire francaise. 

The preface. The first part. Preface. Premiere partie. 

EXERCISE. 

A treatise upon the immortality of the soul. An introduction to 
traite sur immortalite ame. introduction 

the french32 language. 1 The preface. The first29 part. The end. 
francais29 langue. f. preface. premier partie. f. fin. 

20. The article a, an which comes after what, is omitted 
in french ; as, 

What a man ! duel homme ! not quel un hommep 

What a woman ! Quelle femme !— quelle une femme ! 

EXERCISE. 

What82 a pretty dog ! What a funny head he has ! What 
Quel joli33 chien ! 82 drole de tete f. ! 82 

a large33 house ! What a cold32 day ! What a beautiful woman 1 
grand33 maison ! f. 82 froid jour ! m. 82 belle33 femme ! 

21. The article a } an coming before hundred or thousand, 
followed by a noun, or relating to a noun, is not expressed in 
french, the words cent and mille having the property of a& ar- 
ticle*; as, 

I have won a thousand guineas ; J'ai gagne mille guinees ; 

Will you have a hundred of them ? En voulez-vous cent ? not, un cent. 

EXERCISE. 

Canl25 you lend me a thousand pounds'? I canl25 lend 
Pouvoir (kk) preter 54 mille livres sterling ? pouvoir preter 

you54 a hundred, but 1 can notl90 lend you54 a thousand. We 
vous en70 cent, pouvoirl25 vous en70 mille. 

have an army of a hundred thousand men. They have a hundred 
125 armee f. homme. 125 

fieldS5 pieces. 

pieces de campagne. 

22. No article is used in french, before a noun added to il- 
lustrate or explain another noun ; and the article which is pre- 
fixed to such nouns in english, must be omitted in french ; as, 

Zaira a tragedy of Voltaire. Zaire tragedie de Voltaire. 
Paris the capital of France. Paris capitale de la France. 
Never, Zaire une tragedie ; nor Paris la capitale, &c. 



* See note (/) page 172. 



178 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



EXERCISE. 

Neptune the god of the sea. Telemachus an epic poem. 

dieu mer. Telernaque epic32 poems 

Madrid the capital32 city of Spain. My brother is a citizen of 

capitale ville SEspagne. citoyen 
Geneva, a small republic between France and Switzerland. He is a 
Geneve, republique entre f. 5Suisse.f. 

counsel and a member of the great council, 
avocat membre grand conseil. m. 

23. But if we left out the first noun, we should say ; 

J'ai vu une tragedie de Voltaire. J'ai vu la capitale de la France. 

The article a, an is also omitted in french after some neuter 
verbs, such as Etre, to be ; Devenir, to become ; se Faire, to 
turn ; Passer pour, to be reckoned, to - pass for ; the noun 
which follows these verbs being considered as an adjective 
which serves to illustaate their nominative ; as, 

Is he a frenchman % Est-il Francais % 

He passes for a German. Ii passe pour Allemand. 

His father is a merchant. Son pere est negociant ; not, un negoc. 

But the article must be expressed, if the noun is attended by 
an adjective or by a relative pronoun, for it then returns into 
the class of substantives ; 

His father is a weathy merchant. Son pere est un riche negociant. 

EXERCISE. 

Are you a Frenchman 1 No ; I am a Spaniard. He passssl25 
133 Francais? 191; 125 Espagnol. passer 

for a Portuguese. His father was a physician. He was a jew, and he 
pour Fortugais. etait medecin. juif, 

is turned a christian, 
s'est fait Chretien. 

24. No article is used in french, 1st, before a noun which 
being joined to a verb, forms only one idea with that verb 
as, Avoir peur, to fear, to be afraid ; Avoir mal, to ache, t 
have a pain ; Avoir raison, to be right, to be in the right, &c. 

2dly. Before a noun which forms j, kind of adverb wit 1 
the preposition antecedent : such are^ec ardeur, for ardem 
ment, with eagerness ; sans consideration, without consider 
ation: and when the substantive is not particularised. 

3dly. Before the cardinal numbers, one, two, three, four 
five, six*. 

Lend me twenty pounds. I have six oranges. 

Pretez-moi vingtlivres. J'ai six oranges. 



* The article must be used before the cardinal numbers, if the noun to which they 
are joined have a fixed number ; such as, les quatre saisons, the four seasons; let 
neuf muses, the nine muses ; and also if it be specified ; as, les deux que fai ecrites. 
the two letters which I have written ; le dix Janvier, the tentn Janvier. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



179 



EXERCISE. 

I am239 in the right. She is239 in the wrong. I have a pain 
avoir — raison. avoir — tort. avoir mal 

in my head. He madel25 me a sign. He has done me an injury. 

16 faire 54 signe. faire 55 tort. 

Those who speak without reflection are exposed to many errors. We 

ceux parlor sans reflexion exposes bien erreur 

often do by self-love what we think we do through (good nature). 

fair amour-propre ce que croire par bienveillance 

Bibliographers arrange books in five principal classes ; divinity, juris- 

phe ger livre en 32 theologie 

prudence, history, polite letters, and arts. The mouth of the Danube 

histoire belle lettres f. embouchure m. 

has five large canals in the (Euxine sea). The temple of Solomon was 

grand Pont Euxin ' m. 

begun four hundred and eighty years after the departure of the Israel- 
commence quatre-vingts depart 
ites from Egypt. I have pity (on the) poor. 

Egypte. pitie des pauvre pi. 

25. Sometimes two nouns come together, having a depen- 
dence on each other, and forming a kind of complex idea ; as, 
John's horse. The prince's sword. The lady's gown. A silk gown. 

The English have two ways of using these nouns ; they say, 

1. The horse of John. The sword of the prince. The gown of the lady. A gown of silk. 

2. John's horse. The prince's sword. The lady's gown. A silk gown. 

The French, on the contrary, have only one of these modes 
of placing two nouns together ; they, as in the 1st instance, 
always place first the noun which is the subject of discourse, 
with du, de la, des, de, or d before the second noun, agreeably 
to the sense in which it is used ; as, 

John's horse. Le cheval de Jean ; i. e. the horse of John. 

The prince's sword. L' epee du prince ; the sword of the prince. 
The lady's gown. La ro^e de la dame ; the gown of the lady. h ■' 
A silk gown. Une robe de soie; a gown of silk. 

EXERCISE. 

WhichSO do you admirel25 most, Cato's perseverance or 
Laquelle — 133 admirer le plus, Caton Tperseverance, f. 
Caesar's intrepidity 11 Will you have any London porter? No; I 
Cesa intrepidite ? — 174 Londres porter ? m. _ 191 ; 

will drink a glass of Lisbon wine. I have lost my gold watch. I had 
boirel25 verre m Lisbonne vin perdue or mentre. f. avals 

it54 at the park gate. I am afraidl25 I have left it55 (in the) 
1' park m. porte. f . I — craindre de 1'55 avoir laissee au 

(coffee room). Put this gentleman's horse into my brother's stable. 
cafFe. rn. Mettre* monsieur cheval dans ecurie. 

Have you seen my mother's silk gown, and my sister's newt bonnets 
vu soie robe, f. nouveau m. ? , 

It65 is a present from the brother of her children's guardian. After 
C present m. de tuteur m. 

her husband's death, all his father's friends forsookl37 her. 
mari mort, f. touts ami abandonnerl25 F54 



* Second person imperative. 



t Put this adjective before the noun. 



180 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



26. Sometimes however the order of the nouns could not be 
changed in the above manner in english, without changing 
also the meaning; for ex. these expressions, a mine glass, a 
tea spoon, could not be turned into glass of wine, a spoon of 
tea ; yet the nouns require this order in french : instead of 
changing the order of the words to alter the idea, as the Eng- 
lish do, the French change the preposition, and instead of de> 
they use a ; so, 

A glass of wine, is, Un verre de vin ; and 

A wine glass, is, Un verre a vin ; i. e. a glass used for wine.* 
N. B. When the nouns are compounded of the words fair, 
foire ; market, marche, and in speaking of messes, and the in- 
gredients which they are made of, the two nouns are connect- 
ed by au, a la, aux ; as, 

The hay market. Le marche au foin : i. e. the market for hay. 
Some cream tarts. Des tartes a la creme ; tarts made with cream. 

EXERCISE. 

Bring me a wine glass, and a tea spoon. Take the coffee 
Apportez moi56 vint verre, m. the cuiller. f. Porter ^ cane 
cups into the dining room. He has broken the water pot. Where 
tasse dans diner chambre.f. casse eau pot, m. Ou 

is my sister's work bag % It62 is in my mother's bed room. Have 

ouvrage sac ? m. II dans coucher chambre.f. 

you ever seen a steam mill? No; but I have seen several water 
jamais vu vapeur moulinm.? 191; mais plusieurs eau 

mills and many6 wind mills. W111125 you come 1 to the horse 
inoulin n.b. vent moulin. Vouloir " venir cheveaux 

fair % I want to go to the poultry market. Let us go through the 
foire f. ? J'ai besoin d'aller volaille f. marche.m. — ; — allerQ par 

hay market, 
foin. • 

27. Sometimes the name of a country is changed in english 
into an adjective, and prefixed to the name of its production ; 
as Spanish wine, french brandy, english beer, dutch cheese, 
&c. ; that adjective must be expressed by the substantive in 
french, and placed after the name of the production, connected 
by the preposition de ; as, 

Spanish wine. Vin d'Espagne ; i. e. wine of Spain. 

French brandy. Eau-de-vie de France; i. e. brandy of France. 



*This rule is not without some exceptions, for we say, Un pot de chambie, a cham- 
ber pot ; Une fille de chambre, a chamber maid ; Un bonnet de nuit, a night cap ; 
Un mouchoir de poche, a pocket handkerchief ; Un cheval de carosse, a coach horse ; 
Un cochon de lait, a suckling pig, &c. these few exceptions will be learnt by read- 
ing, and in conversation. 

N. B. Many of these compound names are expressed by a single word in french ; 
as, Coachman, Cocher ; Footman, Laquais ; Countinghouse, Comptoir ; Coachhorse, 
Remise. These expressions are found in the dictionaries, and will be learnt by 
reading. 

t When I say to a person, bring me a wine glass, it is evident that it is the glass I 
want, not the wine, so 1 ought to mention the glass first. 
$ First person imperative. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



181 



EXERCISE. 

Have you got any french brandy? No; but I have good 

"133 270 France eau-de-vie? 191; bon 

Spanish wine. Do you likel25 english beer? No; I doTO not ; 

Espagne vin.m. — 133 aimer Angieterre biere f. ? 191; Jetie l'aime pas? 

I preferl25 dutch beer or french cider. Willl25 you have english 

J'aimer mieux HoUande France cidre. m. Vauloir —174 Angieterre 

cheese, or swiss cheese 1 

fromage, m. Suisse ? ;i 

28. Before the name of a country, after a noun denoting 
dignity or authority, such as emperor, king, prince, &c. of is 
expressed by de ; as, 

The emperor of Russia. L'empereur de Russie. 

The parliament of England. Le parlement tT Angieterre. 

After any other noun, of is expressed by du, de la, des ; as, 
The south of France. Le sud de la France. 

The north 0/ England. Le nord de V Angieterre. 

EXERCISE. 

The king of Congo. The queen of Angola. The stadtholder 
roi reine stathouder 

of Holland. The cortes of Spain. The petty states of Italy. The 

HoUande. cortes plur. Espagne. petits etats Italie. 

air of France is more healthful than that 88 of Italy. The soil of 
air m. f. plus salubre celui sol m. 

Spain and Portugal would bel25 very fertile, if it was well cultivated. 

m. — ' etre tres fertile, s'il etait bien cultive. 

The south of England is warmer than the north of France.* 
sud rn. chaud 41 nord m. 



* The gender of nouns will no longer be marked in these exercises with the initial 
letters rn./. ; the learner must now find out the gender by the rules given page 33 
and following, according to the termination of the noun. But observe that it is by^,he 
sound of the last syllable of the word, not by the spelling that we know the gender of 
the noun. Now suppose you want to find out the gender of these twelve nouns, 
France, Pays, Nation, Besoin, Agrement, delice, Vie, Secours, Peche, Abricot, Fruit, 
G'ibicr, which you will find in the beginning of the following exercise. 1st. France ; 
this noun ends in e mute ; see page 35 a general rule for the mute termination 1 page 
33, or s page 35, and you will find that these terminations are both masc. Nation; 
look for ion, 34 ; you will find that nouns of this termination, a few excepted, are ali 
fern. Besoin ; look for the termination oin, page 34, and you will find it to be masc. 
Agrement y look for lnt, page 34, you will find that nouns of this termination are all, 
but one, masc. Delice ; look for the termination ce, page 36, you will find delice, 
masc, being an ajtcepl ion to the general rule, which is fern. Vie ; see page 35, the 
general rule for common names ending in e mute, and you will find it to be fern.. Se- 
cours ; look for oun, page 35, and you will find it to be a masc. termination. Peche ; 
look for che, page 37 ; you will not find, that word in the exceptions, which are masc. 
then you conclude that it is included in the general rule, which is of the contrary 
gender. Abncot , look for o or 0T,page 34 ; you will find that nouns of that termina- 
tion are all masc. Fruit ; look for 1, page 33, a masculine termination. Gibier ; look 
for er, page 34 ; you w ill find it to be a masc. termination ; and so on for any other 
noun the gender of which you want to know. But impress your mind with the gene- 
ral rule, and read often the exception, that by such frequent readings you may re- 
tain the most useful words contained in it ; for you must not expect to retain them 
all at once. The advantage of these rules must appear obvious. By marking the 
gender at the end of the noun, or by referring to the dictionary for it, you learn only 
the gender of one word, whilst by referring to these rules, you learn the gender of a 
whole set of words. 

16 



182 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



Recapitulatory exercise on the foregoing rules* 

This recapitulatory exercise contains likewise the ten first rules of 
the introduction, beginning page 44, and following. 

I come from France and Italy. I have been at Paris, Bordeaux, 
venirl25 Italie. a 204 

Lyons, Geneva, Florence, Leghorn, Naples and Rome. How do 
Lyon, Geneve, Livourne, Comment — 

you like268 Fiance and Italy? I likel25 them bothl22 (very 
133 trouver ? aimer les54 l'une et l'autre beau- 

muchl83), but I would 125 rather live in France than in Italy. 

coup n.b., aimer mieux (kk) vivre qu' 

France is certainly a most beautiful country. ItG2 has within itself 

certainement tres beau 240 Elle en elle-meme 

every thing that can 125 minister to the wants, comforts and delights 
tout " ce qui pouvoir servir {kit) besoin, agrement delice 

of life v France produeesl25, almost without the assistance of art, 
vie. produire presque sans secours art, 

all29 sorts of delicious fruit; pears, apples, grapes, peaches, apricots, 
tout sorte delicieux32 fruit ; poire, pomme, raisin, peche, abricot, 

plums, cherries, figs, olives, a (great deal) more corn, wine and oil, 
prune, cerise, figue, , — beaucoup plus ble, vin 'huile 

than the inhabitants can 125 consume ; and the country aboundsl25 
que habitant 47pouvoir consommer ; pays abonder 

with game, 204poultry, and 204cattle. The population of France, 
en tgibier, volaille, betail. 

(considering I7its extent) is immense. They90 reckon in France 
si on en considere Petendue On n.b. compter] 25 

twenty-five millions of souls. France is undoubtedly the most 
vingt cinq ame. 125 sans contredit plus 

powerful nation 49in Europe. It62 alone has withstood the efforts of 
puissant29 de P Elle seule resiste 202 aux 

Russia, Prussia, Germany, England, Holland, Spain, and Sardinia. 
Russie, Prusse, Allemagne, Angleterre, Hollande, • Espagne, Sardaigne,' 
that wanted tol72 subdue it; but after twenty years of uninterrupted32 
74 voulaient — subjuguer la54 ; vingt an continue29 

victories, that brave and warlike32 nation was (at last) overcome by 
victoire, 13 32 guerrier29 fut enfin accablel58 par 

all29 those powers combined,29 and compelled to submit to the 
tout puissance combine, n.e. force29 de se soumettre 

greatest29 humiliation to which men can be condemned, thatSS 
plus grand 76 puissent etre condamnel58, celle 

of obeying202 beings whom they despise. 125 Now that I have a 
154obeir a etre 74 mepriser. A present que un 



* The recapitulatory exercise at the end of each part of speech, is intended to try 
how far the learner understands the rules on which he has been practising on that 
part of speech. An infallible way to ascertain it, is to induce him to mark under 
every word on that part of speech the rule by which he makes use of such word ,- 
for instance, in the above exercise on the article and the noun, to make him mark un- 
der every noun, the rule by which, or at least to make him give a reason why he uses 
such and such an article, and so on with the other parts of speech ; for unless he can 
do this, it is evident that he does not understand that part of speech, that he has 
no foundation to build upon, and he must read the rules over again, till he is able to 
do it. 

t Do not put any article after en. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



183 



little time to myself, I am going to 172travel. I (am fond) oflG9 
pea terns a moi, 155 aller — voyager. aimer 125 a 

travelling. In travelling one sees (so many) new* things, and 

voyagerl5-I. En voyageant on.90 voirl29 tant nouvelle29 chose, 
every new object furnishes some new idea to the mind. In a few 
chanue nouvo objet fournirl25 t nouvelle idee esprit. Dans — peu 

days I will go to France, and after spending some time with my 
jour — aller , apres avoir passe t avec 

friends at Paris, I will go to Switzerland, Italy, and Spain, where I 
ami a — 125 Suisse, 204 , 204 , ou 

will embarkl25 for America. I long to see that country of liberty 
— m'embarquer pour Amerique. II me tarde de voir 13 230 liberte 
and independence, where rationa!32 beings mayl25 communicate 
independence, ou raisonnable29 etre pouvoir communiquer 

their ideas to their (fellow beings) without fearingl54 the ho]y29 

idee semblable sans craindre saint* 

political32 or religious inquisition. After havingl54 visited the prin- 

politique ou rcligieuse32 avoir visite 

cipa!29 cities of the wise republic of the immortal Washington, I will 

* ville sage* republique immortel* . — 

go to Mexico. Chili, and Peru. I want to see if the tree of liber- 
allerl25 Mexique, , Pcrou. ai envie de voir si arbre 

ty, lately 184 planted in the new world, isl56 thriving better than it62 
, depuis peu plantc 213 nouveaumonde, — reuissirl25 mieux qu' il n'47 
has done in the old, and if it is spreading its enlivening32 branches 
a faire 213 ancien, 92 155 etendrel25 ses vivifiant29 

over the fertiie32 plains of that immense and rich32 continent. What 
sur 29 plaine 13 32 riche Quel 

a pleasure to see millions of intelligent32 beings uniting all their 

plaisir 16S voir 29 etre unirl54 29 

energies tolTO break the chains of superstition and despotism, those 

pour rompre cliaine -despotisme, 
two satanic32 enemies of reason, that divine spark of the supreme 
deux satanique29 ennemis raison, 13 32 etincelle 32 

wisdom ! If the father of light deignsl25 to cast a look on the actions 

sagesse ! lumiere daigner 172 jetter regard sur 

of men, it is surely in such a work that he must delight to see his 

, c' surement213 tel 36 ouvrage qu' doit se complaire a voir 
image employed. What is the reason that trade is so languishing, 

occupe. Quelle que commercel25 si languissant, 

and that money is so scarce now'? (People in trade) thinkl25 that 
argent rare a present? Comrnercants penser que 

it is the war. Oh! war is a dreadful thing. War is the scourge of 
05 guerre. Oh ! 125 affreuse32 chose. fleau 

mankind. How preferable29 are peace and harmony amongst all 
genre humain. Combien preferablel85 125 paix 'harmonie parmi touts 

men ! If men were reasonable, they (would never go to) war. War 

! Si etaient raisonable,29 ne se feraient jamais 

begets!25 taxes, taxes beget poverty, and plungel25 people into 
engendrer taxe, 125 pauvrete, plonger people 213 

misery. Thus whole32 nations are madel58 miserable29 to gratify 
niisere. Ainsi entier29 rendre 170 satisfaire 



* Put this adjective before the noun. 

f When the substance is restrained to a little, a few, SOME is expressed by quelque 
quelques, not by du, de, la, des, which imply an unlimited number or quantity, 



184 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



the am,bition of a few vainS2 beings whom often chance 

petit nombre vain29 etro 74 souvent hazard 

alone raises to the supreme rank, and who have the art of inciting 
soul cleverl25 32 rang, 74 125 cxciter!54 

men to slaughter men, by calling them66 heroes, whoGG are merely 

a egorger en appelant ceux * heros, b.n. ne sont que 

the base executioners of their inhuman32 orders. Will you come 
vil29 executeur inhumain29 Vordre.^ V> uloir 133 venir 

and take a walk along the river side before dinner ? The sight of 
(rm) faire tour sur riviere bord 206 dine 1 vue 

the water is pleasant at this time of the year. (Is there) any fish in 

ean agreable terns annee. Ya-t-il246 poisson 

this river'? Not many; (there are) eels and carps, and some 
? Pas ; II y a346 anguille carpe, t 

trouts ; but we are not far from the sea, and our fish-market is 
truit : 190 loin de mer, poisonnerie 

well supplied with sea 25fish. We have salmon, turbot, soles, 
bien pourvul58 de de mer poisson, salmon, sole, 

mackerel, codfish, excellent32 oysters, crabs, and lobsters. Let us 
macquereau, morue, $ 31 huitre, crabe homard. — — 

go and see your market. What an abundance of (every thing) 
aller (un) voir marche. Quelle82 abondance ' 107 

(there is in it !) What a deal of hares, rabbits and partridges ! 

il y a246 — ! 82 quantite lievre, lapin perdrix ! 

I see people yonderl83 who are sellingl25 woodcocks, snipes and 

voir gens229 la-bas n.b. 75 155 vendre becasse, becassine 

(wild pigeons.) (Here are) also pheasants and quails. Do you 
ramier 247 aussifaisan caille — 133 

like quails'? Yes; (very much.) We mustlSl walk towards 

aimer ? ; beaucoup. II faut que nous allions vers 

home. It62 is dinner time. Let us walk into the dining room, 
lamaison. C n.b. diner heure. — — Entrer 213 diner salle 

The dinner is on the table. What have we for dinner 7 A 

sur Qu' 83 125 133 pour ? 

round of beef with cabbage and carrots, and a loin of veal with 
rouelle bceuf avec chouxil carotte, longe veau, 

peas and spinage. Bring me some mustard, salt, pepper, a coffee 
pois epinards.ll Apportez56 moutarde, sel, poivre, caffe 

cup, and a table, spoon. (How much) do they90 se!1125 meat a 
tasse, soupe cuiller. Combien — 133n.b. vendre viando 

pound in this town ? Beef and mutton selll25 eight pence a 
livre 213 ville 1 mouton se vendre huit sou 

pound, and veal seven pence. That is very dear. Yet we often 
veau sept C tres$ cher. Cependant 184 



* Turn by calling heroes them who <SfC. 
t See note t p. 183. 

X Pat this adjective after all these nouns. 
II This words is plural in french. 

t) Tres can be used before adjectives derived from participles ; such as, inter essant y 
interesting; occupe, busy, &c. ; but as in these instances fort or bien would answer 
just as well, it is more prudent to use these. 

Tres must be always followed by an adjective. Thus, the English very, used alone 
as a reply to, or an affirmation of what precedes, must be translated by beaucoup, or 
any other adverb. 

The Academy and some grammarians connect tres by a hyphen with the adjective 
that follows it ; but the majority of writers, editors, printers, and grammarians, cwX% 
it aB useless. * 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE AND NOUN. 



135 



buyl25 a hundred pounds weight at a time. Corn sellsl25 twelve 
enTOacheter cent livre — a 12 fois. Ble se vendre douze 
shillings a bushel, and bread three pence a pound; but good33 
shelin boisseau, pain trois livre ; bon29 

workmen getl25 four shillings a day. Bring a bottle of wine, 
ouvrier gagner quatre jour. Apporter* bouteille vin, 

and some wine glasses. Will you have french wine or Spanish wine? 

verre. Vouloir — 174 France Espagne ? 

I will drink a glass of Port wine, if you have any.54 (There is) 

— boire , si en.(f>) II n'y a 246 

no5 wine in the bottle % Is there no5 wine in the wine cellar % 
pas 213 N'y a-t-il pas cave ? 

Go to the wine merchant, and tell him to send me 54 a 
Aller* chez de vin marchand, dire* lui de envoyer m' 

dozen bottles of Port wine at sixty shillings a dozen. This 
douzaine de a soixante shelin 

wine costs me five shillings a bottle. You have a very fine 
couter 54 cinq belle 
gold watch. It62 has cost a hundred guineas. It65 is a present 
or montre. Elle coute guinee. C present 

from my cousin's guardian. Have you seen my brother's powder bag? 

cousin tuteur. vu poudre sac ? 

It62 is in my father's bed room. Let us walk up to that hill. 

II 213 coucher chambre. — — Aller* — colline. 
What82 a fine prospect we have from here ! What a deal of fine 
Quelle belle perspective d' ici ! 82 quantite belle29 
flowers (there is) here! Let us gather some96 tol70 make 
fleur ilya ici! — — cueillir* en70 quelques-unes pour f aire 
nosegays for your sister's children who (are so fond of) flowers* 
bouquet pour 74 aimenttant — 

(Here are) some violets. What a pretty rose bud ! I seel25 yonder 
Voici247 " violette.t 82 joli33 rose bouton ! voir la-bas 

some hawthorns, (honey suckles) and sweet32 briers. (That is) 
aubepinei, chevre-feuiller odorant eglantier.f Voila247 

my sister's husband's country house. Your father's house is finer41 

mari de campagne maison. belle 

than that.88 (There are) people who are lookingl25 at the flower 

N.b. Voila247 gens229 155 regarder 201 fleur 

pots which are at your mother's window. My brother's coachman 
pott 74 a fenetre. cocher 

fell 137 from his horse yesterday 183 ; He brokel37 his leg, and putl37 
tomber de — cheval hier ; n.b. se casser jambe, se demettre 

his arm out of joint, 
bras — II 



* Imperative . 

t Use the singular in french. 

t If you mean pots with flowers in, you must say, pots defleurs ; if you mean pots 
to put flowers in, you must say, pots kfleurs. 
.1) Out of joint, is expressed in the verb demettre, 

16* 



186 



SYNTAX OE THE ADJECTIVE. 



CHAPTER IV. 



ADJECTIVE. 

An adjective is a word added to a noun, to denote some 
quality or circumstance belonging to that noun ; as, good wine, 
fine flowers. 

29. The adjective must be of the same gender and number 
as the noun to which it is added ; as, 

That is a handsome -man. Voila un bel homme. 

That is a, handsome woman. Voila une belle femme. (g) 

N. B. A past participle, used to qualify a substantive, fol- 
lows the same rules as an adjective ; ex. 

He is very well made. II est tres bien fait. 

She is very well made. Elle est tres bien faite. 



(g) The feminine gender of an adjective, or of a, participle used acljectively, is formed 
by adding e mute, that is to say, e not accented, to the masculine ; as, 

loved : pretty j lost ; great ; fine ; last ; precise ; little ; learned. 
Masc. aime, joli, perdu, grand, Jin, dernier, precis, petit, savant. 
Fern, aimee. jolie. perdue, grande. fine, derniere. precise. petite, savante. 2 
EXCEPTIONS. 

E. Adjectives ending in e mute, are the same for both genders ; as, Un honnete homme ; 
an honest man. Une honnete femme ; an honest woman. Vnjeune homme aimable ; 
an amiable young man. Une jeune femrne aimable ; an amiable young woman. 

I. The feminine of beni, blessed, is b'enite ; that of favori, favourite, is favorite. 

V. The feminine of beau, fine ; nouveau; new ; mou, soft ; fou, mad ; is belle, nouvelle ; 

molle,folle, from bel, nouvel, mol, fol used before a noun masculine beginning with 

a vowel. 

C. The feminine of blanc, white ; franc, frank; sec, dry; caduc, decayed; public, 
public ; grec, greek ; turc, turkish ; is blanche, franche, seche, caduque, pubhque, 
que, turque. 

D. The feminine of nud, naked, crud, raw ; is nue, crue ; and that of verd, green, is 
greverte. 

F. Adjectives ending in/, change / in ve for the feminine ; as, 

Masc. bref, brief ; neuf, new ; naif, candid ; actif* active ; plaintif, sorrowful. 
Fern, breve, brief ; neuve, new ; naive, candid ; active, active ; plaintive, sorrowful. 

G. The feminine of long, long, the only adjective ending in g, is longue. 

L, N, ) Adjectives ending in el, eil, ul, un, ien, on, as, ais, es, et, os, ot, double the final 
S, T, i consonant, and take e mute for the feminine gender; as, 

cruel; rosy; null; ancient; good; big; fat ; thick ; clean ; foolish. 
Masc. cruel, vermeil, nul ancien ; bon, gros, gras,epais, net, sot. 
Fern. cruelle. vermeille. nulle. aneienne. bonne, grosse. grasse. epaisse. nette sotte. 

Except the adjectives of nations ; as, francais, french ; anglais, english ; &c. 
mauvais, bad; niais, silly; ras, shorn ; complet, complete; discret, discreet ; inquit, 
uneasy; replet, replete; secret; which follow the general rule, francaise, arlglaise, 
mauvaise ; SfC. frais, fresh ; tiers, third ; which make fraichc, tierce ; and benin, benign ; 
malin, mischievous ; which make benigne, maligne, in the feminine. 
X. Adjectives ending in x, change x, intone for the feminine ; as, 
Masc. heureux, happy; paresseux, lazy; jaloux, jealous; faux, false; 
Fern, heureuse. happy. parcsseuse. lazy, jalous. jealouse. fausse. false. 
Except doux, sweet soft ; which makes douce ; and vieux, old, which makes vieille. 1 

N. B. The plural of adjectives is formed like that of nouns, by adding s to the sin- 
gular. , 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



187 



EXERCISE. 

That young man is (in love.) That young woman is (in love.) He 
{bb) jeune homme amoureux (bb) femme * 

is very young. She is very young.* He is married. She is rnarried.29 

tres jeune. * marie. - 158 * n.b. 

He is capricious. She is capricious. AU29 men are capricious, 
capricieux. * Tout 

A1129 women are capricious. 

30. When an adjective qualifies several nouns singular of 
of the same gender, that adjective must be of the same gender 
as those nouns, and plural; as, 

My father and brother are go?ie out. Mon pere etmon frere sont sortis. 
My mother and sister are gone out. Ma mere et ma sosur sont sorties. 

EXERCISE. 

Miss A. and Miss B. are (in love.) They are very happy. They will 
Mademoiselle amoureux.* Elles tres heureux* — 

soonl84 be married. That89 makes the mother and daughter very 
bientot etre * {bb) rendre tres 

proud.- They are bothl22 very capricious ; but they are civil and 
orgueilleux. Elle toutes deux * ; civil * 

obliging. Thatl3 lady has a gown and a petticoat very well matched, 

obligeant.* (bb) dame robe jupe tres bien assorti.* £ 

The tea and the sugar are good, but the cream and the water are 
the sucre bon, creme eau 

had. 

mauvais. 

31. But if the nouns are of different genders, the adjective 
must be of the masculine gender, and in the plural number ; as, 
My father and mother are gone out. Mon pere et ma mere sont sortis. 
He found his son and daughter dead. II trouva son fils et sa fille morts.Qi) 

EXERCISE. 

Mr. A. and Miss B. are (in love.) They are very happy. 

Monsieur amoureux. lis 

Are they not married yetl831 They are bothl22 very capricious j 

190 marieI58 encore? touts deux • 

but they are civil and obliging. He makesl25 his son and daughter 

civil obligeant. rendre 

unhappy. You have a coat and a waistcoat very well matched. The 
malheureux.(h) habit veste tres assorti. 

tea and the water are good, but the cream and the sugar are very 
the eau bon. creme sucre 

bad. 

mauvais. 



* See note (g), how the feminine gender is formed, page 186. 

(h) When the adjective is not separated from the nouns by a verb, some authors 
make it agree with the noun ; thus, II trouva son fils et sa fille morts ; but they except 
the adjectives which express union ; as, II trouva son fils et sa fille reuni-s, reconciles, 
&c. 

These exceptions and exceptions of exceptions are very difficult for learners to re- 
tain ; therefore i would advise them to follow the general rule, which is perfectly 
agreeable to the fundamental principles of the french language. 



188 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE* 



32. Adjectives in english are generally placed before the 
noun, in Trench they are generally placed after it ; as, 

A black coat. Un habit noir. 

A well made man. Un homrae bien fait. 

The french language. La langue frangaise. 

EXERCISE. 

AU29 the polite people in49 Europe speak the french29 language. 
Tout poli29 gens m. de I s parler francais langue. 

(I am told) that it is a very difficult language. Eat* a piece of new 
on m'a dit92 que c' ' difficile Manger morceau frais 

bread, and drink a glass of white wine. England is a delightful 
pain, boire* verre blanc vin. Angleterre delicieux 

country ; but (there is) always a cold and damp air. (There are) 

230 ; il y a246 froid humide 246 

charming women, opulent cities, fruitful lands, and pleasant 
charmantt , opulent29 ville, fertile29 terre. agreable29 

country 25houses. I likel25 their simp]e29 and cordial29 manners, 
de campagne maison. aimer 14 simple cordial maniere. 

33. Except these adjectives, which are generally placed 
before the noun ; 

Premier, 1st ; second, 2d ; and other adjectives of number. 

Beau bel, m. ) fine, Mechant, wicked. 

Belle, fern. \ handsome. Meilleur, better. 

Bon. m. bonne, /. good. Meme, same. 

Grand, great, large. Moindre, less. 

Gros, m. grosse /. big. Petit, little, small. 

Jeune, young. Plusieurs, several. 

Joli, pretty. Tout, all, whole. 

Mauvais, bad. Vieux, m. vieille, /. old ; as, 

She is a handsome woman, C'est une belle femme. 

She has a good husband. Elle a un bon mari. 

EXERCISE. 

(That is) a large house. It62 is in a fine situation. It belongs 
Voila247 . - grand29 Elle 213 belle situation. 52 appartenir 

to a young man. He has lately married an old woman. He65 is a 

jeune depuis peu epouse vieille C 

big man. She is a little woman. They have two pretty children, 
gros 65 petit29 deux joli29 ^ 

34. But if any one of the above adjectives comes with an- 
other adjective that can not be placed before the noun, they 
must both be placed after, connected by a conjunction ; as, 

A handsome, amiable woman. Une femme belle et aimable. 
A good, complaisant husband. Un mari bon et complaisant, (i) 



* Imperative. 

t See note (g) how the feminine gender of adjectives is formed. 

(i) The rules for the placing of adjectives are not very strictly adhered to, especial- 
ly in poetry. Even in prose many adjectives may be placed either before or after the 
noun, according as their position is more agreeable to the ear, of which a learner can 
be no judge ; so his surest way is to follow the rules, and to- notice in reading, those 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 189 

EXERCISE. 

(That is) a large convenient house. It62 is in a fine healthy 

247 grand29 commode Elle 213 belle saine 

situation. It belongs to a profligate young man. He has lately 

62 appartenir debauche 33 39 depuis peu 

married an old rich woman. He65 is a great man, He is a tali 

epouse riche C (i) 65 (i) 

man. They are very honest29 people. They are very civil29 

65 sont tres honnete (i) gens. 65 honnete. (i.) 

people. 

35. The adjectives of number, premier, first; second, deux- 
ieme, second ; troisieme, third ; quatrieme, fourth ; cinquieme, 
fifth, &c. are placed in french as in english, before the noun ; 
as, 

The first day. Le premier jour. 

The fourth month. Le quatrieme mois. 

EXERCISE. 

The first day of the week. The third month of the year. The 

jour semaine. mois armee. 

fourth year of the reign of the fifth monarch. 

regne monarque. 

36. But when the adjectives third, fourth, fifth, sixth, &c. 
are used as a distinction to some personage ; as, George the 
third, Henry the eighth; or to date the months ; as, July 



adjectives which he finds sometimes before and sometimes after the noun. Yet 
custom, for want of other expressions, has fixed a place for some adjectives which 
must be attended to, as the placing the adjective before or after the noun, changes 
the idea ; the most common are, 



TJn brave homme. 
TJn homme brave. 
De braves gens. 
Des gens braves. 
TJn bon homme. 
TJn homme bon. 



A well behaved man. 
A courageous man. 
Well behaved people. 
Courageous people. 
A simple man. 
A good natured man. 



TJn honnete homme. An honest man. 
TJn homme honnete. A civil man 
D' honnetes gens. Honest people 
Des gens honnetes. ' 
TJn gentil homme. 
TJn homme gentil. 
TJn galant homme. 
TJn homme galant. 
TJn grand homme. 
TJn homme grand. 



Civil people. 
A noble man. 
A genteel man. 
A liberal man. 
A gallant. 

A great man. De nouveau vin. Fresh wine. 

A tall man. [low. Du vin nouveau. Wine newly made. 
TJn plaisant homme. An odd sort of a fel- La tnorte eau. The neap tides. 

TJn homme plaisant. A pleasant man. De l'eau morte- Standing water. 
TJn vilain homme. A disagreeable man. 

The adjective Cher placed before the noun signifies dear, affectionate; as, Mon 
cher pere, my dear father ; placed after it, it signifies of high price ; as, TJne livre 
cher, a dear book. 

^Neu> is both neuf and nouveau ; neuf is said of things newly made ; as, A new coat, 
TJn habit neuf, i. e. made of new cloth ; un livre neuf, a new book, i. e. a book that has 
not been used, &c. Nouveau is said of things newly invented, of new productions ; 
as, Un habit nouveau, a coat of a new fashion ; TJn nouveau livre, or un livre nouveau } a 
new book, i. e. a new production. Un nouvel habit means a new dress, 



Un homme vilain. A niggardly fellow. 
Un pauvre homme. A man without genius , 
Un homme pauvre. A poor man. 
Une cruelle femme. An unfeeling woman. 
Une femme cruelle. A cruel woman. 
Une sage femme. A midwife. 
Une femme sage. A wise man. 
Une grosse femme. A big, fat woman. 
Une femme grosse. A woman with child. 
Vnfurieux animal. A huge creature. 
Un animal furieux. A fierce animal. 
Un certaine nou- A certain piece of 

velle. news. 
Une nou velle certaine. True or sure news. 



190 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



November 5th ; they are changed into the substantive num- 
bers deux, trois, quatre, cinq, six, &c. 

If used as a distinction, they are put after the name of the 
personage ; as, 

George the third. George trois, i. e. george three. 

Henry the eighth. Henri huit, i. e. henry eight. 

If used as a date, they are put before the name of the 
month ; as, 

July lith. Le quatorze Juillet. 

November bth. ~ Le cinq Novembre. (k) 



Henry the fourth was a great man and a good king ; he succeeded 
Henri * grand rot ; succeder a 

Henry the third, brother to Charles the ninth, the greatest villain 
* de * 44 scelerat 

that74 ever reignedl36 over a civilized people. Henry the eighth, 
qui t ait50 jamais regne sur civilise32 228 Henri * 

after having 154 been the friend of Pope Clement the seventh, became 
apres avoir ete ami Pape * devenir 

the greatest enemy of the papal32 authority, and delivered England 
44 ennemi papa!29 autorite, delivrer 

(from the) shameful yoke of an Italian priest, 
da honteux32 joug ltalien pretre. 

37. Adjectives of measure and dimension, such as high, 
tall, low, deep, thick, big, wide, broad, long, short, &c. which 
are placed after the number in english, must be placed before 
it in french, joined to it by de ; as, 

A room twelve feet long, and ten broad. 

Une chambre longue de douze pied, et large de dix; 
Literal. A room long of twelve feet, and broad often. 

A wall ten feet high, and two feet thick. 

Un mur haut de dix pieds, et epais de deux ; 
Literal. A wall high of ten feet, and thick of two. 

N. B. The adjectives of measure and dimension are fre- 
quently expressed in french by their substantives ;t then the 
words remain in the same order in the french as they are in 
english, but both the number and the noun of measure must be 
preceded by de ; as, 



(k) Except Premier in dating- the days, and Premier and Second when used for a 
distinction ; for we do not say, Le un Janvier, the one of January ; but, Le premier 
Janvier, Le deux, Le trois, &c. nor we say, George un, George one ; George deux, 
George two; but George premier, George second, and then George trois, George 
three ; George quatre, §c. 

* See numbers, p. 1G4. t See note (o) p. 66. 

t The substantive may be formed by adding ur to the adjective when it ends with a 
vowel ; as, Large, largexxx ; and ear when it ends with a consonant ; as, Haut, hau£- 
eur, &c. 



REMARKS ON THE ADJECTIVE. 



191 



A room twelve feet long, and ten broad. 
Une chambre de douze pieds de longueur , et de dix dclargeur. 
Literal. A room of twelve feet of length, and often of breadth. 
A wall ten feet high, and two feet thick. 
Un mur de dix pieds de hauteur, et de deux d'epaisseur ; 
Literal. A wall <?/ten feet of height, and of two of thickness. 

But observe that when the adjective is changed into its 
substantive, the verb etre must be changed into avoir, and 
de is omitted before the number ; as, 

Our room is twelve feet long, and ten broad. 

Adject. Notre chambre est tongue de douze pieds, et large de dix. 

Subst. Notre chambre a douze pied de longueur, et dix de largeur ; 

i. e. Our room has twelve feet of length, and ten of breadth. 

Adject. Ce mur est haut de dix pieds, et epais de deux. 

Subst. Ce mur a dix pieds de hauteur, et deux d'epaisseur ; 

i. e. This wall has ten feet of height, aud two of thickness. 

exercise. 

Our garden is two hundred paces long, and a hundred and fifty 

jardin * pas long, 21 t 

broad. It62 is surrounded by a wall twelve feet high, two feet thick, 

large. 11 entoure d' mur * pieds haut, epais 

and a hundred yards long. Our garden has two hundred paces of 
21 verge pas 

length, and a hundred and fifty of breadth. It62 is surrounded by a 
longueur, 21 t largeur. II entoure d' 

wall of twelve feet of height, and of two of thickness. Our garden is 

pieds hauteur, epaisseur. 

long of two hundred paces, and broad of a hundred and fifty; or, our 
long pas large 21 t ; ou, 

garden has two hundred paces of length, and a hundred and fifty of 
pas longueur, 

breadth, 
largeur. 

REMARKS ON THE ADJECTIVES. 

38. The adjective can not be separated by an article from 
the noun which it qualifies, therefore those articles which 
come between the adjective and the noun in english, must be 
placed before them in french ; as, 

Such a man. Un tel homme : not tel un homme. 

So great a thing. Une si grande chose. 

Except tout, all, whole, which requires the article after it ; 

as, 

All his time. Tout son terns. 

The whole day. Tout le jour. 

A whole day. Tout un jour.t 



* See numbers p. 164. t See note * p. 165. 

i And if tout is governed by a preposition, the preposition must be placed before 
tout, and the article after ; as, 

Of the whole regiment. De tout le regiment. To the whole fleet. A toute la flotte. 



192 REMARKS ON THE ADJECTIVE. 

Except also, when the adjective is used to distinguish some 
particular person from another person of the same name ; as, 
Peter the cruel. Pierre le cruel. 

Cato the elder. Caton Z'ancien. 

Alexander the great. Alexandre le grand. 

EXERCISE. 

Didl36 you ever see such a man ? I never sawl3G so tall*29 a wo- 
Avez jamais vu tel ? 190 ai vu si grand 

man. It is not so great a thing. 
Ce 190 si grand29 chose. 

39. By prefixing to an adjective, an article of the same 
gender and number as the noun to which it refers, that adjec- 
tive has often the property of a substantive, and the words 
man, woman, people, which are expressed in english, may be 
omitted in french ; as, 

The wise man is happy. Le sage et heureux. 

He is a troublesome man. C'est un importun. 

She is a little brown woman: C'est une petite brune. 

The great ; the covetous people. Les grands ; les avares.* 

EXERCISE. 

An English man. A French woman. He is a drunken man ; a 

Anglais Fran^aise . 65 ivrogne ; 

covetous man. She is an idle woman'? They are ungrateful 
avare. 65 paresseux (g) 65 sont ingrat 

people. Learned men are esteemed.29 Ignorant people are 

Savant estime. (n.b.) Ignorant 

despised.29 Take notice of these words in reading authors, and in 

meprise. (n.b.) Faites attention a ((bb) en lisant auteur, 213 

the dictionaries, 
dictionnaire. 

40. As an article prefixed to an adjective without a noun, 
gives to it the property of a substantive, so when the article is 
taken from a noun, that noun assumes the power of an adjec- 
tive ; for example, 

I know a poet. 

I speak of a philosopher. 

Here the words poet and philosopher are substantives, be- 
cause they name the objects spoken of, consequently they re- 
quire an article ; so, 

Je.connais unpotte. 
Je parle &'un philosophe. 

But when I say, 

The man I speak of is a poet and a philosopher ; 
He is a poet, bat he is not a philosopher ; 

the substance I am speaking of is man, the words poet and 



• This rule extends to many adjectives, but not to all ; they should be taken no- 
tice of in reading. 



OF COMPARATIVES. 



193 



philosopher are only attributes of that substance, and they no 
more require an article than if I said ; 

The man I speak of is witty, is wise ; so the French, 
L'homme dont je parle est poete et philosophe. 
II est poete, mais il n'est pas philosophe. 
A philosopher is seldom a poet, but a poet is seldomer a philosopher. 
Philosopher in the first part of the sentence is a substantive, 
in the second an adjective. Poet in the first part of the sentence 
is an adjective, in the second a substantive ; so the French, 

Rarement un philosophe est poete, mais plus rarement une poete est philosophe. 

(See the 23d rule.) 

EXERCISE. 

My brother is a colonel, and my father is a general. He is the 
colonel, general. II 

commander in chief. That man was a tailor. He latelyl84 turned a 
commandant en chef. 140 tailleur. depuis peu s'est fait 

school 25master. He passes for a doctor. His son was a bookseller ; 
ecole maitre. passer pous medecin. 140 libraire ; 

now he is a surgeon. 

chirurgien. 

COMPARISONS. 
The same words which serve to qualify nouns, serve also, 
by the means of certain adverbs prefixed to them, to compare 
their qualities. 

The quality of a substance, when compared with another, 
is either superior, inferior, or equal to the other ; this is called 
comparative. 

Or the quality is raised above, or lowered below several 
others, and this is called superlative. 

OF COMPARATIVES. 
41. The comparative of superiority, more before the adjec- 
tive, or r or er added to it, as more strong or stronger, is 
formed in french by plus before the adjective ;* as, 

My horse is more strong or stronger than yours. 
Mon cheval est plus fort que le votre. 

EXERCISE. 

Spain is larger than France ; but France is richer and more 

Espagne grand29 que ; riche 

powerful than Spain. ThislS field is better than that,88 because it62 
puissant29 n.b. champ t n.b., parce qu' il 

is better cultivated. Your watch is finer than mine, because it62 is 
t cultive. montre belle 85 elle 

newer and dearer; but mine is better, and will last longer than yours, 
neuve, cher29 ; 85 t — durer long terns 85. 



* Except meillcur, better ; pire, worse, adjectives, ) which are comparative^ of 

mieux, better ; pis, worse, adverbs, j themseives 
t See note (e) page 56. 

17 



194 OF SUPERLATIVES. 

42. The comparative of inferiority, less, before the ad- 
jective, is formed in french by mains before the adjective ;* 
as, 

My horse is less strong than yours. 
Mon cheval est moins fort que le votre. 

The same comparative formed by so before the adjective, 
and as after it, is expressed, so before the adjective by si, and 
as after it by que ; as, 

My horse is not so strong as yours. 
Mon cheval n'est pas si fort que le votre. 

EXERCISE. 

Spain is not so rich, nor so powerful as France. Thatl3 field is less 

Espagne 190 29, ni 29 n,b. champ 

fruitful than this. 88 Your sister is not so handsome, nor so rich as 
fertile n.b. belle, 

your cousin, but she is not less amiable, 
cousine, aimable. 

43. The comparative of equality, as before, and as after 
the adjective, is expressed, as before the adjective by aussi, 
and as after it by que ; as, } 

My horse is as strong as yours. Mon cheval est aussi fort que le votre- 

EXERCISE. 

Spain is not by much as populous as France. Thatl3 field is as ; 
190 de beaucoup peuple28 n.b. champ 

fruitful as this. 88 Your sister is as amiable as your cousin. My 
fertile n.b. aimable cousine. 

watch is as good29 as yours, but it is not so fine, 
montre bon (g) 85, 62 belle. 

OF SUPERLATIVES. 

44. The superlative formed by most or least before the adjec- 
tive, or by st or est added to it ; as, most strong or strong*^,, 
is formed in french by adding le, la, les to the comparative- 
words plus, moins ; as, 

Comp. Stronger, plus fort, m. plus forte, f. 

Sup. Strongest, le plus fort, la plus forte, les plus forts, les plus fortes ; 
Comp. Less strong, moins fort, m. moins forte, f. 
Sup. Least strong, le moins fort, la moins forte, les moins forts, les 

[moins fortes j 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as, 

My pony is the strongest of my horses. 
Mon bidet est le plus fort de mes chevaux. 
My mare is the least strong of the two. 
Ma jument est la moins forte des deux. (Z) 



* Except moindre, less, which is a comparative of itself. 

(I) Observe what is said, note t page 45, that two of the signs called article, can 
not be prefixed to the same noun ; so, 

My strongest horse ; is, Mon plus fort cheval ; Not, Mon le plus fort cheval. 

[Observe 



REMARKS ON THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 195 



N. B. The comparison of adverbs is formed like that of 

adjectives; as, 

Strongly, Fortement. More strongly, Plus fortement. 

Most strongly, Leplus fortement. Less strongly, Mains fortement, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

France is the most populous country in Europe. China is the 
peuple32 230 49 * Chine 
largest empire in the world. (This is) my finest book. If il6 fc 2 is not 
grand 49 monde. 247 (/) beau S' il 

the finest, it is the best. It is the dearest book that I have ever 
, 62 meilleur. 65 cher32 74 50 jamais 

bought, 
achete. 

REMARKS ON THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 

45. When the comparison runs between two parts of a 
sentence, an article is added to the comparative in english ; 
as, 

The more you study, Ike more you learn. 
This article is omitted in french ; 

Plus vous etudiez, plus vous apprenez. 

And the adjective or noun which, in these instances, comes 
before the verb in english, must be placed after it in french ; as, 

The longer the day is, the shorter is the night. 

Plus le jour est long, plus la nuit est courte ; 
Literal. More the day is long, more the night is short. 

The more populous a country is, the richer it is. 

Plus un pays est peuple, plus il est riche ; 
Literal. More a country is populous, more it is rich. 

EXERCISE. 

The more you study,125 the more you learn. The more I see her, 

etudier, apprendre. voir 54, 

the less I like her. The more I know men, the less I esteem them. 

aimer 54 connaitre , estimer 54 

The more difficult a thing is, the more honourable it is. I think that 

difficile chose. , honorable 62 penser (64)n.b, 

the more pains I take, 125 the less progress I make, 
plus peine prendre, moins progres faire. 

46. The comparative words plus, moins, si, aussi must be 
repeated before every adjective, though they are in the same 
sentence ; as, 



( ?*r r ! also ' that if the ad jective is placed first, the article needs not to be re- 
peated before the noun ; but if the noun is first, the article must be repeated before 
the adjective ; as, e 

It is the strongest horse I have seen. 

C'est le plus fort cheval que j'aie vu ; or, C'est le cheval le plus fort que j'aie vu 
* See note t page 47. 



196 REMARKS ON THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 

She is as rich and handsome as her cousin. 
Elie est aussi riche et aussi belle que sa cousine. 

EXERCISE. 

She is more studious29 and dutiful than her sister. She is already 

studieux (g) • 1 obeissant20 deja 
as wise and clever as her mother ; but she is so proud and affected 
sage habile ; ner29 affected 

that nobody likes 125 her. 
27 aimer 54. 

47. The comparative words plus, moins, moindre, meilleur, 
mieux, pire, pis require ne before the verb which follows 

them ; as, 

This is better than I thought. 
Ceci est meilleur que je ne pensais. 

However ne is not required if the following verb is in the 

infinitive, or if it is preceded by a conjunction ; as, 
It is greater to forgive than to revenge. 
II est plus grand de pardonner que de* se venger. 
I am better now than when I was in town. 
Je me porte mieux a present que quand j'etais a la ville. 

EXERCISE. 

He has lost more than he has gained. He is richer than he was. 

perdre gagner. riche 140 

He lives better than he did 139 before. He is less happy than people 
rivre (e) p. 56 faire 206 k.b. heureux 90 h.b. 

imagine. It is better to read than be idle. He is more studious now 
s'imaginer. EL vaut mieux 172 lire (U) oiiif. studieux a present 

than when he was at school. 

140 a ecole. 

48. The particles by and than coming after the compara- 
tive, or after the adverbs more, less, followed by a word de- 
noting quantity, not quality, are expressed by de, not by que 
or par : as, 

It is stronger by much. II est plus fort de beaucoup. 

It costs more tkanien guineas. II coute plus de dix guinees. 

EXERCISE. 

This does not cost less than fifty guineas. It is too dear by half. 
89 — 190 couter guinee. C trop moitie. 

I would not sell itM for less than sixty. I have not had it55 more 

vendre le a eu I* 

than a year. 

an. t 



* The same preposition which foUows the comparative must be repeated after que ; 
as, We are more inclined to revenge, than to forgive. 

Nous sommes plus portes a nous venger qu*d pardonner. 

- An is used to mark an epoch, without thinking of its duration, and amrUe to de- 
termine a duration of twelve months. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 197 

49. The preposition in, after a superlative in english, is 
expressed in french in the same manner as of, agreeably to 
the rules on the article ; as, 

He is the richest merchant in London. 

C'est le plus riche negociant de Londres; i. e. of London. 

She is the most virtuous woman in the city. 

C'est la femme la plus vertueuse de la vilie ; i. e. of the city. 

EXERCISE. 

(That is) the cleverest boy in the school. His father is the most 
247 habile garcon ecole. 

learned man in the kingdom. His mother is the most sensible32 
savant royaume. spirituel29 

woman in the whole town. 
33 

50. The superlative followed by the relative or definite 
pronoun, qui, que, dont requires the following verb in the sub- 
junctive mood ; as, 

She is the prettiest woman that was at the ball. 
C'est la plus jolie femme qui fid au bal. 
He is the handsomest man that I have ever seen. 
C'est le plus bel homme que j'aie jamais vu. 

EXERCISE. 

Mr. A. is the best friend I have. He is the most honest man I 

Mons. meilleur (s) 65 honnete (s) 

know. His sister is the handsomest woman I have ever seen, 
connaitre. belle (s) jamais vue. 



Recapitulatory exercise on the foregoing rules * 

"What82 charming weather! How 185 beautiful the country230 looks! 
Quel charmant terns ! Que belle 185 campagne etre ! 125 

How attractive nature is, when it is arrayed in its verdant charms ! 
185 attrayaut , quand 62 orne de ses verdoyant charrne ! 

How sweet solitude is to innocent minds ! Let us go and take a 

185 doux (g) cceur ! — — aller (nn) faire 

(short walk) in the neighbouring fields, (whilst we wait) till your 
tour263 n\b. 213 voisin champ, en attendant que 

sister is218 ready. Howl 85 is241 your aunt 1 She is still very ill. 

soit pret. Comment se porter tante? encore malade. 

I am sorry (for it.) She is a virtuous, prudent, and generous wo- 

fache en54 65 vertueux, (g) genereux (g) 

man. Her daughter is very handsome, but she is too proud. She 

filie belle, 51 trop orgueilleux (g) t 

is as haughty as if she were the finest woman in England ; yet 

£er 140 ; cependant 

as she is richer and handsomer than her cousin, she wil!41sooner get 
comme belle, cousine, f. — totl53 trouver 



* See note * under the preceding recapitulatory exercise. 

17* 



■ 



198 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

a husband ; but virtue is more precious than riches. (Something 

mari ; vertu precieux (g) riehesse. (Ilfaut 

must be allowed) for her age ; she is so young. She is older than I 52 
passer quelque chose) a * age; jeune. age moi 

am. She is as old as my sister who is married. She is239 not less 

t age 74 marie. a n.b. 

than twenty. I do not think that she is239 more than eighteen. She 
vingt ans. — penser en70 aitl45 

is taller by two inches, but she is not so handsome by much. She has 

grand " pouce, belle 

been spoiled in her infancy. Your sister is the most lovely girl I 

gate enfance. aimable (s) 

know. She is so diligent and46 attentive. You do not learn so well 
connaitre. attentif. (g) — apprendie 

as she does, because you are not so studious. My sister learns better 
t , parceque studieux. (g) (e p. 56) 

than I do, because she has a better memory than I have, but I take more 

52 + , memoire 52 t , 

pains than she does. I foundl36 my exercise easier than I thought, 
peine faire.t ai trouve theme aise penser.140 

It is better than I expected. It is less difficult than you imagined. 

attendre.140 62 moins difficile s'imaginer.140 

My son has made greater progress than 1 expected. (There are) 
41 progres 47esperais.l40. 246 

authors who write better than they speak ; there are others who speak 
auteur 125 i 125 125 

better than they write. The more I examine this affair, the more 

125 45 (bb) affaire, f. 45 

puzzling29 I find it62. Give that89 to your eldest32 sister, and this89 

embarrassant 54 (bb) aine29 It (bb) 

to your younger brother. Your writing is bad, but this8S is worse, 
jeune33 !i ecriture, f. (bb) pire *T 

and thatS8 is the worst of all. This ditch is nine feet deep, and 

(bb) % tout.29 (bb) fosse pied profond, $ 

six feet broad. That tree is a hundred yards high, and ten feet 

large. (bb) arbre 21 verge haut, 

thick. London25 bridge, now the finest bridge in England, is seven 

epais. pont, a present beau 

hundred and sixty-six feet long, and fifty-six feet broad ; the center 

pieds , large ; du millieu 

25arch is one hundred and fifty feet broad, and thirty-two feet high- 
arche, f. 21 $ , haut. 

Napoleon the first succeeded202 Louis the 16th; Louis the 18th 

a 136succede a ; 
succeeded Napoleon the 2d, king of Rome, and second emperor of the 

136 a , roi , 33 empereur , 

French. I want a watch ; but I should not like to give more than ten 
260 montre ; — aimer a donner 

* See note I! page 45. 

t This auxiliary verb is generally left out in french ; if you express it, you must 
follow rule 47. 
± See note (e) page 56. 

II- Eldest and younger can not be expressed by the comparative nor superlative in 
french, they must be expressed by the positive, for, as there is only one eldest and one 
. there can be no comparison. 
IF See note * page 193. $ See note * page 165. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



199 



guineas (for it.) You can not get a good one for less than twenty. I 

guinee en54 (kk) avoir en54 a moins 

will not give more than twelve. The best qualitv a man canl25 

— en70 qualite (s) 50 pouvoir 

have, is to be civil and obliging to the most uncivil and disobliging 
(kk), de civil obligeant incivil desobligeant 

people. The more difficult a thing is, the more merit (there is) in 
gens. 229 difficile chose , merite 246 a 

doingl69 it. 54 The more we contemplate the beauties of nature, the 

faire 62 contempler beaute , 

less reason we have to (be proud.) The richer and the more 

moins sujet de nous enorguillir. riche 

elevated in dignity we are, the less pride we ought to have, and 

eleve en dignite , moinsN.B. orgueil devoir 172 avoir, 

the more we are obliged to be just and reasonable ; but most men 

oblige d' juste raisonnable ; la plupart des 

(of these days) remember that they are rich and powerful, 

d'aujourd'hui ne se souvenirl30 (&6)n.b. puissant, 

only tol70 oppress the poor and the weak, and to be more unjust and 
que pour opprimer pauvre faible 170etre unjuste 

unreasonable. The great wall (on the) north of China is about 

deraisonnable. muraille au nord la Chine environ 

fifteen hundred miles long, and the royal canal of that empire is 

quinze 

about eighteen hundred miles long. The walls of Babylon were two 

dix-huit mur Babylone 

hundred feet high, and fifty broad. An angry man, who suppresses 

pied En colere etouffer 

his passion, thinks worse than he speaks ; an angry man who will 
penser plus mal parler ; vouloir 

chide speaks worse than he thinks. One of the greatest defects of 
gronder Un defaut 

the Pharsalia, is that fury of imagination which Lucan did not 

Pharsale. f. cette fougue f. que Lucain 

know how to repress, and which made him rather an enthusiast 
savoir reprimer en faire plutot enthousiaste m. 

than a poet. I have no pity on the misery of those who, being young 

poete. n' pas pitie de misere ceux jeune 
and strong, choose rather to beg than to work ; but I pity the 
fort, aimer mieux mendier de travailler ; mais j'ai pitie des 
old who can not get their livelihood. Westminster Abbey, 
vieillards pouvoir gagner vie. Abbaye, 

within its walls, is three hundred and sixty feet long ; at the nave 
en dedans des mur cent soixantepied a nef 

it is seventy feet broad, and at the cross one hundred and ninety, 
soixante-dix croix 21 quatre-vingt-dix. 

The front of Somerset house towards the Strand is about one hundred 

facade vers environ 21 

feet long, and the front towards the principal court is two hundred 

vers cour 
feet and more. The most learned men make sometimes the grossest 
savant faire quelquefois grossier 

mistakes. Obedience is the surest means of pleasing our parents, 
faute. Obeissance moy en plaire a parents, 



200 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



CHAPTER V. 
PRONOUN. 



A pronoun is a word used to represent a noun, as when I 
say / instead of naming my own name ; thou, you, he, she, it, 
they instead of naming that of another being. 

There are various sorts of pronouns, generally known by 
the names of personal, relative, possessive, demonstrative, in- 
definite. 

SECT. I. 
PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

As there are three persons in grammar, so there are three 
sorts of words to represent them, but sometimes the same per- 
son is represented by several words, as appears from the fol- 
lowing table. 

Agents or nominatives of Verbs. objects of Verbs, or of Prepositions.* 

1st per. / Je, Moi. Me Me, Moi. 

We; Nous, Us; Nous. 

2nd per. Thou, Tu, Toi. Thee, Te, Toi. 

You; Vous. You; Vous, 

3rd p. m.He, II, Lui. Him, Le, Lui. 

They; lis. Euj. Them ; Les, Leur, Eux. 
3rd p. f. She, Elie, Her, La, Lui, Elle. 

They ; Elles. Them ; Les, Leur, Elles. 

3rd p. n. It, II, m. Elle. f. It, Le, m. La, /. En, Y. 

They ; lis, m. Elles. f. Them ; Les, m. <ff. En, Y. 
"| Himself, ^) 

3rd pers. common V ^Rslif^' r® e > : 

J Themselves ; J 

And as these words are not used indiscriminately, it is ne- 
cessary to attend to the following observations. 



* In every action there is an Agent, doer, or performer ; as I write, I teach, Thou 
teachest, He teaches, The masters teaches ; and if the action is of a nature to be 
communicated, there is also generally a Patient or receiver ; as, I write a Letter, I 
teach You, Him, Her, Them, French, English, &c. This Agent or doer, in grammar, 
is called the nominative of the verb, and the Patient or receiver, is called the object ; 
so, I, Thou, He, The master are nominatives ; Letter, You, Him, Her, &c. are objects. 
of the verb. 

Until now I have avoided speaking of Cases, because if a case be what it seems to 
•be, a modification or variation from the original word, it is evident that in french there 
are no cases in nouns ; and it is astonishing that grammarians should still persist in 
giving six cases to our nouns, as is done in Latin. Whether a noun be the giver or 
receiver of an action, i. e. whether it be the nominative or the object of the verb, it 
remains invariably the same ; for ex. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 201 

AGENTS, OR NOMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 
/, THOU, HE, SHE, IT, WE, YOU, THEY. 

These pronouns are sometimes singly the nominative of a 
verb ; as"/ am, thou art, he is ; sometimes jointly with another 
substantive* ; as, you and / are ; he and his brother are ; 
and sometimes they are used absolutly without a verb ; as, 
Who is there ? /. 

51. When I, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they are attended 
by a verb that agrees with them in number and person, they 
are ; 

/, Je. He, It, m. II. 

Thou, Tu. They, mas. lis. 

We, Nous. She, It, f. Elle. 

You. Vous. They, fern. El!es. 
These words keep the same place in the sentence in french as in english ;t ex 
Jam, thou art, he is, she is. Je suis, tu es, il est, elle est. 
Ami? art thou 1 is he 1 is she % Sms-je ? Es4u? Est-iZ ? Est-elle ? 

EXERCISE. 

I learn 125 french. Doest thou speak it54 welH He has 
apprendre francais,m. — 133 parler 62 bien \ 
not learned long. It62 is not difficult. She is too idle. We have 
190 long-tems. difficile. trop paressenx. (g) 

not time. You will never learn. They are too fond of play, 
terns. 190 125 — 183 aimer a jouer. 

52. If /, thou, he, she, we, you, they are joined to another 
substantive,* for a nominative to the same verb, or if they 
are used without a verb to agree with them, they are ; 

I, Moi. He, Lui. 

Thou, Toi. They, mas. Eux. 

We, Nous. She, Elle. 

You, Vous. They, fern. Elles ; ex. 



Mon frere aime votre sceur. My brother loves your sister. 

Votre sceur aime mon frere. Your sister loves my brother. 

In the first instance, Frere, brother, is the nominative of the verb ; in the second, 
it is the object. Sceur, sister, in the first instance, is the object of the verb ; in the 
second, it is the nominative ; and in both instances, the words are the same. 

But it is not so with the Personal, and Relative pronouns. The same substantive, 
when the object of the verb, is not always expressed by the same word as when it is 
the agent or nominative ; so we do not say, 

II aime elle, elle aime il ; He loves she, she loves he ; 

we say, II Z'aime elle Z'aime ; He loves her, she loves him. 

If it be asked why this variation in the pronouns and not in nouns ; it may be an- 
swered, that the pronouns having been invented to prevent the tiresome repetition of 
the same noun, if there had been only one word to supply its place, the repetition of 
that word must have been too frequent, and only half the inconvenience would 
have been removed. 

* Observe that by substantive \ do not mean nouns only, I mean also the personal 
pronouns ; for the word which represents a substantive, is as much a substantive as the 
word which names it. 

t See the verbs, page 92, and following. 



202 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



In conjunction with another substantive : 
You and /are ready. Vous et moi nous sommes prets. 

He and his sister are ready. Lui et sa sozur sont prets. 

You and they are ready. F^ms et eux vousl27 etes prets. 

They and their friends are here. Eux et leurs amis sont ici. (m) 
Without a verb to agree with : 

Who is ready to go 7 ? 1. Qui est pret a, partir? moi. 

It is / who will go first. C est moi qui irai le premier. 

It ishe who will go first. C est fou qui ira le premier. 

It is who will go first. Ce sont eux qui iront les premiers. 

EVERCISE. 

You and I will learn french. He and I will learn together. 

127 — apprendre — 127 ensemble. 

You and they have learned before : My brother and I have begun 

127 auparavant : 127 commencer 

to learn it54. He and his sister learn very well. They and their 

a le. 126 tres 

master always speak french together : Who learns best % He or H 
184 126 lemieux? ? 

It62 is I w T ho learn best. It62 is he who learns best. 

N.E. 128 N.B. 128 

53. When a personal pronoun is the agent or nominative of 
several verbs, it is generally repeated with each verb ; as, 
/ say and maintain that, &c. Je diset je soutiensque, &e. 
He is poor, and will always be so. II est pauvre, et il le sera toujours.t 

EXERCISE. 

He always promises, but does not keep his word. We have 
184 promettre, — 190 tenir parole, 

seen it55, and will seel25 it again, 
ru le , revoir 54 t 

OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 
ME, THEE, US, YOU, HIM, HER, IT, THEM. 
Now let us see when me is me or moi ; thee, te or toi ; him, 
le or lui ; her, la or lui ; them, les, leur, eux, elles. 



(m) The pronouns moi, toi, nous, vous are sometimes added to Je, Tu, Nous, Vous, 
to point out more clearly a contradistinction ; as, 

You will write and / will read. Vous ecrirez, et moi je lirai. [allons. 

You come from Paris, and we are going there. Vous venez de Paris, et nous nous y 

N. B. The words, Myself, Thyself, &c. which are often used by way of emphasis 
at the end of a sentence ; as, I will doit myself ; are expressed, Myself, moi-meme; 
Thyself, toi-meme ; Himself, lui-meme ; Herself, elle-meme ; Ourselves; nous- 
memes ; Yourselves, vous-memes ; Themselves, eux-memes, m. elles-memes, f. 

t If the verbs are in the same tense, and used in the same sense, as in the exam- 
ple, I say and maintain, the pronoun may be omitted before the second verb, Je dis 
et soutiens ; but if the verbs are in different tenses, as in the other example, He is 
poor, and will always be so ; or if the verbs are used in different senses, i. e. ono 
affirmatively, and the other negatively, the pronoun must be repeated. 

X Again is expressed by re before voir. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



203 



The objective pronouns are always attended by some verb or 
proposition which governs them. 

The are placed sometimes before the verb, and sometimes 
after it ; and it is the place which they keep in the sentence 
that determines which word is to be used. 
The order which the objective pronouns keep with the verb. 



General Rule. 

54. When the objective pronouns me, thee, us, you, him, <SfC. 
are governed by a verb, place them immediately before that 
verb, and express 

to Him, ) 
to Her ; \ 

to Them ; 



| by Me. 



Me, 
to Me ; 

Thee 
to Thee 

Us, 
to Us ; 

You, 
to You; 
Him, It ; 
Her, It; 
Them; 
'me. 
thee, 
us. 

He looks at \ you. 

him, or it. 
her, or it. 
Jhem. 
Does he look at me ? 
He does not look at me. 
Does he not look at me ? 



by 



Lui. 



Te. 

Nous. 

Vous. 

Le. 
La. 
Les. 



Leur. 



> neut. 



> neut 



Y. 



En. 



Se; thus, 



to It, 
to Them, 
of It. > 
of Them, J ' 

Him-Herself, 

Itself, 

Themselves ; 
11 me regarde. 
II te regarde. 
11 nous regarde. 
II vous re gourde. 
II le regarde. 
11 la regarde. 
It les regarde. 
Me regarde-t-il ?* 
11 ne me regarde pa.s. 
Ne me regarde-t-il pas ? 



EXERCISE. 

Your brother does not love me. He never comes to see us 
— aimerl25 190 venir 127 voir. 

Does he not speak to you, when he meets you % My mother will not 

— 138 parler (o) , rencontrer ? vouloir (kk) 
allow me to speak to him. I will write to her. I will scold her 
permettre de (o) — ecrire (o) — gronder 

for using you so. Do not say (any thing to her (about it). She 

de traiter ainsi. — direl25 99 (o) en 

would use me worse (for it.) She would beat me. If I knew it, I 

— traiter plus mal en59 — battre Si savais le, 



* This t is added for the sake of melody ; see note * page 76. 



204 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



would not suffer it. I mustl81 reconcile them. I will invite them 

— souffrir II faut que je reconcilie — inviter 

to come to see me. I will speak to them to-day. 
a venir 172 voir — (o) aujourd'hui. 

55. Observe that if \he objective pronouns are governed by a 
verb compounded of the auxiliary verbs avoir or etre, and of a 
participle past, they must be placed before the auxiliary verb, 
and between the auxiliary and the principle ; thus, 



He has spoken < 



to me II m 1 a parte. 

to thee. II V a parte. 

to us. 11 nous a parte. 

to you. It vous a parte, 

to him, to her. 11 tui a parte. 

to them. It leur a parte. 



^of it j of them. It en a parte. 

Has he spoken to me ? M' a-X-it parte ? 

He has not spoken to me. It ne rrCa pas parte. 

Has he not spoken to me ? Ne w 5 a-l-ilpas parte ? fyc. 



Have you seen my brother'? I have seen him, but I have 

voir ? , 

not spoken to him. My mother has forbidden me to speak to him. 

190 parler (o) defendre de (o) 

Has he returned you the book which you had lent him 7 No, he 

rendre livre 72 aviez preter * ? 191 

has not returned it62 yet.183. Has he read it62 / ? I do notthink221 

190 rendre le encore. lire i ? — penser 

he has opened it62. I am afraid221 he 195 has lost it.62 He has 

145 ouvrir t — craindre 146 perdre t 

told me that you have given it him. I have not given it him. 
dire que donner 62 * 62 * 

It62 is not mine. I have borrowed it62 from a friend. He has 
II 86 emprunter t a 

asked me for201 it again, 
redemander — ft 

If the pronouns me, thee, us, you, him, her, it, them are 
me, thee, us, you, him, her, it, them 
governed by the imperative of a verb, consider whether the 
sentence commands, or whether it forbids. || 

The order which the objective pronouns keep with the verb, 
56. 1st Exception. When the objective pronouns me, thee, 
us, you, him, her, it, them are governed by the imperative of a 



* See note (?.) p. 63. 
t See note (k) p. 64. 

t Again is expressed by re before demander. 

n The verb commands when the action spoken of is to be done ; the verb forbids 
when the action spoken of is not to be done ; so, Wait, is a command ; Do not wait, 
is a forbiddance or prohibition. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



205 



verb used in a commanding sense, i. e. without a negation, the 
pronouns which represent them are placed immediately after 
the verb ; 

In these instances me is expressed by moi, and thee by toi. 

Wait lor me. Get thyself ready. 
Attendre 201 Appreter — 

57. But if the imperative is used in a forbidding sense, i. e. 
if it is attended by a negation, the pronouns must be placed 
immediately before the verb, agreeably to the general rule j 

Then me is expressed by me, and thee by te ; ex. 

Imperative Commanding, 56 rule. Imperative Forbidding, 57 rule, g* 

Look at™*. Regarde-moL Seme J d 

thyself. toi.JSete J s r a 

Look at us. Regardez-nous.Nenous i dez | 

yourself. vous.Ne vous ) £r 

Let us look at Aim or & Regardons-leNe le ~\ p 

her oi it la.Nela \ re gar dons pas. Z 

them. les.(n)Neles J <* 

EXERCISE. 

Help258 me. Do not help me, Help258 yourself; help him; 
Aider* — 190 Servir* t ; servir ; 

help her ; help them. Do not help him ; do not help her ; do not 

; servir — servir ; — ; — 

help them. Wait forme. Do not wait for me. Bring me a clean32 
Attendre* 201 — 201 Apporter* blanche 

plate. Do not give me such a dirty plate. Bring it62 here. Do not 
assiette. — si 38 sale32 * la ici. — 

bring it here. Shew it him. Do not shew it him. Take it. Do 
62 Montrer*62 lui.t 62 162 Prendre 62 — 

not take it. Hear me. Hear him. Do not hear him. Stop her. Do 
62. Ecouter* — Arreter — 

not stop her. Let\M8 her go. Do not let her go. Let them alone. % 
Laisser alter. — 248 tranquilles. 

58. 2nd Exception, The objective pronouns are not always 
the object of verbs, they are sometimes governed by a prepo- 
sition which some verbs require to unite them to the substan- 
tive which follows them ; then the pronoun being the object 
of the preposition, not the object of the verb, it is placed after 
the preposition, and me is expressed by moi ; thee, by toi ; him, 



(n) With two imperatives governing the same pronouns, to avoid monotony, we 
say 

Donnez-Ze-moi, ou me le vendez. Give it me or sell it me. 
Voyez-Ze, et le consolez. See Mm, and comfort him. 

* The second person singular of the imperative is seldom used r in French, ex- 
cept through familiarity or contempt; the second person plural is used, though 
speaking to a single person ; so instead of saying Place, we say Placez ; instead of 
Attends, we say Attendez. 
t See reflective verbs, pages 100, 101. 
t See note (i) page 63. 

18 



206 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN* 



by lui ; her, by elle ; us, by nous ; you, by vous ; them, masc, 
by eux ; them, fern, by elles ; ex. 

He came to me. II vint a moi. * 

He complained of thee. II se plaignit de toi. 

He applied to him, to her, to them. II s'adressa a lui, a elle, a eux, <$*c.(o) 

EXERCISE. 

Come near me. Have you thought of200 me? I always think 

s'approcher t de penser a ? 184 penser 

of you. I was coming to you, when they obliged me to go to her. 

' — venirl55 a , obliger d' aller a 

You are laughingl55 at200 me. Do you know what she says of him? 

— se moquert de — savoirJ25 84 dire de 1 

He does not care for200 her nor for what she says of him. They 

— se soucier d 1 ni de 84 

have enquired after you. Have you applied to them ? I will not 

237 1 s'inforrner de200 237t s'adresser a ] vouloir 

trust202 them. What reason have you to mistrust202 them 1 I do 

me fier a 82 raison de vous metier d' ? 

not speak of them. 

The order which several objective pronouns keep together. 

59. When several objective pronouns are governed by the 
same verb, a precedency must be given to some of them. 

If, agreeably to the general rule, the pronouns are placed 
before the verb, 



(o) Some difficulty arises here with respect to the preposition A, which, like the pre* 
position To, is generally implied in the pronoun ; for we say 

II ?77 c donna un livre, He gave me a book ; instead of 

II donna un livre a moi ; He gave a book to me. 

Je lui pvetai de l'argent, I lent him money ; instead of 

Je pretai de l'argent a lui ; I lent money to him. 

But in some instances this preposition can not be left out ; for though we say, He 
give me a book ; I lent him money ; we could not say, He came me; I went him; we 
must say, He came to me ; I went to him. 

The verbs which require the preposition A to unite them to the pronoun, are the 
following ; 1st, all the Reflective Verbs, which, as they always have a pronoun at- 
tached to them for their ooject, can not govern another substantive, without a prepo- 
sition ; as, 

Ils'est adresse hmoi, a toi, &c. He has applied to me, to thee, SfC. 

Ne vous fiez pas a lui, a elle, &c. Do not trust Arm, her, <f-c. 
2dly, A few Neuter Verbs which also require a preposition to unite them to the 
pronoun which attends them. The most frequently met with are : 

Aller, to go ; as, N'aliez pas a lui. Do not go to him. 

Boire, to drink ; Je bois a vous. I drink to you. 

Courir Accourir, to run ; II accourt a nous. He is running *o us. 

Descemlre, to go or come down ; Elle descendit a moi. She came down to me. 

Etre, to be, viz. to belong; . Ceciesta eux. This belongs to them. 

Monter, to go or come up ; Je monterai a elle. I shall go up to her. 

1 Penser, to think ; Pensez a nous. Think of us. 

Recourir, to have recourse ; Recourez a eux. Have recourse to them. 

Venir, to come ; lis vinrent a moi. They came to me. 

t See note t page 205. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



207 



Me, ^ 

Nous, I 

Te, \have the precedency over le, la, les, y, en. 

Vous, | 

Se, J 

Le, 1 

La, yhave the precedency over lui, leur, y, en. 
Les J 

Leur } ^ ave ^ e P rece ^ enc V over Y> en * 
Y has the precedency over en;* as, 

Will he give him or it to me, Me le ^ 

her" or it to me, Me la ^donnera-t-il? 

them to me? Me les* j 

He promised him or it to us, 11 nous V ~\ 136 

her or it to us, 11 nous V y a promts. 



them to us, 11 nous les 



>*1 



Will he not lend it to you, Ne vous le ^ 

her or it to you, Nevous la \priUra4-il pas? 

them to you? Ne vous les J 

He will send it to me there, 11 meVy ^ 

some tome there, (p) It m\j en \envlra,. 

some to you there. 11 vous y en J 

He will not send it him or her, Ene le lui "\ 

any to him, or her, (p) 11 ne lui en )>enverapas.* 
them to them. 11 ne les leur) 

exercise. 

I have something to tell you. What83 is if? lean not tell it 

98 a dire (y) ? pouvoir (kk) le 

you now. I will tell it you (by and by.) Why will 173 not you 

a present. — tantot Pourquoi vouloir 

tell it me now 1 I have a letter for you. Your brother has sent it62 
lettre pour envoyee t 

me to bring it you. Where is it 1 Give it me. Why will 173 not 
55 170 apporter ; Ou 62? Donner62 60 vouloirl25 

you give it me 1 If you do not give it me immediately, I willl73 not 
62 ? — 62 aussitot, — ne 

ask you for201 it again, and I will tell himl62 of it. Here it is247- , 

— II plus, 190 — lui II le La voici n.b. 

Shew it62 me. I will return it to you presently. I have brought you 
Montrer 60 — rendre 62— tout al'heure. apporter 55 

some fruit too. Give ns some. WhatS3 ! you had promised it to us, 
aussL (p) Quoi ! aviez promettre 62 — , 



* See, page 62, 63, a table which shews how to arrange several pronouns together. 
(p) Some, any, implying of it, of them, are rendered by en. 
± See note (k) p. 64. 

II We do not say in french, Demander quelqu'un pour une chose, to ask somebody for 
a thing ; the thing is always the object of the verb, and the person the object of & pre- 
position ; we say, Demander une chose a quelqu'un, to ask a thing to somebody, the 
same as we say, Donner une chose a quelqu'un, to give a thing to somebody. Nor do 
we say, Dire une personne d J une chose, to tell a person of a thing, we say, Dire une 
chose a une personne, to tell a thing £o a person, 



208 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



and you give it to them. I offered 136 it to you first and you would 

62— ai offert 62 — 55 premierement* avez!36 

not have it. I will send you some to-morrow. Do not forget to send 

voulu 55. — envoyer (p) demain. — oublier de 

me some, for it is long246 since I 196 have eat any. I will70 not. 

(p) , car il y a long-terns que mange {p) n.b. 

60. But if, agreeably to the 56th rule, the pronouns are 
placed after the verb, in which instances moi, toi are used 
instead of me, te, then 

Le, ) 

La, ! have the precedency over moi, toi; as, 
Les, f 
Y J 

Send him, or it to me. Envoyez le-moi. 

her or it to me. la-moi. 

them to me. les-moi. 

them to me there. les-y-moi* 

EXERCISE. 

Give it me. Bring her to me. Send them to me there. Send 
Donnerl25 Amener — Envoyer — y (h) p. 53. 
some to me there, 

61 . Observe also that if me, thee after an imperative, are 
followed by some, of it, of them, they are not expressed by 
moi, toiy as above ; me some, me of it, &c. are expressed by 
rrten; thee some, &c. are expressed by fen, whether they 
come before or alter the verb ; ex. 

He has sent me some. II mien a envoye. send me some, envoy ez-m^en. 
Doestthou remember it? fen souviens-tul remember it. souviens-t'en. 

EXERCISE. 

He gave me some. Give me some. He putl37 me (in mind) (of it.) 
donner (p) (p) faire souvenir en 

Put me (in mind) of it. He brought thee some. Recall to thyself 
Faites souvenir 59 apporter (p) Rappeler — 

the difficulties of it. 
difficult^ 59. 

REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

62. As there are only two genders in french, the masculine 
and the feminine, the neuter pronouns it, they, them must be 
expressed by il, elle, Us, elles, le, la, les, the same as he, she, they, 
him, her, them, masculine or feminine, agreeably to the gender 
of the noun which they represent ; so we say, 

Of a man or a coach ; 

II vient ; je le vois, He or it is coming ; I see him or it. 

Of a woman or a watch ; (See note k, page 64.) 

Elle est belle ; regardez la. She or it is fine ; look at her or it. 



SYNTAX OF THE P$0NOUN. 



209 



N. B. It is often used in an impersonal sense, i. e. without 
reference to any substantive mentioned before ; as, 
It is glorious, shameful, necessary, proper, <&c. 

In these instances, .ft is always expressed by ^7, or by re. 

It is expressed by il, if the verb is followed by an adjec- 
tive ; as, 

It is glorious, shameful, necessary, proper, &c. 
11 est glorieux, honteux, necessaire, a propos, &c. 

It is expressed by ce, when the verb is followed by a sub- 
stantive, either with or without an adjective ; as, 

Is it you 1 it is he. It is his son. It is a shameful thing. 
Est-ce vous 1 C'est lui. C'est son fils. C'est une chose honteuse. 
not, Est-z7 vous 7 II est lui. il est son fils, means he is his son. 

EXERCISE. 

Look at that tree ; it is well blossomed, yet it produces no 
Regarder 201 arbre ; fleuri, cependant produire 190 

fruit. 1 will cut it down, if it does not bear fruit this year. (These 
abattre, (K)p.C4. * , — porter annee. 247 

are) very fine trees, but they are too young to bear fruit yetl83. 

tres 33 , trop jeune29 pour deja.N.B. 

Thev do not bear fruit, when they are so younq-. (That is) a fine 

' — , si 29 247 

flower. It is a rose. Will j r ou havel?4 it 1 How sweet it smells' 
fleur. 65 Vouloir — (K)p.64. 185 bonf sentir ! 

I will take it to my mother. She is sol83 fond of roses. Take 

173 256 (K)p.64. — tant aimer — Prendre 

some of these cherries 5 they are very good, They are not 

96 (bb) cerise ; tres 29 

quite ripe29 yet. 183 They will be better in another week, 
tout a fait rniir encore, n.b. (E)p. 56. 213 une semaine. 

Ii62 is very pleasant to have a garden near one's house. It62 is the 
n.b. agreable d' jardin piesdesa n.b. 

greatest33 pleasure I have. Was it62 you who sent 128 us some fruit 

44 plaisir(s) 50 Etait n.b, envoyerl37 

the other day 1 No, il62 was my brother. I thougbt221 it62 was 

autre jour ? N'on, n.b. 140 penserHO n.b. 

you. Did you like 137 it54 1 Yes, it was very nice. 
— ' trouver bon ? , 140 bon. 

63. Though lui and leur may be said of beings that have 
life, such as brutes and plants ; as, 

That tree is withered, give it some water. 
Cet arbre est flLeiri, donnez lui de l'eau ; 

They can not be said of lifeless beings, commonly called 



*To cutis Oouper ; To cat down is Abattre, not Couper en bas. 

t Sweet is here used adverbially, so is Bon f and it does not require Buy agreement. 

18* 



210 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 

things ; (q) in speaking of things, to it, to them must be ex- 
pressed by Y ; as, 

She loves reading, she gives all her time to it. 
Elle aime la lecture, elite y donne tout son terns. 

EXERCISE. 

Take the horses into the stable, and bring them56 some hay. This 
256 213 ecurie, 256 (i) p. 63. foin. 

tree is dying,155 givel62 it a little water. Most men 
arbre — se mourir, donner 56 peu eau. La plupart des 
worship love ; they sacrifice every thing to it. Geography is a 
adorerl30 amour; sacrifier 107 54. Geographie 

pleasant study ; you should give some time to it. You do not pay 
agreable32 etude ; 176 * terns 54 faire 

sufficient attention to it. I want to learn mathematics ; but I can not 
assez 54. 260 mathematique ; (kk) 

apply to them. I have not time to stick to them, 

m'appliquer 59. de m'attacher 59 

64. Lui, elle, eux, elles, after a preposition, are said only • 
of persons ; in speaking of brutes or things, the preposition 
must be changed into some adverb which implies the meaning 
of both the preposition and pronoun ; as, 

Take this horse, and get upon it. 

Prenez ce cheval, et montez dessus, not sur lui. (q) 

If an adverb can not be found to supply the place of the 
preposition, \\ give another turn to the sentence, by Which the 
preposition will disappear ; as, 

He is come with it; II V a apportc, i. e. he has brought it. 
not, II est venu avec lui, which would imply a person, not a thing. 

EXERCISE. 

If men knewl40 virtue, they would burn with love for it, andt 

connaitre , bruler d' pour , 

own that (there is) no real happiness without it. That chair is 
avouer que 246 vrai t bonne ur sans (bb) chaise 



* See note t page 183. 
(</) Except those that are generally personified, such as Heaven, Fortune, Providence, 
the Elements, some Virtues and Vices ; as, 

Love is the tyrant of reason, yet there are people who sacrifice every thing to it- 
Vamour est le tiran de la raison, cependant il y a des gens qui lui sacrifient tout. 
Or when iri a metaphorical sense, we attribute to things, what in a proper sense can 
only be attributed to persons ; so, speaking of a Sword, we say ; 

Je lui dois la vie, I owe my life to it. 
Of a Book ; Ces livres me coutent cher, mais je letjr dois mon instruction. 
These books cost me dear, but I owe my instruction to them. 
Eut in speaking of the same things without giving rational attributes to them, w 
could not use lui, leur, we must use Y ; as, 

It is an old sword, but I have got a new hilt put to it. 
Cest une vieUle epee, mais fy ai fait mettre une garde neuve. 
H You find in the dictionaries the words which are both prepositions and adverbs. 
t Would is here understood in english. 
X Put this adjective before the noun. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



211 



EXERCISE. 

broken, do not sit57 upon it. The rails are newly painted, 
rompul58, — s'asseoirll dessus barreau fraichement peint29 , 

do not lean57 against them. Stand56 (by the side) of them. I have 
— s'appuyerll contre Se tenhil a cote 

made a terrace in my garden, a grotto under it, and planted trees all 
terrasse 213 , r; grotte dessous, plante arbre 

round it. I am going to make a fountain (in the) middle of it, and a 
autour 155 172 d'eau25jet au milieu , 

canal through it. Have ) r ou ever been in in 
a travers. jamais dedans ? 

65. He, she, it, they coming with the verb he, followed by 
a substantive, are generally expressed by ce ; as, 

He is an officer. O est un officier. 

She is a seamstress. C est une couturiere. 

They are merchants. Ce sont des negociants. 

If the substantive which follows the verb, denotes rank, 

state, trade, or profession, he, she, they may be expressed by 

il, elle, Us, elles, but the article must be left, out ; as, 

11 est officier. elle est couturiere. lis sont negociants. 
not, il est un officier. elle est une couturiere. Us sont des negociants. (see 23 rule . 

EXERCISE. 

Do you know that gentleman who is coming (this way?) He is 
— 133 connaitre (bb) monsieur — venirl55 (par ici?) 

a philosopher. He is a very learned man. That is his wife who 
philosophe. tres savant C'est la femme 

is with him. She is a very haughty32 woman. Is that their house? 

58 hautam29 femme. Est-ce la 1 

Yes, it is. It is a very good29 house. They are very respectable 

Oui, 70. 33 32 

people. 

gens. 

66. He, she, they, him, her, them are sometimes used with- 
out reference to any noun expressed before them, but imply 
the words man, tcoman, or people understood ; in this sense 
they are expressed, 

Him, \ ^ Cehd ; Her, } % celle ' Them, } ^ ceux ; as > 

He who can live dishonored, does not deserve to live, i. e. the man who 

Cehd qui peut vivre deshonore ne merite pas de vivre. 

I have met her whom you wished so mu'ch to see, i.e. the woman whom. 

J'ai rencontre celle que vous souhaitiez si fort de voir. 

N. B. The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, and the relative qui, 
que, dont which attends them, must not be separated, as the 
corresponding words are sometimes in english ; they must be 
placed together ; 



li See the imperative of a reflective verb, p. 100. 



212 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



They'are mistaken who think that riches make men happy. 
Ceux qui pensent que les richesses rendent les hommes heureux se 
trompent. 

i. e. They who think that riches make man happy are mistaken.* 

EXERCISE. 

Happy he who liyes, i. e. the man who lives contented with his lot. 
Heureux vivre content 200 sort. 

Providence never abandons him who does not abandon himself. 

190 abandonner — - s'abandonner lui-merne. 

She who refuses a husband, is not always sure tol56 find another. 

refuser mari, sur29 eiwO trouver un autre. 

He is a flatterer who praises men for virtues which?4 they have 

flatteur louer des (o) p. 66. 
not. He can not be happy whose happiness depends upon other 
saurait 192 74 bonheur dependre des autres 
people. They are not always happy who seem to be so54.t 
— 39 paraitre le 

67. His, her, their are also sometimes used in the same 
sense as the above pronouns, i, e. implying the words man, 
women, or people understood, and are then expressed, 

His, by de celui, her, by de celle ; their, by de ceux ; as, 
We90 always blame their conduct who do not succeed. 
On90 blame toujours la conduite de ceux qui ne reussissent pas. 
i. e. We blame always the conduct of those, viz. of the people who do not succeed. 

EXERCISE. 

Every body blames his manners, i. e. the manners of him, who acts 
106 blamer maniere - - , agir 

without modesty. I would not trust her virtue, who does not care200 

modestie. vouloir me fier a vertu — se soucier 

for her reputation. Their labours do not always succeed, who take 
de travail — 184 reussir prendre 

their measures best.t 
l mesure le mieux. 

68. When an objective pronoun is governed by several verbs, 
that pronoun must be repeated with every verb by which it is 
governed ; as, 

She loves and esteems you. Elle vous aime et vous estime. 
Speak or write to her. Parlez lui ou lid ecrivez. 

EXERCISE. 

He saw and heard me. He loves and esteems you. I hate and 
voir entendre 54 ' aimer estimer 54 hair 

despise him. I entreat and conjure you. 
mepriser 54 prier conjurer 54 



* These sentences may also be expressed without changing- the order of the 
words thus, 

CEUX-la se trompent qui pensent que Us richesses rendent les Jicmrr.es heureux ; 
or C'est se tromper QUE de penser que les richesses rendent les hemmes heureux. 
But these expressions aremore adapted to poetry and oratory, than to conversation. 

t Turn this sentence in French ; They who seem happy, are net always so. 

% Turn ; The labours of those who take best their measures, do not always suc- 
ceed. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



213 



69. It sometimes happens that the verb b) r which the ob- 
jective pronouns are governed, is preceded by another verb ; as, 

I can not do it ; He will not give it me ; You may lend it to him. 
In these instances, it is better to place the pronouns before 

the last verb than before the first; so, instead of saying, 
Je ne le puis pas faire; say, Je ne puis pas le faire. 

II ne me le veut pas donner ; 11 ne veut pas me le donner.* 

EXERCISE. 

Will you help me to do it 1 Can not you do it yourself? He 

173 aider 169 faire 54? 192 (m) n.b. ? 

wishes to marry her. She will not speak lo him. She can not 
souhaiter 172 epouser 54 vouloir \kk) (o) 54 192 

bear him. 
souffrir 54. 

70. Le, la, les, en, y are often used when the corresponding 
words are not requisite in english ; for example, in answer to 
these questions ; 

Are you Mr. B 1 Etes-vous monsieur B 1 

Is that your house 1 Est-ce la votre maison 1 

Are these your gloves'? Sont-ee ici vos gams'? 

It would not be sufficient in french, as it is in english, to 
answer with the auxiliary verb only, and say, 

Oui, je suis; yes, I am. 
Non, ce rtest pas ; no, it is not. Oui, ce sont ; yes, they are. 

We are oblige to add one of the above pronouns, and say ; 

Oui,je Zesuis. Non, cene Vest pas. Oui, ce les sont.(r) 
You have got fine apples. Vous avez de belles pommes. 

"Will you have some ? (of them). En voulez-vous quelques-unes'? 
Yes, give me a few, i. e. (of them). Oui, donnez m'en quelques-unes. 

N.B. And if the auxiliary verb with which the question is asked 
is attended by another verb, that verb must also be repeated ; as, 

Has he done it ? L'a-t-il fait 1 

No, he has not, i. e. {done it). Non, il ne Va pas fait. 
Do you remember it ^ Vous en souvenez-vous 1 

Yes, I do, i. e. (remember it). Oui, je m?en souviens. 
Are you going to the play 1 Allez-vous a la comedie 1 
No, lam not, i. e. (going there). T$ on, je rC y vais pas. 

EXERCISE. 

Is this the master of the house 1 Yes, he is ; i. e. the master. He 
Est-ce ici maitre ? , (r) ; 



* This rule is not strictly adhered to by French writers, especially ancient authors; 
however it makes the sentence clearer, and it is the surest for a foreigner, as there 
are no exceptions to this rule, and there are several to the other, which he might be 
liable to mistake. 

(r) If the answer is made with the pronouns He, She, They, relating to persons, 
Zui, elle, eux, elles added to the verb, render the other words unnecessary ; 
Is that your brother 1 Yes, he is. Is that your sister ? No, she is not. 
Est-ce la votre frere? Oui, c*est lui. Est-ce la votre sceur ? Non, ce n' est pas ELLE. 



214 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



EXERCISE. 

is rich and lam not ; i. e. rich. He has friends and I have not ; i. e.* 

riche (m) . * f ami (m) 

any friends. Are these the books of which you were speaking? 
(.p) * Sont-ce ici 74 155 1 

Yes, they are; i. e. the books. Is your brother at home? No, he is 

, 65 ; * 134 aulogis? 191, 

not; i. e. there. Have you seen your brother lately? No, I 
190. (H)p.58. vu depuispeu? 191, 

have not, i. e. seenhim. When you seel4*2 him, tell him that I want to 
t . verrez , dire lui56 (bb) 260 172 

speak to him. I will ; i. e. tell it him. I do not know what he wants ; 

(o) t . savoir 84 vouloir ; 

do you? i. e. know it? No, I do not ; i. e. know it ; if 1 did ;140 i. e. 
t ! 70n.b. , f ; 70n.b. ; t ; 

know it, I would not have asked you about it. 
70n.b. , demander — J 59. 

71. If the pronoun is added to represent a noun, it must be 
one of the words le, la, les, agreeably to the gender and num- 
ber of that noun ; as, 

Are you the son of Mr. A ? Etes-vous le jils de monsieur A ? 

Yes, I am, i. e. {the son). Oui, je le suis. 
Are you the daughter of Mrs. B ? Etes-vous la fille de madame B 1 

No, I am not, (the daughter). Non, je ne la suis pas. 

Are these your gloves ? Sont-ce ici vos gants ? 

Yes, they are, i. e. (my gloves). Oui, ce les sont. 

EXERCISE. 

Are you the brother of that lady ? Yes, I am. Are you the sister 

(bb) 1 

of that gentleman ? No, I am not. Are these your horses? Yes, 
(bb) monsieur? Sont-ce ici cheval? , 

they are. 

65 

72. But if the word to be represented is an adjective, an 
adverb, or a whole sentence, le is used without regard to gen- 
der or number ; as, 

Are you married, sir ? Etes-vous marie, monsieur ? 

Yes, I am, i. e. (married). Oui, je le suis. 
Are you married, madam ? Etes-vous mariee, madame ? 
No, I am not, i. e. (I am not so). Non, je ne le suis pas. 

Are you contented, ladies ? Etes-vous contentes, mesdamesl 
Yes, we are, i. e. (we are so). Oui, nous le sommes. 

EXERCISE. 

Sir, are vou ready ? Yes, I am ; i. e. ready. Are you ready, Mad- 
prel? , 29 , 



* You do not repeat the noun or adjective, which is understood in English, but you 
.must add one of the above pronouns to the verb, as long as the same subject is contin- 
ued. 

t These signs, or auxiliary verbs which represent the principal verb in English* 
have no meaning in French, you must repeat the verb itself. 
t .See note II p. 207. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



215 



EXERCISE. 

am 1 No, Sir. I am not ; i. e. ready. Are your brothers returned 158 1 

t , , . 134 265? 

No, they are not ; i. e. returned. 
> » 

73. En, y, which are generally applied to things, may, in 
answer to a question or a command, be applied to persons, en 
instead of de moi, de toi, de nous, de vous, de lui, oVelle, oVeux, 
oVelles ; y instead of a moi, d tot, a nous, d vous, d lui, d elle, 
d eux, d dies ; as, 

Remember me. Souvenez-vous de moi. 

I will, i. e. {remember you) Je ru'en souviendrai. 

Have you thought of us ? Avez-vous pense a nous ? 
Yes, we have, i. e. {thought of you). Oui, nous y avons pense. 

EXERCISE. 

Were you speaking of me 1 Yes, I was; i. e. speaking of you. 

— 133 155 58 1 , * . 

Do you care for her? No, I do not; i. e. care for her. Will you 
— se soucier de 58 ? 191, * . 173 

not trust202 him'? No, indeed, I will not; i.e. trust him. Have237 

vous fier a 53 ? 191, en verite, . t 

you not applied to them? Yes, we have237; i. e. have applied to 
s'adresser 58? , * , 

them. 



Recapitulatory exercise on the foregoing rules.t 
Your sister" has' not usec!257 me well. What has she done to youl 

n'en a pas use avec 183n.b. 83 faire (o) ? 

We were at the ball last night ; Iasked252her to dance with me ; she 
140 bal 285 ; prierl37 168 danser ; 

refused me, and after she had refused me, she danced with another, 
refuserl37 , apres que eat refuse , 137 

She mentioned it to me this morning. She is very sorry (for it.) 

a 136 parte en (o) (bb) 234 ' fache29 en 

She desired me to tell you so. She did 140 not intend to offend you. 

al36prie 168 dire le54. avoir dessein 163 offenser 

She had promised to dance with him before you had218 asked her. 
avais promettre 168 avant que eussiez demander 

She oughtl77 then to have told me so. She forgotl37 it. She did 
aurait done — du dire te54 oublier — 

not think (of it.) I beg you will forgive202 her. You had prQ- 

penserl37 y prier " $ de pardonner lui aviez 

mised me that, when you should come to see me, you would bring 
que, quand venir 172 voir , " — 256 

me your children. Why didl36 you not bring them with you? 

Pourquoi avez amenes ? 

I could not bring them to-day. I willl73 bring them the next 
ai 136pu 256 aujourd'hui. — 256 prochaine 



* See t page 214. 

t See compound tenses of a reflective verb used interrogatively, page 101. 
I See note * p. 182. 

$ Turn in French, / beg you to forgive her. 



216 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN* 



time I comel42. Bring them to me as soon as you can. 142 I will.70 

fois221 viendrai. 256 (o) aussitot que pouvoir. n.b. 

They have desired me to buyl62 them fruit, and to send it to them, 
252 168 acheter (i) p. 63. , 168 envoyer (o) i 

but I will take it to them myself. I long to see them. It is so 

256 62 (o) (m) n.b., * de voir II y a si 

long246 since I have seen them. They will be very glad29 to see 

long terns que 196 vusl59 bien aise 168 

you. They are very fond of you. They are always talkingl55 of 
— fort 183 aimer — 155 183 parler 

you. You are so goodt to them. They like you better than their 

avez tant de bonte pour aimer (e ) p. 56. 

uncle. He is incessantly teazingl55 them. Theywilll73 not stay 

oncle. — sanse cessel83 tourmenter vouloir rester 

with him. They would rather come to me or go to you. They are 

aiment mieux (o) (o) ' 65 

very amiable32 children. I often think of them. I am much obliged 

aimable29 184 penser 200 bien oblige 

to you. You have got a nice stick. Let243 me look at it. "Will 
(o) 270 joli baton. Laisser voir — Vouloir 

you have it 7 I make you a present (of it.) I thank you. I wi!1173 

174 1 faire 24 en remercier vouloir 

not deprive you of it. I do not care (for it). I have bought it with 

(kk) priver — se soucier en acheter dans 

the intention of givingl54 it away. Have you got another 3 Yes, 
dessein donner — En70 270 un autre ? , 

I have. 70 Is this your new32 watch 7 Yes, it is. It is silver; I 

n.b. Est-ce iei neuve montre? , ce 70. 62 d'argent ; 

thought221 it was gold. My uncle has promised me a gold one, if I 
pensais 140 62 140 d'or. oncle d'or en70, 

get a prize this year. I wish221 you may. 70 n.b. Ah ! 
remporter prix (bb) 233 souhaiter en remportiez un. Ah ! 

is it62you ? How glad I am to see you ! If you had not called upon 
n.b. 1 185 aise 168 voir ! aviez 266 

me now, I would have called upon you this afternoon. I wanted2G0 

a present, 266 (bb) apres midi. 140 

to see you. We go to the play to-night; will you come with us 1 
alter comediet 235 ; $ venir ? 

Will your cousin 134 be there % I think221 she willTO. I will go ; for 
— () ' cousine f. (h) p. 56. penser n.b. ; car 

I long (very much) to see her. She is a most amiable32 young lady. 

II fort 168 voir 65 des plus aimables ieune demoiselle. IF 

You do not know (how much) I love and esteem her. I always think 
— ^avoir combien aimer estimer 184 penser 



\ * See Long, p. 163. 

t To be so good, to be so kind, are expressed by Avoir tant de bonte : Be so good, be 
so kind, in the imperative, Ayez la bonte ; not Soyez si bon. 

$ Comedie in French, does not mean Comedy only, but is said of any kind of plays 
acted upon a sta?e, and also of the house itself where such plays are acted ; you may 
also express the word Play by Spectacle. Theatre in French is generally understood 
of that part of the house called the stage ; yet it is said also of the house itself. 

$ See note *page 130. 

II See the impersonal verb long, p. 163. 

IF Demoiselle is said of all ladies who have never been married, whatever their age 
may be ; Dame is said of all ladies who are or have been married. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



217 



of her. but I (am afraid)221 she never thinks of me. What reason 
200 , craindre 190 200 82 raison 

have you to think sol Because, when I meet her, she does not 
108 le54 1 Parceque, rencontrer, — * 

take any noiice of me. You shonldl76 speak to her. You should 

faire aucune attention a devoir (o) 176 

call upon her. I (am afraid) of offend ingl54 her. I know22l she has 

(kk) 266 craindre deplaire 202 lui savoir 

a great regard for yon, but I can not say that she loves you. 

— beaucoup de respect pour , (kk) dire (bb) n.b. 

Yet, I recollect that one day, as I was speaking of you to her, 

Cependant, se rappeler un jour, comme 155 (o) , 

she asked me if I knewUO you well. I told her that I did,70 

demander connaitre " bien dire (i) p. 63. (bb) n.b. t n.b. 

and she seemedl37 pleased (at it.) If she is at the theatre to night, 
paraitre bien aise en a comediet 235 

I will tell her what you have told me. I shall be much obliged 

84 bien oblige 

to you, if you do. I see a gentleman in that box yonder who 
(o) , $ monsieur (bb) loge Ja-bas 7511 

owes me (a great deal) of money, but I dare not ask him for it, for 
devoir — beaucoup argent, oser IT , de 

fear of giving him pain; yet I am in great want (of it;) and 
peur faire 154 162 peine ; cependant, avoir grand besoin en ; 
as (you are acquainted with him,) I will be obliged to you, if you 
comme vous vous connaissez ** , (o) , 

will tell him so, the first time you have an opportunity to 
144 dire (i) p. 63. Ie54. fois t» 142 24 occasion 168 

mention it to him. Who, Mr. A 1 I know him very well. He is 
parler en (o) Qui, Mons. A 1 connaitre tres bien. 

a very honest man ; he will pay you, you may be sure of it. I 

honnete (i) ; payer , pouvoir sur 

answer for him as for myself. I suppose221 he has forgotten it. 
repondre 200 comme 200 moi-meme. s'imaginer oublier 

My sisters were taiking this morning of goingl54 to drink tea at 

155 parler (bb) matin aller 172 prendre the 

your 208house this afternoon. Shall yoube there 1 Certainly, IshallTO. 
n.b. apres rnidi. (h) p. 58. Certainement, n.b. 

I should not like to lose that opportunity of seeing them. I want to 

aimer 169 (bb) occasion 154 260 

return265 them the book which74 they have lent me, and to thank 
n.b. (i) p- 63. (o) p. 66. preter , remercier 



* Express Not by ne only, before the verb, as aucune which follows it, supplies the 
place of pas or point. 

t You may express / did by Oui only, or you may repeat the verb Connaitre, and 
say, I did know you. 
t See note t p. 216. 

6 Here you may express Do by the verb Faire, or you may repeat the verb and the 
pronouns, if you tell it her. 

|| Turn ; I see in that box yonder a.gentleman who, 4-c. 
IT See note i! p. 207. 

** Leave out with him ; as Vous vous connaissez means, you are acquainted with each 
other. 

19 



218 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



them (for it.) I have been told that one of them is going to be * 

en 92 une * — 155 172 

married26l. Is it true 1 They90 talk of it, but I do not know whether 
se marier. vrai ? n.b. parler , si 

it is true or not. Ask 162her. I dare not ask her such a thing; 

ou non. Demander le (I) p. 63. oser (i) p. 63. 39 chose ; 

she would be angry with me. I met 137 them walking together the 

fache2*9 200 rencontrer a la promenade ensemble 

other day, and I relatedl37 to them what had238 hnp pened to us, 
autre , raconter (o) 84 etait arriver (o) , 

after we had leftl59 them; they laughed (at it) (very much.) They 
apres que 137 quittees ; * rirel37 en beaucoup. * 
told 137 me they wishedl40 that they had been with us. I alsol84 
dire201 * souhaiter (nn) aussi 

showed 137 them the letter which you have written to me, desiring me 
montrer (i) p. 63. (o) p. 66. ecrite 159 (o) , pourprier 

notl90 to mention it to them, for fear218 your father (should come) to 

n.b. 168 parler en (o) , depeurque " 195 vint a 

know of it; but I requested them notl90 to mention it to him. Have 
savoir — le ; prierl37 n.b. de perler en (o) 

they mentioned it to you ? No, they have not70. They onlyl84 

* en (o) 191, * n.b. * seulement 

toldl3G me that they had met you, and that you had237 walked (a 
ont dit (bb) n.b. * avaient , etiez se promener 

little way) with them. They were (very well) pleased29 with you. I 
un peu * * tres — content n.b. 200 

was not less so54 with them. They have invited me to come and 
moins le d' * * inviter 169 venir (nn) 

spend an evening with them. I intendl25 to pay themlG2 a visit 
27J 234 avec * avoir dessein 168 rendre (i) p. 63. 

soon 183. Pray give my love to them, and tell theml62 so. I will70. 
bientot. n.b. faire * amities (o) t , (i) p. 63. le n.b. 

Is not your country 25honse finished yetl831 No, it is not, and I do 
de campagne 134 finirl58 n.b. 191 , * 70 , — 

not know when it will be. My father does not like it now. He says 

savoir quand 70 — aimer* (k) p. 64. 

that it is too near the road. He wants2(>0 to sell it, and 204 
(bb) n.b. * trop pres de route. avoir envie 168 * (k) p. 64. d'en70 

build another a little further in the country. I wonder he does 
batir 120 un peu loin41 213 230 " s'etonner 221 — 

not like it ; it seemsl25 a good house, and it is in a pleasant 
* ; * avoir apparence — t , * 213 agreable23 

situation. He is goingl55 to add a terrace to it, and make a moat 

— aller 172 ajouter terrasse , fosse 

round it. Have you been in the park % They90 are making a pond 
autour 54 pare 1 n.b. — faire 155 etang 

in the middle of it. (Here is) some fruit. Will you havel74any / ? 

milieu 64 247 — (p) 

I shall be obliged to you, if you will give me some. Take some. 

oblige (o) , 144 (p) Prendre (p) 



* Mind the gender of the noun which this pronoun represents. 

t Express this sentence thus : I pray you to give my love to them, and to tell them, $c. 

X Turn this sentence thus : It has a good appearance. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



219 



Take some more. (There246 is) plenty in the garden. We have 

(p) davantage. en70 - abondance 213 jardin. en 70 

(so much) that we do not 192 know what to do (with it.) Have you 

tant (bb) n.b. — n.e. que 172 faire 200 * en. 

been where I toldl36 you 1 No, I have not70. Why do not you go 1 
etre ou ai dit 191, n.b. Pourquoi— y70 133 

Are you not ready yet 183 1 Yes, I am. Is your sister ready? I 
133 pret * encore n.b. , 70 134 29 

(am afraid) she is not. Go and tell herl62 to (get ready) as fast as 
craindre 221 146 70 Aller(mi) dire(i) p. 63 168 s'appreter 43 vite 43 
she can. 142 Is this the book of which you were speaking to mel 

poura. Est-ce ici 74 155 (o) 

Yes, it is. Have you read it % Yes, I haveTO. Is it entertaining 1 Yes, 

70 lire n.b. amusant ! 

very. Read it. You know Mr. B ; do you not282 / ? Yes, I 
beaucoup connaitre Monsieur ; n'est-ce pas ? Oui, 

do70. He is a very clever young man, but I (am afraidl95) he is a 
n.b. 65 tres habile32 jeune , craindre 221 116 un 

little (too much) addicted to gaming. Has he ever asked you for 
peu trop adonne jeu. jamais t 

money'? Yes, he has. 70 Did 136 you lend himl62 any'? Yes, I 
argent I , n.b. Avez prete (i) p. 63. (p) , 

136did70. I am very sorry (for200 it,) for I do not think that he will 
ai n.b. fache en , car — (bb) n.b. 

ever return it to you. Do you think he will70'? Yes, I do70. He is 

rendrel45 (o) — 221 145n.b. . n.b. 65 

a very worLhy32 young man. I wish221 you would recommend him 
de beaucoup de merite 180 vouloir recommander 

to some of your friends who could serve him. I will70. I esteem him 

96 put servir n.b. estimer 

(very much) myself, and I beg you by all that is dear to you, not 190 
fort (wi)n.b. supplier par tout ce qui cher (o) , n.b. 

to mention to him what84 I have said to you, for I would never 



seel42 him, that I shall be much obliged to him, if he will do me the 
voir , (bb) n.b. bien oblige (o) , 144 faire 

favour that he has promised me. I will tell him 162 so54. I like them 
grace 74 promettreI59 (I) p. 63. le aimer 66 

who show themselves such as they are. (So do I.) Tell himl62 to 
rnontrer se tels que Et moi aussi. (i) p. 63. 16S 

call upon me as soon as he canl42. I will70. Now, I must wish you 

266 43 tot 43 pouvoir. n.b. A present, 181 souhaiter 

good morning. Come and see us again soon. You mayl78 be sure 
234 n.b. Venir — (nn) revoir X bientot. pouvoir sur 

that I will70. I will come as often as I can, whilst I am so near 
(bb) n.b. n.b. '43 43 142, pendant que 142 pres 

you. I hope you wil!70. 



de parler de (o) (o) p. 66. 

pardon you for it. I will70 not. 



(o) , car 190 
Onlyl84 tell himl62, when you 
Seulement (i) p. 63. 



pardonner t n.b. 



de 



221 



N.B. 



* With is implied in the pronoun en. 
t See note B, page 207. 

X Re prefixed to a verb, expresses the word again. 



220 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



SECT. II. 



RELATIVE OR DISTINCTIVE PRONOUN 

WHO, WHOM, WHOSE, THAT, WHICH, WHAT. 

QUI, QUE, DONT, QUOI. QUEL, LEQUEL. 

74. When who, whom, whose, that, which come after one or 
several substantives which they particularize, they are ex- 
pressed, 

1 



Qui ; 



5>Who, ) 
1 That, [ 
Which, ) 

OWhom, 
^■That, iQue; 
h, J 



I Which, 



The man who 
The horse that 
The chaise which 

The man whom 
The horse which 
The coach that 



see note o, page 06. 
£ Whose, } The man of V)hom 

Jg of Whom, } Dont ; The horse of which 
? of Which,) 



see. (5) 



V homme qui 

Le cheval qui 
La chaise qui 

V homme que 
Le cheval que 
Le carosse que 



^ vient. 



L 1 homme dont 
Le cheval dont 
La chaise dont 



\jeparle. 



j-I speak. 

The chaise of which) 

EXERCISE. 

I see a gentleman yonder who is waiting for me. Tt62 is from him 
voir monsieur* iabas 75 155 attendre 2U1 n.b. 221 

I have bought that horse which is lame. He has another which suits 
acheter (hb) boiteux. en70 un autre convenir 

me. I have one which, 1 think, will die. You know the gentleman 

en70 un , croire, mourir. t * (s) 

we have jusi244 met. It62 is from him I have bought the horse that 

venons de rencontrer. n.b. 221 
you have seen. He has another which I want to buy, to replace that 
voir. en70 120 260 acheter, 17G remplacer 88 

which I have lost. He is the gentleman whose horse has won the 
perdre. 65 * gagne le 

race. He is not the person of whom you complain. No, he is70 

prix de la course. 65 personne f. se plaindre. , 65 (r) 

not. He is a man of whom I have a good opinion. The horse of 

65 24 29 

which I was speaking to you is sold. 

— parlerl55 (0) vendre. 

75. Qui, que, dont, whatever be the order of the correspond- 
ing words in english, must be placed immediately after the 
noun to which they relate ; 

Is the gentleman come, who is242 to dine with us ^ 
Le monsieur qui doit242 diner avec nous, est-il venul 
i. e. the gentleman who is to dine with us, is Ael34 come 1 



(s) The distinctive words whom, that, which are often left out ; as, The man 1 saw, 
for the man whom I saw ; The wine we drank, for. the wine which we drank ; but 
the corresponding words qui, que, dont must never be omitted, and if they are the 
nominative, or the object of several verbs they must be repeated with each verb ; as r 
The man I saw, i. e. whom I saw. L' homme que je vis. 

The wine we drank, i. e. which we drank. Le vin que nous bumes. 
The woman I speak of, i. e. of whom I speak. La femrne dont je parle. 
* Monsieur, not Gentilhomme, which in the French language means Nobleman. 
t See page 127, and 139, the difference between Savoir and Connaitre. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 221 

N. B. Dont, besides being placed immediately after the noun 
to which it relates, must be followed by a substantive in the 
nominative ; as, 

He is a man whose probity is known. 

C'est un homme dont la probite est connue, or, dont on conna.it 
]a, &c. 

If whose is followed by a noun governed by a preposition, 
it can not be expressed by dont, it must be expressed by du- 
Quel de laQuelle, desQuels, desQuelles, agreeably to gender 
and number ; as, 

He is a man on whose probity one may rely ; i. e. on the probity of 
whom. 

C'est un homme sur la probite duquel on peut compter ; 
not, C'est un homme dont sur la probite, nor sur la probite dont. (t) 

EXERCISC 

A gentleman has been here who wanted260 to speak to you. Is the 
il es venu ici * vouloirl40 172 (o) 

man (come back) whom I had sent (for him) 1 Yes, he is. 70 Is 

134 revenir avais envoyer le querir 1 , n.b. Peut-on 

the money to be had (turn, can one90 have the money) which we are in 
92 avoir (kk) avons24 

need of? No, it is not. 70 (That is) the gentleman whose horse I 

besoin 203 191 , n.b. 247 

wanted260 to buy. He is a man whose probity I know, a man 
vouloirl40 172 actieter. 65 probite t , 

whose talents I admire, and whose friendship I value much. He is a 
, amitie priser fort. 65 

man to whose family I owe every thing, and in whose hands all my 

famille devoir 107 , main 
property is. They are people upon whose word one may depend, 
bien 65 gens 229 sur parole on peut compter. 



(t) When a relative pronoun comes after two nouns, and relates only to one of 
them, if the noun to which it relates is not the last in french, who, whom, that, which 
must be expressed by leQuel, laQuelle, lesQuels, lesQuelles ; of whom, of which, by 
duQuel, de laQuelle, desQuels, desQuelles ; to whom, to which, by au Quel, a laQuelle, 
auxQuels, auxQuelhs, agreeably to the gender and number of the noun, to avoid the 
ambiguity that might arise from qui, que, dont, which are generally understood to 
relate to the last noun ; as, 

This is that young man's sister of whom we were speaking. 
Voici la sceur decejeune homme de laquelle nous parlions. 

But this being done for the sole purpose of removing the ambiguity which would 
arise from qui, que, dont ; if a relative pronoun, commg after two nouns, was follow- 
ed by a verb, or by an adjective that would sufficiently denote to which noun it refers, 
it would be better to use qui, que, dont, than lequel, laquelle, <S,c. which are rather 
formal expressions ; the following sentence, for example, would not be ambiguous ; 
That young man's sister who is so handsome. 

La saeur de ce jeune homme qui est si belle ; qui being determined by belie. 
But, if these words can not be used without obscurity, the principal object of a lan- 
guage being to express our thoughts with precision, elegance must yield to perspi- 
cuity. 

* Turn this sentence thus. There has been here a gentleman who wanted, &c. 

19* 



222 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



76. After any preposition but of or a preposition synony- 
mous to it, whom is expressed by qui, for both genders and 
numbers ; 



Masc. Sing. Fern. 

Ze&uel, ZtfGtuelle, 
duQLue\ t de fo&uelle, 
aii&uel, d Z&Gluelle, 



Which 
From Which 
To, at Which 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun to which it 
relates ; as, 



Masc. Plur. Fern. 
Ztf&CLuels, ZesGtuelles ; 
desduels, ctesGLuelles; 
auxQiWtls. fl'urcGluelles : 



The man with whom 
The horse on which 
The chaise in which 
The man from whom 
The horse from which 
The chaise from ivhich 
The man to whom 
The horse to which 
The chaise to which 



f CD 
J CD 



L'homme avec qui 
Le cheval mr lequel 
La chaise dans laquelle 
L'homme de qui 
Le cheval duquel 
La chaise de laquelle 
L'homme a qui 
Le cheval auquel 
La chaise d laquelle 



il est. 

il 
vient. 



I" 



EXERCISE. 



You know the gentleman to whom I have spoken. ItG2 is he who 

parler. n.b. 52 

has brought the parcel in which your letter was. (This is) the car- 

apporter paquet 140 247 voi- 

riage in which he came. 136 Are these the horses to which he is so 
ture est venu. Sont-ce ici si 

much attached? They are not fit29 for the use which they are 

fort attache ? pi-opre 200 usage les' 92 

intended for. 203 Let us walk along the road in which we 

destine a. Se promener * le long de route (v) se 



(u) After a preposition, which, relating to the word Thing, is expressed by quoi ; as, 
It is a thing of which I did not think. C'est une chose a quoi je ne pensais pas. 
I see nothing to which he can apply. Je ne voisrien a quoi il puisse s'appliquer. 

(v) With a verb denoting dwelling or movement, even in a figurative sense, which? 
after a preposition, is generally expressed by on ; as, 

The city in which I live. La ville dans laquelle, or oil je derneure. 

The happiness to which I aspire. Le bonheur auquel, or oil j'aspire. 
But we could not say, Le bonheur oil je pense, The happiness on which I think ; 
because penser does not denote movement; we must say, Le bonheur auquel }e 
pense. 

In the same sense, from which is expressed by d'oii, and through which, by par ou ; as T 
The country from which I come. Le pays duquel or d'ouje viens. 

The town through whichl have passed. La ville par laquelle, or par oil j'ai passe. 

(x) The distinctive word which coming after an Indefinite expression, or after a 
Noun without an article in french, can not be rendered by any of the relative words 
which correspond with it in english ; so these sentences, 

I have obtained leave, which was the onlv thing that I asked I 

The earth is ravaged through ambition which is the scourge of mankind, 
can not be translated 

J'ai obtenu permission qui or laquelle e^aitle seule chose que je demandais ; 

On ravage la terre par ambition qui or laquelle est le fieau du genre humain : 
say, J'ai obtenu permission, e'etait la seule chose que je demandais. 

On ravage la terre par ambition, et I 1 ambition est le fieau du genre humain. 
* See se Biamer, page 100. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 223 

walkedl37 yesterday. What is the name of the place in which we 

promener * hier. 82 endroit (v) 

are 1 I like to know the name of the places through which I go. 

aimer 169 t (v) passer. 

Have237 you inquired for the town from which he comes'/? I could 
Vous etes-vous int'orme de (v ) vinir ? aii36 pu 

not hear any thing on which I can rely. 
99 apprendre 99 (u) 145 compter. 

77. • Who, whom used absolutely, i. e. without reference to a 
noun mentioned before, imply the word person understood, 
and are expressed by qui ; as, 

Who has done that % 
i. e. what 'person has done that 1 Qui a fait ccla 1 

I know whom you mean ; 
i. e. what person you mean. Je sais qui vous voulez dire, 

EXERCISE. 

Whom didl86you meet 1 Whom were you with % Whom did!36 

avez trouve? 140 138 203 avez 

you give it55 to 1 I do not know whom you mean. 125 I do not 
donne 203 — savoir vouloir dire. — 

know whom you are speaking of. 

— 155 203 

78. Whose used absolutely, implies also the word person 
understood. If it can be changed into of whom, it is ex- 
pressed by de qui ; as, 

Whose daughter is she % 
i. e. of whom is she the daughter? De qui est-elle fille 1 

I know whose relation she is. 
i. e. of whom, or of lohat person. Je sais de qui elle estparente. 

If whose can be changed into to whom, it is expressed by a 
qui; as, 

Whose house is that 1 
i. e. to whom does that house belong? A qui est cette maison % 
I do not know whose it is. Je ne sais pas a qui elle est. 

EXERCISE. 

Whose son are you 1 Whose daughter is she 1 Whose relations 
138 parent 
are they % Whose house is that, or whom does that house belong to 1 

cette, i — (bb) est 203 

Whose properly is it, or whom does it belong to 1 Whose children 

— 62, X — est 203 

are these, or whom do these children belong to ? Do you not know 

ces, % (bb) — 138 

whose they are 1 They are my sister's. 



* See se Blamer, page 100. 

t See p. 127 and 139, the distinction between Savoir and Connaitre. 

t These two modes of expression are generally rendered in the same manner in 
french. 

See note (g) p. 72. 



224 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 

WHICH INTERROGATIVE. 

In an interrogative sentence, which requires three distinc- 
tions. 

Which interrogative is either joined to the noun like an 
adjective, i. e. without the help of a preposition ; as, 
Which man 1 Which carriage 3 Which horses % 

Or like a substantive, it is joined to it by the preposition of; 
as, 

Which of the men 1 Which of the carriages 1 Which of my horses ? 
Or like a pronoun, it is used absolutely after the noun ; as, 

It is one of these men ; Which is it ? 

I came in one of these carriages In which did you come 1 

79. Which interrogative joined like an adjective, i. e. with- 
out a preposition, to the noun to which it relates, is 

Masc. Sing. Fern. Masc. Plur. Fern. 

Which ; duel, duelle, duels, duelles ; 

Of from Which ; deduel, deduelle, deduels, deduelles ; 

To, at Which ; a duel, a duelle, a duels, a duelles ; 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as, 
Which man ) Quel homme ) 

Which carriage > do you prefer? Quelle voiture >preferez-vous? 
Which horses ) Quels chevaux ) 

EXERCISE. 

Which horse will you ride ? Which road shall we go by208 1 
173* 133 monter ? route 133allerpar ? 

Which inn shall we (put up) at % Which is the best inn in this 
auberge 133 descendre 203 meilleur (bb) 

town ? Which room will you sit in 1 Which paper would you 
ville 1 chambre 173 rester 203 papier 

like to read % 
169 lire ? 

80. Which interrogative joined by a preposition to the 
noun to which it relates, or coining after it absolutely, i. e. 
without a noun, is, 

Masc. Sing. Fern. Masc. Plur. Fern. 

Which ; Zeduel, taduelle, Zesduels, Zesduelles ; 

Of ] from Which ; duduel, delaQiuette, desduels, desduelles ; 

To, at Which; ^duel, a Zaduelle, awzduels, <2^.-rduelles j 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as, 

Which of these men ) Lequel de ces hommes i Dr £f£ rez _ 

Which of the coaches > ° Z 0U i Laquelle des voitures t > vous 7 " 
Which of my horses ) P e er * Lesquels de mes chevaux ) 

* See note * page 130. 

t The pronoun may be either singular or plural, agreeably to the number that is 
meant ; for ex. Which of these horses will you ride ? maybe translated 
Lequel or lesquels de ces chevaux voulez-vous monter? 
lequel meaning one horse j lesquels meaning that the person is to ride more than one. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 225 

Which is the tallest ? Lequel est le pins haut ? 

Which is the finest ? Laquelle est la plus belle 1 

Which are the best 1 Lesquels sont les meilleurs 1 

EXERCISE. 

Which of these horses will you ride 1 Which is the easiest % 
* 173 monter ? aise44 ? 

Which of these two roads shall we go byZOSI Which is the 

138 par ? 

shortest44 % Which of these rooms will yon sit in % Which has 

courl29 ? 173 rester 203 

the finest view 1 
belle44 vue ? 

81. Which sometimes implies the demonstrative pronoun 

that or those understood ; as, 

Which of ihe^e horses shall I ride 1 t 
You may ride vihich you will, i. e. that ivhich you will. 

This demonstrative word can not be omitted in french, and 

which as including the two words, is expressed by 

Celui que, m. > ^ m h Ceux que, m. ) h whi ch. 
Cme que, f. ) ' CWtes qne, f. $ 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun to which it 

relates ; as, 

Which of these horses shall I ride ? Lequel de ces chevaux monterai-je T 
Ride which, i. e. that which you will. Montez cclui que vous voudrez. 
In which carriage will you go ? Dans quelle voiture voulez-vous aller? 

I will go in which you please. J'irai dans celle qu y il vous plaira. 

EXERCISE. 

Which horse shall T ride 1 You may ride which (i. e. that which) 
133 monter? pouvez 

you please. 14*2 Which of these roads shall we go by 1 Go by 
il vous plaira. 133 aller 203 

which you like. 142 In which room shall I put your luggage % Put 

vouloir. 133 mettre bagage % Mettre 

it56 in that which I told 136 you. Put it in which you will. 142 
62 88 ai dit 55 62 vouloir. 

RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
What requires the same distinctions which. 

82. What, followed by a noun, or relating to a noun men- 
tioned before, is expressed, 

Masc. Sing. Fern. Maze. Plur. Fern. 
What ; duel, Quelle, Quels, Quelles ; 

Of, from What; deQuel, flteQuelle, deQuete, de&uelles ; 

To ) at What ; a duel, a Quelle, a Quels, a Quelles ; 

agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as, 
What man ) Quel horn me ) 

What carriage > will you have ? Quelle voiture > vculez-vous % 
What horses ) Quels chevaux ) 

What are your reasons 1 Quelles sont vos raisons 1 



* See note t page 224. 



226 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN'. 



EXERCISE. 

What place do you come from % Which road didl36 you come 

endroit — 133 venir 203 etes238 venu 

by 1 What inn will you go to206 1 Have you heard the report 1 
203 aller entendu bruit qui court T 

No, what is it 7 

62 v ; 

83. What used absolutely, i. e. without reference to a noun 
mentioned, implies the word thing understood, and is ex- 
pressed by que or by quoi. 

What is expressed by que, when it is the object of a verb ; 

as, 

What are you doing there 7 Que faites-vous la 1 

I do not know what to say to her. Je ne sais que lui dire 1 (y) 

What is expressed by quoi, when it is governed by a. prep- 
osition, or used as an interjection ; ex. 

What do you meddle with ? De quoi vous melez-vous 1 

What! you have not done yet ! Quoi I vous n'avez pas encore fini. 

EXERCISE. 

What do you think of this country 1 What do you intend 125 

— 133 penser 230 — 133 avoir dessein 

to (do with yourself) 1 What do you mean 125 1 What do you 
de de venir — — 133 vouloir dire ? — 133 

want260 to do with that 1 What is that to you 1 What ! he is not 
vouloir 172 faire 200 89 (y) fait 89 (o) 54 ! 

come yet. 163 What ! you do not answer me. Listen to me. 
venue encore. n.b. — repondre 54 Ecouter (o) 56 

Well ! what 1 What are these people taking about ? What do you 
Eh bien ! — (bb) gensl34 parlerl55 de203 — 

meddle with 1 

se meler de203 

84. What sometimes implies the demonstrative pronoun 
that, and the distinctive which ; it is then expressed, 

Nom. What, ce qui ; 

Always dc what is right ; i. e. that which is right. 

Faites toujours ce qui est juste. 
Object. What, ce que ; 

What I say is true ; i. e. that which I say is true. 

Ce que je dis est vrai. (z) 



(y) What, in this sense, used interrogatively, is generally expressed in conversa- 
tion by qu'est-ce que, an idiomatical expression ; as, 

What do you say 1 Que dites-vous, or qu'est-ce que vous dites 1 

What are you doing ? Que faites-vous,- or qu'est-ce que vous faites T 

And with the verb be, it is always expressed, by que'est-ce que ; as, 

What is it ? Qu'est-ce que e'est ? 

What is that to you ? Qu'est-ce que cela vous fait ! 

(z) Though the words ce qui, ce que, being compounded of the pronoun substantive- 
ce, and of the distinctive qui, que, should have two verbs either to govern or to bs 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



227 



But with the prepositions of, to, or any preposition that is 
synonymous to them, it is necessary to consider whether the 
preposition comes before or after what ; for, 

Of what is de ce qui, de ce que ; 

I speak of what is true ; i. e. of that which, &c. 
Je parle de ce qui est vrai. 

What of is ce dont ; as, 

What he speaks of is not true ; i. e. that of which. 

Ce dont il parle n'est pas vrai. 
To to hat is d ce qui, a ce que ; 

Apply to what is useful ; i. e. to that which is, &c. 

Appliquez-vous a ce qui est utile. 
What to is ce a quoi; as, 

What you apply to is not useful ; i. e. that to which. 

Ce a quoi vous vous appliquez n'est pas utile. 

EYERCISE. 

Do you know what (that which) makes her angry % Do you hear 
— 133 facher — — entendre 

what she says 1 I know what she wants. 260 You speak of 

vouloir. parler 

what will never happen. "What you are speaking of will never 

196 arnver. 155 203 

happen. Are you sure of what you say 1 It is what you may 178 

sur (o) p. 66. dire ? 65 pouvez 

be sure of. Will you trust to what he proposes 1 What you trust 

203 se fier proposer 1 

to is very uncertain. 
203 tres incertain. 



Recapitulatory exercise on the foregoing rules.* 

What ! is it62 you 1 Where have you been sincel96 I saw 186 you ^ 
! n.b. Oii depuis que ai vu ? 55 

What country did you come from 1 What ship did 136 you come 
pays230 — 133 venir 203 navire etes238 venu 

in'? What news do you bring'? What do they90 say in town 7 ? 
203 nouvelles — 133 apporter 1 — 133n.b. a ville ? 

Read the papers, and you will see. Which paper must I read % 
Lire papi,er, voir. 181 133 

Which of these papers do you advise me to read 7 ? Which has the 
— 133 conseiller54 168 

latest44 news 1 (There is) very little difference ; read which you 
fraiche32 246 tres peu 

canl42 get. Now, what do you think of the news 1 I do not 
pourez trouver. Maintenant, — 133 penser — 



governed ; yet, when these words come 
verb, or by a noun in the plural number, 
What vexes me is, that he 
Ce qui me fache, c'estqu'il 
What I detest most, are idle people. 
* See * page 182. 



before the verb etre followed by another 
another ce must be put before etre ; as, 
will not study, 
ne veut pas etudier. 

Ce que je deteste le plus, ce sont les oisifs. 



228 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



believe a word of what that paper says. (There is) not a word of 

croire mot (bb) 246 

truth in what I have read. What shall we do now 1 Let us go 
vrai * 186 — — aller 

to the place in which we are to meet your cousin. What have you 

endroit (v) 242 172 rencontrer 133 

done with your stick 1 I do not know what I have done (with it). I 

faire 2C0 baton ? — savoir en55 

(am afraid) I have left it at the inn at which we have237 stopped 

craindre (nn) laisser 55 a auberge (v) nous nous sommes arretes. 

to dinner. If your father asks you what you have done (with it), 
diner. 54 en55 , 

what will you answer202 him 1 Indeed, I shall notl92 know what to 

138 repondre lui54 Mu foi, n.b. 173 

say. What would you advise me to say ^ I will tell you sincerelv 
dire. 133 conseiller 54 168 * dire 54 sincerement 

what I would say. Well ! what ^ What would you say 1 I would 
Ehbien! 133 

tell himl62 the truth. It62 is what I was thinking of. What is your 

(i) p. 63. verite. n.b. 155 a.206 

reason for leaving this country 1 Because I see nothing here to which 
raison de quitter (bb) 230t Parceque 99 ~ ici (u) 

I can 145 apply. I want to go abroad. What country would you 

puisse s'appiiquer. 260 dans les pays etrangers. 260 

like to goto? To France or Italy? Which country would you 
aimer 169 203 Italie ? 260 133 

advise me54 to go to 1 Which of those countries is the most pleasant 1 
conseiller 168 203 plus agreable ? 

You have seen them both ; which do you like best ? If you will 
voir 122 ; — 133 aimer le mieux ? 144 

come with me, I will go to which you like. 142 I will consider (of it.) 

58 , vouloir. penser y54 

(That is) the gentleman whose75 house we have just244 passed by .203 
247 monsieur n.b. venons de passer pres de 

It is the house in which we livedl40 formerly. Is it65 the house which 
65 (v) demeurer autrefois. 133 

your father wanted260 to buy, and for which he offered 136 (so much) 

vouloirl40 172 acheter, a offert tant 

money 1 Yes, it is. Dou you know that young lady 1 Yes, I do.70 
argent? Oui, 70 — 133 t (bb) , n.b. 

Who is she % Whose daughter is she % She is married.29 Whose 

marie, n.b. 

wife is she ^ Whom is she married to % She is the wife of that 

femme 158 203 65 (bb) 

gentleman whom we were speaking of. I know whose daughter she 

155 203 t 

is. I know whose relations they are. Whose handkerchief is this 
t parent mouchoir 



* When the French speak of an action which they are on the point of doing, they 
do not use the future as the English do ; they express Shall, Will by the present 
tense of the verb Aller, to go ; je vais, tu vas, il va, nous allons, &c. with the follow- 
ing verb in the infinitive ; so turn this sentence thus, What are we goinglZft to do 
now ? 

t Turn ; What reason have you to leave this country 1 

X See page 127, 139, the difference between Savoir and Connaitre. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



229 



which I have found on the staircase ? I do not know whose it is. 

trouver sur escalier ? — * 62 

I do not know whom it belongs to. What shall I do (with it) ? 

— * appartenir 203 faire en 54 

Take it56 back to the place in which you fonndl36 it. Which 

Rernettre 62 — endroit (v) aveztrouve55 

door must I go through 1 Which of these doors must I go through ? 
porte 181 133 passer par 203 181 133 203 

Go through which you likel42. Have you heard what I saidl36 
Passer voudrez. entendre ai dit 

to you? No, what is it ? The man you trust to deceives you. The 
(o) 55 191 , (y) se fier t 203 tromper 54 

company he keeps, is not honest. You do not know all the harm he 
compagnie frequenter, honnete. — * mal 

does you. I do notl92 know what to do. I wish221 you would tell 
faire 54 — n.b. * 172 faire. 180 vouloir 

me what I must do. You do not know what a disagreeable situation 
54 181 — * 20 desagreable 

I am in. What must I do? Do what I told you. I do not see what 
203 181 133 Faire 136 55 — 

you can do better. If you had believed me, what you complain of 
(kk) de mieux. aviez 55 , se plaindre t 203 

would not have happened. 1 am sorry for what has happened to you. 
etre238 arriver. fache 200 238 (o) 

When was Rome built? what were the achievements of king Romu- 

quand batir exploit 

lus? how long did he reign ? what is the history of Tarquinius 
cornbien de temps regner histoire Tarquin le 

Superbus? when, and (for what) was he expelled from Rome? 
Superbe quand pourquoi chasser 

what efforts did he make (in order to) be restored? what was the 
efforts faire pour retablir 

number of the Roman kings, and how long did- the regal authority 
nombre de Rome cornbien de temps royal autorite 

subsist? what kind of government succeeded at Rome? who were 

subsister sorte gouvernement succeder 

the first consuls ? how did Brutus show his zeal for liberty? when 
premier comment montrer zele liberte 

were the decemvirs created? why were they deposed ? what kind 
decemvir creer pourquoi deposer 

of government followed? when were the military tribunes created 
suivre militaire tribun creer 

with consular authority at Rome? who were the first plebeian 
consulaire plebeien 
consuls? how was the first triumvirate formed? what provinces 

triumvirat forme 

were assigned to the triumvirs ? what were the conquests of Julius 

assigner conquete ' Jules 

Caesar in Great Britain ? what (account have we) of Caesar after the 
Cesar dans la Bretagne rapporte-t-on apres 

civil wars ? when and by whom was he slain? How long, 

tuer Jusqu'a quand 

Catiline, wilt thou abuse our patience ? How long shall thy frantic 
Catiline abuser de frenetique 



* See pp. 127, 139, difference between Savoir &Connaitre. t See reflective verbs, p.100. 

20 



230 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



rage baffle the efforts of justice ? (To what height) meanest thou 

se jouer des jusqu'ou avoir dessein 

to carry thy insolence'? Seest thou not that the senators are apprised 
de porter voir que senateur informer 

of thy conspiracy? Wast thou not last night in the house of Lucca, 

conspiration hier au soir 

with many other associates in guilt and madness? Darest thou 

plusieurs complices de ton crime folie oser 

deny this ? Why art thou silent? Oh, immortal gods ! what coun- 
nier le garderle silence immortel pays 

try do we inhabit ? what city do we belong to ? what government 

habiter ville appartenir 

do we live under? Hast thou not rendered thyself infamous by 

vivre etre rendre te infame 

every vice that can brand a private life? What guilt has not 

tout pouvoir deshonorer prive crime — 

stained thy hands? What pollution has not defiled thy whole 

souiller infamie souiller 

body ? &c— Cicero against Catiline. (How many) years from 

corps combien annees 

the creation to the deluge ? in how many days did God 

creation combien 

create the world ? who were the first man and woman ? who 
creer monde premier 

were their sons ? what was their occupation ? when did Enoch 

occupation 

flourish? what became of him? who was his son ? (how long) 
fleurir que devint-il . qui combien de temps 

did he live? what was the usual length of life at that time ? by 

vivre ordinaire longueur epoque 

whom was the tower of Babel founded? on what design, and 

tour batir a dessein 

when? why was the building (laid aside)? when was Abraham 

quand batisse abandonne 

called by God? what is the history of his life ? (How many) years 

appeler de combien 

from the vocation of Abraham to the departure of the Israelites from 

depart Israelites 
Egypt? whose son was Isaac ? when was he born? who was his 

Egypte de qui naitre 

wife? who were his sons ? when did Jacob live ? (how many) sons 

femme vivre combien 

had he? what is the history of Joseph? when and upon whose 

histoire quand a 

invitation did Jacob and his family (go down) to Egypt ? when was 

l'invitation de qui famille aller en 

Moses born ? how was he educated ? by whose assistance, and 
Mo'ise , eleve par le secours de qui 

when did he bring the Israelites out of Egypt? what miracles 
quand emmener hors 1' 

attended the Israelites at their departure from Egypt and through the 

accompagner sortie 1' dans 

deserts? who was their high priest? when was the law given to 

deserts grand-pretre loi donnee 

Moses? who was Moses' successor? What is the history of 
le successeur 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



231 



Joshua, and what are his wars! when did he and the Israelites come 
Josue guerre entrer 

to the possession of Canaan 1 when came Saul to the throne 1 by 
en monter sur trone 

what means, and when, did David obtain the kingdom'? how long 

moyen David obtenir royaume combien de temps 

did he reign ? who were his sons ? How long reigned Solomon 1 

regner ? Salomon: 
When did he dedicate the temple ? what was his character 7 What 
dedier caractere ? Que 

(is recorded) of Judith '] What was the fate of Josiah T How long 
rapporte-t-on sorte Josias ? 

did he reign 1 When and by whom was Jerusalem burned 1 What 

bruler ? 

is said of Daniel 1 What is the history of his life % How long did 
dire 

he live 1 When was Jesus born 1 What was his mission 1 By 

vivre ? naitrel 
whom and when was he crucified 1 

qui crucifier 1 

SECT. III. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 



Mine ; 
Of, from Mine ; du Mien 



To, at 



Mcne . 
Thine 
His ; 
Hers ; 
Ours ; 
Yours ; 



Maze. Sing. Fern, 
le Mien, la Mienne, 
de la Mienne, 
a la Mienne, 
la Tienne, 



au Mien 
Tien 



Masc. Plur. Fern, 
les Miens, les Miennes. 
des Miens, des Miennes. 
auxMiens, auxMiennes. 
les Tiens, les Tiennes. 



le Sien, 



les Siens, 



le Notre, 
le Votre, 



Theirs ; le Leur, 



les Notres, 
les Votres, 
les Leurs, 



les Siennes. 

les Notres. 
les Votres. 
les Leurs. 

le sien^ &c. 



la Sienne, 

la Notre, 
la Votre, 
la Leur, 

85. The possessive pronouns le ?nien, le tien, 
must be of the same gender and number as the noun which 
they represent ; ex. 

Your hat is better than hers, i. e. her hat. 
Votre chapeau est meilleur que le sien. 
My watch is not so fine as his, i. e. his watch. 
Ma montre n'est pas si belie que la sienne. 

exercise. 

Are our horses ready 7 Yours and mine are,70 but hers is70 not. 

134 pret29 ? 72, 72 

Get hers ready as soon as you can. 142 Have they90 cleaned our 
Appreter * 43 tot 43 pourez. 133n.e. decrotte 

boots % Yours are cleaned,29 but his and mine are70 not. He does 
botte 1 decrotte,N.B. 72 — 

not want260 his now. Clean mine. I want mine directly, 
avoir besoin de tout a l'heure. 



* Ready is expressed in the word Appreter. 



232 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



86. The possessive words mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, 
theirs do not always represent a noun mentioned before them ; 
they are often used instead of the personal pronouns me, thee, 
him, her, us, you, them, with the verb be, meaning to belong ; 
as for example, This book is mine, i.e. belongs to me ; in this 
sense mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs are expressed by 
a moi, a toi, d lui, d elle, d nous, d vous, d eux, m. d elles, f. ; as, 

This book is mine. Ce livre est a moi ; i. e. belongs to me. 
is thine. 
is his. 
is hers. 
is ours. 
is yours. 

is theirs. est d eux, m. a elles, f. to them, (aa) 



est a toi ; 

est a lui ; 

est d elle ; 

est a nous ; 

est a vous ; 

est a eux, m. a elles, f. 



to thee, 
to him. 
to her. 
to us. 
to you. 
to them. 



EXERCISE. 

No, sir ; it is not mine. 

191, ; 62 

Are these horses yours or his? 
13 134 ou 



I think221 

pen^er 



it is 



They 
62 



Is not this fan 134 yours 7 
eventail 

my sister's. Yes, it is hers 

* , 62 

are not ours ; they are my cousin's. 

; 62 cousin.* 

87. The possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, hers, ours, 
yours, theirs, by an idiom peculiar to the english language, 
are sometimes joined to the noun to which they relate by the 
preposition of; as, A friend of mine ; A book of yours ; this 
possessive pronoun can not be expressed by the possessive 
pronoun in trench : it must be expressed by the possessive 
article mes, tes, ses, nos, vos, leurs placed before the noun, 
which must always be plural in french ; as, 



A friend of mine. 


Un de mes amis ; 


i. e. one of my ^ 




of thine. 


Un de tes amis ; 


one of thy , 




of his. 


Un de ses amis ; 


one of his f 




of hers. 


Un de ses amis ; 


one of her > 


E3 


of ours. 


Un de nos amis ; 


one of our \ 




of yours. 


Un de vos amis ; 
Un de leurs amis ; 


one of your 




of theirs. 


one of their ^ 





Never say ; 

Un ami de mes, nor Un ami des miens ; Un ami de tes ; Un ami de ses, &c. 
EXERCISE. 

I (have just244) met an acquaintance of v mine who to1dl36 me 
venir de reneontrer connaissance a dit 55 

that a friend of ours is dead. Is not Mrs. A. a relation of 
(bb) n.b. mourir. Madame 134 parente 

yours ? A son of hers is dead. A cousin of mine has married261 a 

epouser n.b. 



(aa) Yet when a question is asked with est-ce ; as, Est-ce la votre livre ? Is that 
your book ? we may answer, Oui, e'est le mien, or II est a moi ; Yes, it is mine. Est- 
ce la sa maison ? Is that his house ? No, it is not his, it is his sister's ; Non, ce n'est 
pas la sienne, e'est celle de sa sceur, or Elle n'est pas d lui, elle est d sa sceur. 

* See note (q) page 72. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 233 

daughter of hers, but she is no relation of mine. They are neighbours 

190 voisin 
of ours. I am going to dine with an aunt of theirs. 
155 aller 172 tante 

Recapitulatory Exercise on the foregoing Rules* 

Your mother and mine are gonel58 to (take263 a walk) in our fields; 

aller 172 n.b. 213 champ ; 

Let us go and (take a263 walk) in yours. Is not that house yours 1 

— — (nn) n.b. (bb) 134 

No, it is not ours ; it is my uncle's. I should have taken il55 for 

191, 62 ; 62 oncle. t prise 62 pour 

yours. Ours is not so fine as his, and his is better situated than 

42 42 , (e) p. 56. situe 158 

ours. Let us go (this way) ; I want to call at a friend's of mine. 

— — par ici ; 260 266 208 une amie 

I think she is a friend of yours too. Who ? Mrs. A. She is an 

221 65 aussi. Madame 65 

old acquaintance of ours, but she is no friend of mine. I do not 
anciennet connaissance , 190 — 

like her. She is incessantlyl84 talking of herself, or of some relation 
aimer 54 — sans cesse 155 elle-meme, 95 parent 

of hers. Let us walk into this room. What a pretty work26 bag 
— — entrer 213 (bb) 82 20 joli ouvrage sac25 

you have got there. Is it yours 7 No, it is not mine ; it is my 

170 la. 62 191, 62 ; 62 

sister's. This88 is mine. Hers is (very much) like202 yours. Hers 
t n.b. — fort 184 ressembler au 

is not so pretty as mine. How longl88 have you had yours 1 
42 42 Combien y a-t-il que vous avez t) 

I gotl36 mine about the same time that my sister got hers. Yours 
ai eu vers terns 136 

looks253 better than hers. ' Yes, because I take more care of my 
avoir apparence 33 que , prendre soin 

clothes than she does of hers. (What is the matter with) your 
habit 47 faire Qu' est-ce qu' a 281 — 

neighbour ^ A sister of his is dead. She wentlST (a few days ago) to 
voisin ? mort.158 aller il y a quelques jours 172 

see a child of hers who is at a relation of ours in the country, 

208 230 

and she diedl36 there. You have got a handkerchief of mine. A 

est mortl58 y 55 270 mouchoir 

handkerchief of yours! I have no handkerchief of yours. I have 

190 n'en70 

none but what arel45 mine. What ! is thisl34 yours ? Yes, it is mine. 

pas 199 soient 83 ! 89n.b. , 62 

You are greatly mistaken : It is not yours ; it is my mother's. 
— fort 184 se tromper : 62 62 t 



* See note * page 182. t See note (q) page 72. 

t Put this adjective before the noun. 

Q Has been HI. The English often use this past tense to express an action or a 
state of being which is still lasting ; as, 1 have been ill these six months ; the French 
cannot use it in this sense ; so, Has been i/imust be expressed by Est malade, if the 
person is ill still ; by A ete malade, if she has ceased to be so. 

20* 



234 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



SECT. IV. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 

Maze. Sing. Fern. Masc. Plur. Fern. 

■ r&.} Celui > Celle - Kvl Geni i Celles - 

88. The demonstrative pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles must 
be of the same gender and number as the noun which they 
represent ; ex. 

Bring my hat and that of my sister; i. e. the hat of &c. 
Apportez mon chapeau et celui de ma scenr. 
He has lost his watch and that of his brother ; i. e. the watch of &c, 
II a perdu sa montre et celle de son frere. 

Have you seen these (bb) gloves and those which I had on yesterday ? 
Avez-vous vu ces gants et ceux que j'avais hier ? 

N. B. The demonstrative words this, these, that, those imply 
a local distinction which celui, celle, ceux, celles do not express ; 
therefore, when a distinction is to be made between two ob- 
jects, the adverbial particle ci, here, to denote the nearest ob- 
ject, and Id, there, to denote the remotest, must be added to 
these pronouns ; as, 

This hat is better than that. 

Ce chapeau-ci est meilleur que celui-la ; i. e. this hat here — that 
there. 

That watch is not so fine as this. 

Cette montre-Za n'est pas si belle que celle-ci ; i. e. as this here. 

But the particles ci, la, being added merely to discriminate 
the objects, if the demonstrative pronoun is followed by a rela- 
tive pronoun, or by a noun in the possessive state, which 



(bb) It is not unnecessary perhaps to recall here the attention of the learner, that 
the words This, that, these, those, nave already been seen in the chapter of articles,, 
and he must take care not to confound them. 

If this, that, these, those, are followed by a noun, they have the property of a demon- 
strative article, and are expressed by ce, cette, ces, as has been seen, rule 1. 

Ce vin, cette gloire, ces plaisirs. This wine, that glory, those pleasures. 

If this, that, these, those do not point out a noun after them, but represent one men- 
tioned before, they are pronouns, and are expressed by celui, celle, ceux, celles, agree- 
ably to the gender and number of the noun which they represent ; as y [brother 

II a perdu sa rnontre et celle de son frere. He has lost his watch and that of his 

Hthis, that do not point out a noun after them, nor represent one mentioned be- 
fore, they may be considered as substantives implying the word thing, and are ex- 
pressed, this, by ceci ; that, by cela ; as, 

Ceci est bon, mais cela est meilleur. i. e. This thing is good, but that thing is better. 
N. B. That, joining two sentences, is a conjunction, and is always expressed by 
que; as, 

I know that he is come. Je sais qu'il est venu. 

This conjunction is often understood in English, but it must always be expressed 
in French: Do you think he is come ? Pensez-vous jw'il soit venu? [see conj'ns. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 235 

makes the distinction sufficiently clear, these particles would 
be useless, and they must be left out ; as, 

This hat is better than that of your brother. 

Ce chapeau-et est meilleur qui cellui de votre frere. 

This watch is not so fine as that which you have lost. 

Cette montre-ci n'est pas si belle que celle que vous avez perdue. 

EXERCISE. 

This steeple is not so high as that of St. Paul. This church is 
(bb) clocher 42 haut 42 (bb) eglise 

larger than that which we have just244 passed by203. These trees 
grande41 76 venons de , passer pres de (bb) arbre 

are finerl4 than those which are in your park. Thisl3 steeple is not 

beau _ 74 pare. n.b. 

so high as that. Thatl3 church is much larger than this. Thesel3 
42 n.b. beaucoup 41 n.b. 

trees are finer than those. This gown is prettier41 than that of your 

41 (bb) robe joli29 

sister. This is not so fine as that which I showed you. 

42 belle 42 ai montree.55 

89. If this, that are not followed by a noun, nor relate to a 
noun mentioned before, they imply the word thing understood, 
and are expressed, 

This, by Ceci ; That, by Cela; as, 

This is good ; i. e. this thing is good. ceci est bon. 

That is better ; i. e. that thing is better. cela est meilleur. 

EXERCISE. 

Give me this. What will you do with that 1 Take this. Let that 
173 fairede Prendre Laisser 

alone. I will take this. 



Recapitulatory Exercise on the foregoing rules. \ 
Do you hear that man 1 He is scoldingl55 that woman who has 

— 136 entendre J — gronder 

been beating those children. Look at that house. Is not that a 

155 battu Regarder 201 N'est-ce pas la 

good house % Yes, it is a good house, but this is a better29 one. Nay ! 

29 ,65 , (e) p. 56 § Oh non ! 

I think that is better. Those rooms seem to me to be larger41 

penser 221 (e) p. 56 paraitre (o) 54 — — grand29 

than these; besides, that is much better situated than this. I do not 

; outre cela, (E) p. 56 situe 158 — 

see that. I think this is as pleasantly situated as that. Do you 

voir 221 43 agreablement 158 43 — 133 



* See note* page 228. t See note * page 182. 

t Read note (bb), p. 234, before you write this exercise. 

Q tf you express This by the pronoun, you must leave out a and one ; but you may 
express This is by Voicj, rule 247 ; then you express a by une, and one by en, before 
Voici ; thus, En void une fyc. 



236 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



admire those flowers 1 What flowers 1 Those that74 we see in thai 
admirer fleur? 82 (o) p. 66 

garden before that house. How do you call this 1 This is a poppy, 
devant Comment — 133 appeler pavot, 

and that is a marigold. I do not like that kind of flowers; I like 

souci. — aimer sorte ; 

those that74 have a pleasant smell. What do you think of these 1 

(o) p. 66. agreable 32 odeur. 83 — " penser 

Oh, I like these better than those. These smell sweet. The action 
Oh, (e) p. 56. ont une douce odeur. action 

of Virginius sacrificing his daughter, is as strong and more pure than 

Virginius sacrifier ■ , 43 fort 29 pure 29 

that of Brutus condemning his son ; nevertheless this is glorious29 
Brutus condamner ; neanmoins glorieux (g) 

and that is not. Virginius secured only the honour of his family ; 

70 sauvait seulement 'honneur famille ; 

Brutus saved that of the laws and of the country. (There was) much 

sauvait loi patrie." II y avait 

pride in the action of Brutus, perhaps there was nothing but pride ; 
orgueil , peut-etre n'y246 avait-il — que 

there was in that of Virginius only honesty and courage; but this 

'honnetete ; 

didl37 (every thing) for his family, and didl37 every thing, or 
faire 107 " pour , faire 107 , ou 

seemedl37 to do every thing for Rome, and Rome, which considered 136 
sembler 172 faire , a considere 

the action of Virginius as that of an honest man and of a good father, 
comme honnete , 

consecrated the action of Brutus as that of an hero ; is not that just 1 
a 136 consacre comme heros ; 134 juste 1 



SECT. V. 
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.* 

90. One, we ~] used in an indefinite sense, i. e. not relat- 
they, people. )> ing to any particular person, are express- 
J ed by on. 

N. B. On is always the nominative of a verb, and though it 
represents we, they, people, which are plural, it requires the verb 
in the 3rd person sing. ; as, 

One says, ) Q n ^ ^ Q ~ one sa „ s ( see note ^ p> 246.) 

They stfy, people say. ) ' J 

EXERCISE. 

People are spreadingl55 strange reports. They say that we have 
— faire 1 25 courir etrange bruit. dire ibb) n.b. nous 



* Though in point of order, this is the proper place for these pronouns, yet as they 
are easy and of less consequence than the other exercises which follow them ; not 
to break 'the chain of the most useful rules, I would advise the learner, after having 
read the rules on the indefinite pronovns, on this page and following, and written rules 
90 91 and 92 to pass over the rest of the rules and go to the exercise on the verbs, 
the knowledge of which is necessary to have a complete idea of the language. The 
rest of this exercise may be written after all the other exercises. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



237 



been beaten. Who says so 1 They say so. People say so. (Youl8I 

battrel59 le54 54 II n.b. 

must not) believe every thing that people say. 
ne faut pas croire tout ce que 

91. The following and other like indefinite expressions, 
are also expressed in french by on, with the verb in its active 
sense ; as, 

It was said. On disait ; i. e. one said. 

It has been reported. On a rapporte ; one has reported, 

EXERCISE. 

It is thought that (there will be) a peace. It is said that the prelimi- 
penser (bb)s.B. ily aura — paix. (bb) n.b. prelimi- 
naries are signed. It will soonl84 be known if it be true. It was asserted 
naire signerl58. bientot * si cela217 vrai. * assurait 
yesterday on the exchange, 
hier a bourse. 

92. The english passive verbs used indefinitely, require the 
active signification in french, with on for nominative ; but 
by adding on to the sentence, the nominative of the verb in 
english, becomes its object in french ; 

/have been told that news has been received. ) i. e. one has told me that 
On m'a dit qu' on a recu des nouvelles ; \ one has received news, 

EXERCISE. 

How can that be believed, when such great preparations for 
pouvoir 89 * croire, si 33 preparatif 

war (are going on)? I was told yesterday that it has been resolved 
guerrel55 faire — * 137 (bb)N.B. * resolu 

to (carry on) the war. Do you know if the letters have been received 
168 continuer * recu 

which (were expected) by the last29 mail? They have not been 

74 attendaitl40 dernier poste ? * 

received yet. 183 They are expected to-day. Somebody has been 
recues 159 n.b. * attendre aujouid'hui. 95 " * 

sent to know why they have not been brought sooner. We have 
envoy e pour pourquoi * apportees tot. 41 

been much deceived. 

* fort trompes. 

93. Oneself, ~] 

Himself used indefinitely, )-are expressed by Soi ; as, 
Itself 'after a preposition J 

Every one thinks well of himself. Chacun a bonne opinion de sou 
Virtue is amiable of itself. La vertu est aimable de soi. 

EXERCISE. 

Let248 everyone think of himself. Every one for himself, and God 
Que 105 penser200 



* A Passive verb is made Active, by leaving out the verb be, and making the past 
participle into a verb of the same tense and person as the auxiliary verb is ; as It is 
thought ; turn, One thinks. It has been said; turn, One has said. 



238 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 

for all. That is harmless in itself. Vice is odious of itself. The 

touts 99 innocent do odieux 

earth contains all seeds in itself, 
terre contenir 29 semence en 

94. Some, repeated in a sentence of two parts, is in the first 
part Les uns, in the second part les aulres ; as, 

Some laugh, some cry. Les uns rient, les autres pleurent. 

EXERCISE. 

Some like one thing, some likeTO another. Some will have it one 
aimer , en aimer 174 54 d'une 

way, some will have it another, 
maniere, 174 54 d'une autre. 

95. Somebody, some one is Quelqu'un for both genders ; as, 
Somebody has taken my book. Quelqu'un a pris mon livre. 

EXERCISE. 

Somebody has told me so.55 I heardl36 it from somebody. I 

dit le entendre 55 

expect somebody. Somebody will call upon me soon. 183 
attendre 266 bientot. n.b. 

96. Some, any, few followed by a noun or a pronoun in the 
possessive state, are expressed by Quelqu'un, quelques uns, m. 
quelqu'une, quelques unes, f. agreeably to gender and number ; 
as, 

Take some of these oranges. Prenez Quelques unes de ces oranges. 
Give me a few of them. Donnez-m'en quelques unes. 



Have you seen any of my flowers 1 Will you have some (of them) 1 
vu fleur } 174 en 54 

I will take a few (of them.) 

* prendre 

97. Nobody, not any body, personne ; ) require ne, before 
Nobody whatever, qui que ce soit J the verb ; 

Nobody loves that man. Personne n'aime cet horame. 

He trusts nobody whatever. II ne se fie a qui que ce soit. 

EXERCISE. 

]Nobody likes that woman. That woman likes nobody. Do not tell 
aimer (bb) (bb) — dire 

it to any body. Have you met nobody 1 Has nobody met you 1 I 
57 134 rencontre 

have not met any body whatever. 

98. Something is Quelque chose ; as, 

He gave me something good. 11 me donna quelque chose de bon(cc) 



* See note * p. 228. 

(cc) Quelqu'un, personne, quelque, chose, rien, followed by an adjective or a past par- 
ticiple, require de after them ; as Somebody wounded. Quelqu'un de blesse. Some- 
thing good. Quelque chose de bon. Nobody come. Personne de venu. Nothing 
new. Rien de nouveau. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



239 



EXERCISE. 

I feel something that hurts me. 1 have something curious to tell 
74 blesser 54 (cc) curieux a 

you. Ts not that something wonderful 1 Why do you not apply 

54 N'est-ce pas ia (cc) etonnant ? — 133 s'app]iquer\(u) 

to something 1 

99. Nothing, not any thing, Rien ; ) require ne before 
Nothing whatever, Quoi que ce soit ) the verb ; as, 

Nothing is more agreeable. Rien Vest plus agreable. 

He apllies to nothing whatever. II ne s'applique a quoi que ce soit. 

EXERCISE. 

I will give you nothing. You have not done any thing to-day. He 
dormer 54 fait aujourd'hui. 

applies to nothing whatever. He does not mind any thing what- 
s'appliquer * faire attention a 

ever. I would not part (with it) for any thing. Somebody come. 

se defaire * en59 venu 
Something lost. Nobody hurt. Nothing done. 

perdu. blesse. fait. 

100. None, not any, followed by a substantive in the pos- 
sessive state, are expressed by Aucitn, m. Aucune, f. with ne 
before the verb ; as, 

None of your sisters is come. Aucune, de vos.soeurs w'est venue. 

EXERCISE. 

None of the ladies whom we expected will come. We shall not 
t 74 attendions 173 venir 

see any (of them) to-day. Do you know any of them ? No,Ido70not. 

yoir en54 aujourd'hui. — 96 191, n.b. 

101. None, Nul; ~] used absolutely, are synonymous to 
Not one, Pas un y personne, and require ne before the 

J verb ; as, 

None are free from faults. Nul %'est exempt de defauts. 

Not one believes it. Pasun, or personne ne le croit {dd) 

EXERCISE. 

None is sheltered from censure. None can boast (of it). Many 
a I'abri pouvoir se vanter en59 

people called themselves his friends, not one assisted him. 
229 disaient se54 , aiderl37 lui54 

102. Each, joined to a noun, is expressed by Chaque for 
both genders ; as, 

Each boy had a shilling. Chaque garcon eut un shelin. 
Each girl earned six pence. Chaque fille gagna six sous. 



* See reflective verbs, page 100. 

t Speaking of young ladies, we should say demoiselles ; speaking of married, or grown 
up ladies, we should say dames. 

{dd) Rien, aucun, pas un, personne followed by qui, que, dont require the following: 
verb in the subjunctive ; as, [enne ? 

Have you found nothing that suits you ? N'avez vous trouve rien qui vons convi- 

1 do not know any body who can do it. Je ne connais personne qui puisse le faire. 



240 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



EXERCISE. 

Each horse carried two men. Each woman had a bundle in each 
porter 140 paquet dans 

hand. 

main. 

103. Each, followed by a noun in the possessive state, or 
relating to a noun already mentioned, is Chacun, m. Chacune, 
f. as, 

Each of these books has its price. Chacun de ceslivres a son prix. 
Put them each in their places. Mettez-les chacun a sa place. 

EXERCISE. 

Each of these men has a shilling a day; or these men have each a 

(bb) shelin par jour ; 

shilling a day. Each of these women carried two bundles; or these 

(bb) porter ; 

women carried two bundles each. 

104. Every, followed by a noun, requires a distinction. 

If every denotes individuality, it is expressed by Chaque, as, 

Every language has its properties. Chaque langue a ses proprietes; 
i. e. each language has &c. 

If every denotes a totality, it is expressed by Tout, m. 

Toute, f. 

Every man is fallible, i. e. all men ; Tout homme es faillible. 

exercise. 

Every science (i. e. each science) has its principles. Every season 

ses principe saison 

has its attractions. Every plant has its properties. Every man lies, 
charme. plante propriete. , 

(i. e. all men lie) but every man is not a liar. Every woman is 

— menteur. 

frail, but every woman does not yield. I am found at every hour of 
fragile, — succomber, 92 a 

the day. 

233 

105. Every one requires the same distinction as every. 
Every one, implying every one taken individually, is Chacun ; 
Every one lives after his own way. Chacun vit a. sa maniere. 

i. e. each person lives, &c. 

Every one, implying every one collectively, is Touts, m. 
Toutes, f. 

Every one, of them were taken ; ) lis furent touts pris, m. 
i. e. they were all taken. ) Elles furent toutes prises, f. 

exercise. 

Every one has a good opinion of himself, (i. e. each person.) Every 
24 soi, 
one thinks himself to be239 in the right. I have lost every one of my 
penser — t — avoir — 24 raison. perdre — 



* This sentence can not be expressed literally. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 241 

books, (i. e. all my books.) I had won twenty guineas, and I lost 
1 avais gagner , 

every one of them. Every one of the robbers were taken. 

— 54. — voleur 137 prendre. 

106. Every body is Tout le monde ; as, 

Every body speaks ill of her. Tout le monde parle mal d'elle. 
She speaks ill of every body. Elle parle mal de tout le monde. 

EXERCISE. 

Every body says so. She speaks ill of every body. It62 is impossi- 
dire le54 dire du mal n.b. 

ble to please every body. 
168 plaire 202 

107. Every thing is expressed by Tout ; as, 
Eveiy thing is right. Tout est bien. 

She complains of every thing. Elle se plaint de tout. 

EXERCISE. 

Every thing is for the best. You complain of every thing. I am 
mieux. se plaindre* 

prepared against every thing, 
pret a 

108. Any body, any one, used in the sense of some body, 
someone, are expressed by Quelqu'un ; as, 

Has any body asked for me % QuelqyCun m'a-t-il demande % 

EXERCISE. 

Is any body come 1 Have you met any body 1 Can any body do 
134 venu? Pouvoir 134 faire 

what I do? 
84 

109. Any body, any one, used in the sense of every body, 
are expressed by Tout le monde, or il rfy a personne qui ne ; 
as, 

Any body will tell you the same, i. e. every body will, &c. 
Tout le monde vous dira la meme chose ; 
or, Iln'y a personne qui ne vous dise la meme chose. 

EXERCISE. 

Any body (or everybody) may 178 do that. Any body will (or there 

pouvoir faire 89 

is nobody but will) show you the way. 

montrer chemin. 

110. With a verb denoting admiration or doubt, or after a 
comparative, any body is expressed by Personne, but without 
ne, because personne attended by ne, signifies nobody ; as, 

Did ever any body see that ! Personne a-t-il jamais vu cela ! 

He will doit better than any body. II le fera mieux que personne. 



* See reflective yerb, page 100. 

21 



242 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



EXERCISE. 

Did ever any body do such a thing ! Yes ; and you can do it as 

136 jamais 134 38 (kk) 54 43 

well as any body. 

48 

111. Any thing, in the sense of something, is Quelque 
chose ; as, 

Has any thing happened 1 Est-il arrive quelque chose ? 

EXERCISE. 

(Is there) any thing in the bottle ? Have you heard anything? 

240 bouteille ? apprendre 

(Is there) any thing new to-day 1 
246 (cc) nouveau 

112. Any thing, used in the sense of every thing, is ex- 
pressed by Tout ; 

Do any thing you please. Faites tout ce qu'il vous plaira. 

EXERCISE. 

He is fit for any thing (or every thing.) I will do any thing to 
propre 200 faire 170 

serve him. I prefer this to any thing, 
servir preferer 89 

113. With a verb denoting admiration or doubt, any thing 
is expressed by rien, but without ne ; for rien attended by ne, 
expresses nothing ; as, 

Is there any thing finer ! Y a-t-il rien de plus beau ! 

EXERCISE. 

(Is there) any thing finer41 than civility ! I doubt that you will 

246 (cc) beau civilite 1 douter que 

makel45 any thing good (of it.) 
faire (cc) bon en54. 

1 14. Whoever, whosoever joined to a substantive, or relating 
to a substantive before mentioned, is expressed by Quelque, 
Quehque, m. Quelleque, Qucllesque, f. with the verb in the 
subjunctive ; and if the nominative is a noun, it is placed after 
the verb ; as, 

Whoever that man is, I shall have him punished. 
Quelque soit cet homme, je le ferai punir. 

EXERCISE. 

Whoever that man be, he is acting wrong; or that man is acting 

(bb) , agirl55 mal ; 155 

wrong, whoever he be. Whoever those children be, they are ilU83 
, (bb) , — mal se 

behaved. 

comporterl25 

115. Whoever, whosoever, whomsoever, meaning any person 
soever, is expressed by Qui que ce soit, with a relative pro- 
noun after it, and the verb in the subjunctive ; as, 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



243 



Whoever has done it, he shall repent of it ; i. e. whoever that per- 
son be ; 

Qui que ce soit quiVa.it fait, il s'en repentira. 

Whomsoever you meet, do not stop ; i. e. whosoever thai person be; 
Qui que ce soit que vous rencontri^, ne vous arretez pas. 

EXERCISE. 

Whoever speaks to yon, you ought to answer civilly. Whomso- 

(o) 54, devoir 172 repondre civilement. 

ever you apply to, they90 will tell you the same thing. 

s'adresser 203, n b. dire meme chose. 

116. Whoever, whomsoever, meaning every body, is Touts 
ceux ; 

He stops whomsoever he meets. II arrete touts ceux qu'il rencontre. 
N. B, In proverbial sentences, whoever is Quiconque ; as, 
Whoever is rich is every thing. Quiconque est riche est tout. 

EXERCISE. 

Whoever (or every body who) is found out at night is stopped- 

92 tro liver dehors la nuit 92 arreter* 
Bring with you whomsoever (or every person) you meet 142. 
Amener rencontrerez. 

117. Whatever, whatsoever with a substantive, requires a 
distinction. 

If the substantive to which whatever, whatsoever is joined, 
is the nominative of a verb, it is expressed by Quelque, quels- 
que, m. quelleque, qucllesque, f. with the verb in the subjunc- 
tive, and if the nominative is a noun, it is placed after the 
verb ; as, 

Whatever his reasons are, they will not be heard. 
Quellesque soient ses raisons, elles ne seront pas ecoutees. 

If the substantive to which whatever, whatsoever is joined, 
is the object of a verb, whatever, whatsoever is expressed by 
Quelque, sing, quclques, plur. for both genders, with que after 
the substantive, and the verb in the subjunctive ; as, 

Whatever reasons he gives, he will not be excused. 
Quelques raisons qu'il donne, il ne sera pas excuse. 

exercise. ' 

Whatever this work be, it is too dear. Whatever his terms be, 
(bb) ouvrage , 62 trop conditions } 

I shall agree to them. Do not trust to their promises, whatever 
accepter — 54 — se fieri a promesse, 

they be. Whatever business you have, you should not neglect your 
62 affaire ' , 176 negliger 

friends. Whatever terms they propose, I shall agree to 
conditions proposer, accepter — 

them. 
54 



* Turn : one stops whomsoever one finds out at night, 
f See imperative of a reflective verb, page 100. 



244 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN* 



118. Whatever, whatsoever, implying whatever a thing may 
be, is expressed by quoi que ce soit, with a relative pronoun 
after it, and the verb in the subjunctive ; as. 

Whatever happens let me know it; i. e. whatever the thing be tyc. 
Quoi que ce soit qui arrive, faites-le-moi savoir. 

EXERCISE. 

Whatever I do, I am always scolded. Whatever he undertakes, 
faire, gronder. entreprendre, 

he never succeeds. 
190 reussir. 

119. Whatever, whatsoever, implying any thing, or every 
thing, is expressed by Tout ce qui, nomin. tout ce que, object, 
as, 

Whatever is right, is not always approved ; i. e. every thing that &c. 
Tout ce qui est bien n'est pas ton jours approuve. 
Do whatever you will ; i. e. any thing, or every thing you will. 
Faites tout ce que vous voudrez. 

EXERCISE. 

Take whatever you thinkl42 proper. He grants herl62 whatever 

Prendre croirez apropos. accorder (1) 63 

she desires. He approves of whatever she does, 
desirer. approuver 20J faire. 

120. Other is Autre, substantive and adjective, of both gen- 
ders ; as, 

Give me an other yen. Donnez-moi une autre plume. 

Others think differently. D' autres pensent differemment * 

EXERCISE. 

I see another man comingl53. I have found another flower. 

voir qui vient.N.B. trouver fleur. 

(Here is247) another. (There are) a great many others. 
En70 voici En70 247 — beaucoup d y 

121. Each other, one another ; 

masc. sing. fern. masc. plural. fem. 

VUn V Autre, VUne ['Autre, les Uns les Autres, les Unes les Autres ; 
of, from One another ; 

VUn de V Autre, VUne de Y Autre, les Uns des Autres, les Unes des Autres ; 
to, at, One another ; 

VUn a V Autre, VUne a V Autre, les Uns aux Autres, les Unes aux Autres ; 

agreeably to gender and number ; but observe that the prepo- 
sition which comes before one another in english, must be 
placed between the two words Tun, Vautre in french ; as, 

They can not live without one another ; i. e. the one loitkout the 
other. 

lis ne sauraient vivre Yun sans Vautre, m. Yune sans Vautre, f. 



* In proverbial sentences, others after of, to is generally rendered by autrtri ; as, 
Do not do to others what you would not like to be done to. 
Ne faites pas a autrui ce que vous ne voudriezpas qu'on vous fit. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



245 



Fire and water destroy each other. These women hate one 
Feu eau se detruire (bb) se hair 

another. See those two women ; they are jealous of each other ; yet 

; jaloux29(#) ; 

they can not do280 without one another. These people have fallen 
se passer de {bb) gens 238 tombel58 

upon one another. 

122. Both; 

masc. sing. fern. masc. plijr. fern. 

P Un et V Autre, V Une et V Autre, Touts deux, Toutes deux ; 1 Speaking 
of, from Both ; | of two indi- 

te V Un et de V Autre, de VTJne et de V Autre, de Touts deux, de Toutes deux , )■ vidual ob- 
to, at Both ; j jects only ; 

a PUn et a V Autre, a VUne et a V Autre, a Touts deux a Toutes deux ; J as, 

Your sisters are both right. 

Vos soeurs ont raison Yune et V autre, or ont toutes deux raison. 

Both ; les Uns et les Autres, les lines et les Autres ; ) Speaking of a greater 
of, from Both ; des Uns et des Autres, des Unes et des Autres ; > number of individuals, 
to, at Both ; aux Uns et aux Autres, aux Unes et aux Autres ; ) but considered as two 

parties ; as, 

The French and the Dutch are united, let us beat both. 

Les Fran9ais et les Hollandais sont unis, battons les uns et les autres. 



Your brothers are241 both very well. I saw them both last night. 

se porter voir 235 

You know my sisters ; they will both be here to-night. In speaking 

; etre 235 En parler 

of a greater number of individuals. The Russians and the Prussians 
41 individu, Russe Prussien 

have declared war against us ; but we will beat both. Both will 

declarer guerre — 55 ; - battre 

have reason to repent (of it.) 
lieu de se repentir en59. 

123. Either; 

masc. sing. fem. masc. plural, fern. 

V Un ou V Autre, V Une ou V Autre, les Uns ou les Autres, les Unes ou les Autres ; 
of, from Either ; {tres ; 

de VUn oude V Autre, de VUne oxi de V Autre, des Uns ou des Autres, des Unes ou des Au- 
to, at Either ; \tres ; 

■a V Un ou a V Autre, a V Une ou a V Autre, aux Uns ou aux Autres, aux Unes ou aux Au- 

Either of them will come. 

Vun ou V autre viendra, m. Yune ou V autre viendra, f. 
You may use either of them. 

Vous pouvez vous servir de Vun ou de Y autre, m. de Yune ou de 
Yautre, f. 

EXERCISE. 

Either of these men will do it. You mayl78 speak to either. 
(bb) faire 51 pouvoir parler 

Take either of these flowers. You mayl78 have either of them. 
Prendre — (bb) fleur. pouvoir (kk) — — 

21* 



24S svntajc of the phonoi/a. 

124. Neither not either ; 

masc. sing. fern. masc. tlural. fern. 

Ni Zes £/ne# 

Ni VUn ni V Autre, Ni I'Une ni I' Autre ; Ni Zes l/nj ni Zes Autres, [ni Z<?s Autres? 

of, from Neither; Nides Vnts 

Ni Z' Un ni de P Autre, Ni <Zc Z' t7ne ni tZe V Autre ; Ni des Una ni rfes Autres, [ni de.<? Autres, 

to, at Neither; Ni aw# i/netf 

Ni a Z'Z/n ni o V Autre, Ni a Pifoe ni a T Autre ; NI aw^r f r n* ni aux Autres, [ni aux Autres, 

These words require ne before the verb which attends them ; 
as, 

I care for neither of them. 

Je ne me soucie ni de Yun ni de Yautre, m, ni de Yune ni de Yau* 
ire J. 

N. B. When these words are the nominative of a verb, they 
are generally placed after the verb, and Us or elles is added 
to the verb ; as, 

Neither of them will come. 
Ni Yun ni Y autre ne viendra; or itsne viendront ni Yun ni V autre, m, 
Ni Yune ni Y autre ne viendra j or elles ne viendront ni l'-wwe ni Y autre, f 

EXERCISE, 

Neither of them will study. Neither of these men can do it. I will 
— — 173 etudier. (bb) faire 54 173 

not trust202 either of them.TT 
se fier a — 

Recapitulatory Exercise on the foregoing rules* 

Do you know any of the ladies we have244 just passed 1 No 1 I 
— connaitre " t (s) venir de passer 1 ; 

know none (of them.) I have not seen any (of them) before. 

en54 en55 206 n.b. 

I should like to get acquainted with some of them. I know the two 
169 faire connaissance 58} 

Iast29. Which of the two is the handsomest % They are both very 
dernier. 80! belle44? X tres 

handsome, and they have each a handsome fortune. You may 178 
29 , t beau bien. pouvoir 

get acquainted with either of them, or with both, if you like. They 
(kk) — — , , vouloir. } 

come here every summer. Every body is fond of them. Every one 
ici ete. — aimer $ 54 



H When on comes after the conjunctions et, si, ou, or any word ending in ou or on, 
or between que and a verb beginning with con or com, the letter l' is generally 
placed before on, to soften the sound of these words which otherwise would be dis- 
agreeable ; so we say ; C'est un pays ou Von vit a bon marche ; it is a country where 
people live cheap; On apprend plus facilement les choses que Z'on comprend, 
que celles que Z'on ne comprend pas- ; people learn more easily the things which 
they understand, than those which they do not understand : ou on vit, &c. <,u'on 
comprend, &c. would be harsh to the ear. But if these words were followed by le r 
la, les, l' must not be added to on, as it would then cause the same discordance 
which it is intended to remove ; so we say ; Si on le savait, not, Si Z'on le savait , 
if people knew it. On estimerait davantage la science, si on la connaissait, not, si 
Von la connaissait ; people would esteem learning more, if they were acquainted 
with it. 

* See note * p. 182. t See note tp. 239. 
X Mind the gender of the noun which this pronoun represents. 
b We have no other word to express the words be fond of, in French, but the veri:- 
Aimer, to like. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN, 247 
Who knows them is fond of their company. They are very fond of 

54 _ — cornpagnie. — fort s'aimer — • 

each other. They are always with one another. Are they married *? 

marierl58? 

No, neither of them is married, but I think they are both promised. 

191, — -* 153 , 221, promettre.158 

I would give any thing I possess to be acquainted with them. You 
(s) posseder 170 connu 200 58 

may speak to either of them. Bring here every one of your books, 
178(kk) — — Apporter ici 

Let248 every one of you shew me his exercise. Everyone of yon 
Que montrer 54 theme. — — 

will be punished. Can I do any thing for you % Yes, you can. 

punir. Pouvoir faire pour 58 , 70 

You can help me as well as any body. Nobody is more capable 

(kk) aider 54 43 70 

than you. I should like to buy something, but every thing is so 
169 acheter , si 

dear now, that one can not get any thing. I should like to 
a present, (bb) n.b. se procurer 169 

have some of these flowers. Which do vou think are the finest441 

(bb) 80 — 133 belle29 T 

Some say that these are the finest29 ; some give the preference to 

(bb)n.-B. 88n.b. 44 ; preference 

those. These men relate both the same story, but neither of them 

88 n.b. (bb) rapport er meme histoire, — — 

believes that it62 is true. I do not believe either of them. They are 
Groire (M)n.b. 145 vrai29. — — — 239 

both wrong, whoever they be. Whosoever asks for me, tell him5G> 

tort, 201 54, 162 

that I am not at home. Whatever he writes, let 248 me know it, 
(bb) n.b. aulogis. , faire n.b. 56 savoir 59 

Whatever is right, is not always approved. Whatever good is said of 
bien, approuver. bien 

us, we are not told any thing new. Whatever your rank and riches 
dire (cc) nouveau. rang richesses 

may be, or whatever rank and riches you have, do not be proud, if 

, , — orgueilleux, 

you will not (be disliked) by every body. No one ought to be a judge 

144 deplaire a devoir 172 23 juge 

in his own cause. People often flatter themselves more than they should, 
213 propre 184 flatter se 54 47 176 

Every one complains of his memory, but no one complains of his 

se plaindre , 

understanding. There would not be (so much) disorder seen in the 
esprit. tant desordre * 

world, if youth had a good impression given it at first, and if care 

monde, jeunesse * d' abord, 

was taken to form the mind of children as it ought to be. I have 

soin * 168 former esprit comme devrait — — 

just been told that Mr. A. is dead. Indeed 1 Yes, they are so ; 

244 — dire En verite ? , le54 



* Turn this sentence thus • One would not see so much disorder In the world, if 
one gave at first a good impression to youth, and if one took care to form the mind of 
children as one should. 



248 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



He was invited to supper yesterday at Mrs. B.'s. They waitedl37 

140 inviter 169 souper hier 208 Madame attendre 

for him a long time, but seeing that he did not come, somebody was 

201 54 — terns, voir — 136 , — 

sentl37 to look for him ; he couldl37 not be found any where ; they 
envoyer 172 chercher 201 54 ; pouvoir * — trouver nulle part ; 
have been seekingl55 for him all night, and this morning he was 

— chercher 201 55 nuit, (bb) 234 — 

found drowned in a pond, not far from Mrs. B.'s house. Every body 
136 noyer 213 etang, non loin de 25 

is sorry (for it,) Is it known how this accident happenedl361 No, 
faclie en55 — savoir comment (bb) arriver238? 191, 

nobody knows. It is supposed that he (lost his way) in the dark. He 

70 — s'imaginer s'egarerl37 213 obscurite. 

is to be buried to-morrow. You will be expected at his funeral. 
242 enterrer demain. attendre funerailles. (pi.) 

You will go ; will you not? I will not go, unless218 I am invited 

70 ; 282 70 , a moins quel95 — inviter 

(to it.) You may be sure that they will invite you. 

63 178 (kk) sur (bb) n.b. 54. 



CHAPTER VI. 
VERB. 

Agreement of the Verb with its Nominative. 

A verb expressing either being or acting, necessarily implies 
a subject or agent, generally known in grammar by the name 
of nominative. 

125. The verb must be of the same number and person as 
the agent, or nominative ; this is called agreement of the verb 
with its nominative ; as, 

Singular. Plural. 

/speak. Je parle. Nous parlous. ^ 

Thou speakest. Tu paries. Vous parlez. 

He ryi Tl ) lis } 

She lEUe|^ rte - Elles \P aTlenL 

My brother gf Mon frere ) Mes freres ) "k, 
My sister " Ma sosur | Mes soeurs \ ? arleat - ? 

EXERCISE. 

I study ; Thou studiest ; He studies ; My brother studies ; We 

etudier ; ; ; ; 

study ; You study ; They study : My brothers study. 



tt> 
p 



* Express Not by Ne only, before the verb, as Nulle which comes after, supplies the 
place of Pas or Point. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



249 



126. When two or more substantives in the singular are the 
nominative of the same verb, that verb must be in the plural 
number ; as, ♦ 

My sister and he speak french. Ma soeur et lui parlent frai^ais. 

EXERCISE. 

My brother and sister study. 

127. If the substantives which are the nominative of the 
verb, are of different persons,* the verb does not agree with 
either of them ; we add nous or vous to the sentence with 
which we make the verb agree. 

We add nous, if there is in the sentence a substantive* of 
the first person ; as, 

He and 1 speak french. Lui et moi nous parlons francais ; 
i. e. he and I we speak french. 

We add vous, if there is in the sentence a substantive* of 
the second person, and none of the first ; as, 

You and they speak french. Vous et eux vous parlez francais; 
i. e. you and they you speak french. 

EXERCISE. 

You and I agree. My sister and I are fond of study. She and 
52 etre d'accord. 52 — aimer t etude. 

I will learn together. We90 add vous, if there is in the sentence a 
52 ensemble. n.b. , 

substantive of the second person, and219 there is none of the first; 

* 29 33 , 220 il n'y en ait pas 29 ; 

You and your brother do not agree. You and he are continuallyl83 

— s'accorder. 52 — conthmellement 

quarrelling. You and your sister will learn together. You and they 
se querellerl55 52 

are of the same opinion. 

128. If the nominative of the verb is the relative pronoun 
Qui, the verb must be of the same number and person as the 
substantive* to which that pronoun relates ; as, 

It is J who speak best. C est moi qui parle le mieux. 

It is thou who speakest best. C est toi qui paries le mieux. 

It is he who speaks best. C est lui qui parle le mieux. 

It is we who speak best. C est nous qui parlons le mieux. 

It is you who speak best. C est vous qui parlez le mieux. 

It is they who speak best. Ce sont eux qui parlent le mieux. 

exercise. 

It62 is I who will say my lesson first. It62 is we who will say our 

n.b. 52 dire lecon le premier, n.b. 

lessons first. It6*2 is you who will say your lesson first. It62 is 
les premiers. n.b. n.b. 

they who will say their lessons first. 

52 



* See note * page 201. 



t See note t) page 246. 



250 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



129. If Qui refers to several substantives of different per- 
sons,* it agrees with the first person in preference to the 
second, and with the second in preference to the third; as, 

It is you and 1 who speak best. C est vous et moi qui parlons le mieux. 
It is yuu and he who speak best. C'est vous et lui qui parlez le mieux. 

EXERCISE. 

ItG2 is you and I who will begin. ItG'2 is you and your brother 
n.b. 52 commencer. n.b. 

who will (go out) first. 

sortir les premiers. 

130. The collective substantives La plupart, infinite, nombre, 
quantiie, troupe, multitude followed by another substantive, 
require the verb of the same number as that second substan- 
tive ; ex. 

Most people are of that opinion. 

La plupart du monde pense ainsi, or La plupart des gens pense ainsi. 

EXERCISE. 

A great number of men perished. Most of the cavalry 

perir.137 La plupart cavalerie 
deserted. A crowd of people229 came to see them. 
deserterl37. foule gens venir 172 

131. Le quart, le tiers, la moitie require the verb in the sin- 
gular ; as, 

One fourth of my books are lost. Le quart de mes livres est perdu. 

EXERCISE. 

One fourth of the ships were taken or destroyed. One third of the 

Le quart navire 137 prendre detruire. Le tiers 

crews deserted. One half of men do not think, and the other half 

equipage 137 La moitie penser, 

know notl92 what to think, 
ne savoir n.b. 83 172. 

Placing of the Nominative with the Verb. 

132. In a declarative sentence, i. e. when a question is not 
asked, the nominative of the verb is placed in french as in 
english, before the verb ; ex. 

I speak french well. Je parle bien francais. 

He speaks frencri well. It parle bien francais. 

My brother speaks french well. Mon frtre parle bien francais. 

My sister speaks french well. Ma sozur parle bien francais. (ee) 



* Seenote * page 201. 

(ee) The nominative is generally placed after the verb in a declarative sentence. 

1. When the verb is used as a parenthesis ; ex. 

You are wrong, said her mother to her. Vous avez tort, lui dit sa mere. 

2. When the sentence begins with tel, or ainsi ; as. 

Such was his advice. Tel etait son avis. 

Thus ended the business. Ainsi se termina Y affaire. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



251 



I study well. He studies well. This boy studies well. You study 
etudier garcon 

well. They study well. 

(ee) 

But when the sentence is interrogative, it is necessary to con- 
sider whether the nominative of the verb is a noun or a pronoun. 

133. If, when you ask a question, the nominative of the verb 
is one of the pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, Us, elles, on, or 
ce, this pronoun is placed in french, as the corresponding 
words are in english, immediately after the verb ; ex. 

Do / speak french well ? Parle-je bien francais '?* 
Does he speak french well 1 Parle-t-^ bien francais 1 
Does she speak french well ? Parle-t-eZZ<? bien francais 7 
Do people speak french well % Parle-t-^m bien francais 1 

EXERCISE. 

Do I study well/? Does he study welH Do we study welH Do 
etudier 

you study well 1 Do they study 1 

134. If, when you ask a question, the nominative of the verb 
is a noun, that noun is placed before the verb, the same as in 
declarative sentences ; but to show that a question is asked, 
one of the pronouns il, elle, Us, elles, agreeably to the gender 
and number of the noun, must be placed immediately after the 
verb ; as, 

Does my brother speak french well ? Mon frere parle-t-iZ bien francais ? (ff) 
Does my sister speak french well 1 Ma saeur parle-t-eZZe bien francais 1 
Do my brothers speak french well 1 Mes freres parlent-iZs bien francais ? 
Do my sisters speak french well ? Mes sceurs parlent-eZZes bien francais ? 



3. When the nominative is attended by several words which can not be separated 
from it, or can not be placed before the verb, without suspending the sense of the 
sentence ; 

D'un cote on voyait une riviere ou seformaient des iles bor&ees de tilleusfleuris. 
On one side was seen a river from which sprung islands lined with lime trees in 
bloom. 

La coulent mille ruisseaux qui distribuent par tout une eau claire. 
There a thousand rivulets run which carry every where a clear water. Fenelon. 
These sentences would not be so clear, if they were expressed thus : 
D' un cote on voyait une riviere ou des ties bordees de tilleus fleuris seformaient. 
La, mille ruisseaux, qui distribuent par tout une eau claire coulent. 
4. When the verb is preceded by que, se, or ou; as, 
The money which my father sent me. L'argent que m'envoya mon pere. 
The field where the battle was fought. Le champ ou se donna la bataille. 
5. Je, nous, tu, vous, il, Us, elle, elles, on, ce are generally placed after the verb, 
when the sentence begins with one of these words, ainsi, so, therefore ; au moins, 
at last ;. en vain, in vain ; a peine, hardly ; peut-etre, perhaps ; as, 

You were hardly gone, when she came in. a peine etiez vous sorti qu'elle entra. 
* Except the pronoun Je, when the verb to which it is joined ends with several 
consonants, so instead of saying ; cours-je 1 do I run / ments-je 1 do I lie 1 dors-je ? do I 
sleep? which are hard to pronounce, we say, est-ce que je cours ? est-ce que je ments ? 

(ff) When an interrogative sentence begins with que, (what ;) ou, (where ;) we ge- 
nerally place the noun after the verb, without adding a pronoun to it ; as, 
Ou est votre frere 1 Where is your brother 1 

Ou est votre sceur ? Where is your sister ? 

Que fait votre frere ? What is your brother doing ? 

Que fait votre sceur ? What is your, &c. 1 



252 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

EXERCISE. 

Does this boy study well? Does this girl study well? Do these 

(bb) garcon fillo (bb) 

boys study well ? Do these girls study well ? Do any of them learn 

% 58 

french ? Is not the french language very difficult ? Are your 

francais ? 29 32 langue difficile ? 

masters pleased*29 with you ? Does your father often come tc see 

contentN.B. 200 184 172 

you? Has your mother been here lately ? 

ici depuis peii* 

MOODS AND TENSES. 

INDICATIVE MOQD OR MANNER. 

When we declare that a thing is, or is not, or that it is, was, 
will be, or would be in our power to have it so, this manner 
of expressing ourselves is called indicative or declarative. 

Present Tense or Time. 

J' Ai, I have, ) now, to-day, this week, this month, 

Je Suis, I am, > this year, this age, in any period 

Je Parle ,*I speak, or am speaking; ) of time not entirely elapsed.t 

135. The present tense in french does not differ from the 
same tense in english ; it expresses the being or acting at the 
time in which we are ; as, 

I now have. I now am. I now speak, or am speaking. 

A present j' ai. A present je suis. A present je parte. 

EXERCISE. 

I like study. Study is the food of the mind, 
etude aliment esprit. 

PAST TENSES. 

Compound of the Present. 

J' Ai eu, I had, or have had, ) lately, to-day, this week, &c. in any 
J' Ai tie, I was, have been, > period of time, not entirely elapsed ; 

) this is the nearest time to the present. 
J' Ai parte, I spoke, did speak, have spoken. 



* In order to render the elucidation of this interesting part of the language more ob- 
vious, 1 have laid down the two auxiliary verbs avoir, to Have ; and etre, to Be, which 
are generally found the most embarrassing, and the familiar verb parler, to Speak, 
which, may serve as a model for all the rest. 

t A peiiod of time is a certain quantity of time, the duration of which is fixed and 
agreed upon, and which being elapsed, that period ceases ; such as a Day, a Week, a 
•Fortnight, a Month, a Year, an Age, the four seasons of the year, Spring, Summer, Au- 
tumn, Winter ; or any other portion of time, the beginning and end of which can be 
ascertained. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



253 



136. If we speak of an action recently past, without men- 
tioning the time in which it passed, or if we mention ^period* 
which is still lasting, such as, to-day, this week, this month, 
this year, &c. the action being past, and the period of time 
mentioned being still present, we make the verb partake of 
both the present and past tenses, by adding the past participle 
to the present tense of the auxiliary verbs avoir or etre ; ex. 

NO TIME MENTIONED. 

Were you ever at Paris % 
turn, Have you ever been at Paris ? Avez-vous jamais etc a Paris 1 

No, I never was there ; t 
f turn, No, I have never been there. Non, je n'y ai jamais ete. 

I have no opportunity to go ; 
turn, I have hadno opportunity &c. Je n'ai pas eu occasion d'y aller. 

Did you ever see Buonaparte 1 
turn, Have you ever seen B. ? Avez-vous jamais vu Buonaparte 1 



PERIOD MENTIONED, BUT NOT ELAPSED. 

I was at your house this morning ; 
turn, I have been at your house &c. Tai ete chez vousce matin. 

Did you find any body there '? t 
turn, Have you found any body &c. Y dW62r-vous trouve quelqu'un'? 

I s*M0 your sister, and spoke to her ; [le. 
turn, I kt?e your sister, and &c. Taivu votre soeur, et jeluiai^cr- 

Z?id you not see my mother 1 
turn, Have you not sem &c. 1 Wavez-vous pas t?w ma mere 3 

EXERCISE. 

When did vou see Mr. A.I I saw him this morning. I met him 

Quand t $ 234 II 

as he was coming to town. He told me he was going to208 your 
comme 133 155 direll 221 138 155 n.b. 

house. Did you not see him? No, I did70 not. He was at208 our 

II , N.E. IT N.B. 

house, but I was not in. He onlyl84 found my sister there, and he 

140 ;y54 ** ► y55, 

would not stop. Did you hear that he was going to be married'? 
vouloirtt rester. II 155 172 — so marier ? 

No, I did not; (i. e. hearlO it.) Who told you sol His cousin 
, II ; n.b. I! 55 le 59 14 cousine f. 

told me so. I heard that he was going abroad. I shall 

55 le59 || — 155 dans les pays erangers. 



* See notet page 252. 

t The french generally rise the participle ete, instead of the participle alU, to ex- 
press that a person has gone to a place whence he is returned. 
t Turn ; when have you seen 4-c. 

$ Turn ; I have seen him. See note * page 254. 

IT Turn ; he hag been SfC. ** See not© * page 173. 

it Turn ; he has not been willing. 

22 



254 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



soonl34 known if it be true; for, when he called this morning, he 

bient6t 217 ; car, passer , 

promised my sister that he would call again (as he goes back.) 
* 162 (66)n.b. repasser — en s'en retournant. 

PERFECT TENSE. 

J' Ens, I had, ) yesterday, last week, last month, last year, a fort- 
Je, Fus, I was, > night ago, in any period of time entirely past ; 

) this is the remotest time from the present. 
Je, Parlai, I spoke, did speak ; 

] 37. If we speak of an action past, in a period of time which 
is also entirely past ; such as Yesterday, last week, a fortnight 
ago, last month, last year, any year previous to that in which 
we live, then both the time and action being past or accom- 
plished, we use the perfect tense of the verb; viz. eus,fus, 
parlai; as, 

I called at your house yesterday. Je passai hier chez vous. 
Did you find any body there ? Y trouvdles-vous quelqu'un ?* 
I saw your sister and spoke to her. Je vis votre sceur et je lui parlai. 
Did you go to the ball with her ? Alldtes-vous au bal avec elle ?* 
]N'o, I did not; i. e. go there.TOr. n.b. Non, je n'y allai pas. 70 r. n.b. 
Hid you not speak to my mother ? Ne parldtes-vows pas a ma mere ? 
Yes,Idid; i.e. speak to her. 70 r. n.b. Oui, je lui parlai. 70 r. n.b. 

exercise. 

Where did you dine yesterday? I dined at my mother's, and 
Ou diner * 208 

supped at my sister's. Did you not go to the play? Yes, I did70. 
souper 208 * comedie ? , n.b 

What play did they90 act? They90 acted a new comedy. How 

82 piece * n.b. jouer n.b. t nouvelle comedie. 185 

were you entertained? I did not pay much attention to the play. 

* amuserl58 ? * faire n.b. piece. 

I conversed all the while with a gentleman who satl40 by me. Did 
paiier * terns monsieur etre pres de 58. 

you not see me? No; I didTO not. Where were you? I was 

* 191; *n.b Ou 140 140 

(in the) pit. I did not stop long. I went home, where I read the 

au parterre. rester * aulogis, * 

play, 
piece. 

IMPERFECT TENSE. 

J' Avais, I had, } then, at that time, when that happened, in a time 

J' Etais, I was, \ imperfect or uncertain. 
Je Parlais, I spoke, did speak ; 



» * It is not necessary in order to use the past tenses, that every verb should be at- 
tended by an expression denoting a time past ; it is sufficient that the time be men- 
tioned or alluded to at the beginning of the discourse, because the mind naturally 
goes back to the period which has either been mentioned or alluded to. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 255 

The imperfect is used in three different instances. 

138. 1st. When we speak of an action that was passing, 
and consequently imperfect or incomplete at a time we allude 
to, though at the time in which we relate it, it is perfect or ac- 
complished, we use the imperfect tense of the verb : viz. avais, 
etais, parlais, &c. 

These instances are generally expressed in english by the 
gerund or present participle in ing added to was or were ; as, 

What were you doing there ^ Clue faisiez-vo\is la. 

I ioa$ writing to a friend. Tecrivais aun ami. 

I was getting ready to go out. Je xriappr etais asortir. 

I was going to call upon you. Tallais passer chez vous. 

I ivas talking of you just now. Je parlais de vous tout a l'heure. 

I was going out, as you came in. Je sortais, comme vous entriez. 

EXERCISE. 

What were you doing when I came in % I was preparing my- 
83 155 suisl36 entre? 155 me54 

self to study a music lesson. I was going to play a tune. I was 

169 musique 25 155 172 air. 155 

trying to tune my instrument. Stop. You were doing it (the wrong 
essayer 168 accorder Arreter. 155 54 a rebours. 

way.) You were spoiling it. They90 were making (a great deal) 

gater 155 62 n.b. 155 beaucoup 

of noise at208 your house last night. Yes, we had some company, 
bruit n.b. 235 , compagnie. 

We were enjoying ourselves. 
155 rejouir nous54 

139. 2nd. When we wish to denote that the action of 
which we speak was habitual, or has been reiterated, we must 
use the imperfect. 

In these instances, the English verb may be changed into 
the infinitive, with did use, or used, ^efore it ; as, 

Where did you walk in London [Londres % 

viz. Where did you use lo walk &c. Ou vous promeniez-vous a 

I generally walked in the park. [dans le pare. 

or, I used to walk &c. Je me promenais ordinairement 

I often met Frenchmen there. 
or, I used to meet &c. J'y rencontrais souvent des fran- 

I always spoke French with them. [£ais. 
or, I used to speak &c. Je parlais toujours francais avec 

[eux. 

EXERCISE. 

How did you spend your time, when you were in the country*? 

185 271 le terns, 140 a 230 

As soon as we were up, we walked in the garden till breakfast time; 
Aussitot que 140 leves, se promener jusqu'au dejeune 25; 

after breakfast we (sat at our work) till (twelve o'clock), and then 
travailler jusqu' a 236 , alors 

we studied till dinner time. How did you spend your evenings'? 

dine 25 185 271 'les 234 



256 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

You had neither plays nor concerts to go to. Some ladies and gen- 
224 * comedie * — oualler t tmes- 
tlemen in our neighbourhood often called upon us, or we called upon 

sieurs voisinage 184 26G , 266 

them, and we sometimes made a little concert, or we played at 
58 , 184 faire petit , jouer a 

different games, but we generallyl84 spent the evenings in reading 
29 32 jeux, ordinairement 271 234 169 lire 

or in conversing. We spent our time very agreeably.* 
169 converser. 271 le agreablement. 

140. 3rd. Another very extensive use of the imperfect is in 
descriptions for whenever we describe the qualities of persons, 
or things, the state, place, situation, order, disposition in 
which they were in a time past, we use the imperfect ; as, 

Where were you yesterday % Ou etiez-vous hier % 

I was in the country. J'etais a la campagne. 

I tvasMl not well.§ Je ne me portais2il pas bien. 

I had a bad head-ache. Tavais grand mal a la tete.§ 

Was the country pleasant 1 La campagne etait-e\\e agreable 1 

Yes ; but it ims2i0 rather hot. Oui ; mais il faisait24Q un peu 

[ehaud. 



* Do not put any article before the noun which follows ni. 
t See note t page 183. 

$ By using the Perfect instead of the Imperfect in these instances, the sentence 
would be equally grammatical, but the idea would be very different. This difference 
will appear obvious in the following examples composed of the same words ; 
Quand yktais a Londres, ydllais a la comedie ; 
Quand je fus a Londres, yallai a la comedie. 
By the first of these expressions, people will understand that when I was in London, 

I usedto go to the play ; by the second they will understand that when i arrived at 
London, at a certain period either named or alluded to, I went to the play. Learners 
are very apt to confound these two tenses. 

§ The greatest difficulty attending the past tenses is how to discriminate this last 
instance of the imperfect from the perfect, i. e. how to distinguish an action from estate 
of beingf and indeed the distinction is sometimes so nice, that it is not surprising 
foreigners should err in the use of them ; for example, 

First instance. Second instance. 

I was very wet in going into the country. I was so wet that 1 could not stay. 

He was killed in falling from his horse. He was dead when we found him. 

He had his leg carried off by a cannon ball. He had also a wound in the breast. 

Was and had in these various instances can not be expressed by the same tense in 
french. 

When, in the first instance, I say ; I was very wet in going into the country ; He 
was killed in falling ; He had his leg carried off, &c. I am relating facts, events 
which happened, of the end of which a perfect idea may be formed, and these must 
be expressed by the perfect. 

But when, in the second instance, I say ; I was so wet that I could not stay ; He 
was dead when we found him ; He had also a wound in his breast ; I no longer ex- 
press the facts themselves, of being wet, of being killed &c. but describe a state of 
being, i. e. I was in a wet state ; He was in a dead state ; He was in a wounded state, 
the duration of which is not limited to any time, and can not be ascertained, and 
these are expressed by the imperfect; thus, 

First instance. Second instance. 

.Te/ttstresmouille en allant a la campagne. J'etais&i mouilieque je ne pus pas'rester. 

II fut tue en tombant de cheval. II etait mort quand nous le trouvarnes. 
II eut la jambe emportee d'un coup de canon. II avait aussi une blessure a la poitrine. 

In order to elucidate this stillmore, and try the rules that have just been laid down^ 
let us peruse a*piece of history where the difference between a narration and a de&- 
cription, a, fact and an incident, will appear obvious. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



257 



N. B. Observe however, that if the duration of the state, &c. 
which we wish to describe was limited to a period of which 
the end was known, we should not use the imperfect ; we should 
use either the compound of the present or the perfect, according 



Calypso could not console herself for the Calypso ne pouvaitliO se consoler da 
departure of Ulysses. In her grief, she depart d'Ulysse. Dans sa douleur, elle 
considered her immortality as a misfortune, se trouvaitliO malheureuse d'etre im- 
Her grotto no longer resounded with the mortelle. Sagrotte ne resonnaitHO plus 
sweet harmony of her voice. The nymphs du doux chant de sa voix. Les nymphes 
who attended her, dared not to speak qui la servaientliO n' osaientliOlm parler. 
to her. She often walked alone upon Elle se promenaitlZO souvent seule sur 
the flowery turf which an eternal spring les gazons fleuris dont un printems eter- 
diffused round her island ; but these charm- nel bordaitHO son ile ; mais ces beaux 
ing abodes, far from assuaging her grief, lieux, loin de moderer sa douleur ne 
served only to recall the sad remembrance faisaientl39 que lui rappeler le triste 
of Ulysses, whom she had so many times souvenir d'Ulysse qu' elle y avaitliO vu 
seen by her side. Frequently she stood tant de fois auprcs d'elle Souvent elle 
motionless on the beach of the sea, which demeuraitl%9 immobile sur le rivage de 
she watered with her tears, and she was la mer qu'elle arrosaitlZO de ses larrnes, 
incessantly turned towards that quarter et elle etaitHO sans cesse tournee vers 
where the ship of Ulysses, plowing the le cote ou le vaisseau d'Ulysse, fendant 
waves, had disappeared from her eyes, les ondes, avaitliO disparu a ses yeux. 
All on a sudden, she perceived pieces of a Tout a coup, elle appergut)37 les debris 
ship which had just been wrecked ; then d'un navire qui venaitliO de faire nau- 
she descried two men at a distance, one frage ; puis elle decouvritl37 de loin 
of whom was seemingly in years ; the deux hommes dont V un paraissaitliO 
other, though a youth, resembled Ulysses, age ; 1' autre, quoique jeune, ressem- 
He had his sweet and lofty look, with his blaitliO a Ulysse. II avaitliO sa douceur 
size and majestic deportment. The god- et safierte, avec sa taille et sa demarche 
dess understood that it vms Telemachus ( majestueuse. La deesse compritlTt que 
the son of that hero, but she could not find fetaitliO Telemaque fils de ce heros, 
out who that venerable man vms by whom mais elle ne £>«£l37'decouvrir qui etaitHO 
Telemachus was accompanied. cet homme venerable dont Telemaque 

etaitliO accompagne. 

Now, if we select from the above passage the facts that constitute the ground of 
the narration, we shall find them to be these : 

Calypso, standing on her island, perceived the wreck of a ship ; then she descried 
two men, the one young and the other old. She understood the young one to be Te- 
lemachus, but she could not recognise the other. And the verbs expressing these 
facts are in the perfect. The verbs which form only incidents, such as the description 
of Calypso and her island, of Telemachus and his shipwreck, and which might be 
left out of the narration, without impairing it, but not without stripping it of its 
beauties, are in the imperfect. 

Let us examine another piece of the same author, in which there will be more nar- 
ration, and less description, or more facts and fewer incidents. 

Telemachus, relating the manner in which he escaped the danger of being taken 
by the Trojan fleet, says : 

The affability and the courage of the La douceur et le courage du sage 
sage Mentor charmed me ; but I was still Mentor me charmerent ;137 mais je/z«137 
more surprised, when I saw with what ad- encore bien plus surpris, quand je vis]37 
dress he delivered us from the Trojans, avec quelle adresse il nous delivraizi 
At the moment when the skies began to des Troyens. Dans le moment ou le ciel 
clear, and the Trojans, having a nearer commencaitl38 a s'eclaircir et que les 
view of us, would infallibly have known Troyens, nous voyant de plus pres, n* 
us ; he observed one of their ships that was auraient pas manque de nous reconnai- 
almost similar to ours, which the storm tre ; il remarqualZl unde leurs vaisseaux 
had separated from the rest. Her poop qui etaitliO presque semblable au notre, 
tvas adorned with particular flowers. He et que la tempete avaitliO ecarte. La 
hastened to put upon our poop garlands of poupe^en etaitHO courormee'de certaines 
flowers similar to theirs. He fastened them fleurs! II se hdtalSl de mettre sur notre 
himself with fillets of the same colour as poupe des couronnes de fleurs sembla- 
those of the Trojans. He ordered all our bles. II les attachalZl lui meme avec 
rowers to stoop as much as they could des bandelettes de la meme couleur que 
along their benches, that they might not celles des Troyens. II ordonnal37 a 
be known by the enemy. In this manner touts nos rameurs de se baisser le plus 
we passed through the middle of their fleet, qu'ils pourraient le long^de leurs bancs, 
and whilst they were driven by the impet- pour n'etre point recormus des ennemis. 

22* 



258 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

to the period mentioned, or alluded to ; for though I should 
say, 

Tetais malade ce matin. I was ill this morning. 

Tavais hier grand mal a la tete, I had a bad head-ache yesterday, 
I would not say, 

Tetais malade, but j'ai ete malade toute la matinee ; 

V avals mal a la tete, but j'eus mal a la tete toute la journee ; 

Because the state which 1 describe is known to have ended 
with the period mentioned, viz. la matinee, la journee. 

EXERCISE- 

Where were you yesterday 1 I calledl37 at208 your house, but 
Oil hier I 266 n.b. , 

you were not in. I was not well. I had a head-ache ; and as I 
y54 241 24 mal a la tete 5 comme 

could not study, I wentl37 to walk in the fields. There had been a 
, aller 172 263 213 II 240 un 

little rain. The plants were so fresh, the trees were so green, and 
peu pluie. si fraiche29, vert29, 

formed such an agreeable shade, and the flowers spread so sweet32 a 
former si * 32 ombrage, repandre douce 3S 

smell, that I could not be tired with admiring the beautiful landscape 
odeur, — se lasser 168 admirer 154 beau33 paysage 

which surrounded me. I wished to stay longer41 ; but it was late, I 

entourer 172 rester long-terns ; tard, 

was tired, and I had a long way to go. 
lasser, chemin a faire. 



Future Positive. 

*7'Aurai, I shall, will have, ) soon, by and by, to-morrow, next 
Je Serai, I shall, will be, > week, next month, next year r 
Je Parlerai, I shall, will speak; j &c. in any time to come. 

141. The future tense is used in french as in english, to 
express what is to happen in a time to come ; as, 

I will call upon you by and by. Je passerai tantot chez vous. 



uosity of the winds towards Africa, We En cet etat nous passdmesl37 au milieu 
made all our endeavours to reach the de leur flotte, et pendant que les vents 
neighbouring coast of Sicily. There indeed impetueux les poussaient\38 vers l'Af- 
we arrived; but, &c. rique, nous jfiwies 137 les derniers efforts 

pour arriver sur la cote voisine de Sicile. 

Nous y arrivamesl37 en effet ; mais, &c. 

Fenelon. 

The narrative part of this history is ; the affability, &c. of the sage Mentor charmed 
me, but I was still more surprised when I saw with what address he delivered us from 
the Trojans. He observed one of their ships with flowers on her poop. He hastened 
to put similar flowers upon ours. .He fastened ttiem himself with fillets of the same 
colour as those of the Trojans. He ordered all our rowers to stoop along their 
benches, that we might not be known by the enemy. In this manner we passed 
through the middle of their fleet, and made all our efforts to reach the coast of Sicily, 
where we arrived, &c. by which you see that all the verbs which are necessary to tho 
train of the narration, because they declare facts, are in the perfect tense, those wbicte 
denote only incidents, are" in the imperfect. 

* Turn ; a shade so agreeable. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB, 259 

EXERCISE. 

When will you call upon me 7 I will call to-night. I shall not be 

Quand 266 58 235 

in. I shall be in the country. I will (set out) after dinner. 
y54 230 partir dine. 

142. The present tense is sometimes used in both languages, 
instead of the future : so we say, 

Ou allez-voxxs ce soir 1 Where do you go this evening? 
for, Oil irez-vous ce soir 1 Where shall you go this evening ? 

N.B. But if two verbs denoting futurity come in the same 
sentence, the second verb can not be put in the present tense 
in french, as it is sometimes in english, it must be put in the 
future; as, 

Call upon me, when you are ready ; 
the time for calling and for being ready, having yet to come 7 
I would not say in french, 

Passez chez moi } quand vous etes pret, 
which would denote that the person is ready at the time I am 
speaking ; I must say, 

Passez chez moi, quand vous serez pret, i.e. when you will be 
I ivill call as soon as I have dined. [ready, 
Je passerai aussi tot que 'faurai dine ; not, aussi tot que fai dine, 

which would denote that the person had dined at the time 
he is speaking. 

This generally happens after the words when, as. soon as, 
as long, as after, 

EXERCISE. 

Where do you dine to-day 1 Do you go to the play to-night 1 
Ou diner comedie 235 

No, we go to a ball. Call upon me as soon as you can. We shall 
191 , bal. 266 43 tot 43 pouvoir. 

begin as43 soon as you are come. When you are ready, we will 
commence r 43 arrive. . pret, 

go and take a walk.263 You shall not (go out) till after we have 

— (nn) N.B. ne sortir que apres que 

done. We will go as soon as you will. I hope we shall see you 
finir. partir 43 tot 43 221 

oftener,41 when we are in the country. Come as often as you can. 
souvent a 230 43 43 

I will call upon you every time that I go (that way). 
266 104 fois 74 par la. 



Future Conditional. 

./'Aurais, I should, would have, ) if I could, if I would, if I 
Serais, I should, would be, > had time, if such a 

Parlerais, I $hould i would speak;} thing happened. 



143. The conditional lias also the same properties infreneb 



260 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



as in english ; it denotes that a thing would be done, if some 
condition was granted ; as, 

I would call there, if I could. J'y passcrais, si je pouvais. 

EXERCISE. 

I should like much to go to Franc**. What would you do, if you 
fort 169 83 faire, 

were there ? You would not have any pleasure. You could not un- 
y 54 plaisir. en- 

derstand the language. I think I should soon 183 learn it. 
tendre langue. 231 bientot 

144. After the conjunction if, si ; shall, will must not be 
considered as signs of the future, nor should, would as signs of 
the conditional of the verb which follows them ; will is then 
the present tense, and would the imperfect of the verb to will, 
to be willing, and they must be expressed, will by the present, 
and would by the imperfect of the verb vouloir, with the fol- 
lowing verb in the infinitive in french ; as, 

I will go with you, if you will come with me ; 
i. e. if you are willing to come, {gg) 

JHrai avec votts, si vous voulez venir avec moi.* 

I tvould go with you, if you vjould come with me ; 
i. e. if you were willing to come. 

Tirais avec vous, si vous vouliez venir avec moi.* 

N. B. If should is the sign that follows if, it must be left 
out, and the following verb put in the imperfect ; as, 

If he should come, what should I say to him 1 
S'il venait, que lui dirais-je 1 

exercise. 

1 will go with you j if you will come with me. I would go with you, 

t 58 , 58 t 

if you would come with me. I will teach you french, if you will 
t t enseigner fran^ais, t 



(gg) If si is used for whether ; shall, will must be expressed by the future, and 
should, would by the conditional ; as, 

Do you know whether he will come? Savez-vous s f il vicndra ? 

I want to know whether he would come. Je veux savoir s' il viendrait. 

* In these examples, you see will used first as a sign of the future of the following 
verb, then as the present of the verb to will ; would fust used as a sign of the con- 
ditional, then as the imperfect of the verb to will. If the learner finds himself em- 
barrassed how to distinguish the verb from the sign, let him try to substitute in 
the place of will, would some verb of the same meaning, i. e. denoting will, wish, in' 
clination, desire, such as, please, like, choose, be willing ; and he will know by the 
sense it will make, which is the verb, and which is the sign. See also note * page 
130. 

fObserve, that in the sentences where if occurs, there are generally two will, or two 
would: that vjill which follows if is the present, and would is the imperfect of the 
verb to will, to be willing, (see page 130,) and they must be expressed by the corres- 
ponding tenses of the verb vouloir, which then governs the following verb in the 
infinitive ; the other wiU is the sign of the future, and the other would is the sign of 
the conditional of the following verb, which must also be expressed by the corres- 
ponding tenses, i. e. the Future or the Conditional of that verb in french. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



261 



learn it. I would teach you french, if you would learn it. How 

apprendre * ? * 

long do you think that I should be in learning- it, if I should begin 

186 penser a apprendre , 144n.b. commencer 

now ? You may learn it in six months, if you will take pains. You 

178 215 - , * prendre de la peine, 

might learn it in six months, if you would take pains. I will be obliged 
178 215 * oblige 

to you, if you will call upon me to-morrow. 183 I would be (very 
(o) 54 , * 266 demain. n.b. tres 

much) obliged to you, if you would call upon me. 

• — (o) , * 265 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

It has been said, (p. 252,) that when we declare that a thing 
is or is not, or that it is in our power to have it so, that mode of 
expression is called indicative, or declarative ; but if the thing 
spoken of is not asserted to be or not to be ; if it is mentioned 
only as a thing which may or may not be, and is not to be 
depended upon, this mode of expression is called potential, 
conjunctive, or subjunctive, t 



* See note t page 260. 

t A few examples will make the difference between the indicative and subjunctive 
moods more obvious : 

They say that peace is made. I believe that peace is made. 

By these expressions I declare, in a positive manner, that, in the opinion of some 
person, the thing of which I am speaking (peace) does or does not exist, and this pos- 
itive assertion must be made with the indicative ; thus, 

On dit que la paix est faite. Je crois que la paix est faite. 

But by these expressions, 

Do they say that peace is made 1 I do not believe that peace is made; 
I do not assert that peace does or does not exist ; I either declare that I am ignorant 
of it, or that I doubt its existence ; but a thing may exist, though I am ignorant of it ; 
it may exist, though I am not convinced of its existence, and this uncertainty, whether 
the thing is or is not, is imparted to the hearer by means of the subjunctive mood : 
Dit-on que la paix soit faite 1 Je ne crois pas que la paix soit faite. 

Again, 

I know somebody who will lend me money. He promised that he would lend me some. 
These axe positive assertions, and they must be made with the indicative ; 
Je connais quelqu'un qui me pretera de l'argent. 
II a promis qu'il m'en preterait. 
But in these other instances ; 

I seek for somebody who will lend me money ; 
Do you know any body who would lend me money ? 
it is not asserted whether the thing I am speaking of, will, or will not be, i. e. wheth- 
er the money will be lent or not ; the event remains uncertain, and this uncertainty 
must be expressed by the subjunctive ; 

Je cherche quelqu'un qui me prete, or qui veuille me preter de l'argent. 
Connaissez-vous quelqu'un qui voulut me preter de l'argent 1 
The indicative mood (says Harris) which, in all grammars, is the first in order, is 
also the first, both in dignity and use ; it is this which publishes our sublimest per- 
ceptions, which exhibits the soul in her purest energies, superior to the imperfections 
of desires and wants, which includes the whole of time and its minutest distinctions. 
As to the potential (subjunctive) mood, it is only of a subordinate nature, and it im- 
plies but a dubious and conjectural assertion ; whereas that of the indicative is abso- 
lute, and without reserve. (Hermes, page 158, 159.) 



262 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



145. If we speak of an action the event of which is uncer- 
tain, which is generally the case when, in a sentence of two 
parts connected by the conjunction que, the first part is either 
interrogative or negative, or is attended by some expression 
denoting doubt ; as for example when I say ; 

Do you think your sister will come ? 

I do not think she will come to-day. 

// 1 hear that she comes, I will let you know ; 

I which instances it remains uncertain whether the person 
will come or not ; this uncertainty is imparted in french, by 
putting the verb in the second part of the sentence in the sub- 
junctive ; thus, 

Pensez-vous que votre soeur vienne ? not, viendra. 

Je ne pense pas qu'elle vienne aujourd'hui; not, viendra. 

Si j'apprends qu'elle vienne, je vous le ferai savoir. 

Viendra and vient would assert as a fact, what the first 
part of the sentence shows to be doubtful. 

N. B. With respect to interrogative sentences, it must- be 
observed, that it is only when we wish to impart ignorance or 
doubt of the thing inquired after, that the subjunctive is re- 
quired after them ; for if we knew that a thing is or will be, 
and only enquired whether the person to whom we speak 
knows it likewise, we should use the indicative ; as, 

Do you not believe that she will come ? Ne croyez-vous pas qu'elle viendra ? 
Do not you know that she is married 1 Ne savez-vous pas qu'elle est mariee? 

which sentences express the same idea as these ; 

She will come, do you not believe it ? She is married, do not you know it ? 
EXERCISE. 

I think it will rain soon 1 Do not you think it willTO 1 It will 

221 pleuvoir bientot. 221 n.b. 

perhaps rain a little, but I a"o not think that it will rain much. If 

183 unpeu, (bb) n.b. 

I thought that it would not rain, I would stop, but there is no appear- 

140 — 140, rester, 246 190 

ance that it will be line to-day. I will (come again), if I find that it 
240 revenir, trouver 

does not rain. Do you not think that I did well to go before the 

(M)n.b. 136 de s'en aller 218 

rain came 1 Do not you think that I should have been wet, if 
pluie venir ? (M)n.b. monille, 

I had stayed longer ? 
140 rester 41 

146. The subjunctive mood is required after all verbs and 
adjectives, denoting will, wish, desire, command, fear, won- 
der, surprise, astonishment, joy, gladness, grief, sorrow, in 
short, after all expressions which denote any passion or emo- 
tion of the mind ;* as, 



* The ingenious Mr. Harris, {Hermes, pages 15, 16,) gives the following defini- 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



263 



I will have you do that. 
I icish you may succeed. 
I desired it to be got ready. 
I am afraid he will spoil it. 
I am surprised he is not here. 
I am glad you are come. 
I am sorry he not seen it. 



Je veux que vous fassiez cela. 
Je souhaite que vous reussissicz. 
J'ai ordonne qu'on le prepare, 
Je crains qu'il ne le gate. 
Je suis surpris qu'il ne s<?i£ pas ici. 
Je suis bienaise que vous venu. 
Je suis /acAe qu'il ne I'ai7 pas vu. 



I am glad221 you are here. I wish221 my brother would come. I 
bien aise ici. 180 

wonder that he is not yet arrived. I am afraid221 some misfor- 
s'etonner (bb) n.b. encore — craindre quelque 

tune hasl95 befallen him. It62 is a pity that somebody didlSG 
238 arrive lui55 n.b. 24 dommage (66)n.b. 95 238 

not £0 with him. I am surprised that he has not written to me. I am 

alle 58 surpris (o) 55 

sorry that he wentl36 there without my knowing it. I would have 
fache 238 y 55 218 je susse 156 54 

taken care that he should be treated as he deserves, 
soin — 92 traiterl49 comme meriter. 

147. The subjunctive mood is also required in french after 
the following verbs and adjectives, though they neither de- 
note doubt nor passion ; 

I must see him. 

It is time that I should see him. 
He is the only friend I have. 
It is becoming J 
It is material £ that I should go. 
I It is better 

I It is sufficient 

- que je lui parte. It is fit 
I It is necessary 

) It is indifferent 

' que cela soit. It is cruel \ that it should be 
I It is shameful ) [so. 



■ que j'y aille. 



li faut que je le voie. 
II est terns que je le voie. 
C'est le seul ami que ^aie. 
II convient ] 
II importe 
II vaut mieux ] 
II suffit 
II est a propos 
II est necessaire ] 
II est indifferent i 
II est cruel 
II est honieux 



ir 



X I 



speak to 
[him. 



tion of the powers of the soul, which may throw some light 'upon this intricate 
subject. 

The powers of the soul may be included in those of perception, and those of volition. 

Ey the powers of perception, 1 mean the sense and the intellect. By the powers of 
volition, 1 mean not only the will, but the several passions and appetites ; in short, 
all that moves to action, whether rational or irrational. 

If the leading powers of the soul be these two, it is plain that every speech or sen- 
tence, as far as it exhibits the soul, must of course respect one or other of these. 

If we assert, then it is a sentence which respects the powers of perception; for 
what, indeed, is it to assert, but to publish some perception, either of the senses, or of 
the intellect ? 

If we interrogate, if we command, if we pray, if we wish, what do we but publish so 
many different volitions I for, Who is it that questions ? He who has a desire to be in- 
formed. Who is it that commands ? He who has a will, which he would have obeyed. 
What are those beings who either wish or pray ? Those who feel certain wants, either 
for themselves or for others. 

If then the souVs leading powers be the two above mentioned, and if it be true that 
all speech is a publication of these powers, it will follow, that every sentence will be 
either a sentence of assertion, or a sentence of volition. 

To this may be added that sentences of assertion require the indicative, and sen- 
tences of volition require the subjunctive mood after them. 



264 SYNTAX OF THE VERS. 

II est juste "] It is just "\ 

gsss ussst K^fiStt 

II est impossible J It is impossible J 

After an adjective in the superlative degree, (see 50 rule.) 
After nen, aucun,pas un, ptfrsonne, (note cZtf, p. 239.) 
After quelque, qui que ce soit, quoi que ce soit, (114, 115, 117, 
118 rules.) 

After the conjunctions afinque, quoique, &c. (see 218 rule.) 

EXERCISE. 

It is time that we should go. 148 I must be ready to-night. I must 

s'enaller.* 181 pret 235 

(set out) to-morrow. It62 is fit that I should see in what state 
partir n.b. apropos 148 82 etat 

my affairs are. It62 is impossible that they should be so bad as I am 

affaires n.b. 62 14S mal que 92 

told. It62 is shameful that my partner does not write to me. Is it62 
dire. n.b. honteux associe (o) N.B. 

necessary that you should go yourself 1 Is it62 not enough that you 

148 (m) n.b. — n.b. suffire 
write to him % I. think it would be better that you should sendl49 

(o) 221 valoir mieux yTOenvoyer 

somebody. I do not know any body whom I can send. I must either 

95 97 145 y 70 181 ou 

go myself, or I must send my brother. He is the only man whom I 
y 70 (m) N.B.,f y 70 65 seul 

can trust.202 It62 is indifferent whether I go or not. 
me fier a203 n.b. que y 70 non. 

Tenses of the Subjunctive. 

The subjunctive mood being always subordinate to a verb 
that precedes it,t its tenses are regulated by this foregoing 
verb. 

Present Tense- 
J* Aie, I have, may have, ) 

Je Sois, I be, may be, > used after the present and future 
' Je Parle, I speak, may speak ; ) of the indicative. 

148. The present of the subjunctive is used, when the verb 
which requires the subjunctive after it, is in the present or 
future of the indicative ; as, 

JJ Do vou ( * s ^ a ^ ^ ave ^ me * ( ^ ue i' a ™ * e tems ' 

$ think \ * *^ a ^ ^ e rea( ty ? Pensez-vous 1 que je sois pret 1 
~ ( I shall speak to her 1 ( que je lui parte ? 



* See the reflective verb s y en Alter t page 103. 

t Except in some sentences of wish, where tne verb wish is understood ; as, 
God be blessed ! Dieu soit beni ! 

May you be happy !" Puissicz-voua etre heureux ! 

Would to God I had never seen him ! Plut a dieu que je ne V eusse jamais vu ? 



' SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 265 

^ tt 77 C till I have time ; ( que j'aie le terns ; 

5 ae wlu I till I am ready ; II attendra \ que je sois pret ; 

* wait. ^ tilJ j s ^ eak t0 her> ^ q Ue j e lui 

EXERCISE. 

Do you think your sister will come 1 I (am afraid) she will not be 
221 145 craindre 221 146 

here to-day. Somebody must go and fetch her. He will be back 
zei 95 181 (nn) chercher . de retour 

before we begin. It62 is fit that somebody should go for her before 
218 n.b. a propps 95 147 * 54 218 

it is too Tate, 
trop 

Perfect Tense. 

J' Eusse, I had, might have, C used after the perfect, 
Je Fusses, I were, might be, ■? imperfect, and condi- 
Je Parlasse, I spoke, might speak ; ( tional tenses. 

149. The perfect of the subjunctive is used, when the verb 
which requires the subjunctive after it, is in the perfect, imper- 
fect, or conditional ; as, 

^ tt ( till I had time ; f que f 'eusse le terns; 

S> '? H \ ^ * was reac ^y 5 ^ attendit < que je fusse pret ; 

~ wat 6 ' { till I spoke to her. f que je lui parlasse. 

g tt ( till I had time ; ( que feusse le terns 3 

<-d tie .^? as ) till I should be ready ; II attendait 1 que je fusse pret ; 

3 waiting, f tin j sh , d sp , k tQ her> ^ que Je lui par i asset 

O TJ7 7 , ( till I had time *? ( que j'ewwele terns'? 

o w<wMfl * tin j be ready ri Mien g ra ii ii 5 que j e f usse pr $ t 2 

8? ne wait ( till I sh'd sp'k to her 1 ( que je lui parlasse ? 

EXERCISE. 

I did not think221 my sister would havel45 come. I (was afraid) 
140 238 156 craindre 221 

she would not be here in time. It62 was that which made me wish 
146 a terns. n.b. 140 89 74 faisait 

that somebody would go for her. He might have returned before the 

(66)n.b. 95 146 * 54 179 265 218 

play began. It62 would be a pity221 she should not see it62 after 

piece commencer. n.b. — dommage 146 t 

waiting 154 so long. 

avoir attendu 

150. N. B. The perfect of the subjunctive is also used, 
though the foregoing verb is in the present of the indicative, 
if after the subjunctive there is another verb in the imperfect, 
or some conditional expression ; as, 

Do you think I might speak to her, if I went now 1 
Pensez-vous que je pusse lui parler, si j'y allais a present 1 



* Go for is expressed by Aller chercher, not Allerpour. 

23 



266 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

I do not think I should have succeeded without your assistance. 

Je ne pense pas que j'eusse reussi sans votre secours ; 
i. e. if you had not assisted me. 

And also when the action expressed by the verb is past ; as, 

It is no wonder that he was wicked. 

II n'est pas etonnant qu'il fit mechant. 

EXERCISE. 

Do you think your sister would come, if I went for her now % It62 
221 145 ^ aller* t 54 n.b. 

is not probable that she would havel45 gone there, if she had not been 

288 ' 158 y 55, * 92 

invited. 159 I do not think we should have seen her, if it had not 
inviter. 221 145 159 55, ce * 

been for you. I do not think we should. 

a cause de 58 J 

151. If, after a verb in the subjunctive, there is another 
verb, preceded by the conjunction que, that verb must also be 

in the subjunctive ; as, 

Dou you think she expects that I shall come ? 
Pensez-vous qu'elle s'attende que je vienne ? 

EXERCISE. 

Do you think she expectsl45 that I shall see her again ? I wonder 
221 s'attendre revoir s'etonner221 

she couldl79 have thought that I was capable (of it.) 
ait 146 pu penser en 54 

GERUND OR PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

Ayant, having, ) N. Ay ant. etant, never change their 
Etant, being, ) termination. 
Parlant, speaking ; 

152. The gerund or present participle, joined to a noun, 
generally denotes quality, and, like an adjective, agrees with 
it in gender and number ; 

She is a charming woman. C'est une femme charma?ite. 
She has engaging manners. Elle a des manieres engageantes . 

EXERCISE. 

A charming girl, with a moving voice, singing her growing 
charmant 32 , de touchant 32 , 153 naissant 32 

love, in seekingl53 her wandering sheep, heard some threatening 
amours, f. en chercher errant 32 brebis entendre menacant 32 

words followed by piercing cries. I heard her trembling steps, 
parole suivi 157 200 percant 32 cri. tremblant 32 pas. 

153. But the gerund expressing the action, and not the 



* Was, Were, Had, Did, or any other past tense that comes after if, si, mu6t be in 

the imperfect. 
t Go for is expressed by Aller chercher, not Aller pour. 

X Instead of repeating the verb, the french would say ; Je ne le pense pas non plus. 
t) Again is expressed by re before voir. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



267 



quality of the substantive to which it refers, does not require 
any agreement with it ; as, 

I saw her in coming home. Je la vis en venant au logis. (hh) 
I found them in walking here. Je les trouvai en mepromenantici. 

N. B. If the substantive to which the gerund refers is the ob- 
ject of the verb, it is better to express it with the indicative ; 
thus, 

I found her coming here. Je la trouvai qui venait ici. 
I saw them walking. Je les vis qui se promenaient. 

EXERCISE. 

A woman wandering through the country ,280 (lost her way.) Some 

errant a travers compagne, s'egarer. 

men piercing through the crowd and threatening to kill her, she 
percant — foule menacant 168 tuer , 

fled trembling. We met a woman wandering through the country, 
s'enfuir en errer a travers 230 

We heard a man threatening to kill her. We saw some huntsmen 
menacer 168 chasseur 

seeking for a hare, 
chercher — lievre. 

154. The english gerund governed by a verb, or the prepo- 
sitions of, from, at, for, after, with, without, is expressed by 
the infinitive in french ; 

I see him coming. Je le vois venir or qui vient. 

Without bringing his book. Sans apporter son livre. 

I was prevented/r^m doing it. On m'a empeche de \efaire. 

I was tired with waiting. J'etais las d'attendre. 

After having stayed so long. Apr Is avoir reste si long terns. 

I was afraid of being too late. Je craignais d'y etre trop tard. 

EXERCISE. 

I saw you doing it, without taking any pains. I was afraid 
136 , de la peine. craindreHO 

of spoiling it. I blame him for going away, after having promised to 

' gater 200 s'en etre alle, 168 

wait lor me. Be contented with telling himl62 so. There is no 

201 54 — se contenter 200 (i) p. 63. Ie59 246 190 

occasion for (using him ill.) 
lien de maltraiter 54 — 

155. The gerund, so often used in english with the auxilia- 
ry verb be, to render an action more definite, can not be ex- 
pressed by the gerund in french ; the auxiliary verb must be 
left out and the gerund be made into a verb, in the same tense 
and person as the auxiliary verb is ; as, 



(hh) En is the only preposition which the gerund admits before it in french, there- 
fore the preposition by, which is often prefixed to it in english, must be expressed by 
en ; as, 

They saved the city by surrendering. lis sauverent la ville en se rendant. 
You gained his esteem by forgiving him. Vous avezgagne son estime en lui par- 

[donnant. 



268 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

I am speaking. Je parle ; never, Je suis \ 

Thou art speaking. Tu paries ; Tu es / Parlant. See 

He is speaking. II parle ; II est > the conjuga- 

I was speaking. Je parlais ; J'etais I tions, p. 98, 

I shall be speaking. Je parlerai ; Je serai J 

EXERCISE. 

What are you doing there 1 I am reading a novel. You are losing 
83 la ? roman. perdre 

(a deal) of time. What have you been doing, whilst I was dressing 
beaucoup — /'pendant que habiller 

myself % I was waiting for my sister. I am going to dress myself 
me 54 201 178 54 

too. I (am afraid)221 they will be goingl46 before I am ready, 
aussi. craindre 195 — partir 218 pret. 

Make haste, for they are going to (set off) just now. 
se depecher, * car aller 172 partir tout a l'heure. 

156. The gerund, when used as a substantive in english, 
i t e. preceded by an article, can not be expressed by the ge- 
rund in french ; it must be expressed by a noun, if a noun 
synonymous to the verb can be found ; as, 

Let us go a walking. Allons a la promenade. 

Her singing was much admired. Son chant fut fort admire. 

He gives all his time to gaming. II donne tout son terns aujeu. 

That is the cause of his being poor. C'est la la cause desapauvrele* 

If a noun synonymous to the verb can not readily be found, 
give another turn to the sentence ; as, 
What is the reason of your coming so late 1 

Quelle est la raison que vous venez si tard 1 i. e. that you come, tyc- 

The impoverishing of some is the enriching of others. 

Ce qui appauvritles uns enrichit les autres - 7 i. e. what impoverishes. 



The reading of good books forms the mind. His having been in- 

lecture 38 former esprit. 

structed (turn ; his instruction) was of great service to him. If a 

; 136 d'un grand (o) 55 

noun synonymous to the verb does not readily!83 occur to the 

aisement se presenter 

mind, you!81 must give another turn to the sentence ; as, I should 
, il n.b. faut tour phrase ; , 

have caught that bird, if it had not been for your making a noise ; 
attraper oiseau, du bruit ; 

(turn ; if you had not made, <frc.) You are the cause of his having 
; fait, &c. 

been punished ; (turn ; that he has been punished.) What is the reason 

; ; . 82 raison 

for your being so angry with him 1 turn ; that you are so angry. 

fache 200 1 ; 



* See the Imperative of a reflective verb, page 100. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



269 



PAST PARTICIPLE. 

Eu, had, 1 

Ete, been, > N. B. Ete never varies its termination. 
Parle, spoken; ) 

157. The past participle joined to a noun, has the property 
of an adjective, and agrees in gender and number with that 
noun ; 

A well made man. v Un homme bien fait. 

A well made woman. Une femme bien faite. 

After the auxiliary verbs avoir and etre, a distinction must 
be made. 

EXERCISE. 

A married29 man. A married woman. Well brought up children, 
marier n.b. 32 bien elever 32 — 

Well written letters. New built32 houses. Roasted potatoes. 

ecrire 32 nouyellement batir rotir 32 pommes de terre. 

158. After etre, to be, the past participle must be of the 
same gender and number as the nominative of the verb ; ex. 

11 est bien fait. Us sont bien fails. 

Elle est bien faite. Elles sont bien faites. 

EXERCISE. 

That man is married. That woman is married. Those children 
marier. (bb) 

are well brought up. These letters are well written. The potatoes 
eleA^er — 

are not done enough. Those houses are very well built, 
cuire 163 tres batir. 

159. After avoir, to have, the past participle does not agree 
with the nominative of the verb ; so we say, 

II a bien fait. lis ont bien fait. 

Elle a bien fait. Elles ont bien fait. 

In these instances you must consider whether the partici- 
ple has an object, and whether this object comes before or after 
the participle. 

If the participle cornes before its object, it does not require 
any agreement with it ; but if it comes after the object, it must 
agree like an adjective in gender and number with that object ; 
ex. 

Participle before its object. 
My brother has made a mistake. Mon frere &fait une faute. 
My sister has made a mistake. Ma sceur a fait une J uute. 
My brothers have made a mistake. Mes freres ont fait une faute. 

Participle after its object. 
Here is the mistake he has made. Voici Id, faute qu'il a faitk. 
Here is the mistake, she has made. Voici la faute qu'elle a faite. 
Here is the mistake they have made. Voici la faute qu'ils ont faite. 
23* 



270 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

N. B. Observe that the participle agrees only with its direct object (see 162 rule) ; 
for if the object is governed by a preposition expressed or understood, the participle 
does not agree with that object ; so, though we say, II nnus a vu&, He has seen us ; 
we could not say, II nous a dits des nouvelles, He has told us news ; we must say, II 
nous a dit ; because nous is here used for a nous, to us. 

EXERCISE. 

My mother has invited your Sisters. Your sisters have invited my 
invite 

mother; the participle invite must not change its masculine termina- 
devoir changer sa 32 terminai- 

tion; except when the past participle comes after the participle ete, 
son ; excepte 32 

Been, serving with avoir, to form a compound tense ; for then it agrees 
been, servant , 169 former compose 32 terns; car alors s'accorder 

with the nominative of avoir ; as, My sister ha^ been invited. My 

; , ete invite. 

brothers have been invited. My sisters have been invited. I have 

lost my watch. I have not found it. I have found a watch. It is 
perdre montre. trouver 55 65 

not that which I have lost. I have sent you a letter. I have not 

88 envoyer 55 lettre 

received it. Have you not received the letter which I have sent you \ 
recevoir 55 55 
We have sold our house, but we have bought another. (That is) the 

vendre maison, en 70 acheter une autre. 247 
house which we have sold, and (this is) the other which we have 

247 

bought. We have gained a complete3>2 victory. Have you heard 

remporter complet 20 victoire. entendu parler ' 

of the victory which we have gained % We have destroyed or taken 

detruire prendre 

all the enemy's 25ships. (Here are) the frigates which we have taken, 
ennemi vaisseau. 247 fregate 

(Here is) the person to whom I have written the letter of which I have 

247 personne 76 74 

spoken to you. It mentions a victory to which we have not 
(o) 55 62 faire mention d' 76 

contributed a little. OverSOO (how many) powerful 32 enemies have 
contribuer — peul83 De combien puissant 29 

we not triumphed ! 
triompher ! 

160. Sometimes after (he participle preceded by an object, 
there is a verb in the infinitive, then it is necessary to con- 
sider whether the object is governed by the participle, or by 
the infinitive which follows it. 

If the object is governed by the participle, the participle 
must be of the same gender and number as that object ; ex. 

The letter I have given him to copy. 
La lettre que je lui ai donnee a copier. 

If the object is governed by the infinitive which follows the 
participle-, the participle has no agreement with the object ; as 



SYNTAX OP THE VERB* 2?1 

The letter I have told him to copy. 
La feftre que je lui ai dit de copier.* 

EXERCISE. 

Have you finished the letter which I had given you to write ^ Have 

140 55 169 

you finished the letter which you had begun to Write 1 Have you 

, 140 * 168 

read the books which I had lent you to read 1 Have you read the 
140 preter * 55 169 

books which I had advised you to read 1 Is that the actress 
coViseiller * 55 166 Est-ce la actrice 

whom we heardl36 sing? Sing the song which we heard her55 sing. 
s entendre * chanter ? chanson 136 *■ lui 

(These are) the figures which I have lately learned to draw. 1 
247 dernierement * 169 dessiner. 

still 184 see the same faults which you had resolved to avoid, 
encore faute 140 resoudre * 168 eviter. 

161. The participles plu, pleased; du, owed, ought; pu^ 
been able; and voulu, been willing ; clo not agree with the ob- 
ject that precedes them, because the infinitive of the forego-* 
ing verb is understood after them ; ex. 

Je lui ai rendu touts les services que j'ai pu, lui rendre understood. 
I have done him all the services that I have been able, to do understood. 

EXERCISE. 

You have not written this letter so well as you ought. You have 

42 42 177 

had all the time and all the assistance that you wished.136 I have 
terns secours 74 vouloir, 

taken all the pains that I could. 136 
29 peine 74 pouvoir. 

GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. 

A word is said to govern another, when the word govern-' 
ing obliges the governed to conform to certain rules. 

162. When a verb governs two substantives (see note f 
page 201) one of them is the direct object of the verb, and 
does not require any preposition ; the other is an indirect ob- 
ject, and requires a preposition, expressed before a noun, and 
generally implied in the pronouns! ; as, 

I gave her a nosegay. Je lui ai donne un bouquet. 

Qi. I gave what 1 A. a nosegay. To whom ? to her. 

Nosegay is the direct object of the verb ; to her is the indirect. 

* If you are uncertain whether the object is governed by the participle, or by the 
infinitive which follows it, transpose the words, and see after which the object may 
more properly be placed. 

If the object can be placed after the participle^ as in the first instance, The letter I 
have given him to copy, which may be turned, I have given him the letter to copy ; the 
participle given governs the object letter, and it must agree with it. 

If the object comes more properly after the infinitive, as in the second instance, 
The letter I have told him to copy, which might be turned J have told him to copy the 
tetter, (not, the letter to copy,) the object letter is governed by the infinitive to copy, and 
the participle has no agreement with it. 

t See a table of the pronouns, page 58v 



272 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

Do not tell your mother of it. Ne le dites pas a votre mere. 
Do not tell what? do not tell it. To whom? to your mother ; 
For it is the thing you tell, not the person you tell it to, which is the object of the 
verb. , 

EXERCISE. 

Has your sister given my brother any money 1 (turn ; given money 
134 I ; 

to my brother.) Yes, she has lent him55 some ; (i. e. some to him.) 

, preter (I) p. 63 (p) ; (o) 

Did he ask her for it 1 (turn ; did he ask it to her ?) No, it62 was 

136 55 * 59 ; (o) * 191, n.b. 140 

she who offered it55 him ; (i. e. it to him.) They have requested me 

offrirl36 (i)p.63; (o) prier 

to buy them books, (to buy books to them,) and to send them to 

168 (i) p. 63. , (o) 168 (o) 

them ; but I will not send them any ; (any to them.) Have they 

; (i) p. 63, (p) ; 

returned your sister (to your sister) those which she had lent them 55^ 

265 n.b. (66) 140 159 (i)p. 63 

No, they have70 not; i. e. returned them to her. 

, N.B. ; (o) 

163. When a verb governs two objects, the direct object is 
generally placed before the indirect ; as, 

I gave your sister a nosegay. J' ai donne un bouquet a votre sozur. 
Yet the indirect object must be placed first, if by placing it 
last, it made the meaning equivocal ; for example, we say, 
Elle a jete son bouquet dans la rue. 

She has thrown her nosegay into the street ; but we do not say: 
Elle a jete le bouquet que vous lui aviez donne dans la rue. 

She has thrown the nosegay which you had given her into 
the street ; because, dans la rue, after donne, might be under- 
stood that the nosegay was given in the street, not that it was 
thrown into the street ; we say : 

Elle a jete dans la rue, le bouquet que vous lui aviez donne. 

She has thrown into the street, the nosegay which you had given her.t 

EXERCISE. 

I have brought your brother a very entertaining book. He must 
162 amusant32 181 

dedicate all the time that he can spare to study. How can he expect 
dormer 74 pouvoir — etude 185 s'attendre 

to learn unless!95 he pays all the attention he can to his books 1 
168 218 n.b. 'faire 29 (s) 

Have you lent my sister any money 1 She intends to present 

162 avoirl25 dessein de faire present 

your brother with a book. He gives his friends (a great deal) of 

162 de 162 — beaucoup 

trouble. Tell herl62 that I will send her children some fruit, 
peine. (I) p. 63. (&6)n.b. 162 



* See note II page 207. 

t The English should pay particular attention to this rule j they are very apt to act 
contrary to it, both in speaking and writing. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 273 
Take the parcel which I have brought into the parlour. Have you 

256 paquet salon 

sent the letter which 1 gave you to the (post office 1) 
136 55 poste 

164. The same noun may be governed by two verbs which 
are both used without a preposition, or which require both the 
same preposition ; as, 

They attacked and took the place. lis attaquerent et prirent la place. 

But if one of the verbs requires a preposition after it, and 
the other does not, or if the two verbs require different prepo- 
sitions, the noun must be made the object of theirs* verb, 
and an objective pronoun must be added for an object to the 
second verb ; so we could not say : 

lis attaquerent et se rendirent maitres de la place. 

They attacked and m,ade themselves masters of the place ; 
because Rendre maitre requires a preposition after it, and At- 
taquer does not ; we say : 

lis attaquerent la place, et s'en rendirent maitres. 

They attacked the place, and made themselves masters of it. 

EXERCISE. 

I hate and despise that young man. He is always talking and 
hair mepriser (bb) ' 184* parlerI55 

boastingl55 of what he does. He is always opposing and (finding 
se vanter 84 faire. 184 * s'opposerl55 trouverl25 

fault) with what other people do. I hate that young man, and I 
a redire a les autres — 39 faire. (bb) , se 

mistrust him. He is always talking about what other people do, 
mefier de 56 184 155 200 les autres — 39 , 

and finding fault (with it.) 
155 a redire y54 

165. The same verb may likewise govern several parts of 
a sentence, provided they are used in the same sense ; as, 

I expect much from him, but still more from you. 
T attends beaucoup de lui, mais encore plus de vous. 

But if one of the parts is affirmative, and the other negative, 
the verb must be repeated in the second part ; as, 

I expect every thing from you, and nothing from him. 
J 'attends tout de vous, et je attends rien de lui. 

EXERCISE. 

As our reputation depends much (upon200 the) caprice of men, but 
dependre du , 

still more upon our actions. Our reputation does not depend (upon20G 
encore de du 

the) caprice of men, but it depends upon our good or our bad actions, 

, 62 200 



* Put this adverb after the second verb. 



274 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



All man are equal ; it62 is not brith, is virtue alone) which makes 

egaux ; n.b. naissance, n.b. 74 

the difference. 

166. Some verbs govern indifferently the infinitive or the 
subjunctive mood ; but if they govern two verbs, they must be 
both in the same mood; as, 

I will prevent him from going, out, and from doing you any harm. 
Je l'empecherai de sortir, et de vous faire du mal ; or 
J'empecherai qu'il ne sorie, et qu ? ii ne vous fasse du mal. 

EXERCISE. 

I am glad to see you, and to have an opportunity to tell you so ; 

bien aise de , 24 occasion 168 59 le 54 ; 

I have ordered the coach to be got ready, and to be brought here ; I 

168 — appreter,* 168 — 256 ; 

have ordered that the coach be got ready, and that they90 bring it 

92 , n.b. 256 54 

here. 

167. Passive verbs require de or par before the noun which 
they govern. They require de, when the verb expresses an 
action wholly of the mind ; as, 

Your brother is loved and esteemed by all who know him. 
Votre frere est aime et estimede touts ceux qui le connaissent. 

They require par, when the bodily faculties participate in 
the action ; as, 

He was beaten by a sailor, and robbed by a soldier. 

II a etc battu par un matelot, et vole par un soldat. 

But instead of these passive expressions, it is better in french 
to use the active sense of the verb, and say : 

Touts ceux qui connaissent votre frere Yaiment et Yestiment. 
All those who know your brother love and esteem him. (ii) 



* Turn ; to get ready the coach, and to bring SfC. 

(ii) Grammarians distinguish three sorts of verbs, which they call active, passive, 

and neuter. 

Active, when the action of the verb passes from the agent to some object ; as, 
/ teach your sister. 

Passive, when the receiver of the action is made the leading power of the verb ; 
this is done by adding the past participle to the auxiliary verb be ; as, 
Your sister is taught by me. 
Neuter, i. e. neither active nor passive, when the whole energy oFthe verb re- 
mains in the agent, and is not communicated to any object ; as, 
/ think, I walk, I stand, I sit, I sleep, $c. 
These distinctions are common to all languages. 

But the English have a facility of changing active verbs into neuter verbs, which the 
French have not ; for example, when I say ; 

We met your brothers quarrelling ; we parted them. 

Here met and parted are active, because the energy of the verbs met, parted passes 
from the agent we, to an object brothers ; if 1 take away the object, and say ; we 
met, we parted ; then met and parted are neuter, because the whole energy of the 
verb remains in the agent we. 

Again ; I opened the door ; here opened is active, because it has an object, door. 

The door opened; here opened is neuter, because the action remains in the door 
itself. 

To leave out this object would not render the verb neuter in French, it would only 
make the sentence incomplete. 

To answer the same end, and give to the verb a neuter signification, the French 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



275 



When two verbs come together, without being joined by a 
conjunction, the latter is governed by the former in the infini- 
tive, sometimes with, and sometimes without a preposition. 

EXERCISE. 

He is blamed by all his friends, and despised by all his neighbours. 

, mepriser voisin. 
She is commended and esteemed by every body. The town was 
louerl58 158 106 237* 

besieged by the Austrians, and afterwards taken 158 by the French. 

assiegerl58 Autrichiens, ensuite prendre 

The houses were plundered by the mob. This news was sentl58 
137* pillerl58 populace. nouvelle 136 envoyer 

to us by my correspondent. The letter is written by a man who was 
(o) correspondant. 158 140 

upon the spot. All his friends blame him, and all his neighbours 

place , 

despise him. Every body commends and esteems her. The Austrians, 
mepriser 106 louer 68 

&c. When two verbs occur in213 the same part of a sentence the 

se rencontrer partie 

latter is governed by the former in the infinitive mood, sometimes 
dernier regir par premier a infinitif — , 

(by the) means of a preposition, and sometimes without it.t 

au moyen preposition. 

The preposition to,Xhe sign of the infinitive mood in eng- 
lish, is expressed by de, d, pour, in french, but not indiscri- 
minately, (kk) 

168. To, before an infinitive, is expressed by de, when it 
can be changed into of or from, and the infinitive into the 
gerund or present participle ; 



add to it an objective pronoun of the same person as the agent or nominative, by which 
means the whole energy of the verb remains in the same being ; hence the number 
of reflective verbs with which the french language abounds : so in the first instance, 

We met your brothers, we parted them ; the French say : 

Nous rencontrdmes vos freres, nous les separames. 
In the second, 

We met ; we parted. Nous nous rencontrdmes ; Nous nous separames ; i. e. we our- 
selves met ; we ourselves parted. 

They stopped me ; lis m , arreterent. They stopped; lis s'arreterent ; i.e. they 
stopped themselves. 

He opened the door ; 11 ouvrit la porte. The door opened ; La porte s'ouvrit ; i. e. 
the door opened itself. 

N. B. The genius of the french language requires also that some verbs which 
have a kind of passive or neuter signification in english, should be made reflective, 
when we wish to show that the action expressed by the verb is not limited to the 
instance of which we speak, but is applicable to all instances of the same kind; for 
example : 

Ce mot n'est pas bien place ; This word is not rightly placed; i.e . in this instance, 

II se place ordinairement avant le verbe ; It is generally placed before the verb ; i. e. 
its usual place is before the verb. These instances may also be expressed by on ; 
on le place ordinairement avant le verbe. See 92 rule. 

* See note ^ p. 256. f Here the noun must be repeated in the place of the 

pronoun, because the personal pronouns after a preposition, can not be used to re- 
present things. See 64 rule. 

(kk) When two verbs come together, without a conjunction between them, the 
latter is governed by the former in the infinitive, whether the sign to be expressed or 
not. 



276 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



N. B. This commonly happens after nouns used in a defi- 
nite sense ; as, 

He has the pleasure of seeing her. II a le plaisir de la voir. 
She has the vanity to think so. Elle a la vanite de le penser.* 



* As this rule does not apply to all instances in which to is expreseed by de, here 
is a list of the verbs and adjectives which require de before the infinitive which fol- 
lows them : 



s' Abstenir de, 


Abstain from. 


se Garder tie, 


Take care to. 


Accuser de, 


Accuse of. 


Gronder de, 


Scold for. 


Achever de, 


Finish to. 


se Hater de, 


Haste to. 


Affecter de 


Affect to. 


Heureux de, 


Happy to. 


Afflige de, 


Afflicted to. 


Impossible de, 


Impossible to. 


Aise de, 


Glad to. 


Incapable de, 


Incapable of. 


Apprehender de, 
s' Attendre, de, a, t 


Fear to. 


Inspirer de, 


Inspire to. 


Expect to. 


Juger a propos de, 


Think proper to. 


Avertir de, 


Warn to. 


Juger de, 


Swear to. 


s' Aviser de, 


Bethink to. 


Juste de, 


Jus* to. 


Blamer de, 


Blame to. 


Lasse de, 


Ttred of, with. 


Capable de, 


Capable of, to. 


Libre de, 


.A* liberty to. 


Cesser de, 


Cease to. 


Mander de, 


Send word to. 


Charger de, 


Charge to. 


Manquer de, 


FaiZ to. 


Charme de. Ravi de, 


Delighted with. 


Menacer de, 


Threaten to. 


Commander de, 


Command to. 


Meriter de, 


Deserve to. 


Commencer de, a, t 


Begin to. 


Necessaire de, 


Necessary to. 


Conjurer de, 


Entreat to. 


Negliger de, 


Neglect to. 


Conseiller de, 


Advise to. 


Offrir de, 


Ojfer to. 


Consoler de, 


Console for. 


Omettre de, 


Om£ to. 


Content de, 


Content to. 


Ordonner de, 


Order to. 


Continuer de, a, t 


Continue to. 


Oublier de, 


Forget to. 


Convaincre de, 


Convince to. 


Pardonner de, 


Forgive for. 


Convanir de, 


Agree to. 


Permettre de, 


Permit to. 


Craindre de, 


Fear to. 


Persuader de, 


Persuade to. 


Curieux de, 


Curious to. 


se Piquer de, 


Pretend to. 


Decourager de, 


Discourage with. 


Plaindre de, 


Pify to, for. 


Defendre de, 


Forbid to. 


Possible de, 


Possible to. 


se Depecher de. 


Make haste to. 


Prescrire de, 


Prescribe to. 


Desesperer de, 


Despair to. 


Presser de, 


Press to. 


Desirer de, 


Wish to. 


Prier de, 


Request to. 


Determiner de, 


Determine to. 


Promettre de, 


Promise to. 


Detourner de, 


Divert from. 


Proposer de, 


Propose to. 


Differer de, 


Defer to, Delay to. 


Recommander de, 


Recommend to. 


Dire de, 


TeZZ to. 


Refuser de, 


Refuse to. 


Discontinuer de, 


Discontinue to. 


Regretter de, 


Regret to. 


Disconvenir de, 


Disown to. 


se Rejouir de, 


Rejoice to. 


Dispenser de, 


Dispense with. 


Remercier de, 


Thank for. 


Dissuader de, 


Dissuade from. 


se Repentir de, 


Repent of, to. 


Doux de, 


Pleasant to. 


Reprocher de, 


Reproach for. 


Ecrire de, 


Wn£e to. 


Resoudre de, 


Resolve to. 


s' Effoicer de, 


Endeavour to. 


Risquer de, 


.R-isA; to. 


Enjoindre de, 


Enjoin to. 


Rougir de, 


.BZusTi to. 


Empecher de, 
s' Empresser de, 


Prevent to. 


Satisfait de, 


Satisfied to, with. 


Eager to. 


Solliciter de, 


Solicit to. 


Ennuye de, 


Tired of. 


Sommer de, 


Summon to. 


Enrage de 
Entreprendre de, 


Enraged at. 


se Soucier de, 


Care to. 


Undertake to. 


Souhaiter de, 


Wis A to. 


Essayer de, a, f 


Try to. 


Soupconner de, 


Suspect to. 


Etonne de, 


Astonished at. 


se Souvenir de, 


Remember to. 


Eviter de, 


At'OtdtO. / 


Suftire de, 


Sufficient to. 


Excuser de, 


Excuse to. 


Suggerer de, 
Supplier de, 


Suggest to. 


Exempter de, 


Exempt from. 


Entreat to. 


Exorter de, a, t 


Exhort to. 


Sur de, 


Sure to. 


Fache de, 


Sorry to. 


Surpris de, 


Surprised to. 


Feindre de, 


Fci^n to. 


Tacher de, 


Endeavour to. 


Finir de, 


Finish to. 


Tarder de, 


Lon^ io. 


se Flatter de, 


Flatter to. 


seVanter de, 


JBoas? of. 



t As it sounds best, i. e. de to avoid the sound of several a, and a to avoid the- 
sound of several de. 



t 

SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



277 



EXERCISE. 

You shall have the trouble to do it, or (of doing it) over again- 

peine refaire , * 

Will you have the goodness to help, or (of helping) me 1 If you 
bonte aider, 

have any desire to serve me, you have now a fine opportunity to 

24 envie servir , a present occasion 

do it. Have the complaisance to wait for me. I have not time to 

201 

stay. It is time to go. I do not hinder you from going. See, rule 168, 
rester, fl partir. empecher yous en aller. , regie , 

a list of the verbs and adjectives which require de before the infinitive 
liste demander 206 infinitif 

that follows them. 
74 

169 To, before an infinitive, is expressed by a, when it can 
be changed into in, and the english infinitive into the gerund 
or present participle ; 

N. B. This is generally the case after nouns used in a 
partitive sense ; as, 

He has pleasure in seeing her. II a du plaisir a la voir. 

Is there vanity to think so 1 Y a-t-il de la vanite a le penser If 



* Over againis expressed by re before f 'aire. 

t As this rule is not applicable to all instances in which to is expressed by a, here is 
a list of the verbs and adjectives which require d before the infinitive which follows 
them : 



s 7 Abaisser d, 

Accoutumer d, 

Admettre d, 

Admirable d, de,t 

Affreux a, de,X 

Agreable d, de,t 

Aider a, 

Aimer d, 

Aise d, 

Amuser a, 

Animer d, 
s' Appliquer d, 

Apprendre d, 
s* Appreter d, 

Aspirer d, 

Assidu d, 
s' Attacher d, 

Autoriser d, 

Avoir d, 

Beaud, de,t 

Bon a, de,% 

Charmant d, 

Chercher d, 

Condamner d, 

Condescendre d, 

Consister d, 



Stoop to. 
Accustom to. 
Admit to. 
Wonderful to. 
Dreadful to. 
Agreeable to. 
Help to. 
Like to. 
Easy to. 
Amuse to, with. 
Animate to. 
Apply to. 
Learn to. 
Get ready to. 
Aspire to. 
Assiduous to. 
Stick to. 
Authorise to. 
Have to. 
Fine to. 
Good to. 
Charming to. 
Seek to. 
Condemn to. 
Condescend to. 
Consist to in . 



Contraindre d, de,$ 

Contribuer d, 

Demander d, 

Depenser d, 

Dernier d, 

Desagreable d, de } $ 

Destiner d, 

Determiner d, 

Difficile a, de,t 

Diligent d, 

Disposer d, 

Donner d, 
s' E chauffer d, 
s' Efforcer a, 

Effroyable d, cZe,t 

Employer a, 

Encourager d, 

Enclin d, 

Engager d, 

Enhardir d, 

Enseigner d, 
s' Etudier d, 

Etre a, 

Exact d, 

Exercer d, 

Exciter d, 



Compel to. 
Contribute to, 
As& to. 
Spend to, in. 
.Lasf to. 
Disagreeable to. 
Destine to. 
Resolve upon . 
Difficult to. 
DiMgent to. 
Dispose to. 
Gzwe to. 
i?ea2 to. 

Spend oneself to, in, 
Frightful to. 
Employ to, Z7se to. 
Encourage to, 
Inclined to. 
Induce to. 
Embolden to. 
Teach to. 
Study to. 
Be to. 
Exact to. 
Exercise to, 
Excite to. 



% These adjectives require d, when the verb which precedes them has a personal 
nominative ; they require de, when the nominative is impersonal ; ex. 

Cela est agreable, bon, beau, a votr, a dire, a faire, That is agreeable, fine £o see, &c. 
II est agreable, bon, beau, de voir, de dire, de faire, It is agreeable, fine to see, &c. 
4 De or d, as it sounds best in the active sense ; always de in the passive ; as, 
On m'a oblige de or a le faire ; They hare obliged me to do it. 

J'ai e£e oblige de le faire ; I have been obliged fo do it. 

24 



278 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



EXERCISE. 

He will have some trouble to do it (or in doing it) over again. 

peine refaire 

He perhapsl84 will have somebody to help him. Is there no risk to 

peut-etre 95 aider lui 54 246 risque 

go (this way 1) A virtuous man takes pleasure to do good. Amuse 
parici? vertueux bien Arrmser 

yourself with reading some instructive book, instead of spendingl54 
vous 56 154 quelque instnictif 32 , au lieu 271 

your time in playing. 

v jouer. 

170. To, before an infinitive, is expressed by pour, when 
the words in order, or with an intention, may be prefixed to 
it ; as, 

I did it to (in order to) oblige you. Je l'ai fait pour vous obliger. 
We went there to see you. Nous y allames^wr vous voir. 

N. B. The english gerund preceded by the preposition for, 
explaining why a thing is done, is also expressed by the in- 
finitive with pour ; 

He was hanged for having robbed. II a ete pendu pour avoir vole. 
He was flogged for telling lies. II a ete fouette pour avoir menti. 

EXERCISE. 

I was going to write to you to beg, a favour of you. You are too 

155 aller 172 (o) demander grace — 54 trop 

civil to refuse me. (I will do any thing) to oblige you. I want money 

refuser . Iln'est rien que je ne fasse 260 
to buy a horse. I have not money enough to buy one. It is not enough 

acheter assez en 70 un. — suffire 

to have mony to get a horse, one mustl81 have money to keep it. 
168 se procurer , n.b. — maintenir 

He wants to have a horse, in order to make (people believe) that he is 
260 croire aux gens 



Exposer d, 

Facile a, de,$ 
se Fatiguer d, 

Forcer d, de f § 

Gagner d, 

Habile d, 

Habituer d, 

Hesiterd, 

Horrible d, de,t 

Inciter d, 

Ingenieux d, 

Inviter d, 

Laid d, 

Lent d, 

Manquer d, 
seMettre d, 

Montrer d, 

Obliger a, de£ 
s' Obstiner d, 

Occupe d, 
s' Opiniatrer d, 

Parvenir d. 

Passer d, 

Penser d, 



Expose to. 
Easy to. 
Get tired with. 
Force to. 
Gain to. 
Clever to. 
Accustom to. 
Hesitate to. 
Horrid to. 
Incite to. 
Ingenious to. 
Invite to. 
Ugly to. 
Slow to. 
Omit to. 
Set about to. 
Shew to. 
Oblige to. 
Obstinate to. 
Busy to. 
Obstinate to. 
Arrive to. 
Spend in. 
Think of. 



Perdre d, 
Persister d, 
se Plaire d, 
Porter d, » 
Premier d, 
Preparer d, 
Pret d, 
Prompt d, 
Propre d, 
Recommencer d, 
Renoncer d, 
Resoudre d, 
Rester d, 
Reussir d, 
Servir d, 
Soigneux d, 
Songer d, 
Sujet d, 
Tacher d, 
Tarder d, 
Tendre d, 
Terrible d, de,\ 
Travailler d, 
Venir d, 



Lose in. 
Persist in. 
Delight in. 
Induce to. 
First to. 
Prepare to. 
Ready to. 
Quick to. 
Fit to. 

Begin again to. 

Renounce to. 

Resolve to. 

Stay to. 

Succeedto } in. 

Serve to. 

Careful to. 

TTwnA; of. 

Subject to, ap* to. 

Aim at. 
Delay to. 
Tend to. 
Terrible to. 
Worifc to. 
Come to. 



I $ See notes, page 277. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



279 



rich. He has been taken up for having fought a duel. Is thatl34 sufficient 
arreter — s'etre 237 battre en duel. — 89 suffire 125 
for arresting a man 1 He was not arrested for righting, but for rob- 
136 s'etre battu, avoir 

bing and ill using the man whom he had237 fought with, 
vole maltraite 76 s'etait 203 

171. The infinitive is used without a preposition in french, 
when it is the nominative of another verb ; as, 
To be rich is nothing ; Eire riche n' est rien ; 

To be happy is every thing. Le tout est d'etre heureux. 



To love and to be ioved are the greatest pleasures in life. To love 
aimer 44 49 vie. 

without measure is a folly, notl90 to love at all, is insensibility. To 

mesure folie, n.b. du tout, insensibilite. 

do to others as we would wish (to be92 done to), is to follow the law 
a autrui ce que vouldir qu'on nous fit, c'est — loi 

of reason, 
raison. 

172. The infinitive is also used without a preposition in 
french, after the following verbs ; viz. 



Aimer mieux ; 
Aller ; 

Appercevoir ; 
Assurer ; 
Croire ; 
Compter ; 
Daigner ; 
Declarer ; 
Devoir ; 
Entendre ; 
Envoy er ; 
Esperer ; 
Falloir ; 
t 1 Imaginer ; 
Laisser ; 
Oser ; 
Paraitre ; 
Penser ; 
Pretendre ; 
Pouvoir ; 
Reconnoitre ; 
Regarder ; 
Retourner ; 
S avoir ; 
Sembler ; 
Souhaiter ; 
Soutenir ; 
Valoir mie ux ; 
Venir ; 
Voir ; 
Vouloir ; 



J'aime mieux le faire. (II) 

Allons nous promener. 

Je l'appercois mouvoir. 

II assure Vavoir fait. 

II croit me tromper. 

II compte partir en peu. 

Daignez me dire quand. 

II declare le savoir. 

II doit me Venvoyer. 

Je l'entends parler. 

Envoyez le chercher. 

J'espere le rencontrer. 

Ii faut lui aider. 

Je m'imagine y etre. 

Laissez-le dire et faire. 

II n'ose Vavouer. 

II parait Ventendre. 

II a pense tombcr. 

Pretend-il le faire ? 

II n'a pas pu me le dire. 

Je reconnais Vavoir dit. 

Je vous re garde faire. 

Elle retourna la voir. 

II sait ou la trouver. 

Elle semble avoir peur. 

Je souhaite la voir* 

II soutient Vavoir vu. 

II vaut mieux lui ecrire.(ll) 

Viendrez-vous me voir ? {mm) 

Je vois venir votre soeur. 

Elle ne veut pas rester. 



I would rather do it. 

Let us go to take a walk. 

I perceive it move. 

He asserts to have done it. 

He thinks to deceive me. 

He purposes to go soon. 

Deign to tell me when. 

He declares to know it. 

He is to send it me. 

I hear him speak. 

Send for it, or to fetch it. 

I expect to meet him. 

It is necessary to help him. 

I fancy myself to be there. 

Let him say and do. 

He dares not confess it. 

He seems to understand it. 

He had like to have fallen. 

Does he pretend to do it? 

He could not tell it me. 

I acknowledge to have said it. 

I am looking at you doing it. 

She returned to see him. 

He knows where to find her. 

She seems to be afraid. 

I wish to see her. 

He maintains to have seen it. 

It is better to write to her. 

Will you come to see me ? 

I see your sister coming. 

She will not stay. 



{II) Aimer mieux, valoir mieux, followed by another verb in the infinitive, require de 
before the second infinitive ; as, 

I would rather stay than go ; J' aimerais mieux rester que d 1 y aller. 

It is better to go than stay alone ; 11 vaut mieux y aller que de rester seul. 
* Souhaiter may also be used with de ; as, Je souhaite de voir, or de le voir ; I wish 
to see him. 

{mm) Venir used for to be just, to have just, requires de before the following infini- 
tive ; and in the sense of to happen, it requires a; as, 

I have just seen her ; Je viens de la voir. 

If she should happen to know it ; Si elle venait a le savoir. 



280 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



BXERCISE. 

I am going to embark for America. When do you intend to go1 

m'embarquer Amerique. compter partir ? 

I wanf260 to (set out)as soon as I can. I hope you will come to see us be- 

souhaiter partir 142 221 

fore you go. I do not think I shall (be able) to call266 before I go j 
218 partir 221 pouvoir 145 passer 218 partir; 

but I expect to see you often when I havel4 k 2 returned. You seem to 

esperer 238 265 

have a great desire to!68 go. No ; I would rather stay than go ; but 

envie y 70 aller. ; aimer mieux rester (11) y aller ; 
I do notl92 know what to do here. It is better to gain a little 

n.b. savoir 83 II vaut mieux gagner — peu 

than to gain nothing. I would rather gain nothing than to toil 

(11) 99 aimer mieux (U) tourmenter 

myself for so little, 
me 54 si peu de chose. 



WILL, WOULD. 



173. If, by will, would, you wish to denote will, wish, de- 
sire, you must express them by the corresponding tenses of 
the verb vouloir, with the following verb in the infinitive ; if 
you wish to express a determination, to make a positive as- 
sertion, will must be considered as the sign of the future, and 
would as the sign of the conditional of the following verb ; 
ex. 

My brother will not stay ; ) Mon m 
viz. Is not willing to stay ; $ 

He positively will not stay. Mon frere ne restera pas. s . n *p. 130, 
My brother would not stay; ) M f - ai 
viz. Had no desire to stay. ) r 

Would he not stay, if 1 asked him ? Ne resterait-\\ pas, si je Ten priais % 

EXERCISE. 

Will you do me the favour to eall266 upon me? I will call, if I 
* faire grace 168 58 , 

can. Would you do me the favour to call upon me ? I would call, 

pouvoir. * 266 

if I could. Will you bring your sister with you ? I will bring her, 
pouvoir. * amener avec f 

if she will come. Would you bring your sister with you? I would 

144 256 

bring her, if she would come. My sister will not come; she will 

amener > 144 ; 

stay at home. May sister would not come ; she would stay at home. 

Tester au logis. 



* These senterces may be expressed two ways, but each way denotes a different 
idea, and this idea can be determined only by the speaker or writer. See the exam- 
ples under rules 173, 174. See also the different notes on Will, Would, page 130 andi 
260. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



281 



WILL HAVE, WOULD HAVE. 

174. If will have, would have are used to denote the wish, 
the desire to possess an object, they are expressed by the cor- 
responding tenses of vouloir as above, and have is left out; if 
they are used to denote not the wish to possess, but an assu- 
rance of the possession itself, they are expressed by the future 
or by the conditional of avoir ; ex. 

, brother will have this book ; ) M , . h 

viz. My brother wishes to have &c. J Mon Irere %ml ce 11V e * 
He will have it, if he behaves well. II Vaura, s'il se comportebien. 
Mv brother would have this book ; ) r . 7 
viz. My brother wished to have &c. ' | Mon frere vouUlt ce hvre ' 
He would have it, if he behaved well. II Yaurait, s'il se comportait 

bien. 

N. B. If will have, would have, in the sense of wish, choose, 
are followed by another verb, the object of have becomes the 
nominative of the following verb, which must be in the sub- 
junctive in french ; as, 

He will have his sister go with him ; ) T1 . n „ A _„ _ niQ 
« tt„ ■ -l 4.^ 4. u- it- 7 > 11 vwr que sa soeur aille avec lui. 

l. e.He wishes that his sister should go. ) H 

He will not Aewe her stay alone. II ne veut pas qu' elle reste seule.* 

EXERCISE. 

My brother will have a horse. He will have one (cost what it will.) 

t en70 t nn coute qui coute. 

My brother would have a horse. He would have one (at any rate.) 

t t a quelque prix que ce rut. 

He will have a watch too. He would have a watch too. He will 
t montre aussi. t en 70 

have one, if he learns well. He would have one, if he learned well. 

, apprendre en 70 , 

He will have none, if he will not have this88. He would have none, 
n'en 70 pas, 144 n.b. n'en70 pas, 

if he would not have this. He will have one like yours. 

144 en70t une 85 

What will you have me do % What will you have my brother do'? 

83 | faire? t * faire? 

I will have you learn Italian, and I will have him learn French. 

$ Italian. $ Francais. 

Would you have us dol49 nothing but study 1 Must we never play 1 ? 
$ faire 99 qu' etudier? 181 133 190 jouer 



* When you say I will have you, or I would have you do such a thing, it is not the 
person that you wish to have, but you wish that the person would do the thing you 
mention ; so we could not sayj je vous veux, nor je veux vous avoir, nor je vous aurai, 
which would mean that you want the person, not that you want the thing to be done ; 
we must say, je veux que vous fassiez telle chose. 

t See note * page 280. 

X Turn, What will you that I do ? What will you that my brother do ? for it is not 
the person whom you wish, but you wish that the person should perform some action. 

6 Turn, I will that you learn Italian, and I will that he learn french. Would you that 
we should do nothing but study 1 and so on with other sentences of this kind. 

24* 



282 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

Yes, I would have you learn your lessons first, and I would; 

? 149 lecon premierement, 

have you play afterwards. I will not have any of you be idle. I 

149 ensuite 100 oisif. 

will have every one of you do his duty before he does any thing else. 

105 devoir 218 11 J autre chose. 

175. Would have in the sense of chosen, wished, been 
willing, followed by a past participle, is expressed by the im- 
perfect or by the conditional of avoir with the participle voulu, 
and the english participle is expressed by the infinitive in 
french ; as, 

If you would have told him of it. Si vous aviez xoulu le lui dire. 
He would not have believed me, 11 rtaurait pas voulu me croire. 

EXERCISE. 

If you would have let me go, I should have been back long 

laisser , de retour il y a long terns, 

since. This would have been done in time, if he would have helped 
89 finir a terns, aider 

me. I askedl36 him to help me, and he would not. I would not have 
prier 55 , 136 

"lelped you for ever so much. Why did you not tell me so before 
rien au monde. 136 55 cela 218 

I began 1 If I had told vou so, you would not have come. If any 

* 55 le 59, tout 

body but you had told me so, I certainly would not have believed him- 

autre que * 59 le 55, 184 

SHOULD. 

176. Should, which is generally a sign of the conditional 
tense, is sometimes used in the sense of ought, i. e. denoting 
duty or necessity, and is then expressed by the conditional 
tense of the verb devoir; as, 

You should go and see him (ought). Vous devriez aller le voir. 
He should let me know it. II devrait me le faire savoir. 

EXERCISE. 

You should take more pains than you do. Children should learn, 

peine 47 faire. 

every day, something by heart. They should (get up) (sooner in the 
touts les jours, 98 par coeur. se lever plus — 

morning) than they do. 
matin 47 

SHOULD HAVE, OUGHT TO HAVE. 

177. Should have, and ought to have, followed by a past 
participle, are expressed by the conditional of avoir, with the 



* See note * page 266= 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 283 

participle du, and the english participle is expressed by the 
infinitive in french ; as, 

You ought to have seen him. Vous auriez dille voir. 

He should have let me know of it. II aurait die me le faire savoir. 

EXERCISE. 

You should have gone with your brothers. You should not have 
aller 

let them go alone. They ought not to have gone without leave, 
laisser seul 29. y 70 permission 

They should not have stayed so long. Yon ought to have told 

rester si long terns. dire 

them54 so. You have not acted as you should. 
(Dp. 63. le 59 agir 

MAY, MIGHT. 

178. If may, might are used to denote "power, may is ex- 
pressed by the present of the verb pouvoir, viz. puis ; and 
might by the conditional pourais, with the following verb in 
the infinitive ; as, 

I may or can see it, if I choose ; > Jepuis le voir, si je veux. 
i. e. It is in my power to see it, if &c. ) [See note* page 125.] 

I might or could see it, if I chose ; \ , V0ura i 5 i e voir si ie voulais 
i. e. It would be in my power to &c. \ Je P ourais Ae voir > S1 J e voulais. 

If may, might denote a mere possibility, they may be ex* 
pressed by the subjunctive of pouvoir, or the subjunctive of 
the following verb ; as, 

Bring it, that I may see it ; ) Apportez4e, afin que je le voie / 
i. e, That it may be in my power io see y or, afin que je puisse le voir. 

He brought it, that I might see it ; ) II 1' apporta, afin que je le visse ; 
i. e. That it might be in my power &c. j or, afin que je pusse le Voir. 

EXERCISE. 

Any body may do that ; (i. e. can or is able) to do that. You may 
109 * {bb) ; 172 faire 

do it, (i. e. (You can or are able) to do it, if you like, I will shew 
, , vouloir. t montrer 

you how it may be done ; (i.e. how one can, or is able to do it.) Leave 
92 ; , Laisser 

it here, that I may try ; (i. e. that it may be possible for me to 

56 , afinque essayer ; 172 

try.) I will lend it54 you, that you may learn; (i. e. that it may 
preter 59, afinque ; 

be possible for you to learn.) Any body might do that ; (i. e, 

109 < 
would be able) to do that. You might do it, (i. e. you could or 

faire , " i 

would be able) to do it, if you hadl40 a mind, I will shew you how 
, en 70 24 envie. t 



* See note * page 125, N. B, p. 126. 

i See the different use of CowZ<Z,page 125, 



f See note * page 228. 



284 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

it might be done ; (i.e. how one could do it.) I left 136 it here that 
92 ; laisser 55 afinque 

you might try ; (i. e. that it might be possible for you to try.) 

COULD HAVE, MIGHT HAVE. 

] 79. Could have, right have followed by a past par iciple are 
expressed by the imperfect or the conditional of avoir, with 
the participle pu, and the english participle is made by the 

infinitive in french ; as, 

If he could have come sooner. S'il avaitpu venir plutot. 
He might have seen it too. II aurait pu le voir aussi. 

EXERCISE. 

If I could have done it, (i. e. it I had (been able) to do it,) I would 
* faire , 140 pu 172 , 

not have asked252 you to help me. You might have done it (i. e. you 

prier 168 aider 

would have been able to do it) as well as I 52. I could not have done it 
43 43 * 

so soon ; (i. e. I should not have been able to do it so soon.) You 
; si tot. 

perhapsl84 could not, (or would not have been able to do it) but you 

peut-etre , 

might have tried ; (i. e. you would have been able to try.) I might have 

essayer ; 

tried, (i. e. I should have been able to try) as you say ; but I am 

essayer ; comme ; 

sure that I could not have succeeded ; (i. e. that I should not have been 

sur reussir ; 

able to succeed.) 

WISH. 

180. The present tense of the verb wish, followed by an- 
other verb in the imperfect, or in the conditional, is expressed 
by the conditional of souhaiter, and the verb which is in the 
imperfect, or in the conditional in english, must be in the per- 
fect of the subjunctive in french ; as, 

I wish she had seen it. Je souhaiter ais qu'elle l'eut vu. 

I wish he would come. Je souhaiterais qu'il voulut venir. 

I wish I had done it. Je souhaiterais Yavoir fait, (nn) 

EXERCISE. 

I wish that was done. I wish your sister would come. I wish 

221 (bb) 221 221 

somebody would help me. I wish I had never attempted it. I am 

95 aider — (nn) entreprendre 55 

glad that I have done (with it.) 
168 (nn) etre debarasse en 55 



* See the different use of Could, page 125. 

(nn) When two verbs in the same sentence have the same person for their nomina- 
tive, the French generally put the second verb in the infinitive ; as, 
I am afraid I shall spoil it ; Je crains de le gater. 

I wish I could do it ; Je souhaiterais pouvoir le faire. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



285 



MUST, NECESSARY. 

181. Must is conjugated through its different persons, but 
its representative falloir has only the third person singular of 
each tense, with il for nominative; then the nominative of 
must becomes the nominative of the following verb, which 
must be in the subjunctive in french ; as, 

I must do it. II faut que je le fasse. 

You must do it. II faut que vous le fassiez. 

My brother must do it. II faut que mon frere le fasse. 

It was necessary forme to do it. II fallait que je le fisse, &c* 

N. B. When the nominative of must is indefinite, the French 
leave it out, and put the following verb in the infinitive ; as, 
One must be jxiad to think so. II faut etre fou pour le penser. 

' EXERCISE. 

I must see (turn; it must that I see) that man. Thou must not go 
1 ; •.' " " \ , : . ■ t 

alone. He must come himself. Your brother must go with you. You 
seul. (m) n.b. 58 

must not stay long. Must we not speak to him 7 Must not his friends 

t long tems. t (o) 54 t 

know it 7 ? How many times must one tell you the same thing'? We 

savoir ? 232 dire 

must employ our time usefully. People must never be idle. They 

le utilement. oisif. 

must help one another, 
s'aider 121 

MUST HAVE. 

182. Must have, meaning need to have, is also expressed 
by falloir, and the nominative of must have is made the object 
of falloir ; as, 

I must have money. II me faut de Targent. 

He must have books. II lui faut des livres. 

My brother must have a horse. II faut un ehfcval a mon frereX 

EXERCISE. 

I must have a horse. He must have a saddle. My brother must 
$ $ i selle. " 

have a wife. My sister must have a husband. These children must 
femme. mari. 

have clothes, 
habit. 

Recapitulatory Exercise on the foregoing rulesW. 
I^have done. Have you done 7 Has your brother done ? Has 

finir. 

your sister done 1 My brother has sung a song. My sister has sung 

chanter chanson. 



* See the different modifications of fallow, p. 162. t See falloir, p. 163. 
t See must used negatively, p. 162. t) See must have, p. 163. 

II See note * page 182, and add to it that the whole of this exercise on the verbs 
must be well understood before the exercise is left off. 



286 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

a song. My brothers have sung a song. My sisters have sung 

a song. Have you heard the song which ray brother has sung 1 Have 

entendre 74 
you heard the song which my sister has sung 7 Have you heard the 

song which my brothers have sung 7 Have you heard the song which 

my sisters have sung 1 They are gone. Are they gone 7 Are your 

partir. 

brothers gone 1 Are your sisters gone 1 How do they do2417 How 

134 185 se porter? 185 

does your mother do ? Is all your family well % Is your sister 

241 241 29 famille 134 

returned from Bath 1 Have the baths been of service to her 7 I 

265 Bath 1 bain faire du bien (o) 

think they have. She looks253 much better than she did before 
221 * avoir mine \ 47avoir 218 

she went. I am glad*221 you are come ; I wanted to see you. If 

y aller. bien aise ; 260 

you had not come, I woufd have called upon you. I have some 

238 , 266 

news to tell you. Do you know that Mrs. B. is here % No, 

nouvelles plur. savoir ici ? 191, 

I did not know it. When did 136 she come 1 She came this morning. 

Quand. 238 matin. 

I have just received this note from her. I am glad she is come 

244 recevoir billet 58 

(at last), for I longedHO much to see her. I will wait upon her 

enfin, car see p. 163 fort passer chez 58 

to-morrow morning. Will you come with me 1 I do not think I 

demain matin. 58 221 

shall (be able) to go. I (am afraid) my mother will not be able to 

pouvoir y 70 craindre 221 

spare202 me. Since she has been ill, she wishes me to be always 

se passer de 58 Dequis que X malade, vouloir $ 

with her. She will not let me (go out) for fearl95 I should stay too 

56 f^ck) laisser sortir de peur que rester 

long. Do you wish me to go 1 Yes, I do70. Well ; I will eall, 
long-tems. II y70** , n.b. Eh bien ; passer, 

if I can. Yor may call, if you will ; it is not so far. I do not think 

pouvoir , ; 246 loin 224 

your mother will refuse you to (go out) for such a short time. I will 

sortir si — peu 

ask her. Do70 ; i. e. ask her. I wish you would lend me the book which 
ie ft (i) p. 63. n.b. 221 (fcA)preter 



* You may express, I think they have, by je pense gu J oui; or if you express have, 
you must add the rest of the sentence and say ; je pense quHls lui en ontfait. 
t Turn this sentence, She has much better look than she had $c. 
% See note $ page 233. 

$ Turn, she wishes that I be $c. see note * p. 281, which is also applicable to wish. 
II Turn ; do you wish that I go ? see * p. 281, which is also applicable to wish. 
** The verb Aller, to go, requires a place mentioned after it ; if the place has been 
mentioned before we always add to Aller the adverbial pronouu Y, there ; see note 
(h) page 58. 1 1 Add here, in french, the pronoun Le, it. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 287 

you promised me the last time I was at208 your house. I promised 

(s) N.B. 

to send it to my cousin after I have read it. She has nothing to 

f. apres que 62 99 

do now, and it is "'better she should do that than do nothing, 
a present, valoirmieux221 89 (11) 

I will lend it vou now. I wish you (very much) to read it. I did 
* 62 "59 t fort 

not lend it you then, for fear218 you would not return265 it to me 
62 59 alors, de peur que — n.b. 

in time. I (was afraid) that you would keep it too long. I have long 

a terns. craindrel25 — 195 garder 62 long-tems. 

wished to read it. I could not lend it you, before you asked me for 

X 62 pouvoir 62 59, 218 59 201 

it. Here247 it is. I wish221 it may amuse you (as much) as it has 
62 n.b. 62 amuser * autant que 62 

amused me. Do you think your cousin would come, if I sent for 

55 221 cousine , ; envoyer chercher 

her 1 I do not think she can. She told me that she expects a friend 

221 70 attendre 
who promised to call upon her this afternoon. Did she tell you that 
266 apres midi. 

I drank tea with her yesterdayl83 1 Yes, she did.70 I wish221 you 

prendre the hier n.b. n.b. 180 

had been there. I wish I had. She is coming to spend the evening 

y55 (h) p. 58. $ 271 234 

with me (to-morrow,183) will you come with her 7 I wish I could; 

demain, n.b. (hk) 180 (n»)70 ; 

but I can not. I am engaged at Mrs. A's. We will meet some 
70 208 se rencontrer quelque 

other day. I have just heard that Miss B. is very ill. Who told 
120 venirde 244 apprendre malade. dire 

you so 1 Miss C. told me so. How246 long has she been ill 1 She was 
59 le54 le 54 Combien y a-t-il que II 

taken ill this morning. They90 say she is very ill. I must send to in- 
prendredemal 234 n.b. 221 m'in- 

quire how she is now. I think it is better that I go myself. It (is 

former 241 221 valoir mieux (m) n.b. 

necessary) that I should see her. It (is becoming) that I pay her a visit. 
falloirl25 convenirl25 rendrel62 24 visite. 

Did you hear that Mrs C. is dead 1 Indeed ! When did she die ^ 

' entendre(W) n.b. mourir 1 ! 238 

I was with her last night. She seemed (well enough) when 1 left 
235 paraitre en assez bonne sante quitter 

her. She was taken ill suddenly in the night, and she died this 

prendre de mal subitement , 238 

morning. I am very sorry she is dead. She was the most estimable 
faerie 221 65 32 



* See note * page 228. 

t Turn ; I wish much that you read it ; see note * p. 281, which is also applicable to 
wish. 

$ Turn ; it is long since I wish $c. see note $ page 233. 

(j Instead of repeating this verb in french we should say, je le souhaite aussi. 

1! See note $ p. 233. 



288 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



woman that I knew50. I had invited her daughter to come and spend 

connaitre. (nn) 271 

(a few) days with me, but I do not think she will come now that 

quelques 58, 221 

her mother is dead. Were you at the play lately 1 Yes, my sister 

comedie depuis peu ? , 
and I went there (the night before last), to see a new actress. We 

127 y54 avant hier au soir, nouvelle actrice. 

had expected some amusement, but we were greatly disappointed. The 

attendre , bien tromper. 

players were very bad. I never saw a worst41 set. Was it a good 
comediens mauvais. mauvais troupe. Y avait-il beaucoup 

house 1 Yes, the house was pretty full29. The lower29 boxes 
de monde ? * , salle passablement plein. premier loge 

were not full, but the upper boxes and the pit were very full. 

29, t parterre 31 

Was my cousin there 1 I do not know. I did not see her. I met 
f. y 54 

her yesterday, as I was going to take263 a walk, and I went to drink 

hier, n.b. , % 

tea with her. After we had drunk tea, we went into the fields, and 

58 t 213 , 

we picked several curious32 flowers which I intend to draw, and 

cueillir curieux(^) avoir dessein dessiner, 

send to you. I must make you some little present that218 you may 

(o) quelque afinque 

remember me. Do you think I need any think to make me 

se souvenir202 58 221 avoir besoin de 111 170 

remember you 1 I will not forget you (as long) as I live. I was 

202 58 oublier" tant que 

in211 London since I saw you. Did you see the curiosities 1 I saw 
n.b. Londres depuis quel96 curiosite ? 

the Tower, St. Paul's, and the Museum, but I did not find (so many) 
Tour, , Museum, ' tant n.b. 

curiosities as I had expected. Did you ever see the Museum 7 Yes ; 

que 237 s'y attendre. 
I have seen it several times. Did you hear that my brother is gone 

55 232 entendre 

to France 1 No, I did not70. When did he go ? He (set out) this 
191, n.b. 238 partir? 238 partir 

morning. Were you ever in France ? No, I never was there. I 

, 190 y55 (h) p.58. 

never had an opportunity to go I should like to see that country of 

24 occasion y 70 $ (bb) 230 

which I have heard (so much). I will go the first opportunity 
74 entendre parler tant 183 y70 $ a (s) 

I can find. And you, were you ever there"? I lived in France 
, y 55 demeurer 



* This sentence can not be expressed in french according to its literal sense ; it 
must be expressed as if the words were, Were there many people 1 

t The different sets of boxes are distinguished in french by the names of premieres p 
secondes, troisiemes, SfC. loges. 

X Speaking of drinking tea, coffee, &c. as a meal, we use Prendre instead of Boire.. 

i) See note** p. 286. 



SYNTAX OF THE Fft»M. 289 

several years. I have been nearly all over the country. Was 
plusieurs * presque * 36 230 Yavait-il 

any body with you 1 Yes, Mr. B k was with me. How did you travel ] 
108 , 58 185 voyager? 

We travelled sometimes in a coach, sometimes in a gig, and some- 
quelquefois en — carosse, — cabriolet, 

times on (horseback), as it suited us. When, did you return 1 I 

a cheval, comme cela convenir 54 238 265 

returned about three weeks or a month ago. Which way did you 
265 il y a246 environ 246— Par 79 route 

(come back) 1 I came through Havre de Grace and Southampton, 
revenir ? par (*) 

Did you speak french when you went to France 1 I spoke it a Utile. 

t francais m. t 62 un pen. 

I spoke it enough to make myself understood. But I knew grammar 
t 63 assez 170 entendre. savoir grammaire 

pretty welll83, and I soon learned to speak it well. I now speak it 
assez bien n.b., 184 62 184 

as fluently as my native32 language. Did you never meet with 
43 coulamment 43 natal 29 langue 190 rencontrer 201 

people who spoke englishl Yes. sometimes, but not so often as [ 

229 ,191 que 

wished. Were you in France when the revolution began 1 No, I 

commencer ? , 

was in Holland. Were the Dutch glad29 (of it) 7 Some were glad 
Hollande. Hollandais bien aise en54 94 29 

(of it), and some 70were not. Some (were of opinion) that it would do 
en 54, 94 72 94 penser 62 

a (great deal) of good, others thought that it would do a great deal of 
— beaucoup bien, 120 penser 62 — , 

harm. I did not stay long in Holland ; I went to Germany and Italy, 
mal. resier ; Allemagne 204 

I have been to Ireland too, sincel96 I saw you. Well ; how do you like 
Irelande aussi, depuisque Eh bien ; 268 

that country 1 I like it (very much) ; it is a very fine country ; but I 

230 268 62 beaucoup; 65 ; 

will not (go again,) unless, as the Irishman in London says, Icanl93 
y retourner, 213 , comme Irlandais a Londres t n.e. 
go by land. I wasl40 very sick. I never was so sick in my life. 
(kk) y 70 parterre. n.b. malade. 136 de vie. 

Indeed, every body on board was sick. It62 is true that it blew 
alaverite, 106 a bord n.b. vrai faire 

a tempest. One of our masts fell over board, and we lost almost 

tempete. mat tomber par-dessus , perdre 

all our sails. We expected every moment that we should go and 
voiie. attendre a tout —inn) 



* Express been over by the verb parcourir. 

t Did speak and spoke require here an explanation. For instance, if I were to say, 
I met a gentleman in the street yesterday and I spoke french to him ; I should saj% 
jerencontrai hier un monsieur dans la rue, et je lui pa.ri.ai francais, because I then wish 
to express what I did, viz. that I spoke french. But in the example here given, I do 
not want to know whether the person spoke french or not, but whether he knew the 
language, which being mere knowledge or a description of the mind, must, agreeably 
to 140th rule, be expressed by the imperfect parlais, 4-c. 

X In a parenthesis, the French generally put the nominative after the verb ; so, 
tmn this sentence thus, as says the Irishman in London. 

25 



9Q0 *%V* 

290 8 Y NT AX OF THE VERB. 

sup with the god of the waves. However after a deal of toil 
souper dieu flot. Cependant — beaucoup peine 

and fatigue, we arrived at Cork 25harbour. We landed as soon as 

204 , havre. debarquer43 43 

we could, and we were very well received by our friends who were 

pouvoir, recevoir 
waiting for us. We soon forgot the perils of the sea, and we began 

201 184 oublier . , 

to divert ourselves (in the best manner) we could. (Next day) I went 

divertir du mieux que Lendemain 

to my friend Mr. D.'s (country seat.) The weather was240 bad for 
25 chateau 140 n.b. 205 

some days, but one morning it grew fine. I (got up) early, and 

, 234 62 devenir se lever de bonne heure, 

I went by myself to take263 a walk in the fields, while the family 

207 n.b. n.b. , pendant que 

(were sleep.) I never saw nature more sublime than it62 was at that 
dormir.125 * le70 dans 

moment. The sun had just risen, and the dew which was on the grass 

244 se lever, rosee 'herbe 

appeared like pearls. I advanced a little into the country, but the 

ressembler a perle. s'avancer un peu 230 , 45 

more I advanced, the more I felt inclined to advance. I saw on all 

,45 se sentir porte de 

sides trees loaded with fruit which was beginning to ripen ; an in- 
cole 200 commencer murir, in- 

finite number of birds singingl53 and warbling on the branches; 
fini 32 oiseau n.b. gazouillerl38 ; 

cattle grazingl53, or wandering through the meadows; hills and dales co- 
betail paitre, n.b. errer atravers prairie; colline valiee 

vered with corn which began to (turn yellow) ; in short every thing in- 
200 ble jaunir ; en un mot 107 ab- 

dicated abundance and prosperity. I wasl40 so delighted with my walk, 
noncer abondance e e n.b. charme 200 , 

that I (went again) every morning that the weather was fine. I stayed 
y70 retourner touts les matins 240 rester 

there six weeks, and I do not think it62 is possible to spend six weeks 

y54 , 221 n.b. 271 

more agreeably than I did. Did you see Mr. A. lately 1 I saw him 

47 le 70 faire. depuis peu ? 

this morning. I met him as I was going along the street. He 

rencontrer comme passer le long de 

told me that he had called upon you, but that you were not in. He 
266 , y 54 

desired me to tell you that he wanted to see you. If you see him 

252 260 revoir 

again, tell him that I will call upon him as soon as I have dined. 

— , 56 266 58 43 43 

I will70. Did you not go a shooting together yesterday'? Yes, we 
n.b. a la chasse au fusil ensembie 183 n.b. ,J 

did.70 Was your excursion successful 29 ? Not very. The ground 

n.b. chasse heureux(^)? Pas beaucoup. terre 

was wet, and the game was very wild. We killed only six brace of 
humide, gibier sauvage. tuer couple 



* Family being singular, the verb can not be plural in french. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



291 



partridges, two hares and four woodcocks. Were there no pheasants 1 

perdrix, lievre becasse. 246 faisan ! 

There were plenty ; but they were in some gentleman's 25plantations, 

246 abondance ; 62 * messieurs , 

and we dared not touch them. Did you walk or ride 1 We 

oser (kk) toucher y 54 allerapiedou achevaH 

rode as far as R. where we left our horses at a small inn there, 
aller a cheval jusqu'a ou laisser a auberge qui y est, 

and after we had refreshed ourselves a little, we began our excursion, 
apres que rafraichir un peu, chasse. 

We (went over) I do not knowl92 (how many) heaths, fields and cop- 
parcourir n.b. combien bruiere, 204 

pices. I dare say we walked 20 miles. When we arrivd attheinn,we 

taillis. pouvoir 221 263 mille. , 

were so tired that we could not return home that night. We slept there, 

lasser (&&)265 au logis 13 soir-la. coucher y54, 

and we (came home) this morning. We intend to try again to-mor- 
revenir essayer encore demain. 

row. Will you come with us, if we go 1 I will go, if you will promise 

y 7fii t 

me to return in time for dinner. If we find that it is too late, we 

265 a tems diner. trop , 

may dine in the country. I can not stay. We shall have company 

pouvoir t 230 (kk) rester. 

to dinner, and I must be there. Then I think it is better for 

, y54 Doncl84 221 il vaut rnieux que 

us to go after dinner. We may set out as soon as the dinner is 

| y70t pouvoir* 43 43 

over. We generallyl84 dine late ; I am afraid it62 will be too late to 
fini. ordinairement tard ; 221 n.b. 195 170 

go then. I think the best thing we can do, is to (put it54 off) 
y 70 alors. 221 (s) 50 , c'est de remettre 

till after to-morrow. We may then take our own time. We shall 

jusqu'a apres X alors — 

(set out) as early as you please. I wish your cousin would come 

partir d'aussi bonne heure qu'il plairell. 221 

with us. I wish you would send somebody to let248 him know. I do 

221 95 n.b. 1 

not know a man whose company is more pleasant. Bring him with 

74 agreable. 256 56 

vou, if he will come. I see him coming, I will ask him54. Your 

** IT 

cousin and I go a shooting the day after to-morrow, will you be one 

52 127 a la chasse au fusil , (kk) — 

of the party 1 I should be very happy to accompany you, but I do 

partie? bien aise accompagner , 

not think that I can. We shall not go further than you like. You 

70 loin 41 47 vouloir. 



* See note t page 183. t See note ** p. 286 . 

t The french would here use the future. $ Turn ; It is better that we go, 
H Make the verb PZease impersonal, and express You please, as if the english was, 
it vrill please you. 

% Add here the pronoun Le, and say he lui, 70 rule. 
** See note * p. 228, 



292 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



may come, if you will. You might come, if you would. I will 

pouvoir , pouvoir 

consider (of it). I should like to go (very much)183. I will let248you 
penser y 54 * fortN.B.t n.b. 

know to-nigrht, if I can go. Why did you not call yesterday 1 I could 

235 , * 266 

not. I went a hunting. Who was with you 1 (Was there) any body 

alachasse. 246 108 

(that I knew 1) Yes, (there were) several of our friends. What time 
de ma connaissance ? , 246 plusieurs a 82 heure 

did you go ? We (set out) at six o'clock. Did you catch any thing? 

partir? partir a prendre 111 

We caught a fox. Had you a (great deal) of sport? Yes, we hadTO- 
renard. — beaucoup plaisir ? , n.b.* 

I wish I had been with you. If I had known it. I would have gone. 

inn) i) savoir , 233 * 70 

Why did you not let248 me know 1 I did not know that you could go. 

n.b. le 70 pouvoir * 70 

I wasl40 at home the whole day, and I had nothing to do. The next 
n.b. aulogis 38 , 140 99 prochaine 

time you go, do not fail to let248 me know. I will not ; i. e. faillO. 
^32 (s) * , manquer n.b. Ie70 y70 . n.b. 

I have got a new horse. When did you buy it 1 I bought it this 

270 nouveaull acheter 
morning. (How much) did you give (for it) ? I gave a hundred 
combien en 54 en 70 21 

guineas. It62 is a (great deal) of money. How old is289 it 1 It is289 
guinee, n.b. — beaucoup n.b. n.b. 

four years old. Will you come to look at it 7 Now ; what do you 

voir 201 ; 83 

think (of it) 1 Do you not think that I got it cheap ] I do not 

en 54 avoir a ton marche ? 

think it is dear. It is a very good horse. I wish it may answer208 
221 65 221 repondre a 

your expectation. I will buy one too, as soon as I have a little 
attente. en 70 un aussi, 43 tot 43 un peu 

more money. Do you think I can get a good one for fifty guineas ? 

221 (kk) avoir 54 en 70 guinee ? 

I think you may. When I have one, I will lend it you when you 

221 70 en70 un , preter 54 59 

want260 it. Will you take263 a walk when your letter is finished ? 

avoir besoin en54 n.b. 

I can not ; I must take it to the (post office) as fast as I can. It 

70 ; 256 62 poste 43 vite 43 

must go to-night. I am afraid it will be too late when I am 

partir 235 221 195 tard 

there. I will go with you, if you will wait for me. I can not wait ; 

y 54 aller , 201 (kk) ; 

I must go directly. Will you call upon me when you (come back) 1 

y 70 tout a l'heure. 266 revenir ? 

I do not think I can. My sisters go to the play ; they will havel74 me 
221 70 CQpfiedie; n.b. 



* See note ** p. 286. 
$ See note * p. 266, 



t See note * p. 300. X Add, a good deal of it.. 

II Put this adjective before the noun* 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 293 

go with them, and I must go. Will you call when you come back 

56 > 70 passer 

from the play 1 I will see. I will call, if it is not too late when the 

de 266 , 

play is over. Why did you not call in (coming back) from hunting % 
finie. * 566 en revenir de chasse ? 

I could not. It62 was late, the weather was bad, and I was tired. 
70 n.b. tard, terns 240 , lasset] 

I am tired of those violent32 exercises. I must get a wife. Marry ,261 
ennuyet 29 exercice. prendre semarrier, t 

says a proverb, you will do well ; do not marry, you will do better 

proverbe, , + , (e) p.56. 

I do not care for your proverbs. I must have a wife. I will have 

se soucier 200 182 II 

one who is tolerably handsome, who has some common sense and a 
passablement , commun32 un 

little fortune. Do you think you can find a woman who is so 
peu bien. 221 trouver 

accomplished 1 If I thought that I could not find one, I would never 
accomplir? *[T pouvoiren70 une, 

be married. I like your sister. Do you think she will go to the 

— se marier.261 221 

assembly to-night 1 If I hear that she goes, I will send you word, 
assemblee 235 apprendre ** 70, le faire 54 savoir. 

I do not think she willTO. She has not been well for some time, 
221 ** n.b. 237 241 depuis quelque, 

and she (is afraid) of (going out), for fear of (catching cold). I am 

craindre sortir, de peur de s'enrhumer. 

sorry 22 1 she does not come, for I intended to dance with her. She is 
fache , avoir dessein 58 65 

the most agreeable woman that I ever 50knew. When did you see her'? 

44 32 jamais 136 

I saw her this morning. She called at208 our house, but she did not 

234 266 tt n.b. , ft 

stop. Did she give you the book which I sent you? Yes, she didTO; 
rester. 74 , n.b. 

i. e. give itmelO. Did you read it? Yes, I read a good part (of it). 

n.b. , partie en 55 

How do you like it? Did it entertain you? I like it very well ; 
185 268 62 amuser 63 ; 

it entertained me (very much). I never read a book which entertained 

62 fort. 183 74 



* Did refers here to the period of hunting - , which was yesterday. 

t Tired — Lasse, Ennuye. Lasse is said oi the body ; Ennuye is said of the mind. 

% See the imperative of a reflective verb, p. 100. 

II Will have may here be expressed two ways, agreeably to the idea which you wish 
to express. 

If you wish to denote that you know the person you describe, and are certain to 
have her, you express Will have one by Pen aurai une $c. with the following verbs in 
the indicative. 

If you want to denote that you wish to find such a person as you describe, you must 
express Will have one by J'en veux une, with the following verbs in the subjunctive. 
See 174 rule. 

IT See note * p. 266. ** See note ** p. 286. 

tt See note * p. 254. > 

25* 



294 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



me more. Do you think the forei2rn32 mail will arrive to-day ? It 
183 221 etranger29 malle aujourd'hui ? 62 

is arrived. It arrived early this morning. I wonder that (there 

62 238 de bonne heure 234 s'etonner 246 

is) no letter for me. I am afraid my friends have forgotten me. I wrote 

58 221 195 oublier 55 

to them (long ago). It is time that I should hear from them, I 
(o) (il y a long-tems). 11 terns 275 * 

wish they would write to me. I will not write to them again, 

221 (o) recrire (o) — , 

until218 I have heard from them. I think they do not wish me to 

jusqu' a ce que 275 * 221 t 

know what 'is passing at home. I am afraid they will think that I 

savoir 84 — se passer au logis. 221 195 

stay here too long. I suppose they wish me to come264 home, but 

rester ici long-tems. 254 221 t s'en retourner, 265 

I do not intend to go back yet. I will stay here as long as I can. 

avoir dessein s'en retourner encore. 43 43 

We are going to drink tea, will you take a cup with us % I do not 
prendre the, 70 tasse Jeleveux 

care. I was going to Mrs. D.'s, but I (may as well) stay here. I 
bien.H 208 , (ferai aussi bien) de 

can not be in better company. What were you looking for when 

(kk) en 83 201 

I met you 1 I was looking for my little boy who has been wander- 

201 garcon errer 

ing about all the afternoon. I saw him playing with the other 

ca et la apres midi. 120 

children, as I was passing by your house. Your house is well built, 
, comme 207 batir, 

but it is not well situated. It is (too much) exposed to the wind. 

62 situer. 62 trop exposer vent. 

We had planted a great number of trees round it, but the drought 
planter autour 64, secheresse 

has nearly killed them all. Is it62 the house which your father 

presque faire mourir 55 n.b. 74 

got built'? No, it62 is not ; he has sold it62, and has bought this88. 
faire batir? , n.b. 70 ; vendre 55, acheter n.b. 

Have you seen (the one) which he has begun to build 1 No, I have 

cellelT 74 commencer , 

notTO. You have a nice83 library ; may I look at it54 7 Surely, 

n.b. joli29 bibliotheque ; pouvoir voir — 62 Assurement, 

you may. These books are well bound, but they are very badly 

70 relier, mal. 

printed. I have lately read some very entertaining ones. I will 
impiimer. depuis peu ** amusant en55 ft 

shew you the books which I have read. I have also bought several 
74 plusieurs 

curious32 things. See the fine things which I have bought. I want 
curieux29(#) belle 260 



* Express from them by de leurs nouvelles, or by des nouvelles d'eixx. 
t Turn ; they do not wish that / know, 6fC. X See note * page 281, which is also 
applicable to wish. 

il We could not say in this sense, je ne m'ensoucie pas, fori do not care. 

% We could not say Vune for the one. ** See note * p. 300. tt See note * p. 228. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 295 

to shew them to your sister. How long is it since you saw her 1 

246 que 196 

I saw her as she was coming to town. I am glad221 you are come, 

comme bien aise 

and that your sister is coming too. I am surprized she has written 

aussi. 221 

to you, and has not mentioned it. Have you sent the books which 
(o) , 221 parler en55 74 

you were speaking of into the country230 7 No, I have not sent them 

203 213 163 , 

yetl83. I will send them this evening. Did you lend your cousin 
encore. 234 162 

those which he asked you for'? Yes, I did; i. e. lend them to himlO. 

88 201 , . n.b. 

Did you hear that my uncle B. has given my brother a horsed He 

oncle 162 163 

has lent him money to buy one, and I am sure he never will ask 

162 en 70 un, 221 190 redemander 

him for it again. He has also made my eldest32 sister a present of a 
162 ** 59 t aine29 162 24 163 

watch. Did he ever give your other sister anylll thing % No, he 
montre. 120 162 163 , 

never did70. He often promised her something, but he never gave her 

n.b. 184 162 98 , 162 . 

any thing. She should try to please him. She should pay more 

99 essayer 202 / faire 

attention than she does to whal84 she is told. She says she pays all 

47 faire 163 92 221 29 

the attention she can to every thing!63 she does. Sometimes, not 

(s) tout ce que , pas 

always. Take the books which I gave you into the (school room) 

256 213 ecolel63 — 

with you. Now, I must go. Will you come with mel I can not. 

, s'en aller. 58 70 

You might come, if you would. I might go (to be sure;) but then 
, y 70 il est vrai ; alors 

I must neglect business which ought not to be neglected. Come, 
negliger affaires , 
that we may divert ourselves a little. You must have a little diver- 
afin que divertir un peu. amuse- 

sion. You must not always be (shut up) in the house. Send me my 
ment. renfermer 

servant, thal218 I may tell him to get our horses ready. If you 

domestique, afinque appreter — + 

would have (set out) a little sooner, we might have diverted ourselves 

partir tot 41 , nous 54 

(very much.) If I could have got my horse when I ordered it, I 

beaucoup. avoir demander , 

mi^ht have been ready as soon as you. I should have had it sooner, 

pret 43 43 41 , 

if my brother could have spared it. I wish my father had bought 
se passer en 59 221 



* See note I! page 207. 

t Again is expressed by re prefixed to demander. 
t Ready is expressed in the word Appreter. 



296 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



(Jthe one) which you recommended to him. I wish you would sell 

ceiui* (o) 221 

him yours. I would have sold mine (long246 ago,) if I could have found 

162 85 85 il y a long-terns, 

any body who would have bought it. I will have one like yours. 
108 sernblable au 85 

If I had known that you wished to sell yours, I might have found 

t vouloir , 

somebody who would have bought it. You should have told me59 so 
95 le 54 

then; I might have bought it myself. I may perhaps find somebody 
alors (m) n.b. peut-etfe {kk) 95 

yetl83. I wish you could. I could have sold it myself lone: ago. 

encore. n.b. 221 70 55 (m) n.b. il y a long-terns, 

If I could have done without it then. Can you do without it now'? 

280 en alors. 280 en 

I think I can. My sisters wish you to come and spend an evening 

221 70 i (nn) 271 234 

with us. When will you come 1 I can not tell. I will come as soon 

Quand 70 264 34 

as lean. You must bring your sister with you. Oh! we can not 

43 256 ! 

come both at the (same time). Somebody must stay at home. The 
122 a la. fois. 95 rester au logis. 

house can not be left (to itself). Come ; you are rather too hard 
92 92 laisser seule. Allons ; un peu severe 

upon her. She must have a little amusement too. You should have 
envers 58 un peu aussi. 

brought her with you to-day. Why did you not bring her? I did 

256 256 

not know that you wanted260 so much to see her, or else I would 
avoir si grande envie ' , autrement 

have brought her. I will bring her the next time I come. Do. 

256 256 232(5) 70 n.b. 

I will70. Did my sister tell you that I have been in the country'? 

n.b. a 230 

No, she did not70. When did you go 1 I think I saw you (at the) 

, n.b. y70 221 au 

beginning of the week. You couldl36 not see me this week, for 
commencement semaine. pouvoir , car 

I went last32 week. When did you return ? I returned this 

70 238 265 238 

afternoon. Did you call upon our friends ? I justl84 saw them, 

266 seulement , 

as I was passing by the house. How were they 1 They seemed 
207 185 241 paraitre 

very well. Did you come (that way) (on purpose)? YesI 
en tres bonne sante. 238 par Ja expres ? , 

did70. I wonder at your going there again so soon. Will you 
n.b. s'etonner $ retourner y55. — si 



* We could not say Vun for the one. 

t See p. 127 and 139 the difference between Savoir and Connaitre. 

t Turn ; wish that you come fyc. see note * p. 281, which is al.so applicable to wish. 

<> Turn ; that you have23S gone there again so soon, see 165 rule. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



297 



never cease doing what you are desired notl90 to do 1 I should not 

cesser 84 92 dire252 n.b. 

find fault with your calling sometimes, when you happen to be 
trouver mauvais * passer il vous arrive de — 

going (that way), but I wonder at your going there purposely, after 

par la, s'etonner t y 54 expres 

having promised me that you would not go again without asking me 

55 ne plus 

leave. You are tool83 fond of rambling ; are you282not / ? How 
permission. — trop aimer aroder; n' est-ce pas ? 185 

could I help it541 I was accused of neglecting people who have 

s'empecher en59 92 negliger # 229 

been kind to me ; can I be blamed for endeavouring to justify 
en des bontes pour 58 ; 92 de chercher 

myself? I do not blame you for justifying yourself; I only wish you 
me 54 de Vous 54 ; 184 + 

not to do things which may be disagreeable to your friends. Come, 

desagreable 29 Allons, 

ladies, amuse yourselves with reading this pretty tale, instead of losing 
mesdemoiselles, 56 169 conte, au lieu 

your time in playing. You should abstain from looking about you, 

s'abstenir autour de , 

whilst you are learning your lessons. That is not the way to 
pendant que Ce n'est pas la moyen 

improve yourselves. You are veryl83 fond of scolding. What plea- 

perfectionner vous 54 — beaucoup aimer a gronder. 

sure can you have in vexing people sol83 1 You are always 

chagriner 229 ainsiN.B.? — 184 

finding fault with every thing one does. I am quite tired with 
trouver a redire a tout ce (s) 90 189 ennuye 200 

always hearing the same thing. If you paid attention to what you 

184 chose. faire 84 

are told, there would not be occasion for repeating it so often. You 

92 , il besoin de 

never do things (at a proper time). How can I help it 1 I never 

190 apropos Que faired y 54 

know the (time of the day). You should have a watch. Yes; I 

'heure qu'il est. montre. ; 

ought to have a watch. I want260 a watch (very much). When 

avoir besoin grand. II 
shall I have one ? You shall have one as soon as you behave well. 

en 70 70 se comporter 

Will you have mine 1 No, I do not like yours. It is an old one. 

85 62 — vieille — 

I will have a new one, or I will have none. Thenl84 you must 

en 70 une neuve, — en 70 IT Done 

wait till218 you can buv one yourself. What will you have us do 

attendre que en 70 (m) n.b 83 faire 



* Turn ; that you should callX 49 sometimes <f-c. see 156 rule, 
t Turn ; that you 7iat/e238 gone there purposely $c. see 156 rule. 
t Turn ; / only wish that you do not things $c. see note * p. 281. 
^ Help, in the sense of to avoid, is expressed by Faire, Eviter, Empecher, never by 
Aider. 

II Turn ; I have great need of a watch. % Express None by Pas, with Ne before 
the verb. 



298 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



now 1 I would have you go and take a walk263 till dinner25 time ; 

(nn) NB.jusqu'au ; 

and when you have (eaten your dinner), I would have you go to your 

dine, prendre — 

books. What! so soon. Must we have no playl No, you shall 

83 ! si tot * jouer? 

not play before218 you have said your lessons. May we play then ? 

avant que alors ? 

Yes, you may play, if you say them well. You should (get up) 
, , se lever 

sooner ; then you would have plenty of time to play. If you would 

41 ; alors , tout le tems 

have got up when I called you, you might have played as long as 

se lever appeter , 43 long-tems 43 

you would. I wonder that the people whom we expected are not come 

175 s'etonner 229 attendre 

yetl83. Is it62 not astonishing that they should keep us waiting so 
encore. n.b. etonnant faire attendre si 

long? They should not have promised, if they found that they 
long-terns ? promettre, prevoirt 

could not come. I might have asked somebody else. We might 

prier quelqu' autre personne. 
have laken263 a walk before we sat at table. For the future I willl74 
n.b. avant de nous mettre a avenir n.b. 

have my orders punctually attended92 to. You should not have relied 

t exactement qu'onsuive — compter 

upon people you did not know. If you would have followed my advice, 

223 (s) suivre avis, 

this would not have happened. You see; we can not console our- 
89 238 arriver. ; nous54 

selves for being deceived by our enemies, and betrayed by our friends ; 

de tromper par ennemis, trahir ; 

and we are often satisfied with being so by ourselves. I have received 
satisfaire 200 t le 54 (m) n.b. recevoir 

the letters which you have written tome respecting the affair which, 

(o) 55 au sujet de 

I have proposed to you, and after having read them attentively, I have 
proposer (o) 55 , 55 avec attention, 

found that, if I had undertaken it, I should have met with 
reconnaitre , t entreprendre 55 trouver 20 J 

obstacles which I had not foreseen. I am very glad you have 

prevoir, bien 221 

notTO. 
n.b. 

* Express this sentence as if it were, Must we not play 1 

t See note * p. 266. $ See * page 281, 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



299 



CHAPTER VII. 



ADVERB. 

An adverb is to a verb what an adjective is to a noun ; it is 
a word added to the verb, to denote some circumstance belong- 
ing to it, or the manner in which an action is done ; as, 

I walk fast. You walk slowly. He o ften reads. She seldom writes, 

There are adverbs of time, of place, of order, of quality, af- 
firmative, and negative, but their properties being the same in 
both languages, it is needless to enumerate them here.* 

183. Adverbs in general keep the same place with the 
verb in french as in english ; they are placed after the verb, 
when the tense is simple, and between the auxiliary and the 
participle when the tense is compound ; as, 

I always esteem him much. Je l'estime ioujours fort. 

I have always esteemed him much. Je l'ai toujours fort estime.f 

N. B. The adverb expressing some circumstance of the 
verb, must be placed as near to the verb which it modifies, as 
can be done without infringing upon other rules ; ex. 



* Most of the adverbs are formed from the adjectives ; in english by adding Zy ; in 
french by adding ment ; as, 

ADJECTIVE. ADVERB. 

Wise, Sage. Wise/y, Sagemenf. 

Assured, Assure. AssuredZy, Assmement. 

Polite, Poli. PoliteZy, Tohment. 

Assiduous, Assidu. AssiduousZy, Assidument. 

But observe that ment requires a vowel before it ; so that, if the adjective ends 
with a consonant m the masculine, the adverb must be formed by adding ment to tho 
feminine ; 



Frank, 
Public, 
Heal, 
Good, 
Soft, 



Masc. 
Franc, 
Public, 
Reel, 
Bon, 
Doux, 



Generous, Genereux, 



Fern. 
Franche. 
Publique. 
Reelle. 
Bonne. 
Douce. 
Genereuse. 



Ex. Gentil, Pretty, which makes 



FrankZy. 
PublicZy, 
Realty, 
GoodZy, 
SoftZy, 
GenerousZy, 
PrettiZy. 



Franchemm*. 

Publiquernenf. 

Reellement. 

Tioimement. 

Doucement. 

Genereusement. 

Gentiment. 



Except also the adjectives ending in nt, which require nt to be changed into 
tnment, as, 

Constant, Constant ConstantZy, Constzmment. 

Decent, Decent. DecentZy, Decemment. 

Diligent, Diligenf. DiligentZy, T>\\\gemmet. 

Ex. Presentemenf, PresentZy ; Lentement, SlowZy, which follow the general rule, 
t Observe only that the adverbs compounded of several words generally come af- 
ter the participle, so we say, Je Vai vu tres souvent. Je lui ai parle depuis peu. Vous 
etes venu a propos. Not, Je Vai tres souvent vu. Je lui ai depuis peu parte. Vous 
etes a propos venu. Yet, in some instances, the ear alone is consulted ; or we say, 
je Vavais tout a fait oublie ; I had quite forgotten it. Je ne me suis jamais si bien di~ 
verti ; J never diverted myself so well. These variations must be noticed in reading, 



300 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



I saw your sister yesterday. Je vis Her votre soeur. 

She speaks french very well. Elle parle tres bien francais. 
She likes reading very much. Elle aime fort la lecture.* 

EXERCISE. 

I understand french pretty well, 183 but I have not yet learned it 
entendre assez bien,N.B. encore 

long enough to speak it fluently. You pronounce french very 
long-teins assezf 170 62 coulamment. prononcer. Ires 

well. I wish to learn it (very much.) You must take more pains in 

fort. 181 peine a 

future than you do. I will do every thing that you have recommended 
l'avenir 47 tout ce que recommande 

to me carefully. Do you not go into the country to-morrow 1 

(o) 55 soigneusement. a demain? 

184. Some adverbs may be placed in english, either before 
or after the verb which they modify ; as, / often see him, or / 
see him often ; but the corresponding adverbs must always be 
placed after the verb in french ; as, 

I often walk alone. Je me promene souvent seul. 

I seldom go to town. Je vais rarement a la ville. 

I always go into the country. Je vais toujour s a la campagne. 

EXERCISE. 

What is the reason that you so seldom come to see me 1 (say, that 
82 raison si rarement 

you come so seldom, fyc.) I sometimes think that you never will come 
quelquefois 190 revenir 

again. You certainly have no reason to think so. I very seldom 
— certainement sujet le 54 rarement 

(go out,) and when I go, my sisters generally come with me, and I 
sortir, sortir, ordinairement 53 , 

never can bring them so far as your208 house ; but I very often think 
190 amener jusque chez n b. ; 

of you. 
200 58 



* The perspicuity of a sentence depends often upon the right placing of the ad- 
verbs ; for example, J'aime beaucoup a marcher. J'aime a marcher beaucoup. 

These two sentences, though they are formed with the same words, by changing 
the place of the adverb beaucoup, express two different ideas. J'aime beaucoup a 
marcher, means, I am fond of walking ; J'aime a marcher beaucoup, means, 1 like to 
walk a great deal. 

Again ; Je ne Vai pas fait pour vous deplaire"; and, Je Vai fait pour ne pas vous d'e- 
plaire, express also different ideas ; the first implies no design ; the second implies 
one, that of not displeasing. The English, in general, do not pay sufficient attention 
to the placing of the adverbs. 

t The adverb Assez, like the other adverbs, is always placed before the adjective 
or adverb which it modifies ; so say, enough long. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 301 

REMARKS ON THE ADVERBS.* 

HOW; QUE, COMBIEN, COMMENT. 
185. Hoiv, denoting admiration, is expressed by que, and 
ihe adjective or adverb which follows how, must be placed 
after the verb in french ; as, 

How pretty this is ! Que ceci est joli! 

How well it is done ! Qu'iX est bien fait ! 



* A list of adverbial expressions, which can not be expressed literally, as learners 
are apt to do, some of which are not to be found in the dictionaries ; 



About, 

There abouts, 
Here abouts, 
Round about, 
Aloud, 
Amicably, 
Aside, 

On an average, 
Backwards, 
Backwards, 
Into the bargain, 
Betimes, 

Better and better, 

So much the better, 

Abreast, 

By and by, 

By chance, 

Cheap, 

Most commonly. 
In day time, 
In open day, 
Every day, 
From day to day. 
Every other day, 

This day week, 
This day se'night, 

This day fortnight, 



This day month, 

Deservedly, 
Directly, 
In disorder, 
By drops, 
Early, 

In good earnest, 

Empty, 

In emulation, 

That excepted, 

Fairly, 

How far, 

As far as here, 

As far as there, 

Afar off, 

After the fashion, 
After the french, 



Environ. 
A peu pres. 
Ici autour. 
A l'entour. 
A haute voix. 
A Pamiable. 
A cote, a part. 
L'un dans l'autre 
En arriere. (falling) 



On the ground, 
Hand o ver head, 
Hard by, 
Hardly ever, 
In haste, 
Heartily, 
Here and there, 
Helter skelter, 
Hitherto. 



A reculons.(walking)i/ourZy P 
Par dessuslemarche. Every hour, 
De bonne hcure. Inadvertently, 
De mieux en mieux. Inconsiderately, 



To all intents and ) 
purposes, j 
Largely^ 
Lately, 
At last; 
At least, 
For less, 

So much the less, 
By little and little, 
Ever so little, 



Par terre. 

A corps perdu. 

Ici pres. 

Presque jamais. 
A la hate. 
De bon cceur. 
Par ci par la. 
Pele mele. 
Jusqu' ici. 
D'heure en heure* 
A toute heure. 
Par megarde. 
Sans y faire attention* 

De fond encomble. 



Tant mieux, 
De front. 
Tantot. 

Par cas fortuit. 

A bon marche. 

Presque to uj ours 

De jour. 

En plein jour. 

Touts les jours. 

De jour en jour. 

De deux jours Tun. How long, 
■ II y a aujour d'hui 8 As long as v 
| jours. [huit. In the same manner, De rneme. 

. D'aujour d'hui en Through mistake, Par megarde. 
' II y a aujour d'hui 15 More than is neces- 
[ jours. [quinze. sary. 

D'aujour d'hui en Neither more nor less,Ni plus ni moins 



A pleines mains. 
Depuis peu. 
Enfin. 
Au moins. 
A moins. 
D'autant "moins. 
Peu a peu. 
Tant soit pen. 
Jusqu' a quand ? 
Tant que. 



■ Plus qu'iln'en faut* 



' I] y a aujour d'hui un More and more, 
| mois. [mois. Much more so, 

! D'aujour d'hui en un So much the more, 



A bon droit. 
Tout a l'heure. 
A l'abandon. 
Goute a goute. 
De bon matin. 
Tout de bon. 
A vide. 
A l'envi. 
A ceia pres. 
De bonne foi. 
Jusqu' oil. 
Jusqu' ici. 
Jusqu' la. 
De loin. 
A la mode. 
A la francaise. 



The english fashion, A V Ariglaise. 



At first, 
On the same floor, 
Within a fortnight, 
For fun, 
For the future^ 
Groping, 



D'abord. 
De plein pied. 
Dans quinze jours* 
En badinant. 
A l'avenir. 
A tatons. 

26 



At most, 
How much ? 
As much, 
So much, 

Through ill nature, 

Nothing near, 

Just now. 

Now and then, 

All at once, 

Opposite, 

Purposely, 

On purpose, 

To what purpose? 

At random, 

In every respect, 

Seasonably, 

On both sides, 

The wrong side out, 

The wrong side up, 

Sooner or later, 

Soundly, 

With all speed) 



De plus en plus. 
A plus forte raisort, 
D'autant plus. 
Tout au plus. 
Combien ? 
Autant. 
Tant. 

Par malice. 
A beaucoup pres. 
Tout de suite. 
De terns en tems. 
Tout d'un coup. 
Vis-a-vis. 

A dessein, Expres. 
De propos delibere. 
A quoi bon ? 
A tort et a travers. 
A touts egards. 
A propos. 

De part et d'autre. 
A Pen vers. 
A rebours. 
Tot ou tard. 
Comme ll faut« 
Au plus vite. 



302 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERfi. 



In asking a question, how is expressed by comment, to de- 
note the manner, and by combien, to denote number or quan- 
tity ; as, 

How will yon do that ? Comment ferez-vous cela 1 

How often have you done it 1 Combien de fois l'avez-vous fait 1 

EXERCISE. 

How long you have been! How late you come ! How glad I 
long terns tard aise 

am to see you ! How heartily I thank you ! How sweet those 
de bon coeur bon (bb) 

flowers smell ! How beautiful those roses are ! How shall we go 7 

sentir ! {bb) ! 

How shall we carry our luggage 1 How shall w r e know where you 

porter bagage ? savoir ou 

are 1 How many people shall we be 7 How much money have 
229 argent 

you got 1 

270 



HOW LONG. 

COMBIEN, COMBIEN DE TEMS, JTJSaiTA GtUAND. 

186. How long, referring to the beginning of time, is ex- 
pressed by combien; referring to the duration, it is expressed 
by combien de terns ; and referring to the end, it is expressed 

hy jnsqu'd quand ; as, 

Hew long have you been in France 7 Combien y a-t-il que vous etes en France ? 
Or Ccmbicn de terns avez-vous ete en France ? 

N. E. Few learners make a distinction between these two ways of expression ; 
yet the ideas which they express are quite different. By the first, vous etes en 
Fiance, it is understood lhat the person is in Fiance still; by the second, vous avez 
ete en Fiance, it is understood lhat the person is no lcngtr\here. 

How long will ) Combien de terns resterez vous ? i. e. what length of time ? 
you stay ? j Jusqu 1 a quand resterez-vous 1 i. e. until what time 1 

EXERCISE. 

How long have you been learning french 7 or, how long is 

155 



At full speed, ' 

On a sudden, 
Step by step. 
Straight on, 
Thoroughly, 
This long time, 
For a long time, 
From time to time, 

One time or other, 

To and fro, 

From top to bottom, 

Topsy turvy, 

In a trice, 

By turns', 

At every turn, [eye 
In the twinkling 
Unawares, 
Up and down, 



Upwards, 

Unseasonably, 

Visibly, 

"With a low voice, 
The wrong way, 
In a week, [day 



En haut. 
A contre terns, 
A vue d'ceil. 
Tout has. 
A contre sens. 
Dans huit jours. 
It was a week yester- II y eut hier 8 jours. 
It will be a week to- )Il y aura demain 8 
) jours. 
Par tout ou. 
En nulle maniere. 
De pis en pis. 
Tant pis. 

11 y a un an. [an. 
II y a aujour d'hui un 
A contre cceur. 



( A bride abattue. 
( Ventre a terre. 
Tout a coup. 
Pas a pas. 
Tout droit. 
A fond. 
( De long terns. 
| Depuis long terns. 
De leras en terns. morrow, 
Tot ou tard. Wherever, 
Ca et la. In no wise, 

De fond en comble. Worse and worse, 
Sens dessus dessous.So much the worse 
En moins de rien. A year hence, 
Tour a tour. This day 12 months, 

A tout bout de champ. Against one's will, 
of an En un clin d'ceil. Whether one will or Pon gre mai gre. 
Sans y penser. Yonder, [not, La bas. 

De cote et d'autre. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 303 

il24S since you learn french 1 How long do you intend to learn * 
y a-t-il que }& * avoir 125 dessein 

How long will you abuse202 my patience 1 
abuser de 

HOW FAR; COMBIEN, JUSQJJ'OU. 

187. How far, meaning what distance, is expressed by 
combien ; and when used for to zohat distance, it is expressed 
by jusqu'ou ; as, 

How far is it from here 1 Combien y a-t-il d'ici % 

How far shall we go ] Jusqv? ou irons-nous 1 

EXERCISE. 

How far is your house from here 1 or how far is246 it from here to 

t y a-t-il ici 

your house 1 How far is Windsor from London 7 How far do you 

t 246 Londres ? 

intend to go % How far shall we go to meet263 you 1 

avoir dessein au devant de 

HOWEVER, HOWSOEVER, LET; GtUELGtUE. 

188. However, howsoever, before an adjective, a participle, 
or an adverb, is expressed by qaelque with que, after the ad- 
jective, participle, or adverb, and the following verb in the 

subjunctive ; 

However -rich she is; > . h , ]} . 

or Let her be ever so rich. $ ^ * * 

IN. B. If the nominative is a noun, it is generally placed 

after the verb ; as, 

However rich her sister is - \ Q d ^ { 
or Let her sister be ever so rich. $ ^ 1 * 

EXERCISE. 

However learned you are. However diligent she is. However 

I savant 
learned your master is, &c. 
savant maitre , 

QUITE, ENTIRELY; TOUT, 

189. Quite, entirely, before an adjective, or a participle, are 
generally expressed by tout ; as, 



* These two ways of expression are rendered by the latter way in french. By this 
expression, Have been learning, is meant that the person continues to learn ; so to ex- 
* press the same idea in french, you must use the present of the verb, and say ; Vous 
jdj^ apprenez, not Vous avez appris, which would mean that the person has ceased to learn. 
Again, How long have you been in England? may be expressed by Ccmbitn de terns 
avez-vous ete en Angletcrre ? or by Conibien y a-t-il que vous etes en Anglettrre ? The 
former of these expressions meaning that the person has left England ; the latter 
meaning that the person is still in England. Learners are very apt to confound these 
two ideas. See note $ p. 233. 

t These two ways of expression must be rendered by the latter way in french, 



304 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



Those men are quite astonished. Ces hommes sont tout etonnes. 
Those women are quite astonished. Ces femmes sont tout etonnees. 

EXERCISE. 

My shoes are quite (worn out.) My boots are quite worn out. My 
Soulier use 158 botte 

mother is quite astonished (at it.) My boots are quite new. My sis- 

etonnel58 en 55 * neuve. 

ters are quite tired. 158 They are quite ill. 

fatigue. malade. 

KEGATIVE ADVERBS. 

NO, NOT ; NE— PAS, NE — POTNT.t 

NO MORE, I NE-PLUS 

NOT ANY MORE ; S *^" u »- 

NE VER ; NE— JAM AIS. 

BUT LITTLE, \ NF-GTTFRF 

VER Y LITTLE ; \ ^ ^UJ^Kb. 

BY NO MEANS ; NE — NULLEMENT.t 
190. The negative expressions ne — pas, ne— point, &c. form 
only one negation ; ne is always placed before the verb, and 
pas, point, &c. like the other adverbs, are placed after the 
verb, when the tense is simple, and between the auxiliary and 
the participle, when it is compound ; as, 

I do not like her. Je ne l'aime pas, or point. 

I will not see her any more. Je ne veux plus la voir. 

I will never speak to her again. Je ne lui reparlerai jamais. 

You have thought of it but little. Vous n'y avez guere pense. 

N. B. If the verb which follows not is in the infinitive, the 



* When the adjective which follows tout is feminine, and begins with a consonant, 
we make it agree in gender and number with the noun ; as, 

This house is quite new, Cette maison est toute neuve. 

These women are quite ugly. Ces femmes sont toutes laides. 

But, as this is done solely for the sake of melody, it would be better, especially 
when the noun is plural, to make use of Tout a fait, since the hearer is sometimes 
at a loss, whether toutes means quite or all. 

t Pas, point, are used indiscriminately, except in sentences of interrogation, when, 
according to the french academy, point intimates a doubt, and pas a kind of affirma- 
tion ; as, 

iV'avez-vous point pris mon livre ? means, Have not you taken my book ? And 
iV'avez-vous pas pris mon livre ? means, You have taken my book, haveno^you? 
Perhaps it would be better to give another turn to the sentence than to give these 

different properties to two monosyllables which may be so easily mistaken one for 

the other. 

Some grammarians, and even the french academy, make several other distinctions 
between pas, point ; viz. that point means not at all, never, and denies more strongly 
than pas ; that pas is said of something momentary, and point of things that are per- 
manent ; so II ne lit pas, means, He does nor, read now ; and // ne lit point, means, 
He never reads ; these distinctions seem to me merely ideal ; I have endeavoured to 
ascertain them, and I have not found any author who has observed them ; the ear 
alone is consulted. There are in our language, as well as in our manners, trifles 
which reason does not scruple to overlook. 

X Mot and goute are also negative expressions, but used only with the verb dire 
and voir ; as, 

U ne dit mot ; He did not say a word. II ne voit goute ; He does not see at all. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



305 



two negative words ne — pas, ox point, ne—plus, ne — jamais, 
may be, and are generally placed together before the verb ; as, 

I am determined not to see her. J'ai resolu de ne pas la voir. 
Not to speak to her any more. De ne plus lui parler. 
Never to write to her again. De ne jamais lui recrire. 

EXERCISE. 

I do not like that man. I never found so much deceit. He never 
aimer 136 tant tromperie. 

keeps his word. I know him but little. I will not deal any 
tenir parole. faire d'affaires 

more with him. I would advise you not to deal with that 

58 conseiller faire d' affaires 

man. He is accused of never keeping his word. I think you will do 
92 accuser tenir 22i faire 

well not to trust202 him any more, 
vous fier a 58 

191. Without a verb, no is expressed by non, and not by 
nonpas; as, 

Will you go to town to-morrow 1 Irez-vons demain a la ville 1 

No ; I will go, but not to-morrow. Non ; j'y irai, mais7i0?& pas demain. 

EXERCISE. 

Do you not believe what he says % No, I do not70 ; not that the 

croire 84 , n.b. ; 

thing isl45 impossible, but because it is not likely. Will you not 
chose soit , 62 vraisemblable. 

speak to him any more 1 No • not before I know whether that is true 
(o) 54 ; 218 savoir 225 89 vraS 

or not. 



REMARKS ON THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS. 

192. With the verb can, rendered by the conditional tense 
of savoir, instead of the present of pouvoir,\ and with why, 
rendered by que, instead of pour quoi, not is expressed by ne 
only before the verb ; as, 

I can not do it. Je ne pu is pas, or je ne saurais le faire. 

Why does he not do it himself ? Glue ne le fait-il lui meme ^ 

N. B. We also generally suppress pas, point, with the verbs 
oser, to dare; cesser, to cease; and with savoir, to know; 
when it is followed by si, ou, que, quand, quel, combien, com- 
ment ; as, 



* At the end of a sentence, not must be expressed by non, without pas, 

t The present tense of the verb can used negatively, may be expressed two ways ; 

I can not, Je ne puis pas, more frequently, Je ne saurais. 

He can not, 11 ne pent pas, II ne saurait, $c. 

Why may also be expressed by que or pourquoi, in the following way: 

Que ne venez-vous a terns ? 
or Pourquoi ne venez-vous pas a terns ? Why do not you come in time ! 

26* 



306 SXN TAX OF THE ADVERB, 

I dare not do it. Je rtose le faire. 

I do not know what to say to her. Je ne sais que lui dire. 

She is incessantly plaguing me. . Elle ne cesse de me tourmenter. 

EXERCISE. 

Why does he not do like other people 1 Why does he not pay 

Que faire les autres — 39 Que payer 

what he owes when he has money ? He spends his money, and then 
84 devoir 271 , pu:s 

he says that he can not pay other people. I can not pay other people, if 
saurait 120 — 39 saurais 120 — 39, 

other people do not pay me. I dare not speak to her. She does not 

120 — 39 oser (o) 54 

cease scoldingl54 me. I dare not (go out) for fear of displeasing 

gronder sortir 

her54. I do not know what to do. (There are) I do not know how 
lui. 83 faire. 246 combien 

many people at the door. 
229 a 

193. Not, after the verb take care, prendre garde, is not 
expressed in french, when the verb which follows it is in the 
infinitive, and it is expressed by ne, if the following verb is in 
any other mood ; as, 

Take care of falling, or not to fall. Prenez garde de tomber. 
Take care that he does not fall. Prenez garde qu'il ne tombe. 

EXERCISE. 

Take care not to spoil it. Take care that he does not spoil it. 
fcrenez garde de * gater 

I- will take care not to let him (go out). I will take care that he 

* laisser sortir. « 
does not go out. Take care not to let yourself (be cheated) by 

* laisser vous54 tromper 
those people. Take care that those people do not cheat you. 
(bb) 229 . 229 tromper 

194. The verb empecher, to hinder, prevent, keep from, 

requires ne before the following verb, if that verb is not in the 

infinitive ; so we say ; 

Je l'empeeherai de jouer ; ) T , * _ , 

-p J x M . ' > I will hinder him from playing. 

or J empecherai qu ll Tiejoue. $ r J & 

EXERCISE. 

1 will hinder him from (going out.) That will not prevent me from 

sortir 154 (bb) 

seeing him. I can hinder you both222 from going out, and from 

154 N.B. , 

seeing each other, if I choose, 
vous voir 121 , vouloir. 



* Prendre garde, in this sense, meaning to Guard from, or against, if the negative 
not were expressed in french, it would be the same as if you said in engltsh ; Guard 
from not spoiling it. As for the ne which is used after Prendre garde, Empecher, 
Craindre, Avoir peur, SfC. when we put the following verb in the subjunctive, it seems 
to be the ne or quin which the Latins used in similar instances, and which, without 
any apparent reason for it, has been introduced into the french language. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



307 



195. The verbs craindre, avoir peur, apprehender ; to fear f 
to be afraid ; the conjunctions de peur que, de crainte que, lest, 
for fear that, require ne before the following verb, if we fear 
that the action will happen* then the verb has no negation in 
english ; as, 

I am afraid that he will come. Je crains qu'il ne vienne. 

Come in, lest he should see you. Entrez, de peur qu'il ne vous voie. 

But ne is left out, if the following verb is in the infinitive; 
as, 

I am afraid of spoiling it. Je crains, or j'ai peur de le gater. 

If we fear that the action will not happen, there is a negation 
in english, and it must be expressed by the corresponding 
negation in french ; as, 

I fear he will come no more. Je crains qu'il ne vienne plus. 
I am afraid he has not seen me. J'ai peur quil ne m'ait pas vu. 

N. B. The verbs nier, to deny, and douter, to doubt, used 
negatively, the conjunction a moins que, unless, and Si in the 
sense of d moins que, require also ne before the following verb ; 
as, 

He does not deny having seen her. II ne nie pas qu'il ne l'ait vue. 
I do not doubt but she will come. Je ne doutepas qu'elle^e vienne. 

EXERCISE. 

I (am afraid) somebody has seen us55. Let us not stay here for 
craindre 221 95 146 vul59 — — rester 

fear some misfortune should happen to us. Go with that lady lest218 
218 quelque 148 54 Aller de peur que 

she should (lose her way). She is afraid that her mother should find 

s'egarer 143 146 148 

her here. I was afraid of hurtingl54 you. I did not do it, for fear 
140 blesser 136 faire , de peur 

of displeasingl54 your mother. We were afraid of doing wrong. I 
de deplaire 202 mal. 
am afraid nobody will come. I am afraid they have not seen us. Let 

221 97 146 221 146 55 — 

us not go further41, for fear we should not have time to (come back) 
— loin, 218 — 148 revenir. 

for dinner. I do not deny that I have been there sometimes. . He 

145 y 55 quelquefois. 

does not deny that he has asked your cousin. He does not doubt but 
145 cousine. que 

he will obtain her. I have no doubt but they will be married261 

obtenir 145 doute que 145 n.b. 

soon. I will not (go out) unless218 it be fine. I will not go, unless 
135 sortir a moins que 240 70 , 218 

you come with me. 

58. 



* We fear that an action loill happen, when we do not wish for that action ; and we 
fear thai it will not happen, when we wish for it ; so when I say ; 
I am afraid it will rain, I mean that I do not wish for rain. 
/ am afraid it will not rain, I mean that I wish that there should be rain. 



308 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



196. II y a — que, It is — since; de puis que, since, require 
ne before the verb which follows them, when we wish to de- 
note that no action has taken place since the period we men- 
tion* then the verb may also have a negation in english ; 

It is long since I have seen him ; > n i i» • 

or I have not seen him this long while, \ lX ? a loT1 - tems c l ue J e ne 1 31 ™- 

But ne is not required, if there has been an action, and no 
negation could be used in english ; as, 

It is not long since I have seen him j ) II n'y a pas long tems que je 
or I have seen him not long since. \ l'ai vu. 

EXERCISE. 

It is long since I have met you. It is more than three months 

t rencontrer 55 plus 48 moins 

since I saw you. How have you been211 since I had the pleasure to 
t 136 55 . 185 237 se porter 136 plaisir 

see you 1 It is a month since he is gone. Have you seen him since 

246 mois t" partir. 

he is returned % He has been at home this fortnight i 

265 au logis 246 quinze jours. 

197. The negative particle ne is required before the verb 
which follows autre, other ; autrement, otherwise ; as, 

He is quite another than I thought. II est tout autre que je ne pensais. 
He speaks othenoise than he thinks. II parle autrement qu'il ne pense. 

After the comparative words plus, mieux, meilleur, moins, 
see 47 rule ; as also with personne, qui que ce soit, see 97 
rule ; rien, quoi que ce soit, 99 ; aucun, 100 ; nul,pas un, 101 ; 
ni run ni V autre, 124. 

N. B. Ne is also used after the comparative adjective meil- 
leur, and the adverbs plus, moins, mieux, see rule 47 ; and with 
several other words mentioned under their respective heads, 
viz. personne, qui que ce soit, rule 97 ; rien, quoi que ce soit, 
rule 99 ; aucun, rule 100 ; nul, pas un, rule 101 ; ni Vun ni 
Vautre, rule 124. 

EXERCISE. 

These things are quite different from what *you say. Do you 

18 189 autres — que 



* The reason of this difference is that the English speak with reference to the 
last action that passed ; the French, on the contrary, speak with reference to the 
time in which there has not been any action, and the idea is the same as the English 
would express by these words ; I have not met you for this long time. I have not seen 
you for more than three months. 

t Observe that Since after II y a, is expressed by Que only, not by Depuis que. 

t Turn ; It is a fortnight since he is at home ; see note * page 303. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



309 



never speak otherwise than you think ^ I know people who often 

229 

act otherwise then they say. 
agir 

198. But, used in the sense of the adverb only, in express- 
ed by ne before the verb, and que after it ; as, 

She is but fifteen (i. e. 07ilylb). Elle n'a que quinze ans. 

I have seen her but once. Je ne l'ai vue qu'mie fois. 

EXERCISE. 

We were but six people, or only six people229 at table. "We 

140 , personnes 

drank but four bottles, or only four bottles of wine. We were bat a 

bouteille 140 
few miles, or only a few miles from (the place). We met nobody 

, a quelques milles la rencontrer 

but a woman, or only a woman. 
» 

199. But is sometimes used in the sense of a relative pro- 
noun, and is then expressed b} T qui ne, with the following verb 
in the subjunctive ; as, 

There are few people but can do it, i. e. who can not do it. 

II y a peu de gens qui ne puisspnt le faire. 

EXERCISE. 

(There is) no body but derives, or who does not derive some 
246 97"' retirer, quelque 

advantage from study. I have not found a man but thinks so, or 

avantage etude. trouver , 

who does not think so. There is no man but regrets the lose of 

de meme. 246 persorme 

time, or who does not regret the loss of time. 
, regretter perte terns. 

Recapitulatory Exercise on the foregoing Rules.* 

Now, I am ready. Let us (set out) immediately. Let us walk 
a present, pret. — — partir tout al'heure. 263 

gently. (What is the use) of walkingl54 so fast 1 I camel36 here to 
doucement. Pourquoi t — marcher vite 1 238 170 

enjoy a pleasant walk, not to tire myself. I have no more desire 
jouir 202 agreable32 ,191 fatiguer me54 X envie 

to tire myself than you have; only I (am afraid) that we shall 
me54 47 ; craindre (bb) n.b. 

bel48 there too late. We are never there in time. We generally come 
arriver trop y 54 a terns. arriver 

either too soon or too late. It62 is very unpleasant to keep people 

— tot ou n.b. desagreable de faire 229 

waiting! (in that way.) Do they live still in that house where 
attendre ainsi 183 n.b. demeurer encore 213 



I * See note *, p. 182. t Turn ; Why to walk so fast? 

t No more, meaning No longer, is expressed by Ne before the verb, and by Plus after ; 
but when More is used as an adverb of quantity, meaning Greater, the negative Pas 
must be added to the sentence, and we say Pas plus. 

§ Turn ; To keep waiting in that way people, because Keep and Waiting expressing 
together oniy one idea, they can not be separated. 



310 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



we saw them last ? No, they have removed to anoher house 

la derniere fois ? , 238 aller demeurer 

a little further in the count ry. How far shall we go? How far 
un peu plus loin 230 

is it from our house209 1 How long shall we stay 1 How you like to 
n.b. rester 

ask useless32 questions ! Do you not know it, as well as I do 1 Take 
faire inutile savoir 43 43 52 — 

care not to fall into this ditch. Take care lest this post falls upon 

tomber fosse. que poteau 

you. Do not go (so near) Iest2l8 somebody should see you. 

approcher tant de peur que 95 148 
I only (am afraid) that something98 bad should happen to you. Will 
craindre (cc) mat 146 arriver 148 54 

your cousin be there ? I do not think he wilU45. He dares not 
134 y54 221 y70soit. oser 

come near the house. He fears that theyOO would turn him out. 
(approcher de) J46 n.b. mettre a la porte. 

It is near two years since theyOO have (heard275 from him.) Is he not 

246 presde 233 que n.b. recu de ses nouvelles. 

returned yet from his journey ? No, he is not70. It is feared that 

265 encore voyage? , 91 

some misfortune hasl46 happened to him. I (am afraid) he will never 
quelque 238 arriver 55 craindre 221 

return2u5. I fear the report of his death will (prove true.) Never 

146 221 bruit se verifier 146 

believe such reports. I (dare say)22 he is241 well enough. I do not 
eroire de tels bruit je ne doute pas 145 * 

doubt but he will be here (very soon.) If you wi 11 come with me, 
douter qu' 145 bientot. 144 , 

we shall go and meet him. Go that way, and I will go this, 
(nn) 273 par la, par ici, 

for fear218 we should missl.48 him on the road. I long to see him. 
de peur que perdre en — chemin. see p. 163. 

It is long since I have seen him. I told you right. There he is247. 

246 que 136 bien. n.b. 

Sol84 you are returned (at last.) How happy I am to see you again ! 

Done 265 enfin. ravi re voir — 

How have you been since I saw you'? We (were afraid) you 
237 241 depuis que 136 craindre 221 

were lost. I began to fear that we should never seel4G you again. 

146 perdre. 138 ■ 149 — 

Why did you not write to us % Why did you not let us know248 where 
136 136 n b. ou 

you were, and how you were 1 I (was afraid221) you would be offended 
, 241 140 146 fache 

at me. What! offended at you? How could you think so ? How 
200 83 ! pouvoir le54 

often have I told you how glad we were to see you, or to hear275 
de foist 55 , entendre 

from you? We were every day talking of you. We never met 
de vos nouvelles ? — touts les jours 155 58 139 

with a traveller, without enquiringl54 after you. You certainly have 
201 voyageur, s'infonner 200 



* See note t page 300. 



t Turn ; How many times $c. 



SY.MtAX OF .THE ADVERB. 



311 



always' been (very kind) to me, and I sincerely thank you (for it.) 

eu bien des bontes pour 58, en 54. 

How lon^ is it since you left this country % How long have you 

246 * 136 230 

been absent? How far have you been 7 ? How long do you intend 

absent 1 avoir dessein 

to stop 1 I have only been absent about two years, and I have not 

rester? environ , 

been so far as you imagine. How fast the time goes ! Methinks22 
loin 42 s'imaginer. vite passer II me semble 

it is only the other day that we were at R. together. Are you going 
ce 140 

to leave us already 1 Can not you stay a little longer? It is so 

quitter deja rester plus long terns ? 246 

long since we have had the pleasure of your company. I should like 
que 

to stay (very much,) but I am afraid my horse will not stand still. 

beaucoup, 221 146 rester tranquilly. 

(Take hold of) the bridle, lest21S it should gol48. Take care not 

Tenir — bride, depeurque s'en aller.t garde 

to go (too near.) Take care that it does not kick you. Do not 

en approcher trop. [bb) n.b. frapper. 

go (so near,) lest it should bite you. Would it not be better 
approcher tant, 218 mordre valoir mieux 

to put it into the stable 1 It is not worth while. I can not stop, 
213 ecurie ? Cela — en valoir la peine. rester. 
Our friends want to go to the play to-night, and they will not go, 

200 comedie t 235' , ~ — $ i 

unless I go with them. You perhaps can come with us. I would 
218 58 peut-etre 58 

go, if I was not afraid that it will be too late, when the play is over. 

146 , 142 finie. 

You need not stay till the end of the play. Yon may go as 
avoir besoin de rester jusqu'a fin 178 s'en allert43 

soon as you likel42. Come ; (make up your mind); for, unless we 

43 vouloir. Allons ; se determiner ; 140 car, 218 

go immediately, I am almost sure we shall be too late to see the 
partir tout a l'heure, presque 221 arriver 170 

beginning of the play. Go: I will follow you. Take care not to 
commencement ; II suivre 

stop. Take care that he does not stop. We are just in time. Now, 
s'arreter. a 

what do you think of the players 1 They are better than I thought. 

comedien ? (e) p. 56 

They have acted better than I expected. I hope you will come 
jouer (e) p. 56 221 yrevenir 

again soon. I do not think I shallTO. I have but a short time to stay, 
— bientot. 145 n.b. r- peu de 169 rester, 

and have a (great many) things to do. How impatient you seem 

53 — beaucoup 169 

to go ! Can not you stay (a few days longer V) No, I can not. Now, 
s'en allert encore quelqties jours ? , 70 

I want to find my sister, and I do not know where to lock for her. 

200 , ou 201 

* See note t p. 303. t See N. B. p. 102. t See note X p. 216. t) See note ** p. 286, 
j| See note * page 228. 



312 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 



I am afraid she is £onel58. I am afraid she has not seen me. If you 

221 146partir. 221 146 55 

go (that way,) I do not doubt but you will find her. There are few 

par la, que, 246 peu 

people here but know her. I think I see her. Yes; here247 she is. 

229 199 221 ; N.B. 



CHAPTER VIII. 



PREPOSITION. 

Prepositions are certain monosyllables added to nouns, verbs, 
and adjectives in order to extend their meaning to the word 
which follows them ; as, 

I came from Paris, through Canterbury, to London. 
The words from, through, to, which express a relation be- 
tween the verb came and the substantives which follow it, are 
called prepositions. 

The prepositions* are in french ; 



A At, To. Exccpte, 

Apres, After. Hormis, 

Avec, With. Moyennant, 

Avant, Before. Matgre, 

Chez, At the House of. Nonobstant, 

Contre, Against. Outre, 

Dans, In, Into. Par, 

De, Of, From, By. Par mi, 

Des, From. Pendant, 

Depuis, Since, From, For Pour, 

Devant, Befo«e. Sans, 

Derriere, Behind. Selon, 

JJ^urant, During, For. Suivant, 

En, In, Into. Sous, 

Entre, Between, Retwixt. Sur, 

Envers, To, Towards. Touchant, 

Environ, About. Vers, 



| Save, But, Except. 

For, By the Means of. 

Against, In Spite of. 

Notwithstanding. 

Besides. 

By, Through. 

Among, Amongst. 

During, For, 

For, In Order to. 

Without. 

| According to. 

Under, Beneath. 
On, Upon, Over. 
Concerning, About. 
Towards, About. 



* The following expressions are found in several french grammars, and even in the 
dictionary of the french academy, in the class of prepositions : 



Aupres dc, 
Autour de, 
Cause de, 
Cote de, 
Deca dc, 
Dela de, 
Dessous de 
par Dtssous, 
au 
par 



en 



au 



Near, by, close to. 
Round. 

On account of. 
By, by the bide of. 
On this side of. 
On that side of. 



Force de, 
Jusqu'a, 
Hors de, 
au Lieu de, 
Loin de, 
le Long de, 
a Mcins dc, 
au Moyen de, 
Pre* de, 
Troche de, 



Under, below, 
iSSt* j Above, over, upon, 
ptr WZT' (Before.intheforepartof.P"^-, 
au Derriere de Behind, in the back of. au Travcrsde, 
a Vegard de, As to, with respect to. Vis a vis de. 



By dint of. 
To, till, until. 
Out of. 

Instead of, in the place 
Far from. [of. 
Along. 

Under, for less. 
By the means of. 

| Near to, nigh, by. 

With respect to. 
| Across, through. ' 

Over against, facing. 



And a few others which I have not thought proper to notice, because they cer- 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITJON. 



313 



Difference between the frcnch and english prepositions. 
200. The greatest difficulty attending the prepositions, is, 
that they are not always expressed by the words which corres- 
pond to each other in both languages ; L e. of, from, the cor- 
responding preposition of which is de, are sometimes ex- 
pressed by a; at, to, the corresponding preposition of which is d, 
are sometimes expressed by de ; by, for, sometimes expressed 
by de, and sometimes by d, &c. which no rule can suffi- 
ciently explain ; therefore, having found it impossible to make 
rules sufficiently explicit for the use of the prepositions, I 
have subjoined a list of all the verbs and adjectives which 
require a preposition different from the preposition which 
generally corresponds with it in english, by means of which 
the learner may always remove any doubt he may have res- 

de ; as Nous somraes convenus de ceci. 
sur ; Je ne porte pas d'argent sur moi. 

de ; Je suis inquiet de sa sante. 

de ; Nous discourons de nos affaires, 

sur ; Je suis tranquille sur cela. 

de ; Informez-vous de son retour. 

de ; Parlons autres choses. 

de ; 11 est trop avide de richesses. 

de ; II slnforme souvent de vous. 

de ; II est altere de sang. 



contre ; Etre fache contre quelqu'un. 



de ; Etre fache de quelque chose. 



tainly do not belong to this class. But these words are so far from being preposi- 
tions, that it is only by the means of the preposition de or a, that they can be connect- 
ed with the word which follows them. It is evident that they are Nouns, preceded 
and followed as you see, by an Article, or by a Preposition, and coming under the 
rules that have been given on nouns. According to the french academy, some of 
these words are both Prepositions and Adverbs. They are Prepositions when they 
govern a substantive after them, and they are Adverbs when they are used abso- 
lutely without a substantive. This distinction is right, but its application is not al- 
ways so ; for example, J'etais a cote de la porte, I was by the side of the door; here 
a cote is a Preposition, II etait sur la porte, et j'etais a cote ; He was on the door, 
and I was by the side of it ; here a cote, is an Adverb. With due respect to the french 
academy, I must say that a cote, in these instances, seems to me of the same nature 
as the substantive side, which represents it in english. Certain it is, that these 
words called Prepositions are all derived from Nouns or Verbs. If then our poverty 
of expression obliged us to have recourse to this benevolent family, I think their 
generosity should not be abused, and their nature changed without a necessity 
which, in these instances, does not seem to exist. 

* Some grammarians have endeavoured to analyze the different relations which the 
prepositions have with the words which they connect : so, according to them, all 
verbs and adjectives expressing desire, knowledge, remembrance, ignorance, frrgetfuh 
ness, care, fear, guilt, innocence, fulness, emptiness, plenty, want, measure, dimension, 
require DE ; the verbs and adjectives which express submission, relation, pleasure, dis- 
pleasure, duty, resistance, opposition, facility , difficulty, likeness, inclination, aptness, fit- 
ness, advantage, profit, require A ; but these terms are so indefinite, and notwithstand- 
ing their latitude, they leave so great a chasm in the field of prepositions, that I have 
«iot met with any person who has derived the least advantage from them, 

27 



pecting 

Agree 
Carry 
Concerned 
Uneasy 
Discourse 
Easy 
Inquire 
Talk 
Greedy 
Inquire 
Thirst 
Angry 
Offended 
Vexed 



the prepositions. 

about, 
about, 
about, ) 
about, \ 
about, 
about, 
about, 
about, 
after, 
after, 
after, 
at & \ 
at *% \ 

*1 J 



Convenir 
Porter 

Inquiet 

Discourir 
Tranquille 
»' Informer 
Parler 
Avide 
* Informer 
Altere 

Fache 



Angry 

Offended 

Vexed 



at 

at 

at S! 



Fache 



314 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIOX. 



by, 



Astonished at, 

Blush at, 

Exasperated at, 

Grieve at, 

Laugh at, 

Laugh at i 

Rejoice at f 

Scandalised at, 

Smile at, 

Surprised at, 

Wonder at, 

Followed by, 

Gain by, ) 

Get by, \ 

Preceded 
Profit 

Answer for, 

Blame for, 

Bless for, 

Care for, 

Chastise for, 

Console for, 

Design for, 

Fit for, 

Good for, 

Grieve for, 

Obliged for, 

Pity for, 

Praise for, 

Provide for, 

Punish , for, 

Sorry for, 

Sufficient for, 

Thank for, 

Borrow from, 

Conceal from, 

Escape from, 

Escape from, 

Hear from, 

Take from, 

Take from, 

Acquiesce in, 

Interested in, 

Delight in, 

Dexterous in, 

Glory in, 

Pride in, 

Ask of, 

Sensible of, 

Think of,f 

Think of, 

Think on, 

Have pity on, 

Play on, 

Triumph over, 

Pretend to, 

Agree upon, 

Call upon, 
Congratulate upon, 

Depend upon, 

Feed upon, 

Impose upon, 

Live upon, 



Etonne 

Rougir 

Outre 
s' Alniger 

Rire 
se Moquer 
s v . Rejouir 

Scandaliser 

Sourire 

Surpris 

Etonne 

Suivi 

Gagner 

Precede 

Profiter 

Repondre 

Blamer 

Benir 
se Soucier 

Chatier 

Consoler 

Destiner 

Propre 

Bon 
s' Affliger 

Oblige 

Plaindre 

Louer 

Pourvoir 

Punir 

Fache 

Suffire 

Remercier 

Empruntex 

Cacher 

Echapper 

Echapper 

Ouir dire 

Oter 

Prendre 

Acquiescer 
s' Interesser 
se Plaire 

Adroit 
se Glorifier 
s' Enorgueillir 

Demander 

Sensible 

Penser 

Songer 

Penser 

Avoir pitie 

Jouer 

Triompher 
se Piquer 

Convenir 

Passer 

Feliciter 

Dependre 
se Nourrir 
en Imposer 

Vivre 



dc 



de 
de 
de 
de 
de 
chez 
de 
de 
de 
a ; 
de 



as Je ne suis pas etonne de cefa^ 
Elle rougit de sa folie. 
II fut outre de ce discours. 
II s'afflige de sa perte. 
II rit or se moque de tout. 
II se moque de tout le tnonde. 
Je me rejouis de votre succes. 
Je fus scandalise de son action. 
Elle sourit de ma confusion. 
Je ne suis pas surpris de cela. 
.le n'en suis pas etonne. 
U etait suivi de ses gens. 

II n' a rien gagne d cela. 

Le souperfut precede rf'un baL 
II n'a pas profite de vos lecons. 
Repondez-vousde lui ? dc cela 7 
Je le blame de ses defauts. 
Benissons-le de sa bonte. 
Je ne me soucie pas de lui. 
II sera chatie de sa malice. 
Consolez-le de sa perte. 
A quoi le destinez-vous 7 
A quoi cela est-il propre ! 
Cela n'est bon a rien. 
II est afflige de ses fautes. 
Je lui suis oblige de sa lettre. 
Je le plains de sa faiblesse. 
On le loua de sa candeur. 
Qui pourvoie a sesbesoins 7 
II sera pimi de sa temerite. 
Je suis fache de son malheur. 
Cela ne lui* suffit pas. 
Remerciez-le de ses bontes. 
II Pa emprunte d votre pere. 
Ne le cachez pas d votre ami/ 
Echapper <f un endroit. 
Echapper a une personne. 
Je l'ai oui dire a mon pere. 
Ne l'otez pas a cet enfant. 
II le lui* a pris or ote. 
J'acquiesce a votre demands. 
Je m'interesse d son bien-etre, 
II se plait au jardinage. 
II est adroit aux exercises. 
11 se glorifie de ses richesses. 
II s'enorgueillit de sa naissance. 
Demandez-le d cet homme. 
11 est tres sensible au froid. 
Avez-vous pense a moi ? 
Vous ne songez d rien. 
Avez-vous pense dmon affaire 7 
Vous n'avez pitie de personne. 
Joue-t-il dt quelqu'instrument. 
II a triomphe de ses ennemis. 
II se pique de generosite. 
Convenons de quelque chose. 
Quand passerez-vous chez moi? 
Je vous felicite de votre retour. 
Vous ne dependez pas de lui. 
II se nourrit dt pain et de lait. 
II en impose aug gens. 
II vit de fruit et de legumes. 



* Observe that the preposition a is implied in LUI, which means to him. See table 
of the pronouns, page 60. 

t When think is used in the sense of to have an opinion, of is expressed by de, noi 
by a ; as, 

What do you think of that ? Que pensez-vous de cela 1 not, a cela ? 



SYNTAX OF TKE PREPOSITION. 



315 



Prevail 


upon, 


Persuader 


a ; 
de ; 


as 






se Saisir 




Smile 


'upon 


Sourire 


a ; 


Take 


upon. 


se Charger 
Abonder 


ae } 


Abound 


with. 




Arnnainfpn 

UcLlllbCV-i 




Connu 


de 




with, 


Omer 


ae , 




with, 


Fache 


contre ; 


Amuse 


with, 


Amuser 


de ; 


Animated. 


with, 


Anime 


de; 


Armed. 


with, 
with, 


Arme 


de ; 


Bathe 


Baigner 


de ; 


Charge 


with, 


Accuser 


de ; 


Charmed 


with, 


Charme 


de ; 


Compare 


with, 


Comparer 


a ; 


Comply 


with, 


Condescendre 


a ; 


Contented 


with, 


Content 


de , 




Cover 


with, 


Couvrir 


de \ 




Delighted 


with, 


Charme 


de \ 




Die 


with, 


Mourir 


de \ 




Disgusted 


with, 


Degoute 


de ' 




Dispense 


with, 


Dispenser 


de , 




Displeased 


with, 


Mecontent 


de , 




Do 


with, 


Faire 


de \ 




Embelish 


with, 


Embellir 


de \ 




Endue 


with, 


Douer 


de , 




Enflame 


with, 


Enflamer 


de \ 




Feed 


with, 


Nourrir 


de j 




Fill 


with, 


Emplir 


de \ 




Glut 


with, 


Assouvir 


de \ 




In love 


with, 


Amoureux 


de } 




Load 


with, 


Charger 


de \ 




Meddle 


with, 


seMeler 


de 




Moved 


with, 


Touche 


de 




Overjoyed 


with, 


Ravi 


de 




Overwhelm 


with, 


Aceabler 


de 




Part 


with, 


©e Defaire 


de 




Perish 


with, 


Perir 


de , 




Pleased 


with, 


Content 


de , 




Prevail 


with, 


Persuader 


a ; 




Provide 


with, 


Fournir 


de . 




Provided 


with, 


Pourvu 


de 




Puffed up 


with, 


Enfle 


de 




Refresh 


with, 


&e Rafraichir 


de 




Satiated 


with, 


Rassasie 


de 




Satisfied 


with, 


Satisfait 


de 




Set 


with, 


Garnir 


de 




Sport 


with, 


se Jouer 


de 




Store 


with, 


Munir 


de 




Struck 


with, 


Frappe 


de 




Surrounded 


with, 


Entoure 


de , 




Swarm 


with, 


Fourmiller 


de 




Taken up 


with, 


Occupe 


de 




Tax 


with, 


Taxer 


de 




Threaten 


with, 


Menacer 


de 




Tire 


with, 


Ennuyer 


de 




Tormented 


with, 


Tourmente 


de 




Transported 


with, 


Transports 


de 




Do 


without, 


se Passer 


de 





> Je lui* persuadai de s'en aller. 
On se saisit aussitot de lui. 
II souriait a ses amis. 
II s'est charge de cette affaire. 
La France abonde en fruit. 
Je ne suis pas connu lui. 
Une chambre ornee de tableaux. 
; II est tres fache contre vous. 
II l'amusait de promesses. 
II est anime de zele. 
II etait arme d'un pistolet. 
Elle le baignatfe ses larmes. 
On l'accuse de trahison. 
II est charme de ses manidres. 
Comparez-vous ceci a cela? 
U condescend a ses caprices. 
Je ne suis pas content de cela. 
II est couvert de poussiere. 
Ilfut charme de son esprit. 
Je meurs de faim, de soif. 
Je suis degoute du rnonde. 
Dispensez-moi de cela. 
Je suis mecontent de lui. 
Que fera-t-on decet hommet 
Un jardin embelli de fleurs. 
Un'est doue d'aucun esprit. 
II etait enflame de colere. 
On le mourit de pain et d'eau. 
Emplissez votre verre de vin, 
II est assouvi de carnage. 
II est amoureux de cette fille. 
II est charge de butin. 
Melez-vous de vos affaires. 
II fut touche de compassion. 
II fut ravi de cette nouvelle, 
II est accable de chagrin. 
II s'estdefait de son cheval. 
II perit de faim et de misdre. 
Elle n'est pas contente de lui: 
Persuadez-Ztti de le faire. 
lis fournissent Parmee de bl6. 
II est bien pourvu d'habits. 
II est tout enfle d'orgueil. 
Se rafraichir d'un verre de vin. 
II est rassasie de plaisirs. 
II n'est pas satisfait de cela. 
Une boite garnie de diamants. 
Elle se joue de sa credulite. 
La place est munie de provisions,. 
II fut frappe d'etonnement. 
II etait entoure de flatteurs. 
Le pays fcurmille de voleurs. 
II est trop occupe de lui-meme. 
On le taxe de sedition. 
On le menapa de la mort. 
II est ennuye de ces choses. 
II est tourmente de remords ■ 
Elle est transported de joie. 
II ne peut pas se passer d'elle. 



■* See note * page 314. 



316 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 



201. Sometimes a verb requires a preposition after it iu 
english, and will not admit of it in french ; such are, 



Look 

Ask 

Buy 

Go 

Look 

Sell 

Stay 

Wait 

Wish 

Accept 

Admit 

Approve 

Beg 

Ignorant 



at; 
for; 
for; 
for; 
for; 
for; 
for; 
for; 
for; 
of; 
of; 
of; 
of; 
of; 



Tyrannise over ; 
Listen 
Look 
Prevail 
Prevail 
Resolve 
Bear 
Meet 
Put up 



to 
upon ; 
upon ; 
with ; 
upon ; 
with ; 
with ; 
with ; 



Look at that man ; 

He asks for you ; 

I bought this for a penny ; 

Go for your book ; 

Look for it ; 

I have sold it for two pence ; 
Stay for me ; 
Do not wait for rne ; 
I wish for your company ; 
Please to accept of this ; 
He will not admit of that ; 
Do you appiove of it? 
1 beg of you to see her ; 
She was quite ignorant of it ; 
She tyrannises over me ; 
Listen to me ; 
Look upon me as a friend ; 
Prevail upon her to stay ; 
Prevail with him to come ; 



Regardez cet homme. 
II vous demande. 
J'ai achete ceci un sou. 
Allez chercher votre livre. 
Cherchez-le, nor, pour lui. 
Je l'ai vendu deux sous. 
Attendez-moi, not, pour moi. 
Ne nVattcndez pas. 
Je souhaite votre compagnie. 
Daignez accepter ceci. 
II n'admettra pas cela. 
L'approuvez-vous ? 
Je vous prie de la voir. 
E)le l'ignorait tout a fait. 
Elle me tyrannise. 
Ecoutez-inoi, not a moi. 
Regardez-moi comme ami. 
Engagez-la a rester. 
Engagez-le a venir. 



Has he resolved upon any thing? A-t-il resolu quelque chose ? 
I bear with his importunities ; J'endure ses importunites. 
I met with a robber ; Je rencontrai un voleur. 

I put up with his impertinence ; Je souffris son impertinence. 



202. In other instances it is the reverse, and the verb 
which has no preposition in english, must have a preposition 
after it in french; such are, 



Abuser 


de; 


s' Appercevoir 


de; 


Avoir besoin 


de; 


Avoir pitie 


de; 


Changer 


de ; 


se Defier 


de; 


se Demettre 


de; 


Discon venir 


de; 


Douter 


de; 


s' Embarasser 


de; 


Gemir 


de; 


Heriter 


de; 


Jouir 


de; 


Manquer 


de, 


Medire 


de; 


se Mefier 


de; 


se Meprendre 


de; 


se Moquer 


de; 


se Passer 


de; 


se Servir 


de; 


se Souvenir 


de: 


User 


de; 


se Venger 


de; 


Attenter 


d ; 


Commander 


a; 


Compatir 


a ; 


Convenir 


a ; 


Seoir 


a ; 


Defendre 


a; 


De pi aire 


a ; 


Desobeir 


d ; 


se Fier 


a ; 


Manquer 


a ; 


Importer 


a ; 


Nuire 


a ; 


Obeir 


a ; 



II abuse de ma patience ; 
Je m'appercois de cela ; 
J'ai besoin d'argent ; 
II n'a pas pitie de moi ; 
II a change de dessein ; 
Vous defiez-vous de lui ? 
II s'est demis de sa place ; 
II nYn* disconvient pas ; 
II doute de tout ; 
11 ne s'embarasse de rien ; 
II gemit de ses fautes ; 
II a herite d'un gros bien ; 
II jouit d'une bonne sante ; 
II ne manque de rien ; 
II medit des gens ; 
11 se mefie de ses amis ; 
II s'est mepris de chemin; 
II se moque des sages ; 
II ne peut pas s'en* passer ; 
II se sert de mon nom ; 
Je me souviens de cela; 
II a use de violence ; 
Je m'en* vengerai ; 
II a attente a ma vie ; 
Commandez-Zia't d'y allerJ 
Je compatis a sa peine ; 
Cela luii convient, or 
Cela luif sied a merveille ; 
Defendez-Zuif de le dire ; 
II deplait a son pere ; 
11 desobeit d sa mere ; 
II ne se fie a personne ; 
II manque a sa parole ; 
II lui\ importe de le voir ; 
Ne nuisez a personne ; 
Obeissez a vos parents ; 



He abuses my patience. 

I perceive that. 

I want money. 

He does not pity me. 

He has changed his design. 

Do you mistrust him ? 

He has given up his place. 

He does not disown it. 

He doubts every thing. 

He minds nothing. 

He laments his errors. 

He inherited a large estate. 

He enjoys good health. 

He wants nothing. 

He slanders people. 

He mistrusts his friends. 

He has mistaken his way. 

He mocks wise people. 

He can not spare it. 

He uses my name. 

I remember that. 

He has used violence. 

I will revenge it. 

He has attempted my life. 

Bid him to go there. 

I compassionate his pain. 

That suits or becomes him 

wonderfully. 
Forbid him to tell it. 
He displeases his father. 
He disobeys his mother. 
He trusts nobody. 
He breaks his word. 
It concerns her to see it. 
Do not injure any body. 
Obey your parents. 



* The preposition de is implied in the pronoun en, which means of it ; see a table 
of the pronouns page 60, t See note * page 317. 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 



317 



Obvier a ; 

s* Opposer a; 

Ordonner a ; 

Pardonner a; 

Permettre a ; 

Persuader a ; 

Plaire a ; 
Prendre garde a; 

Promettre a ; 

Renoncer a ; 

Repondre d ; 

Resister a; 

Ressembler a; 

Subvenir a; 

Succeder a ; 
Survivre 
Toucher 



a ; 



II n'a pu obvier a cela ; 
Opposez-vous a l'injustice; 
Ordonnez-Zui* de le faire ; 
Pardonnez a vos ennemis ; 
Permettez-Zin* de s'en aller ; 
Persuadez-lui* de la voir ; 
Elle plait a tout le monde ; 
II prend garde a tout ; 
II lui* a promis de venir ; 
II a renonce au jeu ; 
Repondez a ma question ; 
Resistez a la tentation ; 
Elle ressemble d sa mere ; 
II subvient a ses besoins ; 
II succedera a son oncle ; 
Elle ne lui* survivra pas ; 
Ne touchez pas a ce livre ; 



He could not prevent that. 
Oppose injustice. 
Order him to do it. 
Forgive your enemies. 
Permit her to go. 
Persuade him to see her. 
She pleases every body. 
He minds every thing. 
He promised her to come. 
He has given up gaming. 
Answer my question. 
Resist temptation. 
She resembles her mother. 
He supplies her wants. 
He will succeed his uncle. 
She will not outlive him. 
Do not touch that book. 



203. In some instances the preposition may be placed in 
english, either before or after the substantive which it governs ; 
but in french, the preposition must always be placed imme- 
diately before its object ; as, 

With whom were you % 
or Wfwm were you with ? 

To whom shall I give this? 
or Whom shall I give this to? \ A 1 U1 dannerai-je ce« % 



| Avec qui etiez-vous ? 



Whom does this house belong to 1 What house are you speaking oft 
77 134appartenir 82 — 155 

That house which we just244 passed by. It belongs to that gentle- 
76 venir de passer 207 €2 monsieur 

man's father whom we are going to dine with. I know whom it 
25 76 — '155 172 diner. 76 62 

belongs to. 

204. The prepositions must be repeated in french before 
every word which they govern, though these words are in the 
same sentence, and the preposition is not repeated in english ; 
as, 

I come from France and Italy ; Je viens de France et aV Italic 
I have been to Paris and Rome : J'ai ete a Paris et a Rome.t 



EXERCISE. 

Mr. A. has invited me to take a walk and dine with him. We 
inviter 55 263n.b. 58 

shall walk into his park and gardens. We are going to France and 

213 155 

Germany. Do not go without callingl54 on me, or writing to me. 
Allemagne. partir 266 , (o) 



* The preposition a is implied in the pronoun lui, which expresses to him, to her. 
See a table of the pronouns, p. 60. 

t This repetition is not always necessary, but the surest way for a foreigner is to 
make it a general rule, until he has learned by reading when the preposition may be 
left out. 

27* 



318 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION, 

Remarks on the Prepositions. 

FOR ; DEPUIS, PENDANT, DURANT, POUR. 

205. For, before a period of time, is expressed by depuis, 
to denote the two extremes of the period ; by pendant, or du- 
rante to denote its duration ; and by pour, to denote the end ;* 
as, 

I have not seen him for a month ; 
i. e. a month since. Je ne l'ai pas vu depuis un mois. 

They fought for two days ; 
i. e. during two days. lis se bziirenl pendant deux jours. 

They have provisions for a year; 
i. e. to last a year. lis ont des provisions pour un an. 

EXERCISE. 

What dreadful32 weather it has been240 for some time past. 
82 affreux terns il fait quelque tems — 

We have not had a (fine day) for these three weeks. It has 

(jour de beau tems) — semaine. 

rained for two whole32 days. If this weather lasts, we90 shall not 
plu entier29 durer, n.b. 

(be able) to get provisions for the winter, 
pouvoir 172 se procurer 'hiver. 

BEFORE; AVANT, DEVANT. 

206. Speaking of time, or order, before is expressed by avant, 
the opposite of which is apres, after ; speaking of place or in 
presence, it is expressed by devant, the opposite of which is 
derriere, behind ; as, 

Do not walk before me. Ne marchez pas devant moi. 

I want to arrive before you. Je veux arriver avant vous. 

N. B. Without an object after it, before is auparavant ; as, 

I had seen it before. Je l'avais vu auparavant. 

EXERCISE. 

You shall not (go out) before dinner, because you have spoken be- 

sortir , 

fore your turn. Do not walk263 before me, stay behind. I want to 

tour. marcher , rester 260 

arrive before you. (Walk in) or (go away), and do not stay so before 
Entrer s'en aller, ainsi 

the door. 

BY; PRES DE, A COTE DE. 

207. By, used in the sense of near, is pres de, or a cote de ; as, 
He was sitting by or near me. II etait assis a cole de moi. 

He passed by or near us. II passages de nous, a cote de nous. 

N. B. With the words myself thyself himself fyc., by is 

* Observe that when for comes between two sentences, it cannot be expressed 
by any of the above words, as it is not a preposition ; it is then a conjunction, and is 
expressed by car ; as, I can not go with you,/or I am very busy ; Je ne puis pas aller 
avec vous, czxje suis tres affaire. See 217 rule. 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 



319 



often used in the sense of alone, and is expressed by the ad- 
jective seul; as, 

I like to be by myself, i. e. alone. J'aime a etre seul ; not, par moi-meme. 
She was by herself all the day. Elle a ete seule toute la journee. 

EXERCISE. 

Come and sit by me. I would rather stand by the door. How 
(nn) vous asseoir 56 aimer mieux me term- 
can you sit by the fire (in such weather as this I was by my- 

rester feu du terns qu'il fait? 136 

self all the morning. Are you fond of being by yourself? What a 

234 — aimer a 154 82 20 

pleasure (it is) to be by oneself. My sister can notl92 be a moment 
plaisir il y a a saurait 

by herself. 

AT, TO; CHEZ. 

208. At, to, denoting being at, or going to a person's house, 
are expressed by chez, and the word house is left out in 
french ; as, 

I must go^ my sister's ; > T] f . 
or to my sister's house. J 11 laut que ] aille cfiez ma SGeur * 

She is atyom mother's. Elle est chez votre mere, 

N. B. If the word house, instead of being preceded by a 
noun, is preceded by one of the possessive pronominal articles 
my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, the word house is also omit- 
ted, and the possessive article is changed into a personal pro- 
noun, thus ; 

At my house ; Chez moi. At our house ; Chez nous. 
At thy house ; Chez toi. At your house ; Chez vous. 
At his house ; Chez lui. At their house ; Chez eux. m. 
At her house ; Chez elle. At their house ; Chez elles. f. 

EXERCISE. 

Will you come with me to my mother's 1 She is not at home ; She is 
* - 58 elle; 

at your sister's house. (Then I must) go to my sister's, for I must see 

II faut done que 181 , , i 181 

her. Perhaps she is not there now, for she had to call at a 
Peut-etre que y 54 a present, t a 266 

friend's house. Come to my house. I will riot go to" your house. I 
Venir * 

will go to his. Let us go to her house. She is not at home. She is at 
* — — elle 

our house or at theirs. 

FROM; DE CHEZ. 

209. From, with verbs denoting coming or going from a 
person's house, is expressed by de chez, and the word house 
is left out ; as, 



* See note * page 130. 



t See note * page 218. 



320 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION". 

* I come from my sister's ; ) T it 

r £> • 4 i * > Je viens de cAe^r ma soeur. 

ox from my sister's house. J ' c iC 13 uc UttK * lua ^ 

Is she returned from my mother's ? Est-elle revenue de chez ma mere 1 
N. B. If the word house is preceded by the possessive 
pronominal article my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, that article 
is changed into a personal pronoun, as follows ; 

From my house ; De chez moi. From our house ; De chez nous. 

From thy house ; De chez toi. From your house ; De chez vous. 

From his house ; De chez lui. From their house ; De chez eux. m. 

From her house ; De chez elle. From JAeiY house ; De chez elles. f. 

EXERCISE. 

I come from my sister's. You did not find your mother there, 

136 trouver y 55 , 

for I saw her (goingl54out) of your brother's house. I metl36 hercom- 
* 136 55 sortir rencontrer 
ing from my grandmother's. What do you want here 1 (Get out) of my 
153 n.b. grand'mere. chercher Sortir 

house. You come from our house, and I come from yours. I met 

, (m) 136 

your father (comingl53 out) of his house, and goingl53 to ours, 
sortir n.b. n.b. 

FROM; DE LA PART. 

210. From, with the verbs to go, to come, not from the 
house of a person, but from the person himself, is expressed 
by de Impart ; as, , 

Go from me to my daughter's. Allez de ma part chez ma fille. 
Whom do you come from ? De la part de qui venez-vous 1 

EXERCISE. 

Whom do you come from 1 I come from your mother. Go from 

77 venir 

me to my sister's, and tell her that I will come and drink tea at her 
, (i)p. 63. 264 (nn) t the 

house. 

IN, INTO ; DANS, EN. 

211. Before the names of persons and places, in, into are 
expressed by dans ; as, 

I have read that in Voltaire. J'ai lu cela dans Voltaire. 

Are there fine streets in Paris 1 Y a-Ml de belles rues dans Paris 1 

N. B. Observe only with respect to places, that after verbs 
denoting residence, in is expressed by d ; as, 

My brother lives in Paris. Mon frere demeure a Paris. 

EXERCISE. 

There are great beauties in Thompson. Are there (as many) 
246 beaute 246 autant 



* See note * page S18. 



t See note X page 288. 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION". 32l 

inhabitants in Paris as in London ^ My brother is in Paris, and my 
'habitants que Londres ? , 

sister in London. 

212. Before the names of countries, with verbs denoting 
going or residing, in, into are expressed by en ; as, 

My brother lives in Prance. Mon frere demeure en France 1 

Has he ever been into Italy 1 A-t-i\ jamais ete en ItaJie % 
N. B. In other instances, in, into before the names of 
countries, may be expressed by en or by dans ; observing only 
that after dans, the noun must have an article, and after en, it 
must be without ; as, 

There is some in France. II yen a en France, dansld France. 

Is there any in Italy 7 Yen a-t-il en Italie, or dans l'ltalie % 

EXERCISE. 

My father is in Russia, my brother in Switzerland, and my sister 
Russie, Suisse, 
in France. Are there as many people229 in France as in Germany 1 

246 autant monde que Allemagne ? 

213. Before common names used in a limited sense ; i. e. 
preceded by any of the signs which have been called article, 
in, into are expressed by dans ; 

In the last peace. Dans la derniere paix. 

In this unfortunate war. Dans cette guerre malheureuse. 

There are charms in society. II y a des charmes dans la society. 

EXERCISE. 

Put this wine in a bottle. If you will be diligent, we will take 
Mettre bouteille. 144 prendre 

you in our partnership. Put these papers into that parcel. Put them 

societe. papier (bb) paquet. 

in the same order in which you found them. I never saw my papers 

meme ordre 76 136 136 

in such a confusion before. Let every thing be in the state it ought 
telle 38 — 248 107 etat (s) devoir 

to be. (There must be) some order and economy in a house. 
172 II faut economie 

214. But when the same common names are used in an un- 
limited sense, in which sense they generally have no article, 
in, into are expressed by en ; 

I like to live in peace. J'aime a vivre en paix.* 



* If in some instances in, into are expressed by en, without an article in french, 
before nouns which in english have the article a, an ; as, 

I came in a coach ; Je vins en carosse. She iellinto a passion ; Elle se mit en colere i 
It is because in these instances the noun serves less to name the thing itself, than 
the manner of being or acting of the agent of the verb, and these words En carosse. 
En colere, may be considered as adverbial expressions ; but if we add to the same 
nouns some word which will render their meaning definite, in, into must be ex- 
pressed by dans ; as, 

I came in a fine coach ; Je vins dans un beau carosse. 

She fell into a great passion ; Elle se mit dans une grande colere. 



322 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 



We are always in broils. Nous sommes toujours en querelle. 
Il is better to live in society. II vaut niieux vivre en societe.* 

EXERCISE. 

I must -put this wine into bottles ; (i. e. bottle it.) I am going to 
181 mettre ; 155 172 

enter into partnership with my uncle. I will put these papers in par- 
entrer societe oncle. pa- 

cels. Every thing here is in confusion. I will put every thing in 
quet. 107 184 107 

order, if you will not put yourself in a passion. 
, 144 vous 54 — colere. 

215. Speaking of time, in is expressed by dans, to denote 
the time alter which an action will be performed, and by en, 
to denote the time that will be employed in performing it ; as, 

I shall go to Paris in three days. 

J'irai a Paris dans trois jours ; viz. after three days. 

J'irai a Paris en trois jours ; i. e. I shall be three days in going. 

EXERCISE. 

Do you think that I can learn french in six months 1 You mayl78 
145 francais mois ? pouvoir 

learn it in less time. I intend to begin in a month. I shall be 

moins avoir dessein 168 

with you in an hour. I can walk there in less than half an hour. 

heure. aller y 54 48 demi 38 

216. Before nouns denoting any part of the day, in is not 
expressed in french ; 

In the morning — In the evening. Le matin — Le soir. 

In the afternoon. Apres midi, or Apres dine. 

N. B. Observe the same rule with on, before the days 
of the week ; as, 

On Sunday — On Monday. Dimanche — Lundi ; not, stir Lundi. 
On the day he came. Le jour qu'il est venu. 

EXERCISE. 

I will come and see you on Sunday or monday. "Will you come in 
(nn) dimanche lundi. 

the morning or in the afternoon. I will come on rnonday in the 

matin apres midi 1 

afternoon. 



* Societe, in these two instances, is used in a different sense ; in the first instance, 
it means that particular state of being called society; in the second, it is rather an 
adverbial expression, and means sociably. 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION* 



323 



Recapitulatory Exercise on the foregoing rules.* 

I am very uneasy about this business* Have you enquired about 
inquiet 200 affaire. 237 s'informer 

what people90 say (of it)'? Your friends are very angry at you. They 

84 n.b. en 54 fache 58 

laughed 136 at what you desiredl32 me to tell them. I do not wonder 
se moquer237 84 262 (i) p. 63. s'etonner 

at that. They laugh at every thing. They blame you for your 

(bb) se moquer 107 blamer 

rashness. They will not believe that you are sorry for what you 
temerite. 173 145 fache 84 

have done. They will get nothing by that. I neither care 

gagner 99 {bb) 224 se soucier 

for them, nor for what they say. I will punish them for their 

58 , 84 punir 

ingratitude. I will take my property (from them.) I do not depend 
oter bien t leur 54 dependref 

upon them. I need202 nothing. I am abundantly provided with 
58 avoir besoin 99 abondaminent pourvu 

every thing. I congratulate you upon your (good fortune.) I 
107 feliciter bonheur. 

think you have reason to be contented with your lot. Look201 at 

221 lieu content sort. Kegarder 

that woman. See how she laughs at us. She is waitingl55 for us, 
(bb) comme se rire 58 — actendre 201 

Do not look at her. I am angry with her. I do not approve 
201 fache approuvef 

of her behaviour. She imposes upon her friends, and she slanders 
conduite. en imposer , medire202 

every body she knows. She has met with several misfortunes, 
touts ceux que eprouver plusieurs disgrace, 

but she has not profited (by them.) I think she delights in mischief, 
profiter f en 55 221 se plaire faire le maL 

She tyrannizes over all her house, and does not mind202 what the 

tyranniser , s'embarrasser 

world says. She is very much like202 her mother ; a haughty, im- 

— ressembler ; hautain, im^ 

perious woman whom nobody could please. I wonder how you 
perieux (g) 76 97 pouvoir plaire. 202 s'etonner que 

trust202 her brother. He is not fit for (any thing.) He has inherit- 
se fler propre 99 heriter 

ed a large estate, but that will not (be sufficient) for his expenses, 
202 gros bien, suffire depense. 

Do you remember what I told you one day 1 No, what is it % 
se souvenir202 , (y) 

That he would abuse202 his fortune, and perish someday with misery 
(6&)n.b. abuser > perir quelque misere 5 - 

unlessl95 somebody would providel49 for his wants. He will never 
218 n.b. 95 pourvoir besoin. 

give up202 gaming and drinking, He is surrounded with flatterers 
renoncer jeu boisson entoure flatteur 



* See note * page 182*. t The prtposition is mpUti in this pronoun. 



324 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 

who do nothing but sport with his credulity. He had promised 
faire * se jouer credulite. 140 promettre202 

his father that he would (give up) the company which displeases him, 
renoncer202 deplaire202 lui, t 

but there is no trusting his promises. He never keeps them. He 

se fier X 202 tenir 
knows he is despised by every body, but he does not care for that. 

221 mepriser 167 106 , se soucier (bb) 

He does not care for any body. Tell himl62 that if he does not 
97 (i) p 63. 

alter202 his conduct soon. 183 he will be punished for his obstinacy, 
chancer — conduile bientot,N.B. opiniatrete. 
What a difference between him and your brother. This88 is a young 

20 entre 58 n.b. 

man who pleases everv body. Every body wishes himl62 well, and 

202 106 . (i) p. 63. du bien, 

rejoices at his prosperity. All who know him, wish for his com- 
se rejouir Touts ceux 

pany. I met with him the other day at a friend's of mine, and I was 

r 87 , 137 

delighted with his conversation. I was struck with astonishment at 
charmer frapper 

seeing so young a man enjoying] 54 his reputation with (so much) 

154 38 jouir'202 taut 

modesty ; sensible of praises, without seemingl54 to wish for them, 
; louange, paraitre 172 desirer 

and satisfied with the pleasure of having done his duty. His 

satisfaire 154 devoir, 

friends were transported with joy at seeing him covered with glory, 

transports 158 154 couvrir 

and animated with the desire of pleasingl54 them. He is a young 

animer 202 leur,t 65 

man for whom I feel a particular esteem. (Young as) he is, I would 

particulier 32 Tout jeune que , 

trust202 him sooner than any body that I know. I would answer for 
se fier (o) tout autre repondre - 

him as for myself. I am much obliged to you for the good opinion 

comme (m) n.b. bien (o ) (s) 

you have of him, and I thank you (for it.) Look at those flowers. 

, remercier 1 54 en fleur. 

How beautiful they are I Do not touch202 them. 63 They are not 

185 belle 62 toucher y.t 62 

mine. If you wish for one, ask that gentleman for it. No, indeed. 

86 , monsieur $ , vrahnent ; 

I will not ask him for any . I would rather look for one myself; 

(i) p. 63. ip) aimer mieux en 70 chercher (m) n.b. 

1 do not like to ask for flowers from a stranger. If he offered you 
169 a etranger. II 

one, would you not accept of it 7 Perhaps I might.70 I do not 
en 70 , n.b. 
care for flowers. I do not know what I was thinking of when I 

83 155 , 



* Express Nothing but by Ne before the verb, and Que after. 

t The preposition is implied in this pronoun. t Turn, One can not trust, $c. 

S See note II p. 207. II See note * p. 266. 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 



325 



Sflentioned flowers. I beg 0/you, Madam, that you will accept of 
parler de 136 prier , , * 

this.86 Sir, you are very kind. I am much obliged to you {for it.) 

n.b. , avoir bien de la bonte. bien 158 (o) t55en. 
This gentleman has asked your sister a question, and she has not 
% faire 162 163 , 

answered him. Sister, why do not you answer that gentleman 1 I 
repondre202 1ui.f 18 , 202 } 

beg the gentleman's pardon. I did not know that you were talking 
demander 25 $ 155 

about me. I was thinking of something that (just occurred to my mind.) 

155 98 vient de me venir a — 1 'esprit. 

What does he want of me 1 I do not know ; ask him. He seems 

83 vouloir — 54 • ; II (i) p, 63. 

(very much) taken up with you. I think he is (in love) vnth you, 
tres occupe — 221 amoureux 

What ! in love with me % You surelyl84 do not mind what you 
83 certainement penser a 84 

say. I only said so in joke. He wants to know if you can spare202 
184 136 cela pour rire. 260 se passer 

the book which you have promised him. 162 I can not spare it now. 

(I) p. 63. 202 en t 

I am usingl55 it myself. When I have done {with it,) (he shall 

se servir 202 en 59 t (m)N.B. 142 t 55 en, il 

be very welcome to it.) What does he want to do with that book 1 
i'aura, s'il le veut. IT 83 260 

It is not good for any thing. It is not fit for the use to which it is 

62 99 propre usage 76 92 

intended. I did not think of that, (or else) I would not have asked 

destines , autrement 

you for it. Since you have (such a desire) {for it,) you may have it> 

Puisque si grande envie 1 54 en> 178 

if you will accept of it. No, I thank you. I do not want260 it 

144 , avoir besoin en54 

now. It62 was not for me ; it62 was for my sister who wanted 140 to 

n.b. 140 ; n.b. avoir envie 168 

see it, and I (was afraid) of displeasing; her, if I did not ask you for it. 

, craindre 154 202 lui,t ** 

I was afraid she would thinkl49 that I had not thought of her, or that 

221 146 140 , 

I was angry with her. I do not think she cares much {for it.) 

140 fache 221 se soucier t en 

When do you (set out) upon your journey % I do not know yet. I 

partir pour voyage 1 encore, 

intend to set out in about a month or six weeks. What country 
&voir dessein environ mois semaine. 82 230 

do you go to 1 I (am ignorant) of it yet. They90 want to persuade 
ignorer n.b. 260 persuader202 



* That you will accept ; turn, to accept. 

t The preposition is implied in this pronoun. + See note * page 220. 

§ Turn ; / beg pardon to monsieur. II Add here the pronoun Le in freneh. 

% We say in french Eire bien venu, to be welcome, i. e. well received, but we do 
not say, Etre bien venu a une chose, to be welcome to a thing. 
** See note * page 266. 

28 



326 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIOtf. 

my father to send me to Russia, but I will not go, if I can help it 

envoyer Russie, , evrter 

I would rather remain here, than live in a country, and amongst a 

aimer mieux rester , (11) demeurer 230 , parmi 

people whose manners do not suit202 mine. I should like to go 

228 maniere convenir 85 169 

first to France, to see my brother who is in Paris ; then to go to 
premierement , 172 ; puis 

Switzerland, from Switzerland to Italy and Greece, from Greece to 
Suisse, Italie Grcce. 

pass into Spain and Portugal, and then to return to England. You 
passer Espagne , alors 265 

could not do that in less than two years. I think I could do it in 

pouvoir (bb) moins 48 • 221 

(twelve months.) I do not think you could. 145 Do not you think 

un an. * 221* 70 150 

that I canl45 go to Paris in four days 1 I think you may. 178 I 
n.b. 221 le70 pouvoir. 

shall be there before you, for I shall set out either on Monday or 
y54 , t — Lundi 

Tuesday. Will you set out in the morning or in the evening ? I 
Mardi. 234 234 

intend to (set out) about twelve o'clock. I wish I could go with 
avoir dessein 168 partir vers 236 180 (rot) 

you. I wish you70 could, I shall drink tea at your sister's this 

221 146 t 

afternoon. Shall you be there 1 No, I am engaged at Mrs. B.'s. 

apres midi. y 54 , 

(There is) a ball at your aunt's on Friday.183 Will not you go 1 I 

246 tante Vendredi, n.b.Q 70 

do not think221 I shall70; I have been ill for several days. I did not 

145jp.B. ; malade 136 

rest for three days and three nights. Come and sit by the fire, 
reposer (nn) vous asseoir feu. 

Do not stand by the door. As it is cold, and you are not well,, yoa 
se tenir 240 , 219 241 . , 

would be in danger of (catching cold.) I called at your house on 

vous enrhumer. 266 

Wednesday in the morning, but (there was) nobody in. I was not 

Mercredi , 246 97 — 140 ; ■ 

(far off.) I was at my'uncle's. J had been by myself all the morning, 
loin. 'oncle. 140 234 

I went into the fields to take a walk263 before dinner, and in coming 
172 n.b. dine, en revenir 

home, I called at my uncle's. He had some company at dinner, and 
au logis, 266 , 
he prevailed upon me to stay with him. After dinner we played 
engager — rester jouerall 

different games. Some played at cards, some at chess, some at 
jeux. 94 t! carte, echecs, 94 



* See note t page 341, t See note * page 318. 

$ See note t page 288. $ See note * page 300. 

II The verb Play, speaking of games, requires d before the noun which follows it ; 
speaking of instruments, it requires de. 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 327 

draughts, and some at (backgammon.) After tea we made a little 
dames, trictrac. the petit 

concert. I played on the flute, my (brother-in-law) played on the 

jouer de* , beau-frere 

violin, my sister played on the harpsicord, and my cousin on the harp ; 
violon, clavecin, cousine harpe ; 

and some ladies and gentlemen entertained us with several good 

t regaler de 

songs. We parted at (twelve o'clock,) (very well) pleased with the 
chanson. se separer 236 , tres content 

manner (in which) we had spent the evening. We shall meet 
maniere dont 140 271 234 s'assembler 

again on Saturday evening,234 at our house, and have another 
encore Samedi au soir , , 53 

concert. 



CHAPTER IX. 



CONJUNCTION. 

Conjunctions are certain words, and sometimes short 
phrases that serve to express the relation which several sen- 
tences have together ; as, 

Will you come, if I go 1 I will not go, unless you come. 

The words if, unless, which denote a relation between the 
verbs come and go, are called conjunctions- 

The Conjunctions are infrench; 



Afin que, ] 
Pour que, j 
A Moins que, 
Avant que, 
Aussi, 
Bien que, 
Quoique, 

. Car, 

En Cas que, 
Cependant, 
Comme, 

T)eCrainte que, 

DePeur que, 



That, To the 

end that. 
Unless. 
Before. 

So, Therefore. 
Though, 
Although. 
For, Because. 
If, In case that. 
Yet, However. 
As, Since. 
Lest, For fear 
that. 



Et, 
Mais, 
Ni, 
Ou, 

Parce que. 
Pourtant, 



And, Both. 
But. 

Neither, Nor. 
Either, Or. " 
Because. 
Yet, However, 



Pourvu que, Provided. 



Jusqu'kce que, Till, Until. 
Neanmoins, Nevertheless. 



Puisque, 
Que, 
Quand, 
Lorsque, 
Quand, 
Sans que, 
Si, 

Soit que, 



Since. 
That. 

When. 

Though, If even. 
Without. 
If, Whether. 
Whether.* 



* See note I! page 326. f See note t page 183. 

t Several grammarians reckon above one hundred conjunctions, which they call 

Disjunctive, viz. 



Declarative, viz. 
Savoir, 
Comme. 
G'est a dire. 
JPar exemple. 



Suspensive, viz. 
Si. 
Savoir si. 
Cest a savoir si. 
Quoi quHl m soit. 



Ou. 
Ou bien. 
Soit. 
Soit que. 



Copulative, viz. 
Et. 
Aussi. 
Ni. 

Non plus. 



328 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 



The conjunctions in french affect the verbs which follow 
them, so as to require some particular mood. 

217. The following conjunctions require the indicative 
mood after them ; 



Aussi, 
Car, 

Cependant, 
Pourta?U, 
Comme, 
Mais, 

Nlanmoins, 
Ni. 



So, therefore. 
For, because, 

| Yet, however. 

As, since. 
But. 

Nevertheless. 
Neither, nor. 



218. The following 
mood after them ; 
Afin que, ) That. 
Pour que, \ To the end that. 
A moins que* Unless. 
Avant que, Before 
Bien que, 
Quoique, 

Eneas que, If, in case that. 



Ou, Either, or. 

Parce que, Because. 
Puisque, Since. 

Lorsque, \ vvnen. 
Quand, Tho', if even. 

Que, That. 
Si, If, whether. 

conjunctions require] the subjunctive 



| Though, although. 



Decrainte que* 
Depeur que,* 
Jusqu'a ce que, 
Pourvu que, 
QueJ 
Sans que, 
Soit que, 



Lest, for 

fear that. 

Till, until. 

Provided. 

That. 

Without. 

Whether. 



Augmentative, viz. 
D'Ailleurs. 
Outre. 
De plus. 
Au surplus. 

Restrictive, viz. 
Sinon. 

Si ce n'est que. 
Qaolque. 

Pour, viz. quoique. 
Encore que. 
A moins que. 

Causative, viz. 
Car. 

Comme. 
Parce que. 
A cause que. 
Vu que. 
Attendu que. 
Puis que. 
Pour quoi. 
Afin que. 
De peur que. 
De crainte que. 



Diminutive, viz. 
Encore. 
Au Moins. 
Du Moins. 
Pour le Moins. 
Adversative, viz. 
Mais. 

Cependant. 

Neanmoins. 
Pourtant. 
Toute fois. 
Bien que. 

Comparative, viz. 
Comme. 
Ainsi. 
De meme. 
Ainsi que. 
Aussi bien que. 
Aussi peu que, 
Autant que. 
Non plus que. 
Ni plus ni moins q. 
Si que. 

En, viz. comme. 



Concessive, viz. 
Quoi que. 
A la vente. 
Quand, quand meme. 
Non que, Non pas que*. 



Transitive, viz, 
En effet. 
Au reste. 
A propos. 
Apres tout. 

Conclusive viz. 
Or, done. 
Ainsi. 

Par Consequent. 
Cest pour quoi. 
Tellement que. 
De sorte que. De maniere que. 
Conditional, viz. Time and Order, 'viz. 
Si. Quand, lorsque. 

Sinon. Pendant que. 

Quand, quand meme. Tandis que 
Quand bien meme. Tant que. , 
Avant que. 
Depuis que. 
Des que. 
Aussi tot que. 
Apres que. 
Cependant. 
A peine, enfin. 



A moins que. 
Pourvu que. 
Suppose que. 
Au cas que. 
En cas que. 
A condition que. 
Bien entendu que. 

Which, except those mentioned in the table above, are either nouns or adverbs* 
with puzzling and useless denominations, since their properties are the same in 
both languages. 

Some grammarians add to these Afin de ; a moins que de ; avant de ; avant que 
de ; au lieu de ; de crainte de ; de peur de ; faute de ; loin de ; plutot que de ; jusqu' 
a ; but the only connective part of these words being de or a, which are prepositions, 
they can hardly be said to belong to the conjunctions. 

* The conjunction a moins que, de crainte que, de peur que, require ne before the 
verb which follows them ; see 195 rule. 

1 Learners are often mistaken, by considering que as requiring always the sub- 
junctive mood after it ; but que does not govern any particular mood ; its power de- 
pends on the verb or conjunction that precedes it, 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 



329 



219. When a conjunction governs several verbs, it is ex- 
pressed before the first verb only, and que is added to the other 
verbs, with the same mood after it, as if the conjunction itself 
was repeated ; ex. 

As he is diligent, and takes pains. 

Comme il est diligent, et qu'il prend de la peine. 

He Jearns well, because he is diligent, and takes pains. 

II apprend bien, parce qu'il est diligent, et <^'il prend de la peine. 

Unless he is diligent, and takes pains. 

A moins qu?i\ ne soit diligent, et qu'il ne prenne de la peine. 

EXERCISE. 

Since you are busy, and you can not come with me, I will go. 
Puisque occupe, * , vais * m'en aller.f 

I will never forgive you, unlessl95 you come back (this way) and dine 

pardonner n.b. revenir par ici 

with me. Bring my horse, that I may go now, and be back 
256 , afin que 178 partir , de retour 

in timel58. Let us go now, for fear it should rain 148, and we should 

a tems. — — partir , 218 pleuvoir, 

be wetl58. Though it is hot, and the sky is cloudy, I do not think it 
mouille. 240 chaud, ciel nuageux, 221 

will rain. Unlessl95 we go now, and (make haste,) we shall be wet. 
145 n.b. partir , se depecher, 

220. When Si, if, governs two verbs, instead of repeating 
si before the second verb, we use que ; and the verb which fol- 
lows this que, must be in the subjunctive, though the verb which 
follows si is in the indicative ; 

You will learn, if you are diligent, and take pains. 

Vous apprendrez, si vous etes diligent, et que vous preniez de'Ja peine. 

If you come, and I am not at home, you will wait for me. 

Si vous venez, et que je ne sois pas au logis, vous m'attendrez. (oo) 

EXERCISE. 

If you walk so fast, and will not wait for us, we will go back. 

marcher vite, 173 201, , s'en retouner. 

If you go back, and find nobody at home what will you do 1 If the 

, 97 an logis, 

doors are locked,158 and I can not (get in), I will go to the play. 

ferme a clef, entrer , 

You might follow us, if you would walk a little faster, and you did 

178 , 144 peu , 

not look so often behind you. 

derriere. 

221. The idiom of the english language often admits an 
ellipsis, i. e. an omission of the conjunction that ; as, 

I think my sister will come ; for, I think that my sister will come. 



* See note * page 228. t See N. B. page 102. 

(oo) The conjunction if is often suppressed, and the nominative transposed after 
the verb ; as, 

If you should come, or should you come, or were you to come, and I was not at home, you 
will wait for me, which turn of expression must be rendered in french by si before 
th.e verb ; thus, si vous veniez, et owe je ne fusse pas au logis, vous m'attendrez. 

28* 



330 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION* 



But the corresponding conjunction must always be expressed 
in french; as, 

I think my sister will come. Je pense que ma soeur viendra. 
I know she intends to come. Je sais </w'elle a dessein de venir. 
I hope she will soon be here. J' espere qu'elle sera bientot ici. 

EXERCISE. 

Do you think we shall arrive in time to-day ? I (am afraid) it 
145 a aujourd'hui ? craindre 146 

Will be rather late. 

195 un peu tard. 

REMARKS ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
BOTH; ET, TANT. 

222. Both, a conjunction of emphasis, is expressed by et 
before an adjective, by et or tant before a substantive ; but ob- 
serve, that when we use tant before the first substantive, we 
put que instead of et before the second; 

She is both rich and handsome. Elle est et riche et belle. 
Both summer and winter. Tant en ete qxi'evi hiver. 

N. B. This conjunction in familiar writing and in conversa- 
tion is generally left out in french ; thus, 
Elle est riche et belle. En ete et en hiver. 

EXERCISE. 

Our general is both prudent and courageous. Both in the cabinet 

courageux. 

and in the field. We shall beat our enemies both by sea and land. 

armee. battre ennemi par 204 

This conjunction isgenerallyl83 omitted in french, in the familiar 
— ordinairement s\)mettre(u)N.B. , familier32 

style, 
style. 

EITHER, OR; OU, SOIT. 

223. Either, or, are generally expressed by ou ; as, 
That is either good or bad. Cela est ou bon ou mauvais. 
Either he is rich, or he is poor. On il est riche, ou il est pauvre. 

N. B. Either, or, followed by a noun, may be expressed by 
soit ; as, 

Either through love or caprice, she has married him. 

&tt£par amour vu par caprice, or soit par caprice, elle l'a 6pouse. 

EXERCISE. 

Either that is true or it is not. I will see you either in ffoing or in 
89 70 en 

(coming back.) Either through fear or respect, he remained silent. 

revenir. par . 204 garder silence. 

NEITHER, NOR; NE NI, NINE. 

224. Neither, nor, followed by a verb in the indicative or 
subjunctive mood, are expressed, neither by ne, and nor by ni 
ne ; as, 

I neither love nor hate her. Je ne V aime ni ne la hais. 

I neither see her nor speak to her. Je ne la vois ni ne lui parle. 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 



331 



If, after neither, nor, there is a verb in the infinitive, an ad- 
jective, a noun, or a pronoun, neither is expressed by ne be- 
fore the verb, and ni after it, and nor is expressed by ni ; as, 

I care neither for him nor for her. Je ne me souciem de lni ni d'elle. 

She is neither rich nor handsome. Elle w'est ni riche ni belle. 

She has neither beauty nor riches. Elle Ti'a ni beaute ni richesses. 
I can neither see her, nor speak to her. Je ne puis ni la voir, ni lui parler. 

EXERCISE. 

I neither know that man, nor want260 tol68 know him. I nei- 

, avoir envie 

ther love nor esteem him. I neither care for him, nor for all that he 

68 se soucier de 58 , 200 ce que 

can say or do. He can neither read nor write. He is neither rich 

nor poor. He is useful neither to himself nor to others. 

utile (m) n.b. aux autres. 

WHETHER; SI, Q.UE, SOIT GLUE. 

225. Whether, used in the sense of if, is expressed by Si, 
with the following verb in the indicative ; as, 

Do you know whether she will come 1 Savez-vous si elle viendra ? 
I want to know whether she will come J'ai envie de savoir si elle viendra. 

Whether, used in the sense of let, is expressed by que, or soit 
que,wiih the following verb in the subjunctive ; as, 

Come yourself, whether she comes or not ; or let her come or not. 

Venez vous-meme, ^'eile vienne ou non ; or <^'elle vienne ou gu 1 
elle ne vienne pas. 

Whether she comes or not ; or let her come or not, we will go. 

Soit qu' elle vienne ou non ; or ^elle vienne ou qu'elle ne vienne 
pas, nous y irons. 

EXERCISE. 

Do you know whether we shall have peace or war 1 I want to 

260 

know whether that news is true or not. I must go and inquire 
nouvelle vrai non. 181 (nn) s'informer 

whether there has been any news to-day. Whether, or, let that news 
246 en , 

be true or not, I do not care. Whether we have peace or war, I 

non, s'en soucier. 

will go to France. I will go, whether you come with me or not. 

non. 

THO UGH, AL THO UGH?IF E VEN ; AND . 

226. Though, although, if even, followed by a conditional 
tense, are generally expressed by quand ; as, 

She would not go with us. S paS aV6C n0US ' 



(pp) These conjunctions are often left out in english, and the nominative is put after 
the verb, which mode of expression is also rendered in french by quand ; as, 
Were she to come, or, should she come now, she would not go with us ; 
'Quand elle viendrait a present, elle nHrait pas avec nous. 



332 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 



EXERCISE. 

Though that news were true, I would go. We would go, though 

serait ,70 70 , 

we were sure that we should neverl90 return. If even I had said 

senons 29 (nn) n.b. 265 aurais dit 

so, you ought Dot to have (taken advantage of it.) 
cela, 177 vous enprcvaloir. 

BUT FOR, IF IT WERE NOT FOR, &c. SANS. 

227. But for, if it were not for, if it had not been for, had 
it not been for, are generally expressed by sans ; as, 

Butfjr you, I should have starved. Sa7is vous, je serais mortde faim. 

But for his friends, ) 
or // it were not for his friends i Sans ges ami a aurait M { 
or Had it not been for his Iriends, I r 

he would have been punished. * 

EXERCISE. 

But for your father, or if it had not been for your father, I should 
» » 
have lost my (law suit.) Had it not been for him, I should have been 

perdre proces, , 

ruined. If it had not been for this gentleman, we should have been 

miner. monsieur, 

all lostl5S. 
perdre. 

Recapitulatory Exercise on the foregoing rules* 

As it is late, and you are not ready, I will go. Since they are 
tard, pret, vaist m'en aller. Puisque 

all gone, and you will not stop any longer, I will go too. Stay 

partirl58, rester plus long tems, t aussi. Attendre 

till218 I am ready, that we may go together. You know we have a 
que , afinque 178 ensemble. 

long way to go before we can stop. I do not think I can go with you 
chemin a faire, nous arreter. 145 

now ; it is too late. I shall not go, unlessl95 you come with me. I have 

; tard. t, n.b. 

neither horse nor money to go. I can not go before my farther has 
170 t 268 

returned. If you have a mind to go, and you want260 a horse, I 

265 24 envie 168 t , avoir besoin de , 

will lend you mine. If you want money, and your father is not at 

260 , 

home, I will let you have whatever money (s) you want. You will 

, donner, — tout V dont 260 

be too late,unless!95 you go immediately, and make all the haste(s) 
arriver , n.b. partir tout al'heure, diligence 

you can. If your cousin is there, and you have an opportunity to 

142 cousine y 54, 24 occasion 

speak to her, remember me to her. Is she not very handsome 1 Yes; 
(o) , rappeler 56 a son souvenir. belle? ; 

* See note * page 182. t Note * page 228. + Note ** page 286. 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 



333 



she is both rich and handsome ; but I neither value beauty nor riches ; 

; estimer ; 

I only value the qualities of the heart. Though she is amiable, and 
184 aimable, 

has a handsome fortune, I do not hear that any body proposes to 
beau bien, apprendre personne se proposer 

marry her. There is no time lost yet. 183 Shall you (come back) this 
261 246 n.b. encore, n.b. revenir par 

way, if it is fine, and it is not too late'? I will call, if nothing de- 

ici, 240 beau terns, 266 , 99 

tains me, and you will promise to come and sup . with me. But if it 

retenir , — souper 

was too late, and I couldl49 not come, what must I do 1 Will you go ? 

, pouvoir , 83 181 *, 

whether I call or not 7 I do not know yet. Either you intend 168to 

passer encore. avoir dessein 

go, or you do not. If you will (walk in) till the rain is over, and 

* , f 144 entrer pluie passee, 

the weather is clear, I will tell you whether I can go or not. 

tems eclairci, * non. 

I will wait as long as you pleasel42, provided you come and bring- 

43 long terns vouloir, pourvu que 256 

your sister with you. If you go now, and ride gently, I think we 

partir , aller doucement, 

shall (be able) to overtake you. Do not set out before I call, or you 

pouvoir atteindre partir 266, 

hear275 from me, for I shall not go unlessl95 the weather is fine, 
apprendre de mesnouvelles,J * n.b. 240 s 

and my cousin comes with us. Do not you know whether he intends 

avoir dessein 

168to go or not 1 No, I do70 not, but I will send to inquire. If it had 

* , n.b. , $ m'en informer, 

not been for him, we should have been back bofore now. What is it 

, de retour ce tems. (y) 

to us whether he comes or not % Though he should not come with us> 

226 

that would not prevent usgoingl54. But if he shouldl44 call, and you 
(fib) empecher * n.b. 266, 

were not at home, what must I say to him 1 Tell him that if he does 
au logis, 83 181 (o) (i) p. 63. 

not keep his word betterl83, and he disappoints people so, 183 nobody 
tenir parole n.b., tromper 229 ainsi, n.e. 97 

will trust202 him. Do you know whether Mr. A. will be at208 your 
se fier n.b. 

house 1 I dare say he will70. He is a strange man. Whether he 

U 221 y sera. n.b. 65 drole de 

wins or loses, he is always the same, I wanted to speak to him the 

gagner perdre, 260 (o) 



* See note ** page 286, 

t Turn ; Either you have intention to go there, or you have not it. 

t Note * page 379. $ Note * page 228. 

II Dare say. Dare in this sense cannot be rendered by Oser, which expresses bold* 
ness, audacity ; J dare say must be expressed by Je pense, Je m'imagin€ t Je puis dire.y 
Sans doute,je ne doute pas or some similar expression. 



334 



SYNTAX OF THE INTERJECTION- 



other night, but he (went away) without my seeingl56 him. If it 

235 , s'en aller " sans que 218 * 

had not been for him, I should have won the game. Speak low for 

gagner partie. bas 
fear somebody should hearl48 us, and they might report it to him. 
195 on entendre , 90 — 195 rapporter (o) 

Unlessl95you are very attentive, and take your measures well 183, you 

n.b. attentif, 195 mesure n.b. , 

will never succeed. You should watch both£22your cards and204those 
reussir 176 veiller sur n.b. carte sur (66) 

of other people. Neither grandeur nor riches can make man happy, 
des autres — 39 richesses 249 heureux. 

I would not have that place, though it were offered to me. 
174 — , 226 92 (o) 



CHAPTER X. 

INTERJECTION. 

Interjections are natural sounds caused by some sudden 
emotion of joy, grief ] pain, aversion, disgust, fright, surprise^ 
astonishment, tyc. 

The sounds most commonly used in french as interjections 
are;f 

For Joy. 

O! O ! O / si je pouvais le voir. 

Ah! Ah ! Ah ! que je serais aise ! 

Ha ha ! ) 

Hi hi ! > Sounds caused by bursts of laughter. 

Ho ho ! ) 

For pain and grief; 

O! O ! O! que je suis a plaindre ! 

Ah! Ah! Ah ! que je suis malheureux ! 

He ! Ho ! He ! vous me faites mal. 

Aie! Ay! Aie ! vous me blessez. 

Ouf! Oh ! Ouf! que je souffre ! 

Helas! Alas ! Helas! j'ai tout perdu. 

Mon Dieu! O dear ! Mon Dieu! que ferai-je 7 ? 



* Turn, Without that I should see him. ] 

t The number of interjections cannot be ascertained, because any sound which 
expresses a sudden emotion of the soul may be called an interjection. Some of 
these sounds called interjections express even different sensations, according to the 
inflexion which the voice takes, either of joy or grief, of pleasure or pain. The soul 
is then the only syntax for interjections, and they can never embarrass the learner, 
since they do not require any rules. 



IDIOMS. 



335 



P&t aversion, disgust ; 
Me ! Fie upon ! Fi / n'avez-vous pas de honte 1 

For fright, surprise, astonishment ; 
Ha ! Ay ! Ha ! vous voila. 

Eh! Hah! Eh! que vous etes alerte ! 

Oh oh f Oh ! Oh oh! je vous y prends. 

O del ! Heavens ! O del ! qu ? allons-nous devenir % 

Bon dieu ! Mercy on us ! Bon dieu! que vous etes impatient I 

For calling ; 
Ho! 1 

Hola ! > Sounds used when we call out to people. 

Hem ! ) 

For silence ; 
St! \ 

Chut ! \ Sounds used when we call for a sudden silence. 

Paix ! ) 



CHAPTER XL 
IDIOMS. 

Remarks on some idiomatical expressions, and wofcl^ 
having different meanings, in which learners are apt to be 
mistaken. 

PEOPLE; PEUPLE, GENS, PERSONNES, MONDE. 

228. People, meaning that aggregate body of human beings 
that compose a nation, a government, is expressed by peuple; as? 

The french people. Le peuple fran^ais. 

The will of the people. La volonte du peuple. 

N. B. Peuple is also said of that number of persons with- 
out dignity, who compose the multitude ; as, 
An insurrection of the people. Un soulevement du peuple* 

229. People, used to denote a certain number of individ- 
uals, is expressed by gens, personne, monde ; as, 

Were there many people, i. e. persons, at the play ? 

Y avait-il beaucoup de gens, beaucoup de monde a la comedie 1 

There is a great number of people in the street. 

II y a un grand nombre de monde, de gens, de personnes, dans la rue, 

But observe that gens, is not used after a definite number ; 
so we do not say, 

Deux ou trois gens ; two or three people ; we say, Deux outrois personnes, 



336 



IDiOMS. 



Except when gens is attended by an adjective ; as 
Deux ou trois honnetes ge?is. Two or three honest people. 
Cinq ou six jeunes gens. Five or six young people. 

Observe also that when gens is attended by an adjective, this 
adjective must be feminine if it comes before gens, and it must 
be masculine if" it comes after ; as, 

Good people, civil people. De bonnes gens, des gens civils. 

Old people are suspicious. Les vieilles gens sont soup^onneux, 

COUNTRY; PAYS, CAMPAGNE. 

230. Pays is said of a large extent of country, such as the 
dominions of a government, a country, ^province ; campagne is 
said of a certain extent of fields, and is the opposite of ville, 
town ; as, 

France is a fine country. La France est un beau pays. 

I prefer the country to the town, Je prefcre la campagne a la ville. 

MOUTH; BOUCHE, GUEULE, 

231. Speaking of men, horses, mules, asses > we express 
mouth by louche ; 

The mouth of a horse, of an ass. La bouche d'un cheval, d'un ane. 

Speaking of other animals, we express mouth by gueule ; 

The mouth of an ox, of a dog, &c, La gueule d'un bceuf, d'un chien. 
The mouth of a pike, of a trout. La gueule d'un brochet, d'unetruite, 

TIME; TEMS, FOIS. 

232. The word time, denoting any period, or space, is ex- 
pressed by terns ; 

It is time to set out. II est terns de partir. 

We shall not be there in time. Nous n'y serons pas a terns. 

But the word time is sometimes used to limit the action of 
the verb, or to denote a repetition of the action ; as, the first 
time ; this time ; another time ; several times, and is then ex- 
pressed by fois ; as, 

Pardon me for this time. Pardonnez-moi pour cette fois. 

I will do it better next time. Je le ferai mieux laprochaine fois, 
How many times have you done it. Combien de /otsl'avez-vous faitl 

YEAR; AN, ANNEE. 
DAY; JOUR, JOURNEE. 

233. An and jour are indefinite expressions which serve 
more to denote the periods of time than its duration ; they are 
chiefly used after the cardinal or primitive numbers un, deuce, 
trois, quatre, <SfC ; as, 

Un an, deux ans, trois ans, &o. A year, two years, three years,&c. 
Un jour, deux jours, trois jours. One day, two days, three days. &c. 

Annee, on the contrary, implies duration, and will admit of 
different modifications ; so when year is attended by an article^ 



2DI0MS. 



337 



m by an adjective, or by another noun, you must express it 
by annee ; as, 

This year, last year. Cette annee, V annee derniere. 

A good, a happy year. Une bonne, une heureuse annee. 

A great number of years. Un grand nombre d'annees. 

Journee is generally understood of the time which people 
employ in their occupations from their rising to their going to 
bed ; as, 

I spent the day very well. J 5 ai bien employe la journee.. 

I have studied the whole day. J'ai etudie toute la journee. 

MORNING; MATIN, MATINEE. 
EVENING; SOIR, SOIREE. 

234. It is the same with matin, matinee ; soir, soiree, as it is 
with jour, journee. Matin is said of the first \ and soir of the last 
part of the day, but they do not imply any idea of duration. 
Matinee, on the contrary, implies the whole time from day light 
till noon ; but is generally understood to be from the time that 
people get up till twelve o^clock at noon ; and soiree implies the 
whole time of darkness till twelve o'clock at night, or till people 
retire ; as, 

It was fine this morning. II faisait beauce matin. 

I have studied all the morning. J'ai etudie toute la matinee. 
Shall we see you this evening? Vous verrons-nous ce soir? 
I shall spend the evening with you. Je passerai la soiree avec vous, 

N. B. Saluting people, for good morning, we say bon jour, 
not bon matin ; and for good night, we say bon soir, in the 
early part of the night, and bonne nuit, when the night is far 
advanced, 

NIGHT; NUIT, SOIR. 

235. If, by night, you mean the whole time of darkness on 
lhat part of the earth which we inhabit, you express it in french 
by nuit ; as, 

Where did he sleep last night? Ou eoucha-t-il la nuit derniere 1 
He spent the whole night at the ball, II passa toute la nuit au bal. 

If, by night, you mean only the first part of darkness which 
is otherwise called evening, you express it by soir ; as, 
Will you go to the play Xonight ? Irez-vons a la comedie ce soir 
Were you at the ball last night? Etiez-vous au bal hier au soir 

236 TWELVE O'CLOCK; MIDI, MINUIT. 

It is twelve o'clock. II est midi (in the day.) II est minuit (at night.) 
It is a quarter past 12. II est midi et un quart, llestminuit et un Quart 
It is halfipast twelve. II est midi et demi. U est minuit et demi. 
It is three quarters past twelve. > T1 

It wants a quarter to one. \ 11 eSt une heure moins un ^art. 

It is one o'clock. II est une heure. 

It is a quarter past one. II est une heure et en quart &c 

29 



338 



IDIOMS. 



To HAVE, expressed by ETRE. 
237. The auxiliary verb have is expressed by the same 
tense and person of the auxiliary etre, to form the compound 
tenses of reflective verbs ; as, 



I have hurt myself. 
He has gone away. 
We have sat down. 
You have walked. 
They have diverted themselves. 



Je me $uis blesse. 

II s'en est alle. 

Nous nous sommes assis. 

Vous vous etes promenes. 

lis se sont divertis. [see p. 101.] 



238. The auxiliary have is also expressed by the same 
tense and person of etre, when it comes before any of the fol- 
lowing participles ; 



Agreed, eonvenu, Come, 
Arrived, arrive. Come in, 
Become, devenu. Dead, 
Befallen, survenu* Deceased, 
Born, ne. Disagreed, 
I have set out early. 
He has agreed to do it. 
We have arrived in time. 
You have returned too soon. 
They have gone too far. 



venu. Fallen, tombe. 

entre. Gone, alle. 

mort. Returned, revenu. 

decide. Set out, parti. 

disconvenu. Succeeded, parvenu. 

Je suis parti de bonne heure. 

II est eonvenu de le faire.* 
Nous sommes arrives a terns. 
Vous etes revenus trop tot. 
lis sont alles trop loin. 



To BE, expressed by AVOIR. 

239. The auxiliary verb be is expressed by the same tense 
and person of the auxiliary avoir, when it is followed by the 
adjectives hungry, thirst, cold, warm, hot denoting the natural 
feelings ; right, wrong, ashamed ; because these adjectives are 
expressed by a substantive in french ; as 
I am hungry. Tai faim. 



He 25 thirsty. 
His feet are cold. 
She is warm or hot. 
Her hands are warm. 
We are right. 
They are wrong, ashamed. 



II a soif. 
II a froid aux pieds. 
Elle a chaud ; not, elle est chaude, 
Elle a chaud aux mains. 
Nous avons raison. 
lis out tort ; ils ont honte. 



N. B. The verb be is also expressed by avoir, in speaking 
of the age of beings, because in these instances, as in the 



* When the participle eonvenu means suited, it requires avoir ; as, 

Cela m'aurait fort bien eonvenu ; That would have suited me very well. 

N. B. The participles sorti, gone out ; bee 11 out ; passe, gone by ; monte, gone up, 
ascended ; descendu, come down, require avoir or etre, agreeably to the sense in 
which they are used ; but the same distinction, I think, is observed in english ; 

Mon pere a sorti ; My father has been out. II etait sorti ; He was gone out. 

II a passe pres d'ici ; He has passed just by. II est passe ; He is gone by. 

11 a monte la coline ; He has ascended the hill. II est monte ; He is gone up. 

II a descendu l'esca- He has come down the II est descendu ; He is come down . 
lier ; stairs. 

Demeure, used for lived, dwelt, requires avoir; and for remained, staid, it requires 
etre ; as, 

II a demeure a Paris ; He has lived in Paris. II est demeure a P. ; He has staid in P. 
Accouru, run to ; Peri, perished ; apparu, comparu, appeared ; Disparu, disappeared ; 
cru, grown ; decru, grown less ; recru, grown again, take indifferently avoir or etre< 



idioms. 339 

above, the French use a substantive instead of an adjective ; 
as, 

How old are you! duel age avez-vous? i. e. What age have 

I am sixteen. Tai seize ans; not, Je suis seize. [you 1 

How old is your horse 1 duel age a votre cheval 1 

To BE, expressed by FAIRE. 

240. The verb be, attended by an adjective or a substantive 
denoting the state of the weather, or of the atmosphere, is ex- 
pressed in french by the same tense of the verb fair e, with II 
J or its nominative ; as, 

How is the weather 1 Gtuel terns fait-\\ ? 

Is the weather fine % Fait-i\ beau terns 1 

Yes, the weather is very fine. Oui, il fail tres beau terns. 

It is rather warm. i II fait un peu chaud. 

It is very cold. II fait tres froid, or grand froid. 

The weather has been bad lately. II a fait mauvais terns depuis peu. 

To BE, To DO, expressed by Se PORTER. 

241. The verbs 5eand do, used to denote the state the body, 
are expressed by the same tense and person of the reflective 
verb Se porter ; as, 

How are you 1 how do you do ? Comment vous portez-vous 1 
I am pretty well, I thank you. Je me porte assez bien, dieu merci.* 
I have not been well. Je ne me suis pas bien porte. 

How is you mother 1 ) Comment se porte madamet votre 

How does your mother do 1 j mere] 

To BE, expressed by DEVOIR. 

242. The present tense of the verb be, am, art, is, are, and 
the imperfect was, were, followed by another verb in the infin- 
itive y are expressed by the same tense and person of the verb 
devoir; as, 

I am to go there to-night. Je dois y aller ce soir. 

He is to come to-morrow. II doit venir demain ; not, il est&c. 

He was to bring it to-day. II devait l'apporter aujourd'hui. 

To BE, not expressed in FRENCH. 

243. The infinitive words to be, followed by a past participle, 
is not expressed, but the english participle takes the place of 



* The French do not, as the English do, thank those who inquire after their health. 
Instead of Je vous remercie ; they say, Dieu merci; A votre service ; Vous etes bien, 
ton, or bien civil ; Vous avez bien de la bonte, or they return the compliment after the 
answer by saying, Et vous 1 and you 1 

t It is customary wjjjLthe French, in mentioning the relations of the people to 
whom they are speaking, r to add the words Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle; as, 
Comment se porte monsieur votre pere, monsieur votre frere ? 
J'ai rencontre madame votre mere, mademoiselle votre sceur ; these words can not 
be expressed in english, 



340 



IDIOMS. 



the infinitive be, and is expressed by the infinitive in frguch ; 
as, 

There is nothing to be seen. II n'y a rien a voir. 

He caused his head to be cutoff. II lui fit couper la tete. 

This house is to be let,to be sold. Cette maison est klouer, a vendre. 

To BE JUST, To HAVE JUST; VENIR DE, ne FAIRE 
Que DE. 

244. The verbs have and be followed by the adverb Just, to 
denote an action past at the moment we are speaking, are ex- 
pressed by venir de, or ne faire que de, in the same tense and 
person as have or be are, and the english participle is expressed 
by the infinitive in french; thus, 

I am just come. \ J T e vie f dtei Jf r J or > 

■* ( Je ne fats que d amver. 

My brother had just done. % { Mon frSre t;w«Me finir; or, 
' i Mon frere ne faisait que de finir.* 

WAS NEAR, WERE NEAR, HAD LIKE; PENSER. 

245. Was near, were near followed by a present participle, 
and had like followed by an infinitive, denote an action which 
was on the point of being effected, and are expressed by the 
perfect tense, or the present compound] of the verb penser ; as, 

I was near dyinsr : ) T » • -j. 

or I had like to have died, \ J al P ense > or J e P ensa * mounr ' 

You were near falling:: i X7 , 

or Your had like to have fallen. \ Vous avez P ense tomber - 

He was near being- killed : I T i - - -i . 

or He had like to hive been killed.: ( 11 * ° T ll etre tUe ' 

THERE IS, THERE ARE, IT IS FAR, IT IS LONG, AGO r 
IT IS SINCE, THIS, THESE; ILYA; IL Y AVAIT, &c. 

246. There is, there are, it is far, it is long, it is since, ago, 
and the demonstrative words this, these, pointing out a period 
of time, are expressed by the impersonal verb ily a ; il y avait y 
&c. ;J as, 

Is there any news to-day % Y a-t-il des nouvelles aujourd'hui 1 

Are there flowers in his garden ? Y a-t-il des fleurs dans son jardin 1 
How far is it from Calais to Paris 1 > Combien y a-t-il de Calais a 
or How far is Calais from Paris'? J Paris 1 
It is a hundred and fifty miles. Ily a cent cinquante milles. 
Calais is 150 miles from Paris. Ily a cent cinquante milles de C. a P, 
How long has he lived here ? Combien y a-i-il qu'il demeure ici 1 
He has been here these six months. Ily a six mois qu'il est ici. 



* Do not confound ne faire que de, To be just, To havi 
which expressed another idea, viz. To do nothing but 
the difference between these two expressions. 

t Agreeably to 136, 137 rules. 

t See the conjugation of the impersonal verb y avoir, pag! 




ust, with ne faire que, 
" "ed to the first makes 



IDIOMS. 341 

It is 10 years sincehe was in France, i 11 y a dix ans qu'il etait en 
or He was in France 10 years ago. > France ; or, U etait en France 

) il y a dix ans. 

It is long since I have seen him. ~l II y a long terns que je ne* 
or I have not seen him this long while $ l'ai vu. 

It was 12 months since I saw him. ) U y avait un an que je ne 
or I had not seen him these 12 months. $ l'avais vu. t 

HERE IS, HERE ARE j THIS IS, THESE ARE; VOIC1. 
THERE IS, THERE ARE ; THA T IS, THOSE ARE ; VOILA. 

247. Here is, here are, this is, these are, pointing out any ob- 
ject, are expressed by void; there is, there are, that is, those 
are, also pointing out an object, are expressed by voild; as, 

Here is, or this is your horse. Void votre cheval. 

Here are, or these are your boots. Void vos bottes. 

There is, that is a man who says. Voild un homme qui dit. 

N. B. It is to be observed that, when the nominative of the 
verb which attends here, there, in the above sense, i. e. pointing 
out an object, is a personal pronoun, this nominative pronoun 
is changed into an objective pronoun in french, and placed be- 
fore void, voild ; thus, 

Here I am. Me voici. Here we are. Nous voici. 

Here he is. Le voici. There she is. La voila. 

Here they are. Les voici. There they are. Les voila. 

LET; aUE, LAISSEZ. 

248. Let, implying command or permission to a third person, 
is expressed by que, and the object of let is made the nominative 
of the following verb, which must be in the subjunctive in 
french ; as, 

Let him do it himself. Qu'il le fasse lui meme. 

Let her go, if she likes. Quelle y aille, si elle veut. 

Let them go too. Qu'ils, or Relies y aillent aussi. 

Let my brother go alone. Que mon frere y aille seul. 

Let, commanding or entreating a second person, is expressed 
by the second person of the imperative of the verb laisser, 
with the following verb in the infinitive ; as, 

Let him go; permit him to go. Laissez-le aller. 

Let her go ; permit her to go. Laissez-l& aller. 

Let them go ; permit them to-go. Laissez-\es aller. 

Let my brother go ; suffer him to go. Laissez aller mon frere. 

N. B. Let know, meaning to inform, is expressed by fair e 
savoir, agreeably to tense and person ; as, 



* See the 196 rule. 

t The French do not give to the different periods of time names which correspond 
with the English. For a week, they say, Jiuit juors ; for two weeks, or a fortnight, 
they say, quinze jours ;. ^ three weeks, trots semaines ; four weeks, un mois ; for a 
quarter of a year, they say, trois mois ; half a year, six mois ; three quarters of a year, 
fteufmois ; twelve months, un un. 

29* 



342 



IDIOMS, 



Let him know that I will come. Fait.es lui savoir que je viendrai, 
I will him hoa; it to-night. Je le lui ferai savoir ce soir. 

To MAKE ; FA IRE, RENDRE. 

249. To make, meaning to perform some work, or some ac- 
tion, is expressed by fair e ; as, 

To make a book ; to make a noise. Faire un livre ; /aire un bruit. 
To make great progress. Faire de grands progres. 

But to make, expressing not the performance of an action, 
but the moral or natural effects of one being on another, is ex- 
pressed by rcndre ; as, 

Exercise makes the body healthy. L'exercice rend le corps sain. 

Vice makes men unhappy. Le vice rend les hommes malheureux. 

Misfortune has made him wise. Le malheur l'a rendu sage. 

To CAUSE, To HAVE, To GET ; FAIRE. 

250. The verbs cause, and have ; and get, in the sense of 
cause, meaning to order, ox procure a thing to be done, are ex- 
pressed by the same tense and person of the verb faire ; and 
the english participle which follows have, or get, is expressed 
by the infinitive in french ; as, 

I had him arrested ; ) T . f it arr * fpr 

or I have caused him to be arrested. \ Je 1 a% > aa arr ° rer ' 

I shall have him punished ; > •«■ . /• • „, •„ 

t i 77 t_ • i K r . > Je le terai punir. 
ot 1 shall cause him to be punished. ) 

Gel your watch mended. Faites raccommoder votre montre. 

To CAUSE To BE DONE or MADE, To ) 
HAVE or GET DONE or MADE, To > FAIRE FAIRE. 
ORDER, To BESPEAK ; ) 

251. To cause to be done or made, To have or get done or 
made, To order, To bespeak, are expressed by the verb faire 
repeated ; i. e. the first verb in the same tense and person as 
cause, have, get, order, or bespeak is, and the second verb in the 
infinitive ; as, 

I am going to get a watch made. Je vais faire faire une montre. 

Where will you have it made ? ) Qa ]a ferez . vons fairc i 
or Where will you get it done? $ 

I shall have it made in Paris ; Je la faire a Paris, 
or I shall get it done in Pans. ) J 

To ASK, To DESIRE ; DIRE, PRIER CHARGER. 

252. We say in french as in english, demander une chose, 
to ask for a thing ; desirer une chose, to wish for a thing ; 
but we do not say ; demander de faire une chose, to ask to 
do a thing; nor desirer une personne de faire une chose, 
to desire a person to do a thing ; therefore, when ask or de- 
sire are followed by another verb in the infinitive, ask must 
be expressed by dire or prier ; and desire by prier or 
charger ; as, 



IDIOMS. 



343 



He asked me to do it. II me dit, or il me pria de le faire. 

He desired me to tell you so. II m'a prie, or charge de vous le dire. 

To LOOK; REGARDER, PARAITRE, AVOIR LA MINE. 

253. To look, meaning to view, to consider, is expressed by 
regarder ; 

Look at this man, at that horse. Regardez cet homme, ce cheval. 
To look, meaning to seem, to appear, is paraitre, avoir Vair, 
avoir la mine, avoir apparence ; as, 

That men looks very proud. Cet homme a Yair bien fier. 

You look very well to-day. Vous avez bonne mine aujourd'hui. 

This bread looks well. Ce pain par ait bon, or a bonne mine* 

How does the country look. Gluelle apparence a la campagne 1 

To SUPPOSE ; SUPPOSER, PENSER, S'IMAGINER. 

254. The French say as well as the English, supposer une 
chose, to suppose a thing, i. e. to take it as granted for the sake 
of argument ; as 

You suppose (i. e. you take for granted) a thing which is not probable. 
Vous supposez une chose qui n'est pas probable. 

But the verb suppose, so often used in english in the sense 
of to think, to fancy, to imagine, can not be expressed by the 
verb supposer in french ; it must be expressed by penser or 
s'imaginer ; as 

I suppose you know the news, i. e. I think, I imagine, fyc. 
Je m'imagine que vous savez les nouvelles ; not, Je suppose, &c. 
It is supposed that there has been a battle ; i. e. it is thought, &c. 
On pense, on ^imagine qu'il y a eu bataille ; never, On suppose. 

To HOPE; ESPERER. 
To HOPE; Se FLATTER, AIMER a CROIRE, Se PLAIRE oL 
CROIRE. 

255. The verb hope followed by & future tense, is expressed 
by esperer ; 

I hope you will be well by and by, to-morrow, &c. 
Tespere que vous vous porterez bien tantot, demain, &c. 

N. B. Hope, being the expectation of something to come, can 
never be said in french of what is past or present ; so when 
the verb hope is followed by the present or perfect tense of 
another verb, it can not be expressed by Esperer ; it must be ex- 
pressed by Se Flatter, Aimer d Croire, Se Plaire d Croire ; as, 

I hope you are well. Je me flaite, or Taime a croire, or 

Je me plais a croire que vous vous portez bien ; never, Tespere. 

I hope, that I have not kept you wailing. 

Je me flattef que je ne vous ai pas fait attendre ; never, Tespere. 



* mine is said of the look of persons, and of things that are eatable, such as bread, 
meat, fruit, &c. but it cannot be said of other things. 

t Je me flatte, in this sense, does not mean I flatter myself ; it means, I like to 
think to persuade myself. 



344 



IDIOMS. 



Yet, in these instances, we may also use the verb csperer, 
if we transpose it in parenthesis at the end of the sentence ; 
thus, 

Vous v r ous portez bien, '^cspere. You are well, I hope. 

Je ne vous ai pas fait attend re, Respire. I have not kept you, I hope. 

To TAKE ; MENER, PORTER. 
To BRING; AMENER, APPORTER 

256. Mener, to take, is said of beings that have the natural 
faculty of walking ; porter is said of the same beings when 
they have lost, or are not able to use that faculty ; and 
of things ; as, 

Take my horse to the stable. Menez mon cheval a l'ecurie. 

Take the saddle to the saddler. Portez la selle au sellier. 

Arnener and apporter are used in the same sense as mener 
and porter, but they imply a relation to the place in which we 
are ; as, 

Bring me my horse. Amenez-moi mon cheval. 

Bring me my whip. Apportez-moi mon fouet. 

rr ttq tp \ & e SERVIR de, USER de, En USER, 

10 Ub&; j TRAITER, AGIR, AVOIR COUTUME. 

257. To use, meaning to make use of things, is expressed 
by the reflective verb se servir de ; as, 

I am using my knife, my pen, my book, my horse, &c. [val; 
Je me sers de mon couteau, de ma plume, de mon livre, de mon che- 
not Fuse mon couteau, ma plume, &c. 

Beacause user une chose, means, to wear out a thing, not to 

make use of a thing. 

Yet speaking of moral or intellectual objects, we express use 

by user de ; 

To use patience, violence, reprisals, precaution. 

User de patience, de violence, de represailles, de precaution. 
To use, speaking of the manner of acting towards persons, 
is expressed by traiter, en user avec, agir avec ; as, 

He uses me well. 

II me traite bien ; II en use bien avec moi ; II agit bien avec moi. 
He has not used me well. II ne m'a pas bien traite. 

To use, meaning to be accustomed to, is expressed by avoir 
coutume, or etre accoutume ; as, 

You are used to it. Vous y etes accoutume. 

He was not used to do so. II n'avait pas coutume d'agir ainsi. 

To HELP ; AIDER, SERVIR. 

258. To help, viz. to assist a. person to do a thing, is expressed 
by aider ; 

Shall I help you to do it 1 Vous aiderai-je a le faire 1 

My brother will not help me, Mon frere ne veut pas m'aider. 



IDIOMS. 



345 



But to help is often used in the sense of to take, to offer, to 
present a thing to a person ; help is then expressed by servir, 
not the person to the thing, but the thing to the person ; as, 
Shall I help you to a glass of wine 1 Vous servirai-je un verre de vin % 
i. e. shall I help a glass of wine to you ? 

i&Zp that gentleman to a glass ; Servez un verre d ce monsieur; 
not, servez ce monsieur a un verre ; for it is the glass that you help or 
present to the gentleman, not the gentleman to the glass. 

To ATTEND. 

259. Explained in the following examples ; 

To attend a meeting. Alter or assister a une assembler 

To attend to one's duty. Faire or remplir son devoir. 

To attend to what is said. Faire attention a ce qu'on dit. 

To attend to business. S'appliquer aux affaires. 

To attend a sick person. Garder or soigner un malade. 

To attend a patient viz. to v&iis. Ftfir or visiter un malade. 
To attend a master, to upon. Servir un maitre. 
To attend a master, to be taught. Prendre \e$on d'un maitre. 
To attend a pupil, to lessons. Donner \e^on a un ecolier. 

^ ivrd^T. I AVOIR BESOIN, AVOIR EtfVIE, DESIRER, 
i* ^iiiv J ; £ soUHAITER, VOULOIR, DEMANDER. 

260. To want, meaning to be in need of a thing, or under 
the necessity of doing a thing, is expressed by avoir besoin ; 
as, 

I want money, clothes ; am in need. J'ai besoin d'argent, d'habits. 
I do not want him; have no need. Je n'ai pas besoin de lui. 
I want to go to town ; i. e. must go. J'ai besoin d'aller a la ville. 

But want is often used to denote merely wish or desire ; it 
is then expressed by avoir envie, desirer, souhaiter, vouloir ; 
as, 

I want to see him ; i. e. I wish. Je desire or souhaite de le voir. 

I want to speak to him ; {wish ) J'ai envie de lui parler. 

I want him to learn french. Je veux qu'il apprenne le fran^ais. 

To want a person or a thing, in the sense of wish, is cfe- 
mander ; 

Whom or what do you want? Q,ui or que demandez-vous 1 

You are wanted ; He w#?i£s you. On vous demande ; II vous demande. 

To MARRY; MARIER, $e MARIER, EPOUSER. 

261. If, by marry, you mean to give a person in marriage, 
or to perform what is called the ceremony, you must make 
use of the verb marier. If, by marry, you mean to take a per- 
son in marriage, you use epouser ; 

My father has married his niece. 

Mon pere a marie sa niece ; i. e. has given her t?i marriage. 
Mon pere a Spouse sa niece ; e. has her for his. wife. 

That parson has married my sister. 

Ce pretre a marie ma soeur ; i. e. has performed the ceremony, 
Ce pretre a epouse ma soeur i. e. has ta&m her for his wife 



346 



IDIOMS. 



N. B. Married, in the sense of taking a wife, is expressed 
by Spouse after the auxiliary have, and by marie, after the aux- 
iliary be ; as, 

I married his sister. J'ai cpousc sa socur ; not marie. 

I a/?i married to his sister. Je suis marie a sa soeur ; not epouse. 

To marry, in a neuter sense, i. e. without an added to 

it, is expressed by the reflective verb se marier ; as, 

When do you marry? Gluand vous mariez-vous 1 

I will never be married. Je ne me marierai jamais. 

To RIDE. 

262. Explained in the following examples ; 

To ride well. Se tenir bien a cheval. 

To ride in a coach, on horseback. iiZZer en carosse, aller a cheval. 

To take a ride in a coach. \ Faire un l0UT en carosse I or 

( se promener en carosse. 

To take a ride on horseback. \ Faire un <<Mtr * c . heval i or 

) se promener a cheval. 

N. B. To ride, attended by any particular object, i. e. an ob- 
ject determined by any of the signs called article, is ex- 
pressed by aller ; as, 

I will ride your horse, and you will ride in my coach. 
Pirw sur votre cheval, et vous irez dans mon carosse. 

To WALK; MARCHER, Se PROMENER. 

263. If, by walk, you mean the action of going from place to 
place., either for business or exercise, you must use marcher ; 
,as, 

Walk a little faster. Marchez un pen plus vite. 

T can not walk any more. Je ne puis plus marcher. 

I have walked too much to-day. J'ai trop marche aujourd'hui. 

If, by walk, you mean that exercise which is taken for di- 
version, you must use the reflective verb se promener ; as, 
Let us walk a little. Promenons-nous un peu. [d'hui. 

I have not walked to-day. Je ne me suis pas promene aujour- 

N. B. To take a walk is expressed by faire un tour, or by 

faire une promenade, faire un tour de promenade ; as, # 
Let us go and take a walk. Al!ons/<2ireun tour At promenade. 

Go and take a walk in the garden. Allez faire un tour dans le jardin.* 

To COME ; ALLER, VENIR. 

264. The English often use the verb come, with reference 
to the person to whom they speak ; so speaking to a person 
in the street, they will say : 

* Faire un tour is generally understood of a short walk ; and Faire une promenade > 
Faire un tour de promenade means to take a walk, without any limitation as to 
time, but rather long than short. 



IDIOMS. 



347 



I will come and see you to-morrow, meaning, at the person's house ; 
The French, on the contrary, speak with reference to the 
place, and not to the person ; so this sentence : 

I will come and see you to-morrow, 
may be expressed two ways ; 

Je viendrai vous voir demain, 
being then at the place in which you are to come to see the 
person. 

Tirai vous voir demain, 
meaning the place where you are to go to see the person ; for, 
venir means to move from a place in which we are not at the 
time we are speaking, to a place in which we are ; aller means to 
move from a place in which we are, to a place in which we 
are not. 

In asking a question, come is expressed by venir ; but in the 
answer, the verb must be determined by the place, not by the 
person you are to go to. 

To RETURN ; RETOURNER, REVEMR. 

265. The English use the verb return both for to go back, 
and to come back ; but in french you must make a distinction, 

If, by return, you mean to go back, you must use retourner ; as, 

I come from Paris, and I will return to-morrow; i.e. will go back. 
Je viens de Paris, et j'y retournerai demain. 

If, by return, you mean to come back, you must use reve- 
nir ; as, 

I am going to Paris, and I will return next week ; i. e. will come 
Je vais a Paris, et je reviendrai la semaine prochaine. [back, 

N. B. To return, meaning to give back, to restore, to repay, 
is expressed by rendre ; as, 

Return me my money. Rendez-moi mon argent. 

Have I not returned it to you 1 Ne vous l'ai-je pas rendu ? 

To CALL; PASSER CHEZ. 

266. To call a person, is appeler quelqu'un ; but to call at a 
person's, or upon a person, is passer cliez quelqu'un ; as, 

When will you call upon me 1 Quand passerez-vous chez moi 1 
I will call upon you to-morrow. Jepasserai demain chez vous. 

Never say, 

Appelez sur moi, call upon me ; J'appelerai sur vous, &c. 

To BREAK; ROMPRE, CASSER. 

267. Rompre is said of things which require some effort to 
break them, such as wood and metals ; as, 

You have broken my stick. Vous avez rompu mon baton. 



348 idioms, 

Casser is said of things that are frail, such as glass and 
earthenware. 

He has broken the plates. II a casse les assiettes. 

The glass and botile are broken. Le verre et la bouieille sont casscs* 

N- B. In speaking of bones, we use indifferently rompre or 
casser ; 

He has broken his leg, II s'est casse, or rompu la jambe. 

Without specifying any particular object, we use casser ; 
as, 

They break every thing in this house. On casse tout dans cette maison. 
And for break to pieces, we say briser ; as, 
The ship was broken to pieces. La navire fut tout brist* 

To LIKE ! AIMER, TROUVER. 

268. To like, meaning to be fond of, to have a liking for a 
person or a thing, is expressed by aimer ; as, 

I like wine, money, pleasure, France, the country, &c. 
Taime le vin, l'argent, le plaisir, la France, la campagne, &c. 

But like is often used, especially in asking questions, for to 
think, to have an opinion, and is then expressed by penser or 
trouver; 

How do you like this country ? 
i. e. What think you, what is your opinion of this country 7 

Glue pensez-vous de ce pays 1 or comment trouvez-vous ce pays 1 

Yet in the answer we use aimer ; as, 

Je Yaime beaucoup. Je Yaime assez bien. Je ne Vaitne pas du tout. 
I like it much. I like it well enough. I do not like it at all* 

To KEEP ; GARDER, TENIR, AVOIR. 

269. To keep, meaning to preserve, to watch, to guard, to 
look after, is expressed by garder ; as, 

Keep it for my sake ; i. e. preserve. Gardez-le pour l'amour de moi. 
This dog keeps the house ; vmtckes. Ce chien garde la maison. 
This boy keeps the flocks; looks after. Ce garcon garde les troupeaux. 

These instances excepted, to keep is generally expressed 

by tenir ; 

She keeps a house, a school. Elle tient maison, ecole. 

He keeps an inn, boarders. II tient auberge, des pensionnaireS. 

To keep in prison, in the house. Tenir en prison, dans la maison. 

To keep clean, to keep ready. Tenir propre, tenir pret. 

To keep cows, horses, a coach. Avoir des vaches, des chevaux, un 
Familiarly we say ; Router carosse ; to keep a coach. [carosse. 

To GET; GAGNER ; GOT not expressed in french. 

270. The verb get, meaning to gain, to win, to earn, to ac- 
quire, is expressed by gagner ; as, 

He gets or earns five shillings a day. II gagne cinq shelins par jour. 
He has got or won a deal of money. II a gagne beaucoup d'argent. 



IDIOMS. 



349 



But the participle got, so often added to the verb have, to 
denote possession, is not expressed in french, and' is perhaps 
useless in english ; as, 

He has got a deal of money. U a beaucoup d'argent. 

Have you got any money about you 1 Avez-vous de 1'argent sur vousl 
You have got a new hat. Vous avez un chapeau neuf ; 

Not, 

Vous avez gagne, which means, you have won, gained, earned, &c> 



To SPEND ; DEPENSER, PASSER. 

271. Speaking of money, property, to spend is expressed by 
depenser ; speaking of time, spend is expressed by passer ; as> 

He spends all his money in gaming. II defense tout son argent a jouei\ 
He spends all his time in hunting. II passe tout son terns a la chasse* 

To CHARGE; PRENDRE, FAIRE PAYER, PRIX. 

272. The verb charge, so often used in speaking of the 
price of things, can not be expressed in french by charger, 
which means to load, or to give in charge : it must be ex- 
pressed by prendre, faire payer, or by prix, with some other 
verb; as, 

How much do you charge a day for a horse 1 i. e. do you require ? 

Combien prenez-voxis par jour pour un cbeval 1 

How much do you charge for a saddle! what is the price of & saddle 1 

Combien prenez-vous pour une selle 1 or quel est le prix d'une selle 1 

You charge too much ; i. e. the price is too high. 

C'est trop, c'est trop cher, vous prenez trop, vous f ait es payer trop ; 

Never, Vous chargez trop ; vous avez cliarge trop. 

_ ^ • . n/rr^iprr, S ALLER an DEVANT de. 

273. To GO to MEET. J ALLER d u RENC0N TRE de. 

Let us go and meet your sister. Allans au devant de votre scaur. 

■\xr a , „ , . { Nous allionsd voire rencontre : 

We were ^ to ^ you. J Nqus au de ^ 

To BRING NEAR, \ APPROCHER, 

To GO NEAR, To COME NEAR; J S'APPROCHER de, 

274. Approcher means to bring an object near, and s'ajo- 
procher de means to go, or come near an object ; for ex. I shall 
say : 

Approchez la table. Bring the table near. 

But if I said to a person come near or go near the table ; I 
should not say, Approchez la table ; I must sa) 7 , Approchez- 
vous de la table; for it is the person who is to approach the 
table, not the table to approach the person. 

I brought my sister near me. Tapprochai ma smir de moi, 
I near my sister. Je m'approchia de ma soeur* 

. 30 



350 



IDIOMS. 



To HEAR; ENTENDRE, ENTENDRE des NOUVELLES, &C, 

275. To hear a person is entendre quelqu'un ; as, 

I hear your sister coming, Tentends venir votre sceur. 

But to hear from a person, is not entendre de quelqu'un ; hear 
is then expressed by entendre des nouvelles, apprendre des 
nouvelles, recevoir des nouvelles ; as, 
Do you hear from your sister often 1 

Entendez-vous, or apprenez-vous, or recevez-vous souvent des 
nouvelles de votre soeur 1 
Not, Entendez-vous souvent de votre soeur 1 
I hear from her almost every day. 

Tentends, or ^apprends, or je regois presque touts les jours de 
ses nouvelles, or des nouvelles d'elle ; 
Not, Tentends d'elle, &c. 

IT IS WITH; IL EN EST DE. 

276. It is with, denoting a similarity between two objects, is 
expressed by il en est de ; as, 

It is with you as with me. II en est de vous comme de moi. 

It is with a state as with a family. II en est d'un etat comme d'une 

[famille. 

WHATEVER, IN VAIN, TO NO PURPOSE; AVOIR BEAU. 

277. Avoir beau is an expression very prevalent in conver- 
sation, instead of en vain, inutilement ; so, instead of saying; 

C'est en vain que je lui dis d'etudier, il n'en fait rien ; 
It is in vain that I tell him to study, he does not do it j 
We say ; Tai beau lui dire d'etudier, il n'en fait rien. 

278. To FIND FAULT WITH; TROUVER d REDIRE d; ex. 

He finds fault with every thing. II trouve a redire a tout. 
What fault can be found with it. Clue peut-on y trouver a redire. 

279. To TAKE IT KINDLY; SAVOIR BON GRE. 

To TAKE IT UNKINDLY; SAVOIR MAUVAIS GRE, 

If he comes, I will take it kindly. S'il vient, je lui en saurai bon grL 
He would take it unkindly of me. II m'en saurait mauvais i>re. 
Take it kindly or unkindly '. Sachez-m'evi bon gre ou mauvais 

[gre. 

280. To DO WITHOUT, To BE EASY WITHOUT; 
Se PASSER de ; ex. 

Can you do without a horse 1 Pouvez-vous vous passer de chevall 
I can not do without one. I Je ne - mVw . 

I am not easy without it. ) r r 

[aU'IL Y A, 

281 WHAT IS THE MATTER, )Q,U'YA-T-IL, QJJ'EST-CE 
WHAT IS IT ABOUT, >GIU'EST-CE GLUE, 
WHAT IS IT ? ) aU EST-CE aUE C'EST ? 

What is the matter there ? Qu'y a-Lil la; qu'est-ce quHly a la* 

What is the matter with you 1 Qu'est-ce que vous avez 1 

What is the matter with your hand? Qu'est-ce que vous avez a la main 1 



IDIOMS. 



351 



N. B. Qu^ est-ce que is very prevalent in conversation, in- 
stead of que ; so instead of saying : 

Que dites-vous 1 What do you say 1 

Que faites-vous 7 What are you doing 1 

we say: Qu'est-ce que vous'dites ? Qu'est-ce que vous faites 7 

282 /S IT, IS IT NOT, ) EST-CE aUE, 

DOES IT, DOES IT NOT, > N'EST-CE PAS Q,UE, 
i/A VE I, HAVE I NOT? ) N'EST-CE PAS 1 
These expressions are often used to ask questions; but 
they serve less to require information, than to show a kind of 
fear or surprize, that the thing about which we inquire should 
be different from what we thought or wished it to be ; the dif- 
ference will be made obvious in the following examples ; 
Vous en allez-vous Are you going 7 

Est-ce que vous vous en allez 1 You are not going, are you ? 
Ne sortirons-nous pas 1 Shall we not go out % 

N'est-cepas que nous sortirons, j Wq ^ ^ wg %oi ? 

or Nous sortirons, n est-ce pas ? ) ° 

It seems to me, however it may seem to other people, that 
these two ways of asking a question, imply different ideas.* 



Promiscuous Exercises on the Idioms. 



Good morning,234 sir. This is240 a fine morning. How do you do 

n.b. t 185 241 

this morning % I hope you are very well. Very well, sir, I thank you. 

255 241 , , % 

How does all your family do % How are your wife and children*? 

241 241 

They are better, I thank you. And you ; how do you do % Tolerably 

241 (e) p. 56., t) ; 241 Passablement 

well for an (old man.) Do not talk of being old yetl83; it will be 

vieillard. parler vieux deja n.b. ; 

time enough twenty years hence. How old do you think I am239 1 I 

II dans d'ici. 221 n.b. 

should take you to be239 between thirty and forty. I am239 near 1 
pour n.b. entre ans. % enTO n.e. pres de 

fifty. You do not look so old. You look very well for your age, I 

253 age. 253 

am very glad you think so. You have been in the country, 

221 146 le.54 a 230 



* These are the words which, I have remarked, generally embarrass the learner ; 
but he will find in the course of his studies, several other idiomatical expressions of 
less importance and too numerous to be explained in a grammar ; they are found in 
the dictionaries, and will, be learned by taking notice of them in reading. 

t Turn ; It is fine this morning. | See note * page 339. 

t) As we have several words in french for this expression, we vary them as oftesi 
as we can ; see note * page 339. 

II Turn ; Enough time ; see note * page 303. 

% We always add An to the number in frengh, 



352 



IDIOMS. 



(I understand.) Yes, I have, 70 (i. e. been there.) I am just returned 

a ce que j'entends. , n.b. 244 265 

thence. How do you like it? I like it (very much.) It is a beautiful 

(h) p. 58. 185 268 62 beaucoup. 65 

country ; and the people are uncommonly civil and obliging. I am 

230 ; 229 extremement obligeant. 

fond of industrious people. I like those good country people. They 

* 229 25 

look so cheerful and happy. I am going there to-night ; will you come 
253 gai 46 y 54 235 j 

with me 1 How long do you intend 168to stop 1 I will sleep 

186 avoir dessein rester ) t 

there, and return in the morning. But you have no occasion to 

y 54, (h) p. 58. 265 216 234 besoin 168 

return so soon. You mayl78stay there all the morning. You may 

265 pouvoir rester 234 178 

stay till twelve o'clock. Nay, 184 you may spend the whole day 

jusqu'a 236 meme,- 271 233 

there, if you like. Our people will be glad of your company. 

y 54, ' vouloir. 229 bien aise 

We will endeavour to make you as happy as we can. What time do 
tacher 249 43 43 142 A 82 heare 

you. (go to bed) 1 We generally go about twelve o'clock. If 

se coucher ordinairement se coucher vers 336 

you do not like to stop, you may 178 return at night. It will be moon25 

rester, pouvoir 265 le 235 faire lune 

light, and the roads are very good. The weather is so fine, that it62 
clair, chemin 240 , n.b., 

is a pity to remain (shut up) in a town. How does the country 

— dommage 168 rester renferme 
look 1 It looks253 very well, indeed. I never saw it look253 better. 

253 62 1 t . , 136 $ 

Are the cropsl34 promisingl55 ^ Very. If this weather lasts, there 
— recolte promettre. Beaucoup. durer, 246 

will be abundance of (every thing.) I should like to go (very well)183, 

167 li . fort, IF n.b. ; 

but it is rather too far for a walk. You have no occasion to walk ; 

246 un peu pour ** besoin ** 

you may 178 ride, if you will. You will ride262 my horse, I will ride 

pouvoir ** , n.b. 
that of my servant and he will walk. If you would rather ride262 in 
88 dornestique, ** aimer mieux n.b. 

the carriage, it will be here (by and by) ; you may ride262 in it.64 

voiture, 62 tantot ; 178 n.b. dedans — 

No ; I would rather ride on horseback. Come ; the country air will 

aimer mieux 262 ; 25 

do you good. I hope it will70; - for I am not well. What 
bien. 221 (i. e. do me some ;) 241 



* See note $ page 246. 

t The verb Sleep, so often used in english in the sense of hie, is not expressed in 
french by Dormir, but by Coucher; because a person may lie abed, and not sleep. 

$ Turn ; It has a very fine appearance. $ Turn , I have never seen it finer. 

\ See note ** page 286. 1 See note * page 330. 

** When Walk is used by opposition to Ride, it is expressed by Aller a pied, and 
Ride by Aller a chevah 



IDIOMS. 



353 



is the matter with you 1 You look very well. I do not know 

281 253 
how I look, but I am not well. I am always cold. My feet are 
quelle mine j'ai, 241 239 froid. 239 

always cold. The weather is so bad that I (am afraid) of going 
240 craindre 154 

out for fear of (catching cold.) The w T eather has been very bad 

de peur de m'enrhumer. 240 
lately. Is240 the weather always so bad in this country 1 Is it 

depuis quelque terns. 230 240 

always so damp and so cold 1 It is never very warm. However, 

humide 240 chaud. Cependant, 

(it is to be expected) that it will be finer in a short time. The 
il fautl72 esperer 240 — peu de 

weather ought to be fine at this season ; it is near midsummer. 

devoir 240 ; * pres de la St. Jean. 

Our spring generally!94r comes late. We never have it here so early 
printems ordinairement tard. ' 190 de si (bonne 

> as you have it in your own country. (How many) years have 

heure) que — 230 Combien 233 

you been in this country ^ I have been about two years. I did 
t t environ 

not think it wasl45 so long. Do you like it 1 I like the people well 
140 246 iong terns. 268 228 assez 

enoughl88, but I do not like the climate It does not agree with me ; 
bien,$N.B., climat. convenir — 54 ; 

the weather is so cold and so changeable. If I cannot accustom myself 

variable. accoutumer me 54 

to it this year, 1 will not stay another year. You should walk out 

63 233, rester 233 176 263 a Pair 

oftener than you do. I cannot walk. I have hurt my foot. I am 
47 faire 237 se blesser 15 pied. 

afraid I have put myl5 ancle out of joint. Come; do not afflict 

(nn) 237 se demettre cheville. — — II Allons ; 

yourself; I dare say*221 you will be well in (a few) days. Here is Mr. 

, 57 ; See II p. 333 241 quelques 247 

B. How long have you been in town 1 I am just come. I have just 

186 en 244 arriver. 244 

alighted from my horse. Are you come to stop any time 1 No, 

descendre — venir 170 rester quelque , 

I shall (go back) to-night. (How many) times a week do you 

s'en retoumer 235 232 12 

come to town'? Sometimes twice, sometimes three times. You 

deuxfois, 232 
should come oftener. You shonld come every day. You should 

176 y 70 41 y 70 touts les jours, 

bring your wife with you. I wish I could bring her ; but we 

256 (nn) ' ; 

can not well leave the house both (at the) same time. Sir, you are 
quitter 122 en , 92 



* Turn ; We are near, SfC. 

t Turn, How many years is it since 246 you are, SfC. see note * page 303. 

X Turn, It is'246 about two years ; see note *page 303. § See note * page 300. 

[| Two words Out of joint, are all expressed by the verb Demettre. 

"if Turn, How long is it since you are, §c. see note * page 303. 

30* 



354 idioms. 

wanted260. Who wants260 me 1 A gentleman is in the street who 

n.b. n.b. See *p. 220 '// * 

wants to speak to you. Tell him to (walk in). He says he can 

260 (o) 54 (i ) p. 63. entrer. 221 

not stop. Tell him that I will go and speak to him. Will vou 

s'arreter. t — (o) 54 

excuse me whilst I go and see what that genleman wants 1 I am 

pendant quo (nn) 84 260 

going to leave you. No; Sit down; Do not go yet ; do not go 
155 quitter ; s'asseoir; t encore; s'en alleri 

before I return. I hope221 you do not intend to leave us so soon. 

218 t) 265 255 avoir dessein 168 tot. 

Yes, I must go ; but I will (call again) before I leave town. Take 

, 181 s'en alleri ; repasser avant de (nn) 256 

this letter to my sister. Take the children with you. If you can 

256 

not bring my sister, bring me the book which she has promised me. 

256 , 256 55 

Why did you not bring my sister 1 Why did you not bring me the 

136 136 

book which I desiredl36 you to bring 1 I could not bring it ; she is 

252 136 i 

usingl55 it herself. My sister usedl40 to be very fond of reading. She 

257 (m) n.b. 257 I! 169 154 

did not used to be so long in reading a book. I think she does not 

257 longtems 169 154 221 

use me well. I da not like to be used so. I suppose she has not 

257 92 ainsi. 254 221 

had time. I want to see my father. Where is he 1 I want money. 

260 

I want a wife. I want to be married. You want (so many) things 

261 tant 
at once, that I (am afraid)221 you will not getl46 one half (of them.) 
a la fois, craindre 195 avoir la moitie en 54 

Yuu are yet too young to marry. You should get a little money 

encore 176 261 170 2t0 un peu 

first. 183 You do not know what it costs to keep a house, 

premierement. n.b. 84 il en couter a 269 — 

I snppose221 you would like to keep a horse too. I dare say you 

254 269 aussi. 1 

would have no objection) to have a ride now and then. I do not 

ne seriez pas fache** de 262 de terns en terns. 

* Turn, There is246 in the street a gentleman who75 SfC. t See note * p. 228. 

l See N. B. under Aller, page 102. t) Turn ; Before I have238 returned. 

i| See note $ page 246. «|T See note II page 333. 

** The word Objection, so frequently used in english to denote that a person does or 
does not assent to what another person proposes, can not be expressed in french by 
Objection which means a, difficulty which we oppose to an argument or a proposition 
in order to refute it. You must use some other equivalent expression, agreeably to 
the idea which you wish to denote ; such as, Vouloir, Aimer, Etre fache, se Soucicr, 
Avoir a redire, Trouver a redire, or such like ; as, 

Have you any objection to take a walk 1 Voulez-vous faire, or Aimerie.z-vous a faire, 
ne seriez-vous pas Men aise de faire une promenade ? 

No ; I have no objection to it ; oui ; Je le veux bien, or Je ne m*en soucie pas, or 

Comme vous voudrez, <yc. 

What objection have you to that ? Qu'avez-vous a redire, or Que trouvez-vous a 

redire a cela ? 

I have no objection to it. Je n'ai rien a y redire, or Je n'y trouve rien a redire. 



IDIOMS. 



355 



mind ridingl54. I would sooner walk than ride, I can easily walk 

se soucier 262 aimer mieux 263 262 

twenty miles a-day, without being tired. Since you are such a 

12 , 154 fatiguer. Puisque si* 

great walker, I wonder 221 you do not come to see us oftener than 

marcheur, s'etonner 172 41 

you do. Every morning when the weather is fine, you should walk 

47 Touts les que 240 176 263 

(as far as) our208 house ; we will give you some breakfast, and after 

jusque n.b. ; a , apresque 

you have!42 rested yourself, you may either walk back or ride in our 

237 n B.reposer -vous55, 142 — t — 

carriage, as (you like best). I intend to come and see you soon. 183 
voiture, comme il vous plaira. 264 (nn) bientot.tN.B. 

Does your brother return to the university this year 1 I suppose221 he 

265 233 254 

will70; but I do not think he will go70 for some time, for he is just 

§ b.n. ; 221 145 de quelque , II 244 

returned thence. Has he returned265 you the money which you had 

265 en 54 (h) p. 58. n.b. 
lent himl62 1 Yes, he has70. I am glad (of it) ; for I 

(i) p. 63. , n.b. i. e. returned it me. bien aise en 54 ; II 

(was afraid)221 he would never return265 it you. He is so forgetful. 

craindre 146 n.b. sujetaoublier. 

I heard that your sister was tol72be married. She is marriedl58. She 

136 242 243semarier. 261 

was married last week. She has married 159 Mr. Goodhusband. They 

137 158 261 

were married at our church. It62 was my brother who married them, 
137 a eglise. n.b. 

How old is239 she 1 She is239 two and twenty. How old is239 Mr. 

N.B. N.B. % ** N.B. 

G. 1 He is239 about thirty. They are a young couple. I hope221 they 

n.b. environ ** 65 f est 255 

are happy. I hope they will be so long. She desiredl36 me to give her 

221 le 54 long terns. 252 faire ses 

love to you. Please tol68 let her know248 that I will call and 
amities (o) 54 Avoir la bonte lui n.b. 266 (nn) 

pay my respects to her at the first opportunity. How far is their208 
pourrendre (o) 54 a occasion. 246 n.b. 

house from here 1 About seven or eight miles. It62 is a (long way). 

tt Environ n.b. tt loin. 

Yes, it62 is rather far. I suppose221 they keep a coach. No, they have 

, n.b. Jt un peu loin. 254 269 191, 

no coach. They keep horses. (How many) servants do they keep % 

269 domestiques 269 



* Put Si after the article a, because si being here an adverb, can not be separated 
from the adjective which it modifies. 

t Walk back, Revenir a pied, or Retourner a pied, see 265 rule, t See note * p. 300. 

(> Instead of repeating the verb agreeably to the 70 rule, you may express He will by 
Qu'oui. 

II Note * page 318. *[F Say twenty-two ; the French always put the highest num- 
ber first. 

** In speaking of age, we always add An to the number in french. 
tt Turn ; How far is it from here to their house 1 tt You may express it is, by e'est, 
•or il y a« 



356 



IDIOMS. 



Let me see. There is the butler, a footman, a groom, a gardener, 

Attendez que je voie. 246 maitre d'hotel, laquais, palefrenier, 

a cook, and a chamber2G maid. These are many servants for such a 
cuisiniere, charnbre * fille. Ce (e) sit 

small family. They hope that in time itG2 will increase. Was not 

avec le terns augrnenter. 140 

your count ry25 house advertised to be sold? No; my father had 

134 afficher 153 a 243 ; 140 

some thought of selling it, but he has altered his mind. He is going 
quelque envie 154 02, changer — d'idee. 155 

to let his town25 house, and live in the country (altogetherl83.) 

louer a la ville , demeurer a entierement. n.e. 

Trade is so bad now, that he says he spends more than he gets. 
Commerce mauvais , 221 271 47 270 

How do you spend your time in the country ? We generallyl84 spend 
185 271 t a ordinaire merit 271 

the mornings inl69 walkingl54 and 204 practisingl54 music, and we 

234 263 etudier , 

spend the evenings in reading and in amusing ourselves. (That is the 
271 234 169 154 amuser nous 54 C est ainsi que 

way) we generally spend ours. Does Mr. A. often call upon you? 

184 271 85 134 184 266 

Sometimes, not often. Here247 he is. How do you do? I hope you 

,pas n.b. 241 255 

are (very well.) Very well, I thank you. What is the matter with your 
241 bien. Tres , <> 281 a la 

hand ? It is ail bloody29. I wasl36 near breaking my neck in coming 
62 sanglant. 245 secasser 15 cou en 

here. How so? My horse stumbledl36, and had like to have fallen 
185 celal faire un faux pas, 245 — — tomber 

into a pit. I see it has 237hurt itsl6 mouth. I hope221 you have not 
fosse. 221 se faire mal 231 255 237 n.b. 

been hurt. Not much ; I wasl36 more frightened than hurt. I 
se faire mal. Pas beaucoup ; 239 n.b. peur de mal II 

hope221 you will do us the favour to dine with us. At what time do 
255 grace 168 82 heure 

you dine ? We generally dine about four o'clock. I will avail myself of 

184 vers heures. profiter 

your invitation to enjoy the pleasure of your company a little longer. 

170 jouir 202 peu 41 

Have you any objection to take263 a short walk before dinner ? No, 
IT n.b. 206 Oui,** 

none at all. Let us walk along this lane. Let us ratherl84 go into 
je le veux bien.** — — 263 le long de ruelle. — — plutot 
that path. The late29 rains we have had have made the fields very 

sentier. dernier (s) 159 249 . 

pleasant. Yes, the country looks quite beautiful now. I do not 
agieable. , 253 tout a fait belle 



* See note * page 180. t See note *page 318. 

i Use Le here instead oivotre because vous sufficiently denotes whose time it is. 

$ See note * page 339. II Turn ; 1 have had more fright than hurt. 

See note II page 354. 

A * The word objection being changed in the question, you must also change the 
words of the answer. 



IDIOMS. 



357 



recollect having ever seen it finer. We must not go much further, 
se rappeler 154 181 loin41. 

It is near our dinner time. We must walk towards home. Let us 

pres de V 25 heure. 181 263 vers lamaison. 

make haste. Our people do not like to be (keptl45 waiting.) I see some- 
se depScher. 229 92 faire attendre. 

body comingl53 to meet us. Sir, the cloth is laid. The dinner is (on 
n.b. 273 , couvert mis. 

the table.) Come, ladies and gentlemen, (walk in.) Sit down at table, 
servi. Allons, mesdames , entrer. se mettre a 

Now, my pretty neighbour, what do you choose tol72 eat 1 Shall I help 
a present, jolie voisine, souhaiter 258 

you to a little soup ? It looks very good. I will thank you for two or 

a peu de soupe ? 62 253 * 

three (spoonfuls) of it. And you, madam, what will you eat? A bit 

cuilleree en 54 , , morceau 

of that fowl. What part do you like best ? A little of the breast. Shall 

(bb) volaille. partie lemieux? estomac. 

I add some sauce (to63 it?) A little, if you please, and a little of the 

ajouter y54 , t , 

cauliflower. You, sir, what shall I help you to? A bit of the sirloin. 

chou-fleur , , 258 aloyau. 

With some gravy to it? Yes, a little, and a potato. Will you have 

jus 1 , , pomme de terre. 

the goodness to pass the mustard (this way ?) (Give me56 leave) to 

bonte passer moutarde parici? Permettre 

help you to a bit of this loin of veal. A very small bit. Do you like 

258 longe veau. petit 

fat or lean ? A little of both. I will trouble you for a wing of that 
gras maigre ? 122 peine t ■ aile (bb) 

chicken. Shall I send you a little ham (with it ?) No, no ham; I will 

poulet. envoyer jambon aussi64? , pas ; § 

eat a little salad. It lonks so nice. Pass the salad to that gentleman. 

pen 62 253 bon29 (bb) 

(Here is) an excellent hare ; I would advise you to taste it. I thank you; 

247 lievre ; conseiller gouter t ; 

I will eat no hare. I will eat one half of this partridge. And I will eat 

t) la moitie (m) t) 

a bit of the pheasant. Let me56 send you a little of this pie. No, no 
faisan. Perrnettre (kk) pate. , pas 

more ; I can not eat (any more). (Take away), and bring the dessert. 

davantagell ; II Desservir, ; 256 dessert. 

Now, what say you to a glass of wine ? 1 will take a glass with you. 

, 83 de $ JO prendre 

Will you have red or white ? White, if you please. And I will 
174 du rouge du blanc ? , f (in) § 

drink a glass of red. Ladies and gentlemen, your good health. We 

, a — sante. 



* I will thank you for, &c. turn ; I beg you to give me two or three, SfC. 

t Turn ; If it pleases you, because Plaire in this sense is always impersonal infrencho 

t 1 will trouble you for, &c. turn ; Will you take the trouble to give me, tyc. 

t> See note * page 228. 

ii More, Any more, at the end of a sentence, are expressed by Davantage* 



358 idioms. 

thank you, sir. Come, gentlemen, help the ladies ; help yourselves 

, Allons,* , 258 ; vous vous-memes 

and pass the bottle. How do you like this wine ? It is very good indeed. 

185 268 62 

Since you like it, I hope you will make free (with it). It62 is what 
Puisque , 221 boire librement en 54 n.b. 84 

we intend lG8to do. (Here is) very fine fruit too. Have these fruits 

avoir dessein 247 aussi. 238 134 

grown in your garden 1 In the garden and in the houses. These 
venir 158 serre. 

apricots are beautiful. What think you of the peaches and nectarines. 

abricot ties beau. 83 brugnon ? 

They are the finest I have50 seen this year. Taste the pears and 
Ce " ( 5 ) 159 233 Goiiter 

apples ; they look very nice. These grapes are delicious. (Here is 
; 62 253 bon 29 delicieux. 247 

a (pine apple) which is excellent. Permit me to help you to a slice 
ananat 258 tranche 

(of it). I will thank you (for it,) for I am very fond of pine apples. 

en54 etre oblige '54 en59, t t 

Bring the sugar and some spoons. Come, gentlemen, (fill up) your 

* , , remplir 

glasses ; I will give you a toast. Let us drink the health of all good 

; § un toste. — — boire a sante 

people of whatever country, colour, or religion they are. With all my 

229 177 230 couleur, De 

heart. An everlasting peace between all men. What a pity that all 
ccEur. eternelle32 paix entre 20 dommage 

men do not think so. They would spare themselves many afflictions. 

ainsi. epargner se 54 (e) chagrin. 

We will drink this toast, to show you that we join with you in your 
see * p. 228. toste, m. 170 faire voir joindre II 

wishes, but I hope you will excuse us from drinking any more. Since you 
souhait, 221 excuser 154 IT Puisque 

will not drink, would you like to take an excursion on the water 1 We 

j faire tour 

have a fine river (close by)183, with good boats and good boatmen. I should 

riviere tout pres, n.b. bateau batelier. 

like it (very much). And I too. Well, since you all like it, we will 

beaucoup. 52 aussi. Eh bien, ** , 

go. Which do you like best sailingl54 or rowing? I think221 
76 80 le mieux allcr a la voile, aller a la rame ? 

sailing is the most pleasant. They make such a noise with their oars. 

154 agreable. tant de bruit rame. 

Boatman, what do you ask anl2 hour for your boat 1 We generally 
Batelier, combien par heure " 184 

charge three shillings an hour. That is (too much). I will give you 

272 12 Ce trop. — 



* When Come is used as it is here, to encourage, it is a kind of interjection and is 
then expressed by Allons. 

t See note * page 318. t See note II page 246. $ See * p, 228, 

I! We join with you in your wishes, turn ; We join our wishes to yours. 

IT See not* p. 357. 
. ** Put this adjective after the verb in french. 



idioms. 359 

half a crown. That is too little I will not give you more. Well, 
Mn petit 38 ecu. Ce peu. Eh bien ; 

come, I will not cheapen with you. Where shall we go 1 I do not 
see * p. 358. marchander Ou 

mind; (please yourself.) (It is all the same to us.) Are you fond 
s'en soucier ; ou vous voudrz. * Cela nous est egal. t i 

of bathingl54 1 Yes, very. The sea is not far off here. (It is) not 
a se baigner ? , beaucoup. mer loin d'ici. 246 

above a mile and a half. If you wish to bathe, we will go70. Can you 
plus de — demi. se baigner, ^ 

swim ? I can swim a little, but I do not like to (go out of my depth.) 
nager ? perdre fond. 

As for you, I know you can swim like a fish. Not quite ; but 
Quant a , 221 corame poisson. Pas tout a fait ; 

l ean swim pretty well. It begins to be late. I (am afraid) the 

assez sefairetard. craindre 221 

ladies will (catch coldl46). We will (go back,) if you please. Yes, 
195 s'enrhumer. s'enretourner, vouloir. * 

I think it is time. We had a very agreeable sail, had we 

221ilen70est 136 32 promenade en bateau, 282 

not J Very agreeable indeed. I will procure you that diversion as often 

procurer amusement 43 

as'you will favour me with your company. We are (very much) 
43 accorder le plaisir de bien — 

obliged to you, sir; and we wish you a good night234. Good night, 

158 (o) 55 , ; le N.B. , 

ladies ; I wish you a pleasant walk. Mr. M. you used to be very 

18 ; agreable 257 fort 

fond of music ; do you ever (make use) of your violin now 1 I use 
$ musique ; jamais se servir violon 257 

it sometimes ; very seldom. Since you do not use it, I will be obliged 

; rarement. Puisque 257 , 

to you, if you will let me have it, till218 I have got one made. I 

(o) , preter — , jusqu'a ce que 251 

do not think you will (be ablel45) to use it ; the strings are all broken, 
221 pouvoir 257 en54 ; corde 267 u , 

I will get them mended. I will get new ones put (to it.) Who 

250 raccommoder. 250 de neuves en59 mettre y 54 

made it you ? A (man of the name) of Fiddle. When youseel42 him, I 

136 55 59 Un nomme — n.b. , 

beg you will desire him to make me54 one (like it.) (How much) did 
II 252 m'en70un semblable. Combien 136 

he charge you (for it 1) He charged 136 me twenty guineas. He charged 

272 en 272 272 

you (too much.) He did not use me well. If I were in your place, I 

trop. — 136 257 IT a , 

would get one made in Paris. You would get it better and cheaper. 

251 a avoir (E)p. 56 a meilleur marche. 



* Not, Plaisez-vous, which would express quite a different idea, 
t Not, II est le meme a nous, which is not a french expression. 
t See note $ page 246. $ See note ** page 286. 

II J beg you will desire him, turn * I beg you to desire him, $c. 
% See note * page 266. 



360 



IDIOMS. 



I suppose221 you do not intend tol68 return home to night. Yes, I 

254 avoir dessein 265 chez vous 235 , 

do70. You will drink a cup of tea before you go. I 

n.b. i.e. intend to return. * t s'en aller. 

can not stay. Our people will be waiting for me. They will be anxious 
rester. 229 155 201 54 inquiet 

to hear from me. I long to see how they are. I have not heard from 

275 see long p. 163. 241 275 

them for these three days. The tea will be ready just now. Get the 
t tout de suite. Appneter 

tea ready as fast as you can 142. Come near the table. Shall I bring the 

t) 43 43 n.b. 274 274 

table nearer to you? It will do very well where it is. Bring the 

41 de 62 — est 62 256 

tea, and take256 these children out of the room. Is there no coffee 1 

, emmener hors « 248 

Yes ; there is both222 tea and coffee. Which will you have 1 ? I will 

v ; 246 n.b. Duquel 174 — I! 

drink a cup of coffee. Eat a little bread and butter. Is your coffee 
* 134 

sweet enough 1 Yes, it is very pleasant. You will drink another cup 1 
sucre see t p. 300. , 62 agreable. * ; 

will you not ? No, no more, I thank you. Now I must go. 

282 , , pas davantage, A present 181 see N.B.p.122. 

If you will come with me, I will lake it kindly of you. Yes, I willTO. 

144 , IT 279 , ** 

Bring me my horse. Bring me my whip and spurs. (There is) your 

256 256 fouet eperons. 247 

whip, and (here are) your spurs. They are not right. What is the 

, 247 bien. 

matter with them ? You find fault with (every thing.) Can not you 

281 278 ' 107 

do without spurs % No, I can not. I want to return as fast as I canl42, 

280 , 70 260 265 43 43 n.b. 

to go and meet a friend of mine who is coming to spend (a few) days 

170 (nn) 273 87 155 172 -271 quelques 

at208 our house. It will be too late; will it not'? I am afraid it willTO. 

N.B. j 232 ft N.B, 

I never can (get ready) in time. In vain I tell these people to keep 
s'appreter a 277 dire a 229 tenir 

always ready the things which I want, they will not do it. Whatever 

1 1 pret 29 dont 260 , vouloir 277 

I may say or do, they will 174 have every thing their (own way.) They 
, vouloir faire 107 a leur tete.. 



* See note t page 288. 

t Before may be expressed by Avant de with the folio wing verb in the infinivtie, 
or by Avant que with the subjunctive ; but here the two verbs having the same norni* 
native, Before should be expressed by Avant de. See note (nn). 

X For these three days, may be expressed two ways ; je n'ai pas appris de lews 
nouvelles depuis205 trois jours ; or II y a 246 trois jours que je n'ai appris, $c. 

t) Ready is implied in the verb Appreter. 

Q See note * page 228. % See note t page 260. ' 

** Instead of repeating the verb here, you might say, oui, je le veux bien. 
ft Instead of repeating / am afraid it will be too late ; you may say ;je le trains, or 
je crains qu'oui. 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE, ETC. 361 

Plaice me very unhappy. If I wereUO you, I would turn them 

249 * que de vous, mettre 

away. What will you havel74 one do 1 One can not do without 
alaporte. n.b. 90faire? 90 280 

somebody, and it is very unpleasant to be always changingl55 people. 

95 , desagreable — changer de 229 

True; but I would not keep people who would not attend to my 
Cela est vrai ; garder 259 

orders. Come ; do not mind them. They are all alike. 

Allons ; faire attention a 58 — t se ressembler 

Happy they who can do without them. 
Heureux 66 280 en. 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE ON ALL THE RULES. 

It having been represented to the author that the utility of this work might be in- 
creased by lengthening the exercise, he, in consequence, has added the following 
amusing little novel, which is full of the most essential rules, especially on the 
nouns, pronouns<, and verbs. 

Batkmendi, an Eastern Tale. 

Under the reign of a king of Persia whose75 name I have forgotten , 
i Perse n.b. , 

a merchant of Balsora was ruined by bad speculations. He collected 

137 entreprise. recueillir 

the wreck of his fortune, and retired to the (remotest part) of the 
debris plur. , se retirer fond 

province of Kousistan. There he bought a small country house and 

La 25 

& field which he cultivated very badly, because he was always think- 

labourer mal, 155 

ing of the time when he had something more pleasant to (attend to.) 
200 que 140 98 (cc) agreable 32 a Poccuper. 

Grief shortened the days of this merchant • feeling himself near his 

abreger : 54 pres de 

end, he called to him four sons that he had, and addressed them, 

, aupres de 58 140 > 53 parler leur 

(in these words) ; My dear children, I have no other property to leave 

ainsi ; > § bien 169 

you but this house, and the knowledge of a secret which I was242 
198 connaissance ai 136 du 

not to reveal to you till now. In the time of my opulence, I had 
$ 172 (o) que 213 opulence, 140 

for a friend the genie Alzim. He promised me to take care of you 
— avoir 

when I should be no more, and to divide a treasure amongst you. 

190 || , partager IT 54 

This genie lives a few miles hence, in the great forest of Kom. Go 
a quelques d'ici, 



* See note * page 266. 

t Put this adjective after the verb in french. 

$ See note * page 182. § Express No, Not, by Ne only, because Que which 

'comes after the verb supplies the place of Pas. 

II When I should be no more, may be expressed by apres mois 
IT Leave out this preposition in french. 

31 



362 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE 



to him, ask him for that treasure, but (take care) not to believe , , , 

* 54 , + se garder 193 

Death did not allow him to finish. The four sons of the merchant, 

permettre lui 54 achever. 

after having bewailed and buried their father, went to the forest of Kom, 
154 pleurer enterrer , 

They inquired for the residence of the genie Alzim. They had no 

s'informer de demeure 

trouble to find it. Alzim was known to the whole country: he re- 
peine 169 62 140 de 38 tout 230 ; 

ceivedl39 kindly all those who came to see him, he listened to their com- 
accueillir avec bonte 172 , ecouter — 

plaints, consoled them, lent them money, when they (were in want) (of 
plainte, 139 , 162 , avoir besoin en 

it) ; but these favors were on a condition ; (they were) to follow blindly 
44; bienfait a ; il fallait 172 

the advice which he gave them : this was his whim ; No one was ad- 

conseil — ; ce manie ; Nul 101 

mitted into his palace till he had taken an oath (of it). This oath did 
recevoir avant de (nn) avoir fait le serment en55. 

not alarm the three eldest sons of the merchant ; the fourth, whose (name 

effrayer aine 32 ; , qui se norn- 

was) Tai, found this ceremony ridiculous. However he wished to 

mer , Cependant vouloir 

(go in) and receive the treasure : he thenl84 swore like his brothers ; but 

entrer : done comme ; 

reflecting (on the) dangerous consequences of this indiscreet oath /calling 
aux t t , se rap- 

to mind) that his father, who was in the habit of visiting this palace, 
peler avoir — — coutume 154 , 

had passed his life in committing blunders, he wished without being 

169 faire des sottises, 154 

a perjurer, to secure himself from all danger; and whilst they90 were 
— , mettre al'abri 54 de ; n.b. 

conducting them to the genie, he stopped his ears with scented 
conduirel55 vers , boucher odoriferante 32 

wax. (Having taken) this precaution, he prostrated himself before the 

Muni de , prosterner 54 200 

throne of Alzim. Alzim bid the four sons of his ancient friend to 
faire () ancien X — 

rise, embraced them, and ordered a large chest filled with daricks to 
relever^, , faire II grand coffre de darique "IT — ■ 

(be brought). Here, said he, is the treasure which I have designed for 

apporter$ 247 , 247 destiner — 

you. I am going to divide it amongst you, and then 1 will tell each 

55 partager — 54 , ensuite dire a 103 

of you the road he must follow to be perfectly happy, Tai did not 

(s) devoir prendre 170 



* 'Express to by the verb trouver. t See note II page 207. 

i Put this adjective before the noun. See note (i) page 188. 

ft The two verbs faire and felever must come together, because faire here means 
to cause ; he did not cause the four sons, but he caused to rise. 
U Faire and apporter must come together ; see note t) above. 
IT Small pieces of gold. 



ON ALL THE RULES. 363 

hear what the genie said, but he observed him attentively, and saw 

" * , > 

in his eyes, and on his countenance an air of cunning and of malig- 

} visage finesse 

nity which gave him much uneasiness. However he received with 

inquietude. 

gratitude his share of the treasure. Alzim, after having thus enriched 

part , 154 ainsi 

them, assumed an affectionate tone and said to them; my dear children, 
55 , prendre affectueux 32 (o) 54 ; , 

your good or bad destiny depends upon your meetingl56 sooner or later 
tenir a ce que vous rencontnez 41 

with a certain being called Bathmendi, of whom every body speaks, 
201 etre nomine , 106 , 

but whom very few people know. The wretched mortals seek him 
229 malheureux t humains 

all (in the dark). moi I, who love you, will whisper to each of you 

a tatons. (m) , t dire a l'oreille de 103 

where he will (be able) to find him. At these words, Alzim took aside 

pouvoir 172 , en particulier 

Bekir the eldest of the four brothers. My son, said he to him, you are 

aine $ , , II 

born with courage, and have (a great deal) of ability for war ; the king of 

, 53 beaucoup talents ; 

Persia has just sent an army against the Turks; join that army ; 

Perse 244 Turc ; ; 

it is in the camp of the Persians that you will find Bathmendi. 
ce Perse 

Bekir thanked the genie, and (was quite impatient) to (set out) 
■flf , — deja 183 bruler IT de partir. 

Alzim beckoned to the second son to (come near); it was Mesrou. 
faire signe 168 approcher ; ce 

You have sense, said he to him, some address and great aptness forl70 
II esprit , dispositions n.b. 

lying ; take the road to Ispahan ; it is at court that you must look 

; cheminde ; ce devoir 

for Bathmendi. He then called the third brother who (was named) Sad- 
201 184 qui s'appeller 

der : You, said he to him, were gifted with a lively and fertile 
: II , (m), 137 douer de vive32 feconde 

imagination ; You see objects not as they are, but as you wish 
; , vouloir 

theml74 to be; You have often genius, and not always common sense; 

N.E. ; , 32 ; 

You will be a poet. Take the way to Agra ; it is amongst the wits 

23 chemin de ; ce beaux esprits 



* The action not being momentary, but having been continued, this verb should 
be in the imperfect. 

t Put this adjective before the noun. t See note * page 228. 
^ Vaine not le plus aine, because aine means eldest. 

H In familiar tales and in familiar conversation, the French generally use the second 
person singular instead of the second person plural. 

% Put this verb in the present tense. The French often use the present instead of 
the perfect, in narrations, to show the suddenness of the action, or to call the attention. 
,of the hearer or reader more particularly to it. 



364 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE 

and the fine ladies of that city, that you will find Bathmendi. Tai 

(bb) 

advanced in his turn; and thanks to the wax25 balls, he did not hear 

s'avancer a ; grace boule, 

a word of what Alzim said to him. It has been known since that 

(o) 91 savoir 

he had advised him to turn dervis. The four brothers, after having* 

lui55 se faire derviche. , 154 

thanked the beneficent genie, returned to their home. The three eldest 

bienfaisant , demeure. 

thought of nothing but Bathmendi. Tai unstopped his ears, heard them 
rever a * 198 deboucher , 

arranging their departure, and proposing to sell their small house to the 

154 , 154 

first (person that should offer,) (in order to) divide the amount (of it.) 

offrant , 170 partager prix en 54 

Tai asked to be the purchaser. He got250the house and field valued, 
acquereur. faire t estimer t 

paid with his gold the share that came to each of his brothers, wished 
de part 74 revenir 103 , 

them every prosperity, embraced them tenderly, and remained alone 
toutes sortes de , , rester tout seul 

in the paternal house. It was then that he (set about) executing a project 
29 32 Ce 137 alors s'occuper de 154 

which had for a long while been the object of his thoughts. He was 
auquel il pensait depuis tems t 

(in love) with the young Amine, the daughter of a neighbouring farmer, 
amoureux de , 22 son voisin 32 laboureur. 

Amine was handsome and prudent. She had the management of her 

sage. soin 
father's house, and asked of God only two things ; the first was that her 

25 menage, a ; — 

father shouldl46 live long ; the second that she might become the wife of 
149 long terns ; — — — de $ femme 

Tai. Her wishes were granted. Tai asked for her and obtained her hand. 

137 exaucer. 201 
The father of Amine came to live with his (son in law>) and taught 
demeurer chez gendre , apprendre 

him the art of making the earth yield all that it can give to those 
162 faire II a ]a rendre II ce que 62 

who cultivate it. The field doubled in value ; and as he was laborious* 

62. de valeur ; comme » 

and his wife economical, each year encreased their revenue. Amine 

econome, 102 augmenter 
had many children. Children who ruin the rich idle people of towns, 
1371T oisif 39 , 

enrich the (husbandman.) At the end of twelve years, Tai, the 

laboureur. bout , 22 



* Express Nothing by Ne only, because que which comes after, expresses nothing 
but. 

t The two verbs faire and estimer must come together. 
± Had been the object of his thoughts is all expressed by the verb penser. 
§ Put this verb in the infinitive. II Faire and rendre must come together before 
<r la terre ; for he did not make the earth, but he made or caused to yield. 
IT See note § page 256. 



ON ALL THE RULES. 365 

father of ten pretty children, the husband of a good and virtuous 

33 , 22 epoux 34 

wife, master of several slaves, and possessor of two flocks, was the 

, plusieurs , , 

happiest farmer in Kousistan. Meanwhile his three brothers were 

49 m. . Cependant 
running after Bathmendi. Bekir hadl49 arrived at the camp of the 

155 238 
Persians. He presented himself to the grand vizier, and asked to 
Perse. 54 vizir, 

serve in the corps that was the most exposed. His appearance, his 

92 figure, 

willingness pleased the vizier who admitted him into a troop of horse, 
bonne volonte 202 cavalerie 

A few days after, a bloody battle (was fought.) Bekir proformed 

sanglant se donner. faire 

wonders, saved the life of his general, and took with his own hand 

prodige, a , de — 

the general of the enemy. The praises of Bekir resounded every where, 
celui* retentir t , 

and the vizier (out of gratitude) raised his deliverer to the rank of a 
reconnaissant, elever litterateur grade — 

general officer. Alzim was right, said Bekir to himself ; it is here 

32 239 , 139 — se 54 ; ce 

that fortune awaited me ; every thing shews that I am going to meet 

attendrel38; 107 annoncer 
with Bathmendi. The glory of Bekir, and especially his preferment, 
201 , surtout elevation, 

excited the envy and the murmurs of all the satraps. Bekir unhappy 

by his very success, lived alone, always on his guard, and exposed 
meme t) , , $ , 

every moment to receive an affront. He regretted the time when he 
a tout outrage. ou 

was only a common soldier, and was waiting with impatience for the 
I! — simple , 201 

end of the war, when the Turks reinforced by fresh troops and led!57 
, quand 157 nouvelle IT guider 

by a new general, came and attacked the division which Bekir 

nouveau IT (nn) (ec) 

commanded. This was an opportunity which the satraps of the army 

Ce occasion 
(had long been waitingl55 for.) They used a hundred times more 
— attendaient 140 depuis long terns. employer 21 

skill to get their commander beaten, than they had showed in all their 

250** chef battre** en 70 

lives to (avoid being) beaten themselves. The brave Bekir forsaken, 
ft pour n'etrepas .jf 158 eux-memes. m abandonner, 

* Instead of repeating the noun, the French would here use a. pronoun. 

t Les louanges de Bekir retentirent partout would be french ; but, Tout retentit des 
louanges de Bekir would be better. 

X Persian nobleman. $ Make this word plural in french. II See note * p. 173. 

% Put this adjective before the noun. ** Faire and battre must come together be- 
fore chef. 

tt This word must be singular in french, because it implies the life of each person 
indivdually, not of them collectively. 

31* 



366 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE 



covered with wounds, overpowered by numbers, was taken by the 

200 , accabler sous le nombre, 137 

janissaries, and sent to Constantinople, where he was thrown into a 

janissaire, , jetter 

dungeon. Alas ! exclaimed he, in his prison ; I begin to think that 

cachot. , • Helas ! s'ecrier 139 , ; 

Alzim has deceived me, for I can not expect to meet with Balhmendi 

esperer 201 
herel83. The war lasted fifteen years, and the satraps always prevented 
n.b . , 184 empecher 

t he exchange of Bekir . His prison was not opened (till peace was made.) 

* qu'a la paix. 

He ran immediately to Ispahan to seek the vizier his protector, whose 

aussitot chercher , a qui 

life he had saved. (Three weeks elapsed) before he could s^eak to 
t 11 fut trois semaines sans X — pouvoir (o) 

him. (At the) end of that time, he obtained an audience. Fifteen years 

54 Au bout , 233 

imprisonment alter a little the figure of a handsome young man. Bekir 

de prison changer 

(could hardly be said to be the same ;) so the vizier did not know 

etait a peine reconnaissable ; aussi reconnaitre 

him again. However, by dint of (calling to mind) the different epochs of 
— , a force se rappeler 154 $ 

his glorious life, he recollected that Bekir had formerly done him a little 
t) , se souvenir rendre 162 

service. Yes, yes, my friend, said he to him, I remember you ; you 
, , , (o) 54 , remettre ; 

are a brave man ; but the state is much encumbered; a long war and 

$ ; bien obere ; ^ 

great festivals have exhausted our finances ; however come to me again 

fete epuiser ; revenir voir II 

I will try, I will see. ... Ah ! my lord, I have no bread, and for 

tacher, Eh! , , depuis 

this fortnight that I have been waiting for an opportunity to speak to 

— que, — — T 201 le moment 168 

your lordship, I should have perished with misery, but for a soldier of 
grandeur, 238 mourir de ,227 

the guard, my ancient companion, who has shared his pay with me. 

, vieux camarade, 

That is very well of that soldier, replied the vizier; it is truly noble 

Ce a , repondre ; cela viaiment 

and affecting ; I will mention it to the king. Call upon me again ; 
touchant ; parler en54 Revenir voir 54 II ; 

you know I (have a regard for) you. ... In saying these words, he 

221 aimer 54 , 

turned his back (upon him.) Bekir called again the (next day.) but he 
15 lui54 revenir H lendemain, 



* Express Not by Ne only, as Que which comes after supplies the place of Pas. 

t Turn ; to whom he had saved the life. 

X This preposition governs the infinitive in french. 

$ Put this adjective before the noun. 

I The adverb againis expressed by the preposition re prefixed to the verb. 
He having been waiting till the moment he was speaking, the French would put 
the verb wait in the present, and leave out have and been. 



ON ALL THE RULES. 



367 



(was denied admittance.) Overwhelmed with despair, he left the palace 
trouva la porte fermee. Accabler 200 , sortir du 

and the city, resolved never to enter it again. He threw himself at 
de la , 190 rentrer y 54 jetter 54 

the foot of a tree on the bank of the river Zenderou. There he 

bord fleuve La 

reflected on the ingratitude of viziers, on all the misfortunes which he 

a , a 

had experienced, on those which still 184 threatened him, and (unable 

140 eprouver, 159 a (bb) encore , pouvant 

any 1901onger) to support these melancholy ideas, he rose to throw 
ne plus 172 soutenir triste , se lever 170 precipiter 

himself into the river ; . . but he felt himself embraced by a beggar 
54 , 54 * mendiant 

who bathed his face with tears, and exclaimed sobbing; it62 is my 
188 visage 200 , 138 en sanglotant ; n.b. 

brother, it62 is my brother Bekir 1 Bekir looks, and recognises Mes- 
, n.b. , reconnaitre 

rou. Every man feels pleasure no doubt in meeting again with a 
104 avoir sans doute 169 retrouver 201 

brother he has not seen for a long time ; but an unfortunate man 

(s) depuis — ; 39 

without resource, without a friend, who is going to (put an end to) 
, t , 172 finir jgftu 

his existence in despair, thinks he sees an angel from heaven, in 
jours de croire (nn) , en 

finding again a brother whom he loves. Such was the sentiment 
retrouver — Ce 137 

which Bekir and Mesrou felt at the same time. They mutually 

eprouver a — fois. 184 

pressed (each other) in their arms, they mingled their tears, and after 

} se 54 , confondre $ larme, 

the first moments given to tenderness, they looked at (each other) with 

157 , J 201 se54 

eyes full of surprise and affliction. Art thou then also unfortunate 7 

§ — surpris afflige. Tu es done 

exclaimed Bekir. This, answered Mesrou, is the first moment of 

s'ecrier 247 , , 247 

happiness which I have enjoyed since we 136parted237. At these words, 
dont se quitter. , 

the two unfortunate men embraced (each other) again ; they leaned 
39 t se 54 encore ; s'appuyert 

on each other ; and Mesrou seated near to Bekir, thusl84 began his 
contre 121 ; assis pres de , ainsi 

history. You remember the fatal day when we went to Alzim's. 

202 32 ou 208 

That perfidious genie told me I might find at court that Bathmendi 

perfide II 221 



* Put this verb in the infinitive. 

t After the preposition Sans, the noun is generally used without an article, be- 
cause the preposition and the noun are considered either as an adjective or as an ad- 
verbial expression. 

X To show the quickness in which the action was done, the french would put this 
verb in the present tense. 
i} Leave out this adjective, and make surprise and affliction into adjectives. 
II Put this adjective before the noun. 



363 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE 



whom we wished (so much) to meet. I followed his pernicious advice, 
140 tant funeste conseil, 

and soon arrived at Ispahan. I became acquainted with a young female 
184 53 a faire connaissance une — 39 

slave who belonged to the mistress of the first secretary of the grand 

140 

vizier. This slave conceived an affection for me. and introduced me to 

de 1' 58 , 

her mistress, who made me pass for her youngest brother. Soon the 

» , petit 

youngest brother was presented to the vizier, and a few days after, he 

137 , — quelques , 

obtained an employment in the palace. The Sultana distinguished me, 

emploi Sultane 
and took me into an intimate friendship. From that moment, honours 

213 32 Des f 

and riches began to shower upon me. The monarch himself showed 

pleuvoir 58 temoigner 

some regard for me. He liked to converse with me, because I flattered 

affection — 54 140 causer 139 

him with address, and always advised him to do what he had a mind to 
, 219 53 conseiller 162 — — 84 140 24 envie 168 

do. This was the way to make him soon do what I should wish. 
— Ce 140 moyen 168 t lui 54 faire f rouloir. 

That failed not to happen. (At the) end of three years, I saw myself 

(bb) manquer 168 Au bout , 54 

at once prime minister, favourite of the king, (having in my power) 
a la fois , , maitre 

to appoint and to remove the viziers, deciding every thing by my 
de nominer dpplacer , 107 

influence, and receiving every morning the great men of the empire, 

credit, touts les matins 39 , 

who came to wait (till I awoke) to obtain from me a smile of protection. 

139 monreveil ' 170 de 58 

(In the) midst of my glory and of my fortune, I (was astonished) that 

Au s'etonner 140 — 

I did notl90 meet with that Bathmendi I was seeking. (I feel no 

(nn) n.b. 201 (s) Rienneme 

want of any kind), said I to myself; why (do I still want Bathmendi) ? 
manque , 139 — me54 ; ' Bathmendi me manque-t-il ? 

This idea and the constraint (in which) I spent my life, poisoned all 

gene ou {v) 271 , 

my pleasures. The passion of the king for a young Mingrelienne 

amour 

came to (fill up) my misfortune. The whole court cast their eyes to 

combler infortune. 38 tourner les 15 de 

that side, in hope that the mistress would (turn out) the minister. I 

, espoir chasser 

parried the blow by connecting myself with the Mingrelienne, and 
parer {hh) lier me 54 , 

flattering the passion of the king : but that passion became so violent, 

204 : 



* Make this word plural in french. 

t Make do, Faire faire, must come together in french. 



ON ALL THE RULES. 369 

that the monarch, determined to marry his mistress, asked me for 201 

, decider a 261 , * 

my advice. I wavered for some days. The Sultan's mother, who 
avis. tergiverser — Sultane mere, t 

was afraid of losing her influence if her son shouldl44 marry, came 
credit n.e. se marier, 

to declare to me that, if I did not break off that match, she would 
172 (o) , rompre — marriage, 

have me assassinated on the very 32 day of the ceremomy. An hour after, 

250 — raeme 

the Mingrelienne came and assured me that, if I did not get her 

(n») 54 , t 250 

married to the king (the very next day), I should be strangled the day 

261 par des le lendemain, 

after. My situation was embarrassing ; I had to choose (between the) 
d'apres position il faliait 172 du $ 

dagger,204 the rope or204 flight. I chosel36 the last. I disguised my- 
, du cordon de la prendre dernier parti. 136 237 54 

self as you see, and have escaped from the palace with some diamonds 

, 237 s'echapper II 

in my pockets, which will support me with you in some corner of 

, faire vivre quelque 

Indoustan, far from the Sultanas, the Mingreliennes and the court. 
, loin , 204 204 

After this recital, Bekir related his adventures to Mesrou. They both 
recit, 1221" 

agreed that they would have done just as well notl90 to have (ram- 
convenir tout aussi n.b. — cou- 

bled about) the world, as they had done, and that the wisest thing 
rir — , comme 140 , meilleur (s) 

they could do, was to return into Kousistan, to their brother r Tai f 
50 , 140 de , aupres de , 

where the diamonds of Mesrou would enable them to lead a sweet and 

mettre en etat 168 mener 32 

easy29 life. After this resolution, they (set out on their journey), and 
ais6 , se mettre en route 

travelled for several days without meeting with any adventure. As they 
marcher 205 — — ** 

were crossing the province of Farsistan, they arrived towardsdusk at a 
155 traverser , vers le soir 

small village where they intended to spend the night. It was a holy 

compter 271 140 fete 

day. On entering the village, they saw several peasants' children 

25 En entrer dans tt , 25 

returningl53 from walking, attended by a kind of (school-master) badly 
138 n.b. promenade, conduit 157 espece magister mal , 



* See note li page 207. 

t Mere being here considered as an adjective, must come after Sultane. 
t See note * page 266. 

$ The preposition between is here expressed like of. 
II See note t page 183. 

^TPut this pronoun after the verb. ** All these words may be left out in frenclu 
t+ The French do not say entrer un endroit, to enter a place ; they say entrer dans un 
endroit, to enter into a place. 



370 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE 

clad, walking with his head down, and having the appearance of (being 

vetu, marcher — la 15 basse, air 

absorbed in) (melancholy thoughts). The two brothers approached this 
rever * tristement 274 t 

school-master, looked at him attentively. . .What was their surprise ! it62 
^ .. vj , f 201 82 t n.b. 

was Sadder, it62 was their brother Sadder whom they embraced. 

P t , B.N. t t 

What83 ! my friend, said Bekir to him, is this (the way) in which ge- 
Eh quoi ! , (o) , ce ainsi * — que 

nius is rewarded ] You see, replied Sadder, that it is treated much (in 

92 , , 92 a peu pres 

the same way as) valour is ; but philosophy finds (in it) abundant food 

comme — ; y54 un grand sujet 

for reflection and that (is no small consolation). In saying these words, 
de (bb) console beaucoup. En , 

he bid202 all the children go (to their homes), took Bekir and Mesrou 

ordonner a 168 208 , conduire 

to his little cottage, dressed himself a little rice for their supper, and 

cabane, appreter (m)N.B. , 
after ha.vingl54 (asked them for) their histories, he told them his own 
s'etre237 fait raconter , dire 162 85 — 

in these words : The genie Alzim, whom I suspect much of delighting 
en mot : aimer 154 

in (other people's) afflictions, advised me to seek that (not to be found) 
— autrui25 malj introuvable 

Bathmendi in the great city of Agra, amongst the wits and the 

, beaux esprits 

fine ladies of that city. I arrived at Agra ; and before I mixed 

; avant de (nn) me repandre 

with the world, I wished!37 to (make myself known) by some 
dans , vouloir m'annoncer quelque 

striking work. (At the) end of a month, my work appeared : 

d'eclat32 Au bout 

it was a complete course of all human sciences, in a small volume 

65 32 cours 32 , en 

divided into chapters. Each chapter was a tale, and each tale taught 

par 102 140 

a science thoroughly 183. My book and I soonl84 became fashionable 

parfaitement n.b. 127bientdt a la mode. 

I was invited to all the societies that pretended to have any sense ; 

92 74 se piquer 140 un peu d'esprit ; 

(there was no talk) but of me, and the favourite Sultana wrote to 
On ne parlait que de 58 , 32 (o) 

me with her own hand a note (badly spelled), to ask me to come 

de — billet sans orthographe, 170 prier 

to court. Well ! I said tQ myself, Alzim has not deceived me : 

Courage ! (ee) 139 -— me 54 , ; 

my glory is (at its) height ; I will sustain it by surer41 means 
au comble ; soutenir 62 32 



* Express the words being absorbed in by the verb rever. 

t To express the suddenness of the action, the French would here use the present 
tense. 

t Put this word in the singular in french. 



ON ALL THE RULES* 371 

than those of intrigue ; I will please, and I shall find Bathmendi. 

88 ; , ■ 

I was (most agreeably) received in the palace of the grand Mogul : The 

137 parfaitement accueillir 
favourite Sultana declared herself openly my protectress, presented 

32 54 haute ment , 

me to the emperor, bespoke verses from me, gave me pensions, admit- 

, commander — 54 , , 

ted me to her private suppers, and swore'to me, a hundred times a 
petit , (o) 21 12 

day, a friendship (that would stand any test). I thoughtl40 I was 

, a toute epreuve. croire (nn) toucher 

(on the) point of meeting with Bathmendi, when my protectress 

au moment 201 
quarrelled with the vizier about the government of a province which 
se brouiller vizir pour un — 

the latter refused to the son of the confectioner of the favourite. The 

celui-ci Confiseur 

Sultana exasperated at this audacity, asked the emperor to dismiss the 
outre 157 de , chasser 

insolent minister; but the emperor liked his Vizier, and refused the 

140 , 

favourite. Then it (became necessary) to (set on foot) a regular32 
Alors il fallut 172 etablir en regie 

intrigue to ruin the patronized vizier. I entered (into the) plot, and 
170 perdre soutenu32 etre 137 du complot, 53 

(was!37 desired) to compose against the minister a cutting32 satire, and 
recevoir ordre 168 sanglant , 

to spread it amongst the public. The vizier soon discovered that I was 
repandre 62 dans bientot 

the author (of it). He went to the favourite, brought her the commis- 
en 54 aller trouver , 162 brevet 

sion which he had refused (at first), an order for a hundred thousand 
140 d'abord, ordonnance de 21 

daricks on the royal treasury, and only asked herl62 (in return.) to 
32 , * lui pour recompense de 

permit himl62 to throw me into a dungeon. That is a trifle, answered 
lui cachot. Ce misere, 

the favourite, and I am very fortunate in (having it in my power) to do 
, heureux (g) de pouvoir 172 

something that may be acceptable to you. I will send immediately for 

74 agreable (o) tenvoyertoutal'heurecherchertf 

that wretch who has dared to insult you (in spite of) my express orders, 
miserable 172 malgre 32 defense, 

and deliver him into your hands. Luckily forme a slave of the favour- 
remettre entre Heureusement 

ite who was present, came to relate their conversation to me ; I had 
, raconter (o) 45 137 

only time to escape. Since that time, I have (wandered all over) Indou- 
$ se sauver. Depuis epoque, parcourir tout 



* See note * page 173. t See note * page 228. 

± The preposition For after the verbs Go and Send, is not expressed by Pour, but 
by the verb Chercher. 
$ See note * page 173. 



372 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE 



stan, hardly 184 gaining my livelihood by writing novels, and making 

, a peine vie a 154 romans, 204 154 

verses. (As long as) I had money, my works had been master-pieces \ 
Tant que avais eu - , chef-d'ceuvres ; 

as soon as I was in misery, (all that I wrote was nonsense). (Atlast)dis- 
sitot que 137 , je ne fis plus que des sottises. Enfin 

gusted with instructing the worlds I have preferred tol72 teach peasants 

200 154 univers, mieux airne apprendre a 

to read, and have237 turned school-master in this little village where I 
* 53 se faire ou 

live upon brown bread, and where I do not expect ever to see Bathmen* 
200 bis 32 , esperer 184 

di. (You may leave it if you like), said Mesrou to him, and (go back) 
II ne tient qu' t a vous de le quitter, (o) 54, 204 retonrner 

with us into Kousistan, where some diamonds which 1 take with me, 
, % emporter — — , 

assure us a sweet and easy32 life. He had not much difficulty to deter- 

32 tranquille 137 peine a 

mine Sadder. (The very next day) the three brothers (set out) from the 
Des le lendemain sortir 

village before (daybreak)) and took the road to Kousistan. TheyTO were 
lejour, du en 140 

on their last (day's journey), and (at no great) distance from the 
journee, pres de arriver a 

small house of Tai. This idea consoled them j but their hope was 

140 ; espoir 140 

mingled with fear. Shall we find our brother? they said: we left him 

meler de (ee) : 136 

very poor ; he will not have met with Bathmendi, since he has not 

; 201 , 

(been able) to (go in search of) him. My dear friends, said Sadder to 
pu 172 chercher 54 , (o) 

them, I have meditated a (good deal) on this Bathmendi of whom Alzim 

, reflechir, — beaucoup 183 a 74 

has spoken to us. To (tell you the truth), I believe that the genie 

(o) a parler franchement, 
has (made game) of us. Bathmendi does not exist, and has never 
237 se moquer , 
existed; for since my brother Bekir did not meet him, when he 

$ 217 136 , 

commanded half of the persian32 army ; since Mesrou did not 

la moitie persanne ; 217 136 

(hear his name mentioned), when he was the favourite of the great 

en 55 entendre parler , lorsque 
king ; since I myself could not even guess what it was at a time 

; 136 meme 84 ce dans le 

when I was loaded (with the) favours of glory and fortune; it62 is 
que combler des 204 ; n.b. 

clear that Bathmendi is an imaginary being, an illusion, a chimera after 
32 etre, , 



Turn ; to teach to read to peasants. 
II ne tient que is a very common exp] 
english. 

t See note t page 183. $ See note * page 318. 



t II ne tient que is a very common expression, but it can not be expressed literally 

in english. 



i 



ON ALL THE RULES. 



373 



which all men run, because they like chimeras, and (rambling about), 

76 , a courir. 

He was going to prove that Bathmendi did not exist in this world, when 
172 habiter , 217 

a band of robbers rushed from behind the rocks which linedl40 the 

troupe sortir* border 

road, surrounded the three travellers, and ordered theml62 to strip. 

, entourer* , * leur se depouiller. 

Bekir wished 137 to resist, but he was soon disarmed. After this cere- 

vouloir , 137 

mony which w T as the business of a moment, the captain of*the robbers 

instant, chef 

wished them a good journey, and left them quite naked (in the) midst 

162 voyage, 189 29 au 

of the highway. This comes in support of my proposition, said 

grand chernin. a l'appui , 

Sadder, looking at his brothers. Ah ! the cowards! exclaimed Bekir 

, en 201 Ah ! lache 139 

in a ra?e ; they have taken my sword from me ! Oh ! my diamonds ! 
en — fureur; arracher " — 55 Eh ! 

my poor diamonds ! replied Mesrou weeping. It was dark j the 

repondre en pleurant. faire nuit ; 

three unfortunate men (made haste) to reach the house of their 

39 se hater gagner 
brother Tai. They (at length) reached it, and the sight of that house 

enfin 184 arriver y 54, vue 
caused their tears to flow. They stopped at the door ; they dared not 
faire t — couler.t ; 

knock ; all their fears, all their doubts (were renewed). Whilst they 

; , incertitude recommencer. 

were wavering thus, Bekir rolled a large stone, got upon it, and 

balancer , * gros29 , monter * 64, 

finding a cleft in the window shutter, he looked and perceived in 

fente 25 contrevent, * * 

a neat, plainly furnished room, his brother Tai at table, (in the) 

32 , simplement meuble 32 a , au 

midst of ten children who were eating, laughing and chattering all 

155 , 155 babiller 
(at once). Tai had on his right his wife Amine who was feeding 
a la fois, 140 a 155 faire manger 

her youngest child, and on his left was a little (old man) with a 
dernier , a vieillard de 

sweet*29 and cheerful countenance, who was (pouring out) drink for 

32 gai 32 physionomie, verser aboire a 

Tai. At this sight Bekir rushed into the arms of his brothers, and 

se precipiter * , 
knocked at the door with all his might. A servant came to open it, 

frapper * de forces. valet * 172 , 

and screamed with fright, at seeing three men completely naked. Tai 

jetter * des cris de frayeur, en tout 29 



* To show the quickness of the action, the French would here use thepresent tense; 
but the perfect may also be used. 

t Turn ; caused to flow their tears ; the two verbs faire and couler must come to* 
gether in french, for it did not cause their tears, but it caused to flow tears. 

32 



374 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE 



ran to the door. The strangers fall (on hisl5) neck, they90 call 
* — On t lui saute au n.b. cou, n.b. * 

hiin brother; they90 bathe him with tears. He was confused (at first). 

18 ; n.b. * 200 * troubler d'abord, 

but he soon recollects Bekir, Mesrou, Sadder. He presses them in his 

184 reconnaitre , , serrer 

arms, he can not embrace them sufficiently. All the children ran 

, suffire a leurs embrassements. accourir 

to see what it was. Amine also came, but she (drew back) with her 
172 84 il y avait. 184 , se retirer 

daughters at the sight of the three naked brothers. (The little old man 
aspect 32 II n' y eat que 

was the only one) who did not quit the table. Tai gave clothes to his 
le petit vieillard 

brothers, presented them to his wife, and made them kiss his chil- 

, , 162 (kk) 

dren. Alas ! said Bekir affected at this sight; thy happy lot consoles 

Helas ! attendri spectacle ; sort 

us for all that we have suffered. Since the moment (we parted,) 

200 ce que Depuis instant de notre separation, 

our life has been only a series of misfortunes, and we have not 

enchainement infortune, 
even (had a glimpse) of that Bathmendi after which we have all 
seulement entrevu — 76 

been running. I readily believe it, said the little (old man) thenl83 
— 155 bien 184 54, vieillard alors n.b. 

who remained (all this time) at table ; I have not stirred hence. How ! 

75 140 toujours ; bouger Comment ! 

exclaimed Mesrou, you are. . . I am Bathmendi, replied the (old man ;) 

s r ecrier , , reprendre 

it is quite natural that you should not know me, since you have never 

189 simple t $ , 217 

seen me ; but ask of Tai, ask of the good Amine, and of all these little 

; 200 , 200 , 204 

children, there is not one (of them) but knows my name. The three 

246 en 54 199 6 

brothers who could not (keep their eyes off) this little (old man), wished 
140 se lasserde considerer , vouloir 

to embrace him. Gently, said he to them ; I do not like these great 

172 Doucement, (o) ; 

raptures. (PeoplelSl should) be friends before they (make so free.) If 
mouvements. II n.b. faut etre avant de (nn) se caresser. 

you wish that we should ever become so, be not (too much) (taken up) 

146 le 54, — trop s'occuper 

with me. In saying these words, he (got up), kissed every one of the 
200 , se lever, 105 

children, made a gentle bow to the three brothers, gave a smile to 
, petit salut , — 

Amine and to Tai, and went to wait for them in their bed26 chamber. 

, 201 coucher 25 



* See note * page 373. 

t This noun would be expressed better in french by the indefinite pronoun On, 

X This adjective requires the following verb in the subjunctive. 

$ See note * page 127, the difference between Savoir and Connaitre. 



ON ALL THE RULES 375 

Tai (sat again) at table with his brothers, and ordered beds to be got 

se remettre , faire * appr6- 

ready for them. Next day he showed them his fields, his flocks, and 
ter* — leur54 Le lendemam 162 , , 

gave them a detail of all the pleasures (s) he enjoyed. Bekir w ouldl37 
faire 162 dont 140 vouloir 

(work in the fields) (that very day) ; so he was the first that became 
labourer le jour meme ; aussi 137 74 

the friend of Bathmendi. Mesrou who had been prime minister, was 

140 , 137 

head shepherd of the farm, and the poet (took upon himself) to go and 
premier ' , se charger 168 — 

sell in town, the corn, the wool, and the milk which was sent to market ; 

a , , , 92 130 

his eloquence brought customers, and he was as useful as the others, 
attire r chaland, 140 43 43 

(At the) end of six months, Bathmendi (was pleased) with them, and 

Au bout , se plaire 137 58 , 

their numerous32 and quiet days (glided on) gently (in the) bosom 
nombreux 32 couler 137 doucement au 

of happiness. It62 is perhaps unnecessary to say that BATHMENDI 

n.b. inutile de 

(in the Persian language) means HAPPINESS, 
en Persan signifier 



The Advantages of a Good Education. 

I consider a human soul without education like marble in the 
l'ame de l'homme 

quarry, which shows none of its inherent beauties, until the skill 

talent 

of the polisher fetches out the colours, makes the surface shine, 

raarbrier en fasse soitir en 
and discovers every (ornamental cloud), spot, and vein, (that runs 

nuance 

through the body of it). Education, (after the same manner), when 

dont il est parseme de meme 

it works upon a noble mind, (draws out to view) every latent virtue 

operer ame mettre au jour 

and perfection, which, without such helps, are never able (to make 

son 

their appearance. 

paraitre. 

If my reader will (give me leave) to change so soon the allusion 

vouloir me permettre de 

upon him, I shall t (make use) of the same instance, to illustrate the 
— — se servir comparaison faire sentir 

force of education, which Aristotle has brought to explain his doc- 
employer 

trine of substantial forms s when he tells us that a statue lies hid in 

etre 



* Turn ; ordered to get ready beds, &c. for he did not order the heds s but he ordered 
So get ready, 



376 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE, ETC. 

a block of marble, and the art of the statuary only clears away the 

que en fait qu'enlever 

superfluous matter, and removes the rubbish. The figure is in the 

ecarter immondices. 

stone, and the sculptor only finds it. What sculpture is to a block 

n'a qu'a la trouver. 

of marble, education is to a human soul. The philosopher, the saint, 

or the hero; the wise, the good, or the great man ; very often 

homme de bien 

lie hid, and concealed in a plebeian, which a proper education might 
6tre cache enfoui et 

have disinterred, and have brought to light. I am therefore 

le — le mettre aii jour. prendre 

much delighted with reading the accounts of savage nations, and 

beaucoup de plaisir a histoire 

with contemplating those virtues which are wild and uncultivated; to 

grossier 

see courage exerting itself in fierceness, resolution in obstinacy, 
se mani fester opiniatrete 
wisdom in cunning, patience in sullenness and despair, 
ruse chagrin 

Men's passions operate variously, and appear in different kinds of 

actions, according as they are more or less rectified and swayed by 

gouverner 

reason. When one hears of negroes, who upon the death of their 

a 

masters, or upon changing their service, hang themselves upon 

lorsqu'ils changent de condition a 

the next tree, as it frequently happens in our American plantations, 
premier 

who can forbear admiring their fidelity, though it expresses itself in so 
s'empecher de se manifester 

dreadful a manner 1 What mi^ht not that savage greatness of soul, 

a quoi ne s'eleverait pas 
which appears in these poor wretches on many occasions, (be raised 

dans — 

to,) were it rightly cultivated 7 And what colour of excuse can there 

si bien — — 

be for the contempt with which we treat this part of our species ; 

(that we should not) put them upon the common footing of humanity; 
pour ne point ranger dans classe des autres hommes - 

(that we should only set) an insignificant fine upon (the man) whomur- 
pour ne prononcer que amende contre celui 

ders them ; nay, (that we should, as much as in us lies, cut them off 

et meme pour leur enlever, autant qu'il est en nous 
from) the prospects of happiness in another world, as well as in this, 
perspective 

and denying them that which we (look upon) as the proper means for 

considerer a 

attaining it 1 
parvenir y ? 

It is therefore an unspeakable blessing to be born in those parts of 

ineffable bonne ur 



A COMPENDIUM, ETC. 



377 



the world where wisdom and knowledge flourish ; though it must be 

science 

-confessed there are, even in these parts, several poor uninstructed 

nos contrees, ignorant 
persons, who are but little above those nations of which I (have been 

— bien peu viens de 

here) speaking ; as those who have had the advantages of a more 

liberal education, rise above one another by several different degrees 

of perfection. For, to return to our statue in the block of marble, we 

see it sometimes only begun to be chipped, sometimes rough- 
que on n'a que commence a le degrossir on Pa 

hewn, and but just sketched inio a human figure ; sometimes we see 
ebauche on y a seulement esquisse 

the man appearing distinctly in all his limbs and features ; some- 
times we find the figure wrought up to great elegancy; but we 

— avec beaucoup de 

seldom meet with any to which the hand of a Phidias or a Praxite- 

une statue 

les could not give several (nice touches and finishings.) 

touches propres a l'embellir et a la rendre parfaite. Spectatob. 



A COMPENDIUM 

OF THE 

PRINCIPAL RULES 

Contained in this Treatise.* 

What are words commonly calledl57 the parts of speech, of which 
82 appeler partie discours, 

the french language is composed % 
32 langue composer 158 ? 

(What is) a noun ? 
Qu'est-ce que (y) nom 1 

(How many) sorts of nouns do we90 distinguish in grammar 1 
Combien n.b. distinguer en grammaire ? 



* The learner must translate these questions into french, as he has done the fore- 
going exercises ; and he must also write in french an answer to every question, with 
an explanation of the rule, and two or three appropriate examples from his own im- 
agination. This exercise would perhaps be useless to grown persons who have read 
the rules with attention, but I think it will be particularly useful to all young 
learners. 

32* 



378 A COMPENDIUM OF tttfi 

(How many) genders (are there) in french 1 

246 

How do we90 know the gender of the names of the beings without 
185 n.b. connaitre norri etre 

life, which are commonly called92 things 1 
, — appelcr 

(How many) numbers (are there) 1 How do you make the plural 

246 185 former plurier 

number of nouns 7 

Has this rule any exceptions 1 What are they ? 

134 82 62 

(What is) an article? 
(y) 

What are the words which are commonly called article in french 1 
82 — T 92 

What agreement does the article require with the noun'? 

accord demander 

What sign do we use, when the noun which follows the article 

signe employer, 
is (in the) singular, and begins with a vowel, or an h mute 1 
au , par voyelle, muette 1 

When several nouns which require the article meet in the same 
plusieurs demander se rencontrer 

sentence, is it necessary to repeat the article before each noun 1 

phrase, 102 

Do the nameslS4 of persons and of towns require the article 1 
nom demander 

Do the names of countries require the article 7 
134 pays 

Has not this rule some exceptions ? What are they 1 

134 * 82 62 

(Is there) not a small number of words which are never excepted, 

246 , 

i. e. which always require the article ^ Name them. 

184 Nommer 

What article do common names require, when they are used 
82 commun 134 demander — s'employer 

in a general or in a particular sense It 
partlculier sens 

How is of expressed before a noun used in a general sense, 

185 — s'exprimer («) n.b. 
preceded by a noun used in a partitive sense 1 

What article do common names require, when we90 use them 
134 n.b. employer 

in a partitive sense, i. e. to denote only a portion of the thing 

a designer 

(spoken of?) 
dont on parle ? t 

What sign do weOOput before a noun used in a partitive sense, when 
signe n.e. partitif , 

it is attended by an adjective which must be placed before that noun 1 
accompagne de devoir — se placer 



r See note t page 183. 



t See note * page 49. 



PRINCIPAL RULES. 379 

(Are not there) some adverbs in french which require the preposi- 

246 

tion de, when the words which represent them in english do not re- 

representer 

quire any preposition 1 What are they 1 

82 

How is the numeral article a, an expressed 1 
185 — (ii). n.b. 

How are a, an expressed before nouns of measure, weight, number, 

— 204 poids, 204 
and periods of time used in a collective sense % 

204 157 collectif 32 

What are the words which are called demonstrative article 1 

82 — 92 demonstrate 

How do we90 make in french that local32 distinction which is made 
n.b. de lieu — se faire 

in english by means of the words this, these ; that, those ? 
au moyen 

What are the words which we90 call possessive article 1 

82 n.b. possessif32 

Is not the possessive article my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, some- 

"-'7- ; 134 : p \ v \ .-:y* 

times expressed by the definite article le, la, les? „ 
184 s'exprimer (u)n.b. 

Are not the possessive words my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, some- 

' —-'>'" , 134 / . 

times expressed by au, a la, aux ? 

(«) N.B. 

Do not the French sometimes use mon, ma, mes, before a noun, 
134 184 employer 

when the corresponding32 signs are not used in english 1 
qui y correspondent — (ii) n.b. 

In what instances are the signs called article (left out) in french 

cas — 134 s'omettre 

When two nouns govern each other, which of the two nouns is to 
se regir 121 , 242 
be placed the first in french 1 
243 se placer (m)n.b. premier 

By what preposition are these nouns united together 1 
— 134 s'unir ensemble 1 

How is of expressed before the proper names of countries 1 

185 — (ii) n.b, nom 

Do not the French sometimes use the name of a country, when 
134 184 employer 

the English use the adjective derived fiom that name 1 

derive 

What is an adjective ? 
(y) adjectif? 

What agreement does the adjective require with the noun 1 

accord 134 demander 

How is the feminine gender of an adjective formed 1 

— — se former (ii) n.b. 

(Are there) any exceptions to this rule, and what are they ? 

246 82 62 

How is the^plural number of adjectives formed 1 



380 



A COMPENDIUM OF THE 



When an adjective qualifies two nouns, of what gender and number 

qualifier , * 

must that adjective be 7 
devoir 

Are adjectives placed in french before or after the noun 1 
— 134 se placer (ii) n.b. 

Has not this rule some exceptions 1 
134 t 

What place do the adjectives of number keep with the noun '? 

place 134 tenir 

How are the adjectives of number expressed and where are they 

— s'exprimer, (ii) n.b. ou — 
placed, when they are used to distinguish some personage 1 

se placer, — s'employer t personnage ? 

How are the adjectives of measure and dimensioa long, broad, high, 

— 204 long", large, haut, 
deep, d^c. placed with the number in french 1 

profond, &c. se placer (ii) n.b. 

Do not the French often use the substantive of dimension instead of 

134 184 substantif 

the adjective 1 Is the same verb used with the substantive of 

92 

dimension as with the adjective 1 

que 

Can the adjective be separated from the noun by an article in french 

134 

as it62 sometimes is in english 1 
comme 184 70 

May 178 not the adjective be sometimes used as a substantive 1 
OPouvoiri 134 — (it) n.b. 
How is an adjective made comparative ? How is it made 

92 comparatif ? 92 

superlative 1 
superlatif 7 

When the comparison is made, not between two substantives, 
— se faire (ii) n.b. entre , 
but between two parts of a sentence ; as, the more difficult a thing is, 
partie phrase ; , , 

the more merit there is in doing it ; what difference (is there) in the 

; 246 

arrangement of the words in french 1 

Are the adverbial particlesl3-l which serve to form the comparative 

32 particule servir 

and superlative repeated in french 1 
se repeter (tt)N.B. 

Do not some96 of the comparative adjectives and adverbs require 
134 32 demander 

ne before the verb which follows them ? 

How are by and than expressed after a comparative 1 
185 — (ii) n.b. 

How is in expressed after a superlative 1 
185 — s^exprimer (U) n.b. 



* Repeat here Of what before number. 

i See note tpage 183. + See note * page 125. 



PRINCIPAL RULES. 381 

What mood does the superlative require, when it is followed by a 
82 mode demander, 62 de 

relative pronoun 7 
relatif 

What is a pronoun ? 
(y) pronom ? 

How many sorts of pronouns do we90 distinguish 1 

n.b. distinguer? 

How do you express the pronouns 7, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they, 

when they are the nominative of a verb % 
nominatif 

How do you express the same words I, thou, he, she, we, you, they t 
mercies , 

when they are joined 158 to another substantive for the nominative of 
joindre substantif 

the same verb, or when the verb is understood % 
, sous entendre ? 

How do you express the pronouns me, thee, us, you, him, her, it, them, 

when they are the object of a verb 1 
objet 

What place do the pronouns objects of the verb keep with the verb, 
place 134 tenir , 

when the tense is simple 1 
tems simple 1 

What place do these pronouns require when the tense is compounded 

134 demander compose 
of the auxiliary 32 verb avoir or etre, and of a past32 participle 1 
auxiliaire , passe participe ? 

Where are the pronouns objects of the verb placed, when the 
Ou — se placer, {it) n.b. 

verb commands, and how are me and thee expressed 1 
commander, 185 — (u) n.b. 

How are me, thee, us, you, him, her, them expressed, and where are 

185 — (u) N.B. 

they placed, when they are governed by a preposition 1 
— (u) n.b. regir par 

Is not the preposition a in french, like the preposition to in english, 
134 

often implied in the pronoun 1 When is al34 to be expressed 1 

renfermee 242 243 s'exprimer 1 

When several pronouns of different persons are the object of the 
plusieurs 

same verb, what order do these pronouns keep with one another 1 
, ordre 134 tenir 121 

As (there are) in french only two genders, the masculine and the 
Comme il n'y a que , 

feminine, how is the english neuter32 pronoun it expressed in french 1 
— 32 neutre 134 (ii) n.b. 

Explain the different uses of the pronoun it. 

Expliquer usages 

May 178 lui, leur, be used for things 1 
Pouvoir* 134 ^ s'employer 



* See note * page 125. 



382 



A COMPENDIUM OF THE 



May lui, elle, eux, elles be used for things after a preposition 1 
* 134 t 

How are the pronouns he, she, it, they expressed before the verb be, 

185 — 134 (ii) n.b. 206 , 

when that verb is followed by a substantive 1 

200 

How are the pronouns he, she, they, him, her, them expressed, when 

— (ii) N.B., 

they do not relate to any noun (mentioned before,) but 53refer 

t sc rapporter aucun dont on a fait 145 mention, 219 se rapporter 

to the word person understood ? 

sous entendre ? 

Are not the pronouns le, la, les, en, y frequently used, when the 
— 134 * souvent 184 s'employer, 

words which represent them are not used in english 1 
representer — (m)n.b. 

Do these pronouns agree with the words which they represent 1 

, s'accorder 

How do you express the pronouns who, whom, whose, that, which, 

» 

■when they relate to a noun (mentioned before) 1 
se rapporter dont on a fait mention? 

What place does the relative keep with the noun to which it relates 1 

place relatif tenir 76 

Is not the relative pronoun sometimes understood in english, when 

32 134 184 

it can not (be left out) in french 1 

s'omettre 

How are ivho, whom, whose expressed, when they relate to the 

— 134 t , (it) n.b. se rapporter 
word person understood 7 

How are whom and which expressed, when they are governed by a 
(ii) n.b. regir 

preposition 1 

How is which expressed after a preposition, when it. relates 
185 — s'exprimer (ii) n.b. , se rapporter 

to the word thing ? 

How is which expressed after a preposition, when it relates to a place 7 ? 

— (ii) n.b. lieu? 

How is which interrogative expressed 1 
-— interrogatif (ii) n.b. 

Explain the different ways of expressing the pronoun what. 
Expliquer maniere 154 

How do we90 express the possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, hers, 
n.b. possessif 32 

.ours, yours, theirs, when they relate to a noun (mentioned before) 
, dont on a fait mention ? 

How are the possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, hers, ours, &c, 

— 32 



* See note * page 125. 

+ These words in this sense may be considered as nouns. 

X Express Not by ne only, because aucun that follows is a negative expression 
which takes the place oi pas. 



PRINCIPAL RULES* 383 

expressed, when they are used instead of the personal pronouns me, 
n.b. — s'employer 

thee, us, you, him, her, them ; as, This book is mine t 
; ., This book is mine ? 
How are the possessive pronouns mine, thine i his, hers, &c. ex- 
pressed, when they are joined by the preposition of to the noun to 
(U) n.b. of 

which they relate ; as, A book of mine, &c. 1 
; , A book of mine, &c. 1 

How are the demonstrative pronouns this, that, these, those, ex- 

— demonstratif 32 

pressed 1 How is the distinction made between these words in 

(it) n.b. — 92 entre 

french 1 

How are this, that expressed, when they relate to the word thing 
(«) n.b. se rapporter 

understood 7 

Explain the different properties of this, that, these, those.* 
propriete 

How do we90 express the words one, we, they, people, when they do 
n.b. , 

not refer to any particular32 person % 
se rapporter aucune en particulier personne l \ 

How are the indefinite expressions such as these ; It is thought, It 
— indefini 32 134 ^telles que 88 ; , 

is said, expressed in french 1 

, (u) N.B. 

How are these other indefinite expressions 1 have been told, 2 

— autre 32 , 

was advised, &c. expressed in french 1 

, (it) N.B. 

What is a verb ? 
(y) verbe ? \ 

What agreement does the verb require with its nominative 1 

82 accord demander son nominatif ? 

When two substantives of different persons are the nominative of 

substantif t 

the same verb, of what number and person must the verb bel 
, 82 t devoir 

Of what person is the verb, when it has qui for its nominative 1 

Of what person must the verb be, when qui relates to two sub- 
devoir se rapporter 
stantives of different persons 1 
t 

Of what number must the verb be, after the collective substantives 

collectif32 

la plupart, infinite, nombre, quantite, troupe, multitude ? 
Of what number is the verb, after te quart, le tiers, la moilie 1 



* See note (bb) page 234. t See note * page 201, 

i Of what must be repeated before person. 



384 



A COMPENDIUM OF THE 



What is the place of the nominative with the verb, in an interro* 

82 place , 

gative sentence, when the nominative is a personal pronoun 1 
phrase. 32 
What is the place of the nominative, in an interrogative sentence, 

when that nominative is a noun, or any other word but a personal 

, tout autre que 

pronoun 1 

When is the present of the indicative used92? 
— employer 

When do we90 use the compound of the present 1 
n.b. compose 

When do we90 make use of the perfect tense of the verb ! 

n.b. usage parfait — J 

Explain the different uses of the imperfect. 
Expliquer usage 

When is the future used 1 Is not the present sometimes used 

— futur 92 — 134 

for the future 1 Does not the french language require the future, 

134 demander 

in some instances (in which) the English use the present 1 
* cas ou 
How are will, would expressed after the conjunction if ? 
185 — s'exprimer if? 

Mention the different instances in which the subjunctive is used. 
Rapporter cas 76 subjonctif — 92 

When is the present of the subjunctive used 1 

— 92 

When is the perfect of the subjunctive used 1 

92 

Does the present participle agree with the words that attend it 1 
32 participe s'accorder accompagner 

How is the english participle in ing expressed, after a preposition 1 

— 32 s'exprimer, 

How is the english present participle expressed, when it is joined 

— (ti) N.B., 

to the auxiliary verb be ? 

be ? 

Does the past participle agree with the noun to which it is joined 1 

32 134 76 joindre ? 

When a past participle comes after the auxiliary verb etre, to be t 

i i 

does it require any agreement, and with what word does it agree 1 

quelque accord, s'accorder 
When a past participle comes after the auxiliary verb avoir } to have, 

does it require any agreement, and with what word does it agree 1 

Does the past participle agree after avoir, when it is followed by 

de 

another verb in the infinitive 1 Explain this rule. 

a Expliquer 



* See note t page 183. 



PRINCIPAL RULES. 



385 



How is to, the sign of the infinitive in english, expressed in frenchl 

— 134, 22signe , (ii) n.b. * 

(Are not there) some instances in which this preposition is left out 
246 t cas 76 — s'omettre 

in french? Name them. 

Nommer 

Is willlSi always the sign of the future, and would the sing of the 

will , would 

conditional of the verb which follows it 1 
conditionnel 

How are will have, would have expressed 1 — Explain these words. 

— (ii) n.b. 

How do we90 express should ; should have, ought to have ? 

N.B. 

How do we90 express may, might ; could have, might have ? 

N.B. 

How is wish expressed when it is followed by another verb 
135 — s'expnmer (u)n.b. 200 
(in the) imperfect, or (in the) conditional '? 
a V imparfait, au conditionnel ? 

How is must expressed, and what mood does it govern'? 

— (ii) n.b , mode regir 

How mustl81 we express must have in the sense of being in need? 

n.b. sens 
What is an adverb ? 
(y) adverbe ? 

What place do the adverbs keep with the verb % 
place 134 tenir 

Which are the words that we90 call negative adverbs'? 
79 n.b. negatif32 

How are the negative adverbs placed with the verb 1 

— se placer (ii) n.b. 

How are they placed, when the verb is in the inflnitve 1 

— (ii) n.b. a 
Are not pas, point sometimes left out ? 

— 134 184 s'omettre (ii) n.b. 
How are no, not expressed without a verb \ 

— (ii) N.B. 

How is not expressed with the verb take care, prendre garde ? 

(li) N.B. , 

(Are there) not in french some words which require ne, when 

246 t demander , 

(there is) no negation in english 1 Which are these words? 

246 79 

How do we93 express but in the sense of the adverb only ? 

n.b. but only ? 

How is but expressed in the sense of a relative pronoun 7 

— but (U)N.B. 

What is a preposition? 
(y) preposition ? 

Are the prepo^ii ions always expressed by the words which generally 

— 134 184 

* See, pages 276, 277, 278, the different ways of expressing to before an infinitive, 
and peruke often the list of those verbs, 
t See note t page 183. 

33 



386 A COMPENDIUM OF THE 

correspond to one another in both languages 1 Mention the 

se correspondre 121 les deux Rapporter 

words the most frequently used 157 with which the prepositions 
184 employer 76 

differ* * 
differer ? 

Do not some verbs require a preposition in english, when the 

t demander , 

corresponding^ words do not require any in french 1 Name 

qui y correspondent (p) Nommer 

them. 

(Are there) not (on the) contrary some verbs which require a pre- 
246 au contraire t 

position in french, when the corresponding32 words do not require 
, qui y correspondent 

any in english % Name them. 

(p) 

May the prepositions be placed in french, as they sometimes 
t 134 — se placer (u) n.b. , 62 J84 

are placed in english, either before or after the words which they 

— (it) n.b. , 223 62 

govern 1 

regir ? i 

Are the prepositions repeated before all the words which they 
— 134 se repeter 62 

govern 1 

Explain the following32 prepositions ; for. before. by. 

Expliquer suivant 29 

Explain at, to, from with verbs denoting beingl54 at, goingl54, 

quidesignent etre a, aller , 

or coming to, going or coming from a person's25 house 1 
venir a, de — quelqu'un 
Explain the different properties of in, into. in, before the dif- 

propriete in, into. in, 

ferent parts of the day ; and on before the days of the week. 

partie ; on 

What is a conjunction ? 
(y) conjonction ? 

Which are the conjunctions that govern the indicative mood 1 

79 regir indicatif? 

Which are the conjunctions that govern the subjunctive 1 

79 74 subjonctif? 

When a conjunction governs several verbs, is iifi2 necessary to 

plusieurs , n.b. 168 

repeat it before each verb 1 
62 102 

(Is there,) not something to be remarked about the conjunction si, if? 

246 243 au sujet de 

May not some conjunctions (be left out) in english, when the con- 

t t 134 s'omettre , 

junctions which represent them can not (be left out) in french 1 

* See, pages 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, alist of the words with which the prepositions 
differ, and peruse it often, 
t See note t page 183. t See note * page 125. 



PRINCIPAL RULES. 387 

Explain the conjunctions both. either, or. neither, nor. 

Explain the conjunctions whether. though, although, if even. 

But for, if it were not for, if it had not been for, fyc. 

Explain the different ways of expressing the word people. 
Expliquer maniere 154 

Explain the different meanings of the words country. time. 

signification 

What difference between an, annee ; jour, journee ; matin 

entre 

matinee ; soir, soiree ; nuit, soir ; midi, minuit ? 

When is the auxiliary verb have expressed by the auxiliary etre ? 

— 134 s'exprimer par 

When is the auxiliary verb be expressed by the auxiliary avoir ? 

— Hi) N.B. 

When is be expressed by f aire? When is be expressed by se 

— 134 — 

porter ? When is be expressed by devoir ? 

Is not the verb be sometimes left out 1 
— 134 184 s'omettre 

How do we90 express to be just, to have just ? 

185 N.B. 

How do we90 express was near, were near, had like? 

N.B. 

How do we90 express there is, there are ; it is far, it is long ago ; 

N.B. 

it is since ; and this, these, (pointing out) a period of time % 

designant 

How do we90 express here is, here are ; this is, these are ; — —there is, 

N.B. 

there are ; that is, those are, when they serve to (point out) an object % 

169 designer 

Explain the different meanings of the word let. let know. 

signification 

Explain the different meanings of the verb make. 

Explain to cause, to have, to get. to cause to be done or made ; to 

have or get done or made ; to order, to bespeak. 

Explain the verbs to ask, to desire. to look. 

Explain the different meanings of the verbs to suppose. — to hope. 

Explain the different meanings of the verbs to take. to bring. 

signification 

' to use. to help. to attend. To want. 

Explain the verbs to marry.~ — to ride.- to walk. to come. 

■ to return. to call. 



388 



COMPENDIUM OF THE PRINCIPAL RULES. 



Explain the verbs to break. to like. to keep. to get. 

to spend. to charge. 

How do weOO express to go to meet. to bring near, to go near, 

185 N.B. 

to come near. to hear ? 

How do we90 express it is with. whatever, in vain, to no purpose. 

N.B. 

to find fault with. to take it kindly. to take it unkindly? 

How do weOO express to do without, to be easy without. What is 

N.B. 

the matter, what is it about, what is it. Is it, is it not ; does it, does 

it not ; have I, have 1 not ? 



JJZT The learner having gone through the Syntax, and being able to answer the 
foregoing questions, with appropriate examples to each of them, there can be no 
doubt but he understands the rules well; he should now try to write something of 
his own composition in french, such as letters, dialogues, short histories, or anec- 
dotes either that he has read or heard, or from his own imagination. This he will 
perhaps find difficult at first ; but if he will persevere in it for a few days, he will find 
it easier and more profitable than translating from a book ; for unless he has read a 
great deal of french, he will be apt to commit many anglicisms, owing to the differ- 
ence in the idiom of the two languages, i. e. he will put together a number of french 
words which separately have a meaning, but which, when put together, have hardly 
any meaning at all. His attention should be called entirely to recollect the french 
words which he has seen to express the same ide is, and even ihe english dictionary 
should be used as seldom as possible. If he finds himself deficient in some of the 
rules, he must write over again the recapitulatory exercise on those paits of speech 
which are not familiar to him, and there is little doubt that after a second attentive 
perusal, he will be sufficiently acquainted with them. 



THE END. 



/ 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 117 920 8 



